Relion® Protection and Control

615 series
Technical Manual
 Document ID: 1YHT530004D05
Issued: 2014-09-12
Revision: D
Product version: 4.1.1

© Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license

and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such
license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.

ABB
Nanjing SAC Power Grid Automation Co., Ltd.
No. 11 Phoenix Road, Jiangning Development Zone
211100 Nanjing
China
Telephone: +86 25 51183000
Facsimile: +86 25 51183883
Customer hotline: 4008876268
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data and
information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure
network. It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network
administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the
necessary measures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application
of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs,
etc.) to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included,
against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages
and/or losses.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC
directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low
voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international
standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................25
This manual......................................................................................25
Intended audience............................................................................25
Product documentation.....................................................................26
Product documentation set..........................................................26
Document revision history...........................................................26
Related documentation................................................................27
Symbols and conventions.................................................................27
Symbols.......................................................................................27
Document conventions................................................................27
Functions, codes and symbols....................................................28

Section 2 615 series overview........................................................33

Overview...........................................................................................33
Product series version history.....................................................33
PCM600 and IED connectivity package version..........................35
Local HMI.........................................................................................35
Display.........................................................................................36
LEDs............................................................................................37
Keypad........................................................................................37
Web HMI...........................................................................................38
Authorization.....................................................................................39
Audit trail......................................................................................40
Communication.................................................................................42

Section 3 Basic functions...............................................................45

General parameters..........................................................................45
Self-supervision................................................................................59
Internal faults...............................................................................59
Warnings.....................................................................................61
LED indication control.......................................................................63
Programmable LEDs........................................................................63
Function block.............................................................................63
Functionality................................................................................63
Signals.........................................................................................66
Settings........................................................................................67
Monitored data.............................................................................69
Time synchronization........................................................................70
Parameter setting groups.................................................................71
Function block.............................................................................71

615 series 1
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Functionality................................................................................71
Fault records.....................................................................................73
Non-volatile memory.........................................................................77
Binary input.......................................................................................78
Binary input filter time..................................................................78
Binary input inversion..................................................................79
Oscillation suppression................................................................79
Binary outputs...................................................................................79
Power output contacts ................................................................80
Dual single-pole power outputs PO1 and PO2.......................80
Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip
circuit supervision...................................................................81
Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1,
HSO2 and HSO3....................................................................82
Signal output contacts ................................................................83
Internal fault signal output IRF ..............................................83
Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module..........84
Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005............84
Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006.....................85
RTD/mA inputs ................................................................................86
Functionality................................................................................86
Operation principle......................................................................86
Selection of input signal type..................................................86
Selection of output value format.............................................87
Input linear scaling.................................................................87
Measurement chain supervision.............................................88
Selfsupervision.......................................................................88
Calibration..............................................................................89
Limit value supervision...........................................................89
Deadband supervision............................................................90
RTD temperature vs. resistance.............................................91
RTD/mA input connection......................................................92
Signals.........................................................................................94
Settings........................................................................................94
GOOSE function blocks....................................................................97
GOOSERCV_BIN function block.................................................97
Function block........................................................................97
Functionality...........................................................................98
Signals....................................................................................98
GOOSERCV_DP function block..................................................98
Function block........................................................................98
Functionality...........................................................................98
Signals....................................................................................98
GOOSERCV_MV function block..................................................99

2 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block........................................................................99
Functionality...........................................................................99
Signals....................................................................................99
GOOSERCV_INT8 function block...............................................99
Function block........................................................................99
Functionality...........................................................................99
Signals..................................................................................100
GOOSERCV_INTL function block.............................................100
Function block......................................................................100
Functionality.........................................................................100
Signals..................................................................................100
GOOSERCV_CMV function block.............................................101
Function block......................................................................101
Functionality.........................................................................101
Signals..................................................................................101
GOOSERCV_ENUM function block..........................................102
Function block......................................................................102
Functionality.........................................................................102
Signals..................................................................................102
GOOSERCV_INT32 function block...........................................102
Function block......................................................................102
Functionality.........................................................................102
Signals..................................................................................103
Type conversion function blocks....................................................103
QTY_GOOD function block.......................................................103
Function block......................................................................103
Functionality.........................................................................103
Signals..................................................................................103
QTY_BAD function block...........................................................104
Fucntion block......................................................................104
Functionality.........................................................................104
Signals..................................................................................104
QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block........................................105
Functionality.........................................................................105
Signals..................................................................................105
T_HEALTH function block.........................................................105
Function block......................................................................105
Functionality.........................................................................105
Signals..................................................................................106
T_F32_INT8 function block........................................................106
Function block......................................................................106
Functionality.........................................................................106
Signals..................................................................................106

615 series 3
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Settings................................................................................107
T_DIR function block.................................................................107
Functionality.........................................................................107
Signals..................................................................................107
Configurable logic blocks................................................................108
Standard configurable logic blocks............................................108
OR function block.................................................................108
AND function block...............................................................109
XOR function block...............................................................110
NOT function block...............................................................111
MAX3 function block.............................................................112
MIN3 function block..............................................................112
R_TRIG function block.........................................................113
F_TRIG function block..........................................................114
T_POS_XX function blocks..................................................115
SWITCHR function block......................................................116
SR function block.................................................................117
Minimum pulse timer ................................................................118
Minimum pulse timer TPGAPC............................................118
Minimum pulse timer TPSGAPC..........................................119
Minimum pulse timer TPMGAPC.........................................120
Pulse timer function block PTGAPC..........................................121
Function block......................................................................121
Functionality.........................................................................121
Signals..................................................................................121
Settings................................................................................122
Technical data......................................................................122
Time-delay-off function block TOFGAPC..................................123
Function block......................................................................123
Functionality.........................................................................123
Signals..................................................................................123
Settings................................................................................124
Technical data......................................................................124
Time-delay-on function block TONGAPC..................................125
Function block......................................................................125
Functionality.........................................................................125
Signals..................................................................................125
Settings................................................................................126
Technical data......................................................................126
Set-reset function block SRGAPC.............................................127
Function block......................................................................127
Functionality.........................................................................127
Signals..................................................................................128

4 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings................................................................................129
Move function block MVGAPC..................................................129
Function block......................................................................129
Functionality.........................................................................129
Signals..................................................................................130
Local/remote control function block CONTROL........................130
Function block......................................................................130
Functionality.........................................................................130
Signals..................................................................................131
Settings................................................................................132
Monitored data.....................................................................133
Generic control points function block SPCGGIO.......................134
Function block......................................................................134
Functionality.........................................................................134
Signals..................................................................................135
Settings................................................................................136
Factory settings restoration............................................................138

Section 4 Protection functions......................................................139

Three-phase current protection......................................................139
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
PHxPTOC..................................................................................139
Identification.........................................................................139
Function block......................................................................139
Functionality.........................................................................139
Operation principle...............................................................140
Measurement modes............................................................142
Timer characteristics............................................................143
Application............................................................................144
Signals..................................................................................151
Settings................................................................................152
Monitored data.....................................................................155
Technical data......................................................................156
Technical revision history.....................................................156
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
PH3xPTOC................................................................................157
Identification.........................................................................157
Function block......................................................................157
Functionality.........................................................................157
Operation principle...............................................................158
Timer characteristics............................................................163
Application............................................................................164
Signals..................................................................................171
Settings................................................................................172

615 series 5
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Monitored data.....................................................................175
Technical data......................................................................176
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection
DPHxPDOC...............................................................................176
Identification.........................................................................176
Function block......................................................................177
Functionality.........................................................................177
Operation principle ..............................................................177
Measurement modes............................................................182
Directional overcurrent characteristics ................................183
Application............................................................................191
Signals..................................................................................193
Settings................................................................................195
Monitored data.....................................................................198
Technical data......................................................................199
Technical revision history.....................................................200
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection
DPH3xPDOC.............................................................................200
Identification.........................................................................200
Function block......................................................................201
Functionality.........................................................................201
Operation principle ..............................................................201
Timer characteristics............................................................208
Directional overcurrent characteristics ................................209
Application............................................................................217
Signals..................................................................................219
Settings................................................................................220
Monitored data.....................................................................223
Technical data......................................................................225
Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and
distribution transformers T1PTTR.............................................225
Identification.........................................................................225
Function block......................................................................226
Functionality.........................................................................226
Operation principle...............................................................226
Application............................................................................229
Signals..................................................................................230
Settings................................................................................230
Monitored data.....................................................................231
Technical data......................................................................231
Technical revision history.....................................................232
Three-phase thermal overload protection for power
transformers, two time constants T2PTTR................................232
Identification.........................................................................232

6 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Function block......................................................................232
Functionality.........................................................................232
Operation principle...............................................................233
Application............................................................................236
Signals..................................................................................238
Settings................................................................................239
Monitored data.....................................................................239
Technical data......................................................................240
Technical revision history.....................................................240
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC........................................240
Identification.........................................................................240
Function block......................................................................240
Functionality.........................................................................240
Operation principle...............................................................241
Application............................................................................242
Signals..................................................................................242
Settings................................................................................243
Monitored data.....................................................................243
Technical data......................................................................243
Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC........................................244
Identification.........................................................................244
Function block......................................................................244
Functionality.........................................................................244
Operation principle...............................................................244
Application............................................................................245
Signals..................................................................................246
Settings................................................................................246
Monitored data.....................................................................246
Technical data......................................................................247
Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR.......................247
Identification.........................................................................247
Function block......................................................................247
Functionality.........................................................................247
Operation principle...............................................................248
Application............................................................................256
Signals..................................................................................260
Settings................................................................................261
Monitored data.....................................................................262
Technical data......................................................................262
Technical revision history.....................................................262
Earth-fault protection......................................................................263
Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC.......................263
Identification.........................................................................263

615 series 7
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block......................................................................263
Functionality.........................................................................263
Operation principle...............................................................264
Measurement modes............................................................265
Timer characteristics............................................................266
Application............................................................................267
Signals..................................................................................268
Settings................................................................................269
Monitored data.....................................................................271
Technical data......................................................................272
Technical revision history.....................................................272
Directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF............................273
Identification.........................................................................273
Function block......................................................................273
Functionality.........................................................................274
Operation principle...............................................................274
Directional earth-fault principles...........................................279
Measurement modes............................................................285
Timer characteristics............................................................286
Directional earth-fault characteristics...................................287
Application............................................................................295
Signals..................................................................................297
Settings................................................................................298
Monitored data.....................................................................301
Technical data......................................................................302
Technical revision history.....................................................303
Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF............304
Identification.........................................................................304
Function block......................................................................304
Functionality.........................................................................304
Operation principle...............................................................305
Application............................................................................307
Signals..................................................................................309
Settings................................................................................309
Monitored data.....................................................................310
Technical data......................................................................310
Technical revision history.....................................................311
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM....................311
Identification.........................................................................311
Function block......................................................................311
Functionality.........................................................................311
Operation principle...............................................................312
Neutral admittance characteristics.......................................324

8 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Application............................................................................330
Signals..................................................................................334
Settings................................................................................335
Monitored data.....................................................................336
Technical data......................................................................336
Harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC..................336
Identification.........................................................................336
Function block......................................................................337
HAEFPTOC functionality......................................................337
Operation principle...............................................................337
Application............................................................................341
Signals..................................................................................342
Settings................................................................................343
Monitored data.....................................................................344
Technical data......................................................................344
Differential protection......................................................................345
Line differential protection and related measurements,
stabilized and instantaneous stages LNPLDF...........................345
Identification.........................................................................345
Function block......................................................................345
Functionality.........................................................................345
Operation principle...............................................................346
Commissioning.....................................................................367
Application............................................................................373
Signals..................................................................................379
Settings................................................................................380
Monitored Data.....................................................................382
Technical data......................................................................383
Technical revision history.....................................................383
Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for 2W-
transformers TR2PTDF.............................................................383
Identification.........................................................................383
Function block......................................................................384
Functionality.........................................................................384
Operation principle...............................................................384
Application............................................................................397
CT connections and transformation ratio correction.............413
Signals..................................................................................417
Settings................................................................................418
Monitored data.....................................................................420
Technical data......................................................................422
Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault
protection LREFPNDF...............................................................422
Identification.........................................................................422

615 series 9
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block......................................................................423
Functionality.........................................................................423
Operation principle...............................................................423
Application............................................................................427
Signals..................................................................................430
Settings................................................................................430
Monitored data.....................................................................431
Technical data......................................................................431
High-impedance-based restricted earth-fault protection
HREFPDIF.................................................................................431
Identification.........................................................................431
Function block......................................................................432
Functionality.........................................................................432
Operation principle...............................................................432
Application............................................................................433
The measuring configuration................................................436
Recommendations for current transformers ........................437
Setting examples..................................................................441
Signals..................................................................................444
Settings................................................................................445
Monitored data.....................................................................445
Technical data......................................................................445
Unbalance protection......................................................................446
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC................446
Identification.........................................................................446
Function block......................................................................446
Functionality.........................................................................446
Operation principle...............................................................447
Application............................................................................449
Signals..................................................................................449
Settings................................................................................450
Monitored data.....................................................................451
Technical data......................................................................451
Technical revision history.....................................................451
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC..............................452
Identification.........................................................................452
Function block......................................................................452
Functionality.........................................................................452
Operation principle...............................................................452
Application............................................................................454
Signals..................................................................................455
Settings................................................................................455
Monitored data.....................................................................456

10 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data......................................................................456
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC.....................................456
Identification.........................................................................456
Function block......................................................................457
Functionality.........................................................................457
Operation principle...............................................................457
Application............................................................................458
Signals..................................................................................458
Settings................................................................................458
Monitored data.....................................................................459
Technical data......................................................................459
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for motors
MNSPTOC.................................................................................459
Identification.........................................................................459
Function block......................................................................460
Functionality.........................................................................460
Operation principle...............................................................460
Timer characteristics............................................................461
Application............................................................................463
Signals..................................................................................464
Settings................................................................................464
Monitored data.....................................................................465
Technical data......................................................................465
Voltage protection...........................................................................466
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV..........................466
Identification.........................................................................466
Function block......................................................................466
Functionality.........................................................................466
Operation principle...............................................................466
Timer characteristics............................................................470
Application............................................................................470
Signals..................................................................................471
Settings................................................................................472
Monitored data.....................................................................473
Technical data......................................................................473
Technical revision history.....................................................473
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV........................474
Identification.........................................................................474
Function block......................................................................474
Functionality.........................................................................474
Operation principle...............................................................474
Timer characteristics............................................................478
Application............................................................................478

615 series 11
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................479
Settings................................................................................479
Monitored data.....................................................................480
Technical data......................................................................481
Technical revision history.....................................................481
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV..............................481
Identification.........................................................................481
Function block......................................................................481
Functionality.........................................................................482
Operation principle...............................................................482
Application............................................................................483
Signals..................................................................................483
Settings................................................................................484
Monitored data.....................................................................484
Technical data......................................................................484
Technical revision history.....................................................485
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV...............485
Identification.........................................................................485
Function block......................................................................485
Functionality.........................................................................485
Operation principle...............................................................486
Application............................................................................487
Signals..................................................................................487
Settings................................................................................488
Monitored data.....................................................................488
Technical data......................................................................488
Technical revision history.....................................................489
Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV...............489
Identification.........................................................................489
Function block......................................................................489
Functionality.........................................................................489
Operation principle...............................................................490
Application............................................................................491
Signals..................................................................................492
Settings................................................................................492
Monitored data.....................................................................493
Technical data......................................................................493
Technical revision history.....................................................493
Frequency protection......................................................................494
Frequency protection FRPFRQ.................................................494
Identification.........................................................................494
Function block......................................................................494
Functionality.........................................................................494

12 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Operation principle...............................................................494
Application............................................................................500
Signals..................................................................................501
Settings................................................................................501
Monitored data.....................................................................502
Technical data......................................................................502
Load shedding and restoration LSHDPFRQ.............................502
Identification.........................................................................502
Function block......................................................................503
Functionality.........................................................................503
Operation principle...............................................................503
Application............................................................................508
Signals..................................................................................512
Settings................................................................................512
Monitored data.....................................................................513
Technical data......................................................................513
Arc protection ARCSARC...............................................................514
Identification..............................................................................514
Function block...........................................................................514
Functionality..............................................................................514
Operation principle....................................................................514
Application.................................................................................516
Signals.......................................................................................519
Settings......................................................................................520
Monitored data...........................................................................520
Technical data...........................................................................520
Motor startup supervision STTPMSU.............................................521
Identification..............................................................................521
Function block...........................................................................521
Functionality..............................................................................521
Operation principle....................................................................522
Application.................................................................................527
Signals.......................................................................................530
Settings......................................................................................531
Monitored data...........................................................................531
Technical data...........................................................................532
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC...............................................532
Identification..............................................................................532
Function block...........................................................................533
Functionality..............................................................................533
Operation principle....................................................................533
Application.................................................................................535
Signals.......................................................................................535

615 series 13
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................535
Monitored data...........................................................................536
Technical data...........................................................................536

Section 5 Protection related functions..........................................537

Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR.........................................537
Identification..............................................................................537
Function block...........................................................................537
Functionality..............................................................................537
Operation principle....................................................................537
Application.................................................................................539
Signals.......................................................................................540
Settings......................................................................................540
Monitored data...........................................................................541
Technical data...........................................................................541
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF..................................541
Identification..............................................................................541
Function block...........................................................................541
Functionality..............................................................................542
Operation principle....................................................................542
Application.................................................................................548
Signals.......................................................................................550
Settings......................................................................................550
Monitored data...........................................................................551
Technical data...........................................................................551
Technical revision history..........................................................551
Master trip TRPPTRC.....................................................................551
Identification..............................................................................551
Function block...........................................................................552
Functionality..............................................................................552
Operation principle....................................................................552
Application.................................................................................553
Signals.......................................................................................554
Settings......................................................................................555
Monitored data...........................................................................555
Technical revision history..........................................................555
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO....................................................555
Identification..............................................................................555
Function block...........................................................................556
Functionality..............................................................................556
Operation principle....................................................................556
Application.................................................................................557
Signals.......................................................................................559
Settings......................................................................................559

14 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................560
Emergency startup ESMGAPC......................................................560
Identification..............................................................................560
Function block...........................................................................561
Functionality..............................................................................561
Operation principle....................................................................561
Application.................................................................................562
Signals.......................................................................................562
Settings......................................................................................563
Monitored data...........................................................................563
Technical data...........................................................................563
Switch on to fault control CBRSOF................................................563
Identification..............................................................................563
Function block...........................................................................564
Functionality..............................................................................564
Principle of operation.................................................................564
Application.................................................................................565
Signals.......................................................................................565
Settings......................................................................................566
Monitored data...........................................................................566
Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR...................................566
Identification..............................................................................566
Function block...........................................................................566
Functionality..............................................................................567
Operation principle....................................................................567
Application.................................................................................568
Signals.......................................................................................568
Settings......................................................................................569
Technical data...........................................................................569

Section 6 Supervision functions...................................................571

Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR..................................................571
Identification..............................................................................571
Function block...........................................................................571
Functionality .............................................................................571
Operation principle....................................................................571
Application.................................................................................572
Signals.......................................................................................579
Settings......................................................................................579
Monitored data...........................................................................580
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF...............................................580
Identification..............................................................................580
Function block...........................................................................580
Functionality..............................................................................580

615 series 15
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operation principle....................................................................581
Application.................................................................................583
Signals.......................................................................................587
Settings......................................................................................588
Monitored data...........................................................................588
Technical data...........................................................................588
Protection communication supervision PCSRTPC.........................588
Identification..............................................................................588
Function block...........................................................................589
Functionality..............................................................................589
Operation principle....................................................................590
Application.................................................................................591
Signals.......................................................................................592
Settings......................................................................................592
Monitored data...........................................................................592
Technical revision history..........................................................593
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF...............................................593
Identification..............................................................................593
Function block...........................................................................593
Functionality..............................................................................593
Operation principle....................................................................594
Application.................................................................................597
Signals.......................................................................................598
Settings......................................................................................598
Monitored data...........................................................................599
Technical data...........................................................................599
Operation time counter MDSOPT...................................................599
Identification..............................................................................599
Function block...........................................................................600
Functionality..............................................................................600
Operation principle....................................................................600
Application.................................................................................601
Signals.......................................................................................602
Settings......................................................................................602
Monitored data...........................................................................602
Technical data...........................................................................603
Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR...................................603
Identification..............................................................................603
Function block...........................................................................603
Functionality..............................................................................603
Operation principle....................................................................603
Application.................................................................................605
Signals.......................................................................................605

16 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................605
Technical data...........................................................................605

Section 7 Condition monitoring functions.....................................607

Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR..................................607
Identification..............................................................................607
Function block...........................................................................607
Functionality..............................................................................607
Operation principle....................................................................608
Circuit breaker status...........................................................609
Circuit breaker operation monitoring....................................609
Breaker contact travel time...................................................610
Operation counter.................................................................611
Accumulation of Iyt................................................................612
Remaining life of circuit breaker...........................................613
Circuit breaker spring-charged indication.............................615
Gas pressure supervision.....................................................615
Application.................................................................................616
Signals.......................................................................................619
Settings......................................................................................620
Monitored data...........................................................................622
Technical data...........................................................................622
Technical revision history..........................................................623

Section 8 Measurement functions................................................625

Basic measurements......................................................................625
Functions...................................................................................625
Measurement functionality.........................................................626
Measurement function applications...........................................633
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU............................633
Identification.........................................................................633
Function block......................................................................634
Signals..................................................................................634
Settings................................................................................634
Monitored data.....................................................................635
Technical data......................................................................635
Technical revision history.....................................................636
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU............................636
Identification.........................................................................636
Function block......................................................................636
Signals..................................................................................636
Settings................................................................................637
Monitored data.....................................................................637
Technical data......................................................................637

615 series 17
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Residual current measurement RESCMMXU...........................638

Identification.........................................................................638
Function block......................................................................638
Signals..................................................................................638
Settings................................................................................638
Monitored data.....................................................................639
Technical data......................................................................639
Technical revision history.....................................................639
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU...........................639
Identification.........................................................................639
Function block......................................................................640
Signals..................................................................................640
Settings................................................................................640
Monitored data.....................................................................640
Technical data......................................................................641
Technical revision history.....................................................641
Frequency measurement FMMXU............................................641
Identification.........................................................................641
Function block......................................................................641
Signals..................................................................................641
Settings................................................................................642
Monitored data.....................................................................642
Technical data......................................................................642
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI................................642
Identification.........................................................................642
Function block......................................................................642
Signals..................................................................................643
Settings................................................................................643
Monitored data.....................................................................644
Technical data......................................................................644
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI................................644
Identification.........................................................................644
Function block......................................................................645
Signals..................................................................................645
Settings................................................................................645
Monitored data.....................................................................646
Technical data......................................................................646
Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU/
MPEMMXU................................................................................647
Identification.........................................................................647
Function block......................................................................647
Signals..................................................................................647
Settings................................................................................648

18 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data.....................................................................648
Technical data......................................................................649
Disturbance recorder......................................................................649
Functionality..............................................................................649
Recorded analog inputs.......................................................650
Triggering alternatives..........................................................650
Length of recordings.............................................................651
Sampling frequencies...........................................................652
Uploading of recordings.......................................................652
Deletion of recordings..........................................................653
Storage mode.......................................................................653
Pre-trigger and post-trigger data..........................................654
Operation modes..................................................................654
Exclusion mode....................................................................655
Configuration.............................................................................655
Application.................................................................................656
Settings......................................................................................657
Monitored data...........................................................................660
Technical revision history..........................................................660
Tap changer position indicator TPOSSLTC...................................660
Identification..............................................................................660
Function block...........................................................................661
Functionality..............................................................................661
Operation principle....................................................................661
Application.................................................................................664
Signals.......................................................................................665
Settings......................................................................................665
Monitored data...........................................................................665
Technical data...........................................................................665
Technical revision history..........................................................665

Section 9 Control functions..........................................................667

Circuit breaker control CBXCBR, Disconnector control
DCXSWI and Earthing switch control ESXSWI .............................667
Identification..............................................................................667
Function block...........................................................................667
Functionality..............................................................................668
Operation principle....................................................................668
Application.................................................................................671
Signals.......................................................................................672
Settings......................................................................................674
Monitored data...........................................................................675
Technical revision history..........................................................676

615 series 19
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch

indication ESSXSWI.......................................................................676
Identification..............................................................................676
Function block...........................................................................676
Functionality..............................................................................677
Operation principle....................................................................677
Application.................................................................................677
Signals.......................................................................................677
Settings......................................................................................678
Monitored data...........................................................................678
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN.............................679
Identification..............................................................................679
Function block...........................................................................679
Functionality..............................................................................679
Operation principle....................................................................680
Application.................................................................................687
Signals.......................................................................................689
Settings......................................................................................690
Monitored data...........................................................................691
Technical data...........................................................................691
Autoreclosing DARREC..................................................................692
Identification..............................................................................692
Function block...........................................................................692
Functionality..............................................................................692
Protection signal definition...................................................693
Zone coordination.................................................................693
Master and slave scheme....................................................694
Thermal overload blocking...................................................694
Operation principle....................................................................695
Signal collection and delay logic..........................................695
Shot initiation........................................................................699
Shot pointer controller..........................................................702
Reclose controller.................................................................703
Sequence controller.............................................................705
Protection coordination controller.........................................706
Circuit breaker controller......................................................707
Counters....................................................................................708
Application.................................................................................709
Shot initiation........................................................................710
Sequence.............................................................................714
Configuration examples........................................................715
Delayed initiation lines..........................................................718
Shot initiation from protection start signal............................720

20 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Fast trip in Switch on to fault................................................720

Signals.......................................................................................721
Settings......................................................................................722
Monitored data...........................................................................724
Technical data...........................................................................725
Technical revision history..........................................................726
Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC.....................726
Identification..............................................................................726
Function block...........................................................................726
Functionality..............................................................................726
Operation principle....................................................................727
Voltage and current measurements..........................................728
Tap changer position inputs......................................................729
Operation mode selection..........................................................730
Manual voltage regulation.........................................................731
Automatic voltage regulation of single transformer...................732
Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers...............736
Master/Follower principle M/F..............................................737
Negative Reactance Principle NRP......................................739
Minimizing Circulating Current principle MCC......................741
Timer characteristics.................................................................743
Pulse control..............................................................................745
Blocking scheme.......................................................................746
Alarm indication.........................................................................750
Application.................................................................................751
Signals.......................................................................................758
Settings......................................................................................759
Monitored data...........................................................................760
Technical data...........................................................................762
Technical revision history..........................................................763

Section 10 Power quality measurement functions.........................765

Current total demand distortion monitoring CMHAI........................765
Identification..............................................................................765
Function block...........................................................................765
Functionality..............................................................................765
Operation principle....................................................................765
Application.................................................................................766
Signals.......................................................................................767
Settings......................................................................................768
Monitored data...........................................................................768
Voltage total harmonic distortion monitoring VMHAI......................769
Identification..............................................................................769
Function block...........................................................................769

615 series 21
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Functionality..............................................................................769
Operation principle....................................................................769
Application.................................................................................770
Signals.......................................................................................770
Settings......................................................................................771
Monitored data...........................................................................771
Voltage variation PHQVVR.............................................................772
Identification..............................................................................772
Function block...........................................................................772
Functionality..............................................................................772
Operation principle....................................................................773
Phase mode setting..............................................................773
Variation detection................................................................774
Variation validation...............................................................775
Duration measurement.........................................................778
Three/single-phase selection variation examples................779
Recorded data...........................................................................781
Application.................................................................................783
Signals.......................................................................................785
Settings......................................................................................786
Monitored data...........................................................................787

Section 11 General function block features....................................791

Definite time characteristics............................................................791
Definite time operation...............................................................791
Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics........794
IDMT curves for overcurrent protection.....................................794
Standard inverse-time characteristics..................................798
User-programmable inverse-time characteristics.................813
RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics........................813
Reset in inverse-time modes.....................................................817
Inverse-timer freezing................................................................826
Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics........827
IDMT curves for overvoltage protection.....................................827
Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage
protection..............................................................................829
User programmable inverse-time characteristics for
overvoltage protection..........................................................833
IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection..................834
IDMT curves for undervoltage protection..................................834
Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage
protection..............................................................................835
User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for
undervoltage protection........................................................837

22 615 series
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection...............838

Frequency measurement and protection........................................838
Measurement modes......................................................................839
Calculated measurements..............................................................841

Section 12 Requirements for measurement transformers..............843

Current transformers......................................................................843
Current transformer requirements for non-directional
overcurrent protection................................................................843
Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit
factor....................................................................................843
Non-directional overcurrent protection.................................844
Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..............845

Section 13 IED physical connections.............................................847

Protective earth connections..........................................................847
Binary and analog connections......................................................847
Communication connections..........................................................848
Ethernet RJ-45 front connection................................................848
Ethernet rear connections.........................................................849
EIA-232 serial rear connection..................................................849
EIA-485 serial rear connection..................................................849
Line differential protection communication connection..............850
Optical ST serial rear connection..............................................850
Communication interfaces and protocols..................................850
Rear communication modules...................................................851
COM0001-COM0014 jumper locations and connections.....855
COM0023 jumper locations and connections.......................858
COM0008 and COM0010 jumper locations and
connections..........................................................................863
COM0032-COM0034 jumper locations and connections.....866
Recommended third-party industrial Ethernet switches ...........869

Section 14 Technical data..............................................................871

Section 15 IED and functionality tests............................................877

Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations..........................881

Section 17 Glossary.......................................................................883

615 series 23
Technical Manual
24
1YHT530004D05 D Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in
the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

615 series 25
Technical Manual
Section 1 1YHT530004D05 D
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

deinstallation & disposal

Decommissioning,
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering
Planning &

Installation

Operation
Quick start guide purchase
Quick installation guide
Brochure
Product guide
Operation manual
Installation manual
Connection diagram
Engineering manual
Technical manual
Application manual c
Communication protocol manual c
IEC 61850 Engineering guide
Point list manual

GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V1 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded

from the ABB Website http://www.abb.com/relion.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date Product version History
A/2009-09-29 2.0 First release
B/2010-07-02 3.0 Content updated
C/2014-05-14 4.1 Content updated to correspond to the
product series version
D/2014-09-12 4.1.1 Content updated to correspond to the
product series version

Download the latest documents from the ABB Website

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

26 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 1
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documentation

Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB
Website http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.4 Symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard

which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage
to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to

understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. Therefore, comply fully with all warning and caution notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

A particular convention may not be used in this manual.

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push-button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push-button icons.

615 series 27
Technical Manual
Section 1 1YHT530004D05 D
Introduction

To navigate between the options, use and .

• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
Select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.
The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
• IED input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.
When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.

1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols

All available functions are listed in the table. All of them may not be applicable to
all products.

Table 1: Functions included in the IEDs

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Protection
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)
low stage, instance 1
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
PHLPTOC2 3I> (2) 51P-1 (2)
low stage, instance 2
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)
high stage, instance 1
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)
high stage, instance 2
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)
instantaneous stage, instance 1
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,
PHIPTOC2 3I>>> (2) 50P/51P (2)
instantaneous stage, instance 2
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low
DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)
stage, instance 1
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low
DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)
stage, instance 2
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high
DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> 67-2
stage
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
that contains three independent phase-segregated PH3LPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)
timers, low stage, instance 1
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
that contains three independent phase-segregated PH3LPTOC2 3I> (2) 51P-1 (2)
timers, low stage, instance 2
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
that contains three independent phase-segregated PH3HPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)
timers, high stage, instance 1
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
that contains three independent phase-segregated PH3HPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)
timers, high stage, instance 2
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection
that contains three independent phase-segregated PH3IPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)
timers, instantaneous stage, instance 1
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection that
contains three independent phase-segregated timers, DPH3LPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)
low stage, instance 1

Table continues on next page

28 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 1
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Three-phase directional overcurrent protection that
contains three independent phase-segregated timers, DPH3LPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)
low stage, instance 2
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection that
contains three independent phase-segregated timers, DPH3HPDOC1 3I>> -> (1) 67-2 (1)
high stage, instance 1
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection that
contains three independent phase-segregated timers, DPH3HPDOC2 3I>> -> (2) 67-2 (2)
high stage, instance 2
Non-directional earth-fault protection, low stage,
EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)
instance 1
Non-directional earth-fault protection, low stage,
EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)
instance 2
Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage,
EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
instance 1
Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage,
EFHPTOC2 Io>> (2) 51N-2 (2)
instance 2
Non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous
EFIPTOC1 Io>>> 50N/51N
stage
Directional earth-fault protection, low stage, instance 1 DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)
Directional earth-fault protection, low stage, instance 2 DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)
Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> 67N-2
Admittance based earth-fault protection, instance 1 EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)
Admittance based earth-fault protection, instance 2 EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)
Admittance based earth-fault protection, instance 3 EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)
Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF 67NIEF
Harmonics based earth-fault protection 1) HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA 51NHA
Non-directional (cross-country) earth fault protection,
EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
using calculated Io
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection, instance 1 NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection, instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection, instance 3 NSPTOC3 I2> (3) 46 (3)
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection, instance 4 NSPTOC4 I2> (4) 46 (4)
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> 46PD
Residual overvoltage protection, instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)
Residual overvoltage protection, instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)
Residual overvoltage protection, instance 3 ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)
Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance 1 PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)
Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance 2 PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)
Three-phase undervoltage protection, instance 3 PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)
Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 1 PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)
Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 2 PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)
Three-phase overvoltage protection, instance 3 PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)
Positive-sequence undervoltage protection, instance 1 PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)
Positive-sequence undervoltage protection, instance 2 PSPTUV2 U1< (2) 47U+ (2)
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection, instance 1 NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)
Negative-sequence overvoltage protection, instance 2 NSPTOV2 U2> (2) 47O- (2)
Frequency protection, instance 1 FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)
Frequency protection, instance 2 FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)
Frequency protection, instance 3 FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)
Frequency protection, instance 4 FRPFRQ4 f>/f<,df/dt (4) 81 (4)
Frequency protection, instance 5 FRPFRQ5 f>/f<,df/dt (5) 81 (5)
Frequency protection, instance 6 FRPFRQ6 f>/f<,df/dt (6) 81 (6)
Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables
T1PTTR1 3Ith>F 49F
and distribution transformers
Three-phase thermal overload protection for power
T2PTTR1 3Ith>T 49T
transformers, two time constants

Table continues on next page

615 series 29
Technical Manual
Section 1 1YHT530004D05 D
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for motors,
MNSPTOC1 I2>M (1) 46M (1)
instance 1
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for motors,
MNSPTOC2 I2>M (2) 46M (2)
instance 2
Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC1 3I< 37
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC1 Ist> 51LR
Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU1 Is2t n< 49,66,48,51LR
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC1 I2>> 46R
Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR1 3Ith>M 49M
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 BST BST
Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for
TR2PTDF1 3dI>T 87T
2W –transformers
Line differential protection and related measurements,
LNPLDF1 3dI>L 87L
stabilized and instantaneous stages
Numerical stabilized low impedance restricted earth-
LREFPNDF1 dIoLo> 87NL
fault protection
High impedance based restricted earth-fault protection HREFPDIF1 dIoHi> 87NH
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF
Switch onto fault CBRSOF1 50/27
Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR1 50/27
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> 68
Master trip, instance 1 TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)
Master trip, instance 2 TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)
Arc protection, instance 1 ARCSARC1 ARC (1) 50L/50NL (1)
Arc protection, instance 2 ARCSARC2 ARC (2) 50L/50NL (2)
Arc protection, instance 3 ARCSARC3 ARC (3) 50L/50NL (3)
Multi-purpose protection, instance 1 2) MAPGAPC1 MAP (1) MAP (1)
Multi-purpose protection, instance 2 2) MAPGAPC2 MAP (2) MAP (2)
Multi-purpose protection, instance 3 2) MAPGAPC3 MAP (3) MAP (3)
Multi-purpose protection, instance 4 2) MAPGAPC4 MAP (4) MAP (4)
Multi-purpose protection, instance 5 2) MAPGAPC5 MAP (5) MAP (5)
Multi-purpose protection, instance 6 2) MAPGAPC6 MAP (6) MAP (6)
Load shedding and restoration, instance 1 LSHDPFRQ1 UFLS/R (1) 81LSH (1)
Load shedding and restoration, instance 2 LSHDPFRQ2 UFLS/R (2) 81LSH (2)
Load shedding and restoration, instance 3 LSHDPFRQ3 UFLS/R (3) 81LSH (3)
Load shedding and restoration, instance 4 LSHDPFRQ4 UFLS/R (4) 81LSH (4)
Load shedding and restoration, instance 5 LSHDPFRQ5 UFLS/R (5) 81LSH (5)
Power quality
Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I PQM3I
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U PQM3V
Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU PQMV
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB I <-> O CB
Disconnector control, instance 1 DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) I <-> O DCC (1)
Disconnector control, instance 2 DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) I <-> O DCC (2)
Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC I <-> O ESC
Disconnector position indication, instance 1 DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)
Disconnector position indication, instance 2 DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)
Disconnector position indication, instance 3 DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)
Earthing switch indication, instance 1 ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)
Earthing switch indication, instance 2 ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)
Emergergency startup ESMGAPC1 ESTART ESTART
Auto-reclosing DARREC1 O -> I 79
Tap changer position indication TPOSSLTC1 TPOSM 84M

Table continues on next page

30 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 1
Introduction

Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSI

Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC1 COLTC 90V
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC 25
Condition monitoring
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM CBCM
Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)
Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF1 MCS 3I MCS 3I
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF1 FUSEF 60
Protection communication supervision PCSRTPC1 PCS PCS
Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT1 OPTS OPTM
Measurement
Disturbance recorder RDRE1 - -
Three-phase current measurement, instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 3I
Three-phase current measurement, instance 2 CMMXU2 3I(B) 3I(B)
Sequence current measurement, instance 1 CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0
Sequence current measurement, instance 2 I1I(B), I2I(B), I1I(B), I2I(B),
CSMSQ2
I0I(B) I0I(B)
Residual current measurement, instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io In
Residual current measurement, instance 2 RESCMMXU2 Io(B) In(B)
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U 3U
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo Vn
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0
Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU1 P, E P, E
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 X130 (RTD) X130 (RTD)
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f f

1) One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F or harmonics-based E/F.
The option is an addition to the existing E/F of the original configuration. The optional E/F has also a
predefined configuration in the IED. The optional E/F can be set on or off. Note: The existing E/F of
the configuration, (DEFx), is always present in the configuration even if it is an option in the order
code sheet.
2) Multi-purpose protection is used for example for. RTD/mA-based protection

615 series 31
Technical Manual
32
1YHT530004D05 D Section 2
615 series overview

Section 2 615 series overview

2.1 Overview

615 series is a product family of IEDs designed for protection, control,

measurement and supervision of utility substations and industrial switchgear and
equipment. The design of the IEDs has been guided by the IEC 61850 standard for
communication and interoperability of substation automation devices.

The IEDs feature draw-out-type design with a variety of mounting methods,

compact size and ease of use. Depending on the product, optional functionality is
available at the time of order for both software and hardware, for example,
autoreclosure and additional I/Os.

The 615 series IEDs support a range of communication protocols including IEC
61850 with GOOSE messaging, IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus®.

2.1.1 Product series version history

Product series version Product series history
1.0 First product from 615 series REF615 released with configurations A-D
1.1 New product: RED615

Platform enhancements:

• IRIG-B support
• Support for parallel protocols: IEC 61850 and Modbus
• Additional binary input/output module X130 as an option
• Enhanced CB interlocking functionality
• Enhanced TCS functionality in HW
• Non-volatile memory support

2.0 New products:

• RET615 with configurations A, B, C, D, J and K

• REM615 with configuration C

New configurations:

• REF615: E, F and J
• RED615: B and C

Platform enhancements:

• Support for IEC 60870-5-103

• Voltage measurement and protection
• Power and energy measurement
• Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI
• Fuse failure supervision

615 series 33
Technical Manual
Section 2 1YHT530004D05 D
615 series overview

Product series version Product series history

3.0 New product:

• REU615 with configurations A and B

New configurations:

• REF615 G and K
• RET615 E-H
• REM615 A, B and J

Additions for configurations:

• REF615 A, B, E, F and J
• RET615 A, B, C, D, J and K
• REM615 C
• RED615 B

Platform enhancements:

• Application configurability support

• Analog GOOSE support
• Large display with single line diagram
• Enhanced mechanical design
• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
• Frequency measurement and protection
• Admittance-based earth fault
• Combi sensor inputs
• RTD/mA measurement and protection
• Synchronism and energizing check
• Tap changer control with voltage regulator
• Load shedding and restoration
• Measured/calculated Io/Uo selectable
• Multi-port Ethernet option

4.1 New configurations:

• RED615 L
• REF615 L and M

Platform enhancements:

• Dual fibre optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)

• Generic control point (SPCGGIO) function blocks
• Additional logic blocks
• Button object for SLD
• Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD
• Harmonics based E/F
• Power quality functions
• Additional multi-purpose protection instances
• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
• High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR)
• Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP-1)
• Support for parallel protocols:
• IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103
• Programmable LEDs
• Online monitoring for PCM600

4.1.1 Platform enhancements:

• Line differential protection with in-zone transformer

34 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 2
615 series overview

2.1.2 PCM600 and IED connectivity package version

• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 Ver. 2.6 or later
• RED615 Connectivity Package Ver. 4.1 or later
• REF615 Connectivity Package Ver. 4.1 or later
• REM615 Connectivity Package Ver. 4.1 or later
• RET615 Connectivity Package Ver. 4.1 or later
• REU615 Connectivity Package Ver. 4.1 or later

Download connectivity packages from the ABB Website

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with the
Update Manager in PCM600.

2.2 Local HMI

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the IED. The LHMI
comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.

615 series 35
Technical Manual
Section 2 1YHT530004D05 D
615 series overview

REF615

Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.

A070704 V3 EN

Figure 2: Example of the LHMI

2.2.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. The
character size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and
rows fitting the view depends on the character size.

Table 2: Small display

Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6x12 pixels) 5 20
Large, variable width (13x14 pixels) 4 8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

Table 3: Large display

Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row

Small, mono-spaced (6x12 pixels) 10 20
Large, variable width (13x14 pixels) 8 8 or more

1) Depending on the selected language

36 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 2
615 series overview

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 4
A070705 V3 EN

Figure 3: Display layout

1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)

2.2.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start and
Trip.

There are also 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs
can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the
LHMI, WHMI or PCM600.

2.2.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. With the push-buttons you can give open or close commands to
objects in the primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a
disconnector. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

615 series 37
Technical Manual
Section 2 1YHT530004D05 D
615 series overview

A071176 V1 EN

Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

2.3 Web HMI

The WHMI allows accessing the IED via a Web browser. The supported Web
browser versions are Internet Explorer 7.0, 8.0 and 9.0.

WHMI is disabled by default.

WHMI offers several functions.

• Programmable LEDs and event lists

• System supervision
• Parameter settings
• Measurement display
• Disturbance records
• Phasor diagram
• Single-line diagram

The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.

38 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 2
615 series overview

A070754 V4 EN

Figure 5: Example view of the WHMI

The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.

• Locally by connecting the laptop to the IED via the front communication port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.

2.4 Authorization

The user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each with
different rights and default passwords.

The default passwords can be changed with Administrator user rights.

User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI

always uses authorization.

615 series 39
Technical Manual
Section 2 1YHT530004D05 D
615 series overview

Table 4: Predefined user categories

Username User rights
VIEWER Read only access
OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)
• Changing setting groups
• Controlling
• Clearing indications

ENGINEER • Changing settings

• Clearing event list
• Clearing disturbance records
• Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate
or disturbance recorder settings
• Setting the IED to test mode
• Selecting language

ADMINISTRATOR • All listed above

• Changing password
• Factory default activation

For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.

2.4.1 Audit trail

The IED offers a large set of event-logging functions. Normal process-related
events can be viewed by the normal user with Event Viewer in PCM600. Critical
system and IED security-related events are logged to a separate nonvolatile audit
trail for the administrator.

Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the

reconstruction and examination of the sequence of events and changes in an event.
Past user and process events can be examined and analyzed in a consistent method
with the help of Event List and Event Viewer in PCM600. The IED stores 2048
system events to the nonvolatile audit trail. Additionally, 1024 process events are
stored in a nonvolatile event list. Both the audit trail and event list work according
to the FIFO principle.

User audit trail is defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE
1686. The logging is based on predefined usernames or user categories. The user
audit trail events are supported in IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.

Table 5: Audit trail events

Audit trail event Description
Configuration change Configuration files changed
Firmware change
Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely
Table continues on next page

40 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 2
615 series overview

Audit trail event Description

Setting group local User changed setting group locally
Control remote DPC object control remote
Control local DPC object control local
Test on Test mode on
Test off Test mode off
Setting commit Settings have been changed
Time change
View audit log Administrator accessed audit trail
Login
Logout
Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool
Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period

PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events together with
normal events. Since only the administrator has the right to read audit trail,
authorization must be properly configured in PCM600. The audit trail cannot be
reset but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data. Some of the audit trail events are
interesting also as normal process events.

To expose the audit trail events also as normal process events,

define the level parameter via Configuration/Authorization/
Authority logging.

Table 6: Comparison of authority logging levels

Audit trail event Authority logging level
Configurati Setting Setting Settings All
None on change group group, edit
control
Configuration change ● ● ● ● ●
Firmware change ● ● ● ● ●
Setting group remote ● ● ● ●
Setting group local ● ● ● ●
Control remote ● ● ●
Control local ● ● ●
Test on ● ● ●
Test off ● ● ●
Setting commit ● ●
Time change ●
View audit log ●
Login ●
Table continues on next page

615 series 41
Technical Manual
Section 2 1YHT530004D05 D
615 series overview

Audit trail event Authority logging level

Logout ●
Firmware reset ●
Audit overflow ●

2.5 Communication

The IED supports a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-103 and Modbus®. Operational information and controls are available
through these protocols. However, some communication functionality, for
example, horizontal communication between the IEDs, is only enabled by the IEC
61850 communication protocol.

The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and

control functions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings and
fault records can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordings
are available to any Ethernet-based application in the standard COMTRADE file
format. The IED can send and receive binary signals from other IEDs (so-called
horizontal communication) using the IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE profile, where the
highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms is supported.
Furthermore, the IED supports sending and receiving of analog values using
GOOSE messaging. The IED meets the GOOSE performance requirements for
tripping applications in distribution substations, as defined by the IEC 61850
standard. The IED can simultaneously report events to five different clients on the
station bus.

The IED can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one client
connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850 and
Modbus.

All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated optional communication modules. The IED can be connected to Ethernet-
based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or the fibre-
optic LC connector (100Base-FX).

For the correct operation of redundant loop topology, it is essential that the external
switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in the
switches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to the
network. The IED itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP. The ring
recovery process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-up/link-
down events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For a better
performance of the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switch
furthest from the IED loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority = 0) and
the bridge priority increases towards the IED loop. The end links of the IED loop
can be attached to the same external switch or to two adjacent external switches. A
self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communication module with at least two
Ethernet interfaces for all IEDs.

42 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 2
615 series overview

Client A Client B

Network A
Network B

Managed Ethernet switch Managed Ethernet switch

with RSTP support with RSTP support

GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN

Figure 6: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution

The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30

IEDs. If more than 30 IEDs are to be connected, it is recommended
that the network is split into several rings with no more than 30
IEDs per ring. Each IED has a 50-μs store-and-forward delay, and
to fullfill the performance requirements for fast horizontal
communication, the ring size is limited to 30 IEDs.

615 series 43
Technical Manual
44
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Section 3 Basic functions

3.1 General parameters

Table 7: Analog input settings, phase currents

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Secondary current 2=1A 2=1A Rated secondary current
3=5A
Primary current 1.0...6000.0 A 0.1 100.0 Rated primary current
Amplitude corr. A 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase A amplitude correction factor
Amplitude corr. B 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase B amplitude correction factor
Amplitude corr. C 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase C amplitude correction factor
Nominal Current 39...4000 A 1 1300 Network Nominal Current (In)
Rated Secondary Value 1.000...50.000 mV/Hz 0.001 3.000 Rated Secondary Value (RSV) ratio
Reverse polarity 0=False 0=False Reverse the polarity of the phase CTs
1=True

Table 8: Analog input settings, residual current

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Secondary current 1=0.2A 2=1A Secondary current
2=1A
3=5A
Primary current 1.0...6000.0 A 0.1 100.0 Primary current
Amplitude corr. 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Amplitude correction
Reverse polarity 0=False 0=False Reverse the polarity of the residual CT
1=True

Table 9: Analog input settings, phase voltages

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 kV 0.001 20.000 Primary rated voltage
Secondary voltage 60...210 V 1 100 Secondary rated voltage
VT connection 1=Wye 2=Delta Wye, delta, U12 or UL1 VT connection
2=Delta
3=U12
4=UL1
Amplitude corr. A 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase A Voltage phasor magnitude
correction of an external voltage
transformer
Table continues on next page

615 series 45
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Amplitude corr. B 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase B Voltage phasor magnitude
correction of an external voltage
transformer
Amplitude corr. C 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase C Voltage phasor magnitude
correction of an external voltage
transformer
Division ratio 1000...20000 1 10000 Voltage sensor division ratio
Voltage input type 1=Voltage trafo 1=Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input
3=CVD sensor

Table 10: Analog input settings, residual voltage

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Secondary voltage 60...210 V 1 100 Secondary voltage
Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 kV 0.001 11.547 Primary voltage
Amplitude corr. 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Amplitude correction

Table 11: Authorization settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Local override 0=False 1) 1=True Disable authority
1=True 2)
Remote override 0=False 3) 1=True Disable authority
1=True 4)
Local viewer 0 Set password
Local operator 0 Set password
Local engineer 0 Set password
Local administrator 0 Set password
Remote viewer 0 Set password
Remote operator 0 Set password
Remote engineer 0 Set password
Remote administrator 0 Set password

1) Authorization override is disabled, LHMI password must be entered.

2) Authorization override is enabled, LHMI password is not asked.
3) Authorization override is disabled, communication tools ask password to enter the IED.
4) Authorization override is enabled, communication tools do not need password to enter the IED, except for WHMI which always requires it.

Table 12: Binary input settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Threshold voltage 18...176 Vdc 2 78 Binary input threshold voltage
Input osc. level 2...50 events/s 1 30 Binary input oscillation suppression
threshold
Input osc. hyst 2...50 events/s 1 10 Binary input oscillation suppression
hysteresis

46 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 13: Ethernet front port settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IP address 192.168.0.254 IP address for front port (fixed)
Mac address XX-XX-XX-XX- Mac address for front port
XX-XX

Table 14: Ethernet rear port settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IP address 192.168.2.10 IP address for rear port(s)
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask for rear port(s)
Default gateway 192.168.2.1 Default gateway for rear port(s)
Mac address XX-XX-XX-XX- Mac address for rear port(s)
XX-XX

Table 15: Redundancy settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Switch mode Normal Normal Mode selection for Ethernet switch on
HSR Redundant communication modules
PRP

Table 16: DIAGLCCH1 Output signals

Name Values Description
CHLIV True Status of LAN A in HSR mode
False
REDCHLIV True Status of LAN B in HSR mode
False

Table 17: XGGIO90 Output signals

Name Values Description
ETHLNK1 Up Status of Ethernet link 1
Down
ETHLNK2 Up Status of Ethernet link 2
Down
ETHLNK3 Up Status of Ethernet link 3
Down

615 series 47
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 18: General system settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Rated frequency 1=50Hz 1=50Hz Rated frequency of the network
Phase rotation 1=ABC 1=ABC Phase rotation order
2=ACB
Blocking mode 1=Freeze timer 1=Freeze timer Behaviour for function BLOCK inputs
2=Block all
3=Block OPERATE
output

Bay name1) REF6152) Bay name in system

IDMT Sat point 10...50 I/I> 1 50 Overcurrent IDMT saturation point

1) Used in the IED main menu header and as part of the disturbance recording identification
2) Depending on the product variant

Table 19: HMI settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FB naming convention 1=IEC61850 1=IEC61850 FB naming convention used in IED
2=IEC60617
3=IEC-ANSI
Default view 1=Measurements 1=Measurements LHMI default view
2=Main menu
3=SLD
Backlight timeout 1...60 min 1 3 LHMI backlight timeout
Web HMI mode 1=Active read only 3=Disabled Web HMI functionality
2=Active
3=Disabled
Web HMI timeout 1...60 min 1 3 Web HMI login timeout
SLD symbol format 1=IEC 1=IEC Single Line Diagram symbol format
2=ANSI
Autoscroll delay 0...30 s 1 0 Autoscroll delay for Measurements view

Table 20: IEC 60870-5-103 settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Serial port 1 0=Not in use 0=Not in use COM port for instance 1
1=COM 1
2=COM 2
Address 1 1...255 1 Unit address for instance 1
Start delay 1 0...20 char 4 Start frame delay in chars for instance 1
End delay 1 0...20 char 4 End frame delay in chars for instance 1
DevFunType 1 0...255 9 Device Function Type for instance 1
UsrFType 1 0...255 10 Function type for User Class 2 Frame for
instance 1
UsrInfNo 1 0...255 230 Information Number for User Class2
Frame for instance 1
Table continues on next page

48 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Class1Priority 1 0=Ev High 0=Ev High Class 1 data sending priority relationship
1=Ev/DR Equal between Events and Disturbance
2=DR High Recorder data.
Frame1InUse 1 -1=Not in use 6=Private frame 6 Active Class2 Frame 1 for instance 1
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Frame2InUse 1 -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 2 for instance 1
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Frame3InUse 1 -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 3 for instance 1
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Frame4InUse 1 -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 4 for instance 1
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Table continues on next page

615 series 49
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Class1OvInd 1 0=No indication 2=Rising edge Overflow Indication for instance 1
1=Both edges
2=Rising edge
Class1OvFType 1 0...255 10 Function Type for Class 1 overflow
indication for instance 1
Class1OvInfNo 1 0...255 255 Information Number for Class 1 overflow
indication for instance 1
Class1OvBackOff 1 0...500 500 Backoff Range for Class1 buffer for
instance 1
GI Optimize 1 0=Standard 0=Standard Optimize GI traffic for instance 1
behaviour behaviour
1=Skip
spontaneous
2=Only overflown
3=Combined
DR Notification 1 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Disturbance Recorder spontaneous
1=Enabled indications enabled/disabled
Serial port 2 0=Not in use 0=Not in use COM port for instance 2
1=COM 1
2=COM 2
Address 2 1...255 1 Unit address for instance 2
Start delay 2 0...20 char 4 Start frame delay in chars for instance 2
End delay 2 0...20 char 4 End frame delay in chars for instance 2
DevFunType 2 0...255 9 Device Function Type for instance 2
UsrFType 2 0...255 10 Function type for User Class 2 Frame for
instance 2
UsrInfNo 2 0...255 230 Information Number for User Class2
Frame for instance 2
Class1Priority 2 0=Ev High 0=Ev High Class 1 data sending priority relationship
1=Ev/DR Equal between Events and Disturbance
2=DR High Recorder data.
Frame1InUse 2 -1=Not in use 6=Private frame 6 Active Class2 Frame 1 for instance 2
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Table continues on next page

50 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Frame2InUse 2 -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 2 for instance 2
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Frame3InUse 2 -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 3 for instance 2
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Frame4InUse 2 -1=Not in use -1=Not in use Active Class2 Frame 4 for instance 2
0=User frame
1=Standard frame
1
2=Standard frame
2
3=Standard frame
3
4=Standard frame
4
5=Standard frame
5
6=Private frame 6
7=Private frame 7
Class1OvInd 2 0=No indication 2=Rising edge Overflow Indication for instance 2
1=Both edges
2=Rising edge
Class1OvFType 2 0...255 10 Function Type for Class 1 overflow
indication for instance 2
Class1OvInfNo 2 0...255 255 Information Number for Class 1 overflow
indication for instance 2
Class1OvBackOff 2 0...500 500 Backoff Range for Class1 buffer for
instance 2
GI Optimize 2 0=Standard 0=Standard Optimize GI traffic for instance 2
behaviour behaviour
1=Skip
spontaneous
2=Only overflown
3=Combined
DR Notification 2 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Disturbance Recorder spontaneous
1=Enabled indications enabled/disabled

615 series 51
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 21: IEC 61850-8-1 MMS settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unit mode 1=Primary 0=Nominal IEC 61850-8-1 unit mode
0=Nominal
2=Primary-Nominal

Table 22: Modbus settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Serial port 1 0=Not in use 0=Not in use COM port for Serial interface 1
1=COM 1
2=COM 2
Parity 1 0=none 2=even Parity for Serial interface 1
1=odd
2=even
Address 1 1...255 1 Modbus unit address on Serial interface 1
Link mode 1 1=RTU 1=RTU Modbus link mode on Serial interface 1
2=ASCII
Start delay 1 0...20 char 4 Start frame delay in chars on Serial
interface 1
End delay 1 0...20 char 3 End frame delay in chars on Serial
interface 1
Serial port 2 0=Not in use 0=Not in use COM port for Serial interface 2
1=COM 1
2=COM 2
Parity 2 0=none 2=even Parity for Serial interface 2
1=odd
2=even
Address 2 1...255 2 Modbus unit address on Serial interface 2
Link mode 2 1=RTU 1=RTU Modbus link mode on Serial interface 2
2=ASCII
Start delay 2 0...20 4 Start frame delay in chars on Serial
interface 2
End delay 2 0...20 3 End frame delay in chars on Serial
interface 2
MaxTCPClients 0...5 5 Maximum number of Modbus TCP/IP
clients
TCPWriteAuthority 0=No clients 2=All clients Write authority setting for Modbus TCP/
1=Reg. clients IP clients
2=All clients
EventID 0=Address 0=Address Event ID selection
1=UID
TimeFormat 0=UTC 1=Local Time format for Modbus time stamps
1=Local
ClientIP1 000.000.000.000 Modbus Registered Client 1
ClientIP2 000.000.000.000 Modbus Registered Client 2
ClientIP3 000.000.000.000 Modbus Registered Client 3
ClientIP4 000.000.000.000 Modbus Registered Client 4
ClientIP5 000.000.000.000 Modbus Registered Client 5
Table continues on next page

52 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CtlStructPWd1 **** Password for Modbus control struct 1
CtlStructPWd2 **** Password for Modbus control struct 2
CtlStructPWd3 **** Password for Modbus control struct 3
CtlStructPWd4 **** Password for Modbus control struct 4
CtlStructPWd5 **** Password for Modbus control struct 5
CtlStructPWd6 **** Password for Modbus control struct 6
CtlStructPWd7 **** Password for Modbus control struct 7
CtlStructPWd8 **** Password for Modbus control struct 8

Table 23: Serial communication settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Fiber mode 0=No fiber 0=No fiber Fiber mode for COM1
2=Fiber optic
Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire 1=RS485 2Wire Serial mode for COM1
2=RS485 4Wire
3=RS232 no
handshake
4=RS232 with
handshake
CTS delay 0...60000 0 CTS delay for COM1
RTS delay 0...60000 0 RTS delay for COM1
Baudrate 1=300 6=9600 Baudrate for COM1
2=600
3=1200
4=2400
5=4800
6=9600
7=19200
8=38400
9=57600
10=115200

615 series 53
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 24: Serial communication settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Fiber mode 0=No fiber 0=No fiber Fiber mode for COM2
2=Fiber optic
Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire 1=RS485 2Wire Serial mode for COM2
2=RS485 4Wire
3=RS232 no
handshake
4=RS232 with
handshake
CTS delay 0...60000 0 CTS delay for COM2
RTS delay 0...60000 0 RTS delay for COM2
Baudrate 1=300 6=9600 Baudrate for COM2
2=600
3=1200
4=2400
5=4800
6=9600
7=19200
8=38400
9=57600
10=115200

Table 25: Time settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Date 0 Date
Time 0 Time
Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS 1=24H:MM:SS:M Time format
2=12H:MM:SS:MS S
Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY 6=YYYY-MM-DD Date format
2=DD/MM/YYYY
3=DD-MM-YYYY
4=MM.DD.YYYY
5=MM/DD/YYYY
6=YYYY-MM-DD
7=YYYY-DD-MM
8=YYYY/DD/MM
Local time offset -720...720 min 480 Local time offset in minutes
Synch source 0=None 1=SNTP Time synchronization source
1=SNTP
2=Modbus
5=IRIG-B
8=Line differential
9=DNP
17=IEC60870-5-10
3
IP SNTP primary 10.58.125.165 IP address for SNTP primary server
IP SNTP secondary 192.168.2.165 IP address for SNTP secondary server
DST on time 02:00 Daylight savings time on, time (hh:mm)
DST on date 01.05 Daylight savings time on, date (dd.mm)
Table continues on next page

54 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DST on day 0=Not in use 0=Not in use Daylight savings time on, day of week
1=Mon
2=Tue
3=Wed
4=Thu
5=Fri
6=Sat
7=Sun
DST offset -720...720 min 0 Daylight savings time offset, in minutes
DST off time 02:00 Daylight savings time off, time (hh:mm)
DST off date 25.09 Daylight savings time off, date (dd.mm)
DST off day 0=Not in use 0=Not in use Daylight savings time off, day of week
1=Mon
2=Tue
3=Wed
4=Thu
5=Fri
6=Sat
7=Sun

Table 26: X100 PSM binary output signals

Name Type Default Description
X100-PO1 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors 6-7
X100-PO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors 8-9
X100-SO1 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
10c-11nc-12no
X100-SO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors 13c-14no
X100-PO3 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
15-17/18-19
X100-PO4 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
20-22/23-24

Table 27: X110 BIO binary output signals

Name Type Default Description
X110-SO1 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
14c-15no-16nc
X110-SO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
17c-18no-19nc
X110-SO3 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
20c-21no-22nc
X110-SO4 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors 23-24

615 series 55
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 28: X110 BIO binary input signals

Name Type Description
X110-Input 1 BOOLEAN Connectors 1-2
X110-Input 2 BOOLEAN Connectors 3-4
X110-Input 3 BOOLEAN Connectors 5-6c
X110-Input 4 BOOLEAN Connectors 7-6c
X110-Input 5 BOOLEAN Connectors 8-9c
X110-Input 6 BOOLEAN Connectors 10-9c
X110-Input 7 BOOLEAN Connectors 11-12c
X110-Input 8 BOOLEAN Connectors 13-12c

Table 29: X110 BIO binary input settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Input 1 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 1-2
Input 2 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 3-4
Input 3 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 5-6c
Input 4 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 7-6c
Input 5 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 8-9c
Input 6 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 10-9c
Input 7 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 11-12c
Input 8 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 13-12c
Input 1 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 1-2
1=True
Input 2 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 3-4
1=True
Input 3 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 5-6c
1=True
Input 4 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 7-6c
1=True
Input 5 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 8-9c
1=True
Input 6 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 10-9c
1=True
Input 7 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 11-12c
1=True
Input 8 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 13-12c
1=True

56 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 30: X120 AIM binary input signals

Name Type Description
X120-Input 1 BOOLEAN Connectors 1-2c
X120-Input 2 BOOLEAN Connectors 3-2c
X120-Input 3 BOOLEAN Connectors 4-2c
X120-Input 4 BOOLEAN Connectors 5-6

Table 31: X120 AIM binary input settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Input 1 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 1-2c
Input 2 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 3-2c
Input 3 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 4-2c
Input 4 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 5-6
Input 1 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 1-2c
1=True
Input 2 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 3-2c
1=True
Input 3 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 4-2c
1=True
Input 4 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 5-6
1=True

Table 32: X130 BIO binary output signals

Name Type Default Description
X130-SO1 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
10c-11no-12nc
X130-SO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
13c-14no-15nc
X130-SO3 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors
16c-17no-18nc

Table 33: X130 BIO binary input signals

Name Type Description
X130-Input 1 BOOLEAN Connectors 1-2c
X130-Input 2 BOOLEAN Connectors 3-2c
X130-Input 3 BOOLEAN Connectors 4-5c
X130-Input 4 BOOLEAN Connectors 6-5c
X130-Input 5 BOOLEAN Connectors 7-8c
X130-Input 6 BOOLEAN Connectors 9-8c

615 series 57
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 34: X130 BIO binary input settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Input 1 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 1-2c
Input 2 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 3-2c
Input 3 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 4-5c
Input 4 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 6-5c
Input 5 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 7-8c
Input 6 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 9-8c
Input 1 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 1-2c
1=True
Input 2 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 3-2c
1=True
Input 3 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 4-5c
1=True
Input 4 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 6-5c
1=True
Input 5 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 7-8c
1=True
Input 6 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 9-8c
1=True

Table 35: X130 AIM binary input signals

Name Type Description
X130-Input 1 BOOLEAN Connectors 1-2
X130-Input 2 BOOLEAN Connectors 3-4
X130-Input 3 BOOLEAN Connectors 5-6
X130-Input 4 BOOLEAN Connectors 7-8

Table 36: X130 AIM binary input settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Input 1 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 1-2
Input 2 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 3-4
Input 3 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 5-6
Input 4 filter time 5...1000 ms 5 Connectors 7-8
Input 1 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 1-2
1=True
Input 2 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 3-4
1=True
Input 3 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 5-6
1=True
Input 4 inversion 0=False 0=False Connectors 7-8
1=True

58 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.2 Self-supervision

The IED's extensive self-supervision system continuously supervises the software

and the electronics. It handles run-time fault situation and informs the user about a
fault via the LHMI and through the communications channels.

There are two types of fault indications.

• Internal faults
• Warnings

3.2.1 Internal faults

When an IED internal fault is detected, IED protection operation is disabled, the
green Ready LED begins to flash and the self-supervision output contact is activated.

Internal fault indications have the highest priority on the LHMI.

None of the other LHMI indications can override the internal fault
indication.

An indication about the fault is shown as a message on the LHMI. The text
Internal Fault with an additional text message, a code, date and time, is
shown to indicate the fault type.

Different actions are taken depending on the severity of the fault. The IED tries to
eliminate the fault by restarting. After the fault is found to be permanent, the IED
stays in the internal fault mode. All other output contacts are released and locked
for the internal fault. The IED continues to perform internal tests during the fault
situation.

If an internal fault disappears, the green Ready LED stops flashing and the IED
returns to the normal service state. The fault indication message remains on the
display until manually cleared.

The self-supervision signal output operates on the closed-circuit principle. Under

normal conditions, the IED is energized and the contact gaps 3-5 in slot X100 is
closed. If the auxiliary power supply fails or an internal fault is detected, the
contact gaps 3-5 are opened.

615 series 59
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

A070789 V1 EN

Figure 7: Output contact

The internal fault code indicates the type of internal IED fault. When a fault
appears, the code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service.

Table 37: Internal fault indications and codes

Fault indication Fault code Additional information
Internal Fault 2 An internal system error has occurred.
System error
Internal Fault 7 A file system error has occurred.
File system error
Internal Fault 8 Internal fault test activated manually by
Test the user.
Internal Fault 10 Watchdog reset has occurred too many
SW watchdog error times within an hour.
Internal Fault 43 Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card
SO-relay(s),X100 located in slot X100.
Internal Fault 44 Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card
SO-relay(s),X110 located in slot X110.
Internal Fault 45 Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card
SO-relay(s),X120 located in slot X120.
Internal Fault 46 Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card
SO-relay(s),X130 located in slot X130.
Internal Fault 53 Faulty Power Output relay(s) in card
PO-relay(s),X100 located in slot X100.
Internal Fault 54 Faulty Power Output relay(s) in card
PO-relay(s),X110 located in slot X110.
Internal Fault 55 Faulty Power Output relay(s) in card
PO-relay(s),X120 located in slot X120.
Internal Fault 56 Faulty Power Output relay(s) in card
PO-relay(s),X130 located in slot X130.
Internal Fault 57 Faulty ARC light sensor input(s).
Light sensor error
Internal Fault 62 Card in slot X000 is wrong type.
Conf. error,X000
Internal Fault 63 Card in slot X100 is wrong type or does
Conf. error,X100 not belong to the original composition.
Table continues on next page

60 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Fault indication Fault code Additional information

Internal Fault 64 Card in slot X110 is wrong type, is
Conf. error,X110 missing or does not belong to the original
composition.
Internal Fault 65 Card in slot X120 is wrong type, is
Conf. error,X120 missing or does not belong to the original
composition.
Internal Fault 66 Card in slot X130 is wrong type, is
Conf.error,X130 missing or does not belong to the original
composition.
Internal Fault 72 Card in slot X000 is faulty.
Card error,X000
Internal Fault 73 Card in slot X100 is faulty.
Card error,X100
Internal Fault 74 Card in slot X110 is faulty.
Card error,X110
Internal Fault 75 Card in slot X120 is faulty.
Card error,X120
Internal Fault 76 Card in slot X130 is faulty.
Card error,X130
Internal Fault 79 LHMI module is faulty. The fault
LHMI module indication may not be seen on the LHMI
during the fault.
Internal Fault 80 Error in the RAM memory on the CPU
RAM error card.
Internal Fault 81 Error in the ROM memory on the CPU
ROM error card.
Internal Fault 82 Error in the EEPROM memory on the
EEPROM error CPU card.
Internal Fault 83 Error in the FPGA on the CPU card.
FPGA error
Internal Fault 84 Error in the RTC on the CPU card.
RTC error
Internal Fault 96 RTD card located in slot X130 may have
RTD card error,X130 permanent fault. Temporary error has
occurred too many times within a short
time.

For further information on internal fault indications, see the operation manual.

3.2.2 Warnings
In case of a warning, the IED continues to operate except for those protection
functions possibly affected by the fault, and the green Ready LED remains lit as
during normal operation.

Warnings are indicated with the text Warning additionally provided with the
name of the warning, a numeric code and the date and time on the LHMI. The
warning indication message can be manually cleared.

615 series 61
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be

provided to ABB customer service.

Table 38: Warning indications and codes

Warning indication Warning code Additional information
Warning 10 A watchdog reset has occurred.
Watchdog reset
Warning 11 The auxiliary supply voltage has dropped
Power down det. too low.
Warning 20 Error when building the IEC 61850 data
IEC61850 error model.
Warning 21 Error in the Modbus communication.
Modbus error
Warning 24 Error in the Data set(s).
Dataset error
Warning 25 Error in the Report control block(s).
Report cont. error
Warning 26 Error in the GOOSE control block(s).
GOOSE contr. error
Warning 27 Error in the SCL configuration file or the
SCL config error file is missing.
Warning 28 Too many connections in the
Logic error configuration.
Warning 29 Error in the SMT connections.
SMT logic error
Warning 30 Error in the GOOSE connections.
GOOSE input error
ACT error 31 Error in the ACT connections.
Warning 32 Error in the GOOSE message receiving.
GOOSE Rx. error
Warning 33 Analog channel configuration error.
AFL error
Warning 40 A new composition has not been
Unack card comp. acknowledged/accepted.
Warning 50 Error in protection communication.
Protection comm.
Warning 85 A continuous light has been detected on
ARC1 cont. light the ARC light input 1.
Warning 86 A continuous light has been detected on
ARC2 cont. light the ARC light input 2.
Warning 87 A continuous light has been detected on
ARC3 cont. light the ARC light input 3.
Warning 96 Temporary error occurred in RTD card
RTD card error,X130 located in slot X130.
Warning 106 Measurement error in RTD card located
RTD meas. error,X130 in slot X130.

62 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

For further information on warning indications, see the operation manual.

3.3 LED indication control

The IED includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used with the
protection indication LEDs.

LED indication control should never be used for tripping purposes.

There is a separate trip logic function TRPPTRC available in the
IED configuration.

LED indication control is preconfigured in a such way that all the protection
function general start and operate signals are combined with this function
(available as output signals OUT_START and OUT_OPERATE). These signals are
always internally connected to Start and Trip LEDs. LEDPTRC collects and
combines phase information from different protection functions (available as
output signals OUT_ST_A /_B /_C and OUT_OPR_A /_B /_C). There is
also combined earth fault information collected from all the earth fault functions
available in the IED configuration (available as output signals OUT_ST_NEUT and
OUT_OPR_NEUT).

3.4 Programmable LEDs

3.4.1 Function block

GUID-00339108-34E4-496C-9142-5DC69F55EE7A V1 EN

Figure 8: Function block

3.4.2 Functionality
The programmable LEDs reside on the right side of the display on the LHMI.

615 series 63
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

REF615

Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.

A070704 V3 EN

Figure 9: Programmable LEDs on the right side of the display

All the programmable LEDs in the HMI of the IED have two colors, green and red.
For each LED, the different colors are individually controllable.

Each LED has two control inputs, ALARM and OK. The color setting is common for
all the LEDs. It is controlled with the Alarm color setting, the default value being
"Red". The OK input corresponds to the color that is available, with the default
value being "Green".

Changing the Alarm color setting to "Green" changes the color behavior of the OK
inputs to red.

The ALARM input has a higher priority than the OK input.

Each LED is seen in the Application Configuration tool as an individual function

block. Each LED has user-editable description text for event description. The state
("None", "OK", "Alarm") of each LED can also be read under a common
monitored data view for programmable LEDs.

64 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

The LED status also provides a means for resetting the individual LED via
communication. The LED can also be reset from configuration with the RESET input.

The resetting and clearing function for all LEDs is under the Clear menu.

The menu structure for the programmable LEDs is presented in Figure 10. The
common color selection setting Alarm colour for all ALARM inputs is in the
General menu, while the LED-specific settings are under the LED-specific menu
nodes.

Programmable LEDs
General Alarm color Red
Green
LED 1
Alarm mode
LED 2
Description
Follow-S
Follow-F
Latched-S
LatchedAck-F-S

Programmable LED description

GUID-0DED5640-4F67-4112-9A54-E8CAADFFE547 V1 EN

Figure 10: Menu structure

The ALARM input behavior can be selected with the alarm mode settings from the
alternatives "Follow-S", "Follow-F", "Latched-S" and "LatchedAck-F-S". The OK
input behavior is always according to "Follow-S". The alarm input latched modes
can be cleared with the reset input in the application logic.

GUID-58B6C3F2-873A-4B13-9834-9BB21FCA5704 V1 EN

Figure 11: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

"Follow-S": Follow Signal, ON

In this mode ALARM follows the input signal value, Non-latched.

Activating
signal

LED
GUID-952BD571-874A-4572-8710-F0E879678552 V1 EN

Figure 12: Operating sequence "Follow-S"

"Follow-F": Follow Signal, Flashing

Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non-
latched.

615 series 65
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

"Latched-S": Latched, ON

This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm
shows a steady light. After acknowledgement, the alarm disappears.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
GUID-055146B3-780B-43E6-9E06-9FD8D342E881 V1 EN

Figure 13: Operating sequence "Latched-S"

"LatchedAck-F-S": Latched, Flashing-ON

This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm
starts flashing. After acknowledgement, the alarm disappears if the signal is not
present and gives a steady light if the signal is present.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
GUID-1B1414BD-2535-40FA-9642-8FBA4D19BA4A V1 EN

Figure 14: Operating sequence "LatchedAck-F-S"

3.4.3 Signals
Table 39: Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 1
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 1
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 1
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 2
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 2
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 2
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 3
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 3
Table continues on next page

66 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Default Description

RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 3
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 4
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 4
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 4
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 5
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 5
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 5
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 6
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 6
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 6
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 7
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 7
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 7
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 8
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 8
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 8
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 9
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 9
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 9
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 10
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 10
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 10
OK BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 11
ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 11
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 11

3.4.4 Settings
Table 40: LED settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Alarm colour 1=Green 2=Red Colour for the alarm state of the LED
2=Red
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 1
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 1
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 2
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Table continues on next page

615 series 67
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 2
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 3
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 3
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 4
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 4
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 5
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 5
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 6
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 6
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 7
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 7
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 8
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 8
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 9
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 9
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 10
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Table continues on next page

68 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 10
Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 11
1=Follow-F
2=Latched-S
3=LatchedAck-F-S
Description Programmable Programmable LED description
LEDs LED 11

3.4.5 Monitored data

Table 41: Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
1 1=Ok LED 1
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
2 1=Ok LED 2
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
3 1=Ok LED 3
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
4 1=Ok LED 4
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
5 1=Ok LED 5
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
6 1=Ok LED 6
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
7 1=Ok LED 7
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
8 1=Ok LED 8
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
9 1=Ok LED 9
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
10 1=Ok LED 10
3=Alarm
Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable
11 1=Ok LED 11
3=Alarm

615 series 69
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.5 Time synchronization

The IED has an internal real-time clock which can be either free-running or
synchronized from an external source. The real-time clock is used for time
stamping events, recorded data and disturbance recordings.

The IED is provided with a 48-hour capacitor back-up that enables the real-time
clock to keep time in case of an auxiliary power failure.

Setting Synch Source determines the method how the real-time clock is
synchronized. If set to “None”, the clock is free-running and the settings Date and
Time can be used to set the time manually. Other setting values activate a
communication protocol that provides the time synchronization. Only one
synchronization method can be active at a time but SNTP provides time master
redundancy.

The IED supports SNTP, IRIG-B, Modbus and IEC 60870-5-103 to update the real-
time clock. IRIG-B with GPS provides the best accuracy, ±1 ms. The accuracy
using SNTP is +2...3 ms.

When Modbus TCP over TCP/IP is used, SNTP or IRIG-B time

synchronization should be used for better synchronization accuracy.

When the SNTP server IP setting is changed, the IED must be

rebooted to activate the new IP address. The SNTP server IP
settings are normally defined in the engineering phase via the SCL
file.

With the legacy protocols, the synchronization message must be

received within four minutes from the previous synchronization.
Otherwise bad synchronisation status is raised for the IED. With
SNTP, it is required that the SNTP server responds to a request
within 12 ms, otherwise the response is considered invalid.

The IED can use one of two SNTP servers, the primary or the secondary server.
The primary server is mainly in use, whereas the secondary server is used if the
primary server cannot be reached. While using the secondary SNTP server, the IED
tries to switch back to the primary server on every third SNTP request attempt. If
both the SNTP servers are offline, event time stamps have the time invalid status.
The time is requested from the SNTP server every 60 seconds.

IRIG-B time synchronization requires the IRIG-B format B004/B005 according to

the 200-04 IRIG-B standard. Older IRIG-B standards refer to these as B000/B001
with IEEE-1344 extensions. The synchronization time can be either UTC time or

70 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

local time. As no reboot is necessary, the time synchronization starts immediately

after the IRIG-B sync source is selected and the IRIG-B signal source is connected.

ABB has tested the IRIG-B with the following clock masters:
• Tekron TTM01 GPS clock with IRIG-B output
• Meinberg TCG511 controlled by GPS167
• Datum ET6000L
• Arbiter Systems 1088B

IRIG-B time synchronization requires a COM card with an IRIG-B

input.

When using line differential communication between RED615 IEDs, the time
synchronization messages can be received from the other line end IED within the
protection telegrams. The IED begins to synchronize its real-time clock with the
remote end IEDs time if the Line differential time synchronization source is
selected. This does not affect the protection synchronization used in the line
differential protection or the selection of the remote end IEDs time synchronization
method. [1]

3.6 Parameter setting groups

3.6.1 Function block

GUID-76F71815-D82D-4D81-BCFE-28AF2D56391A V1 EN

Figure 15: Function block

3.6.2 Functionality
The IED supports six setting groups. Each setting group contains parameters
categorized as group settings inside application functions. The customer can
change the active setting group at run time.

The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs
depending on the mode selected with the Configuration/Setting Group/SG
operation mode setting.

[1] The line differential protection is available only in RED615.

615 series 71
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the
required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected. The setting group
selection is not dependent on the SG_x_ACT outputs.

Table 42: Optional operation modes for setting group selection

SG operation mode Description
Operator (Default) Setting group can be changed with the setting
Settings/Setting group/Active group.
Logic mode 1 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs
(BI_SG_2...BI_SG_6). The highest TRUE
binary input defines the active setting group.
Logic mode 2 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs
where BI_SG_4 is used for selecting setting
groups 1-3 or 4-6.
When binary input BI_SG_4 is FALSE, setting
groups 1-3 are selected with binary inputs
BI_SG_2 and BI_SG_3. When binary input
BI_SG_4 is TRUE, setting groups 4-6 are
selected with binary inputs BI_SG_5 and
BI_SG_6.

For example, six setting groups can be controlled with three binary inputs. Set SG
operation mode =”'Logic mode 2” and connect together BI_SG_2 and BI_SG_5
same as BI_SG_3 and BI_SG_6.

Table 43: SG operation mode = “Logic mode 1”

Input
BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 1
TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 2
any TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3
any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4
any any any TRUE FALSE 5
any any any any TRUE 6

Table 44: SG operation mode = “Logic mode 2”

Input
BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group
FALSE FALSE FALSE any any 1
TRUE FALSE FALSE any any 2
any TRUE FALSE any any 3
any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4
any any TRUE TRUE FALSE 5
any any TRUE any TRUE 6

72 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

The setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy
group 1).

3.7 Fault records

The IED has the capacity to store the records of 128 latest fault events. Fault
records include fundamental or RMS current values. The records enable the user to
analyze recent power system events. Each fault record (FLTMSTA) is marked with
an up-counting fault number and a time stamp that is taken from the beginning of
the fault.

The fault recording period begins from the start event of any protection function
and ends if any protection function trips or the start is restored before the operate
event. If a start is restored without an operate event, the start duration shows the
protection function that has started first.

Start duration that has the value of 100% indicates that a protection function has
operated during the fault and if none of the protection functions has been operated,
Start duration shows always values less than 100%.

The Fault recorded data Protection and Start duration is from the same protection
function. The Fault recorded data operate time shows the time of the actual fault
period. This value is the time difference between the activation of the internal start
and operate signals. The actual operate time also includes the starting time and the
delay of the output relay.

If some functions in relay application are sensitive to start

frequently it might be advisable to set the setting parameter Trig
mode to “From operate”. Then only faults that cause an operate
event trigger a new fault recording.

The fault-related current, voltage, frequency, angle values, shot pointer and the
active setting group number are taken from the moment of the operate event, or
from the beginning of the fault if only a start event occurs during the fault. The
maximum current value collects the maximum fault currents during the fault. In
case frequency cannot be measured, nominal frequency is used for frequency and
zero for Frequency gradient and validity is set accordingly.

Measuring mode for phase current and residual current values can be selected with
the Measurement mode setting parameter.

615 series 73
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 45: FLTMSTA Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Trig mode 0=From all faults 0=From all faults Triggering mode
1=From operate
2=From only start
A measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode phase
2=DFT currents and residual current
3=Peak-to-Peak

Table 46: FLTMSTA Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Fault number INT32 0...999999 Fault record number
Time and date Timestamp Fault record time stamp
Start duration FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Maximum start duration
of all stages during the
fault
Operate time FLOAT32 0.000...999999.9 s Operate time
99
Breaker clear time FLOAT32 0.000...999999.9 s Breaker clear time
99
Active group INT32 1...6 Active setting group
Shot pointer INT32 0...7 Autoreclosing shot
pointer value
Max diff current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Maximum phase A
differential current
Max diff current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Maximum phase B
differential current
Max diff current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Maximum phase C
differential current
Diff current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current
phase A
Diff current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current
phase B
Diff current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current
phase C
Max bias current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Maximum phase A bias
current
Max bias current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Maximum phase B bias
current
Max bias current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Maximum phase C bias
current
Bias current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current phase A
Bias current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current phase B
Bias current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current phase C
Diff current Io FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 pu Differential current
residual
Table continues on next page

74 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Bias current Io FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 pu Bias current residual
Max current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A
current
Max current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B
current
Max current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C
current
Max current Io FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum residual
current
Current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase A current
Current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase B current
Current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase C current
Current Io FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Residual current
Current Io-Calc FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Calculated residual
current
Current Ps-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Positive sequence
current
Current Ng-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Negative sequence
current
Max current IL1B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A
current (b)
Max current IL2B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B
current (b)
Max current IL3B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C
current (b)
Max current IoB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum residual
current (b)
Current IL1B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase A current (b)
Current IL2B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase B current (b)
Current IL3B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase C current (b)
Current IoB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Residual current (b)
Current Io-CalcB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Calculated residual
current (b)
Current Ps-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Positive sequence
current (b)
Current Ng-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Negative sequence
current (b)
Max current IL1C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase A
current (c)
Max current IL2C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase B
current (c)
Max current IL3C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum phase C
current (c)
Max current IoC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Maximum residual
current (c)
Current IL1C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase A current (c)
Table continues on next page

615 series 75
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Current IL2C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase B current (c)
Current IL3C FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Phase C current (c)
Current IoC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Residual current (c)
Current Io-CalcC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Calculated residual
current (c)
Current Ps-SeqC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Positive sequence
current (c)
Current Ng-SeqC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 xIn Negative sequence
current (c)
Voltage UL1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A voltage
Voltage UL2 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B voltage
Voltage UL3 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase C voltage
Voltage U12 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A to phase B
voltage
Voltage U23 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B to phase C
voltage
Voltage U31 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase C to phase A
voltage
Voltage Uo FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Residual voltage
Voltage Zro-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Zero sequence voltage
Voltage Ps-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Positive sequence
voltage
Voltage Ng-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Negative sequence
voltage
Voltage UL1B FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A voltage (b)
Voltage UL2B FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B voltage (b)
Voltage UL3B FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B voltage (b)
Voltage U12B FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase A to phase B
voltage (b)
Voltage U23B FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase B to phase C
voltage (b)
Voltage U31B FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Phase C to phase A
voltage (b)
Voltage UoB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Residual voltage (b)
Voltage Zro-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Zero sequence voltage
(b)
Voltage Ps-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Positive sequence
voltage (b)
Voltage Ng-SeqB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 xUn Negative sequence
voltage (b)
PTTR thermal level FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 PTTR calculated
temperature of the
protected object relative
to the operate level
PDNSPTOC1 rat. I2/ FLOAT32 0.00...999.99 % PDNSPTOC1 ratio I2/I1
I1
Table continues on next page

76 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Frequency FLOAT32 30.00...80.00 Hz Frequency
Frequency gradient FLOAT32 -10.00...10.00 Hz/s Frequency gradient
Conductance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Conductance Yo
00
Susceptance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Susceptance Yo
00
Angle Uo - Io FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle residual voltage -
residual current
Angle U23 - IL1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase B to phase
C voltage - phase A
current
Angle U31 - IL2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase C to phase
A voltage - phase B
current
Angle U12 - IL3 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase A to phase
B voltage - phase C
current
Angle UoB - IoB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle residual voltage -
residual current (b)
Angle U23B - IL1B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase B to phase
C voltage - phase A
current (b)
Angle U31B - IL2B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase C to phase
A voltage - phase B
current (b)
Angle U12B - IL3B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle phase A to phase
B voltage - phase C
current (b)

3.8 Non-volatile memory

In addition to the setting values, the IED can store some data in the non-volatile
memory.
• Up to 1024 events are stored. The stored events are visible in LHMI and
WHMI only.
• Recorded data
• Fault records (up to 128)
• Maximum demands
• Circuit breaker condition monitoring
• Latched alarm and trip LEDs' status
• Trip circuit lockout
• Counter values

615 series 77
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.9 Binary input

3.9.1 Binary input filter time

The filter time eliminates debounces and short disturbances on a binary input. The
filter time is set for each binary input of the IED.

1 2

4
5 5
GUID-13DA5833-D263-4E23-B666-CF38B1011A4B V1 EN

Figure 16: Binary input filtering

1 t0

2 t1

3 Input signal
4 Filtered input signal
5 Filter time

At the beginning, the input signal is at the high state, the short low state is filtered
and no input state change is detected. The low state starting from the time t0
exceeds the filter time, which means that the change in the input state is detected
and the time tag attached to the input change is t0. The high state starting from t1 is
detected and the time tag t1 is attached.

Each binary input has a filter time parameter Input # filter, where # is the number
of the binary input of the module in question (for example Input 1 filter).

Table 47: Input filter parameter values

Parameter Values Default
Input # filter time 5...1000 ms 5 ms

78 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.9.2 Binary input inversion

The parameter Input # invert is used to invert a binary input.

Table 48: Binary input states

Control voltage Input # invert State of binary input
No 0 False (0)
Yes 0 True (1)
No 1 True (0)
Yes 1 False (0)

When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control
voltage is applied to its terminals. Accordingly, the input state is FALSE (0) when
a control voltage is applied to the terminals of the binary input.

3.9.3 Oscillation suppression

Oscillation suppression is used to reduce the load from the system when a binary
input starts oscillating. A binary input is regarded as oscillating if the number of
valid state changes (= number of events after filtering) during one second is equal
to or greater than the set oscillation level value. During oscillation, the binary input
is blocked (the status is invalid) and an event is generated. The state of the input
will not change when it is blocked, that is, its state depends on the condition before
blocking.

The binary input is regarded as non-oscillating if the number of valid state changes
during one second is less than the set oscillation level value minus the set
oscillation hysteresis value. Note that the oscillation hysteresis must be set lower
than the oscillation level to enable the input to be restored from oscillation. When
the input returns to a non-oscillating state, the binary input is deblocked (the status
is valid) and an event is generated.

Table 49: Oscillation parameter values

Parameter Values Default
Input osc. level 2...50 events/s 30 events/s
Input osc. hyst 2...50 events/s 10 events/s

3.10 Binary outputs

The IED provides a number of binary outputs used for tripping, executing local or
remote control actions of a breaker or a disconnector, and for connecting the IED
to external annunciation equipment for indicating, signalling and recording.

615 series 79
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Power output contacts are used when the current rating requirements of the
contacts are high, for example, for controlling a breaker, such as energizing the
breaker trip and closing coils.

The contacts used for external signalling, recording and indicating, the signal
outputs, need to adjust to smaller currents, but they can require a minimum current
(burden) to ensure a guaranteed operation.

The IED provides both power output and signal output contacts. To guarantee
proper operation, the type of the contacts used are chosen based on the operating
and reset time, continuous current rating, make and carry for short time, breaking
rate and minimum connected burden. A combination of series or parallel contacts
can also be used for special applications. When appropriate, a signal output can
also be used to energize an external trip relay, which in turn can be confiugred to
energize the breaker trip or close coils.

Using an external trip relay can require an external trip circuit

supervision relay. It can also require wiring a separate trip relay
contact back to the IED for breaker failure protection function.

All contacts are freely programmable, except the internal fault output IRF.

3.10.1 Power output contacts

Power output contacts are normally used for energizing the breaker closing coil and
trip coil, external high burden lockout or trip relays.

3.10.1.1 Dual single-pole power outputs PO1 and PO2

Dual (series-connected) single-pole (normally open/form A) power output contacts

PO1 and PO2 are rated for continuous current of 8 A. The contacts are normally
used for closing circuit breakers and energizing high burden trip relays. They can
be arranged to trip the circuit breakers when the trip circuit supervision is not
available or when external trip circuit supervision relay is provided.

The power outputs are included in slot X100 of the power supply module.

80 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

X100

PO1

6
7

PO2

8
9

GUID-4E1E21B1-BEEC-4351-A7BE-9D2DBA451985 V1 EN

Figure 17: Dual single-pole power output contacts PO1 and PO2

3.10.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision

The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double-pole normally open/form A power
outputs with trip circuit supervision.

When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series, they have the same
technical specification as PO1 for breaking duty. The trip circuit supervision
hardware and associated functionality which can supervise the breaker coil both
during closing and opening condition are also provided. Contacts PO3 and PO4 are
almost always used for energizing the breaker trip coils.

615 series 81
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

X100
16
PO3
17
15
19
TCS1
18
20
22
PO4
21
23
TCS2 24

GUID-5A0502F7-BDC4-424A-BF19-898025FCCBD7 V1 EN

Figure 18: Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision

Power outputs PO3 and PO4 are included in the power supply module located in
slot X100 of the IED.

3.10.1.3 Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3

HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 are dual parallel connected, single-pole, normally open/
form A high-speed power outputs. The high-speed power output is a hybrid
discrete or electromechanical output that is rated as a power output.

The outputs are normally used in applications that require fast IED output contact
activation time to achieve fast opening of a breaker, such as, arc-protection or
breaker failure protection, where fast operation is required either to minimize fault
effects to the equipment or to avoid a fault to expand to a larger area. With the high-
speed outputs, the total time from the application to the IED output contact
activation is 5-6 ms shorter than when using output contacts with conventional
mechanical output relays. The high-speed power outputs have a continuous rating
of 6 A.

82 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

X110
15
HSO1

16
19
HSO2

20
23
HSO3

24
GUID-38EDD366-7456-4933-B49E-0F43FE1D6C39 V1 EN

Figure 19: High-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3

The reset time of the high-speed output contacts is longer than that of the
conventional output contacts.

High-speed power contacts are part of the card BIO0007 with eight binary inputs
and three HSOs. They are optional alternatives to conventional BIO cards of the IED.

3.10.2 Signal output contacts

Signal output contacts are single-pole, single (normally open/form A or change-over/
form C) signal output contacts (SO1, SO2,...) or parallel connected dual contacts.

The signal output contacts are used for energizing, for example, external low
burden trip relays, auxiliary relays, annunciators and LEDs.

A single signal contact is rated for a continuous current of 5 A. It has a make and
carry for 0.5 seconds at 15 A.

When two contacts are connected in parallel, the relay is of a different design. It
has the make and carry rating of 30 A for 0.5 seconds. This can be applied for
energizing breaker close coil and tripping coil. Due to the limited breaking
capacity, a breaker auxiliary contact can be required to break the circuit.

3.10.2.1 Internal fault signal output IRF

The internal fault signal output (change-over/form C) IRF is a single contact

included in the power supply module of the IED.

615 series 83
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

X100
3
IRF
4
5

GUID-C09595E9-3C42-437A-BDB2-B20C35FA0BD2 V1 EN

Figure 20: Internal fault signal output IRF

3.10.2.2 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module

Signal outputs (normally open/form A or change-over/form C) SO1 (dual parallel

form C) and SO2 (single contact/form A) are part of the power supply module of
the IED.

X100
10
SO1
11
12

X100
13
SO2
14

GUID-83F96C39-652F-494A-A226-FD106568C228 V1 EN

Figure 21: Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module

3.10.2.3 Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005

The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 SO3 and SO4.
Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single
form C contact, and SO4 is a single form A contact.

84 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

X110
14
SO1
16
15
17
SO2
19
18

X110
20
SO3
22
21
23
SO4
24
GUID-CBA9A48A-2549-455B-907D-8261E2259BF4 V1 EN

Figure 22: Signal output in BIO0005

3.10.2.4 Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006

The optional card BIO0006 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3. Signal
outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts; SO3 is a single form C
contact.

615 series 85
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

X130
10
SO1
12
11
13
SO2
15
14
16
SO3
18
17
GUID-C5B5FD1C-617B-4F38-A0D4-D98735E69530 V1 EN

Figure 23: Signal output in BIO0006

3.11 RTD/mA inputs

3.11.1 Functionality
RTD and mA analog input module is used for monitoring and metering milli-
ampere (mA), temperature (°C) and resistance (Ω). Each input can be linearly
scaled for various applications, for example, transformer’s tap changer position
indication. Each input has independent limit value supervision and deadband
supervision functions, including warning and alarm signals.

3.11.2 Operation principle

All the inputs of the module are independent RTD and mA channels with
individual protection, reference and optical isolation for each input, making them
galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. However,
the RTD inputs share a common ground.

3.11.2.1 Selection of input signal type

The function module inputs accept current or resistance type signals. The inputs are
configured for a particular type of input type by the channel specific Input mode
setting. The default value for all inputs is “Not in use”, which means that the
channel is not sampled at all, and the output value quality is set accordingly.

86 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 50: Limits for the RTD/mA inputs

Input mode Description
Not in use Default selection. Used when the corresponding input is not used.
0...20 mA Selection for analog DC milli-ampere current inputs in the input range of 0 – 20 mA.
Resistance Selection for RTD inputs in the input range of 0 – 2000 Ω.
Pt100 Selection for RTD inputs, when temperature sensor is used. All the selectable
Pt250 sensor types have their resistance vs. temperature characteristics stored in the
Ni100 module; default measuring range is -40 – 200 °C.
Ni120
Ni250
Cu10

3.11.2.2 Selection of output value format

Each input has independent Value unit settings that are used to select the unit for
the channel output. The default value for the Value unit setting is “Dimensionless”.
Input minimum and Input maximum, and Value maximum and Value minimum
settings have to be adjusted according to the input channel. The default values for
these settings are set to their maximum and minimum setting values.

When the channel is used for temperature sensor type, set the Value unit setting to
“Degrees celsius”. When Value unit is set to “Degrees celsius”, the linear scaling is
not possible, but the default range (-40…200 °C) can be set smaller with the Value
maximum and Value minimum settings.

When the channel is used for DC milli-ampere signal and the application requires
linear scaling of the input range, set the Value unit setting to “Dimensionless”,
where the input range can be linearly scaled with settings Input minimum and Input
maximum to Value minimum and Value maximum. When milli-ampere is used as an
output unit, set the Value unit setting to “Ampere”. When Value unit is set to
“Ampere”, the linear scaling is not possible, but the default range (0…20 mA) can
be set smaller with Value maximum and Value minimum settings.

When the channel is used for resistance type signals and the application requires
linear scaling of the input range, set the Value unit setting to “Dimensionless”,
where the input range can be linearly scaled with the setting Input minimum and
Input maximum to Value minimum and Value maximum. When resistance is used as
an output unit, set the Value unit setting to “Ohm”. When Value unit is set to
“Ohm”, the linear scaling is not possible, but the default range (0…2000 Ω) can be
set smaller with the Value maximum and Value minimum settings.

3.11.2.3 Input linear scaling

Each RTD/mA input can be scaled linearly by the construction of a linear output
function in respect to the input. The curve consists of two points, where the y-axis
(Input minimum and Input maximum) defines the input range and the x-axis (Value
minimum and Value maximum) is the range of the scaled value of the input.

615 series 87
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

The input scaling can be bypassed by selecting Value unit = "Ohm"

when Input mode = "Resistance" is used and by selecting Value unit
= "Ampere" when Input mode = "0...20 mA" is used.

Example for linear scaling

Milli-ampere input is used as tap changer position information. The sensor
information is from 4 mA to 20 mA that is equivalent to the tap changer position
from -36 to 36, respectively.
X130-Input#
20 mA
Input maximum

”0..20mA”
Input mode

4 mA
Input minimum AI_VAL#

-36 ”Dimensionless” 36
Value minimum Value unit Value maximum
GUID-85338A5E-3D2F-4031-A598-EA8A525190D3 V1 EN

Figure 24: Milli-ampere input scaled to tap changer position information

3.11.2.4 Measurement chain supervision

Each input contains functionality to monitor the input measurement chain. The
circuitry monitors the RTD channels continuously and reports a circuitry break of
any enabled input channel. If the measured input value is outside the limits, minimum/
maximum value is shown in the corresponding output. The quality of the
corresponding output is set accordingly to indicate misbehavior in the RTD/mA input.

Table 51: Function identification, limits for the RTD/mA inputs

Input Limit value
RTD temperature, high > 200 °C
RTD temperature, low < -40 °C
mA current, high > 23 mA
Resistance, high > 2000 Ω

3.11.2.5 Selfsupervision

Each input sample is validated before it is fed into the filter algorithm. The samples
are validated by measuring an internally set reference current immediately after the
inputs are sampled. Each RTD sensor type has expected current based on the

88 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

sensor type. If the measured offset current deviates from the reference current more
than 20%, the sample is discarded and the output is set to invalid. The invalid
measure status deactivates as soon as the measured input signal is within the
measurement offset.

3.11.2.6 Calibration

RTD and mA inputs are calibrated at the factory. The calibration circuitry monitors
the RTD channels continuously and reports a circuitry break of any channel.

3.11.2.7 Limit value supervision

The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of
AI_INST# exceeds or falls below the set limits. All the measuring channels have
an individual limit value supervision function. The measured value contains the
corresponding range information AI_RANGE# and has a value in the range of 0 to
4:

• 0: “normal”
• 1: “high”
• 2: “low”
• 3: “high-high”
• 4: “low-low”

The range information changes and the new values are reported.
Y Out of Range
Value maximum

AI_RANGE#=3

Val high high limit

Hysteresis
AI_RANGE#=1
Val high limit
AI_RANGE#=0

AI_RANGE#=0 t

Val low limit

AI_RANGE#=2
Val low low limit
AI_RANGE#=4

Value Reported

Value minimum
GUID-6A6033E6-22C8-415D-AABD-D0556D38C986 V1 EN

Figure 25: Limit value supervision for RTD (X130)

The range information of “High-high limit” and “Low-low limit” is combined from
all measurement channels to the Boolean ALARM output. The range information
of “High limit” and “Low limit” is combined from all measurement channels to
Boolean WARNING output.

615 series 89
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 52: Settings for X130 (RTD) analog input limit value supervision
Function Settings for limit value supervision
X130 (RTD) analog input Out of range Value maximum
High-high limit Val high high limit
High limit Val high limit
Low limit Val low limit
Low-low limit Val low low limit
Out of range Value minimum

When the measured value exceeds either the Value maximum setting or the Value
minimum setting, the corresponding quality is set to out of range and a maximum
or minimum value is shown when the measured value exceeds the added
hysteresis, respectively. The hysteresis is added to the extreme value of the range
limit to allow the measurement slightly to exceed the limit value before it is
considered as out of range.

3.11.2.8 Deadband supervision

Each input has an independent deadband supervision. The deadband supervision

function reports the measured value according to integrated changes over a time
period.

GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN

Figure 26: Integral deadband supervision

The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the Value
deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between
the maximum and minimum limits in the units of 0.001 percent * seconds. The
reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the formula:

( Value maximum - Value minimum) × deadband / 1000

t (s ) =
∆Y × 10
00%
GUID-CC447162-C1B4-4E74-A253-828F388266EB V1 EN (Equation )

90 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Example of X130 (RTD) analog input deadband supervision

Temperature sensor Pt100 is used in the temperature range of 15...180 °C. Value
unit “Degrees Celsius” is used and the set values Value minimum and Value
maximum are set to 15 and 180, respectively.

Value deadband = 7500 (7,5% of the total measuring range 165)

AI_VAL# = AI_DB# = 85

If AI_VAL# changes to 90, the reporting delay is:

(180 − 15) × 7500 / 1000

t (s ) = ≈ 2, 5s
90 − 85 × 100%
GUID-F47EF6B6-9A14-44A2-AD19-BC067E4A7D78 V1 EN (Equation )

Table 53: Settings for X130 (RTD) analog input deadband supervision
Function Setting Maximum/minimum (=range)
X130 (RTD) analog input Value deadband Value maximum / Value minimum
(=20000)

Since the function can be utilized in various measurement modes,

the default values are set to the extremes; thus, it is very important
to set correct limit values to suit the application before the
deadband supervision works properly.

3.11.2.9 RTD temperature vs. resistance

Table 54: Temperature vs. resistance
Temp Platinum TCR 0.00385 Nickel TCR 0.00618 Copper TCR
°C 0.00427
Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10
-40 84.27 210.675 79.1 94.92 197.75 7.49
-30 88.22 220.55 84.1 100.92 210.25 -
-20 92.16 230.4 89.3 107.16 223.25 8.263
-10 96.09 240.225 94.6 113.52 236.5 -
0 100 250 100 120 250 9.035
10 103.9 259.75 105.6 126.72 264 -
20 107.79 269.475 111.2 133.44 278 9.807
30 111.67 279.175 117.1 140.52 292.75 -
40 115.54 288.85 123 147.6 307.5 10.58
50 119.4 298.5 129.1 154.92 322.75 -
60 123.24 308.1 135.3 162.36 338.25 11.352
70 127.07 317.675 141.7 170.04 354.25 -
Table continues on next page

615 series 91
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Temp Platinum TCR 0.00385 Nickel TCR 0.00618 Copper TCR

°C 0.00427
Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10
80 130.89 327.225 148.3 177.96 370.75 12.124
90 134.7 336.75 154.9 185.88 387.25 -
100 138.5 346.25 161.8 194.16 404.5 12.897
120 146.06 365.15 176 211.2 440 13.669
140 153.58 383.95 190.9 229.08 477.25 14.442
150 - - 198.6 238.32 496.5 -
160 161.04 402.6 206.6 247.92 516.5 15.217
180 168.46 421.15 223.2 267.84 558 -
200 175.84 439.6 240.7 288.84 601.75 -

3.11.2.10 RTD/mA input connection

RTD inputs can be used with 2-wire or 3-wire connection with common ground.
When using the 3-wire connection, it is important that all three wires connecting
the sensor are symmetrical, that is, the wires are of the same type and length, hence
the wire resistance is automatically compensated.

GUID-BC4182F7-F701-4E09-AB3D-EFB48280F097 V1 EN

Figure 27: Three RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire

connection

92 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

GUID-2702C0B0-99CF-40D0-925C-BEC0725C0E97 V1 EN

Figure 28: Three RTD/resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire

connection

X130

+
Sensor 1
Shunt
Transducer (44 Ω)
-
2
...
...
...

11

12
...
...
...

GUID-88E6BD08-06B8-4ED3-B937-4CC549697684 V1 EN

Figure 29: mA wiring connection

615 series 93
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.11.3 Signals
Table 55: X130 (RTD/mA) analog input signals
Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN General alarm
WARNING BOOLEAN General warning
AI_VAL1 FLOAT32 mA input, Connectors 1-2, instantaneous value
AI_VAL2 FLOAT32 mA input, Connectors 3-4, instantaneous value
AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 5-6-11c, instantaneous
value
AI_VAL4 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 7-8-11c, instantaneous
value
AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 9-10-11c, instantaneous
value
AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 13-14-12c, instantaneous
value
AI_VAL7 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 15-16-12c, instantaneous
value
AI_VAL8 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 17-18-12c, instantaneous
value

3.11.4 Settings
Table 56: RTD input settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Input mode 1=Not in use 1=Not in use Analogue input mode
2=Resistance
10=Pt100
11=Pt250
20=Ni100
21=Ni120
22=Ni250
30=Cu10
Input maximum 0...2000 1 2000 Maximum analogue input value for mA
or resistance scaling
Input minimum 0...2000 1 0 Minimum analogue input value for mA or
resistance scaling
Value unit 1=Dimensionless 1=Dimensionless Selected unit for output value format
5=Ampere
23=Degrees
celsius
30=Ohm
Value maximum -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Maximum output value for scaling and
supervision
Value minimum -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Minimum output value for scaling and
supervision
Val high high limit -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Output value high alarm limit for
supervision
Table continues on next page

94 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Value high limit -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Output value high warning limit for
supervision
Value low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Output value low warning limit for
supervision
Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Output value low alarm limit for
supervision
Value deadband 100...100000 1000 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

Table 57: mA input settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Input mode 1=Not in use 1=Not in use Analogue input mode
5=0..20mA
Input maximum 0...20 1 20 Maximum analogue input value for mA
or resistance scaling
Input minimum 0...20 1 0 Minimum analogue input value for mA or
resistance scaling
Value unit 1=Dimensionless 1=Dimensionless Selected unit for output value format
5=Ampere
23=Degrees
celsius
30=Ohm
Value maximum -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Maximum output value for scaling and
supervision
Value minimum -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Minimum output value for scaling and
supervision
Val high high limit -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Output value high alarm limit for
supervision
Value high limit -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Output value high warning limit for
supervision
Value low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Output value low warning limit for
supervision
Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Output value low alarm limit for
supervision
Value deadband 100...100000 1000 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

615 series 95
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 58: X130 (RTD/mA) monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AI_DB1 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 mA input, Connectors
.0 1-2, reported value
AI_RANGE1 Enum 0=normal mA input, Connectors
1=high 1-2, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB2 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 mA input, Connectors
.0 3-4, reported value
AI_RANGE2 Enum 0=normal mA input, Connectors
1=high 3-4, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB3 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 5-6-11c, reported value
AI_RANGE3 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 5-6-11c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB4 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 7-8-11c, reported value
AI_RANGE4 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 7-8-11c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB5 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 9-10-11c, reported value
AI_RANGE5 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 9-10-11c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB6 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 13-14-12c, reported
value
AI_RANGE6 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 13-14-12c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB7 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 15-16-12c, reported
value
Table continues on next page

96 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

AI_RANGE7 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 15-16-12c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low
AI_DB8 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors
.0 17-18-12c, reported
value
AI_RANGE8 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors
1=high 17-18-12c, range
2=low
3=high-high
4=low-low

3.12 GOOSE function blocks

GOOSE function blocks are used for connecting incoming GOOSE data to
application. They support BOOLEAN, Dbpos, Enum, FLOAT32, INT8 and INT32
data types.

Common signals
The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data, which means in
case of valid, that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality
bits (if configured) indicate good process data. Invalid status is caused either by
bad data quality bits or GOOSE communication failure. See IEC 61850
engineering guide for details.

The OUT output passes the received GOOSE value for the application. Default
value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status. The IN input is defined
in the GOOSE configuration and can always be seen in SMT sheet.

Settings
The GOOSE function blocks do not have any parameters available in LHMI or
PCM600.

3.12.1 GOOSERCV_BIN function block

3.12.1.1 Function block

GUID-44EF4D6E-7389-455C-BDE5-B127678E2CBC V1 EN

Figure 30: Function block

615 series 97
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.12.1.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_BIN function is used to connect the GOOSE binary inputs to the
application.

3.12.1.3 Signals
Table 59: GOOSERCV_BIN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 60: GOOSERCV_BIN Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

3.12.2 GOOSERCV_DP function block

3.12.2.1 Function block

GUID-63C0C3EE-1C0E-4F78-A06E-3E84F457FC98 V1 EN

Figure 31: Function block

3.12.2.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs
to the application.

3.12.2.3 Signals
Table 61: GOOSERCV_DP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Dbpos 00 Input signal

Table 62: GOOSERCV_DP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT Dbpos Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

98 615 series
Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.12.3 GOOSERCV_MV function block

3.12.3.1 Function block

GUID-A59BAF25-B9F8-46EA-9831-477AC665D0F7 V1 EN

Figure 32: Function block

3.12.3.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value

inputs to the application.

3.12.3.3 Signals
Table 63: GOOSERCV_MV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN FLOAT32 0 Input signal

Table 64: GOOSERCV_MV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT FLOAT32 Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

3.12.4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block

3.12.4.1 Function block

GUID-B4E1495B-F797-4CFF-BD19-AF023EA2D3D9 V1 EN

Figure 33: Function block

3.12.4.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_INT8 function is used to connect the GOOSE 8 bit integer

inputs to the application.

615 series 99
Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.12.4.3 Signals
Table 65: GOOSERCV_INT8 Input signals
Name Type Description
IN INT8 Input signal

Table 66: GOOSERCV_INT8 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INT8 Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

3.12.5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block

3.12.5.1 Function block

GUID-241A36E0-1BB9-4323-989F-39668A7B1DAC V1 EN

Figure 34: Function block

3.12.5.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_INTL function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary

input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the
double binary position signal.

The OP output signal indicates that the position is open. Default value (0) is used if
VALID output indicates invalid status.

The CL output signal indicates that the position is closed. Default value (0) is used
if VALID output indicates invalid status.

The OK output signal indicates that the position is neither in faulty or intermediate
state. The default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.

3.12.5.3 Signals
Table 67: GOOSERCV_INTL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Dbpos 00 Input signal

100 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 68: GOOSERCV_INTL Output signals

Name Type Description
OP BOOLEAN Position open output signal
CL BOOLEAN Position closed output signal
OK BOOLEAN Position OK output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

3.12.6 GOOSERCV_CMV function block

3.12.6.1 Function block

GUID-4C3F3A1A-F5D1-42E1-840F-6106C58CB380 V1 EN

Figure 35: Function block

3.12.6.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_CMV function is used to connect GOOSE measured value

inputs to the application. The MAG_IN (amplitude) and ANG_IN (angle) inputs
are defined in the GOOSE configuration (PCM600).

The MAG output passes the received GOOSE (amplitude) value for the
application. Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.

The ANG output passes the received GOOSE (angle) value for the application.
Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status.

3.12.6.3 Signals
Table 69: GOOSERCV_CMV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
MAG_IN FLOAT32 0 Input signal
(amplitude)
ANG_IN FLOAT32 0 Input signal (angle)

Table 70: GOOSERCV_CMV Output signals

Name Type Description
MAG FLOAT32 Output signal (amplitude)
ANG FLOAT32 Output signal (angle)
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

615 series 101

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.12.7 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block

3.12.7.1 Function block

GUID-E1AE8AD3-ED99-448A-8C11-558BCA68CDC4 V1 EN

Figure 36: Function block

3.12.7.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_ENUM function block is used to connect GOOSE enumerator

inputs to the application.

3.12.7.3 Signals
Table 71: GOOSERCV_ENUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Enum 0 Input signal

Table 72: GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT Enum Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

3.12.8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block

3.12.8.1 Function block

GUID-61FF1ECC-507D-4B6D-8CA5-713A59F58D5C V1 EN

Figure 37: Function block

3.12.8.2 Functionality

The GOOSERCV_INT32 function block is used to connect GOOSE 32 bit integer

inputs to the application.

102 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.12.8.3 Signals
Table 73: GOOSERCV_INT32 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN INT32 0 Input signal

Table 74: GOOSERCV_INT32 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INT32 Output signal
VALID BOOLEAN Output signal

3.13 Type conversion function blocks

3.13.1 QTY_GOOD function block

3.13.1.1 Function block

GUID-1999D6D9-4517-4FFE-A14D-08FDB5E8B9F6 V1 EN

Figure 38: Function block

3.13.1.2 Functionality

The QTY_GOOD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and
passes it as a Boolean signal for the application.

The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function
output, binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal). Due
to application logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined)
signal has quality which can be evaluated.

The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal. Input signals that have
no quality bits set or only test bit is set, will indicate quality good status.

3.13.1.3 Signals
Table 75: QTY_GOOD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal

615 series 103

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 76: QTY_GOOD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

3.13.2 QTY_BAD function block

3.13.2.1 Fucntion block

GUID-8C120145-91B6-4295-98FB-AE78430EB532 V1 EN

Figure 39: Function block

3.13.2.2 Functionality

The QTY_BAD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and
passes it as a Boolean signal for the application.

The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function
output, binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal). Due
to application logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined)
signal has quality which can be evaluated.

The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal. Input signals that have
any other than test bit set, will indicate quality bad status.

3.13.2.3 Signals
Table 77: QTY_BAD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal

Table 78: QTY_BAD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

104 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.13.3 QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block

3.13.3.1 Functionality

The QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block evaluates the peer IED communication

status from the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal to
the application.

The IN input can be connected to any GOOSE application logic output signal, for
example, GOOSERCV_BIN.

The OUT output indicates the communication status of the GOOSE function block.
When the output is in the true (1) state, the GOOSE communication is active. The
value false (0) indicates communication timeout.

3.13.3.2 Signals
Table 79: QTY_GOOSE_COMM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal

Table 80: QTY_GOOSE_COMM Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

3.13.4 T_HEALTH function block

3.13.4.1 Function block

GUID-B5FCAE66-8026-4D5F-AC38-028E5A8171BB V1 EN

Figure 40: Function block

3.13.4.2 Functionality

The T_HEALTH function evaluates enumerated data of “Health” data attribute.

This function block can only be used with GOOSE.

The IN input can be connected to GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is

receiving the LD0.LLN0.Health.stVal data attribute sent by another IED.

615 series 105

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

The outputs OK, WARNING and ALARM are extracted from the enumerated input
value. Only one of the outputs can be active at a time. In case the
GOOSERCV_ENUM function block doesn't receive the value from the sending
IED, the default value (0) is used and the ALARM is activated in the T_HEALTH
function block.

3.13.4.3 Signals
Table 81: T_HEALTH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN Any 0 Input signal

Table 82: T_HEALTH Output signals

Name Type Description
OK BOOLEAN Output signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Output signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Output signal

3.13.5 T_F32_INT8 function block

3.13.5.1 Function block

GUID-F0F44FBF-FB56-4BC2-B421-F1A7924E6B8C V1 EN

Figure 41: Function block

3.13.5.2 Functionality

T_F32_INT8 is a type conversion function.

The function converts 32-bit floating type values to 8-bit integer type. The
rounding operation is included. Output value saturates if the input value is below
the minimum or above the maximum value.

3.13.5.3 Signals
Table 83: T_F32_INT8 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F32 FLOAT32 0.0 Input signal

106 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 84: T_F32_INT8 Output signal

Name Type Description
INT8 INT8 Output signal

3.13.5.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.13.6 T_DIR function block

3.13.6.1 Functionality

The T_DIR function evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR data attribute
of the directional functions. T_DIR can only be used with GOOSE. The DIR input
can be connected to the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving
the LD0.<function>.Str.dirGeneral or LD0.<function>.Dir.dirGeneral data attribute
sent by another IED.

The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value.

3.13.6.2 Signals
Table 85: T_DIR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
DIR Enum 0 Input signal

Table 86: T_DIR Output signals

Name Type Default Description
FWD BOOLEAN 0 Direction forward
REV BOOLEAN 0 Direction backward

615 series 107

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14 Configurable logic blocks

3.14.1 Standard configurable logic blocks

3.14.1.1 OR function block

Function block

GUID-9D001113-8912-440D-B206-051DED17A23C V1 EN

Figure 42: Function blocks

Functionality
OR and OR6 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.

The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE. The default
value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required
number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.

OR has two inputs and OR6 has six inputs.

Signals
Table 87: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

Table 88: OR6 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

108 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 89: OR Output signal

Name Type Description
O BOOLEAN Output signal

Table 90: OR6 Output signal

Name Type Description
O BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.2 AND function block

Function block

GUID-7592F296-60B5-4414-8E17-2F641316CA43 V1 EN

Figure 43: Function blocks

Functionality
AND and AND6 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean
variables.

The default value in all inputs is logical true, which makes it possible to use only
the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.

AND has two inputs and AND6 has six inputs.

Signals
Table 91: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2

615 series 109

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 92: AND6 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
B3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
B4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4
B5 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 5
B6 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 6

Table 93: AND Output signal

Name Type Description
O BOOLEAN Output signal

Table 94: AND6 Output signal

Name Type Description
O BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.3 XOR function block

Function block

GUID-9C247C8A-03A5-4F08-8329-F08BE7125B9A V1 EN

Figure 44: Function block

Functionality
The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
Boolean variables.

The output signal is TRUE if the input signals are different and FALSE if they are
equal.

110 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Signals
Table 95: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

Table 96: XOR Output signal

Name Type Description
O BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.4 NOT function block

Function block

GUID-0D0FC187-4224-433C-9664-908168EE3626 V1 EN

Figure 45: Function block

Functionality
NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.

NOT inverts the input signal.

Signals
Table 97: NOT Input signal
Name Type Default Description
I BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 98: NOT Output signal

Name Type Description
O BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

615 series 111

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.1.5 MAX3 function block

Function block

GUID-5454FE1C-2947-4337-AD58-39D266E91993 V1 EN

Figure 46: Function block

Functionality
The maximum function MAX3 selects the maximum value from three analog values.

The disconnected inputs have the value 0.

Signals
Table 99: MAX3 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1
IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2
IN3 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 3

Table 100: MAX3 Output signal

Name Type Description
OUT FLOAT32 Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.6 MIN3 function block

Function block

GUID-40218B77-8A30-445A-977E-46CB8783490D V1 EN

Figure 47: Function block

Functionality
The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values.

112 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

If the minimum value is to be selected from two signals, connecting one of the
inputs to two in MIN3 makes all the inputs to be connected.

Signals
Table 101: MIN3 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1
IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2
IN3 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 3

Table 102: MIN3 Output signal

Name Type Description
OUT FLOAT32 Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.7 R_TRIG function block

Function block

GUID-3D0BBDC3-4091-4D8B-A35C-95F6289E6FD8 V1 EN

Figure 48: Function block

Functionality
R_Trig is used as a rising edge detector.

R_Trig detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the
rising edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE. At the next
execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input.

Signals
Table 103: R_TRIG Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

615 series 113

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 104: R_TRIG Output signal

Name Type Description
Q BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.8 F_TRIG function block

Function block

GUID-B47152D2-3855-4306-8F2E-73D8FDEC4C1D V1 EN

Figure 49: Function block

Functionality
F_Trig is used as a falling edge detector.

The function detects the transition from TRUE to FALSE at the CLK input. When
the falling edge is detected, the element assigns the Q output to TRUE. At the next
execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input.

Signals
Table 105: F_TRIG Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 106: F_TRIG Output signal

Name Type Description
Q BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

114 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.1.9 T_POS_XX function blocks

Function block

GUID-4548B304-1CCD-454F-B819-7BC9F404131F V1 EN

Figure 50: Function blocks

Functionality
The circuit breaker position information can be communicated with the IEC 61850
GOOSE messages. The position information is a double binary data type which is
fed to the POS input.

T_POS_CL and T_POS_OP are used for extracting the circuit breaker status
information. Respectively, T_POS_OK is used to validate the intermediate or
faulty breaker position.

Table 107: Cross reference between circuit breaker position and the output of the function block
Circuit breaker position Output of the function block
T_POS_CL T_POS_OP T_POS_OK
Intermediate '00' FALSE FALSE FALSE
Close '01' TRUE FALSE TRUE
Open '10' FALSE TRUE TRUE
Faulty '11' TRUE TRUE FALSE

Signals
Table 108: T_POS_CL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POS Double binary 0 Input signal

Table 109: T_POS_OP Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POS Double binary 0 Input signal

Table 110: T_POS_OK Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POS Double binary 0 Input signal

615 series 115

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 111: T_POS_CL Output signal

Name Type Description
CLOSE BOOLEAN Output signal

Table 112: T_POS_OP Output signal

Name Type Description
OPEN BOOLEAN Output signal

Table 113: T_POS_OK Output signal

Name Type Description
OK BOOLEAN Output signal

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

3.14.1.10 SWITCHR function block

Function block

GUID-63F5ED57-E6C4-40A2-821A-4814E1554663 V1 EN

Figure 51: Function block

Functionality
SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is operated by the CTL_SW input,
selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
CTL_SW OUT
FALSE IN2
TRUE IN1

Signals
Table 114: SWITCHR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch
IN1 REAL 0.0 Real input 1
IN2 REAL 0.0 Real input 2

116 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 115: SWITCHR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT REAL Real switch output

3.14.1.11 SR function block

Function block

GUID-0B62CAED-F8A4-4738-B546-677DA362FE24 V1 EN

Figure 52: Function block

Functionality
The SR flip-flop output Q can be set or reset from the S or R inputs. S input has a
higher priority over the R input. Output NOTQ is the negation of output Q.

The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the

nonvolatile memory.

Table 116: Truth table for SR flip-flop

S R Q
0 0 01)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1

1) Keep state/no change

Signals
Table 117: SR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
S BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when set
R BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when
set

Table 118: SR Output signals

Name Type Description
Q BOOLEAN Q status
NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status

615 series 117

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.2 Minimum pulse timer

3.14.2.1 Minimum pulse timer TPGAPC

Function block

GUID-809F4B4A-E684-43AC-9C34-574A93FE0EBC V1 EN

Figure 53: Function block

Functionality
The Minimum pulse timer TPGAPC function contains two independent timers. The
function has a settable pulse length (in milliseconds). The timers are used for
setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is
activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting.

GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN

Figure 54: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Pulse time setting

Signals
Table 119: TPGAPC Output signals
Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status

Settings
Table 120: TPGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse time 0...60000 ms 1 150 Minimum pulse time

118 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.2.2 Minimum pulse timer TPSGAPC

Function block

GUID-F9AACAF7-2183-4315-BE6F-CD53618009C0 V1 EN

Figure 55: Function block

Functionality
The Minimum second pulse timer function TPSGAPC contains two independent
timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used
for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the
input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting.

GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN

Figure 56: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Pulse time setting

Signals
Table 121: TPSGAPC Output signals
Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status

Settings
Table 122: TPSGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse time 0...300 s 1 0 Minimum pulse time

615 series 119

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.2.3 Minimum pulse timer TPMGAPC

Function block

GUID-AB26B298-F7FA-428F-B498-6605DB5B0661 V1 EN

Figure 57: Function block

Functionality
The Minimum minute pulse timer function TPMGAPC contains two independent
timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in minutes). The timers are used
for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the
input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting.

GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN

Figure 58: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is
longer than Pulse time setting

Signals
Table 123: TPMGAPC Output signals
Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status

Settings
Table 124: TPMGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse time 0...300 min 1 0 Minimum pulse time

120 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.3 Pulse timer function block PTGAPC

3.14.3.1 Function block

GUID-2AA275E8-31D4-4CFE-8BDA-A377213BBA89 V1 EN

Figure 59: Function block

3.14.3.2 Functionality

The pulse timer function block PTGAPC contains eight independent timers. The
function has a settable pulse length. Once the input is activated, the output is set for
a specific duration using the Pulse delay time setting.

t0 t0+dt t1 t1+dt t2 t2+dt

dt = Pulse delay time

GUID-08F451EE-5110-41D9-95ED-084D7296FA22 V1 EN

Figure 60: Timer operation

3.14.3.3 Signals
Table 125: PTGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 status

615 series 121

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Table 126: PTGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
Q1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
Q2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status
Q3 BOOLEAN Output 3 status
Q4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status
Q5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status
Q6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status
Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status
Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status

3.14.3.4 Settings
Table 127: PTGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Pulse delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 2 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 3 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 4 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 5 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 6 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 7 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time
Pulse delay time 8 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time

3.14.3.5 Technical data

Table 128: PTGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

122 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.4 Time-delay-off function block TOFGAPC

3.14.4.1 Function block

GUID-6BFF6180-042F-4526-BB80-D53B2458F376 V1 EN

Figure 61: Function block

3.14.4.2 Functionality

The time-delay-off function block TOFGAPC can be used, for example, for a drop-
off-delayed output related to the input signal. TOFGAPC contains eight
independent timers. There is a settable delay in the timer. Once the input is
activated, the output is set immediately. When the input is cleared, the output stays
on until the time set with the Off delay time setting has elapsed.

t0 t1 t1+dt t2 t3 t4 t5 t5+dt

dt = Off delay time

GUID-D45492E6-5FBC-420C-B1BF-B3A1F65ADF96 V1 EN

Figure 62: Timer operation

3.14.4.3 Signals
Table 129: TOFGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status
Table continues on next page

615 series 123

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Name Type Default Description

IN6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 status

Table 130: TOFGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
Q1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
Q2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status
Q3 BOOLEAN Output 3 status
Q4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status
Q5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status
Q6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status
Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status
Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status

3.14.4.4 Settings
Table 131: TOFGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Off delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 2 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 3 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 4 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 5 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 6 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 7 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time
Off delay time 8 0...3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time

3.14.4.5 Technical data

Table 132: TOFGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

124 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.5 Time-delay-on function block TONGAPC

3.14.5.1 Function block

GUID-B694FC27-E6AB-40FF-B1C7-A7EB608D6866 V1 EN

Figure 63: Function block

3.14.5.2 Functionality

The time-delay-on function block TONGAPC can be used, for example, for time-
delaying the output related to the input signal. TONGAPC contains eight
independent timers. The timer has a settable time delay. Once the input is activated,
the output is set after the time set by the On delay time setting has elapsed.

t0 t0+dt t1 t2 t3 t4 t4+dt t5

dt = On delay time
GUID-B74EE764-8B2E-4FBE-8CE7-779F6B739A11 V1 EN

Figure 64: Timer operation

3.14.5.3 Signals
Table 133: TONGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5
Table continues on next page

615 series 125

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Name Type Default Description

IN6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8

Table 134: TONGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
Q1 BOOLEAN Output 1
Q2 BOOLEAN Output 2
Q3 BOOLEAN Output 3
Q4 BOOLEAN Output 4
Q5 BOOLEAN Output 5
Q6 BOOLEAN Output 6
Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7
Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8

3.14.5.4 Settings
Table 135: TONGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
On delay time 1 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 2 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 3 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 4 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 5 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 6 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 7 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time
On delay time 8 0...3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time

3.14.5.5 Technical data

Table 136: TONGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

126 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.6 Set-reset function block SRGAPC

3.14.6.1 Function block

GUID-93136D07-FDC4-4356-95B5-54D3B2FC9B1C V1 EN

Figure 65: Function block

3.14.6.2 Functionality

The SRGAPC function block is a simple SR flip-flop with a memory that can be
set or that can reset an output from the S# or R# inputs, respectively. SRGAPC
contains eight independent set-reset flip-flop latches where the SET input has the
higher priority over the RESET input. The status of each Q# output is retained in
the nonvolatile memory. The individual reset for each Q# output is available on the
LHMI or through tool via communication.

Table 137: Truth table for SRGAPC

S# R# Q#
0 0 01)
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 1

1) Keep state/no change

615 series 127

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.6.3 Signals
Table 138: SRGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
S1 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q1 output when set
R1 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q1 output when set
S2 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q2 output when set
R2 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q2 output when set
S3 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q3 output when set
R3 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q3 output when set
S4 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q4 output when set
R4 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q4 output when set
S5 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q5 output when set
R5 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q5 output when set
S6 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q6 output when set
R6 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q6 output when set
S7 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q7 output when set
R7 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q7 output when set
S8 BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q8 output when set
R8 BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q8 output when set

Table 139: SRGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
Q1 BOOLEAN Q1 status
Q2 BOOLEAN Q2 status
Q3 BOOLEAN Q3 status
Q4 BOOLEAN Q4 status
Q5 BOOLEAN Q5 status
Q6 BOOLEAN Q6 status
Q7 BOOLEAN Q7 status
Q8 BOOLEAN Q8 status

128 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.6.4 Settings
Table 140: SRGAPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset Q1 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q1 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q2 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q2 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q3 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q3 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q4 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q4 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q5 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q5 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q6 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q6 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q7 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q7 output when set
1=Reset
Reset Q8 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q8 output when set
1=Reset

3.14.7 Move function block MVGAPC

3.14.7.1 Function block

GUID-C79D9450-8CB2-49AF-B825-B702EA2CD9F5 V1 EN

Figure 66: Function block

3.14.7.2 Functionality

The move function block MVGAPC is used for user logic bits. Each input state is
directly copied to the output state. This allows the creating of events from
advanced logic combinations.

615 series 129

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.7.3 Signals
Table 141: MVGAPC Output signals
Name Type Description
Q1 BOOLEAN Q1 status
Q2 BOOLEAN Q2 status
Q3 BOOLEAN Q3 status
Q4 BOOLEAN Q4 status
Q5 BOOLEAN Q5 status
Q6 BOOLEAN Q6 status
Q7 BOOLEAN Q7 status
Q8 BOOLEAN Q8 status

3.14.8 Local/remote control function block CONTROL

3.14.8.1 Function block

GUID-FA386432-3AEF-468D-B25E-D1C5BDA838E3 V2 EN

Figure 67: Function block

3.14.8.2 Functionality

Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front
panel. The control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR
control setting to "Binary input".

The actual Local/Remote control state is evaluated by the priority scheme on the
function block inputs. If more than one input is active, the input with the highest
priority is selected.

The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs. Only one output is
active at a time.

130 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Table 142: Truth table for CONTROL

Input Output
CTRL_OFF CTRL_LOC CTRL_STA 1) CTRL_REM
TRUE any any any OFF = TRUE
FALSE TRUE any any LOCAL = TRUE
FALSE FALSE TRUE any STATION =
TRUE
FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE REMOTE = TRUE
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE OFF = TRUE

1) If station authority is not in use, the CTRL_STA input is interpreted as CTRL_REM.

The station authority check based on the IEC 61850 command originator category
in control command can be enabled by setting the value of the Station authority
setting to "Station, Remote" (The command originator validation is performed only
if the LR control setting is set to "Binary input"). The station authority check is not
in use by default.

3.14.8.3 Signals
Table 143: CONTROL input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN 0 Control input OFF
CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN 0 Control input Local
CTRL_STA BOOLEAN 0 Control input Station
CTRL_REM BOOLEAN 0 Control input Remote

Table 144: CONTROL output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control output OFF
LOCAL BOOLEAN Control output Local
STATION BOOLEAN Control output Station
REMOTE BOOLEAN Control output Remote

615 series 131

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.8.4 Settings
Table 145: CONTROL settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LR control 1 = "LR key" 1 = "LR key" LR control
2 = "Binary through LR
input" key or binary
input
Station 1 = "Not used" 1 = "Not used" Control
authority 2 = "Station command
Remote" originator
category
usage

132 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.8.5 Monitored data

Table 146: CONTROL Monitored data
Parameter Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Command ENUM 1 = "Select open" Latest command
response 2 = "Select close" response
3 = "Operate
open"
4 = "Operate
close"
5 = "Direct open"
6 = "Direct close"
7 = "Cancel"
8 = "Position
reached"
9 = "Position
timeout"
10 = "Object
status only"
11 = "Object
direct"
12 = "Object
select"
13 = "RL local
allowed"
14 = "RL remote
allowed"
15 = "RL off"
16 = "Function off"
17 = "Function
blocked"
18 = "Command
progress"
19 = "Select
timeout"
20 = "Missing
authority"
21 = "Close not
enabled"
22 = "Open not
enabled"
23 = "Internal
fault"
24 = "Already
close"
25 = "Wrong
client"
26 = "RL station
allowed"
27 = "RL change"
LR state ENUM 1 = "OFF" LR state
2 = "Local" monitoring for
3 = "Remote" PCM
4 = "Station"

615 series 133

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.9 Generic control points function block SPCGGIO

3.14.9.1 Function block

GUID-B1380341-22B1-4C7E-A57B-39DBBB9D7B92 V1 EN

Figure 68: Function block

3.14.9.2 Functionality

The generic control points function SPCGGIO contains 16 independent control

points. SPCGGIO offers the capability to activate its outputs through a local or
remote control. The local control request can be issued through the buttons in the
single-line diagram or via inputs and the remote control request through
communication. The rising edge of the input signal is interpreted as a control
request, and the output operation is triggered. When remote control requests are
used the control points behaves as persistent.

The Loc Rem restriction setting is used for enabling or disabling the restriction for
SPCGGIO to follow the R/L button state. If Loc Rem restriction is "True", as it is
by default, the local or remote control operations are accepted according to the R/L
button state.

Each of the 16 generic control point outputs has the Operation mode, Pulse length
and Description setting. If Operation mode is "Toggle", the output state is toggled
for every control request received. If Operation mode is "Pulsed", the output pulse
of a preset duration (the Pulse length setting) is generated for every control request
received. The Description setting can be used for storing information on the actual
use of the control point in application, for instance.

The BLOCK input can be used for blocking the functionality of the outputs. The
operation of the BLOCK input depends on the Operation mode setting. If Operation
mode is "Toggle", the output state freezes and cannot be changed while the BLOCK
input is active. If Operation mode is "Pulsed", the activation of the BLOCK input
resets the outputs to the "False" state and further control requests are ignored while
the BLOCK input is active.

134 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

3.14.9.3 Signals
Table 147: SPCGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
IN1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 16

Table 148: SPCGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
O1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status
O2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status
O3 BOOLEAN Output 3 status
O4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status
O5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status
O6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status
O7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status
O8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status
O9 BOOLEAN Output 9 status
O10 BOOLEAN Output 10 status
O11 BOOLEAN Output 11 status
O12 BOOLEAN Output 12 status
O13 BOOLEAN Output 13 status
O14 BOOLEAN Output 14 status
O15 BOOLEAN Output 15 status
O16 BOOLEAN Output 16 status

615 series 135

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

3.14.9.4 Settings
Table 149: SPCGGIO Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction
1=True
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 1
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 2
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 3
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 4
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 5
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 6
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 7
Table continues on next page

136 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 3
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 8
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 9
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 10
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 11
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 12
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 13
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 14
Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 15
Table continues on next page

615 series 137

Technical Manual
Section 3 1YHT530004D05 D
Basic functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point
1=Toggle
-1=Off
Pulse length 10...3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode
Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description
Output 16

3.15 Factory settings restoration

In case of configuration data loss or any other file system error that prevents the
IED from working properly, the whole file system can be restored to the original
factory state. All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are
restored. For further information on restoring factory settings, see the operation
manual.

138 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Section 4 Protection functions

4.1 Three-phase current protection

4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection

PHxPTOC

4.1.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1
overcurrent protection - Low stage
Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>> 51P-2
overcurrent protection - High stage
Three-phase non-directional PHIPTOC 3I>>> 50P/51P
overcurrent protection - Instantaneous
stage

4.1.1.2 Function block

A070553 V1 EN

Figure 69: Function block

4.1.1.3 Functionality

The three-phase overcurrent protection PHxPTOC is used as one-phase, two-phase

or three-phase non-directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection.

The function starts when the current exceeds the set limit. The operate time
characteristics for low stage PHLPTOC and high stage PHHPTOC can be selected
to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).The
instantaneous stage PHIPTOC always operates with the DT characteristic.

615 series 139

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection can be

described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained
in the next sections.

A070552 V1 EN

Figure 70: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents.

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding
of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start
value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

140 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070554 V1 EN

Figure 71: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic
detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If
the phase information matches the Num of start phases setting, the phase selection
logic activates the timer module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"

615 series 141

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during
the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.1.1.5 Measurement modes

The function operates on four alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT",

"Peak-to-Peak" and "P-to-P + backup". The measurement mode is selected with the
setting Measurement mode.

142 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 150: Measurement modes supported by PHxPTOC stages

Measurement Supported measurement modes
mode PHLPTOC PHHPTOC PHIPTOC
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x
P-to-P + backup x

For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the

Measurement modes section in this manual.

4.1.1.6 Timer characteristics

PHxPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings.
When the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Operate delay
time and Reset delay time settings.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition
to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are
applicable. The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating
curve type values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is
identical in both cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:

Table 151: Timer characteristics supported by different stages

Operating curve type Supported by
PHLPTOC PHHPTOC
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
Table continues on next page

615 series 143

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Operating curve type Supported by

PHLPTOC PHHPTOC
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x

PHIPTOC supports only definite time characteristic.

For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block

features section in this manual.

Table 152: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
PHLPTOC PHHPTOC Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all
operate time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all
operate time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to PHIPTOC or

when the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by
the Reset delay time setting.

4.1.1.7 Application

PHxPTOC is used in several applications in the power system. The applications

include but are not limited to:

144 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

• Selective overcurrent and short-circuit protection of feeders in distribution and

subtransmission systems
• Backup overcurrent and short-circuit protection of power transformers and
generators
• Overcurrent and short-circuit protection of various devices connected to the
power system, for example shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and motors
• General backup protection

PHxPTOC is used for single-phase, two-phase and three-phase non-directional

overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Typically, overcurrent protection is used
for clearing two and three-phase short circuits. Therefore, the user can choose how
many phases, at minimum, must have currents above the start level for the function
to operate. When the number of start-phase settings is set to "1 out of 3", the
operation of PHxPTOC is enabled with the presence of high current in one-phase.

When the setting is "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3", single-phase faults
are not detected. The setting "3 out of 3" requires the fault to be
present in all three phases.

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. PHxPTOC consists of three protection stages.
• Low PHLPTOC
• High PHHPTOC
• Instantaneous PHIPTOC

PHLPTOC is used for overcurrent protection. The function contains several types
of time-delay characteristics. PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC are used for fast clearance
of very high overcurrent situations.

Transformer overcurrent protection

The purpose of transformer overcurrent protection is to operate as main protection,
when differential protection is not used. It can also be used as coarse back-up
protection for differential protection in faults inside the zone of protection, that is,
faults occurring in incoming or outgoing feeders, in the region of transformer
terminals and tank cover. This means that the magnitude range of the fault current
can be very wide. The range varies from 6xIn to several hundred times In,
depending on the impedance of the transformer and the source impedance of the
feeding network. From this point of view, it is clear that the operation must be both
very fast and selective, which is usually achieved by using coarse current settings.

The purpose is also to protect the transformer from short circuits occurring outside
the protection zone, that is through-faults. Transformer overcurrent protection also
provides protection for the LV-side busbars. In this case the magnitude of the fault
current is typically lower than 12xIn depending on the fault location and
transformer impedance. Consequently, the protection must operate as fast as

615 series 145

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

possible taking into account the selectivity requirements, switching-in currents, and
the thermal and mechanical withstand of the transformer and outgoing feeders.

Traditionally, overcurrent protection of the transformer has been arranged as

shown in Figure 72. The low-set stage PHLPTOC operates time-selectively both in
transformer and LV-side busbar faults. The high-set stage PHHPTOC operates
instantaneously making use of current selectivity only in transformer HV-side
faults. If there is a possibility, that the fault current can also be fed from the LV-
side up to the HV-side, the transformer must also be equipped with LV-side
overcurrent protection. Inrush current detectors are used in start-up situations to
multiply the current start value setting in each particular IED where the inrush
current can occur. The overcurrent and contact based circuit breaker failure
protection CCBRBRF is used to confirm the protection scheme in case of circuit
breaker malfunction.

A070978 V1 EN

Figure 72: Example of traditional time selective transformer overcurrent

protection

The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above
scheme become quite long, this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in
the transformer LV-terminal faults. In order to improve the performance of the
above scheme, a multiple-stage overcurrent protection with reverse blocking is
proposed. Figure 73 shows this arrangement.

Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking

principle
By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels
between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing
feeders, it is possible to speed up the operation of overcurrent protection in the

146 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

busbar and transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity. Also, the
security degree of busbar protection is increased, because there is now a dedicated,
selective and fast busbar protection functionality which is based on the blockable
overcurrent protection principle. The additional time selective stages on the
transformer HV and LV-sides provide increased security degree of backup
protection for the transformer, busbar and also for the outgoing feeders.

Depending on the overcurrent stage in question, the selectivity of the scheme in

Figure 73 is based on the operating current, operating time or blockings between
successive overcurrent stages. With blocking channels, the operating time of the
protection can be drastically shortened if compared to the simple time selective
protection. In addition to the busbar protection, this blocking principle is applicable
for the protection of transformer LV terminals and short lines. The functionality
and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as
seen in the table.

Table 153: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection.
DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time
O/C-stage Operating char. Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity
HV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
HV/3I>> DT blockable/time high/low high
selective
HV/3I>>> DT current selective very high low
LV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
LV/3I>> DT time selective low high
LV/3I>>> DT blockable high high

In case the bus-tie breaker is open, the operating time of the blockable overcurrent
protection is approximately 100 ms (relaying time). When the bus-tie breaker is
closed, that is, the fault current flows to the faulted section of the busbar from two
directions, the operation time becomes as follows: first the bus-tie relay unit trips
the tie breaker in the above 100 ms, which reduces the fault current to a half. After
this the incoming feeder relay unit of the faulted bus section trips the breaker in
approximately 250 ms (relaying time), which becomes the total fault clearing time
in this case.

615 series 147

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

A070980 V2 EN

Figure 73: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub-

transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not shown).
Blocking output = digital output signal from the start of a protection
stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of a
protection stage

The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading
margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due
to the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation,
good operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units. So, for
example, a grading margin of 150 ms in the DT mode of operation can be used,
provided that the circuit breaker interrupting time is shorter than 60 ms.

The sensitivity and speed of the current-selective stages become as good as

possible due to the fact that the transient overreach is practically zero. Also, the
effects of switching inrush currents on the setting values can be reduced by using
the IED logic, which recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and
blocks the operation or multiplies the current start value setting of the selected
overcurrent stage with a predefined multiplier setting.

Finally, a dependable trip of the overcurrent protection is secured by both a proper

selection of the settings and an adequate ability of the measuring transformers to
reproduce the fault current. This is important in order to maintain selectivity and
also for the protection to operate without additional time delays. For additional
information about available measuring modes and current transformer
requirements, see the Measurement modes chapter in this manual.

Radial outgoing feeder overcurrent protection

The basic requirements for feeder overcurrent protection are adequate sensitivity
and operation speed taking into account the minimum and maximum fault current

148 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

levels along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the
thermal and mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.

In many cases the above requirements can be best fulfilled by using multiple-stage
overcurrent units. Figure 74 shows an example of this. A brief coordination study
has been carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders.

The protection scheme is implemented with three-stage numerical overcurrent

protection, where the low-set stage PHLPTOC operates in IDMT-mode and the
two higher stages PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC in DT-mode. Also the thermal
withstand of the line types along the feeder and maximum expected inrush currents
of the feeders are shown. Faults occurring near the station where the fault current
levels are the highest are cleared rapidly by the instantaneous stage in order to
minimize the effects of severe short circuit faults. The influence of the inrush
current is taken into consideration by connecting the inrush current detector to the
start value multiplying input of the instantaneous stage. By this way the start value
is multiplied with a predefined setting during the inrush situation and nuisance
tripping can be avoided.

615 series 149

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

A070982 V1 EN

Figure 74: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection

The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective
operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the
overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a
coordination plan. In Figure 75, the coordination plan shows an example of
operation characteristics in the LV-side incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder.

150 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070984 V2 EN

Figure 75: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection

4.1.1.8 Signals
Table 154: PHLPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 155: PHHPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

615 series 151

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 156: PHIPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 157: PHLPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

Table 158: PHHPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

Table 159: PHIPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.1.1.9 Settings
Table 160: PHLPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Table continues on next page

152 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 161: PHLPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve

615 series 153

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 162: PHHPTOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10...40.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 163: PHHPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve

Table 164: PHIPTOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 1.00...40.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Operate delay time 20...200000 ms 10 20 Operate delay time

154 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 165: PHIPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time

4.1.1.10 Monitored data

Table 166: PHLPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PHLPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 167: PHHPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PHHPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 168: PHIPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PHIPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

615 series 155

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.1.11 Technical data

Table 169: PHxPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

PHLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

PHHPTOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 x In

and (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 x In)
PHIPTOC ±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 x In)

Start time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

PHIPTOC:
IFault = 2 x set Start 16 ms 19 ms 23 ms
value
IFault = 10 x set Start 11 ms 12 ms 14 ms
value
PHHPTOC and
PHLPTOC:
IFault = 2 x set Start 22 ms 24 ms 25 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
P-to-P+backup: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 x In, fn = 50 Hz, fault
current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.1.1.12 Technical revision history

Table 170: PHIPTOC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Operate delay time setting.
C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms
for the Operate delay time setting.
Minimum value changed to 1.00 x In for the Start
value setting.

156 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 171: PHHPTOC Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
C Measurement mode "P-to-P + backup" replaced
with "Peak-to-Peak"
D Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

Table 172: PHLPTOC Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Operate delay time setting
C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

4.1.2 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection

PH3xPTOC

4.1.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase non-directional PH3LPTOC 3I> 51P-1
overcurrent protection - Low stage
Three-phase non-directional PH3HPTOC 3I>> 51P-2
overcurrent protection - High stage
Three-phase non-directional PH3IPTOC 3I>>> 50P/51P
overcurrent protection - Instantaneous
stage

4.1.2.2 Function block

GUID-684F722A-B4AC-4326-AE35-B5B3A8D3ACC1-CN V1 EN

Figure 76: Function block

4.1.2.3 Functionality

The three-phase overcurrent protection PH3xPTOC is used as one-phase, two-

phase or three-phase non-directional overcurrent and short circuit protection for
feeders.

615 series 157

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The function starts when the current exceeds the set limit. Each phase has its own
timer. The operating time characteristics for low-stage PH3LPTOC and high-stage
PH3HPTOC can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT). The instantaneous stage PH3IPTOC always operates with
the DT characteristic.

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operating time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The three-phase overcurrent protection PH3xPTOC is used as single-phase and three-

phase non-directional overcurrent and short circuit protection. The phase operation
mode is selected with the Operation curve type setting. The operation is further
specified with the Num of start phases setting, which sets the number of phases in
which the current must exceed the set current start value before the corresponding
start and operating signals can be activated.

The operation of the three-phase overcurrent protection function can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

158 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-07A8AE81-64A6-496E-AE20-2894B5474046-CN V1 EN

Figure 77: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding
of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start
value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

615 series 159

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

A070554 V1 EN

Figure 78: Start value behavior with the ENA_MULT input activated

Phase selection logic

The phase selection logic detects the faulty phase or phases and controls the timers
according to the set value of the Num of start phases setting.

160 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-BCAA40B6-AFC8-439D-BFC6-754280F0000E-CN V1 EN

Figure 79: Logic diagram for phase selection module

When the Number of start phases setting is set to "1 out of 3" and the fault is in one
or several phases, the phase selection logic sends an enabling signal to the faulty
phase timers. In case the fault disappears, the related timer-enabling signal is
removed.

When the setting is "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3", the single-phase faults are not
detected. The setting "3 out of 3" requires the fault to be present in all three phases.

Timer A, Timer B, Timer C

The function design contains three independent phase-segregated timers that are
controlled by common settings. This design allows true three-phase overcurrent
protection which is useful in some applications.

Common START and OPERATE outputs are created by ORing the phase-specific
start and operating outputs.

Each phase has its own phase-specific start and operating outputs: ST_A, ST_B,
ST_C, OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C.

615 series 161

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operating time characteristics
are defined with the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve
parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

The shortest IDMT operation time is adjustable. It can be set up

with the global parameter in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/
IDMT Sat point. More information can be found in the General
function block features section.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during
the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired
operation time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are
used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. More
information can be found in the General function block features
section in this manual.

162 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode", which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE,
OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C outputs are not activated.

4.1.2.5 Timer characteristics

PH3xPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The timer characteristics

can be selected with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings.
When the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Operate delay
time and Reset delay time settings.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition,
a programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
The DT characteristic can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values
"ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is identical in both cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:

Table 173: IDMT curves supported by different stages

Operating curve type Supported by
PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
Table continues on next page

615 series 163

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Operating curve type Supported by

PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(17) Programmable x x

PH3IPTOC supports only definite time characteristic.

A detailed description of the timers can be found in the General

function block features section in this manual.

Table 174: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all
operating time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all
operating time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to PH3IPTOC or

when the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by
the Reset delay time setting.

4.1.2.6 Application

PH3xPTOC is used in several applications in the power system. The applications

include different protections, for example.

164 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

• Selective overcurrent and short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and

subtransmission systems
• Backup overcurrent and short circuit protection of power transformers and
generators
• Overcurrent and short circuit protection of various devices connected to the
power system, for example shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and motors
• General backup protection

PH3xPTOC is used for single-phase, two-phase and three-phase non-directional

overcurrent and short circuit protection. Typically, overcurrent protection is used
for clearing two-phase and three-phase short circuits. Therefore, it can be chosen
how many phases, at minimum, must have currents above the start level for the
function to operate.

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. PH3xPTOC consists of three protection stages:
• Low PH3LPTOC
• High PH3HPTOC
• Instantaneous PH3IPTOC.

PH3LPTOC is used for overcurrent protection. The function contains several types
of time delay characteristics. PH3HPTOC and PH3IPTOC are used for the fast
clearing of very high overcurrent situations.

Transformer overcurrent protection

The purpose of the transformer overcurrent protection is to operate as the main
protection when differential protection is not used. It can also be used as a coarse
backup protection for differential protection in the faults inside the zone of
protection, that is, faults occurring in incoming or outgoing feeders, in the region of
transformer terminals and in the tank cover. This means that the magnitude range
of the fault current can be very wide. The range varies from 6xIn to several
hundred times In, depending on the impedance of the transformer and the source
impedance of the feeding network. From this point of view, it is clear that the
operation must be both very fast and selective, which is usually achieved by using
coarse current settings.

The purpose is also to protect the transformer from short circuits occurring outside
the protection zone, that is, from through-faults. Transformer overcurrent
protection also provides protection for the LV-side busbars. In this case, the
magnitude of the fault current is typically lower than 12xIn, depending on the fault
location and transformer impedance. Consequently, the protection must operate as
fast as possible, taking into account the selectivity requirements, switching-in
currents and the thermal and mechanical withstand of the transformer and outgoing
feeders.

Traditionally, overcurrent protection of the transformer has been arranged as

shown in Figure 72. The low-set stage PH3LPTOC operates time-selectively both

615 series 165

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

in transformer and LV-side busbar faults. The high-set stage PH3HPTOC operates
instantaneously, making use of current selectivity only in the transformer HV-side
faults. If there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV-side
up to the HV-side, the transformer must also be equipped with an LV-side
overcurrent protection. Inrush current detectors are used in startup situations to
multiply the current start value setting in each particular IED where the inrush
current can occur. The overcurrent- and contact-based circuit breaker failure
protection CCBRBRF is used to confirm the protection scheme in case of circuit
breaker malfunction.

PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC

MF PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC MF

INRPHAR INRPHAR

PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC

PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC

CCBRBRF CCBRBRF

MF INRPHAR INRPHAR MF

MEASUREMENT OUTGOING OUTGOING BUS-TIE BUS_TIE OUTGOING OUTGOING MEASUREMENT

INCOMING INCOMING

PH3LPTOC
MF MF MF PH3HPTOC MF MF

CCBRBRF

GUID-46F45186-75AC-4487-886A-AA8369F6EF9F V1 EN

Figure 80: Example of traditional time-selective transformer overcurrent

protection

The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above
scheme become quite long. This applies especially in the busbar faults and also in
the transformer LV-terminal faults. To improve the performance of the above
scheme, a multiple-stage overcurrent protection with a reverse blocking is
proposed. Figure 73 shows this arrangement.

Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking

principle
By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels
between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing
feeders, it is possible to accelerate the operation of the overcurrent protection in the
busbar and transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity. Also, the
security degree of the busbar protection is increased, because there is now a
dedicated, selective and fast busbar protection functionality which is based on the
blockable overcurrent protection principle. The additional time-selective stages on

166 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

the transformer HV- and LV-sides provide increased security degree of backup
protection for the transformer, busbar and also for the outgoing feeders.

Depending on the overcurrent stage in question, the selectivity of the scheme in

Figure 73 is based on the operating current, operating time or blockings between
successive overcurrent stages. With blocking channels, the operating time of the
protection can be drastically shortened if compared to the simple time-selective
protection. In addition to the busbar protection, this blocking principle is applicable
for the protection of transformer LV-terminals and short lines. The functionality
and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized.

Table 175: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection.
DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time
O/C-stage Operating char. Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity
HV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
HV/3I>> DT blockable/time high/low high
selective
HV/3I>>> DT current selective very high low
LV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective low very high
LV/3I>> DT time selective low high
LV/3I>>> DT blockable high high

If the bus-tie breaker is open, the operating time of the blockable overcurrent
protection is approximately 100 ms (relaying time). When the bus-tie breaker is
closed, that is, the fault current flows to the faulted section of the busbar from two
directions, the operation time becomes as follows: first the bus-tie relay unit trips
the tie breaker in the above 100 ms, which reduces the fault current to a half. After
this the incoming feeder relay unit of the faulted bus section trips the breaker in
approximately 250 ms (relaying time), which becomes the total fault-clearing time
in this case.

615 series 167

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC

MF PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC MF

BLOCK in
BLOCK in
PH3IPTOC PH3IPTOC

CCBRBRF CCBRBRF
HV-side INRPHAR INRPHAR HV-side

Blocking output Blocking output

(PH3HPTOC (PH3HPTOC
START) START)
PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC
LV-side LV-side
PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC

PH3IPTOC PH3IPTOC

BLOCK in
BLOCK in

CCBRBRF CCBRBRF

MF MF

MEASUREMENT OUTGOING OUTGOING BUS-TIE BUS_TIE OUTGOING OUTGOING MEASUREMENT

INCOMING INCOMING

BLOCK in
PH3LPTOC

PH3HPTOC
MF MF MF MF MF
PH3IPTOC

CCBRBRF

Blocking output Blocking output

(Outgoing feeder (Outgoing feeder
PH3HPTOC START) PH3HPTOC START)

GUID-F7E5C2F1-FDF4-490D-B69D-6535FCEDBDE4 V1 EN

Figure 81: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub-

transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not shown).
Blocking output = digital output signal from the start of a protection
stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of a
protection stage

The operating times of the time-selective stages are very short, because the grading
margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due
to the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation,
good operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units. So, for
example, a grading margin of 150 ms in the DT mode of operation can be used,
provided that the circuit breaker interrupting time is shorter than 60 ms.

The sensitivity and speed of the current-selective stages become as good as

possible due to the fact that the transient overreach is practically zero. Also, the
effects of switching inrush currents on the setting values can be reduced using the
IED logic which recognizes the transformer-energizing inrush current and blocks
the operation or multiplies the current start value setting of the selected overcurrent
stage with a predefined multiplier setting.

Finally, a dependable trip of the overcurrent protection is secured by both a proper

selection of the settings and an adequate ability of the measuring transformers to
reproduce the fault current. This is important in maintaining selectivity and also for
the protection to operate without additional time delays. Additional information
about available measuring modes and current transformer requirements can be
found in the General function block features section in this manual.

168 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Radial outgoing feeder overcurrent protection

The basic requirements for feeder overcurrent protection are adequate sensitivity
and operation speed taking into account the minimum and maximum fault current
levels along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the
thermal and mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.

Often the above requirements can be best fulfilled using multiple-stage overcurrent
units.Figure 74 shows an example of this. A brief coordination study has been
carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders.

The protection scheme is implemented with three-stage numerical overcurrent

protection where the low-set stage PH3LPTOC operates in the IDMT-mode and
the two higher stages, PH3HPTOC and PH3IPTOC, in the DT-mode. Also the
thermal withstand of the line types along the feeder and the maximum expected
inrush currents of the feeders are shown. Faults occurring near the station where
the fault current levels are the highest are cleared rapidly by the instantaneous stage
to minimize the effects of severe short circuit faults. The influence of the inrush
current is taken into consideration by connecting the inrush current detector to the
start value-multiplying input of the instantaneous stage. This way, the start value is
multiplied with a predefined setting during the inrush situation, and nuisance
tripping can be avoided.

615 series 169

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

PH3LPTOC

PH3HPTOC

PH3IPTOC

CCBRBRF

MF INRPHAR

Ik max 7
OUTGOING OUTGOING
Ik min
INCOMING

MF MF
PH3LPTOC

PH3HPTOC

PH3IPTOC

CCBRBRF

INRPHAR
Line type 2

Ik max 8
Ik min

Line type 1

Ik max 9
Ik min
GUID-0A032F35-2E27-4AAE-B698-D33E1893B3EA V1 EN

Figure 82: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection

The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time-selective

operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the
overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a
coordination plan. In Figure 75, the coordination plan shows an example of
operation characteristics in the LV-side incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder.

170 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070984 V2 EN

Figure 83: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent

protection

4.1.2.7 Signals
Table 176: PH3LPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 177: PH3HPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 178: PH3IPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 179: PH3LPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C
START BOOLEAN Start
Table continues on next page

615 series 171

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Name Type Description

ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C

Table 180: PH3HPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C
START BOOLEAN Start
ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C

Table 181: PH3IPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C
START BOOLEAN Start
ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C

4.1.2.8 Settings
Table 182: PH3LPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.05 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Table continues on next page

172 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 183: PH3LPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve

615 series 173

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 184: PH3HPTOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10...40.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.05 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 185: PH3HPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve

Table 186: PH3IPTOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 1.00...40.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Operate delay time 20...200000 ms 10 20 Operate delay time

174 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 187: PH3IPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time

4.1.2.9 Monitored data

Table 188: PH3LPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PH3LPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 189: PH3HPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PH3HPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 190: PH3IPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PH3IPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

615 series 175

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.2.10 Technical data

Table 191: PH3xPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation PH3LPTOC Depending on the frequency of the current measured: fn ±2
accuracy Hz
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

PH3HPTOC and ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 x In (at currents in the range
PH3IPTOC of 0.1…10 x In)
±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…40 x
In)

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

PH3IPTOC: IFault 15 ms 16 ms 17 ms
= 2 x set Start
value
IFault = 10 x set 11 ms 14 ms 17 ms
Start value
PH3HPTOC and 23 ms 25 ms 28 ms
PH3LPTOC: IFault
= 2 x set Start
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
mode
Operate time accuracy in inverse time ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
mode
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
Peak-to-Peak + backup: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 x In, fn = 50 Hz, fault
current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurements.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20.

4.1.3 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC

4.1.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67-1
protection - Low stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC 3I>> -> 67-2
protection - High stage

176 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.3.2 Function block

GUID-9EB77066-518A-4CCC-B973-7EEE31FAE4F1 V3 EN

Figure 84: Function block

4.1.3.3 Functionality

The three-phase overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC is used as one-phase, two-

phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for feeders.

DPHxPDOC starts up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and
directional criterion is fulfilled. The operate time characteristics for low stage
DPHLPDOC and high stage DPHHPDOC can be selected to be either definite time
(DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of directional overcurrent protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 177

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-C5892F3E-09D9-462E-A963-023EFC18DDE7 V3 EN

Figure 85: Functional module diagram

Directional calculation
The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor.
A suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization
quantities, which are the positive sequence voltage, negative sequence voltage, self-
polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages). The
polarizing method is defined with the Pol quantity setting.

Table 192: Polarizing quantities

Polarizing quantity Description
Pos. seq. volt Positive sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt Negative sequence voltage
Self pol Self polarization
Cross pol Cross polarization

The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The
user can select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. By
setting the value of Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is
allowed when the directional information is invalid.

The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The
value of Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in
the operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the
opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of Characteristic
angle depends on the network configuration.

178 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed
certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating
quantity (current) is set with the Min operate current setting. The minimum
amplitude level for the polarizing quantity (voltage) is set with the Min operate
voltage setting. If the amplitude level of the operating quantity or polarizing
quantity is below the set level, the direction information of the corresponding phase
is set to "Unknown".

The polarizing quantity validity can remain valid even if the amplitude of the
polarizing quantity falls below the value of the Min operate voltage setting. In this
case, the directional information is provided by a special memory function for a
time defined with the Voltage Mem time setting.

DPHxPDOC is provided with a memory function to secure a reliable and correct

directional IED operation in case of a close short circuit or an earth fault
characterized by an extremely low voltage. At sudden loss of the polarization
quantity, the angle difference is calculated on the basis of a fictive voltage. The
fictive voltage is calculated using the positive phase sequence voltage measured
before the fault occurred, assuming that the voltage is not affected by the fault. The
memory function enables the function to operate up to a maximum of three seconds
after a total loss of voltage. This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting.
The voltage memory cannot be used for the "Negative sequence voltage"
polarization because it is not possible to substitute the positive sequence voltage for
negative sequence voltage without knowing the network unsymmetry level. This is
the reason why the fictive voltage angle and corresponding direction information
are frozen immediately for this polarization mode when the need for a voltage
memory arises and these are kept frozen until the time set with Voltage Mem time
elapses.

The value for the Min operate voltage setting should be carefully
selected since the accuracy in low signal levels is strongly affected
by the measuring device accuracy.

When the voltage falls below Min operate voltage at a close fault, the fictive
voltage is used to determine the phase angle. The measured voltage is applied again
as soon as the voltage rises above Min operate voltage and hysteresis. The fictive
voltage is also discarded if the measured voltage stays below Min operate voltage
and hysteresis for longer than Voltage Mem time or if the fault current disappears
while the fictive voltage is in use. When the voltage is below Min operate voltage
and hysteresis and the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault direction cannot be
determined. The fictive voltage can be unusable for two reasons:
• The fictive voltage is discarded after Voltage Mem time
• The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation.

615 series 179

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

DPHxPDOC can be forced to the non-directional operation with the NON_DIR

input. When the NON_DIR input is active, DPHxPDOC operates as a non-
directional overcurrent protection, regardless of the Directional mode setting.

GUID-718D61B4-DAD0-4F43-8108-86F7B44E7E2D V1 EN

Figure 86: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding
of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start
value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

180 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070554 V1 EN

Figure 87: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector and the directional calculation,
the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current
exceeds the setting. If the phase information matches the Num of start phases
setting, the phase selection logic activates the timer module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"

615 series 181

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during
the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.1.3.5 Measurement modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: “RMS”, “DFT”

and “Peak-to-Peak” . The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement
mode setting.

182 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 193: Measurement modes supported by DPHxPDOC stages

Measurement mode Supported measurement modes
DPHLPDOC DPHHPDOC
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x

4.1.3.6 Directional overcurrent characteristics

The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area
is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.

The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.

In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.

In the backward operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, a measurement from the Characteristic angle setting that has
been rotated 180 degrees.

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set positive if the operating current lags the
polarizing quantity and negative if the operating current leads the polarizing quantity.

615 series 183

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-CD0B7D5A-1F1A-47E6-AF2A-F6F898645640 V2 EN

Figure 88: Configurable operating sectors

Table 194: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C
The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined 0 = unknown
sectors, or the direction cannot be defined due
too low amplitude
The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward
The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 = backward
(The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse 3 = both
sectors, that is, when the sectors are overlapping)

Table 195: Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION
The direction information (DIR_X) for all phases 0 = unknown
is unknown
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 1 = forward
phase is forward, none being in reverse
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 2 = backward
phase is reverse, none being in forward
The direction information (DIR_X) for some 3 = both
phase is forward and for some phase is reverse

184 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is,
when the START output is active.

Self-polarizing as polarizing method

Table 196: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA UA ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U A ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-60308BBA-07F8-4FB4-A9E8-3850325E368C V2 EN

B IB UB ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U B ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-9AF57A77-F9C6-46B7-B056-AC7542EBF449 V2 EN

C IC UC ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U C ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-51FEBD95-672C-440F-A678-DD01ABB2D018 V2 EN

A-B IA - IB UAB ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-7DA1116D-86C0-4D7F-AA19-DCF32C530C4C V2 EN

B-C IB - IC UBC ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U BC ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-3E9788CA-D2FC-4FC4-8F9E-1466F3775826 V2 EN

C-A IC - IA UCA ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-EFD80F78-4B26-46B6-A5A6-CCA6B7E20C6E V2 EN

In an example case of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where the faulted
phase is phase A, the angle difference between the polarizing quantity UA and
operating quantity IA is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no
need to rotate the polarizing quantity.

GUID-C648173C-D8BB-4F37-8634-5D4DC7D366FF V1 EN

Figure 89: Single-phase earth fault, phase A

615 series 185

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between

phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity
UBC and operating quantity IB - IC in the self-polarizing method.

GUID-65CFEC0E-0367-44FB-A116-057DD29FEB79 V1 EN

Figure 90: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C

Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity

Table 197: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method
Faulte Used Used Angle difference
d fault polarizing
phase current voltage
s
A IA UBC
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-4F0D1491-3679-4B1F-99F7-3704BC15EF9D V3 EN

B IB UCA
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-F5252292-E132-41A7-9F6D-C2A3958EE6AD V3 EN

C IC UAB
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-84D97257-BAEC-4264-9D93-EC2DF853EAE1 V3 EN

A-B IA - IB UBC -
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC - U CA ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UCA
GUID-AFB15C3F-B9BB-47A2-80E9-796AA1165409 V2 EN

B-C IB - IC UCA -
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA - U AB ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UAB
GUID-C698D9CA-9139-40F2-9097-007B6B14D053 V2 EN

C-A IC - IA UAB -
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB - U BC ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UBC
GUID-838ECE7D-8B1C-466F-8166-E8FE16D28AAD V2 EN

The angle difference between the polarizing quantity UBC and operating quantity
IA is marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where

186 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

the faulted phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated with 90 degrees.
The characteristic angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees.

GUID-6C7D1317-89C4-44BE-A1EB-69BC75863474 V1 EN

Figure 91: Single-phase earth fault, phase A

In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is

between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the
polarizing quantity UAB and operating quantity IB - IC marked as φ.

615 series 187

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-C2EC2EF1-8A84-4A32-818C-6D7620EA9969 V1 EN

Figure 92: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C

The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter-

clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is
reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference.
This is done automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation.

Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity, the angle difference
between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula
for all fault types:

ANGLE _ X = ϕ (−U 2 ) − ϕ ( I 2 ) − ϕ RCA

GUID-470263DD-C1D7-4E59-B011-24D8D35BD52A V3 EN (Equation 1)

188 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is -U2.

UA
IA
UA

IA U
2
I2

UCA UAB IC
IB
IC IB
U2
I2
UC UB
UC UBC UB

A B
GUID-027DD4B9-5844-4C46-BA9C-54784F2300D3 V2 EN

Figure 93: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase
short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing
quantity is the negative-sequence voltage -U2

Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

Table 198: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quantity polarizing
method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA U1 ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A ) − ϕ RCA
GUID-4C933201-2290-4AA3-97A3-670A40CC4114 V4 EN

B IB U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B ) − ϕ RCA − 120o
GUID-648D061C-6F5F-4372-B120-0F02B42E9809 V4 EN

C IC U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C ) − ϕ RCA + 120o
GUID-355EF014-D8D0-467E-A952-1D1602244C9F V4 EN

A-B IA - IB U1
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A − I B ) − ϕ RCA + 30o
GUID-B07C3B0A-358E-480F-A059-CC5F3E6839B1 V3 EN

B-C IB - IC U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B − I C ) − ϕ RCA − 90o
GUID-4597F122-99A6-46F6-A38C-81232C985BC9 V3 EN

C-A IC - IA U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C − I A ) − ϕ RCA + 150o
GUID-9892503C-2233-4BC5-8C54-BCF005E20A08 V3 EN

615 series 189

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

UA
IA U1
U1
UA
-90°
IA
IB - Ic
-IC
IB
IB IC
IC

UC UB
UC UB

A B
GUID-1937EA60-4285-44A7-8A7D-52D7B66FC5A6 V3 EN

Figure 94: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two-
phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the
polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U1

Network rotation direction

Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as
"ABC". If the network rotating direction is reversed, meaning clockwise, that is,
"ACB", the equations for calculating the angle difference needs to be changed. The
network rotating direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation. The
change in the network rotating direction affects the phase-to-phase voltages
polarization method where the calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180
degrees. Also, when the sequence components are used, which are, the positive
sequence voltage or negative sequence voltage components, the calculation of the
components are affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same.
When the phase-to-ground voltages are used as the polarizing method, the network
rotating direction change has no effect on the direction calculation.

The network rotating direction is set in the IED using the parameter
in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The
default parameter value is "ABC".

190 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86 V1 EN

Figure 95: Examples of network rotating direction

4.1.3.7 Application

DPHxPDOC is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub

transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz.

In radial networks, phase overcurrent IEDs are often sufficient for the short circuit
protection of lines, transformers and other equipment. The current-time
characteristic should be chosen according to the common practice in the network. It
is recommended to use the same current-time characteristic for all overcurrent
IEDs in the network. This includes the overcurrent protection of transformers and
other equipment.

The phase overcurrent protection can also be used in closed ring systems as short
circuit protection. Because the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in
closed ring networks can be complicated, a large number of fault current
calculations are needed. There are situations with no possibility to have the
selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent IEDs in a closed ring system.

In some applications, the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved

significantly if DPHxPDOC is used. This can also be done in the closed ring
networks and radial networks with the generation connected to the remote in the
system thus giving fault current infeed in reverse direction. Directional overcurrent
IEDs are also used to have a selective protection scheme, for example in case of
parallel distribution lines or power transformers fed by the same single source. In
ring connected supply feeders between substations or feeders with two feeding
sources, DPHxPDOC is also used.

Parallel lines or transformers

When the lines are connected in parallel and if a fault occurs in one of the lines, it
is practical to have DPHxPDOC to detect the direction of the fault. Otherwise,

615 series 191

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

there is a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-
energize the whole system connected to the LV side.

GUID-1A2BD0AD-B217-46F4-A6B4-6FC6E6256EB3 V2 EN

Figure 96: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional IEDs

DPHxPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these

applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV-
side up to the HV-side. Therefore, the transformer is also equipped with directional
overcurrent protection.

GUID-74662396-1BAD-4AC2-ADB6-F4A8B3341860 V2 EN

Figure 97: Overcurrent protection of parallel operating transformers

Closed ring network topology

The closed ring network topology is used in applications where electricity
distribution for the consumers is secured during network fault situations. The
power is fed at least from two directions which means that the current direction can
be varied. The time grading between the network level stages is challenging
without unnecessary delays in the time settings. In this case, it is practical to use
the directional overcurrent IEDs to achieve a selective protection scheme.
Directional overcurrent functions can be used in closed ring applications. The
arrows define the operating direction of the directional functionality. The double

192 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

arrows define the non-directional functionality where faults can be detected in both
directions.

GUID-276A9D62-BD74-4335-8F20-EC1731B58889 V1 EN

Figure 98: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected
with directional overcurrent IEDs

4.1.3.8 Signals
Table 199: DPHLPDOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current

U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase

voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage B or phase-to-phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage C or phase-to-phase
voltage CA
U1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage

U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage

Table continues on next page

615 series 193

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enabling signal for current multiplier
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional

Table 200: DPHHPDOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current

U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase

voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
U1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage

U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enabling signal for current multiplier
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional

Table 201: DPHLPDOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

Table 202: DPHHPDOC Output signals

Name Type Description
START BOOLEAN Start
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

194 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.3.9 Settings
Table 203: DPHLPDOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Voltage Mem time 0...3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 60 Characteristic angle
Max forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Max reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Pol quantity -2=Pos. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine
1=Self pol fault direction
4=Neg. seq. volt.
5=Cross pol

615 series 195

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 204: DPHLPDOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
1=True info is invalid
Min operate current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage

Table 205: DPHHPDOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10...40.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 60 Characteristic angle
Table continues on next page

196 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Max forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Max reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Voltage Mem time 0...3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time
Pol quantity -2=Pos. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine
1=Self pol fault direction
4=Neg. seq. volt.
5=Cross pol

Table 206: DPHHPDOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
1=True info is invalid
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Min operate current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3

615 series 197

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.3.10 Monitored data

Table 207: DPHLPDOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase A
ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase B
ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase C
DPHLPDOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 208: DPHHPDOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
Table continues on next page

198 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase A
ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase B
ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase C
DPHHPDOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.1.3.11 Technical data

Table 209: DPHxPDOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current/
voltage measured: fn ±2 Hz

DPHLPDOC Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un
Phase angle: ±2°
DPHHPDOC Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 x In)
±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 x In)
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un
Phase angle: ±2°

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2.0 x set Start
38 ms 43 ms 46 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Table continues on next page

615 series 199

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Measurement mode and Pol quantity = default, current before fault = 0.0 x In, voltage before fault =
1.0 x Un, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase
angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.1.3.12 Technical revision history

Table 210: DPHLPDOC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added a new input NON_DIR

C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the

Time multiplier setting.

Table 211: DPHHPDOC Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Added a new input NON_DIR

C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the

Time multiplier setting.

4.1.4 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection

DPH3xPDOC

4.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPH3LPDOC 3I> -> 67-1
protection - Low stage
Three-phase directional overcurrent DPH3HPDOC 3I>> -> 67-2
protection - High stage

200 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.4.2 Function block

GUID-22B2621B-5B78-4C71-97F8-4BD477A50D51 V1 EN

Figure 99: Function block

4.1.4.3 Functionality

The three-phase overcurrent protection DPH3xPDOC is used as one-phase, two-

phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short circuit protection for feeders.

DPH3xPDOC starts when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and
directional criterion is fulfilled. Each phase has its own timer. The operation time
characteristics for the low stage, DPH3LPDOC, and the high stage, DPH3HPDOC,
can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT).

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operation time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the phase-segregated three-pole tripping mode can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

615 series 201

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-347973B8-AB04-40ED-B985-3F36A6305066 V1 EN

Figure 100: Functional module diagram

Directional calculation
The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor.
A suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization
quantities, which are the positive-sequence voltage, negative-sequence voltage, self-
polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages). The
polarizing method is defined with the Pol quantity setting.

Table 212: Polarizing quantities

Polarizing quantity Description
Pos. seq. volt Positive-sequence voltage
Neg. seq. volt Negative-sequence voltage
Self pol Self-polarization
Cross pol Cross-polarization

The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. Either
"Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation can be selected. By setting
the value of Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is allowed
when the directional information is invalid.

202 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The
value of Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in
the operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the
opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of Characteristic
angle depends on the network configuration.

Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed
certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating
quantity (current) is set with the Min operate current setting. The minimum
amplitude level for the polarizing quantity (voltage) is set with the Min operate
voltage setting. If the amplitude level of the operating quantity or polarizing
quantity is below the set level, the direction information of the corresponding phase
is set to "Unknown".

The polarizing quantity validity can remain valid even if the amplitude of the
polarizing quantity falls below the value of the Min operate voltage setting. In this
case, the directional information is provided by a special memory function for a
time defined with the Voltage Mem time setting.

DPH3xPDOC is provided with a memory function to secure a reliable and correct

directional IED operation in case of a close short circuit or an earth fault
characterized by an extremely low voltage. At the sudden loss of the polarization
quantity, the angle difference is calculated on the basis of a fictive voltage. The
fictive voltage is calculated using the positive-phase sequence voltage measured
before the fault occurred, assuming that the voltage is not affected by the fault. The
memory function enables the function to operate up to a maximum of three seconds
after a total loss of voltage. This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting.
The voltage memory cannot be used for the negative-sequence voltage polarization
because it is not possible to substitute the positive-sequence voltage for negative-
sequence voltage without knowing the network asymmetry level. This is the reason
why the fictive voltage angle and corresponding direction information are frozen
immediately for this polarization mode when the need for a voltage memory arises,
and these are kept frozen until the time set with Voltage Mem time elapses.

The value for the Min operate voltage setting should be carefully
selected since the accuracy in low signal levels is strongly affected
by the measuring device accuracy.

When the voltage falls below Min operate voltage at a close fault, the fictive
voltage is used to determine the phase angle. The measured voltage is applied again
as soon as the voltage rises above Min operate voltage and hysteresis. The fictive
voltage is discarded if the fault current disappears while the fictive voltage is in
use. When the voltage is below Min operate voltage and hysteresis and the fictive
voltage is unusable, the fault direction cannot be determined.. The fictive voltage
can be unusable for two reasons:

615 series 203

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

• The fictive voltage is discarded if the fault current disappears while the fictive
voltage is in use
• The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation.

DPH3xPDOC can be forced to non-directional operation with the NON_DIR input.

When the NON_DIR input is active, DPH3xPDOC operates as a non-directional
overcurrent protection regardless of the Directional mode setting.

GUID-718D61B4-DAD0-4F43-8108-86F7B44E7E2D V1 EN

Figure 101: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared to the set Start value. If the measured
value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding of the
value, together with the directional results of that phase, to the phase selection
logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the
Start value Mult setting.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

204 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

A070554 V1 EN

Figure 102: Start value behavior with the ENA_MULT input activated

Phase selection logic

The phase selection logic detects the faulty phase or phases and controls the timers
according to the set value of the Num of start phases setting.

615 series 205

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-55DB779A-4F3D-4E2D-AF39-E1F2F5ED9CAA V1 EN

Figure 103: Logic diagram for phase selection module

When the Number of start phase setting is set to "1 out of 3" and the fault is in one
or several phases, the phase selection logic sends an enabling signal to the faulty
phase timers. If the fault disappears, the related timer-enabling signal is removed.

When the Number of start phase setting is "2 out of 3" or "3 out of 3", single-phase
faults are not detected. The value "3 out of 3" requires the fault to be present in all
three phases.

Timer A, Timer B, Timer C

The function design contains three independent phase-segregated timers which are
controlled by common settings. This design allows a true three-phase overcurrent
protection which is useful in some applications.

The common START and OPERATE outputs are created by "ORing" the phase-
specific starting and operating outputs.

206 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Each phase has its own phase-specific starting and operating outputs: ST_A, ST_B,
ST_C, OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C.

Once activated, each timer activates its START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics
are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve
parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

The shortest IDMT operation time is adjustable. The setup can be

done with a global parameter in the HMI menu: Configuration/
System/IDMT Sat point. More information can be found in the
General function block features section in this manual.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operation delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of
the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. If the drop-
off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the START output is deactivated.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or

programmable IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve
type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off
situation.

The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operating and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired
operating time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are
used.

The Minimum operate timeoperating setting should be used with

great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT
operating curve, but always at least the value of the Minimum

615 series 207

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

operate time setting. More information can be found in the General

function block features section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE,
OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C outputs are not activated.

4.1.4.5 Timer characteristics

DPH3xPDOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The timer

characteristics can be selected with the Operating curve type and Type of reset
curve settings. When the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the
Operate delay time and Reset delay time settings.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of the ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In
addition to this, a programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves
are applicable. The DT characteristic can be chosen by selecting the Operating
curve type values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is
identical in both cases.

The list of characteristics, which matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicates the characteristics supported by different stages.

Table 213: IDMT curves supported by different stages

Curve name Supported by
DPH3LPDOC DPH3HPDOC
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
Table continues on next page

208 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Curve name Supported by

DPH3LPDOC DPH3HPDOC
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(17) Programmable x x

A detailed description of the timers can be found in the General

function block features section in this manual.

Reset curve type Supported by Note

DPH3LPDOC DPH3HPDOC
(1) Immediate x x Available for all
operating time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all
operating time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and programmable
curves

4.1.4.6 Directional overcurrent characteristics

The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area
is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.

The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.

In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding
clockwise sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.

In the backward operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the
counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding

615 series 209

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

clockwise sector, a measurement from the Characteristic angle setting that has
been rotated 180 degrees.

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set positive if the operating current lags the
polarizing quantity and negative if the operating current leads the polarizing quantity.

GUID-CD0B7D5A-1F1A-47E6-AF2A-F6F898645640 V2 EN

Figure 104: Configurable operating sectors

Table 214: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C
The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined 0 = unknown
sectors, or the direction cannot be defined due to
low amplitude
The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward
The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 = backward
The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse 3 = both
sectors, that is, when the sectors are overlapping

210 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 215: Momentary phase-combined direction value for monitored data view
Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION
The direction information (DIR_X) for all phases 0 = unknown
is unknown
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 1 = forward
phase is forward, none being in reverse
The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 2 = backward
phase is reverse, none being in forward
The direction information (DIR_X) for some 3 = both
phase is forward and for some phase is reverse

FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is,
when the START output is active.

Self-polarizing as polarizing method

Table 216: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA UA ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U A ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-60308BBA-07F8-4FB4-A9E8-3850325E368C V2 EN

B IB UB ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U B ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-9AF57A77-F9C6-46B7-B056-AC7542EBF449 V2 EN

C IC UC ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U C ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA
GUID-51FEBD95-672C-440F-A678-DD01ABB2D018 V2 EN

A-B IA - IB UAB ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-7DA1116D-86C0-4D7F-AA19-DCF32C530C4C V2 EN

B-C IB - IC UBC ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U BC ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-3E9788CA-D2FC-4FC4-8F9E-1466F3775826 V2 EN

C-A IC - IA UCA ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA

GUID-EFD80F78-4B26-46B6-A5A6-CCA6B7E20C6E V2 EN

In an example case of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where the faulted
phase is phase A, the angle difference between the polarizing quantity UA and
operating quantity IA is marked as φ. In the self-polarization method, there is no
need to rotate the polarizing quantity.

615 series 211

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-C648173C-D8BB-4F37-8634-5D4DC7D366FF V1 EN

Figure 105: Single-phase earth fault, phase A

In an example case of a two-phase short circuit failure where the fault is between
phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity
UBC and operating quantity IB - IC in the self-polarizing method.

GUID-65CFEC0E-0367-44FB-A116-057DD29FEB79 V1 EN

Figure 106: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C

212 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity

Table 217: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method
Faulte Used Used Angle difference
d fault polarizing
phase current voltage
s
A IA UBC
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC ) - ϕ ( I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-4F0D1491-3679-4B1F-99F7-3704BC15EF9D V3 EN

B IB UCA
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA ) - ϕ ( I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-F5252292-E132-41A7-9F6D-C2A3958EE6AD V3 EN

C IC UAB
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB ) - ϕ ( I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
GUID-84D97257-BAEC-4264-9D93-EC2DF853EAE1 V3 EN

A-B IA - IB UBC -
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U BC - U CA ) - ϕ ( I A - I B ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UCA
GUID-AFB15C3F-B9BB-47A2-80E9-796AA1165409 V2 EN

B-C IB - IC UCA -
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U CA - U AB ) - ϕ ( I B - I C ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UAB
GUID-C698D9CA-9139-40F2-9097-007B6B14D053 V2 EN

C-A IC - IA UAB -
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U AB - U BC ) - ϕ ( I C - I A ) - ϕ RCA + 90o
UBC
GUID-838ECE7D-8B1C-466F-8166-E8FE16D28AAD V2 EN

The angle difference between the polarizing quantity UBC and operating quantity
IA is marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single-phase earth fault where
the faulted phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated 90 degrees. The
characteristic angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees.

GUID-6C7D1317-89C4-44BE-A1EB-69BC75863474 V1 EN

Figure 107: Single-phase earth fault, phase A

615 series 213

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short circuit failure where the fault is
between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the
polarizing quantity UAB and operating quantity IB - IC marked as φ.

GUID-C2EC2EF1-8A84-4A32-818C-6D7620EA9969 V1 EN

Figure 108: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C

The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter-

clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is
reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference.
This is done automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation.

214 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Negative-sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity, the angle difference
between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula
for all fault types:

ANGLE _ X = ϕ (−U 2 ) − ϕ ( I 2 ) − ϕ RCA

GUID-470263DD-C1D7-4E59-B011-24D8D35BD52A V3 EN (Equation 2)

This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is -U2.

UA
IA
UA

IA U
2
I2

UCA UAB IC
IB
IC IB
U2
I2
UC UB
UC UBC UB

A B
GUID-027DD4B9-5844-4C46-BA9C-54784F2300D3 V2 EN

Figure 109: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase
short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing
quantity is the negative-sequence voltage -U2

Positive-sequence voltage as polarizing quantity

Table 218: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quantity polarizing
method
Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference
phases current polarizing
voltage
A IA U1 ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A ) − ϕ RCA
GUID-4C933201-2290-4AA3-97A3-670A40CC4114 V4 EN

B IB U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B ) − ϕ RCA − 120o
GUID-648D061C-6F5F-4372-B120-0F02B42E9809 V4 EN

C IC U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C ) − ϕ RCA + 120o
GUID-355EF014-D8D0-467E-A952-1D1602244C9F V4 EN

A-B IA - IB U1
ANGLE _ A = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I A − I B ) − ϕ RCA + 30o
GUID-B07C3B0A-358E-480F-A059-CC5F3E6839B1 V3 EN

B-C IB - IC U1
ANGLE _ B = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I B − I C ) − ϕ RCA − 90o
GUID-4597F122-99A6-46F6-A38C-81232C985BC9 V3 EN

C-A IC - IA U1
ANGLE _ C = ϕ (U 1 ) − ϕ ( I C − I A ) − ϕ RCA + 150o
GUID-9892503C-2233-4BC5-8C54-BCF005E20A08 V3 EN

615 series 215

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

UA
IA U1
U1
UA
-90°
IA
IB - Ic
-IC
IB
IB IC
IC

UC UB
UC UB

A B
GUID-1937EA60-4285-44A7-8A7D-52D7B66FC5A6 V3 EN

Figure 110: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two-
phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the
polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U1

Network rotation direction

Typically, the network rotatiion direction is counterclockwise and defined as
"ABC". If the network rotation direction is reversed, meaning clockwise, that is,
"ACB", the equations for calculating the angle difference need to be changed. The
network rotation direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation. The
change in the network rotation direction affects the polarization method of the phase-
to-phase voltages where the calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180
degrees. Also, when the sequence components are used, the calculation of the
components is affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same. The
sequence components are the positive-sequence voltage or negative-sequence
voltage components. When the phase-to-ground voltages are used as the polarizing
method, the network rotation direction change has no effect on the direction
calculation.

The network rotation direction is set in the IED using the parameter
in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The
default parameter value is "ABC".

216 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86 V1 EN

Figure 111: Examples of network rotation direction

4.1.4.7 Application

DPH3xPDOC is used as short circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub

transmission networks operating at 50 Hz.

In radial networks, phase overcurrent IEDs are often sufficient for the short circuit
protection of lines, transformers and other equipment. The current-time
characteristic should be chosen according to the common practice in the network. It
is recommended to use the same current-time characteristic for all overcurrent
IEDs in the network. This includes the overcurrent protection of transformers and
other equipment.

The phase overcurrent protection can also be used in closed ring systems as short
circuit protection. Because the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in
closed ring networks can be complicated, a large number of fault current
calculations are needed. There are situations with no possibility to have the
selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent IEDs in a closed ring system.

In some applications, the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved

significantly if DPH3xPDOC is used. This can also be done in the closed ring
networks and radial networks with the generation connected to the remote in the
system, thus giving fault current infeed in the reverse direction. Directional
overcurrent IEDs are also used to have a selective protection scheme, for example
in case of parallel distribution lines or power transformers fed by the same single
source. DPH3xPDOC is also used in the ring-connected supply feeders between
substations or feeders with two feeding sources.

Parallel lines or transformers

When the lines are connected in parallel and a fault occurs in one of the lines, it is
practical to have DPH3xPDOC to detect the direction of the fault. Otherwise, there

615 series 217

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

is a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-energize the
whole system connected to the LV-side.

GUID-1A2BD0AD-B217-46F4-A6B4-6FC6E6256EB3 V2 EN

Figure 112: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional IEDs

DPH3xPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these

applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV-
side up to the HV-side. Therefore, the transformer is also equipped with directional
overcurrent protection.

GUID-74662396-1BAD-4AC2-ADB6-F4A8B3341860 V2 EN

Figure 113: Overcurrent protection of parallel operating transformers

Closed-ring network topology

The closed-ring network topology is used in applications where electricity
distribution for the consumers is secured during network fault situations. The
power is fed from at least two directions, which means that the current direction
can be varied. The time-grading between the network level stages is challenging
without unnecessary delays in the time settings. In this case, it is practical to use
the directional overcurrent IEDs to achieve a selective protection scheme.
Directional overcurrent functions can be used in closed-ring applications. The
arrows define the operating direction of the directional functionality. The double

218 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

arrows define the non-directional functionality where faults can be detected in both
directions.

GUID-276A9D62-BD74-4335-8F20-EC1731B58889 V1 EN

Figure 114: Closed-ring network topology where feeding lines are protected
with directional overcurrent IEDs

4.1.4.8 Signals
Table 219: DPH3LPDOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional

Table 220: DPH3HPDOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional

615 series 219

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 221: DPH3LPDOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C
ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C

Table 222: DPH3HPDOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A
OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B
OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C
ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A
ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B
ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C

4.1.4.9 Settings
Table 223: DPH3LPDOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.05 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Table continues on next page

220 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 60 Characteristic angle
Max forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Max reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Pol quantity -2=Pos. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine
1=Self pol fault direction
4=Neg. seq. volt.
5=Cross pol

Table 224: DPH3LPDOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Table continues on next page

615 series 221

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
1=True info is invalid
Min operate current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage

Table 225: DPH3HPDOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10...40.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.05 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 60 Characteristic angle
Max forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Max reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min forward angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Pol quantity -2=Pos. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine
1=Self pol fault direction
4=Neg. seq. volt.
5=Cross pol

222 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 226: DPH3HPDOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 10 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
1=True info is invalid
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Min operate current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3

4.1.4.10 Monitored data

Table 227: DPH3LPDOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
Table continues on next page

615 series 223

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase A
ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase B
ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase C
DPH3LPDOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 228: DPH3HPDOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase A
ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase B
ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Calculated angle
difference, Phase C
DPH3HPDOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

224 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.4.11 Technical data

Table 229: DPH3xPDOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation DPH3LPDOC Depending on the frequency of the current measured: fn ±2
accuracy Hz
Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un
Phase angle: ±2°
DPH3HPDOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 x In (at currents in the range
of 0.1…10 x In)
±5.0% of the set value (at currents in the range of 10…40 x
In)
Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un
Phase angle: ±2°

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2 x set 38 ms 40 ms 43 ms
Start value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
mode
Operate time accuracy in inverse time ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
mode
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression
Peak-to-Peak + backup: No suppression

1) Measurement mode and Pol quantity = default, current before fault = 0.0 x In, voltage before fault =
1.0 x Un, fn = 50 Hz, fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase
angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact.
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20.

4.1.5 Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and

distribution transformers T1PTTR

4.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase thermal protection for T1PTTR 3lth> 49F
feeders, cables and distribution
transformers

615 series 225

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.5.2 Function block

A070691 V2 EN

Figure 115: Function block

4.1.5.3 Functionality

The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need for a thermal overload function also for power lines.

A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and
the introduction of the thermal overload function T1PTTR allows the protected
circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.

An alarm level gives an early warning to allow operators to take action before the
line trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current measuring function
using a thermal model with first order thermal loss with the settable time constant.
If the temperature rise continues the function will operate based on the thermal
model of the line.

Re-energizing of the line after the thermal overload operation can be inhibited
during the time the cooling of the line is in progress. The cooling of the line is
estimated by the thermal model.

4.1.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and
distribution transformers can be described using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

226 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

I_A Max START

Temperature
I_B current
estimator OPERATE
I_C selector
Thermal
ALARM
ENA_MULT counter
BLK_CLOSE
BLK_OPR
AMB_TEMP
A070747 V3 EN

Figure 116: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents.

Max current selector

The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured
TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the
temperature estimator.

Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:

2
 I 
Θ final =  ⋅ Tref
 I ref 
 
A070780 V2 EN (Equation 3)

I the largest phase current

Iref set Current reference

Tref set Temperature rise

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature rise

estimation, and the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also
available in the monitored data as TEMP_AMB in degrees. If the final temperature
estimation is larger than the set Maximum temperature, the START output is activated.

Current reference and Temperature rise setting values are used in the final
temperature estimation together with the ambient temperature. It is suggested to set
these values to the maximum steady state current allowed for the line or cable
under emergency operation for a few hours per years. Current values with the
corresponding conductor temperatures are given in cable manuals. These values are
given for conditions such as ground temperatures, ambient air temperature, the way
of cable laying and ground thermal resistivity.

Thermal counter
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

615 series 227

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

 ∆t 
−
(
Θn = Θn −1 + Θ final − Θn −1 ) 
⋅ 1− e τ



 
A070781 V2 EN (Equation 4)

Θn calculated present temperature

Θn-1 calculated temperature at previous time step

Θfinal calculated final temperature with actual current

Δt time step between calculation of actual temperature

t thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable), set Time constant

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be given a constant value or it can be measured. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level Alarm value, the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level Maximum temperature, the OPERATE output is activated. The OPERATE
signal pulse length is fixed to 100 ms

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:

 Θ final − Θoperate 
toperate = −τ ⋅ ln  
 Θ final − Θn 
 
A070782 V2 EN (Equation 5)

Caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout to

reconnect the tripped circuit after operating. The lockout output BLK_CLOSE is
activated at the same time when the OPERATE output is activated and is not reset
until the device temperature has cooled down below the set value of the Reclose
temperature setting. The Maximum temperature value must be set at least two
degrees above the set value of Reclose temperature.

The time to lockout release is calculated, that is, the calculation of the cooling time
to a set value. The calculated temperature can be reset to its initial value (the Initial
temperature setting) via a control parameter that is located under the clear menu.
This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated
false temperature level.

228 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

 Θ final −Θlockout _ release 

tlockout _ release = −τ ⋅ ln  
 Θ final − Θn 
 

A070783 V3 EN (Equation 6)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature.

In some applications, the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables.
By setting the Current multiplier parameter to the number of parallel lines (cables),
the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this
option, the ENA_MULT input must be activated.

The ambient temperature can be measured with the RTD measurement. The
measured temperature value is then connected, for example, from the AI_VAL3
output of the X130 (RTD) function to the AMB_TEMP input of T1PTTR.

The Env temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the
ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input.
The Env temperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature
measurement connected to T1PTTR is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function.

The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature setting parameter. This is done in case the IED is powered up, the
function is turned "Off" and back "On" or reset through the Clear menu. The
temperature is also stored in the nonvolatile memory and restored in case the IED
is restarted.

The thermal time constant of the protected circuit is given in seconds with the Time
constant setting. Please see cable manufacturers manuals for further details.

4.1.5.5 Application

The lines and cables in the power system are constructed for a certain maximum
load current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses will be higher than
expected. As a consequence, the temperature of the conductors will increase. If the
temperature of the lines and cables reaches too high values, it can cause a risk of
damages by, for example, the following ways:
• The sag of overhead lines can reach an unacceptable value.
• If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, becomes
too high, the material will be destroyed.
• In cables the insulation can be damaged as a consequence of overtemperature,
and therefore phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults can occur.

In stressed situations in the power system, the lines and cables may be required to
be overloaded for a limited time. This should be done without any risk for the above-
mentioned risks.

615 series 229

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The thermal overload protection provides information that makes temporary

overloading of cables and lines possible. The thermal overload protection estimates
the conductor temperature continuously. This estimation is made by using a
thermal model of the line/cable that is based on the current measurement.

If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level, a signal is
given to the operator. This enables actions in the power system to be done before
dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the
maximum allowed temperature value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected
line.

4.1.5.6 Signals
Table 230: T1PTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable Current multiplier
BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for operate outputs
TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 0 The ambient temperature used in the calculation

Table 231: T1PTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose.

4.1.5.7 Settings
Table 232: T1PTTR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Env temperature Set -50...100 °C 1 40 Ambient temperature used when no
external temperature measurement
available
Current multiplier 1...5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for parallel lines
Current reference 0.05...4.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature
raise temperature
Temperature rise 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 75.0 End temperature rise above ambient
Time constant 60...60000 s 1 2700 Time constant of the line in seconds.
Table continues on next page

230 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Maximum temperature 20.0...200.0 °C 0.1 90.0 Temperature level for operate
Alarm value 20.0...150.0 °C 0.1 80.0 Temperature level for start (alarm)
Reclose temperature 20.0...150.0 °C 0.1 70.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose
after operate

Table 233: T1PTTR Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Initial temperature -50.0...100.0 °C 0.1 0.0 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

4.1.5.8 Monitored data

Table 234: T1PTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated
temperature of the
protected object
TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 The calculated
temperature of the
protected object relative
to the operate level
T_OPERATE INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to operate
T_ENA_CLOSE INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to
deactivate BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.1.5.9 Technical data

Table 235: T1PTTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or

±0.002 x In (at currents in the range of
0.01...4.00 x In)

Operate time accuracy1) ±2.0% of the theoretical value or ±0.50 s

1) Overload current > 1.2 x Operate level temperature

615 series 231

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.5.10 Technical revision history

Table 236: T1PTTR Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
C Removed the Sensor available setting parameter
D Added the AMB_TEMP input

4.1.6 Three-phase thermal overload protection for power

transformers, two time constants T2PTTR

4.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase thermal overload T2PTTR 3Ith>T 49T
protection for power transformers, two
time constants

4.1.6.2 Function block

GUID-68AADF30-9DC7-49D5-8C77-14E774C8D1AF V2 EN

Figure 117: Function block

4.1.6.3 Functionality

The three-phase thermal overload, two time constant protection function T2PTTR
protects the transformer mainly from short-time overloads. The transformer is
protected from long-time overloads with the oil temperature detector included in its
equipment.

The alarm signal gives an early warning to allow the operators to take action before
the transformer trips. The early warning is based on the three-phase current
measuring function using a thermal model with two settable time constants. If the
temperature rise continues, T2PTTR operates based on the thermal model of the
transformer.

After a thermal overload operation, the re-energizing of the transformer is inhibited

during the transformer cooling time. The transformer cooling is estimated with a
thermal model.

232 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.6.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase thermal overload, two time constant protection for
power transformers can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in
the diagram are explained in the next sections.

I_A Max START

I_B Temperature
current
estimator OPERATE
I_C selector
Thermal
ALARM
counter
BLK_CLOSE
BLOCK

AMB_TEMP
GUID-FF965F1C-6039-4A01-9A4F-B378F8356279 V2 EN

Figure 118: Functional module diagram

Max current selector

The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured
TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the thermal
counter.

Temperature estimator
The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents
according to the expression:

2
 I 
Θ final =  ⋅ Tref
 I ref 
 
GUID-06DE6459-E94A-4FC7-8357-CA58988CEE97 V2 EN (Equation 7)

I highest measured phase current

Iref the set value of the Current reference setting

Tref the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise (°C) with the steady-state current
Iref

The ambient temperature value is added to the calculated final temperature rise
estimation. If the total value of temperature is higher than the set operate
temperature level, the START output is activated.

The Current reference setting is a steady-state current that gives the steady-state
end temperature value Temperature rise. It gives a setting value corresponding to
the rated power of the transformer.

615 series 233

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The Temperature rise setting is used when the value of the reference temperature
rise corresponds to the Current reference value. The temperature values with the
corresponding transformer load currents are usually given by transformer
manufacturers.

Thermal counter
T2PTTR applies the thermal model of two time constants for temperature
measurement. The temperature rise in degrees Celsius (°C) is calculated from the
highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression:

  2   2
−    
∆t ∆t 
I    −
∆Θ =  p *   * Tref  ⋅  1 − e τ 1  + (1 − p ) ⋅  I  ⋅ Tref  ⋅ 1 − e τ 2 
  I ref       I ref    
           
GUID-27A879A9-AF94-4BC3-BAA1-501189F6DE0C V2 EN (Equation 8)

ΔΘ calculated temperature rise (°C) in transformer

I measured phase current with the highest TRMS value
Iref the set value of the Current reference setting (rated current of the protected object)
Tref the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise setting (°C) with the steady-state
current Iref)

p the set value of the Weighting factor p setting (weighting factor for the short time constant)
Δt time step between the calculation of the actual temperature
t1 the set value of the Short time constant setting (the short heating / cooling time constant)

t2 the set value of the Long time constant setting (the long heating / cooling time constant)

The warming and cooling following the two time-constant thermal curve is a
characteristic of transformers. The thermal time constants of the protected
transformer are given in seconds with the Short time constant and Long time
constant settings. The Short time constant setting describes the warming of the
transformer with respect to windings. The Long time constant setting describes the
warming of the transformer with respect to the oil. Using the two time-constant
model, the IED is able to follow both fast and slow changes in the temperature of
the protected object.

The Weighting factor p setting is the weighting factor between Short time constant
τ1 and Long time constant τ2. The higher the value of the Weighting factor p
setting, the larger is the share of the steep part of the heating curve. When
Weighting factor p =1, only Short-time constant is used. When Weighting factor p
= 0, only Long time constant is used.

234 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-E040FFF4-7FE3-4736-8E5F-D96DB1F1B16B V1 EN

Figure 119: Effect of the Weighting factor p factor and the difference between
the two time constants and one time constant models

The actual temperature of the transformer is calculated by adding the ambient

temperature to the calculated temperature.

Θ = ∆Θ + Θ amb
GUID-77E49346-66D2-4CAB-A764-E81D6F382E74 V2 EN (Equation 9)

Θ temperature in transformer (°C)

ΔΘ calculated temperature rise (°C) in transformer
Θamb set value of the Env temperature Set setting or measured ambient temperature

The ambient temperature can be measured with RTD measurement. The measured
temperature value is connected, for example, from the AI_VAL3 output of the
X130 (RTD) function to the AMB_TEMP input of T2PTTR.

The Env temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the
ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input.
The Env temperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature
measurement connected to T2PTTR is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function.

The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial
temperature and Max temperature setting parameters. The initial value is a
percentage of Max temperature defined by Initial temperature. This is done when
the IED is powered up or the function is turned off and back on or reset through the

615 series 235

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Clear menu. The temperature is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the
IED is restarted.

The Max temperature setting defines the maximum temperature of the transformer
in degrees Celsius (°C). The value of the Max temperature setting is usually given
by transformer manufacturers. The actual alarm, operating and lockout
temperatures for T2PTTR are given as a percentage value of the Max temperature
setting.

When the transformer temperature reaches the alarm level defined with the Alarm
temperature setting, the ALARM output signal is set. When the transformer
temperature reaches the trip level value defined with the Operate temperature
setting, the OPERATE output is activated. The OPERATE output is deactivated
when the value of the measured current falls below 10 percent of the Current
Reference value or the calculated temperature value falls below Operate
temperature.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
T_OPERATE is only calculated if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature. The value is available in the monitored data view.

After operating, there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit due to the
thermal overload protection function. The BLK_CLOSE lockout output is activated
when the device temperature is above the Reclose temperature lockout release
temperature setting value. The time to lockout release T_ENA_CLOSE is also
calculated. The value is available in the monitored data view.

4.1.6.5 Application

The transformers in a power system are constructed for a certain maximum load
current level. If the current exceeds this level, the losses are higher than expected.
This results in a rise in transformer temperature. If the temperature rise is too high,
the equipment is damaged:
• Insulation within the transformer ages faster, which in turn increases the risk
of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults.
• Possible hotspots forming within the transformer degrade the quality of the
transformer oil.

During stressed situations in power systems, it is required to overload the

transformers for a limited time without any risks. The thermal overload protection
provides information and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible.

The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the

transformer cooling system. The two main principles are:

236 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

• ONAN: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans, and the oil is
naturally circulated without pumps.
• OFAF: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling, and pumps to force the
circulation of the transformer oil.

The protection has several parameter sets located in the setting groups, for example
one for a non-forced cooling and one for a forced cooling situation. Both the
permissive steady-state loading level as well as the thermal time constant are
influenced by the transformer cooling system. The active setting group can be
changed by a parameter, or through a binary input if the binary input is enabled for
it. This feature can be used for transformers where forced cooling is taken out of
operation or extra cooling is switched on. The parameters can also be changed
when a fan or pump fails to operate.

The thermal overload protection continuously estimates the internal heat content,
that is, the temperature of the transformer. This estimation is made by using a
thermal model of the transformer which is based on the current measurement.

If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches the set alarm level, a signal
is given to the operator. This enables the action that needs to be taken in the power
systems before the temperature reaches a high value. If the temperature continues
to rise to the trip value, the protection initiates the trip of the protected transformer.

After the trip, the transformer needs to cool down to a temperature level where the
transformer can be taken into service again. T2PTTR continues to estimate the heat
content of the transformer during this cooling period using a set cooling time
constant. The energizing of the transformer is blocked until the heat content is
reduced to the set level.

The thermal curve of two time constants is typical for a transformer. The thermal
time constants of the protected transformer are given in seconds with the Short time
constant and Long time constant settings. If the manufacturer does not state any
other value, the Long time constant can be set to 4920 s (82 minutes) for a
distribution transformer and 7260 s (121 minutes) for a supply transformer. The
corresponding Short time constants are 306 s (5.1 minutes) and 456 s (7.6 minutes).

If the manufacturer of the power transformer has stated only one, that is, a single
time constant, it can be converted to two time constants. The single time constant is
also used by itself if the p-factor Weighting factor p setting is set to zero and the
time constant value is set to the value of the Long time constant setting. The
thermal image corresponds to the one time constant model in that case.

Table 237: Conversion table between one and two time constants
Single time constant Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) Weighting factor p
(min)
10 1.1 17 0.4
15 1.6 25 0.4
20 2.1 33 0.4
Table continues on next page

615 series 237

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Single time constant Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) Weighting factor p
(min)
25 2.6 41 0.4
30 3.1 49 0.4
35 3.6 58 0.4
40 4.1 60 0.4
45 4.8 75 0.4
50 5.1 82 0.4
55 5.6 90 0.4
60 6.1 98 0.4
65 6.7 107 0.4
70 7.2 115 0.4
75 7.8 124 0.4

The default Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even
though the IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable
temperature in long-time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can
withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even months, which may produce
the winding temperature of 140°C. Therefore, 105°C is a safe maximum
temperature value for a transformer if the Max temperature setting value is not
given by the transformer manufacturer.

4.1.6.6 Signals
Table 238: T2PTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 0 The ambient temperature used in the calculation

Table 239: T2PTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose.

238 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.6.7 Settings
Table 240: T2PTTR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Env temperature Set -50...100 °C 1 40 Ambient temperature used when no
external temperature measurement
available
Current reference 0.05...4.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 The load current leading to Temperature
raise temperature
Temperature rise 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 78.0 End temperature rise above ambient
Max temperature 0.0...200.0 °C 0.1 105.0 Maximum temperature allowed for the
transformer
Operate temperature 80.0...120.0 % 0.1 100.0 Operate temperature, percent value
Alarm temperature 40.0...100.0 % 0.1 90.0 Alarm temperature, percent value
Reclose temperature 40.0...100.0 % 0.1 60.0 Temperature for reset of block reclose
after operate
Short time constant 6...60000 s 1 450 Short time constant in seconds
Long time constant 60...60000 s 1 7200 Long time constant in seconds
Weighting factor p 0.00...1.00 0.01 0.40 Weighting factor of the short time constant

Table 241: T2PTTR Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Initial temperature 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Initial temperature, percent value

4.1.6.8 Monitored data

Table 242: T2PTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated
temperature of the
protected object
TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 The calculated
temperature of the
protected object relative
to the operate level
T_OPERATE INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to operate
T_ENA_CLOSE INT32 0...60000 s Estimated time to
deactivate BLK_CLOSE
in seconds
T2PTTR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

615 series 239

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.6.9 Technical data

Table 243: T2PTTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or

±0.002 x In (at currents in the range of
0.01...4.00 x In)

Operate time accuracy1) ±2.0% of the theoretical value or ±0.50 s

1) Overload current > 1.2 x Operate level temperature

4.1.6.10 Technical revision history

Table 244: T2PTTR Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added the AMB_TEMP input

4.1.7 Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC

4.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist> 51LR

4.1.7.2 Function block

GUID-FA5FAB32-8730-4985-B228-11B92DD9E626 V2 EN

Figure 120: Function block

4.1.7.3 Functionality

The motor load jam protection JAMPTOC is used for protecting the motor in stall
or mechanical jam situations during the running state.

When the motor is started, a separate function is used for the startup protection, and
JAMPTOC is normally blocked during the startup period. When the motor has
passed the starting phase, JAMPTOC monitors the magnitude of phase currents.

240 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

The function starts when the measured current exceeds the breakdown torque level,
that is, above the set limit. The operation characteristic is definite time.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs.

4.1.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the motor load jam protection can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-93025A7F-12BE-4ACD-8BD3-C144CB73F65A V2 EN

Figure 121: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The measured phase currents are compared to the set Start value. The TRMS
values of the phase currents are considered for the level detection. The timer
module is enabled if at least two of the measured phase currents exceed the set
Start value.

Timer
Once activated, the internal START signal is activated. The value is available only
through the Monitored data view. The time characteristic is according to DT. When
the operation timer has reached the Operate delay time value, the OPERATE output
is activated.

When the timer has elapsed but the motor stall condition still exists, the OPERATE
output remains active until the phase currents values drop below the Start value,
that is, until the stall condition persists. If the drop-off situation occurs while the
operating time is still counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time
exceeds the set Reset delay time, the operating timer is reset.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

615 series 241

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.1.7.5 Application

The motor protection during stall is primarily needed to protect the motor from
excessive temperature rise, as the motor draws large currents during the stall phase.
This condition causes a temperature rise in the stator windings. Due to reduced
speed, the temperature also rises in the rotor. The rotor temperature rise is more
critical when the motor stops.

The physical and dielectric insulations of the system deteriorate with age and the
deterioration is accelerated by the temperature increase. Insulation life is related to
the time interval during which the insulation is maintained at a given temperature.

An induction motor stalls when the load torque value exceeds the breakdown
torque value, causing the speed to decrease to zero or to some stable operating
point well below the rated speed. This occurs, for example, when the applied shaft
load is suddenly increased and is greater than the producing motor torque due to
the bearing failures. This condition develops a motor current almost equal to the
value of the locked-rotor current.

JAMPTOC is designed to protect the motor in stall or mechanical jam situations

during the running state. To provide a good and reliable protection for motors in a
stall situation, the temperature effects on the motor have to be kept within the
allowed limits.

4.1.7.6 Signals
Table 245: JAMPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

242 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 246: JAMPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

4.1.7.7 Settings
Table 247: JAMPTOC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Start value 0.10...10.00 xIn 0.01 2.50 Start value
Operate delay time 100...120000 ms 10 2000 Operate delay time
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 100 Reset delay time

4.1.7.8 Monitored data

Table 248: JAMPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START BOOLEAN 0=False Start
1=True
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
JAMPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.1.7.9 Technical data

Table 249: JAMPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Reset time < 40 ms

Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

615 series 243

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.8 Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC

4.1.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 3I< 37

4.1.8.2 Function block

GUID-B7774D44-24DB-48B1-888B-D9E3EA741F23 V2 EN

Figure 122: Function block

4.1.8.3 Functionality

The loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC is used to detect a sudden load loss which
is considered as a fault condition.

LOFLPTUC starts when the current is less than the set limit. It operates with the
definite time (DT) characteristics, which means that the function operates after a
predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.1.8.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the loss of load supervision can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-4A6308B8-47E8-498D-A268-1386EBBBEC8F V1 EN

Figure 123: Functional module diagram

244 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Level detector 1
This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Start value high
setting. If all the phase current values are less than the set Start value high value,
the loss of load condition is detected and an enable signal is sent to the timer. This
signal is disabled after one or several phase currents have exceeded the set Start
value high value of the element.

Level detector 2
This is a low-current detection module, which monitors the de-energized condition
of the motor. It compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Start value low
setting. If any of the phase current values is less than the set Start value low, a
signal is sent to block the operation of the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

The BLOCK signal blocks the operation of the function and resets the timer.

4.1.8.5 Application

When a motor runs with a load connected, it draws a current equal to a value
between the no-load value and the rated current of the motor. The minimum load
current can be determined by studying the characteristics of the connected load.
When the current drawn by the motor is less than the minimum load current drawn,
it can be inferred that the motor is either disconnected from the load or the
coupling mechanism is faulty. If the motor is allowed to run in this condition, it
may aggravate the fault in the coupling mechanism or harm the personnel handling
the machine. Therefore, the motor has to be disconnected from the power supply as
soon as the above condition is detected.

LOFLPTUC detects the condition by monitoring the current values and helps
disconnect the motor from the power supply instantaneously or after a delay
according to the requirement.

When the motor is at standstill, the current will be zero and it is not recommended
to activate the trip during this time. The minimum current drawn by the motor
when it is connected to the power supply is the no load current, that is, the higher
start value current. If the current drawn is below the lower start value current, the
motor is disconnected from the power supply. LOFLPTUC detects this condition

615 series 245

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

and interprets that the motor is de-energized and disables the function to prevent
unnecessary trip events.

4.1.8.6 Signals
Table 250: LOFLPTUC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary outputs by resetting timers

Table 251: LOFLPTUC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.1.8.7 Settings
Table 252: LOFLPTUC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value low 0.01...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.10 Current setting/Start value low
Start value high 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.50 Current setting/Start value high
Operate delay time 400...600000 ms 10 2000 Operate delay time

Table 253: LOFLPTUC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time

4.1.8.8 Monitored data

Table 254: LOFLPTUC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
LOFLPTUC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

246 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.8.9 Technical data

Table 255: LOFLPTUC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time Typical 300 ms

Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 1.04
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

4.1.9 Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR

4.1.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR 3Ith>M 49M

4.1.9.2 Function block

GUID-1EEED1E9-3A6F-4EF3-BDCC-990E648E2E72 V4 EN

Figure 124: Function block

4.1.9.3 Functionality

The thermal overload protection for motors function MPTTR protects the electric
motors from overheating. MPTTR models the thermal behavior of motor on the
basis of the measured load current and disconnects the motor when the thermal
content reaches 100 percent. The thermal overload conditions are the most often
encountered abnormal conditions in industrial motor applications. The thermal
overload conditions are typically the result of an abnormal rise in the motor
running current, which produces an increase in the thermal dissipation of the motor
and temperature or reduces cooling. MPTTR prevents an electric motor from

615 series 247

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

drawing excessive current and overheating, which causes the premature insulation
failures of the windings and, in worst cases, burning out of the motors.

4.1.9.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the motor thermal overload protection function can be described
using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

I_A Max
I_B current
I_C selector
Thermal Alarm and OPERATE
I2 level tripping ALARM
calculator logic BLK_RESTART
Internal
AMB_TEMP FLC
calculator

START_EMERG
BLOCK
GUID-1E5F2337-DA4E-4F5B-8BEB-27353A6734DC V2 EN

Figure 125: Functional module diagram

Max current selector

Max current selector selects the highest measured TRMS phase current and reports
it to Thermal level calculator.

Internal FLC calculator

Full load current (FLC) of the motor is defined by the manufacturer at an ambient
temperature of 40°C. Special considerations are required with an application where
the ambient temperature of a motor exceeds or remains below 40°C. A motor
operating at a higher temperature, even if at or below rated load, can subject the
motor windings to excessive temperature similar to that resulting from overload
operation at normal ambient temperature. The motor rating has to be appropriately
reduced for operation in such high ambient temperatures. Similarly, when the
ambient temperature is considerably lower than the nominal 40°C, the motor can
be slightly overloaded. For calculating thermal level it is better that the FLC values
are scaled for different temperatures. The scaled currents are known as internal
FLC. An internal FLC is calculated based on the ambient temperature shown in the
table. The Env temperature mode setting defines whether the thermal level
calculations are based on FLC or internal FLC.

When the value of the Env temperature mode setting is set to the "FLC Only"
mode, no internal FLC is calculated. Instead, the FLC given in the data sheet of the
manufacturer is used. When the value of the Env temperature mode setting is set to
"Set Amb Temp" mode, the internal FLC is calculated based on the ambient
temperature taken as an input through the Env temperature Set setting. When the

248 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Env temperature mode setting is on "Use input" mode, the internal FLC is
calculated from temperature data available through resistance temperature detectors
(RTDs) using the AMB_TEMP input.

Table 256: Modification of internal FLC

Ambient Temperature Tamb Internal FLC
<20°C FLC x 1.09
20 to <40°C FLC x (1.18 - Tamb x 0.09/20)

40°C FLC
>40 to 65°C FLC x (1 –[(Tamb -40)/100])

>65°C FLC x 0.75

The ambient temperature is used for calculating thermal level and it is available in
the monitored data view from the TEMP_AMB output. The activation of the BLOCK
input does not affect the TEMP_AMB output.

The Env temperature Set setting is used:

• If the ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the
AMB_TEMP input in ACT.
• When the ambient temperature measurement connected to 49M is set to Not in
use in the RTD function.
• In case of any errors or malfunctioning in the RTD output.

Thermal level calculator

The module calculates the thermal load considering the TRMS and negative-
sequence currents. The heating up of the motor is determined by the square value
of the load current.

However, in case of unbalanced phase currents, the negative-sequence current also

causes additional heating. By deploying a protection based on both current
components, abnormal heating of the motor is avoided.

The thermal load is calculated based on different situations or operations and it also
depends on the phase current level. The equations used for the heating calculations
are:

 I  2  I2  
2
θ B =   + K2 × 
 k × I r   k × I r
  × 1− e
 
−t /τ
(
× p% )
 
GUID-526B455A-67DD-46E7-813D-A64EC619F6D7 V2 EN (Equation 10)

 I  2  I2  
2
θ A =   + K2 × 
 k × I r   k × I r
  × 1− e
 
−t /τ
(
× 100% )
 
GUID-9C893D3E-7CAF-4EA6-B92D-C914288D7CFC V2 EN (Equation 11)

615 series 249

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

I TRMS value of the measured max of phase currents

Ir set Rated current, FLC or internal FLC

I2 measured negative sequence current

k set value of Overload factor

K2 set value of Negative Seq factor

p set value of Weighting factor

t time constant

The equation θB is used when the values of all the phase currents are below the
overload limit, that is, k x Ir. The equation θA is used when the value of any one of
the phase currents exceeds the overload limit.

During overload condition, the thermal level calculator calculates the value of θB in
background, and when the overload ends the thermal level is brought linearly from
θA to θB with a speed of 1.66 percent per second. For the motor at standstill, that is,
when the current is below the value of 0.12 x Ir, the cooling is expressed as:

−t
θ = θ02 × e τ
GUID-2C640EA9-DF69-42A9-A6A8-3CD20AEC76BD V2 EN (Equation 12)

θ02 initial thermal level when cooling begins

GUID-A19F9DF2-2F04-401F-AE7A-6CE55F88EB1D V2 EN

Figure 126: Thermal behavior

The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor
are set by the values of the Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings.

In order to accurately calculate the motor thermal condition, different time

constants are used in the above equations. These time constants are employed
based on different motor running conditions, for example starting, normal or stop,

250 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

and are set through the Time constant start, Time constant normal and Time
constant stop settings. Only one time constant is valid at a time.

Table 257: Time constant and the respective phase current values
Time constant (tau) in use Phase current
Time constant start Any current whose value is over 2.5 x Ir

Time constant normal Any current whose value is over 0.12 x Ir and all
currents are below 2.5 x Ir

Time constant stop All the currents whose values are below 0.12 x Ir

The Weighting factor p setting determines the ratio of the thermal increase of the
two curves θA and θB.

The thermal level at the power-up of the IED is defined by the Initial thermal Val
setting.

The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined in the Initial
thermal Val setting. This is done if the IED is powered up or the function is turned
off and back on or reset through the Clear menu.

The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the operate level, the
TEMP_RL output, is available through the monitored data view. The activation of
the BLOCK input does not affect the calculated temperature.

The thermal level at the beginning of the startup condition of a motor and at the
end of the startup condition is available in the monitored data view at the
THERMLEV_ST and THERMLEV_END outputs respectively. The activation of the
BLOCK input does not have any effect on these outputs.

Alarm and tripping logic

The module generates alarm, restart inhibit and tripping signals.

When the thermal level exceeds the set value of the Alarm thermal value setting,
the ALARM output is activated. Sometimes a condition arises when it becomes
necessary to inhibit the restarting of a motor, for example in case of some extreme
starting condition like long starting time. If the thermal content exceeds the set
value of the Restart thermal val setting, the BLK_RESTART output is activated.
The time for the next possible motor startup is available through the monitored data
view from the T_ENARESTART output. The T_ENARESTART output estimates
the time for the BLK_RESTART deactivation considering as if the motor is stopped.

When the emergency start signal START_EMERG is set high, the thermal level is
set to a value below the thermal restart inhibit level. This allows at least one motor
startup, even though the thermal level has exceeded the restart inhibit level.

615 series 251

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

When the thermal content reaches 100 percent, the OPERATE output is activated.
The OPERATE output is deactivated when the value of the measured current falls
below 12 percent of Rated current or the thermal content drops below 100 percent.

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM, BLK_RESTART and
OPERATE outputs.

252 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Tau [s]

3840

1920

960

640

480

320

160

80

GUID-F3D1E6D3-86E9-4C0A-BD43-350003A07292 V1 EN

Figure 127: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor
= 1.05.

615 series 253

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Tau [s]

3840

1920

80 160 320 480 640 960

GUID-44A67C51-E35D-4335-BDBD-5CD0D3F41EF1 V1 EN

Figure 128: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor =
1.05.

254 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Tau [s]

3840

1920

960

640

480

320

80 160

GUID-5CB18A7C-54FC-4836-9049-0CE926F35ADF V1 EN

Figure 129: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05.

615 series 255

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.9.5 Application

MPTTR is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during
the abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor
insulation failure.

The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload, stalling,

failure to start, high ambient temperature, restricted motor ventilation, reduced
speed operation, frequent starting or jogging, high or low line voltage or frequency,
mechanical failure of the driven load, improper installation and unbalanced line
voltage or single phasing. The protection of insulation failure by the
implementation of current sensing cannot detect some of these conditions, such as
restricted ventilation. Similarly, the protection by sensing temperature alone can be
inadequate in cases like frequent starting or jogging. The thermal overload
protection addresses these deficiencies to a larger extent by deploying a motor
thermal model based on load current.

The thermal load is calculated using the true RMS phase value and negative
sequence value of the current. The heating up of the motor is determined by the
square value of the load current. However, while calculating the thermal level, the
rated current should be re-rated or de-rated depending on the value of the ambient
temperature. Apart from current, the rate at which motor heats up or cools is
governed by the time constant of the motor.

Setting the weighting factor

There are two thermal curves: one which characterizes the short-time loads and long-
time overloads and which is also used for tripping and another which is used for
monitoring the thermal condition of the motor. The value of the Weighting factor p
setting determines the ratio of the thermal increase of the two curves.

When the Weighting factor p setting is 100 percent, a pure single time constant
thermal unit is produced which is used for application with the cables. As presented
in Figure 130, the hot curve with the value of Weighting factor p being 100 percent
only allows an operate time which is about 10 percent of that with no prior load.
For example, when the set time constant is 640 seconds, the operate time with the
prior load 1 x FLC (full Load Current) and overload factor 1.05 is only 2 seconds,
even if the motor could withstand at least 5 to 6 seconds. To allow the use of the
full capacity of the motor, a lower value of Weighting factor p should be used.

Normally, an approximate value of half of the thermal capacity is used when the
motor is running at full load. Thus by setting Weighting factor p to 50 percent, the
IED notifies a 45 to 50 percent thermal capacity use at full load.

For direct-on-line started motors with hot spot tendencies, the value of Weighting
factor p is typically set to 50 percent, which will properly distinguish between short-
time thermal stress and long-time thermal history. After a short period of thermal
stress, for example a motor startup, the thermal level starts to decrease quite
sharply, simulating the leveling out of the hot spots. Consequently, the probability
of successive allowed startups increases.

256 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

When protecting the objects without hot spot tendencies, for example motors
started with soft starters, and cables, the value of Weighting factor p is set to 100
percent. With the value of Weighting factor p set to 100 percent, the thermal level
decreases slowly after a heavy load condition. This makes the protection suitable
for applications where no hot spots are expected. Only in special cases where the
thermal overload protection is required to follow the characteristics of the object to
be protected more closely and the thermal capacity of the object is very well
known, a value between 50 and 100 percent is required.

For motor applications where, for example, two hot starts are allowed instead of
three cold starts, the value of the setting Weighting factor p being 40 percent has
proven to be useful. Setting the value of Weighting factor p significantly below 50
percent should be handled carefully as there is a possibility to overload the
protected object as a thermal unit might allow too many hot starts or the thermal
history of the motor has not been taken into account sufficiently.

615 series 257

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

t/s
4000

3000

2000

1000

500

400

300

200

100

50

40

Cold
30
curve

20

10

20
5

4 50

75
2

p
[%]
1.05
100
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 I/Iq
GUID-B6F9E655-4FFC-4B06-841A-68DADE785BF2 V1 EN

Figure 130: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC,

timeconstant = 640 sec, and Overload factor = 1.05

258 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Setting the overload factor

The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The
recommended value is 1.05.

Setting the negative sequence factor

During the unbalance condition, the symmetry of the stator currents is disturbed
and a counter-rotating negative sequence component current is set up. An increased
stator current causes additional heating in the stator and the negative sequence
component current excessive heating in the rotor. Also mechanical problems like
rotor vibration can occur.

The most common cause of unbalance for three-phase motors is the loss of phase
resulting in an open fuse, connector or conductor. Often mechanical problems can
be more severe than the heating effects and therefore a separate unbalance
protection is used.

Unbalances in other connected loads in the same busbar can also affect the motor.
A voltage unbalance typically produces 5 to 7 times higher current unbalance.
Because the thermal overload protection is based on the highest TRMS value of the
phase current, the additional heating in stator winding is automatically taken into
account. For more accurate thermal modeling, the Negative Seq factor setting is
used for taking account of the rotor heating effect.
RR 2
Negative Seq factor =
RR1
GUID-EA5AD510-A3CA-47FB-91F0-75D7272B654E V1 EN (Equation 13)

RR2 rotor negative sequence resistance

RR1 rotor positive sequence resistance

A conservative estimate for the setting can be calculated:

175
Negative Seq factor = 2
I LR
GUID-13CE37C5-295F-41D4-8159-400FA377C84C V1 EN

ILR locked rotor current (multiple of set Rated current). The same as the startup current at the
beginning of the motor startup.

For example, if the rated current of a motor is 230 A, startup current is 5.7 x Ir,

175
Negative Seq factor = = 5.4
5.7 2
GUID-DF682702-E6B1-4814-8B2E-31C28F3A03DF V1 EN

615 series 259

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Setting the thermal restart level

The restart disable level can be calculated as follows:
 startup time of the motor 
θi = 100% −  ×100% + margin 
 operate time when no prior load 
GUID-5B3B714D-8C58-4C5D-910D-A23852BC8B15 V1 EN (Equation 14)

For example, the motor startup time is 11 seconds, start-up current 6 x rated and
Time constant start is set for 800 seconds. Using the trip curve with no prior load,
the operation time at 6 x rated current is 25 seconds, one motor startup uses 11/25
≈ 45 percent of the thermal capacity of the motor. Therefore, the restart disable
level must be set to below 100 percent - 45 percent = 55 percent, for example to 50
percent (100 percent - (45 percent + margin), where margin is 5 percent).

Setting the thermal alarm level

Tripping due to high overload is avoided by reducing the load of the motor on a
prior alarm.

The value of Alarm thermal value is set to a level which allows the use of the full
thermal capacity of the motor without causing a trip due to a long overload time.
Generally, the prior alarm level is set to a value of 80 to 90 percent of the trip level.

4.1.9.6 Signals
Table 258: MPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
START_EMERG BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for indicating the need for emergency start
TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 0 The ambient temperature used in the calculation

Table 259: MPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator, to inhibit restart

260 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.1.9.7 Settings
Table 260: MPTTR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Overload factor 1.00...1.20 0.01 1.05 Overload factor (k)
Alarm thermal value 50.0...100.0 % 0.1 95.0 Thermal level above which function
gives an alarm
Restart thermal Val 20.0...80.0 % 0.1 40.0 Thermal level above which function
inhibits motor restarting
Negative Seq factor 0.0...10.0 0.1 0.0 Heating effect factor for negative
sequence current
Weighting factor p 20.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 Weighting factor (p)
Time constant normal 80...4000 s 1 320 Motor time constant during the normal
operation of motor
Time constant start 80...4000 s 1 320 Motor time constant during the start of
motor
Time constant stop 80...8000 s 1 500 Motor time constant during the standstill
condition of motor
Env temperature mode 1=FLC Only 1=FLC Only Mode of measuring ambient temperature
2=Use input
3=Set Amb Temp
Env temperature Set -20.0...70.0 °C 0.1 40.0 Ambient temperature used when no
external temperature measurement
available

Table 261: MPTTR Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Rated current 0.30...2.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Rated current (FLC) of the motor
Initial thermal Val 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 74.0 Initial thermal level of the motor

615 series 261

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.1.9.8 Monitored data

Table 262: MPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 The calculated
temperature of the
protected object relative
to the operate level
THERMLEV_ST FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at
beginning of motor
startup
THERMLEV_END FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at the end
of motor startup situation
T_ENARESTART INT32 0...99999 s Estimated time to reset
of block restart
MPTTR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.1.9.9 Technical data

Table 263: MPTTR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or

±0.002 x In (at currents in the range of
0.01...4.00 x In)

Operate time accuracy1) ±2.0% of the theoretical value or ±0.50 s

1) Overload current > 1.2 x Operate level temperature

4.1.9.10 Technical revision history

Table 264: MPTTR Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added a new input AMB_TEMP.
Added a new selection for the Env temperature
mode setting "Use input".

262 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.2 Earth-fault protection

4.2.1 Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC

4.2.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFLPTOC Io> 51N-1
Low stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFHPTOC Io>> 51N-2
High stage
Non-directional earth-fault protection - EFIPTOC Io>>> 50N/51N
Instantaneous stage

4.2.1.2 Function block

EFLPTOC EFHPTOC EFIPTOC

Io OPERATE Io OPERATE Io OPERATE
BLOCK START BLOCK START BLOCK START
ENA_MULT ENA_MULT ENA_MULT

A070432 V2 EN

Figure 131: Function block

4.2.1.3 Functionality

The earth-fault function EFxPTOC is used as non-directional earth-fault protection

for feeders.

The function starts and operates when the residual current exceeds the set limit.
The operate time characteristic for low stage EFLPTOC and high stage EFHPTOC
can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT). The instantaneous stage EFIPTOC always operates with the DT
characteristic.

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

615 series 263

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.2.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of non-directional earth-fault protection can be described by using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070437 V3 EN

Figure 132: Functional module diagram. Io represents the residual current.

Level detector
The operating quantity can be selected with the setting Io signal Sel. The selectable
options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io". The operating quantity is compared
to the set Start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level
detector sends an enable-signal to the timer module. If the ENA_MULT input is
active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function
(INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When

264 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during
the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.2.1.5 Measurement modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.

615 series 265

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 265: Measurement modes supported by EFxPTOC stages

Measurement Supported measurement modes
mode EFLPTOC EFHPTOC EFIPTOC
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x x

For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the

Measurement modes section in this manual.

4.2.1.6 Timer characteristics

EFxPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings.
When the DT characteristic is selected, it is only affected by the Operate delay
time and Reset delay time settings.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition
to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are
applicable. The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating
curve type values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is
identical in both cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages:

Table 266: Timer characteristics supported by different stages

Operating curve type Supported by
EFLPTOC EFHPTOC
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x x
(11) IEC Inverse x
Table continues on next page

266 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Operating curve type Supported by

EFLPTOC EFHPTOC
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
curve
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x

EFIPTOC supports only definite time characteristics.

For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block

features section in this manual.

Table 267: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
EFLPTOC EFHPTOC Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all
operate time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all
operate time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to EFIPTOC or when
the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the
Reset delay time setting.

4.2.1.7 Application

EFxPTOC is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults in distribution

and sub-transmission networks where the neutral point is isolated or earthed via a
resonance coil or through low resistance. It also applies to solidly earthed networks
and earth-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems,
such as shunt capacitor bank or shunt reactors and for backup earth-fault protection
of power transformers.

615 series 267

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. EFxPTOC consists of three different protection stages.
• Low EFLPTOC
• High EFHPTOC
• Instantaneous EFIPTOC

EFLPTOC contains several types of time-delay characteristics. EFHPTOC and

EFIPTOC are used for fast clearance of serious earth faults.

4.2.1.8 Signals
Table 268: EFLPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 269: EFHPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 270: EFIPTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 271: EFLPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

Table 272: EFHPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

268 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 273: EFIPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.2.1.9 Settings
Table 274: EFLPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...5.000 xIn 0.005 0.010 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 275: EFLPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Table continues on next page

615 series 269

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated Io

Table 276: EFHPTOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10...40.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 277: EFHPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated Io

270 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 278: EFIPTOC Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 1.00...40.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Operate delay time 20...200000 ms 10 20 Operate delay time

Table 279: EFIPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated Io

4.2.1.10 Monitored data

Table 280: EFLPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
EFLPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 281: EFHPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
EFHPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

Table 282: EFIPTOC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
EFIPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

615 series 271

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.2.1.11 Technical data

Table 283: EFxPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

EFLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

EFHPTOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 x In

and (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 x In)
EFIPTOC ±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 x In)

Start time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

EFIPTOC:
IFault = 2 x set Start 16 ms 19 ms 23 ms
value 11 ms 12 ms 14 ms
IFault = 10 x set Start
value
EFHPTOC and
EFLPTOC: 22 ms 24 ms 25 ms
IFault = 2 x set Start
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 x In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-
fault current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.2.1.12 Technical revision history

Table 284: EFIPTOC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B The minimum and default values changed to 40
ms for the Operate delay time setting
C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms
for the Operate delay time setting
Minimum value changed to 1.00 x In for the Start
value setting.
D Added a setting parameter for the "Measured Io"
or "Calculated Io" selection

272 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 285: EFHPTOC Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Operate delay time setting
C Added a setting parameter for the "Measured Io"
or "Calculated Io" selection
D Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

Table 286: EFLPTOC Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B The minimum and default values changed to 40
ms for the Operate delay time setting
C Start value step changed to 0.005
D Added a setting parameter for the "Measured Io"
or "Calculated Io" selection
E Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

4.2.2 Directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF

4.2.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional earth-fault protection - Low DEFLPDEF Io>-> 67N-1
stage
Directional earth-fault protection - High DEFHPDEF Io>>-> 67N-2
stage

4.2.2.2 Function block

A070433 V2 EN

Figure 133: Function block

615 series 273

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.2.2.3 Functionality

The earth-fault function DEFxPDEF is used as directional earth-fault protection for

feeders.

The function starts and operates when the operating quantity (current) and
polarizing quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is
inside the set operating sector. The operate time characteristic for low stage
(DEFLPDEF) and high stage (DEFHPDEF) can be selected to be either definite
time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets
when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent
timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.2.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of directional earth-fault protection can be described using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070438 V3 EN

Figure 134: Functional module diagram. Io and Uo represent the residual

current and residual voltage. I2 and U2 represent the negative
sequence components for current and voltage.

Level detector
The operating quantity (residual current) can be selected with the setting Io signal
Sel. The selectable options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io" respectively. The
polarizing quantity can be selected with the setting Pol signal Sel. The selectable
options are "Measured Uo", "Calculated Uo" and "Neg. seq. volt". The magnitude
of the operating quantity is compared to the set Start value and the magnitude of

274 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

the polarizing quantity is compared to the set Voltage start value. If both limits are
exceeded, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer module. When
the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "False", Voltage start value has no effect
and the level detection is purely based on the operating quantity. If the ENA_MULT
input is active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.

If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of

the polarizing quantity is checked even if the Directional mode was
set to "Non-directional" or Allow Non Dir to "True". The IED does
not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product
of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

Typically, the ENA_MULT input is connected to the inrush detection function

INRHPAR. In case of inrush, INRPHAR activates the ENA_MULT input, which
multiplies Start value by the Start value Mult setting.

Directional calculation
The directional calculation module monitors the angle between the polarizing
quantity and operating quantity. Depending on the Pol signal Sel setting, the
polarizing quantity can be the residual voltage (measured or calculated) or the
negative sequence voltage. When the angle is in the operation sector, the module
sends the enabling signal to the timer module.

The minimum signal level which allows the directional operation can be set with
the Min operate current and Min operate voltage settings.

If Pol signal Sel is set to "Measured Uo" or "Calculated Uo", the residual current
and residual voltage are used for directional calculation.

If Pol signal Sel is set to "Neg. seq. volt", the negative sequence current and
negative sequence voltage are used for directional calculation.

In the phasor diagrams representing the operation of DEFxPDEF, the polarity of

the polarizing quantity (Uo or U2) is reversed, that is, the polarizing quantity in the
phasor diagrams is either -Uo or -U2. Reversing is done by switching the polarity
of the residual current measuring channel (see the connection diagram in the
application manual). Similarly the polarity of the calculated Io and I2 is also switched.

For defining the operation sector, there are five modes available through the
Operation mode setting.

615 series 275

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 287: Operation modes

Operation mode Description
Phase angle The operating sectors for forward and reverse
are defined with the settings Min forward angle,
Max forward angle, Min reverse angle and Max
reverse angle.
IoSin The operating sectors are defined as "forward"
when |Io| x sin (ANGLE) has a positive value and
"reverse" when the value is negative. ANGLE is
the angle difference between -Uo and Io.
IoCos As "IoSin" mode. Only cosine is used for
calculating the operation current.
Phase angle 80 The sector maximum values are frozen to 80
degrees respectively. Only Min forward angle
and Min reverse angle are settable.
Phase angle 88 The sector maximum values are frozen to 88
degrees. Otherwise as "Phase angle 80" mode.

Polarizing quantity selection "Neg. seq. volt." is available only in

the "Phase angle" operation mode.

The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The
user can select either "Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse" operation. The
operation criterion is selected with the Operation mode setting. By setting Allow
Non Dir to "True", non-directional operation is allowed when the directional
information is invalid, that is, when the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is less
than the value of the Min operate voltage setting.

Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as

"ABC". If the network rotating direction is reversed, meaning clockwise, that is,
"ACB", the equation for calculating the negative sequence voltage component need
to be changed. The network rotating direction is defined with a system parameter
Phase rotation. The calculation of the component is affected but the angle
difference calculation remains the same. When the residual voltage is used as the
polarizing method, the network rotating direction change has no effect on the
direction calculation.

The network rotating direction is set in the IED using the parameter
in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation.
The default parameter value is "ABC".

If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of

the polarizing quantity is checked even if Directional mode is set to
"Non-directional" or Allow Non Dir to "True".

276 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

The Characteristic angle setting is used in the "Phase angle" mode to adjust the
operation according to the method of neutral point earthing so that in an isolated
network the Characteristic angle (φRCA) = -90° and in a compensated network
φRCA = 0°. In addition, the characteristic angle can be changed via the control
signal RCA_CTL. RCA_CTL affects the Characteristic angle setting.

The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity when there are
inaccuracies due to measurement transformers. The setting decreases the operation
sector. The correction can only be used with the "IoCos" or "IoSin" modes.

The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be reversed by setting the Pol reversal
to "True", which turns the polarizing quantity by 180 degrees.

For definitions of different directional earth-fault characteristics,

see the Directional earth-fault characteristics section in this manual.

For definitions of different directional earth-fault characteristics,

refer to general function block features information

The directional calculation module calculates several values which are presented in
the monitored data.

Table 288: Monitored data values

Monitored data values Description
FAULT_DIR The detected direction of fault during fault
situations, that is, when START output is active.

DIRECTION The momentary operating direction indication

output.
ANGLE Also called operating angle, shows the angle
difference between the polarizing quantity (Uo,
U2) and operating quantity (Io, I2).

ANGLE_RCA The angle difference between the operating

angle and Characteristic angle, that is,
ANGLE_RCA = ANGLE – Characteristic angle.
I_OPER The current that is used for fault detection. If the
Operation mode setting is "Phase angle", "Phase
angle 80" or "Phase angle 88", I_OPER is the
measured or calculated residual current. If the
Operation mode setting is "IoSin", I_OPER is
calculated as follows I_OPER = Io x sin(ANGLE).
If the Operation mode setting is "IoCos", I_OPER
is calculated as follows I_OPER = Io x
cos(ANGLE).

Monitored data values are accessible on the LHMI or through tools via
communications.

615 series 277

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during
the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be

278 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal

of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.2.2.5 Directional earth-fault principles

In many cases it is difficult to achieve selective earth-fault protection based on the

magnitude of residual current only. To obtain a selective earth-fault protection
scheme, it is necessary to take the phase angle of Io into account. This is done by
comparing the phase angle of the operating and polarizing quantity.

Relay characteristic angle

The Characteristic angle setting, also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA),
Relay Base Angle or Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), is used in the "Phase angle"
mode to turn the directional characteristic if the expected fault current angle does
not coincide with the polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque. That is,
RCA is the angle between the maximum torque line and polarizing quantity. If the
polarizing quantity is in phase with the maximum torque line, RCA is 0 degrees.
The angle is positive if the operating current lags the polarizing quantity and
negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.

Example 1

The "Phase angle" mode is selected, compensated network (φRCA = 0 deg)

=> Characteristic angle = 0 deg

615 series 279

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-829C6CEB-19F0-4730-AC98-C5528C35A297 V2 EN

Figure 135: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a

compensated network

Example 2

The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly earthed network (φRCA = +60 deg)

=> Characteristic angle = +60 deg

280 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-D72D678C-9C87-4830-BB85-FE00F5EA39C2 V2 EN

Figure 136: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a

solidly earthed network

Example 3

The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg)

=> Characteristic angle = -90 deg

615 series 281

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-67BE307E-576A-44A9-B615-2A3B184A410D V2 EN

Figure 137: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an

isolated network

Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network

In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral
point and earth. The only connection is through the phase-to-earth capacitances
(C0) of phases and leakage resistances (R0). This means that the residual current is
mainly capacitive and has a phase shift of –90 degrees compared to the polarizing
voltage. Consequently, the relay characteristic angle (RCA) should be set to -90
degrees and the operation criteria to "IoSin" or "Phase angle". The width of the
operating sector in the phase angle criteria can be selected with the settings Min
forward angle, Max forward angle, Min reverse angle or Max reverse angle.
Figure 138 illustrates a simplified equivalent circuit for an unearthed network with
an earth fault in phase C.

For definitions of different directional earth-fault characteristics,

see Directional earth-fault principles .

282 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070441 V1 EN

Figure 138: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network

Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network

In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance
coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive
current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the
operation of the IEDs. In this case, the selectivity is based on the measurement of
the active current component. The magnitude of this component is often small and
must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment.
When measuring the resistive part of the residual current, the relay characteristic
angle (RCA) should be set to 0 degrees and the operation criteria to "IoSin" or
"Phase angle". Figure 139 illustrates a simplified equivalent circuit for a
compensated network with an earth fault in phase C.

A070444 V2 EN

Figure 139: Earth-fault situation in a compensated network

The Petersen coil or the earthing resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To
keep the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the characteristic
angle setting accordingly. This can be done with an auxiliary input in the relay
which receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen

615 series 283

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

coil in compensated networks. As a result the characteristic angle is set

automatically to suit the earthing method used. The RCA_CTL input can be used to
change the operation criteria as described in Table 289 and Table 290.

Table 289: Relay characteristic angle control in Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) operation criteria
Operation mode setting: RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
Iosin Actual operation mode: Iosin Actual operation mode: Iocos
Iocos Actual operation mode: Iocos Actual operation mode: Iosin

Table 290: Characteristic angle control in phase angle operation mode

Characteristic RCA_CTL = FALSE RCA_CTL = TRUE
angle setting
-90° φRCA = -90° φRCA = 0°

0° φRCA = 0° φRCA = -90°

Use of the extended phase angle characteristic

The traditional method of adapting the directional earth-fault protection function to
the prevailing neutral earthing conditions is done with the Characteristic angle
setting. In an unearthed network, Characteristic angle is set to -90 degrees and in a
compensated network Characteristic angle is set to 0 degrees. In case the earthing
method of the network is temporarily changed from compensated to unearthed due
to the disconnection of the arc suppression coil, the Characteristic angle setting
should be modified correspondingly. This can be done using the setting groups or
the RCA_CTL input. Alternatively, the operating sector of the directional earth-
fault protection function can be extended to cover the operating sectors of both
neutral earthing principles. Such characteristic is valid for both unearthed and
compensated network and does not require any modification in case the neutral
earthing changes temporarily from the unearthed to compensated network or vice
versa.

The extended phase angle characteristic is created by entering a value of over 90

degrees for the Min forward angle setting; a typical value is 170 degrees (Min
reverse angle in case Directional mode is set to "Reverse"). The Max forward
angle setting should be set to cover the possible measurement inaccuracies of
current and voltage transformers; a typical value is 80 degrees (Max reverse angle
in case Directional mode is set to "Reverse").

284 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070443 V3 EN

Figure 140: Extended operation area in directional earth-fault protection

4.2.2.6 Measurement modes

The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and
"Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode
setting.

Table 291: Measurement modes supported by DEFxPDEF stages

Measurement mode Supported measurement modes
DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF
RMS x x
DFT x x
Peak-to-Peak x x

For a detailed description of the measurement modes, see the

Measurement modes section in this manual.

615 series 285

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.2.2.7 Timer characteristics

DEFxPDEF supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The user can select the
timer characteristics with the Operating curve type setting.

The IED provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves, of which seven comply with the
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the
special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition
to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are
applicable. The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating
curve type values "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". The functionality is
identical in both cases.

The following characteristics, which comply with the list in the IEC 61850-7-4
specification, indicate the characteristics supported by different stages.

Table 292: Timer characteristics supported by different stages

Operating curve type Supported by
DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse x x
(2) ANSI Very Inverse x
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse x x
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse x
(5) ANSI Definite Time x x
(6) Long Time Extremely x
Inverse
(7) Long Time Very Inverse x
(8) Long Time Inverse x
(9) IEC Normal Inverse x
(10) IEC Very Inverse x
(11) IEC Inverse x
(12) IEC Extremely Inverse x
(13) IEC Short Time Inverse x
(14) IEC Long Time Inverse x
(15) IEC Definite Time x x
(17) User programmable x x
curve
(18) RI type x
(19) RD type x

For a detailed description of the timers, see the General function

block features section in this manual.

286 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 293: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages

Reset curve type Supported by
DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note
(1) Immediate x x Available for all
operate time curves
(2) Def time reset x x Available for all
operate time curves
(3) Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI
and user
programmable curves

4.2.2.8 Directional earth-fault characteristics

Phase angle characteristic

The operation criterion phase angle is selected with the Operation mode setting
using the value "Phase angle".

When the phase angle criterion is used, the function indicates with the
DIRECTION output whether the operating quantity is within the forward or
reverse operation sector or within the non-directional sector.

The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area
is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse
operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings.

The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.

In the forward operation area, the Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise
sector and the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise
sector, measured from the Characteristic angle setting.

In the reverse operation area, the Max reverse angle setting gives the clockwise
sector and the Min reverse angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise
sector, measured from the complement of the Characteristic angle setting (180
degrees phase shift) .

The relay characteristic angle (RCA) is set to positive if the operating current lags
the polarizing quantity. It is set to negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.

615 series 287

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-92004AD5-05AA-4306-9574-9ED8D51524B4 V2 EN

Figure 141: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic

Table 294: Momentary operating direction

Fault direction The value for DIRECTION
Angle between the polarizing and operating 0 = unknown
quantity is not in any of the defined sectors.
Angle between the polarizing and operating 1= forward
quantity is in the forward sector.
Angle between the polarizing and operating 2 = backward
quantity is in the reverse sector.
Angle between the polarizing and operating 3 = both
quantity is in both the forward and the reverse
sectors, that is, the sectors are overlapping.

If the Allow Non Dir setting is "False", the directional operation (forward, reverse)
is not allowed when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are invalid,
that is, their magnitude is below the set minimum values. The minimum values can
be defined with the settings Min operate current and Min operate voltage. In case
of low magnitudes, the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 =
unknown, except when the Allow non dir setting is "True". In that case, the

288 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

function is allowed to operate in the directional mode as non-directional, since the

directional information is invalid.

Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria

A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current
measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on
the earthing principle of the network. The Iosin(φ) characteristics is used in an
isolated network, measuring the reactive component of the fault current caused by
the earth capacitance. The Iocos(φ) characteristics is used in a compensated
network, measuring the active component of the fault current.

The operation criteria Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) are selected with the Operation mode
setting using the values "IoSin" or "IoCos" respectively.

The angle correction setting can be used to improve selectivity. The setting
decreases the operation sector. The correction can only be used with the Iosin(φ) or
Iocos(φ) criterion. The RCA_CTL input is used to change the Io characteristic:

Table 295: Relay characteristic angle control in the IoSin and IoCos operation criteria
Operation mode: RCA_CTL = "False" RCA_CTL = "True"
IoSin Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion:
Iosin(φ) Iocos(φ)
IoCos Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion:
Iocos(φ) Iosin(φ)

When the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) criterion is used, the component indicates a forward-
or reverse-type fault through the FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs, in which
1 equals a forward fault and 2 equals a reverse fault. Directional operation is not
allowed (the Allow non dir setting is "False") when the measured polarizing or
operating quantities are not valid, that is, when their magnitude is below the set
minimum values. The minimum values can be defined with the Min operate
current and Min operate voltage settings. In case of low magnitude, the
FAULT_DIR and DIRECTION outputs are set to 0 = unknown, except when the
Allow non dir setting is "True". In that case, the function is allowed to operate in
the directional mode as non-directional, since the directional information is invalid.

The calculated Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) current used in direction determination can be

read through the I_OPER monitored data. The value can be passed directly to a
decisive element, which provides the final start and operate signals.

The I_OPER monitored data gives an absolute value of the

calculated current.

The following examples show the characteristics of the different operation criteria:

Example 1.

615 series 289

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Iosin(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 1

GUID-560EFC3C-34BF-4852-BF8C-E3A2A7750275 V2 EN

Figure 142: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault

The operating sector is limited by Angle correction, that is, the operating sector is
180 degrees - 2*(Angle correction).

Example 2.

Iosin(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 2

290 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-10A890BE-8C81-45B2-9299-77DD764171E1 V2 EN

Figure 143: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault

Example 3.

Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 1

GUID-11E40C1F-6245-4532-9199-2E2F1D9B45E4 V2 EN

Figure 144: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault

Example 4.

615 series 291

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault

=> FAULT_DIR = 2

GUID-54ACB854-F11D-4AF2-8BDB-69E5F6C13EF1 V2 EN

Figure 145: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault

Phase angle 80
The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting
by using the value "Phase angle 80".

Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they
have a fixed value of 80 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.

The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low
current amplitudes. When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the
nominal current, the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side. This
makes the protection more selective, which means that the phase angle
measurement errors do not cause faulty operation.

There is no sector rounding on the other side of the sector.

292 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-EFC9438D-9169-4733-9BE9-6B343F37001A V2 EN

Figure 146: Operating characteristic for phase angle 80

Io / % of In

10
Min forward angle 80 deg
9
8
7
6
Operating zone
4
3 3% of In
2 70 deg
Non- 1 1% of In
operating
zone -90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-49D23ADF-4DA0-4F7A-8020-757F32928E60 V2 EN

Figure 147: Phase angle 80 amplitude (Directional mode = Forward)

Phase angle 88
The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the Operation mode setting
using the value "Phase angle 88".

615 series 293

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the
following differences:
• The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they
have a fixed value of 88 degrees
• The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded.

Sector rounding in the phase angle 88 consists of three parts:

• If the current amplitude is between 1...20 percent of the nominal current, the
sector limit increases linearly from 73 degrees to 85 degrees
• If the current amplitude is between 20...100 percent of the nominal current, the
sector limit increases linearly from 85 degrees to 88 degrees
• If the current amplitude is more than 100 percent of the nominal current, the
sector limit is 88 degrees.

There is no sector rounding on the other side of the sector.

GUID-0F0560B7-943E-4CED-A4B8-A561BAE08956 V2 EN

Figure 148: Operating characteristic for phase angle 88

294 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Io / % of In
88 deg
100 100% of In
Min forward angle
90
80
70

50
40
30 85 deg
20 20% of In
10 73 deg
1% of In
-90 -75 -60 -45 -30 -15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90
GUID-F9F1619D-E1B5-4650-A5CB-B62A7F6B0A90 V2 EN

Figure 149: Phase angle 88 amplitude (Directional mode = Forward)

4.2.2.9 Application

The directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF is designed for protection and

clearance of earth faults and for earth-fault protection of different equipment
connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors,
and for backup earth-fault protection of power transformers.

Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time
delays. DEFxPDEF consists of two different stages.
• Low DEFLPDEF
• High DEFHPDEF

DEFLPDEF contains several types of time delay characteristics. DEFHPDEF is

used for fast clearance of serious earth faults.

The protection can be based on the phase angle criterion with extended operating
sector. It can also be based on measuring either the reactive part Iosin(φ) or the
active part Iocos(φ) of the residual current. In isolated networks or in networks
with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly
smaller than the short-circuit currents. In addition, the magnitude of the fault
current is almost independent of the fault location in the network.

The function uses the residual current components Iocos(φ) or Iosin(φ) according
to the earthing method, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the
reference residual voltage (-Uo). In compensated networks, the phase angle
criterion with extended operating sector can also be used. When the relay
characteristic angle RCA is 0 degrees, the negative quadrant of the operation sector
can be extended with the Min forward angle setting. The operation sector can be
set between 0 and -180 degrees, so that the total operation sector is from +90 to
-180 degrees. In other words, the sector can be up to 270 degrees wide. This allows

615 series 295

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

the protection settings to stay the same when the resonance coil is disconnected
from between the neutral point and earth.

System neutral earthing is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce
interference for example in telecommunication systems. The neutral earthing sets
challenges for protection systems, especially for earth-fault protection.

In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral

point and earth. The only connection is through the line-to-earth capacitances (C0)
of phases and leakage resistances (R0). This means that the residual current is
mainly capacitive and has –90 degrees phase shift compared to the residual voltage
(-Uo). The characteristic angle is -90 degrees.

In resonance-earthed networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive

resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on
the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would
disturb the operation of the relays. In this case, the selectivity is based on the
measurement of the active current component. This means that the residual current
is mainly resistive and has zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage (-Uo)
and the characteristic angle is 0 degrees. Often the magnitude of this component is
small, and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation
equipment.

In networks where the neutral point is earthed through low resistance, the
characteristic angle is also 0 degrees (for phase angle). Alternatively, Iocos(φ)
operation can be used.

In solidly earthed networks, the Characteristic angle is typically set to +60 degrees
for the phase angle. Alternatively, Iosin(φ) operation can be used with a reversal
polarizing quantity. The polarizing quantity can be rotated 180 degrees by setting
the Pol reversal parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual
voltage measurement wires. Although the Iosin(φ) operation can be used in solidly
earthed networks, the phase angle is recommended.

Connection of measuring transformers in directional earth fault

applications
The residual current Io can be measured with a core balance current transformer or
the residual connection of the phase current signals. If the neutral of the network is
either isolated or earthed with high impedance, a core balance current transformer
is recommended to be used in earth-fault protection. To ensure sufficient accuracy
of residual current measurements and consequently the selectivity of the scheme,
the core balance current transformers should have a transformation ratio of at least
70:1. Lower transformation ratios such as 50:1 or 50:5 are not recommended.

Attention should be paid to make sure the measuring transformers are connected
correctly so that DEFxPDEF is able to detect the fault current direction without
failure. As directional earth fault uses residual current and residual voltage (-Uo),
the poles of the measuring transformers must match each other and also the fault
current direction. Also the earthing of the cable sheath must be taken into notice

296 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

when using core balance current transformers. The following figure describes how
measuring transformers can be connected to the IED.

A070697 V2 EN

Figure 150: Connection of measuring transformers

4.2.2.10 Signals
Table 296: DEFLPDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0=False Relay characteristic angle control

Table 297: DEFHPDEF Input signals

Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier
RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0=False Relay characteristic angle control

615 series 297

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 298: DEFLPDEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

Table 299: DEFHPDEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.2.2.11 Settings
Table 300: DEFLPDEF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...5.000 xIn 0.005 0.010 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Operate delay time 60...200000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time
Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria
2=IoSin
3=IoCos
4=Phase angle 80
5=Phase angle 88
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 -90 Characteristic angle
Max forward angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Table continues on next page

298 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Max reverse angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min forward angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Voltage start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.010 Voltage start value
Enable voltage limit 0=False 1=True Enable voltage limit
1=True

Table 301: DEFLPDEF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 60...60000 ms 1 60 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
1=True info is invalid
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Min operate current 0.005...1.000 xIn 0.001 0.005 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Correction angle 0.0...10.0 deg 0.1 0.0 Angle correction
Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity
1=True
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated Io
Pol signal Sel 1=Measured Uo 1=Measured Uo Selection for used polarization signal
2=Calculated Uo
3=Neg. seq. volt.

615 series 299

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 302: DEFHPDEF Group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.10...40.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria
2=IoSin
3=IoCos
4=Phase angle 80
5=Phase angle 88
Characteristic angle -179...180 deg 1 -90 Characteristic angle
Max forward angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward
direction
Max reverse angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse
direction
Min forward angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction
Min reverse angle 0...180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction
Voltage start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.010 Voltage start value
Enable voltage limit 0=False 1=True Enable voltage limit
1=True

Table 303: DEFHPDEF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Minimum operate time 40...60000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Allow Non Dir 0=False 0=False Allows prot activation as non-dir when dir
1=True info is invalid
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
3=Peak-to-Peak
Min operate current 0.005...1.000 xIn 0.001 0.005 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Correction angle 0.0...10.0 deg 0.1 0.0 Angle correction
Table continues on next page

300 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity
1=True
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated Io
Pol signal Sel 1=Measured Uo 1=Measured Uo Selection for used polarization signal
2=Calculated Uo
3=Neg. seq. volt.

4.2.2.12 Monitored data

Table 304: DEFLPDEF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle between operating
angle and characteristic
angle
ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle between
polarizing and operating
quantity
I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Calculated operating
current
DEFLPDEF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

615 series 301

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 305: DEFHPDEF Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle between operating
angle and characteristic
angle
ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Angle between
polarizing and operating
quantity
I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Calculated operating
current
DEFHPDEF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.2.2.13 Technical data

Table 306: DEFxPDEF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

DEFLPDEF Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
Voltage
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un
Phase angle:
±2°
DEFHPDEF Current:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 x In)
±5.0% of the set value
(at currents in the range of 10…40 x In)
Voltage:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un
Phase angle:
±2°
Table continues on next page

302 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Start time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum
DEFHPDEF
IFault = 2 x set Start 42 ms 44 ms 46 ms
value
DEFLPDEF 61 ms 64 ms 66 ms
IFault = 2 x set Start
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 30 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression
DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
Peak-to-Peak: No suppression

1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 x In, fn = 50 Hz, earth-
fault current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.2.2.14 Technical revision history

Table 307: DEFHPDEF Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max
forward angle setting
C Added a setting parameter for the "Measured Io"
or "Calculated Io" selection and setting
parameter for the "Measured Uo", "Calculated
Uo" or "Neg. seq. volt." selection for polarization.
Operate delay time and Minimum operate time
changed from 60 ms to 40 ms. The sector
default setting values are changed from 88
degrees to 80 degrees.
D Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

615 series 303

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 308: DEFLPDEF Technical revision history

Technical revision Change
B Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max
forward angle setting.
Start value step changed to 0.005
C Added a setting parameter for the "Measured Io"
or "Calculated Io" selection and setting
parameter for the "Measured Uo", "Calculated
Uo" or "Neg. seq. volt." selection for polarization.
The sector default setting values are changed
from 88 degrees to 80 degrees.
D Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

4.2.3 Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF

4.2.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Transient/intermittent earth-fault INTRPTEF Io> ->IEF 67NIEF
protection

4.2.3.2 Function block

A070663 V2 EN

Figure 151: Function block

4.2.3.3 Functionality

The transient/intermittent measuring earth-fault protection INTRPTEF is a function

designed for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent earth faults
in distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is done from the
residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients.

The operating time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

304 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of transient/intermittent earth-fault protection can be described with

a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

Fault Timer 1
Io OPERATE
Transient t
indication
detector
Uo logic START

Timer 2
Level
BLK_EF
detector

Blocking
BLOCK
logic

A070661 V4 EN

Figure 152: Functional module diagram. Io and Uo stand for residual current
and residual voltage

Level detector
The Level detector module compares the measured residual voltage to the set
Voltage start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Voltage start value, the
module reports the exceeding of the value to the Fault indication logic.

Transient detector
The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual
current and residual voltage signals.

The sensitivity of the transient detection can be adjusted with the Min operate
current setting. This setting should be set based on the value of the parallel resistor
of the coil, with security margin. For example, if the resistive current of the parallel
resistor is 10 A, then a value of 0.7*10 A = 7 A could be used. The same setting is
also applicable in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes unearthed.
Generally, a smaller value should be used and it must never exceed the value of the
parallel resistor in order to allow operation of the faulted feeder.

Fault indication logic

Depending on the set Operation mode, INTRPTEF has two independent modes for
detecting earth faults. The "Transient EF" mode is intended to detect all kinds of

615 series 305

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

earth faults. The "Intermittent EF" mode is dedicated for detecting intermittent
earth faults in cable networks.

Traditional earth fault protection should always be used in parallel

with the INTRPTEF function.

The Fault indication logic module determines the direction of the fault. When
Directional mode setting "Forward" is used, the protection operates when the fault
is in the protected feeder. When Directional mode setting "Reverse" is used, the
protection operates when the fault is outside the protected feeder (in the
background network). If the direction has no importance, the value "Non-
directional" can be selected. The detected fault direction (FAULT_DIR) is
available in the monitored data view.

In the "Transient EF" mode, when the start transient of the fault is detected and the
Uo level exceeds the set Voltage start value, Timer 1 is activated. Timer 1 is kept
activated until the Uo level exceeds the set value or in case of a drop-off, the drop-
off duration is shorter than the set Reset delay time.

In the "Intermittent EF" mode, the Timer 1 is activated from the first detected
transient. When a required number of intermittent earth-fault transients set with the
Peak counter limit setting are detected without the function being reset (depends on
the drop-off time set with the Reset delay time setting), the START output is
activated. The Timer 1 is kept activated as long as transients are occurring during
the drop-off time Reset delay time.

Timer 1
The time characteristic is according to DT. In the "Transient EF" mode, the
OPERATE output is activated after Operate delay time if the residual voltage
exceeds the set Voltage start value.

In the "Intermittent EF" mode the OPERATE output is activated when the
following conditions are fulfilled:

• the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the Peak counter
limit setting
• the timer has reached the time set with the Operate delay time
• and one additional transient is detected during the drop-off cycle

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Timer 2
If the function is used in the directional mode and an opposite direction transient is
detected, the BLK_EF output is activated for the fixed delay time of 25 ms. If the
START output is activated when the BLK_EF output is active, the BLK_EF output
is deactivated.

306 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the Freeze timers mode,
the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the Block all mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the Block OPERATE output
mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.

4.2.3.5 Application

INTRPTEF is an earth-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and

permanent earth faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks.
Fault detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by
monitoring the transients with predefined criteria. As the function has a dedicated
purpose for the fault types, fast detection and clearance of the faults can be achieved.

Intermittent earth fault

Intermittent earth fault is a special type of fault that is encountered especially in
compensated networks with underground cables. A typical reason for this type of
fault is the deterioration of cable insulation either due to mechanical stress or due
to insulation material aging process where water or moisture gradually penetrates
the cable insulation. This eventually reduces the voltage withstand of the
insulation, leading to a series of cable insulation breakdowns. The fault is initiated
as the phase-to-earth voltage exceeds the reduced insulation level of the fault point
and mostly extinguishes itself as the fault current drops to zero for the first time, as
shown in Figure 153. As a result, very short transients, that is, rapid changes in the
form of spikes in residual current (Io) and in residual voltage (Uo), can be
repeatedly measured. Typically, the fault resistance in case of an intermittent earth
fault is only a few ohms.

615 series 307

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Residual current Io and residual voltage Uo

COMP. COIL
Iov
Re (Healthy
K Feeder)
0.1

Residual Voltage x 10 (kV)

FEEDER FEEDER MEAS

2
Residual Current (kA)
INCOMER
0

Uo
Ictot Ioj Iov -0.1 Uo
Pulse width
400 - 800 s
Fault -0.2
Point UUtres R Ioj
tres f Pulse interval
(Faulty 5 - 300 ms
Feeder)
-0.3
Peak value
~0.1 ... 5 kA
GUID-415078AD-21B3-4103-9622-712BB88F274A V2 EN

Figure 153: Typical intermittent earth-fault characteristics

Earth-fault transients
In general, earth faults generate transients in currents and voltages. There are
several factors that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients, such as
the fault moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the
parameters of the feeders and the supplying transformers. In the fault initiation, the
voltage of the faulty phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is
discharged to earth (→ discharge transients). At the same time, the voltages of the
healthy phases increase and the related capacitances are charged (→ charge transient).

If the fault is permanent (non-transient) in nature, only the initial fault transient in
current and voltage can be measured, whereas the intermittent fault creates
repetitive transients.

308 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-CC4ADDEA-EE11-4011-B184-F873473EBA9F V1 EN

Figure 154: Example of earth-fault transients, including discharge and charge

transient components, when a permanent fault occurs in a 20 kV
network in phase C

4.2.3.6 Signals
Table 309: INTRPTEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 310: INTRPTEF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
BLK_EF BOOLEAN Block signal for EF to indicate opposite direction
peaks

4.2.3.7 Settings
Table 311: INTRPTEF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Operate delay time 40...1200000 ms 10 500 Operate delay time
Voltage start value 0.10...0.50 xUn 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value for transient EF

615 series 309

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 312: INTRPTEF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operation mode 1=Intermittent EF 1=Intermittent EF Operation criteria
2=Transient EF
Reset delay time 40...60000 ms 1 500 Reset delay time
Peak counter limit 2...20 2 Min requirement for peak counter before
start in IEF mode
Min operate current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current for transient
detector

4.2.3.8 Monitored data

Table 313: INTRPTEF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
INTRPTEF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.2.3.9 Technical data

Table 314: INTRPTEF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy (Uo criteria with transient Depending on the frequency of the current
protection) measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Uo

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5

310 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.3.10 Technical revision history

Table 315: INTRPTEF Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Operate delay time setting
C The Minimum operate current setting is added.
Correction in IEC61850 mapping: DO BlkEF
renamed to InhEF. Minimum value changed from
0.01 to 0.10 (default changed from 0.01 to 0.20)
for the Voltage start value setting. Minimum
value changed from 0 ms to 40 ms for the Reset
delay time setting.

4.2.4 Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM

4.2.4.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM Yo>-> 21YN

4.2.4.2 Function block

GUID-70A9F388-3588-4550-A291-CB0E74E95F6E V1 EN

Figure 155: Function block

4.2.4.3 Functionality

The admittance-based earth-fault protection function EFPADM provides a

selective earth-fault protection function for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and
compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as
well as with underground cables. It can be used as an alternative solution to
traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection functions, such as the IoCos
mode in DEFxPDEF. Main advantages of EFPADM include a versatile
applicability, good sensitivity and easy setting principles.

EFPADM is based on evaluating the neutral admittance of the network, that is, the
quotient:

615 series 311

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Yo = Io / −Uo
GUID-F8BBC6A4-47BB-4FCB-A2E0-87FD46073AAF V1 EN (Equation 15)

The measured admittance is compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries

in the admittance plane. The supported characteristics include overadmittance,
oversusceptance, overconductance or any combination of the three. The
directionality of the oversusceptance and overconductance criteria can be defined
as forward, reverse or non-directional, and the boundary lines can be tilted if
required by the application. This allows the optimization of the shape of the
admittance characteristics for any given application.

EFPADM supports two calculation algorithms for admittance. The admittance

calculation can be set to include or exclude the prefault zero-sequence values of Io
and Uo. Furthermore, the calculated admittance is recorded at the time of the trip
and it can be monitored for post-fault analysis purposes.

To ensure the security of the protection, the admittance calculation is supervised by

a residual overvoltage condition which releases the admittance protection during a
fault condition. Alternatively, the release signal can be provided by an external
binary signal.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.2.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the admittance-based earth-fault protection can be described using

a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

Timer
Io OPERATE
Neutral
Operation t
admittance
characteristics
calculation
Uo START

RELEASE
Blocking
BLOCK logic

GUID-BAD34871-A440-433D-8101-022E1E245A0D V1 EN

Figure 156: Functional module diagram

Neutral admittance calculation

The function can operate on the measured or calculated residual quantities. The
residual current can be selected with the Io signal Sel setting. The selectable
options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io". Respectively, the residual voltage
can be selected with the Uo signal Sel setting. The selectable options are
"Measured Uo" and "Calculated Uo".

312 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start value, an earth
fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.

To ensure a sufficient accuracy for the Io and Uo measurements, it is required that

the residual voltage exceeds the value set by Min operate voltage. If the admittance
calculation mode is "Delta", the minimum change in the residual voltage due to a
fault must be 0.01 xUn to enable the operation. Similarly, the residual current must
exceed the value set by Min operate current.

The polarity of the polarizing quantity Uo can be changed, that is,

rotated by 180 degrees, by setting the Pol reversal parameter to
"True" or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage
measurement wires.

As an alternative for the internal residual overvoltage-based start condition, the

neutral admittance protection can also be externally released by utilizing the
RELEASE input.

When Admittance Clc mode is set to "Delta", the external logic used must be able
to give RELEASE in less than 0.1 s. Otherwise the collected pre-fault values are
overwritten with fault time values. If it is slower, Admittance Clc mode must be set
to “Normal”.

Neutral admittance is calculated as the quotient between the residual current and
residual voltage (polarity reversed) fundamental frequency phasors. The
Admittance Clc mode setting defines the calculation mode:

Admittance Clc mode = "Normal"

Io fault
Yo =
−Uo fault
GUID-B1E03EA1-E958-43F3-8A28-2D268138DE36 V1 EN (Equation 16)

Admittance Clc mode = "Delta"

Io fault − Io prefault ∆ Io
Yo = =
−(Uo fault − Uo prefault ) − ∆Uo
GUID-B0611FF1-46FD-4E81-A11D-4721F0AF7BF8 V1 EN (Equation 17)

Yo Calculated neutral admittance [Siemens]

Iofault Residual current during the fault [Amperes]

Uofault Residual voltage during the fault [Volts]

Ioprefault Prefault residual current [Amperes]

Uoprefault Prefault residual voltage [Volts]

ΔIo Change in the residual current due to fault [Amperes]

ΔUo Change in the residual voltage due to fault [Volts]

615 series 313

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Traditionally, admittance calculation is done with the calculation mode "Normal",

that is, with the current and voltage values directly measured during the fault. As
an alternative, by selecting the calculation mode "Delta", the prefault zero-
sequence asymmetry of the network can be removed from the admittance
calculation. Theoretically, this makes the admittance calculation totally immune to
fault resistance, that is, the estimated admittance value is not affected by fault
resistance. Utilization of the change in Uo and Io due to a fault in the admittance
calculation also mitigates the effects of the VT and CT measurement errors, thus
improving the measuring accuracy, the sensitivity and the selectivity of the protection.

Calculation mode "Delta" is recommended in case a high sensitivity

of the protection is required, if the network has a high degree of
asymmetry during the healthy state or if the residual current
measurement is based on sum connection, that is, the Holmgren
connection.

Neutral admittance calculation produces the following values during forward and
reverse faults:

Fault in reverse direction, that is, outside the protected feeder:

Yo = −Y Fdtot
GUID-B6E3F720-1F9F-4C11-A5DC-722838E8CCDA V1 EN (Equation 18)

I eFd
≈ −j⋅
U ph
GUID-19AA418B-9A0A-4CEE-8772-0CD3F595E63F V1 EN (Equation 19)

YFdtot Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (YFdA, YFdB, YFdC) of the protected feeder

IeFd Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is
zero ohm
Uph Magnitude of the nominal phase-to-earth voltage of the system

Equation 18 shows that in case of outside faults, the measured admittance equals
the admittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign. The measured
admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured
admittance is due to the leakage losses of the feeder. Theoretically, the measured
admittance is located in the third quadrant in the admittance plane close to the
im(Yo) axis, see Figure 157.

The result of Equation 18 is valid regardless of the neutral earthing

method. In compensated networks the compensation degree does
not affect the result. This enables a straightforward setting principle
for the neutral admittance protection: admittance characteristic is
set to cover the value Yo = –YFdtot with a suitable margin.

314 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Due to inaccuracies in voltage and current measurement, the small

real part of the calculated neutral admittance may appear as
positive, which brings the measured admittance in the fourth
quadrant in the admittance plane. This should be considered when
setting the admittance characteristic.

Io
A B C
Protected feeder

EA
~ YFd
EB

EC
~
~ Background network
Rn
Uo
Lcc Reverse
Rcc Fault
YBg

(IeTot - IeFd) IeFd

Im(Yo)

Re(Yo)
Reverse fault:
Yo ≈ -j*IeFd/Uph

GUID-B852BF65-9C03-49F2-8FA9-E958EB37FF13 V1 EN

Figure 157: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault

RCC Resistance of the parallel resistor

LCC Inductance of the compensation coil

Rn Resistance of the neutral earthing resistor

YFd Phase-to-earth admittance of the protected feeder

YBg Phase-to-earth admittance of the background network

615 series 315

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

For example, in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the earth-

fault current in the protected feeder being 10 A (Rf = 0 ohm), the theoretical value
for the measured admittance during an earth fault in the reverse direction, that is,
outside the protected feeder, can be calculated:

I eFd 10 A
Yo ≈ − j ⋅ = −j⋅ = − j ⋅ 1.15 milliSiemens
U ph 15 3kV
GUID-E2A45F20-9821-436E-94F1-F0BFCB78A1E3 V1 EN (Equation 20)

The result is valid regardless of the neutral earthing method.

In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses
of the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close
to zero. Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real
part of the apparent neutral admittance may appear positive. This should be
considered in the setting of the admittance characteristic.

Fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder:

Unearthed network:

Yo = Y Bgtot
GUID-5F1D2145-3C0F-4F8F-9E17-5B88C1822566 V1 EN (Equation 21)

I −I 
≈ j ⋅  eTot eFd 
 U ph 
 
GUID-0B7C9BA9-B41B-4825-9C1B-F8F36640B693 V1 EN (Equation 22)

Compensated network:

Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC
GUID-F3810944-D0E1-4C9A-A99B-8409F4D3CF05 V1 EN (Equation 23)

I Rcc + j ⋅ ( I eTot ⋅ (1 − K ) − I eFd )

≈
U ph
GUID-208EA80C-62B6-46E0-8A5B-DC425F0FE122 V1 EN (Equation 24)

High-resistance earthed network:

Yo = Y Bgtot + Y Rn
GUID-F91DA4E4-F439-4BFA-AA0D-5839B1574946 V1 EN (Equation 25)

316 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

I Rn + j ⋅ ( I eTot − I eFd )
≈
U ph
GUID-CAA0C492-20CF-406C-80AC-8301375AB454 V1 EN (Equation 26)

YBgtot Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances (YBgA, YBgB, YBgC) of the background network

YCC Admittance of the earthing arrangement (compensation coil and parallel resistor)

IRcc Rated current of the parallel resistor

IeFd Magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm

IeTot Magnitude of the uncompensated earth-fault current of the network when Rf is zero ohm

K Compensation degree, K = 1 full resonance, K<1 undercompensated, K>1 overcompensated

IRn Rated current of the neutral earthing resistor

Equation 21 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in unearthed
networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background
network. The admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the
measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network.
Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first quadrant in the
admittance plane, close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 158.

Equation 23 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in

compensated networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the
background network and the coil including the parallel resistor. Basically, the
compensation degree determines the imaginary part of the measured admittance
and the resistive part is due to the parallel resistor of the coil and the leakage losses
of the background network and the losses of the coil. Theoretically, the measured
admittance is located in the first or fourth quadrant in the admittance plane,
depending on the compensation degree, see Figure 158.

Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the

measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background
network and the losses of the coil. As they are typically small, the
resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the
discrimination of the fault and its direction based on the measured
conductance. This and the rating and the operation logic of the
parallel resistor should be considered when setting the admittance
characteristic in compensated networks.

Equation 25 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in high-
resistance earthed systems, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the
background network and the neutral earthing resistor. Basically, the imaginary part
of the measured admittance is due to the phase-to-earth capacitances of the
background network, and the resistive part is due to the neutral earthing resistor
and the leakage losses of the background network. Theoretically, the measured
admittance is located in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, see Figure 158.

615 series 317

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Io
A B C
Protected feeder
Forward
Fault
EA
~ YFd
EB

EC
~
IeFd IeTot
~ Background network
Rn
Uo
Lcc
Rcc
YBg (IeTot - IeFd)

Forward fault,
high resistance earthed network:
Yo ≈ (IRn+j*(IeTot-IeFd))/Uph
Im(Yo)

Forward fault,
unearthed network:
Yo ≈ j*(IeTot-IeFd)/Uph
Under-comp. (K<1)

Re(Yo)
Resonance (K=1)
Reverse fault:
Yo ≈ -j*IeFd/Uph
Over-comp. (K>1)

Forward fault, compensated network:

Yo ≈ (Ircc + j*(IeTot*(1-K) - IeFd))/Uph
GUID-5DB19698-38F9-433E-954F-4EBDBA5B63BD V1 EN

Figure 158: Admittance calculation during a forward fault

When the network is fully compensated in compensated networks,

theoretically during a forward fault the imaginary part of the
measured admittance equals the susceptance of the protected feeder
with a negative sign. The discrimination between a forward and
reverse fault must therefore be based on the real part of the
measured admittance, that is, conductance. Thus, the best

318 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

selectivity is achieved when the compensated network is operated

either in the undercompensated or overcompensated mode.

For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the earth fault

current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 ohm) and the magnitude of the
network is 100 A (Rf = 0 ohm). During an earth fault, a 15 A resistor is connected
in parallel to the coil after a 1.0 second delay. Compensation degree is
overcompensated, K = 1.1.

During an earth fault in the forward direction, that is, inside the protected feeder,
the theoretical value for the measured admittance after the connection of the
parallel resistor can be calculated:

I Rcc + j ⋅ ( I eTot ⋅ (1 − K ) − I eFd )

Yo ≈
U ph
15 A + j ⋅ (100 A ⋅ (1 − 1.1) − 10 A)
= ≈ (1.73 − j ⋅ 2.31) milliSiemens
15kV 3
GUID-8763BA04-22DC-4B93-B52D-1E8FD44A68B9 V1 EN (Equation 27)

Before the parallel resistor is connected, the resistive part of the measured
admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of
the coil. As they are typically small, the resistive part may not be sufficiently large
to secure the discrimination of the fault and its direction based on the measured
conductance. This and the rating and the operation logic of the parallel resistor
should be considered when setting the admittance characteristic.

When a high sensitivity of the protection is required, the residual

current should be measured with a cable/ring core CT, that is, the
Ferranti CT. Also the use of the sensitive Io input should be
considered. The residual voltage measurement should be done with
an open delta connection of the three single pole-insulated voltage
transformers.

Operation characteristic
After the admittance calculation is released, the calculated neutral admittance is
compared to the admittance characteristic boundaries in the admittance plane. If the
calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic, the enabling
signal is sent to the timer.

EFPADM supports a wide range of different characteristics to achieve the

maximum flexibility and sensitivity in different applications. The basic
characteristic shape is selected with the Operation mode and Directional mode
settings. Operation mode defines which operation criterion or criteria are enabled
and Directional mode defines if the forward, reverse or non-directional boundary
lines for that particular operation mode are activated.

615 series 319

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 316: Operation criteria

Operation mode Description
Yo Admittance criterion
Bo Susceptance criterion
Go Conductance criterion
Yo, Go Admittance criterion combined with the
conductance criterion
Yo, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the
susceptance criterion
Go, Bo Conductance criterion combined with the
susceptance criterion
Yo, Go, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the
conductance and susceptance criterion

The options for the Directional mode setting are "Non-directional", "Forward" and
"Reverse".

Figure 159, Figure 160 and Figure 161 illustrate the admittance characteristics
supported by EFPADM and the settings relevant to that particular characteristic.
The most typical characteristics are highlighted and explained in details in the
chapter Neutral admittance characteristics . Operation is achieved when the
calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic (the operation
area is marked with gray).

The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in

primary milliSiemens (mS). The conversion equation for the
admittance from secondary to primary is:
niCT
Y pri = Ysec ⋅
nuVT
GUID-2F4EAEF7-0D92-477F-8D4C-00C7BEDE04CB V1 EN (Equation 28)

niCT CT ratio for the residual current Io

nuVT VT ratio for the residual voltage Uo

Example: Admittance setting in the secondary is 5.00 milliSiemens.

The CT ratio is 100/1 A and the VT ratio is 11547/100 V. The
admittance setting in the primary can be calculated.

100 1A
Y pri = 5.00 milliSiemens ⋅ = 4.33 milliSiemens
11547 100V
GUID-9CFD2291-9894-4D04-9499-DF38F1F64D59 V1 EN

320 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Operation mode
Yo Bo Go
Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Settings: Settings: Settings:

•Circle conductance •Susceptance forward •Conductance forward
•Circle susceptance •Susceptance reverse •Conductance reverse
•Circle radius •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance tilt Ang

Not applicable in Not applicable in

high resistance earthed unearthed systems!
or compensated
systems!

Operation mode
Yo,Go Yo,Bo Go,Bo Yo,Go,Bo
Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Settings: Settings: Settings: Settings:

•Circle conductance •Circle conductance •Conductance forward •Circle conductance
•Circle susceptance •Circle susceptance •Conductance reverse •Circle susceptance
•Circle radius •Circle radius •Conductance tilt Ang •Circle radius
•Conductance forward •Susceptance forward •Susceptance forward •Conductance forward
•Conductance reverse •Susceptance reverse •Susceptance reverse •Conductance reverse
•Conductance tilt Ang •Susceptance tilt Ang •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance tilt Ang
•Susceptance forward
•Susceptance reverse
•Susceptance tilt Ang

GUID-FD8DAB15-CA27-40B0-9A43-FCF0881DB21E V1 EN

Figure 159: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Non-directional"

615 series 321

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Operation mode
Yo Bo Go

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Settings: Settings: Settings:

•Circle conductance •Susceptance forward •Conductance forward
•Circle susceptance •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance tilt Ang
•Circle radius

Not applicable in Not applicable in

high resistance earthed unearthed systems!
or compensated
systems!

Operation mode
Yo,Go Yo,Bo Go,Bo Yo,Go,Bo

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Settings: Settings: Settings: Settings:

•Circle conductance •Circle conductance •Conductance forward •Circle conductance
•Circle susceptance •Circle susceptance •Conductance tilt Ang •Circle susceptance
•Circle radius •Circle radius •Susceptance forward •Circle radius
•Conductance forward •Susceptance forward •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance forward
•Conductance tilt Ang •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance tilt Ang
•Susceptance forward
•Susceptance tilt Ang

GUID-7EDB14B9-64B4-449C-9290-70A4CC2D588F V1 EN

Figure 160: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Forward"

322 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Operation mode

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Re(Yo)

Settings: Settings: Settings:

•Circle conductance •Susceptance reverse •Conductance reverse
•Circle susceptance •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance tilt Ang
•Circle radius

Not applicable in Not applicable in

high resistance earthed unearthed systems!
or compensated
systems!

Operation mode
Yo,Go Yo,Bo Go,Bo Yo,Go,Bo

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Re(Yo)

Settings: Settings: Settings: Settings:

•Circle conductance •Circle conductance •Conductance reverse •Circle conductance
•Circle susceptance •Circle susceptance •Conductance tilt Ang •Circle susceptance
•Circle radius •Circle radius •Susceptance reverse •Circle radius
•Conductance reverse •Susceptance reverse •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance reverse
•Conductance tilt Ang •Susceptance tilt Ang •Conductance tilt Ang
•Susceptance reverse
•Susceptance tilt Ang

GUID-C847609F-E261-4265-A1D9-3C449F8672A1 V1 EN

Figure 161: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when

Directional mode = "Reverse"

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the
Operate delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault

615 series 323

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value set with the Reset delay time setting, the operation timer resets
and the START output is deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value
START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set
operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode,
the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.

4.2.4.5 Neutral admittance characteristics

The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the
protected feeder with a suitable margin. However, more detailed setting value
selection principles depend on the characteristic in question.

The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in

primary milliSiemens.

The forward and reverse boundary settings should be set so that the forward setting
is always larger than the reverse setting and that there is space between them.

Overadmittance characteristic
The overadmittance criterion is enabled with the setting Operation mode set to
"Yo". The characteristic is a circle with the radius defined with the Circle radius
setting. For the sake of application flexibility, the midpoint of the circle can be
moved away from the origin with the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance
settings. Default values for Circle conductance and Circle susceptance are 0.0 mS,
that is, the characteristic is an origin-centered circle.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the circle.

The overadmittance criterion is typically applied in unearthed networks, but it can

also be used in compensated networks, especially if the circle is set off from the origin.

324 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

Circle radius

Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Circle susceptance
Circle radius

Circle conductance

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

GUID-AD789221-4073-4587-8E82-CD9BBD672AE0 V1 EN

Figure 162: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered

admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the
origin.

Non-directional overconductance characteristic

The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode
setting set to "Go" and Directional mode to "Non-directional". The characteristic is
defined with two overconductance boundary lines with the Conductance forward
and Conductance reverse settings. For the sake of application flexibility, the
boundary lines can be tilted by the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang
setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero degrees, that is, the boundary line is a
vertical line in the admittance plane. A positive tilt value rotates the boundary line
counterclockwise from the vertical axis.

In case of non-directional conductance criterion, the Conductance reverse setting

must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over either of the
boundary lines.

The non-directional overconductance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance earthed and compensated networks. It must not be
applied in unearthed networks.

615 series 325

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

OPERATE OPERATE Conductance tilt Ang <0 Conductance tilt Ang >0

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

Conductance reverse Conductance reverse Conductance reverse

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Conductance forward Conductance forward Conductance forward

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

GUID-F5487D41-6B8E-4A7A-ABD3-EBF7254ADC4C V1 EN

Figure 163: Non-directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure:

classical non-directional overconductance criterion. Middle figure:
characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure:
characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle.

Forward directional overconductance characteristic

The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation
mode setting set to "Go" and Directional mode set to "Forward". The characteristic
is defined by one overconductance boundary line with the Conductance forward
setting. For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted with
the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is
zero degrees, that is, the boundary line is a vertical line in the admittance plane. A
positive tilt value rotates the boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.

The forward directional overconductance criterion is applicable in

high-resistance earthed and compensated networks. It must not be
applied in unearthed networks.

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

OPERATE Conductance tilt Ang <0

Conductance tilt Ang >0

OPERATE OPERATE

Re(Yo) Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Conductance forward Conductance forward Conductance forward

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

GUID-43F312AA-874A-4CE7-ABFE-D76BA70B7A5D V1 EN

Figure 164: Forward directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure:

classical forward directional overconductance criterion. Middle
figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure:
characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle.

326 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic

The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation
mode setting set to "Bo" and Directional mode to "Forward". The characteristic is
defined by one oversusceptance boundary line with the Susceptance forward
setting. For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted by the
angle defined with the Susceptance tilt Ang setting. By default, the tilt angle is zero
degrees, that is, the boundary line is a horizontal line in the admittance plane. A
positive tilt value rotates the boundary line counterclockwise from the horizontal axis

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over the boundary line.

The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is applicable in

unearthed networks. It must not be applied in compensated networks.

Im(Yo) Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE
OPERATE OPERATE

Susceptance tilt Ang >0

Susceptance tilt Ang <0

Susceptance forward Susceptance forward Susceptance forward

Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Re(Yo)
Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

GUID-43B0F2F9-38CE-4F94-8381-0F20A0668AB1 V1 EN

Figure 165: Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure:

classical forward directional oversusceptance criterion. Middle
figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure:
characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle.

Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic

The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is enabled with the
Operation mode setting set to "Yo, Go" and Directional mode to "Non-directional".
The characteristic is a combination of a circle with the radius defined with the
Circle radius setting and two overconductance boundary lines with the settings
Conductance forward and Conductance reverse. For the sake of application
flexibility, the midpoint of the circle can be moved from the origin with the Circle
conductance and Circle susceptance settings. Also the boundary lines can be tilted
by the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting. By default, the Circle
conductance and Circle susceptance are 0.0 mS and Conductance tilt Ang equals
zero degrees, that is, the characteristic is a combination of an origin-centered circle
with two vertical overconductance boundary lines. A positive tilt value for the
Conductance tilt Ang setting rotates boundary lines counterclockwise from the
vertical axis.

615 series 327

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

In case of the non-directional conductance criterion, the Conductance reverse

setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward. If this rule is not
followed, a conflict situation is declared in the monitored data CONFLICT.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the

characteristic.

The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is applicable in

unearthed, high-resistance earthed and compensated networks or in systems where
the system earthing may temporarily change during normal operation from
compensated network to unearthed system.

Compared to the overadmittance criterion, the combined characteristic improves

sensitivity in high-resistance earthed and compensated networks. Compared to the
non-directional overconductance criterion, the combined characteristic enables the
protection to be applied also in unearthed systems.

Im(Yo) Im(Yo)

OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

Conductance tilt Ang

Conductance reverse
Conductance reverse

Re(Yo) Re(Yo)
Circle radius Circle susceptance
Conductance forward
Conductance forward
Circle radius
Circle conductance
OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE OPERATE

GUID-7AE09721-1428-4392-9142-A6D39FD4C287 V1 EN

Figure 166: Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic.

Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle combined
with two overconductance boundary lines. Right figure: admittance
circle is set off from the origin.

Combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic

The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the
Operation mode setting set to "Go, Bo".

By setting Directional mode to "Forward", the characteristic is a combination of

two boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward and Susceptance
forward. See Figure 167.

By setting Directional mode to "Non-directional", the characteristic is a

combination of four boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward,
Conductance reverse, Susceptance forward and Susceptance reverse. See Figure
168.

328 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle
defined with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings. By
default, the tilt angles are zero degrees, that is, the boundary lines are straight lines
in the admittance plane. A positive Conductance tilt Ang value rotates the
overconductance boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis. A positive
Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line
counterclockwise from the horizontal axis.

In case of the non-directional conductance and susceptance criteria, the

Conductance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance
forward and the Susceptance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than
Susceptance forward.

Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the

characteristic.

The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is applicable in high-

resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks or in the systems where
the system earthing may temporarily change during normal operation from
compensated to unearthed system.

OPERATE
Im(Yo) Im(Yo)
Conductance tilt Ang >0
OPERATE OPERATE
OPERATE

Susceptance tilt Ang <0

Susceptance forward Susceptance forward

Re(Yo) Re(Yo)

Conductance forward Conductance forward

OPERATE OPERATE

GUID-1A21391B-A053-432B-8A44-7D2BF714C52D V1 EN

Figure 167: Combined forward directional overconductance and forward

directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: the
Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings equal zero
degrees. Right figure: the setting Conductance tilt Ang > 0 degrees
and the setting Susceptance tilt Ang < 0 degrees.

615 series 329

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Im(Yo)
OPERATE OPERATE

Conductance tilt Ang >0

Conductance reverse

Susceptance forward Susceptance tilt Ang <0

Re(Yo)

Susceptance reverse

OPERATE

OPERATE
Conductance forward

GUID-0A34B498-4FDB-44B3-A539-BAE8F10ABDF0 V1 EN

Figure 168: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional

oversusceptance characteristic

The non-directional overconductance and non-directional

oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and
selectivity when the characteristic is set to cover the total
admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin.

4.2.4.6 Application

Neutral admittance protection provides a selective earth-fault protection function

for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks. It can be applied
for the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables. It can be
used as an alternative solution to traditional residual current-based earth-fault
protection functions, for example the IoCos mode in DEFxPDEF. Main advantages
of EFPADM include versatile applicability, good sensitivity and easy setting
principles.

As a start condition for the neutral admittance protection, the residual overvoltage
condition is used. When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start
value, an earth fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.
In order to guarantee a high security of protection, that is, avoid false starts, the
Voltage start value setting must be set above the highest possible value of Uo

330 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

during normal operation with a proper margin. It should consider all possible
operation conditions and configuration changes in the network. In unearthed
systems, the healthy-state Uo is typically less than 1%xUph (Uph = nominal phase-
to-earth voltage). In compensated networks, the healthy-state Uo may reach values
even up to 30%xUph if the network includes large parts of overheadlines without a
phase transposition. Generally, the highest Uo is achieved when the compensation
coil is tuned to the full resonance and when the parallel resistor of the coil is not
connected.

The residual overvoltage-based start condition for the admittance protection

enables a multistage protection principle. For example, one instance of EFPADM
could be used for alarming to detect faults with a high fault resistance using a
relatively low value for the Voltage start value setting. Another instance of
EFPADM could then be set to trip with a lower sensitivity by selecting a higher
value of the Voltage start value setting than in the alarming instance (stage).

To apply the neutral admittance protection, at least the following network data are
required:

• System earthing method

• Maximum value for Uo during the healthy state
• Maximum earth-fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance
Rf is zero ohm
• Maximum uncompensated earth-fault current of the system (Rf = 0 ohm)
• Rated current of the parallel resistor of the coil (active current forcing scheme)
in the case of a compensated neutral network
• Rated current of the neutral earthing resistor in the case of a high-resistance
earthed system
• Knowledge of the magnitude of Uo as a function of the fault resistance to
verify the sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance

Figure 169 shows the influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage
magnitude in unearthed and compensated networks. Such information should be
available to verify the correct Voltage start value setting, which helps fulfill the
requirements for the sensitivity of the protection in terms of fault resistance.

615 series 331

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Rf = 2500 ohm

Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

70 70 70
Rf = 5000 ohm
60 Rf = 10000 ohm 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-2F3654EF-9700-4FB7-B73C-85F7ED5D8EEF V1 EN

Figure 169: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in

10 kV unearthed and compensated networks. The leakage
resistance is assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute
value of the capacitive reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of
the compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected.

Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
Rf = 10000 ohm
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-3880FB01-5C89-4E19-A529-805208382BB1 V1 EN

Figure 170: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in

15 kV unearthed and compensated networks. The leakage
resistance is assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute
value of the capacitive reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of
the compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected.

Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 Rf = 500 ohm 80 80
Residual voltage (%)
Residual voltage (%)

Residual voltage (%)

70 Rf = 2500 ohm 70 70
60 Rf = 5000 ohm 60 60
50 Rf = 10000 ohm 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm
GUID-6321328D-6C17-4155-A2DF-7E1C47A44D53 V1 EN

Figure 171: Influence of fault resistance on the residual voltage magnitude in

20 kV unearthed and compensated networks. The leakage
resistance is assumed to be 30 times larger than the absolute
value of the capacitive reactance of the network. Parallel resistor of
the compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected.

332 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Example
In a 15 kV, 50 Hz compensated network, the maximum value for Uo during the
healthy state is 10%xUph. Maximum earth-fault current of the system is 100 A.
The maximum earth fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 ohm). The
applied active current forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor, which is connected in
parallel to the coil during the fault after a 1.0 second delay.

Solution: As a start condition for the neutral admittance protection, the internal
residual overvoltage condition of EFPADM is used. The Voltage start value setting
must be set above the maximum healthy-state Uo of 10%xUph with a suitable margin.

Voltage start value = 0.15 xUn

According to Figure 170, this selection ensures at least a sensitivity corresponding

to a 2000 ohm fault resistance when the compensation degree varies between 80%
and 120%. The greatest sensitivity is achieved when the compensation degree is
close to full resonance.

An earth-fault current of 10 A can be converted into admittance.

10 A
Y Fdtot = ≈ j ⋅1.15 milliSiemens
15kV 3
GUID-3631BAB9-7D65-4591-A3D6-834687D0E03C V1 EN

A parallel resistor current of 15 A can be converted into admittance.

15 A
Gcc = ≈ 1.73 milliSiemens
15kV 3
GUID-4B7A18DE-68CB-42B2-BF02-115F0ECC03D9 V1 EN

According to Equation 18, during an outside fault EFPADM measures the

following admittance:

Yo = −Y Fdtot ≈ − j ⋅1.15 milliSiemens

GUID-AD02E209-1740-4930-8E28-AB85637CEF0D V1 EN

According to Equation 23, during an inside fault EFPADM measures the

admittance after the connection of the parallel resistor:

Yo = Y Bgtot + Y CC ≈ (1.73 + j ⋅ B ) milliSiemens

GUID-28AF4976-1872-48A1-ACC7-7CC3B51CD9D8 V1 EN

Where the imaginary part of the admittance, B, depends on the tuning of the coil
(compensation degree).

The admittance characteristic is selected to be the combined overconductance and

oversusceptance characteristic with four boundary lines:

Operation mode = "Go, Bo"

Directional mode = "Non-directional"

615 series 333

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The admittance characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected
feeder with a proper margin, see Figure 172.

Conductance forward = 1.73 mS · 0.2 ≈ 0.35 mS

Conductance reverse = -1.0 mS (valid range apprx. 0.5 · 1.15 - 1.2 · 1.73 = -0.6...-2.1)

Susceptance forward = 0.1 mS

Susceptance reverse = -1.15 mS · 1.2 ≈ -1.4 mS

5 5
Go (mS) Go (mS)
4 4

3 3 OPERATE OPERATE

2 2

1 1
0.1 mS
0 0
Bo (mS) Bo (mS)
-1 -1
Backward fault: -1.4 mS
-2 -2
Yo ≈ -j*1.15mS Forward fault,
-3 Yo ≈ 1.73+j*Bo mS -3 -1.0 mS 0.35 mS

-4 -4 OPERATE OPERATE

-5 -5
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
GUID-AE9BB46E-B927-43F6-881A-A96D3410268D V1 EN

Figure 172: Admittances of the example

4.2.4.7 Signals
Table 317: EFPADM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to release neutral admittance
protection

Table 318: EFPADM Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

334 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.4.8 Settings
Table 319: EFPADM Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Voltage start value 0.01...2.00 xUn 0.01 0.15 Voltage start value
Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode
2=Forward
3=Reverse
Operation mode 1=Yo 1=Yo Operation criteria
2=Go
3=Bo
4=Yo, Go
5=Yo, Bo
6=Go, Bo
7=Yo, Go, Bo
Operate delay time 60...200000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time
Circle radius 0.05...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Admittance circle radius
Circle conductance -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, conductance
Circle susceptance -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 0.00 Admittance circle midpoint, susceptance
Conductance forward -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Conductance threshold in forward
direction
Conductance reverse -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Conductance threshold in reverse
direction
Conductance tilt Ang -30...30 deg 1 0 Tilt angle of conductance boundary line
Susceptance forward -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 1.00 Susceptance threshold in forward
direction
Susceptance reverse -500.00...500.00 mS 0.01 -1.00 Susceptance threshold in reverse
direction
Susceptance tilt Ang -30...30 deg 1 0 Tilt angle of susceptance boundary line

Table 320: EFPADM Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Admittance Clc mode 1=Normal 1=Normal Admittance calculation mode
2=Delta
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Rotate polarizing quantity
1=True
Min operate current 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current
Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage
Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal
2=Calculated Io
Uo signal Sel 1=Measured Uo 1=Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal
2=Calculated Uo

615 series 335

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.2.4.9 Monitored data

Table 321: EFPADM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction
1=forward
2=backward
3=both
COND_RES FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Real part of calculated
00 neutral admittance
SUS_RES FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000. mS Imaginary part of
00 calculated neutral
admittance
EFPADM Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.2.4.10 Technical data

Table 322: EFPADM Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy1) At the frequency f = fn

±1.0% or ±0.01 mS
(In range of 0.5 - 100 mS)

Start time2) Minimum Typical Maximum

56 ms 60 ms 64 ms
Reset time 40 ms
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms
Suppression of -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…
harmonics

1) Uo = 1.0 x Un
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements.

4.2.5 Harmonic based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC

4.2.5.1 Identification
Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE
identification identification identification
Harmonics earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC Io>HA 51NHA

336 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.5.2 Function block

HAEFPTOC
Io OPERATE
I_REF_RES START
BLOCK

GUID-A27B40F5-1E7D-4880-BBC4-3B07B73E9067 V2 EN

Figure 173: Function block

4.2.5.3 HAEFPTOC functionality

The harmonics earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC is used instead of a traditional

earth-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency component of
the earth-fault current is low due to compensation.

By default, HAEFPTOC is used as a standalone mode. Substation-wide application

can be achieved using horizontal communication where the detection of a faulty
feeder is done by comparing the harmonics earth-fault current measurements.

The function starts when the harmonics content of the earth-fault current exceeds
the set limit. The operation time characteristic is either definite time (DT) or
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). If the horizontal communication is used
for the exchange of current values between the IEDs, the function operates
according to the DT characteristic.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.2.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the harmonics earth-fault protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 337

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-DFEDB90A-4ECE-4BAA-9987-87F02BA0798A V2 EN

Figure 174: Functional module diagram

Harmonics calculation
This module feeds the measured residual current to the high-pass filter, where the
frequency range is limited to start from two times the fundamental frequency of the
network (for example, in a 50 Hz network the cutoff frequency is 100 Hz), that is,
summing the harmonic components of the network from the second harmonic. The
output of the filter, later referred to as the harmonics current, is fed to the Level
detector and Current comparison modules.

The harmonics current I_HARM_RES is available in the monitored data view. The
value is also sent over horizontal communication to the other IEDs on the parallel
feeders configured in the protection scheme.

338 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

1.0

Normalized output
0.5

0
0 f 2f
Frequency

GUID-F05BA8C4-AC2B-420C-AE9D-946E815682D5 V1 EN

Figure 175: High-pass filter

Level detector
The harmonics current is compared to the Start value setting. If the value exceeds
the value of the Start value setting, Level detector sends an enabling signal to the
Timer module.

Current comparison
The maximum of the harmonics currents reported by other parallel feeders in the
substation, that is, in the same busbar, is fed to the function through the
I_REF_RES input. If the locally measured harmonics current is higher than
I_REF_RES, the enabling signal is sent to Timer.

If the locally measured harmonics current is lower than I_REF_RES, the fault is
not in that feeder. The detected situation blocks Timer internally, and
simultaneously also the BLKD_I_REF output is activated.

The module also supervises the communication channel validity which is reported
to the Timer.

Timer
The START output is activated when Level detector sends the enabling signal.
Functionality and the time characteristics depend on the selected value of the
Enable reference use setting.

615 series 339

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 323: Values of the Enable reference use setting

Enable reference use Functionality
Standalone In the standalone mode, depending on the value of the
Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are
according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has
reached the value of the Operate delay time setting in
the DT mode or the value defined by the inverse time
curve, the OPERATE output is activated.

Reference use Communication When using the horizontal communication, the function
valid is forced to use the DT characteristics. When the
operation timer has reached the value of the Minimum
operate time setting and simultaneously the enabling
signal from the Current comparison module is active, the
OPERATE signal is activated.

Communication Function operates as in the standalone mode.

invalid

The Enable reference use setting forces the function to use the DT
characteristics where the operating time is set with the Minimum
operate time setting.

If the communication for some reason fails, the function switches to use the
Operation curve type setting, and if DT is selected, Operate delay time is used. If
the IDMT curve is selected, the time characteristics are according to the selected
curve and the Minimum operate time setting is used for restricting too fast an
operation time.

In case of a communication failure, the start duration may change substantially

depending on the user settings.

When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics
are defined with the Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C,
Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters.

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operation delay is exceeded, the Timer reset state is activated. The functionality of
Timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the value of the Reset delay time setting is
exceeded. When the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can
be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type
"Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset",
the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type
"Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation.
If the drop-off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the START output is
deactivated.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or the

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another

340 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during

the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired
operation time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are
used

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. More
information can be found in the IDMT curves for overcurrent
protection .

Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation, and the set operating time, which can be
either according to DT or IDMT. The value is available in the monitored data view.

More information can be found in the General function block features .

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the Freeze timers mode,
the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the Block all mode, the
whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the Block OPERATE output
mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.

4.2.5.5 Application

During an earth fault, HAEFPTOC calculates the maximum current for the current
feeder. The value is sent over an analog GOOSE to other IEDs of the busbar in the
substation. At the configuration level, all the values received over the analog
GOOSE are compared through the MAX function to find the maximum value. The
maximum value is sent back to HAEFPTOC as the I_REF_RES input. The
operation of HAEFPTOC is allowed in case I_REF_RES is lower than the locally
measured harmonics current. If I_REF_RES exceeds the locally measured
harmonics current, the operation of HAEFPTOC is blocked.

615 series 341

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Analogue
GOOSE
receive

Analogue
GOOSE
receive HAEFPTOC
Io START
MAX I_REF_RES OPERATE Analogue
BLOCK I_HARM_RES GOOSE
BLKD_I_REF send

Analogue
GOOSE
receive

GUID-4F4792F0-B311-4EB2-8EC8-56F062592158 V1 EN

Figure 176: Protection scheme based on the analog GOOSE communication

with three analog GOOSE receivers

4.2.5.6 Signals
Table 324: HAEFPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
I_REF_RES FLOAT32 0.0 Reference current

Table 325: HAEFPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

342 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.2.5.7 Settings
Table 326: HAEFPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 100...200000 ms 10 600 Operate delay time
Minimum operate time 100...200000 ms 10 500 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset
Enable reference use 0=False 0=False Enable using current reference from
1=True other IEDs instead of stand-alone

Table 327: HAEFPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve

615 series 343

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.2.5.8 Monitored data

Table 328: HAEFPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
I_HARM_RES FLOAT32 0.0...30000.0 A Calculated harmonics
current
BLKD_I_REF BOOLEAN 0=False Current comparison
1=True status indicator
HAEFPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.2.5.9 Technical data

Table 329: HAEFPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz
±5 % of the set value or ±0.004 x In

Start time 1)2) Typical 77 ms

Reset time < 40 ms

Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Operate time accuracy in IDMT mode 3) ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Suppression of harmonics -50dB at f= fn

-3dB at f= 13 x fn

1) Fundamental frequency current = 1.0 x In. Harmonics current before fault = 0.0 x In, harmonics fault
current 2.0 x Start value. Results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurement.
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 2 to 20

344 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3 Differential protection

4.3.1 Line differential protection and related measurements,

stabilized and instantaneous stages LNPLDF

4.3.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Line differential protection and related LNPLDF 3dI>L 87L
measurements, stabilized and
instantaneous stages

4.3.1.2 Function block

GUID-F7ECAC0B-14B5-444C-9282-59AC32380576 V3 EN

Figure 177: Function block

4.3.1.3 Functionality

The phase segregated line differential protection LNPLDF is used as feeder

differential protection for the distribution network lines and cables. LNPLDF
includes low, stabilized and high, non-stabilized stages. The line differential
protection can also be used when there is an in-zone transformer in the protected
feeder section.

The stabilized low stage provides a fast clearance of faults while remaining stable
with high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current
measuring. Second harmonic restraint insures that the low stage does not operate
due to energizing of a tapped or in-zone transformer. The high stage provides a
very fast clearance of severe faults with a high differential current regardless of
their harmonics.

The operating time characteristic for the low stage can be selected to be either
definite time (DT) or inverse definite time (IDMT). The direct inter-trip ensures
both ends are always operated, even without local criteria.

615 series 345

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.3.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”.

The function can also be set into test mode by setting the Operation setting to “test/
blocked”.

The operation of the line differential protection and related measurements,

stabilized and instantaneous stages can be described using a module diagram.

GUID-44304073-30AC-4EEA-889C-2D9410DC1180 V3 EN

Figure 178: Functional module diagram. I_LOC_x stands for current of the local
end and I_REM_x for phase currents of the remote ends.

Stabilized low stage

In the stabilized low stage, the higher the load current is, the higher the differential
current required for tripping is. This happens on normal operation or during
external faults. When an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the
protected object flow towards the fault and cause the stabilizing current to be
considerably lower. This makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults.
The low stage includes a timer delay functionality.

The characteristic of the low stage taking the apparent differential current into
account is influenced by various factors:
• Small tapped loads within the protection zone
• Current transformer errors
• Current transformer saturation
• Small asymmetry of the communication channel go and return paths

346 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

• Small steady state line charging current

• In-zone transformer no load current
• Impact of tap changer positions

The timer is activated according to the calculated differential, stabilizing current

and the set differential characteristic.

GUID-C5DA7D40-A17A-473F-A73D-6B291716C4A3 V2 EN

Figure 179: Operation logic of the stabilized low stage

The stabilization affects the operation of the function.

GUID-C7A3DFD3-1DDB-47EC-9C9A-B56FA4EDC69B V2 EN

Figure 180: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the low
stage and (HS) for the high stage.

615 series 347

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The slope of the operating characteristic curve of the differential function varies in
the different sections of the range:
• Section 1 where 0.0 < Ib/Ir < End section 1. The differential current required
for tripping is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as the
basic setting (Low operate value) selected for the function. The basic setting
allows the appearance of the no-load current of the line, the load current of the
tapped load and minor inaccuracies of the current transformers. It can also be
used to influence the overall level of the operating characteristic.
• Section 2 where End section 1 < Ib/Ir < End Section 2. This is called the
influence area of the starting ratio. In this section, the variations in the starting
ratio affect the slope of the characteristic, meaning the required change for
tripping in the differential current in comparison with the change in the load
current. CT errors should be considered in the starting ratio.
• Section 3 where End section 2 < Ib/Ir. By setting the slope in this section,
attention can be paid to prevent unnecessary operation of the protection when
there is an external fault, and the differential current is mainly produced by
saturated current transformers.

The operation of the differential protection is based on the fundamental frequency

components. The operation is accurate and stable and the DC component and the
harmonics of the current do not cause unwanted operations.

Inrush detector
The transformer inrush currents cause high degrees of second harmonic to the
measured phase currents. The inrush detector detects inrush situations in
transformers. The second harmonic based local blocking is selected into use with
the Restraint mode parameter. The blocking for the low stage on the local end is
issued when the second harmonic blocking is selected and the inrush is detected.

The inrush detector calculates the ratio of the second harmonic current
I_2H_LOC_A and the fundamental frequency current I_1H_LOC_A. If the line
differential protection is used in normal mode (Winding selection is “Not in use”),
the calculated value is compared with the parameter value of the Start value 2.H
setting. If the calculated value exceeds the set value and the fundamental frequency
current I_1H_LOC_A is more that seven percent of the nominal current, the output
signal BLK2H_A is activated. The inrush detector handles the other phases the
same way.

If the line differential protection is used in the in-zone transformer mode (Winding
selection is “Winding 1” or “Winding 2”), the weighed average is calculated for the
2nd harmonic ratios in different phases and the weighed ratio is then compared with
the value of the Start value 2.H setting. If the calculated weighed ratio value
exceeds the set value and the fundamental frequency current I_1H_LOC_A is
more than seven percent of the nominal current, output signal BLK2H_A is activated.

The locally detected transformer inrush is also transferred to the remote end as a
binary indication signal independently of the local Restraint mode setting

348 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

parameter value. When the internal blocking of the stabilized low stage is
activated, the RSTD2H_LOC and RSTD2H_REM outputs will also be activated at
the same time depending on whether the inrush has been detected on local or
remote end or on both ends.

GUID-92818F6B-4FB7-4D5C-AF64-36786F31AED8 V3 EN

Figure 181: Inrush current detection logic

Differential calculation
The operating principle is to calculate on both ends differential current from
currents entering and leaving the protection zone by utilizing the digital
communication channels for data exchange. The differential currents are almost
zero on normal operation. The differential protection is phase segregated and the
differential currents are calculated separately on both ends.

GUID-E9D80758-16A2-4748-A08C-94C33997E603 V2 EN

Figure 182: Basic protection principle

The differential current I∆ (Id) of the IED is obtained on both ends with the formula:

I d = I LOC + I REM
GUID-9C08695B-8241-4B74-AA2A-B64783F9C288 V2 EN (Equation 29)

The stabilizing current Ibias (Ib) of the IED is obtained on both ends with the formula:

615 series 349

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

I LOC − I REM
Ib =
2
GUID-6014FAFC-12CB-4DB3-85A9-0EF254D1729D V2 EN (Equation 30)

Depending on the location of the star points of the current transformers, the
polarity of the local end remote currents may be different causing malfunction of
the calculation algorithms. The CT transformation ratio may be different and this
needs to be compensated to provide a correct differential current calculation result
on both ends.

The operation characteristics related settings are given in units as percentage of the
current transformer secondary nominal current on each line end IED. For the actual
primary setting, the corresponding CT ratio on each line end has to be considered.
An example of how the CT ratio correction parameter values should be selected on
both line ends in the example case to compensate the difference in the nominal
levels can be presented.

Another example for differential application without in-zone transformer where

line rated current is 400 A. The ratio of CTs are 800/1 and 400/1.

GUID-E9087A8C-1F10-45E0-A47C-754C30CB801C V1 EN

Figure 183: Example of CT ratio correction setting calculation in line differential

application

The settings for CT ratio Corrections for IED A and IED (B) are:

CT ratio Correction (A) = 800 A / 400 A = 2.000

CT ratio Correction (B) = 400 A / 400 A = 1.000

The CT secondary current often differs from the rated current at the rated load of
the power transformer. The CT transforming ratio can be corrected on both sides of
the power transformer with the CT ratio Correction setting.

First, the rated load of the power transformer is calculated on both sides when the
apparent power and phase-to-phase voltage are known.

350 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Sn
I nT =
3 ×U n
GUID-B2130C43-E82B-4617-9FC4-79AB2F735CD9 V1 EN (Equation 31)

InT rated load of the power transformer

Sn rated power of the power transformer

Un rated phase-to-phase voltage

Next, the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated with the formula:

In
CT ratio correction =
I nT
GUID-F950DE9C-6AFB-4DF9-B299-6631693C55C0 V1 EN (Equation 32)

In nominal primary current of the CT

After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting
values of LNPLDF are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer
current Ir (×Ir) or percentage value of Ir (%Ir).

An example shows how the CT ratio correction settings are calculated; when the
rated power of the transformer is 5 MVA, the ratio of CTs on the 20 kV side is
200/1 and that on the 10.5 kV side is 300/1.

GUID-74289FF5-E90D-4633-9FEE-04DB8E86A3AE V1 EN

Figure 184: Example of CT ratio correction setting calculation with in-zone

transformer

The rated load of the transformer is:

HV side (A): InT_A = 5 MVA / (1.732 × 20 kV) = 144.3 A

615 series 351

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

LV side (A): InT_B = 5 MVA / (1.732 × 10.5 kV) = 274.9 A

So the settings for CT ratio Corrections at HV (A) and LV (B) side are:

CT ratio Correction (A) = 200 A / 144.3 A = 1.386

CT ratio Correction (B) = 300 A / 274.9 A = 1.091

CT connections
The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as “Type 1”
and “Type 2”.

• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 IED currents are
opposite, the CT connection type setting parameter is “Type 1”. The
connection examples of “Type 1” are as shown in the Figure 185 and Figure
186.
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 IED currents equate,
the CT connection type setting parameter is “Type 2”. The connection
examples of “Type 2” are as shown in the Figure 187 and Figure 188.
• The default value of the CT connection type setting is “Type 1”.

352 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-CED6A87F-980C-408D-B069-99ACDF1ACE86 V2 EN

Figure 185: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1

615 series 353

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-BFA25E96-B9FC-49F8-A8E2-23F2B5548490 V2 EN

Figure 186: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1

354 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-C49F5640-2FBD-4758-8C8B-7292130648CF V2 EN

Figure 187: Connection example of current transformers of Type 2

615 series 355

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-11ABD3BA-877D-411A-A970-3B6D5BA05803 V2 EN

Figure 188: Connection example of current transformers of Type 2

Transformer vector group matching

Before differential and bias currents can be calculated, the phase difference of the
currents must be vector group matched based on the transformer connection type.
The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high
voltage and low voltage sides by means of the Winding selection, Winding 1 type,
Winding 2 type and Clock number settings. Thus no interposing CTs are needed if
there is only a power transformer inside the protected zone. The matching is based
on phase shifting and a numerical delta connection in the IED. If the neutral of a star-
connected power transformer is earthed, any earth-fault in the network is perceived
by the IED as a differential current. The elimination of the zero-sequence

356 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

component can be selected for that winding by setting the Zro A elimination
parameter.

Winding selection setting defines the IED location respect to the transformer. If the
IED is situated at the HV side of the transformer, then IED location setting is set to
“Winding 1” and respectively to “Winding 2” if IED is situated at the LV side. If
the differential IEDs are used to protect a line without in-zone transformer, then the
setting is set to “Not in use”. In this case vector group matching is ignored.

The matching of the phase difference is based on the phase shifting and the
numerical delta connection inside the IED. The Winding 1 type parameter
determines the connection on winding 1 (“Y”, “YN”, “D”, “Z”, “ZN”). The vector
group matching can be implemented either on both, winding 1 and winding 2, or
only on winding 1 or winding 2, at intervals of 30° with the Clock number setting.
Similarly, the Winding 2 type parameter determines the connections of the phase
windings on the low voltage side (“y”, “yn”, “d”, “z”, “zn”).

When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the CT connection type is according to
“Type 2”, the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the IED does not
change. When the vector group matching is Yy6, the phase currents are on one side
turned 180° in the IED.

Example 1, vector group matching of an YNd11-connected power transformer on

winding 1, CT connection type according to type 1. The Winding 1 type setting is
“YN”, Winding 2 type is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is
compensated internally by giving winding 1 internal compensation value +30° and
winding 2 internal compensation value 0°:
− −
− I L1 − I L 2
I L1mHV =
3
GUID-7DD69356-3528-4161-AFD2-7807B133403D V1 EN (Equation 33)

− −
− I L 2 − I L3
I L 2 mHV =
3
GUID-36A1CB86-4BE8-45BD-B9BE-76F417EB0700 V1 EN (Equation 34)

− −
− I L 3 − I L1
I L 3mHV =
3
GUID-E215125D-50B4-4F0B-95B0-84D5C6519B2E V1 EN (Equation 35)

Example 2, if vector group is Yd11 and CT connection type is according to type 1,

the compensation is a little different. The Winding 1 type setting is “Y”, Winding 2
type is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by
giving winding 1 internal compensation value 0° and winding 2 internal
compensation value -30°:

615 series 357

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

− −
− I L1 − I L 3
I L1mLV =
3
GUID-AFF5341B-32F8-457B-86A2-6A05B950FF29 V1 EN (Equation 36)

− −
− I L 2 − I L1
I L 2 mLV =
3
GUID-FE2E9619-077C-4E9A-99A7-C6DD02A34590 V1 EN (Equation 37)

− −
− I L3 − I L 2
I L 3mLV =
3
GUID-99D25F61-7857-4410-86E4-E1DC1B3D5F40 V1 EN (Equation 38)

The “Y” side currents stay untouched, while the “d” side currents are compensated
to match the currents actually flowing in the windings.

In this example there is no neutral current on either side of the transformer

(assuming there are no earthing transformers installed). In the previous example,
the matching is done differently to have the winding 1 neutral current compensated
at the same time.

Table 330: LNPLDF vector group matching

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence
transformer current elimination
Yy0 Y y 0 Not needed
YNy0 YN y 0 HV side
YNyn0 YN yn 0 HV & LV side
Yyn0 Y yn 0 LV side
Yy2 Y y 2 Not needed
YNy2 YN y 2 (Automatic)
YNyn2 YN yn 2 (Automatic)
Yyn2 Y yn 2 (Automatic)
Yy4 Y y 4 Not needed
YNy4 YN y 4 (Automatic)
YNyn4 YN yn 4 (Automatic)
Yyn4 Y yn 4 (Automatic)
Yy6 Y y 6 Not needed
YNy6 YN y 6 HV side
YNyn6 YN yn 6 HV & LV side
Yyn6 Y yn 6 LV side
Yy8 Y y 8 Not needed
YNy8 YN y 8 (Automatic)
YNyn8 YN yn 8 (Automatic)
Yyn8 Y yn 8 (Automatic)
Table continues on next page

358 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence
transformer current elimination
Yy10 Y y 10 Not needed
YNy10 YN y 10 (Automatic)
YNyn10 YN yn 10 (Automatic)
Yyn10 Y yn 10 (Automatic)
Yd1 Y d 1 Not needed
YNd1 YN d 1 (Automatic)
Yd5 Y d 5 Not needed
YNd5 YN d 5 (Automatic)
Yd7 Y d 7 Not needed
YNd7 YN d 7 (Automatic)
Yd11 Y d 11 Not needed
YNd11 YN d 11 (Automatic
Dd0 D d 0 Not needed
Dd2 D d 2 Not needed
Dd4 D d 4 Not needed
Dd6 D d 6 Not needed
Dd8 D d 8 Not needed
Dd10 D d 10 Not needed
Dy1 D y 1 Not needed
Dyn1 D yn 1 (Automatic)
Dy5 D y 5 Not needed
Dyn5 D yn 5 (Automatic)
Dy7 D y 7 Not needed
Dyn7 D yn 7 (Automatic)
Dy11 D y 11 Not needed
Dyn11 D yn 11 (Automatic)
Yz1 Y z 1 Not needed
YNz1 YN z 1 (Automatic)
YNzn1 YN zn 1 LV side
Yzn1 Y zn 1 (Automatic)
Yz5 Y z 5 Not needed
YNz5 YN z 5 (Automatic)
YNzn5 YN zn 5 LV side
Yzn5 Y zn 5 (Automatic)
Yz7 Y z 7 Not needed
YNz7 YN z 7 (Automatic)
YNzn7 YN zn 7 LV side
Yzn7 Y zn 7 (Automatic)
Yz11 Y z 11 Not needed
Table continues on next page

615 series 359

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence
transformer current elimination
YNz11 YN z 11 (Automatic)
YNzn11 YN zn 11 LV side
Yzn11 Y zn 11 (Automatic)
Zy1 Z y 1 Not needed
Zyn1 Z yn 1 (Automatic)
ZNyn1 ZN yn 1 HV side
ZNy1 ZN y 1 (Automatic)
Zy5 Z y 5 Not needed
Zyn5 Z yn 5 (Automatic)
ZNyn5 ZN yn 5 HV side
ZNy5 ZN y 5 (Automatic)
Zy7 Z y 7 Not needed
Zyn7 Z yn 7 (Automatic)
ZNyn7 ZN yn 7 HV side
ZNy7 ZN y 7 (Automatic)
Zy11 Z y 11 Not needed
Zyn11 Z yn 11 (Automatic)
ZNyn11 ZN yn 11 HV side
ZNy11 ZN y 11 (Automatic)
Dz0 D z 0 Not needed
Dzn0 D zn 0 LV side
Dz2 D z 2 Not needed
Dzn2 D zn 2 (Automatic)
Dz4 D z 4 Not needed
Dzn4 D zn 4 (Automatic)
Dz6 D z 6 Not needed
Dzn6 D zn 6 LV side
Dz8 D z 8 Not needed
Dzn8 D zn 8 (Automatic)
Dz10 D z 10 Not needed
Dzn10 D zn 10 (Automatic)
Zd0 Z d 0 Not needed
ZNd0 ZN d 0 HV side
Zd2 Z d 2 Not needed
ZNd2 ZN d 2 (Automatic)
Zd4 Z d 4 Not needed
ZNd4 ZN d 4 (Automatic)
Zd6 Z d 6 Not needed
ZNd6 ZN d 6 HV side
Table continues on next page

360 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero sequence
transformer current elimination
Zd8 Z d 8 Not needed
ZNd8 ZN d 8 (Automatic)
Zd10 Z d 10 Not needed
ZNd10 ZN d 10 (Automatic)
Zz0 Z z 0 Not needed
ZNz0 ZN z 0 HV side
ZNzn0 ZN zn 0 HV & LV side
Zzn0 Z zn 0 LV side
Zz2 Z z 2 Not needed
ZNz2 ZN z 2 (Automatic)
ZNzn2 ZN zn 2 (Automatic)
Zzn2 Z zn 2 (Automatic)
Zz4 Z z 4 Not needed
ZNz4 ZN z 4 (Automatic)
ZNzn4 ZN zn 4 (Automatic)
Zzn4 Z zn 4 (Automatic)
Zz6 Z z 6 Not needed
ZNz6 ZN z 6 HV side
ZNzn6 ZN zn 6 HV & LV side
Zzn6 Z zn 6 LV side
Zz8 Z z 8 Not needed
ZNz8 ZN z 8 (Automatic)
ZNzn8 ZN zn 8 (Automatic)
Zzn8 Z zn 8 (Automatic)
Zz10 Z z 10 Not needed
ZNz10 ZN z 10 (Automatic)
ZNzn10 ZN zn 10 (Automatic)
Zzn10 Z zn 10 (Automatic)

Zero-sequence component elimination

If Clock number is “Clk Num 2“, “Clk Num 4”, “Clk Num 8” or “Clk Num 10”,
the vector group matching is always done on both, winding 1 and winding 2. The
combination results in the correct compensation. In this case the zero-sequence
component is always removed from both sides automatically. The Zro A
elimination parameter cannot change this.

If Clock number is “Clk Num 1”, “Clk Num 5”, “Clk Num 7” or “Clk Num 11”,
the vector group matching is done on one side only. A possible zero-sequence
component of the phase currents at earth faults occurring outside the protection
area is automatically eliminated in the numerically implemented delta connection

615 series 361

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

before the differential current and the biasing current are calculated. This is why
the vector group matching is almost always made on the star connected side of the
“Ynd” and “Dyn” connected transformers.

If Clock number is “Clk Num 0” or “Clk Num 6”, the zero-sequence component of
the phase currents is not eliminated automatically on either side. Therefore, the zero-
sequence component on the star connected side that is earthed at its star point has
to be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter.

The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero-sequence component if

there is, for example, an earthing transformer on the delta-connected side of the
“Ynd” power transformer in the area to be protected. In this case, the vector group
matching is normally made on the side of the star connection. On the side of the
delta connection, the elimination of the zero-sequence component has to be
eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter.

By using the Zro A elimination parameter, the zero-sequence component of the

local phase currents is calculated and reduced for each phase current:

− − 1 − − −

I LOC _ A = I LOC _ A − ×  I LOC _ A + I LOC _ B + I LOC _ C 
3  
GUID-7C504C11-31C0-47A2-8253-E05020CA1CF7 V1 EN (Equation 39)

− − 1 − − −

I LOC _ B = I LOC _ B − ×  I LOC _ A + I LOC _ B + I LOC _ C 
3  
GUID-6FEF478B-7DA1-4012-9F59-43B21AF813E3 V1 EN (Equation 40)

− − 1 − − −

I LOC _ C = I LOC _ C − ×  I LOC _ A + I LOC _ B + I LOC _ C 
3  
GUID-D5203A0B-D0A0-4147-B1F0-06C2B78B288B V1 EN

Fail safe function

To prevent malfunction during communication interference, the operation of
LNPLDF is blocked when the protection communication supervision detects severe
interference in the communication channel. The timer reset stage is activated in
case the stabilized stage is started during a communication interruption. The
protection communication supervison is connected internally from PCSRTPC to
LNPLDF (dotted OK line).

362 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-010E1FF3-D7B0-42C8-9179-09F753D7DFC3 V1 EN

Figure 189: Operation logic of the fail safe function

The function can also be set into “test/blocked” state with the Operation setting.
This can also be utilized during the commissioning.

The BLOCK input is provided for blocking the function with the logic. When the
function is blocked, the monitored data and measured values are still available but
the binary outputs are blocked. When the function is blocked, the direct inter-trip is
also blocked.

The PROT_ACTIVE output is always active when the protection function is

capable of operating. PROT_ACTIVE can be used as a blocking signal for backup
protection functions.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the STR_LS_LOC output. Depending on the
value of the set Operating curve type, the timer characteristics are according to DT
or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the Operate
delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time
curve, the OPR_LS_LOC output is activated. When the operation mode is
according to IDMT, Low operate value is used as reference value (Start value) in
the IDMT equations presented in the Standard inverse-time characteristics section.

A timer reset state is activated when a drop-off situation happens. The reset is done
according to the DT characteristics.

For a detailed description of the timer characteristics, see the

“General function block features” section in this manual.

Instantaneous high stage

In addition to the stabilized low stage, LNPLDF has an instantaneous high stage.
The stabilizing is not done with the instantaneous high stage. The instantaneous

615 series 363

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

high stage operates immediately when the differential current amplitude is higher
than the set value of the High operate value setting. If the ENA_MULT_HS input is
active, the High operate value setting is internally multiplied by the High Op value
Mult setting.

GUID-99000979-88BE-4A03-9F87-4A9608D91822 V1 EN

Figure 190: Operation logic of instantaneous high stage

Direct inter-trip
Direct inter-trip is used to ensure the simultaneous opening of the circuit breakers
at both ends of the protected line when a fault is detected. Both start and operate
signals are sent to the remote end via communication. The direct-intertripping of
the line differential protection is included into LNPLDF. The OPERATE output
combines the operate signals from both stages, local and remote, so that it can be
used for the direct inter-trip signal locally.

364 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

OR OPERATE

OR START
OPR_HS_A
Inst. OPR_HS_B SEND OR OPR_HS_LOC
high stage
OPR_HS_C

OPR_LS_A
OPR_LS_B SEND OR OPR_LS_LOC
OPR_LS_C
Stabilized
low stage
STR_LS_A
STR_LS_B SEND OR STR_LS_LOC
STR_LS_C

OPR_HS_A
RECEIVE OPR_HS_B OR OPR_HS_REM
OPR_HS_C

OPR_LS_A
RECEIVE OPR_LS_B OR OPR_LS_REM
OPR_LS_C

STR_LS_A
RECEIVE STR_LS_B OR STR_LS_REM
STR_LS_C
GUID-002B4F83-260D-4ADA-983E-9CB46DBF1228 V3 EN

Figure 191: Operation logic of the direct intertrip function

The start and operate signals are provided separately for the low and high stages,
and in the local and remote.

Blocking functionality
There are two independent inputs that can be used for blocking the function:
BLOCK and BLOCK_LS. The difference between these inputs is that BLOCK_LS
(when TRUE) blocks only the stabilized low stage leaving the instantaneous high
stage operative. BLOCK (when TRUE) blocks both stages and also the
PROT_ACTIVE output is updated according to the BLOCK input status, as
described in the Fail safe function chapter.

The BLOCK and BLOCK_LS input statuses affect only the behavior of the local
protection instance. When a line differential protection stage (stabilized low or
instantaneous high) is blocked, also the received remote signals related to the

615 series 365

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

corresponding stage are ignored (received direct inter-trip signals from the remote
end). The binary signal transfer functionality should therefore be used for
transferring the possible additional blocking information between the local and
remote terminals whenever the blocking logic behavior needs to be the same on
both line ends.

Test mode
The line differential function in one IED can be set to test mode, that is, the
Operation setting is set to “test/blocked”. This blocks the line differential
protection outputs in the IED and sets the remote IED to a remote test mode, such
that the injected currents are echoed back with the shifted phase. It is also possible
that both IEDs are simultaneously in the test mode. When the line differential
protection function is in the test mode:
• The remote end IED echoes locally injected current samples back with the
shifted phase. The current samples that are sent to the remote IED are scaled
with the CT ratio correction setting.
• The operation of both stages (stabilized low or instantaneous high) are
blocked, and also the direct inter-trip functionality is blocked (both receive and
send) in the IED where the test mode is active.
• The remote end line differential protection function that is in the normal mode
(On) is not affected by the local end being in the test mode. This means that
the remote end function is operative but, at the same time, it ignores the
received current samples from the other end IED which is in the test mode.
• The PROT_ACTIVE output is false only in the IED that is currently in the test
mode.

GUID-8E76712C-5DA3-46DA-AC6A-3C05CDBAB5AF V3 EN

Figure 192: Operation during the normal operation of the line differential
protection

366 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-FC28C85A-6199-4249-8E01-C8693B005D3D V3 EN

Figure 193: Operation during test operation of the line differential protection

4.3.1.5 Commissioning

The commissioning of the line differential protection scheme would be difficult

without any support features in the functionality because of the relatively long
distance between the IEDs. This has been taken into consideration in the design of
the line differential protection. The communication channel can be used for
echoing the locally fed current phasors from the remote end. By using this mode, it
is possible to verify that differential calculation is done correctly in each phase.
Also, the protection communication operation is taken into account with the
differential current calculation when this test mode is used.

Required material for testing the IED

• Calculated settings
• Terminal diagram
• Circuit diagrams
• Technical and application manuals of the IED
• Single of three-phase secondary current source
• Single of three-phase primary current source
• Timer with start and stop interfaces
• Auxiliary voltage source for the IEDs
• PC with related software, a Web browser for WHMI

The setting and configuration of the IED must be completed before testing.

The terminal diagram, available in the technical manual, is a general diagram of the
IED.

The same diagram is not always applicable to each specific

delivery, especially for the configuration of all the binary inputs

615 series 367

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

and outputs. Therefore, before testing, check that the available

terminal diagram corresponds to the IED.

The circuit diagrams of the application are recommended to be available. These are
required for checking the terminal block numbers of the current, trip, alarm and
possibly other auxiliary circuits.

The technical and application manuals contain application and functionality

summaries, function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting
parameters and technical data sorted per function.

The minimum requirement for a secondary current injection test device is the
ability to work as a one phase current source.

The IED should be prepared for the test before testing a particular function. The
logic diagram of the tested protection function must be considered while
performing the test. All included functions in the IED are tested according to the
corresponding test instructions in this chapter. The functions can be tested in any
order according to user preferences. Therefore, the test instructions are presented in
alphabetical order. Only the functions that are in use (Operation is set to "On")
should be tested.

The response from the test can be viewed in different ways.

• Binary output signals

• Monitored data values in the LHMI (logical signals)
• A PC with a Web browser for WHMI use (logical signals and phasors)

All used setting groups should be tested.

Checking the external optical and electrical connections

The user must check the installation to verify that the IED is connected to the other
required parts of the protection system. The IED and all the connected circuits are
to be de-energized during the check-up.

Checking CT circuits

Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied

connection diagram.

The CTs must be connected in accordance with the terminal diagram provided with
the IED, both with regards to phases and polarity. The following tests are
recommended for every primary CT or CT core connected to the IED.

• Primary injection test to verify the current ratio of the CT, the correct wiring
up to the protection IED and correct phase sequence connection (that is L1,
L2, L3.)
• Polarity check to prove that the predicted direction of the secondary current
flow is correct for a given direction of the primary current flow. This is an

368 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

essential test for the proper operation of the directional function, protection or
measurement in the IED.
• CT secondary loop resistance measurement to confirm that the current
transformer secondary loop DC resistance is within specification and that there
are no high resistance joints in the CT winding or wiring.
• CT excitation test to ensure that the correct core in the CT is connected to the
IED. Normally only a few points along the excitation curve are checked to
ensure that there are no wiring errors in the system, for example, due to a
mistake in connecting the CT's measurement core to the IED.
• CT excitation test to ensure that the CT is of the correct accuracy rating and
that there are no short circuited turns in the CT windings. Manufacturer's
design curves should be available for the CT to compare the actual results.
• Earthing check of the individual CT secondary circuits to verify that each three-
phase set of main CTs is properly connected to the station earth and only at
one electrical point.
• Insulation resistance check.
• Phase identification of CT shall be made.

Both the primary and the secondary sides must be disconnected

from the line and the IED when plotting the excitation characteristics.

If the CT secondary circuit is opened or its earth connection is

missing or removed without the CT primary being de-energized
first, dangerous voltages may be produced. This can be lethal and
cause damage to the insulation. The re-energizing of the CT
primary should be prohibited as long as the CT secondary is open
or unearthed."

Checking of the power supply

Check that the auxiliary supply voltage remains within the permissible input
voltage range under all operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct
before powering the IED.

Checking binary I/O circuits

Always check the binary input circuits from the equipment to the IED interface to
make sure that all signals are connected correctly. If there is no need to test a
particular input, the corresponding wiring can be disconnected from the terminal of
the IED during testing. Check all the connected signals so that both input voltage
level and polarity are in accordance with the IED specifications. However,
attention must be paid to the electrical safety instructions.

Always check the binary output circuits from the IED to the equipment interface to
make sure that all signals are connected correctly. If a particular output needs to be
tested, the corresponding wiring can be disconnected from the terminal of the IED
during testing. Check all the connected signals so that both load and polarity are in

615 series 369

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

accordance with the IED specifications. However, attention must be paid to the
electrical safety instructions.

Checking optical connections

Check that the Tx and Rx optical connections are correct.

An IED equipped with optical connections requires a minimum

depth of 180 mm for plastic fiber cables and 275 mm for glass fiber
cables. Check the allowed minimum bending radius from the
optical cable manufacturer.

Applying required settings for the IED

Download all calculated settings and measurement transformer parameters in the
IED.

Connecting test equipment to the IED

Before testing, connect the test equipment according to the IED specific connection
diagram.

Pay attention to the correct connection of the input and output current terminals.
Check that the input and output logical signals in the logic diagram for the function
under test are connected to the corresponding binary inputs and outputs of the IED.
Select the correct auxiliary voltage source according to the power supply module of
the IED. Select the correct auxiliary voltage source according to the power supply
module of the IED.

370 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-F1F4E199-8B6A-4066-ACCB-07FE4F887417 V3 EN

Figure 194: Example of connections to test the line differential IED

Secondary current injection

There are two alternative modes to check the operation of a line differential IED.
These are not exclusive methods for each other and can be used for various test on
the IED.

Normal mode
In normal mode, that is, the mode when the function is on normal operation, the
local end IED sends phasors to the remote end IED and receives phasors measured
by the remote end IED. This mode can be used in testing the operating level and
time of the low and high stages of the local end IED. This is due to a test situation
when the remote end does not measure any current and therefore, all the current fed
to the local end current circuit is seen as differential current at both ends.

Testing of the line differential protection is done with both IEDs separated
geographically from each other. It is important to note that local actions in one IED
cause operation also in the remotely located IED. When testing the line differential
function, actions have to be done in both IEDs.

615 series 371

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Before the test, the trip signal to the circuit breaker shall be blocked, for example
by breaking the trip circuit by opening the terminal block or by using some other
suitable method.

When injecting current to one phase in the local end IED, the current is seen as a
differential current at both ends. If a current Iinjected is injected, L1 in phase L1, the
differential and stabilizing currents for phase L1 are:
ID _ A = I injected
GUID-B5B84B9B-B26C-421F-B4D0-E301EE4883F3 V3 EN (Equation 41)

IB _ A = I injected / 2
GUID-6A1A367B-241B-4831-A1F2-9373AE4D26ED V1 EN (Equation 42)

The operation is equal for phases L2 and L3.

Verifying the settings

1. Block the unwanted trip signals from the IED units involved.
2. Inject a current in phase L1 and increase the current until the function
operates for phase L1.
The injected operate current corresponds to the set Low operate value. The
monitored values for ID_A should be equal to the injected current.
3. Repeat point 2 by current injection in phases L2 and L3.
4. Measure the operating time by injecting the single-phase current in phase L1.
The injected current should be four times the operating current. The time
measurement is stopped by the trip output from the IED unit.
5. Disconnect the test equipment and reconnect the current transformers and all
other circuits including the trip circuit.

Phasor echoing method

The line differential function in one IED can be set to special test mode, that is, the
Operation setting is set to “test/blocked”. When this mode is in use, the remote end
IED echoes locally injected current phasors back with the shifted phase and
settable amplitude. Therefore, the local end line differential function is also
automatically blocked and the remote end line differential function discards the
phasors it receives from the IED in the test mode.

When the test mode is active, the CT connection type is still used by the line
differential protection function as in the normal operation mode. The setting can be
used for shifting the phase (0 or 180 degrees).

372 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-6F26D761-CB1D-4D86-80AA-CEC95CEBC1A9 V2 EN

Figure 195: An example of a test mode situation where three-phase currents

are injected to the local end IED

GUID-21BCDEC5-2A22-4AEE-831E-BC8A72E40A64 V2 EN

Figure 196: Local and remote end currents presented in a web HMI of the IED

4.3.1.6 Application

LNPLDF is designed for the differential protection of overhead line and cable
feeders in a distribution network. LNPLDF provides absolute selectivity and fast
operating times as unit protection also in short lines where distance protection
cannot be applied.

LNPLDF provides selective protection for radial, looped and meshed network
topologies and can be used in isolated neutral networks, resistance earthed
networks, compensated (impedance earthed) networks and solidly earthed

615 series 373

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

networks. In a typical network configuration where the line differential protection

scheme is applied, the protected zone, that is, the line or cable, is fed from two
directions.

GUID-E9D80758-16A2-4748-A08C-94C33997E603 V2 EN

Figure 197: Line protection with phase segregated line differential with in-zone
transformer

LNPLDF can be utilized for various types of network configurations or topologies.

Case A shows the protection of a ring-type distribution network. The network is
also used in the closed ring mode. LNPLDF is used as the main protection for
different sections of the feeder. In case B, the interconnection of two substations is
done with parallel lines and each line is protected with the line differential
protection. In case C, the connection line to mid scale power generation (typical
size around 10...50 MVA) is protected with the line differential function. The
protection includes the transformer from the protection field. In case D, the
connection between two substations and a small distribution transformer is located
at the tapped load. The usage of LNPLDF is not limited to these applications.

374 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-64A6AADE-275F-43DA-B7D9-2B1340166A4D V2 EN

Figure 198: Line differential applications

Communication supervision
A typical line differential protection application includes LNPLDF as the main
protection. Backup over current functions is needed if a protection communication
failure occurs. When the communication supervision function detects a failure in
the communication between the protective units, the safe operation of the line is
still guaranteed by blocking the line differential protection and unblocking the over
current functions.

When a communication failure is detected, the protection communication

supervision function issues block for the LNPLDF line differential protection and
unblock for the instantaneous and high stages (instance 2) of the over current
protection. These are used to give backup protection for the remote end feeder
protection IED. In situations where the selectivity is weaker than usually, the
protection should still be available for the system.

615 series 375

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-01A2A41E-2813-448D-953F-F9690578DEDE V1 EN

Figure 199: Protection communication supervision detects failures on

communication

In-zone transformer

GUID-52FC4852-C9D1-4DD1-B2D7-62FCE98B7FD7 V1 EN

Figure 200: In-zone transformer example about CT ratio correction calculation

The CT ratio correction calculation starts with the rated load current calculation for
HV and LV sides. The rated load current is defined as the rated power of the
transformer divided by the square root of three times the nominal phase-to-phase
voltage at the HV or LV side.

376 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Sn
InΤ =
3 × Un
GUID-0024F590-C940-4636-A56B-A8C13A5F1BBA V1 EN (Equation 43)

The rated load current of the transformer on the HV side is 209.9 A (40 MW / (√3
× 110 kV)) and the rated load current of the transformer on the LV side is 1154.7 A
(40 MW / (√3 × 20 kV)). This means that the CT ratio corrections for the HV and
LV sides are:

CT ratio correction (HV) = 1.429 (300 A / 209.9 A)

CT ratio correction (LV) = 1.299 (1500 A / 1154.7 A)

Small power transformers in a tap

With a relatively small power transformer in a line tap, the line differential
protection can be applied without the need of current measurement from the tap. In
such cases, the line differential function is time delayed for low differential
currents below the high set limit and LNPLDF coordinates with the downstream
IEDs in the relevant tap. For differential currents above the set limit, the operation
is instantaneous. As a consequence, when the load current of the tap is negligible,
the low resistive line faults are cleared instantaneously at the same time as
maximum sensitivity for the high resistive faults are maintained but with a time
delayed operation. The maximum sensitivity for high resistive faults is maintained
at the same time, but with a time delayed operation.

GUID-F1B36FF9-7463-4D8D-8EDC-70A09B52CAE9 V1 EN

Figure 201: Influence of the tapped transformer load current to the stabilized
low stage setting

The stabilized stage provides both DT and IDMT characteristics that are used for
time selective protection against faults which are not covered by the instantaneous
stage. The impedance of the line is typically an order of magnitude lower than the

615 series 377

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

transformer impedance providing significantly higher fault currents when the fault
is located on the line.

GUID-F9600D18-75B9-4EA5-8F9B-656FCB1FC938 V1 EN

Figure 202: Influence of the short circuit current at LV side of the tapped
transformer to the differential current

Detection of the inrush current during transformer start-up

When the line is energized, the transformer magnetization inrush current is seen as
differential current by the line differential protection and may cause malfunction of
the protection if not taken into account. The inrush situation may only be detected
on one end but the differential current is always seen on both ends. The inrush
current includes high order harmonic components which can be detected and used
as the blocking criteria for the stabilized stage. The inrush detection information is
changed between two ends so that fast and safe blocking of the stabilized stage can
be issued on both ends.

378 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-0383F2EF-18CC-45A0-A9BC-E04658981495 V2 EN

Figure 203: Blocking of line differential functions during detected transformer

startup current

If the protection stage is allowed to start during the inrush situation, the time delay
can be selected so that the stabilized stage does not operate in the inrush situation.

4.3.1.7 Signals
Table 331: LNPLDF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_LOC_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A local current
I_LOC_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B local current
I_LOC_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C local current
I_REM_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A remote current
I_REM_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B remote current
I_REM_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C remote current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for blocking the function
BLOCK_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for blocking the stab. stage
ENA_MULT_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Enables the high stage multiplier

615 series 379

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 332: LNPLDF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate, local or remote, stabilized or
instantaneous stage
START BOOLEAN Start, local or remote
STR_LS_LOC BOOLEAN Start stabilized stage local
STR_LS_REM BOOLEAN Start stabilized stage remote
OPR_LS_LOC BOOLEAN Operate stabilized stage local
OPR_LS_REM BOOLEAN Operate stabilized stage remote
OPR_HS_LOC BOOLEAN Operate instantaneous stage local
OPR_HS_REM BOOLEAN Operate instantaneous stage remote
BLKD2H_LOC BOOLEAN Restraint due 2nd harmonics detected local
BLKD2H_REM BOOLEAN Restraint due 2nd harmonics detected remote
PRO_ACTIVE BOOLEAN Status of the protection, true when function is
operative

4.3.1.8 Settings
Table 333: LNPLDF Group settings (Basic)
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Low operate value 10...200 %Ir 1 10 Basic setting for the stabilized stage start
High operate value 200...4000 %Ir 1 2000 Instantaneous stage operate value
Start value 2.H 10...50 % 1 20 The ratio of the 2. harmonic component
to fundamental component required for
blocking
High Op value Mult 0.5...1.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the high stage
operate value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IDMT curves
End section 1 0...200 %Ir 1 100 Turn-point between the first and the
second line of the operating
characteristics
Slope section 2 10...50 % 1 50 Slope of the second line of the operating
characteristics
End section 2 200...2000 %Ir 1 500 Turn-point between the second and the
third line of the operating characteristics
Slope section 3 100...200 % 1 150 Slope of the third line of the operating
characteristics
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve for
3=ANSI Norm. inv. stabilized stage
5=ANSI Def. Time
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
Operate delay time 45...200000 ms 1 45 Operate delay time for stabilized stage

380 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 334: LNPLDF Non group settings (Basic)

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation mode of the function
4=test/blocked
5=off
Winding selection 1=Not in use 1=Not in use IED location respect to transformer, HV
2=Winding 1 (Winding 1) side or LV (Winding 2) side
3=Winding 2
Winding 1 type 1=Y 1=Y Connection of the HV side windings
2=YN
3=D
4=Z
5=ZN
Winding 2 type 1=y 1=y Connection of the LV side windings
2=yn
3=d
4=z
5=zn
Clock number 0=Clk Num 0 0=Clk Num 0 Setting the phase shift between HV and
1=Clk Num 1 LV with clock number for connection
2=Clk Num 2 group compensation (e.g. Dyn11 -> 11)
4=Clk Num 4
5=Clk Num 5
6=Clk Num 6
7=Clk Num 7
8=Clk Num 8
10=Clk Num 10
11=Clk Num 11
CT ratio correction 0.200...5.000 0.001 1.000 Remote phase current transformer ratio
correction
CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the
2=Type 2 directions of the connected current
transformers.
Zro A elimination 1=Not eliminated 1=Not eliminated Elimination of the zero-sequence current
2=Winding 1
3=Winding 2
4=Winding 1 and 2
Restraint mode 1=None 1=None Selects what restraint modes are in use
2=Harmonic2

Table 335: LNPLDF Non group settings (Advanced)

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for stabilized stage
Minimum operate time 45...60000 ms 1 45 Minimum operate time for stabilized
stage IDMT curves

615 series 381

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.3.1.9 Monitored Data

Table 336: LNPLDF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
I_AMPL_LOC_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Local phase A amplitude
after correction
I_AMPL_LOC_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Local phase B amplitude
after correction
I_AMPL_LOC_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Local phase C amplitude
after correction
I_AMPL_REM_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Remote phase A
amplitude after correction
I_AMPL_REM_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Remote phase B
amplitude after correction
I_AMPL_REM_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Remote phase C
amplitude after correction
ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current
phase A
ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current
phase B
ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential current
phase C
IB_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Stabilization current
phase A
IB_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Stabilization current
phase B
IB_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Stabilization current
phase C
I_ANGL_DIFF_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
differential between local
and remote, phase A
I_ANGL_DIFF_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
differential between local
and remote, phase B
I_ANGL_DIFF_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
differential between local
and remote, phase C
LNPLDF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

382 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.1.10 Technical data

Table 337: LNPLDF Technical data
Characteristics Value
Operation accuracy 1) Depending on the frequency of the measured
current: fn ±2 Hz

Low stage ±2.5% of the set value

High stage ±2.5% of the set value
Minimum Typical Maximum

High stage, operate time 2)3) 22 ms 25 ms 29 ms

Reset time Typically 40 ms

Reset ratio Typically 0.96
Retardation time (Low stage) <40 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 4)

1) With the symmetrical communication channel (as when using dedicated fiber optic).
2) Without additional delay in the communication channel (as when using dedicated fiber optic).
3) Including the delay of the output contact. When differential current = 2 × High operate value and fn =
50 Hz with galvanic pilot wire link + 5 ms.
4) Low operate value multiples in range of 1.5...20.

4.3.1.11 Technical revision history

Table 338: LNPLDF Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.
C Support for in-zone transformer added.
Differential and bias currents are shown as rated
currents in the Measurements view.

4.3.2 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for 2W-

transformers TR2PTDF

4.3.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Stabilized and instantaneous TR2PTDF 3dI>T 87T
differential protection for 2W-
transformers

615 series 383

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.3.2.2 Function block

GUID-134E8524-738D-4232-A6BD-4C9BD2A62F8D V1 EN

Figure 204: Function block

4.3.2.3 Functionality

The transformer differential protection TR2PTDF is designed to protect two-

winding transformers and generator-transformer blocks. TR2PTDF includes low
biased and high instantaneous stages.

The biased low stage provides a fast clearance of faults while remaining stable with
high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current
measuring. The second harmonic restraint, together with the waveform based
algorithms, ensures that the low stage does not operate due to the transformer
inrush currents. The fifth harmonic restraint ensures that the low stage does not
operate on apparent differential current caused by a harmless transformer over-
excitation.

The instantaneous high stage provides a very fast clearance of severe faults with a
high differential current regardless of their harmonics.

The setting characteristic can be set more sensitive with the aid of tap changer
position compensation. The correction of transformation ratio due to the changes in
tap position is done automatically based on the tap changer status information.

4.3.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of transformer differential protection can be described by using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

384 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-3A506E19-4E77-4866-8EDC-6264823E1090 V1 EN

Figure 205: Functional module diagram. I_x1 and I_x2 represent the phase
currents of winding 1 and winding 2

Differential calculation
TR2PTDF operates phase-wise on a difference of incoming and outgoing currents.
The positive direction of the currents is towards the protected object.

IW1 IW 2

Winding 1 Winding 2
(usually HV) (usually LV)
GUID-DABAB343-214F-4A86-ADC8-BFD8E64B25A7 V3 EN

Figure 206: Positive direction of the currents

Id = I W 1 + I W 2
GUID-0B35503B-CA7D-4598-A1E4-59C9AA66012D V2 EN (Equation 44)

615 series 385

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the
currents I W1 and I W 2 are equal and the differential current Id is zero. In practice,
however, the differential current deviates from zero in normal situations. In the
power transformer protection, the differential current is caused by CT inaccuracies,
variations in tap changer position (if not compensated), transformer no-load current
and instantaneous transformer inrush currents. An increase in the load current
causes the differential current, caused by the CT inaccuracies and the tap changer
position, to grow at the same percentage rate.

In a biased differential IED in normal operation or during external faults, the higher
the load current is the higher is the differential current required for tripping. When
an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the protected object are
flowing into it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which
makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults.

IW1 − IW 2
Ib =
2
GUID-1403DDDA-D840-4746-A925-F426AC7A8608 V2 EN (Equation 45)

If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or if the phase
angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a
normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most certainly
occurred in the area protected by the differential IED. Then the operation value set
for the instantaneous stage is automatically halved and the internal blocking signals
of the biased stage are inhibited.

Transformer vector group matching

The phase difference of the winding 1 and winding 2 currents that is caused by the
vector group of the power transformer is numerically compensated. The matching
of the phase difference is based on the phase shifting and the numerical delta
connection inside the IED. The Winding 2 type parameter determines the
connections of the phase windings on the low voltage side
(“y”, ”yn”, ”d”, ”z”, ”zn”). Similarly, the Winding 1 type parameter determines the
connection on winding 1 (”Y”, ”YN”, ”D”, ”Z”, ”ZN”).

The vector group matching can be implemented either on both, winding 1 and
winding 2, or only on winding 1 or winding 2, at intervals of 30° with the Clock
number setting.

When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the CT connection type is according to
"Type 2", the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the IED does not
change. When the vector group matching is Yy6, the phase currents are turned
180° in the IED.

Example 1
Vector group matching of a Ynd11-connected power transformer on winding 1, CT
connection type according to type 1. The Winding 1 type setting is ”YN”, Winding
2 type is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally

386 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

by giving winding 1 internal compensation value +30° and winding 2 internal

compensation value 0°:

I L1 − I L 2
I L1mHV =
3
I L 2 − I L3
I L 2 mHV =
3
I L 3 − I L1
I L 3mHV =
3
GUID-633921A4-D973-4BD2-BFDF-E9FF73C3B9E3 V1 EN (Equation 46)

Example 2
But if vector group is Yd11 and CT connection type is according to type 1, the
compensation is a little different. The Winding 1 type setting is ”Y”, Winding 2
type is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by
giving winding 1 internal compensation value 0° and winding 2 internal
compensation value -30°;

I L1 − I L3
I L1mLV =
3
I L 2 − I L1
I L 2 mLV =
3
I L3 − I L 2
I L3mLV =
3
GUID-41089920-D9BF-4574-96FB-0B1F48019391 V1 EN (Equation 47)

The "Y" side currents stay untouched, while the "d" side currents are compensated
to match the currents actually flowing in the windings.

In this example there is no neutral current on either side of the transformer

(assuming there are no earthing transformers installed). In the previous example,
however, the matching is done differently to have the winding 1 neutral current
compensated at the same time.

Zero-sequence component elimination

If Clock number is "Clk Num 2", "Clk Num 4", "Clk Num 8" or "Clk Num 10", the
vector group matching is always done on both, winding 1 and winding 2. The
combination results in the correct compensation. In this case the zero-sequence
component is always removed from both sides automatically. The Zro A
elimination parameter cannot change this.

If Clock number is "Clk Num 1", "Clk Num 5", "Clk Num 7" or "Clk Num 11", the
vector group matching is done on one side only. A possible zero-sequence
component of the phase currents at earth faults occurring outside the protection
area is eliminated in the numerically implemented delta connection before the
differential current and the biasing current are calculated. This is why the vector

615 series 387

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

group matching is almost always made on the star connected side of the "Ynd" and
"Dyn" connected transformers.

If Clock number is "Clk Num 0" or "Clk Num 6", the zero-sequence component of
the phase currents is not eliminated automatically on either side. Therefore, the zero-
sequence component on the star connected side that is earthed at its star point has
to be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter.

The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero-sequence component if

there is, for example, an earthing transformer on the delta-connected side of the
"Ynd" power transformer in the area to be protected. In this case, the vector group
matching is normally made on the side of the star connection. On the side of the
delta connection, the elimination of the zero-sequence component has to be
separately selected.

By using the Zro A elimination parameter, the zero-sequence component of the

phase currents is calculated and reduced for each phase current:

1
(
I L1m = I L1 − x I L1 + I L 2 + I L3
3
)
1
(
I L 2 m = I L 2 − x I L1 + I L 2 + I L3
3
)
1
(
I L3m = I L3 − x I L1 + I L 2 + I L3
3
)
GUID-398EDAFF-4A32-4C39-AD75-1F6D19B8FF48 V1 EN (Equation 48)

In many cases with the earthed neutral of a "wye" winding, it is

possible to make the compensation so that a zero-sequence
component of the phase currents is automatically eliminated. For
example, in a case of a "Ynd" transformer, the compensation is
made on the winding 1 side to automatically eliminate the zero-
sequence component of the phase currents on that side (and the "d"
side does not have them). In those cases, explicit elimination is not
needed.

Compensation of tap changer position

The position of the tap changer used for voltage control can be compensated and
the position information is provided for the protection function through the tap
position indication function TPOSSLTC1.

Typically, the tap changer is located within the high voltage winding, that is,
winding 1, of the power transformer. The Tapped winding parameter specifies
whether the tap changer is connected to the high voltage side winding or the low
voltage side winding. This parameter is also used to enable and disable the
automatic adaptation to the tap changer position. The possible values are "Not in
use", "Winding 1", "Winding 2".

388 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

The Tap nominal parameter tells the number of the tap, which results in the
nominal voltage (and current). When the current tap position deviates from this
value, the input current values on the side where the tap changer resides are scaled
to match the currents on the other side.

A correct scaling is determined by the number of steps and the direction of the
deviation from the nominal tap and the percentage change in voltage resulting from
a deviation of one tap step. The percentage value is set using the Step of tap parameter.

The operating range of the tap changer is defined by the Min winding tap and Max
winding tap parameters. The Min winding tap parameter tells the tap position
number resulting in the minimum effective number of winding turns on the side of
the transformer where the tap changer is connected. Correspondingly, the Max
winding tap parameter tells the tap position number resulting in the maximum
effective number of winding turns.

The Min winding tap and Max winding tap parameters help the tap position
compensation algorithm know in which direction the compensation is being made.
This ensures also that if the current tap position information is corrupted for some
reason, the automatic tap changer position adaptation does not try to adapt to any
unrealistic position values.

GUID-317C68F8-A517-458A-A5D0-32FCE6C5F547 V1 EN

Figure 207: Simplified presentation of the high voltage and medium voltage
windings with demonstration of the Max winding tap, Min winding
tap and Tap nominal parameters

The position value is available through the Monitored data view on LHMI or
through other communication tools in the tap position indication function. When
the quality of the TAP_POS value is not good, the position information in
TAP_POS is not used but the last value with the good quality information is used
instead. In addition, the minimum sensitivity of the biased stage, set by the Low
operate value setting, is automatically desensitized with the total range of the tap
position correction. The new acting low operate value is
Desensitized Low operate value = Low operate value + ABS ( MaxWinding tap − Min winding tap ) × Step of tap
GUID-2E5AD399-D8DD-4F64-A194-7540D55DB8ED V3 EN (Equation 49)

615 series 389

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Second harmonic blocking

The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when energizing the
transformer after a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times
the rated current and the halving time can be up to several seconds. To the
differential protection, the inrush current represents a differential current, which
would cause the differential protection to operate almost always when the
transformer is connected to the network. Typically, the inrush current contains a
large amount of second harmonics.

Blocking the operation of the TR2PTDF biased low stage at a magnetizing inrush
current is based on the ratio of the amplitudes of the second harmonic digitally
filtered from the differential current and the fundamental frequency (Id2f /Id1f).

The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the
transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to
normal after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic
inrush is caused by the energization of another transformer running in parallel with
the protected transformer already connected to the network.

The ratio of the second harmonic to a fundamental component can vary

considerably between the phases. Especially when the delta compensation is done
for a Ynd1 connected transformer and the two phases of the inrush currents are
otherwise equal but opposite in phase angle, the subtraction of the phases in a delta
compensation results in a very small second harmonic component.

Some measures have to be taken in order to avoid the false tripping of a phase
having too low a ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental component. One
way could be to always block all the phases when the second harmonic blocking
conditions are fulfilled in at least one phase. The other way is to calculate the
weighted ratios of the second harmonic to the fundamental component for each
phase using the original ratios of the phases. The latter option is used here. The
second harmonic ratios I_2H_RAT_x are given in monitored data.

The ratio to be used for second harmonic blocking is, therefore, calculated as a
weighted average on the basis of the ratios calculated from the differential currents
of the three phases. The ratio of the concerned phase is of most weight compared to
the ratios of the other two phases. In this IED, if the weighting factors are four, one
and one, four is the factor of the phase concerned. The operation of the biased stage
on the concerned phase is blocked if the weighted ratio of that phase is above the
set blocking limit Start value 2.H and if blocking is enabled through the Restraint
mode parameter.

Using separate blocking for the individual phases and weighted averages calculated
for the separate phases provides a blocking scheme that is stable at the connection
inrush currents.

390 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

If the peak value of the differential current is very high, that is Ir> 12 xIn, the limit
for the second harmonic blocking is desensitized (in the phase in question) by
increasing it proportionally to the peak value of the differential current.

The connection of the power transformer against a fault inside the protected area
does not delay the operation of the tripping, because in such a situation the
blocking based on the second harmonic of the differential current is prevented by a
separate algorithm based on a different waveform and a different rate of change of
the normal inrush current and the inrush current containing the fault current. The
algorithm does not eliminate the blocking at inrush currents, unless there is a fault
in the protected area.

The feature can also be enabled and disabled with the Harmonic deblock 2.H
parameter.

Fifth harmonic blocking

The inhibition of TR2PTDF operation in the situations of overexcitation is based
on the ratio of the fifth harmonic and the fundamental component of the differential
current (Id5f/Id1f). The ratio is calculated separately for each phase without
weighting . If the ratio exceeds the setting value of Start value 5.H and if blocking
is enabled through the Restraint mode parameter, the operation of the biased stage
of TR2PTDF in the concerned phase is blocked.The fifth harmonic ratios
I_5H_RAT_x are given in monitored data.

At dangerous levels of overvoltage, which can cause damage to the transformer,

the blocking can be automatically eliminated. If the ratio of the fifth harmonic and
the fundamental component of the differential current exceeds the Stop value 5.H
parameter, the blocking removal is enabled. The enabling and disabling of
deblocking feature is also done through the Harmonic deblock 5.H parameter.

GUID-A97464D1-3085-4F27-B829-11EEC47CA654 V1 EN

Figure 208: The limits and operation of the fifth harmonic blocking when both
blocking and deblocking features are enabled using the Harmonic
deblock 5.H control parameter.

615 series 391

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The fifth harmonic blocking has a hysteresis to avoid rapid fluctuation between
"TRUE" and "FALSE". The blocking also has a counter, which counts the required
consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the
counter is decreased (if >0).

Also the fifth harmonic deblocking has a hysteresis and a counter which counts the
required consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not
fulfilled, the counter is decreased (if >0).

Waveform blocking
The biased low stage can always be blocked with waveform blocking. The stage
can not be disabled with the Restraint mode parameter. This algorithm has two
parts. The first part is intended for external faults while the second is intended for
inrush situations. The algorithm has criteria for a low current period during inrush
where also the differential current (not derivative) is checked.

Biased low stage

The current differential protection needs to be biased because the possible
appearance of a differential current can be due to something else than an actual
fault in the transformer (or generator).

In the case of transformer protection, a false differential current can be caused by:
• CT errors
• Varying tap changer positions (if not automatically compensated)
• Transformer no-load current
• Transformer inrush currents
• Transformer overexcitation in overvoltage
• Underfrequency situations
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the transformer.

The differential current caused by CT errors or tap changer positions increases at

the same percent ratio as the load current.

In the protection of generators, the false differential current can be caused by:
• CT errors
• CT saturation at high currents passing through the generator.

392 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

I_D Charact.
(from Differential calculation) OPERATE
OR
I_B
I
(from Differential calculation) OPR_LS

BLOCK
Ibias
BLOCK_OPR_LS AND
OR

Slope section 2

OR AND
End section 2

Low operate value

OR AND

OR BLKD2H
Fault in protected area
(from Differential calculation)

AND AND
BLKD2HPHAR_A
(from Second harmonic blocking)

AND AND
BLKD2HPHAR_A
(from Second harmonic blocking)

AND AND OR BLKD5H

BLKD2HPHAR_C
(from Second harmonic blocking)

AND AND
BLKD5HPHAR_A
(from Fifth harmonic blocking)

AND AND
BLKD5HPHAR_B
(from Fifth harmonic blocking)

AND AND
BLKD5HPHAR_C OR BLKDWAV
(from Fifth harmonic blocking)

AND AND
BLKDWAV_A
(from Waveform blocking)

AND AND
BLKDWAV_B
(from Waveform blocking)

AND AND
BLKDWAV_C
(from Waveform blocking))

GUID-0E927DF9-5641-4CAE-B808-0B75EA09EA95 V2 EN

Figure 209: Operation logic of the biased low stage

The high currents passing through a protected object can be caused by the short
circuits outside the protected area, the large currents fed by the transformer in
motor startup or the transformer inrush situations. Therefore, the operation of the
differential protection is biased in respect to the load current. In biased differential
protection, the higher the differential current required for the protection to operate,
the higher the load current.

The operating characteristic of the biased low stage is determined by Low operate
value, Slope section 2 and the setting of the second turning point of the operating
characteristic curve, End section 2 (the first turning point and the slope of the last
part of the characteristic are fixed). The settings are the same for all the phases.
When the differential current exceeds the operating value determined by the
operating characteristic, the differential function awakes. If the differential current
stays above the operating value continuously for a suitable period, which is 1.1
times the fundamental cycle, the OPR_LS output is activated. The OPERATE
output is always activated when the OPR_LS output is activated.

The stage can be blocked internally by the second or fifth harmonic restraint, or by
special algorithms detecting inrush and current transformer saturation at external

615 series 393

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

faults. When the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the second
harmonic blocking functionality, the BLKD2H output is activated.

When operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the fifth harmonic blocking
functionality, the BLKD5H output is activated. Correspondingly, when the
operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the waveform blocking
functionality, the BLKDWAV output is activated according to the phase information.

When required, the operate outputs of the biased low stage can be blocked by the
BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK external control signals.

Id [%Ir]

300 Ib3

Id3
200

Ib2

100

Id1
Id2
Low operate value

100 200 300 400 500 Ib [%Ir]

Section 1 Section 2 Section 3

End section 1 End section 2

GUID-EAAB6851-B6A9-4A69-B962-1725A4928D54 V3 EN

Figure 210: Operation characteristic for biased operation of TR2PTDF

The Low operate value of the biased stage of the differential function is determined
according to the operation characteristic:

Low operate value = Id1

Slope section 2 is determined correspondingly:

Slope section 2 = Id 2 / Ib 2 × 100%

GUID-D1C2CAED-3D58-4405-A79D-17B203A8D3A9 V3 EN (Equation 50)

The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to
500 percent.

The slope of the differential function's operating characteristic curve varies in the
different sections of the range.

394 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

• In section 1, where 0 percent Ir < Ib < End section 1, End section 1 being fixed
to 50 percent Ir, the differential current required for tripping is constant. The
value of the differential current is the same as the Low operate value selected
for the function. Low operate value basically allows the no-load current of the
power transformer and small inaccuracies of the current transformers, but it
can also be used to influence the overall level of the operating characteristic.
At the rated current, the no-load losses of the power transformer are about 0.2
percent. If the supply voltage of the power transformer suddenly increases due
to operational disturbances, the magnetizing current of the transformer
increases as well. In general the magnetic flux density of the transformer is
rather high at rated voltage and a rise in voltage by a few percent causes the
magnetizing current to increase by tens of percent. This should be considered
in Low operate value
• In section 2, where End section 1 < Ib/In < End section 2, is called the
influence area of Slope section 2. In this section, variations in the starting ratio
affect the slope of the characteristic, that is, how big a change in the
differential current is required for tripping in comparison with the change in
the load current. The starting ratio should consider CT errors and variations in
the transformer tap changer position (if not compensated). Too high a starting
ratio should be avoided, because the sensitivity of the protection for detecting
inter-turn faults depends basically on the starting ratio.
• In section 3, where Ib/In > End section 2, the slope of the characteristic is
constant. The slope is 100%, which means that the increase in the differential
current is equal to the corresponding increase in the biasing current.

GUID-739E1789-778D-44BF-BD4A-6BD684BF041D V2 EN

Figure 211: Setting range for biased low stage

615 series 395

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current of the phase
angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a
normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most likely
occurred in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the internal blocking signals of
the biased stage are inhibited.

Instantaneous high stage

The instantaneous high stage operation can be enabled and disabled with the
Enable high set setting. The corresponding parameter values are "TRUE" and
"FALSE."

The operation of the instantaneous high stage is not biased. The instantaneous stage
operates and the output OPR_HS is activated when the amplitude of the
fundamental frequency component of the differential current exceeds the set High
operate value or when the instantaneous value of the differential current exceeds
2.5 times the value of High operate value. The factor 2.5 (=1.8 x √2) is due to the
maximum asymmetric short circuit current.

If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or the phase
angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a
normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has occurred in the
area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the operation value set for the instantaneous
stage is automatically halved and the internal blocking signals of the biased stage
are inhibited.

GUID-8B8EC6FC-DF75-4674-808B-7B4C68E9F3E8 V1 EN

Figure 212: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the
biased low stage and (HS) for the instantaneous high stage

The OPERATE output is activated always when the OPR_HS output activates .

The internal blocking signals of the differential function do not prevent the operate
signal of the instantaneous differential current stage. When required, the operate

396 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

outputs of the instantaneous high stage can be blocked by the BLK_OPR_HS and
BLOCK external control signals.

GUID-9AACAC66-BF72-430C-AAC7-2E52C3DC4487 V1 EN

Figure 213: Operation logic of instantaneous high stage

Reset of the blocking signals (de-block)

All three blocking signals, that is, waveform and second and fifth harmonic, have a
counter, which holds the blocking on for a certain time after the blocking
conditions have ceased to be fulfilled. The deblocking takes place when those
counters have elapsed. This is a normal case of deblocking.

The blocking signals can be reset immediately if a very high differential current is
measured or if the phase difference of the compared currents (the angle between
the compared currents) is close to zero after the automatic vector group matching
has been made (in a normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees). This
does not, however, reset the counters holding the blockings, so the blocking signals
may return when these conditions are not valid anymore.

External blocking functionality

TR2PTDF has three inputs for blocking.
• When the BLOCK input is active ("TRUE"), the operation of the function is
blocked but measurement output signals are still updated.
• When the BLK_OPR_LS input is active ("TRUE"), TR2PTDF operates
normally except that the OPR_LS output is not active or activated in any
circumstance. Additionally, the OPERATE output can be activated only by the
instantaneous high stage (if not blocked as well).
• When the BLK_OPR_HS input is active ("TRUE"), TR2PTDF operates
normally except that the OPR_HS output is not active or activated in any
circumstance. Additionally, the OPERATE output can be activated only by the
biased low stage (if not blocked as well).

4.3.2.5 Application

TR2PTDF is a unit protection function serving as the main protection for

transformers in case of winding failure. The protective zone of a differential

615 series 397

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

protection includes the transformer, the bus-work or the cables between the current
transformer and the power transformer. When bushing current transformers are
used for the differential IED, the protective zone does not include the bus work or
cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer.

In some substations, there is a current differential protection for the busbar. The
busbar protection includes bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the
power transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and cause immediate
damage. Short circuits and earth faults in windings and terminals are normally
detected by the differential protection. If enough turns are short-circuited, the
interturn faults, which are flashovers between the conductors within the same
physical winding, are also detected. The interturn faults are the most difficult
transformer-winding faults to detect with electrical protections. A small interturn
fault including a few turns results in an undetectable amount of current until the
fault develops into an earth fault. Therefore, it is important that the differential
protection has a high level of sensitivity and that it is possible to use a sensitive
setting without causing unwanted operations for external faults.

It is important that the faulty transformer is disconnected as fast as possible. As

TR2PTDF is a unit protection function, it can be designed for fast tripping, thus
providing a selective disconnection of the faulty transformer. TR2PTDF should
never operate to faults outside the protective zone.

TR2PTDF compares the current flowing into the transformer to the current leaving
the transformer. A correct analysis of fault conditions by TR2PTDF must consider
the changes to voltages, currents and phase angles. The traditional transformer
differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for the correction
of the phase shift and turns ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential
algorithm implemented in TR2PTDF compensates for both the turns ratio and the
phase shift internally in the software.

The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external
faults if the turns ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated. However,
there are several different phenomena other than internal faults that cause
unwanted and false differential currents. The main reasons for unwanted
differential currents are:
• Mismatch due to varying tap changer positions
• Different characteristics, loads and operating conditions of the current
transformers
• Zero sequence currents that only flow on one side of the power transformer
• Normal magnetizing currents
• Magnetizing inrush currents
• Overexcitation magnetizing currents.

TR2PTDF is designed mainly for the protection of two-winding transformers.

TR2PTDF can also be utilized for the protection of generator-transformer blocks as
well as short cables and overhead lines. If the distance between the measuring

398 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

points is relatively long in line protection, interposing CTs can be required to

reduce the burden of the CTs.

GUID-B326703C-3645-4256-96AD-DA87FC9E9C67 V1 EN

Figure 214: Differential protection of a generator-transformer block and short

cable/line

TR2PTDF can also be used in three-winding transformer applications or two-

winding transformer applications with two output feeders.

On the double-feeder side of the power transformer, the current of the two CTs per
phase must be summed by connecting the two CTs of each phase in parallel.
Generally this requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and/or ratio
mismatch between the two windings/feeders.

The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements
as the main CTs. Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden
to the main CTs.

The most important rule in these applications is that at least 75 percent of the short-
circuit power has to be fed on the side of the power transformer with only one
connection to the IED.

615 series 399

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-799588E3-C63F-4687-98C5-FF48284676DF V1 EN

Figure 215: Differential protection of a three-winding transformer and a

transformer with two output feeders

TR2PTDF can also be used for the protection of the power transformer feeding the
frequency converter. An interposing CT is required for matching the three-winding
transformer currents to a two-winding protection relay.

The fundamental frequency component is numerically filtered with a Fourier filter,

DFT. The filter suppresses frequencies other than the set fundamental frequency,
and therefore the IED is not adapted for measuring the output of the frequency
converter, that is, TR2PTDF is not suited for protecting of a power transformer or
motor fed by a frequency converter

400 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-46FDF23A-7E78-4B17-A888-8501484AB57A V1 EN

Figure 216: Protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency converter

Transforming ratio correction of CTs

The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of
the power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides
of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ration Cor Wnd 2
settings.

First, the rated load of the power transformer must be calculated on both sides
when the apparent power and phase-to-phase voltage are known.

Sn
I nT =
3 ×U n
GUID-B5467DB8-17EB-4D09-A741-1F5BB23466AA V1 EN (Equation 51)

InT rated load of the power transformer

Sn rated power of the power transformer

Un rated phase-to-phase voltage

Next, the settings for the CT ratio correction can be calculated.

615 series 401

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

I1n
CT ratio correction =
I nT
GUID-F5F45645-C809-4F99-B783-751C8CC822BF V1 EN (Equation 52)

I1n nominal primary current of the CT

After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting
values of TR2PTDF are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer
current Ir (xIr) or percentage value of Ir (%Ir).

Example
The rated power of the transformer is 25 MVA, the ratio of the CTs on the 110 kV
side is 300/1 and that on the 21 kV side is 1000/1

GUID-DC9083B2-CB07-4F6B-8C06-52979E5F484A V1 EN

Figure 217: Example of two-winding power transformer differential protection

The rated load of the transformer is calculated:

HV side: InT_Wnd1 = 25 MVA / (1.732 x 110 kV) = 131.2 A

LV side: InT_Wnd2 = 25 MVA / (1.732 x 21 kV) = 687.3 A

Settings:
CT ratio Cor Wnd 1= 300 A / 131.2 A = “2.29”

CT ratio Cor Wnd 2= 1000 A / 687.3 A = “1.45”

Vector group matching and elimination of the zero-sequence

component
The vector group of the power transformer is numerically matched on the high
voltage and low voltage sides by means of the Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and
Clock number settings. Thus no interposing CTs are needed if there is only a power
transformer inside the protected zone. The matching is based on phase shifting and
a numerical delta connection in the IED. If the neutral of a star-connected power
transformer is earthed, any earth fault in the network is perceived by the IED as a

402 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

differential current. The elimination of the zero-sequence component can be

selected for that winding by setting the Zro A elimination parameter.

Table 339: TR2PTDF settings corresponding to the power transformer vector groups and zero-
sequence elimination
Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Yy0 Y y Clk Num 0 Not needed
YNy0 YN y Clk Num 0 HV side
YNyn0 YN yn Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Yyn0 Y yn Clk Num 0 LV side
Yy2 Y y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNy2 YN y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNyn2 YN yn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yyn2 Y yn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yy4 Y y Clk Num 4 Not needed
YNy4 YN y Clk Num 4 Not needed
YNyn4 YN yn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Yyn4 Y yn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Yy6 Y y Clk Num 6 Not needed
YNy6 YN y Clk Num 6 HV side
YNyn6 YN yn Clk Num 6 HV & LV side
Yyn6 Y yn Clk Num 6 LV side
Yy8 Y y Clk Num 8 Not needed
YNy8 YN y Clk Num 8 Not needed
YNyn8 YN yn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Yyn8 Y yn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Yy10 Y y Clk Num 10 Not needed
YNy10 YN y Clk Num 10 Not needed
YNyn10 YN yn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yyn10 Y yn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yd1 Y d Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNd1 YN d Clk Num 1 Not needed
Yd5 Y d Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNd5 YN d Clk Num 5 Not needed
Yd7 Y d Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNd7 YN d Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yd11 Y d Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNd11 YN d Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dd0 D d Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dd2 D d Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dd4 D d Clk Num 4 Not needed
Table continues on next page

615 series 403

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Dd6 D d Clk Num 6 Not needed
Dd8 D d Clk Num 8 Not needed
Dd10 D d Clk Num 10 Not needed
Dy1 D y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dyn1 D yn Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dy5 D y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Dyn5 D yn Clk Num 5 Not needed
Dy7 D y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Dyn7 D yn Clk Num 7 Not needed
Dy11 D y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dyn11 D yn Clk Num 11 Not needed
Yz1 Y z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNz1 YN z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNzn1 YN zn Clk Num 1 LV side
Yzn1 Y zn Clk Num 1 Not needed
Yz5 Y z Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNz5 YN z Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNzn5 YN zn Clk Num 5 LV side
Yzn5 Y zn Clk Num 5 Not needed
Yz7 Y z Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNz7 YN z Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNzn7 YN zn Clk Num 7 LV side
Yzn7 Y zn Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yz11 Y z Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNz11 YN z Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNzn11 YN zn Clk Num 11 LV side
Yzn11 Y zn Clk Num 11 Not needed
Zy1 Z y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zyn1 Z yn Clk Num 1 Not needed
ZNyn1 ZN yn Clk Num 1 HV side
ZNy1 ZN y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zy5 Z y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Zyn5 Z yn Clk Num 5 Not needed
ZNyn5 ZN yn Clk Num 5 HV side
ZNy5 ZN y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Zy7 Z y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Zyn7 Z yn Clk Num 7 Not needed
ZNyn7 ZN yn Clk Num 7 HV side
ZNy7 ZN y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Table continues on next page

404 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Zy11 Z y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Zyn11 Z yn Clk Num 11 Not needed
ZNyn11 ZN yn Clk Num 11 HV side
ZNy11 ZN y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dz0 D z Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dzn0 D zn Clk Num 0 LV side
Dz2 D z Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dzn2 D zn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dz4 D z Clk Num 4 Not needed
Dzn4 D zn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Dz6 D z Clk Num 6 Not needed
Dzn6 D zn Clk Num 6 LV side
Dz8 D z Clk Num 8 Not needed
Dzn8 D zn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Dz10 D z Clk Num 10 Not needed
Dzn10 D zn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Zd0 Z d Clk Num 0 Not needed
ZNd0 ZN d Clk Num 0 HV side
Zd2 Z d Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNd2 ZN d Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zd4 Z d Clk Num 4 Not needed
ZNd4 ZN d Clk Num 4 Not needed
Zd6 Z d Clk Num 6 Not needed
ZNd6 ZN d Clk Num 6 HV side
Zd8 Z d Clk Num 8 Not needed
ZNd8 ZN d Clk Num 8 Not needed
Zd10 Z d Clk Num 10 Not needed
ZNd10 ZN d Clk Num 10 Not needed
Zz0 Z z Clk Num 0 Not needed
ZNz0 ZN z Clk Num 0 HV side
ZNzn0 ZN zn Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Zzn0 Z zn Clk Num 0 LV side
Zz2 Z z Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNz2 ZN z Clk Num 2 Not needed
ZNzn2 ZN zn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zzn2 Z zn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Zz4 Z z Clk Num 4 Not needed
ZNz4 ZN z Clk Num 4 Not needed
ZNzn4 ZN zn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Table continues on next page

615 series 405

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Zzn4 Z zn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Zz6 Z z Clk Num 6 Not needed
ZNz6 ZN z Clk Num 6 HV side
ZNzn6 ZN zn Clk Num 6 HV & LV side
Zzn6 Z zn Clk Num 6 LV side
Zz8 Z z Clk Num 8 Not needed
ZNz8 ZN z Clk Num 8 Not needed
ZNzn8 ZN zn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Zzn8 Z zn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Zz10 Z z Clk Num 10 Not needed
ZNz10 ZN z Clk Num 10 Not needed
ZNzn10 ZN zn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Zzn10 Z zn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yy0 Y y Clk Num 0 Not needed
YNy0 YN y Clk Num 0 HV side
YNyn0 YN yn Clk Num 0 HV & LV side
Yyn0 Y yn Clk Num 0 LV side
Yy2 Y y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNy2 YN y Clk Num 2 Not needed
YNyn2 YN yn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yyn2 Y yn Clk Num 2 Not needed
Yy4 Y y Clk Num 4 Not needed
YNy4 YN y Clk Num 4 Not needed
YNyn4 YN yn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Yyn4 Y yn Clk Num 4 Not needed
Yy6 Y y Clk Num 6 Not needed
YNy6 YN y Clk Num 6 HV side
YNyn6 YN yn Clk Num 6 HV & LV side
Yyn6 Y yn Clk Num 6 LV side
Yy8 Y y Clk Num 8 Not needed
YNy8 YN y Clk Num 8 Not needed
YNyn8 YN yn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Yyn8 Y yn Clk Num 8 Not needed
Yy10 Y y Clk Num 10 Not needed
YNy10 YN y Clk Num 10 Not needed
YNyn10 YN yn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yyn10 Y yn Clk Num 10 Not needed
Yd1 Y d Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNd1 YN d Clk Num 1 Not needed
Table continues on next page

406 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
Yd5 Y d Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNd5 YN d Clk Num 5 Not needed
Yd7 Y d Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNd7 YN d Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yd11 Y d Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNd11 YN d Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dd0 D d Clk Num 0 Not needed
Dd2 D d Clk Num 2 Not needed
Dd4 D d Clk Num 4 Not needed
Dd6 D d Clk Num 6 Not needed
Dd8 D d Clk Num 8 Not needed
Dd10 D d Clk Num 10 Not needed
Dy1 D y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dyn1 D yn Clk Num 1 Not needed
Dy5 D y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Dyn5 D yn Clk Num 5 Not needed
Dy7 D y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Dyn7 D yn Clk Num 7 Not needed
Dy11 D y Clk Num 11 Not needed
Dyn11 D yn Clk Num 11 Not needed
Yz1 Y z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNz1 YN z Clk Num 1 Not needed
YNzn1 YN zn Clk Num 1 LV side
Yzn1 Y zn Clk Num 1 Not needed
Yz5 Y z Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNz5 YN z Clk Num 5 Not needed
YNzn5 YN zn Clk Num 5 LV side
Yzn5 Y zn Clk Num 5 Not needed
Yz7 Y z Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNz7 YN z Clk Num 7 Not needed
YNzn7 YN zn Clk Num 7 LV side
Yzn7 Y zn Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yz11 Y z Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNz11 YN z Clk Num 11 Not needed
YNzn11 YN zn Clk Num 11 LV side
Yzn11 Y zn Clk Num 11 Not needed
Zy1 Z y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zyn1 Z yn Clk Num 1 Not needed
ZNyn1 ZN yn Clk Num 1 HV side
Table continues on next page

615 series 407

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination
transformer
ZNy1 ZN y Clk Num 1 Not needed
Zy5 Z y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Zyn5 Z yn Clk Num 5 Not needed
ZNyn5 ZN yn Clk Num 5 HV side
ZNy5 ZN y Clk Num 5 Not needed
Zy7 Z y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Zyn7 Z yn Clk Num 7 Not needed
ZNyn7 ZN yn Clk Num 7 HV side
ZNy7 ZN y Clk Num 7 Not needed
Yy0 Y y Clk Num 0 Not needed

Commissioning
The correct settings, which are CT connection type, Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type
and Clock number, for the connection group compensation can be verified by
monitoring the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1,
I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2, I_ANGL_C2_A2,
I_ANGL_A1_A2, I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 while injecting the
current into the transformer. These angle values are calculated from the
compensated currents. See signal description from Monitored data table.

When a station service transformer is available, it can be used to provide current to

the high voltage side windings while the low voltage side windings are short-
circuited. This way the current can flow in both the high voltage and low voltage
windings. The commissioning signals can be provided by other means as well. The
minimum current to allow for phase current and angle monitoring is 0.015 Ir.

GUID-5ACBF127-85A3-4E5E-A130-9F7206A2DB4C V1 EN

Figure 218: Low voltage test arrangement. The three-phase low voltage source
can be the station service transformer.

The Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to “Not in use” to make
sure that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to
the tap changer position. When only the angle values are required, the setting of
Tapped winding is not needed since angle values are not affected by the tap
changer position adaptation.

408 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

When injecting the currents in the high voltage winding, the angle values
I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1, I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2,
I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 have to show +120 deg. Otherwise the
phase order can be wrong or the polarity of a current transformer differs from the
polarities of the other current transformers on the same side.

If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1

show -120 deg, the phase order is wrong on the high voltage side. If the angle
values I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2 and I_ANGL_C2_A2 show -120 deg,
the phase order is wrong on the low voltage side. If the angle values
I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 do not show the same
value of +120, the polarity of one current transformer can be wrong. For instance,
if the polarity of the current transformer measuring IL2 is wrong,
I_ANGL_A1_B1 shows -60 deg, I_ANGL_B1_C1 shows -60 deg and
I_ANGL_C1_A1 shows +120 deg.

When the phase order and the angle values are correct, the angle values
I_ANGL_A1_A2, I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 usually show ±180
deg. There can be several reasons if the angle values are not ±180 deg. If the values
are 0 deg, the value given for CT connection type is probably wrong. If the angle
values are something else, the value for Clock number can be wrong. Another
reason is that the combination of Winding 1 type and Winding 2 type does not
match Clock number. This means that the resulting connection group is not supported.

Example
If Winding 1 type is set to "Y", Winding 2 type is set to "y" and Clock number is set
to "Clk num 1", the resulting connection group "Yy1" is not a supported
combination. Similarly if Winding 1 type is set to "Y", Winding 2 type is set to "d"
and Clock number is set to "Clk num 0", the resulting connection group "Yd0" is
not a supported combination. All the non-supported combinations of Winding 1
type, Winding 2 type and Clock number settings result in the default connection
group compensation that is "Yy0".

Recommendations for current transformers

The more important the object to be protected, the more attention has to be paid to
the current transformers. It is not normally possible to dimension the current
transformer so that they repeat the currents with high DC components without
saturating when the residual flux of the current transformer is high. TR2PTDF
operates reliably even though the current transformers are partially saturated.

The accuracy class recommended for current transformers to be used with

TR2PTDF is 5P, in which the limit of the current error at the rated primary current
is 1 percent and the limit of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The limit of the
composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current is 5 percent.

The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to the actual
current transformer burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy

615 series 409

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

limit factor Fn at the rated burden, the rated burden Sn, the internal burden Sinand
the actual burden Sa of the current transformer.

Sin + Sn
Fa = Fn ×
Sin + Sa
GUID-26DEE538-9E1A-49A2-9C97-F69BD44591C9 V2 EN (Equation 53)

Fa The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor (ALF) corresponding to the actual CT burden

Fn The rated accuracy limit factor at the rated burden of the current transformer

Sn The rated burden of the current transformer

Sin The internal burden of the current transformer

Sa The actual burden of the current transformer

Example 1
The rated burden Sn of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated
current is 5A, the internal resistance Rin= 0.07 Ω and the accuracy limit factor Fn
corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20). Thus the internal burden of the
current transformer is Sin= (5A)2 * 0.07 Ω = 1.75 VA. The input impedance of the
IED at a rated current of 5A is < 20 mΩ. If the measurement conductors have a
resistance of 0.113 Ω, the actual burden of the current transformer is Sa=(5A)2 *
(0.113 + 0.020) Ω = 3.33 VA. Thus the accuracy limit factor Fa corresponding to
the actual burden is approximately 46.

The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A. The actual burden of
the current transformer decreases at the rated current of 1A while the repeatability
simultaneously improves.

At faults occurring in the protected area, the currents may be very high compared
to the rated currents of the current transformers. Due to the instantaneous stage of
the differential function block, it is sufficient that the current transformers are
capable of repeating the current required for instantaneous tripping during the first
cycle.

Thus the current transformers usually are able to reproduce the asymmetric fault
current without saturating within the next 10 ms after the occurrence of the fault to
secure that the operate times of the IED comply with the retardation time.

The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer to be used in differential protection fulfill the requirement.

Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm /Tdc ) + 1)

GUID-DA861DAD-C40E-4A82-8973-BBAFD15279C0 V1 EN (Equation 54)

Ikmax The maximum through-going fault current (in Ir) at which the protection is not allowed to operate

Tdc The primary DC time constant related to Ikmax

410 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

ω The angular frequency, that is, 2*π*fn

Tm The time-to-saturate, that is, the duration of the saturation free transformation

Kr The remanence factor 1/(1-r), where r is the maximum remanence flux in p.u. from saturation flux

The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current
transformer is used in differential protection.

The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in p.u.
from saturation flux density. The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic
material used and on the construction of the CT. For instance, if the value of r =
0.4, the remanence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density.
The manufacturer of the CT has to be contacted when an accurate value for the
parameter r is needed. The value r = 0.4 is recommended to be used when an
accurate value is not available.

The required minimum time-to-saturate Tm in TR2PTDF is half fundamental cycle

period (10 ms when fn = 50Hz).

Two typical cases are considered for the determination of the sufficient accuracy
limit factor (Fa):

1. A fault occurring at the substation bus:

The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating
situation. Re-energizing the transformer against a bus fault leads to very high
fault currents and thermal stress and therefore re-energizing is not preferred in
this case. Thus, the remanence can be neglected.
The maximum through-going fault current Ikmax is typically 10 Ir for a
substation main transformer. At a short circuit fault close to the supply
transformer, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is almost the same
as that of the transformer, the typical value being 100 ms.

Ikmax 10 Ir

Tdc 100 ms

ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Kr 1

When the values are substituted in Equation 54, the result is:

Fa > K r × Ikmax × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm / Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 40

GUID-7F1019C5-C819-440B-871B-5CFD1AF88956 V1 EN

2. Re-energizing against a fault occurring further down in the network:

615 series 411

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The protection must be stable also during re-energization against a fault on the
line. In this case, the existence of remanence is very probable. It is assumed to
be 40 percent here.
On the other hand, the fault current is now smaller and since the ratio of the
resistance and reactance is greater in this location, having a full DC offset is
not possible. Furthermore, the DC time constant (Tdc) of the fault current is
now smaller, assumed to be 50 ms here.
Assuming a maximum fault current being 30 percent lower than in the bus
fault and a DC offset 90 percent of the maximum.

Ikmax 0.7* 10 = 7 (Ir)

Tdc 50 ms

ω 100π Hz
Tm 10 ms

Kr 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667

When the values are substituted in the equation, the result is:

Fa > K r × Ikmax × 0.9 × (Tdc × ω × (1 − e−Tm / Tdc ) + 1) ≈ 40

GUID-9B859B2D-AC40-4278-8A99-3475442D7C67 V1 EN

If the actual burden of the current transformer (Sa) in Equation 53 cannot be

reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa, there are two
alternatives to deal with the situation:
• a CT with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen (which also means a
higher rated accuracy limit Fn)
• a CT with a higher nominal primary current I1n (but the same rated
burden) can be chosen

Example 2
Assuming that the actions according to alternative two above are taken in order to
improve the actual accuracy limit factor:
IrCT
Fa = * Fn
IrTR
GUID-31A3C436-4E17-40AE-A4EA-D2BD6B72034E V1 EN (Equation 55)

IrTR 1000 A (rated secondary side current of the power transformer)

IrCT 1500 A (rated primary current of the CT on the transformer secondary side)
Fn 30 (rated accuracy limit factor of the CT)

Fa (IrCT / IrTR) * Fn (actual accuracy limit factor due to oversizing the CT) = (1500/1000) * 30 = 45

412 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

In TR2PTDF, it is important that the accuracy limit factors Fa of the phase current
transformers at both sides correspond with each other, that is, the burdens of the
current transformers on both sides are to be as equal as possible. If high inrush or
start currents with high DC components pass through the protected object when it
is connected to the network, special attention is required for the performance and
the burdens of the current transformers and for the settings of the function block.

4.3.2.6 CT connections and transformation ratio correction

The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as "Type 1"
and "Type 2".
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 IED currents are
opposite, the CT connection type setting parameter is "Type 1". The
connection examples of "Type 1" are as shown in Figure 219 and Figure 220.
• If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 IED currents equate,
the CT connection type setting parameter is "Type 2". The connection
examples of "Type 2" are as shown in Figure 221 and Figure 222.
• The default value of the CT connection type setting is "Type 1".

615 series 413

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

L1 L2 L3

P1 X120
S1
7 1/5A
S2 IL1
P2 8 N
9 1/5A
IL2
10 N
11 1/5A
IL3
12 N

P2
S2
S1
P1 X120
1 1/5A
IL1B
2 N
3 1/5A
IL2B
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3B
6 N

GUID-53F7DCB6-58B8-418C-AB83-805B4B0DCCAE V2 EN

Figure 219: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1

414 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

L1 L2 L3

P2
S2
S1
P1 X120

7 1/5A
IL1
8 N
9 1/5A
IL2
10 N
11 1/5A
IL3
12 N

P1 X120
S1
1 1/5A
S2 IL1B
P2 2 N
3 1/5A
IL2B
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3B
6 N

GUID-24C391DC-D767-4848-AE98-FE33C1548DEE V1 EN

Figure 220: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1

615 series 415

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

L1 L2 L3

P1 X120
S1
7 1/5A
S2 IL1
P2 8 N
9 1/5A
IL2
10 N
11 1/5A
IL3
12 N

P1 X120
S1
1 1/5A
S2 IL1B
P2 2 N
3 1/5A
IL2B
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3B
6 N

GUID-66D375DD-BF49-43C5-A7B5-BFA2BEAD035C V2 EN

Figure 221: Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the

currents during an external fault

416 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

L1 L2 L3

P2
S2
S1
P1 X120

7 1/5A
IL1
8 N
9 1/5A
IL2
10 N
11 1/5A
IL3
12 N

P2
S2
S1
P1 X120
1 1/5A
IL1B
2 N
3 1/5A
IL2B
4 N
5 1/5A
IL3B
6 N

GUID-5E0D15BA-ADA9-4FE0-A85D-5C6E86D7E32B V1 EN

Figure 222: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 2

The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of
the power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides
of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2
settings.

4.3.2.7 Signals
Table 340: TR2PTDF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A1 SIGNAL 0 Phase A primary current
I_B1 SIGNAL 0 Phase B primary current
I_C1 SIGNAL 0 Phase C primary current
I_A2 SIGNAL 0 Phase A secondary current
I_B2 SIGNAL 0 Phase B secondary current
Table continues on next page

615 series 417

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Name Type Default Description

I_C2 SIGNAL 0 Phase C secondary current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block
BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks operate outputs from biased stage
BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks operate outputs from instantaneous stage

Table 341: TR2PTDF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate combined
OPR_LS BOOLEAN Operate from low set
OPR_HS BOOLEAN Operate from high set
BLKD2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint block status
BLKD5H BOOLEAN 5th harmonic restraint block status
BLKDWAV BOOLEAN Waveform blocking status

4.3.2.8 Settings
Table 342: TR2PTDF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
High operate value 500...3000 %Ir 10 1000 Instantaneous stage setting
Enable high set 0=False 1=True Enable high set stage
1=True
Low operate value 5...50 %Ir 1 20 Basic setting for biased operation
Slope section 2 10...50 % 1 30 Slope of the second line of the operating
characteristics
End section 2 100...500 %Ir 1 150 Turn-point between the second and the
third line of the operating characteristics
Restraint mode -1=2.h + 5.h + wav -1=2.h + 5.h + wav Restraint mode
5=Waveform
6=2.h + waveform
7=5.h + waveform
Harmonic deblock 2. 0=False 1=True 2. harmonic deblocking in case of switch
1=True on to fault
Start value 2.H 7...20 % 1 15 2. harmonic blocking ratio
Start value 5.H 10...50 % 1 35 5. harmonic blocking ratio
Stop value 5.H 10...50 % 1 35 5. harmonic deblocking ratio
Harmonic deblock 5. 0=False 0=False 5. harmonic deblocking in case of severe
1=True overvoltage

418 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 343: TR2PTDF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off/On
5=off
CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the
2=Type 2 directions of the connected current
transformers
Winding 1 type 1=Y 1=Y Connection of the HV side windings
2=YN
3=D
4=Z
5=ZN
Winding 2 type 1=y 1=y Connection of the LV side windings
2=yn
3=d
4=z
5=zn
Clock number 0=Clk Num 0 0=Clk Num 0 Setting the phase shift between HV and
1=Clk Num 1 LV with clock number for connection
2=Clk Num 2 group compensation (e.g. Dyn11 -&gt; 11)
4=Clk Num 4
5=Clk Num 5
6=Clk Num 6
7=Clk Num 7
8=Clk Num 8
10=Clk Num 10
11=Clk Num 11
Zro A elimination 1=Not eliminated 1=Not eliminated Elimination of the zero-sequence current
2=Winding 1
3=Winding 2
4=Winding 1 and 2
Min winding tap -36...36 1 36 The tap position number resulting the
minimum number of effective winding
turns on the side of the transformer
where the tap changer is.
Max winding tap -36...36 1 0 The tap position number resulting the
maximum number of effective winding
turns on the side of the transformer
where the tap changer is.
Tap nominal -36...36 1 18 The nominal position of the tap changer
resulting the default transformation ratio
of the transformer (as if there was no tap
changer)
Tapped winding 1=Not in use 1=Not in use The winding where the tap changer is
2=Winding 1 connected to
3=Winding 2
Step of tap 0.60...9.00 % 0.01 1.50 The percentage change in voltage
corresponding one step of the tap changer
CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, winding 1
CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, winding 2

615 series 419

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.3.2.9 Monitored data

Table 344: TR2PTDF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase A
1=True
OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase B
1=True
OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase C
1=True
BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True block phase A status
BLKD2H_B BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True block phase B status
BLKD2H_C BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True block phase C status
BLKD5H_A BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True block phase A status
BLKD5H_B BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True block phase B status
BLKD5H_C BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True block phase C status
BLKDWAV_A BOOLEAN 0=False Waveform blocking
1=True phase A status
BLKDWAV_B BOOLEAN 0=False Waveform blocking
1=True phase B status
BLKDWAV_C BOOLEAN 0=False Waveform blocking
1=True phase C status
BLKD2HPHAR BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
combined
BLKD2HPHAR_A BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
phase A
BLKD2HPHAR_B BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
phase B
BLKD2HPHAR_C BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
phase C
BLKD5HPHAR BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
combined
BLKD5HPHAR_A BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
phase A
BLKD5HPHAR_B BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
phase B
BLKD5HPHAR_C BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint
1=True blocking for PHAR LN,
phase C
Table continues on next page

420 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I_AMPL_A1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated primary
current phase A
I_AMPL_B1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated primary
current phase B
I_AMPL_C1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated primary
current phase C
I_AMPL_A2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated secondary
current phase A
I_AMPL_B2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated secondary
current phase B
I_AMPL_C2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIr Connection group
compensated secondary
current phase C
ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential Current
phase A
ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential Current
phase B
ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Differential Current
phase C
IB_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Biasing current phase A
IB_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Biasing current phase B
IB_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIr Biasing current phase C
I_2H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current
second harmonic ratio,
phase A
I_2H_RAT_B FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current
second harmonic ratio,
phase B
I_2H_RAT_C FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current
second harmonic ratio,
phase C
I_ANGL_A1_B1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
phase A to B, winding 1
I_ANGL_B1_C1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
phase B to C, winding 1
I_ANGL_C1_A1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
phase C to A, winding 1
I_ANGL_A2_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
phase A to B, winding 2
I_ANGL_B2_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
phase B to C, winding 2
I_ANGL_C2_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle
phase C to A, winding 2
I_ANGL_A1_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle diff
between winding 1 and
2, phase A
Table continues on next page

615 series 421

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle diff
between winding 1 and
2, phase B
I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Current phase angle diff
between winding 1 and
2, phase C
I_5H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth
harmonic ratio, phase A
I_5H_RAT_B FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth
harmonic ratio, phase B
I_5H_RAT_C FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth
harmonic ratio, phase C
TR2PTDF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.3.2.10 Technical data

Table 345: TR2PTDF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±3.0% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Operate time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

Low stage 34 ms 40 ms 44 ms
High stage 21 ms 22 ms 24 ms
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, …

1) Current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the output contact. When differential current = 2 x set operate value and fn =
50 Hz.

4.3.3 Numerically stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault

protection LREFPNDF

4.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Numerically stabilized low-impedance LREFPNDF dIoLo> 87NL
restricted earth-fault protection

422 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.3.2 Function block

GUID-A04FED1B-8424-4A84-A327-262E4CC5628F V2 EN

Figure 223: Function block

4.3.3.3 Functionality

The stabilized restricted low-impedance earth-fault protection LREFPNDF for a two-

winding transformer is based on the numerically stabilized differential current
principle. No external stabilizing resistor or non-linear resistor are required.

The fundamental components of the currents are used for calculating the residual
current of the phase currents, the neutral current, differential currents and
stabilizing currents. The operating characteristics are according to the definite time.

LREFPNDF contains a blocking functionality. The neutral current second

harmonic is used for blocking during the transformer inrush situation. It is also
possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.3.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the stabilized restricted low-impedance earth-fault protection can

be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained
in the next sections.

GUID-079EB39A-B62C-47DF-9B53-9432AB24A9CE V2 EN

Figure 224: Functional module diagram

615 series 423

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Earth-fault detector
The operation is based on comparing the amplitude and the phase difference
between the sum of the fundamental frequency component of the phase currents
(ΣI, residual current) and the fundamental frequency component of the neutral
current (Io) flowing in the conductor between the transformer or generator's neutral
point and earth. The differential current is calculated as the absolute value of the
difference between the residual current, that is, the sum of the fundamental
frequency components of the phase currents I_A, I_B and I_C, and the neutral
current. The directional differential current ID_COSPHI is the product of the
differential current and cosφ. The value is available in the monitored data view.

ID _ COSPHI = ( ΣI − Io ) × cos ϕ
GUID-46782962-D465-47D2-8ECE-3FF0B87B324F V3 EN (Equation 56)

Residual current
ΣI
GUID-87E4DEDD-9288-41D9-B608-714CF3CC7A04 V1 EN

ϕ Phase difference between the residual and neutral currents

GUID-C4F98C50-7279-4DAA-8C77-5C761572F4B4 V1 EN

Neutral current
Io
GUID-2D713C98-4F81-4DF4-8193-C47120A65489 V1 EN

An earth fault occurring in the protected area, that is, between the phase CTs and
the neutral connection CT, causes a differential current. The directions, that is, the
phase difference of the residual current and the neutral current, are considered in
the operation criteria to maintain selectivity. A correct value for CT connection
type is determined by the connection polarities of the current transformer.

The current transformer ratio mismatch between the phase current

transformer and neutral current transformer (residual current in the
analog input settings) is taken into account by the function with the
properly set analog input setting values.

During an earth fault in the protected area, the currents ΣI and Io are directed
towards the protected area. The factor cosφ is 1 when the phase difference of the
residual current and the neutral current is 180 degrees, that is, when the currents are
in opposite direction at the earth faults within the protected area. Similarly,
ID_COSPHI is specified to be 0 when the phase difference between the residual
current and the neutral current is less than 90 degrees in situations where there is
no earth fault in the protected area. Thus tripping is possible only when the phase
difference between the residual current and the neutral current is above 90 degrees.

The stabilizing current IB used by the stabilizing current principle is calculated as

an average of the phase currents in the windings to be protected. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

424 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

I _ A + I _ B + I _C
IB =
3
GUID-E162EE11-DEDF-49BA-B60F-E22ECF1ACAE8 V2 EN (Equation 57)

GUID-9D592151-7598-479B-9285-7FB7C09F0FAB V1 EN

Figure 225: Operating characteristics of the stabilized earth-fault protection

function

GUID-552423CA-6FE9-4F69-8341-FFE0FF1943D4 V1 EN

Figure 226: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized
differential current principle of the earth-fault protection function

The Operate value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function.
The differential current value required for tripping is constant at the stabilizing
current values 0.0 < IB/In < 1.0, where In is the nominal current, and the In in this
context refers to the nominal of the phase current inputs. When the stabilizing
current is higher than 1.0, the slope of the operation characteristic (ID/IB) is
constant at 50 percent. Different operating characteristics are possible based on the
Operate value setting.

615 series 425

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

To calculate the directional differential current ID_COSPHI, the fundamental

frequency amplitude of both the residual and neutral currents has to be above 4
percent of In. If neither or only one condition is fulfilled at a time, the cosφ term is
forced to 1. After the conditions are fulfilled, both currents must stay above 2
percent of In to allow the continuous calculation of the cosφ term.

Second harmonic blocking

This module compares the ratio of the current second harmonic (I0_2H) and I0 to
the set value Start value 2.H. If the ratio (I0_2H / I0) value exceeds the set value,
the BLK2H output is activated.

The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the
transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to
normal after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic
inrush is caused by the energization of a transformer running in parallel with the
protected transformer connected to the network.

The second harmonic blocking is disabled when Restraint mode is set to "None"
and enabled when set to "Harmonic2".

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum
operate time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the reset timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operate time. The value is
available through the Monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode,
the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not
activated.

The activation of the output of the second harmonic blocking signal BLK2H
deactivates the OPERATE output.

426 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.3.5 Application

An earth-fault protection using an overcurrent element does not adequately protect

the transformer winding in general and the star-connected winding in particular.

The restricted earth-fault protection is mainly used as a unit protection for the
transformer windings. LREFPNDF is a sensitive protection applied to protect the star-
connected winding of a transformer. This protection system remains stable for all
the faults outside the protected zone.

LREFPNDF provides higher sensitivity for the detection of earth faults than the
overall transformer differential protection. This is a high-speed unit protection
scheme applied to the star-connected winding of the transformer. LREFPNDF is
normally applied when the transformer is earthed solidly or through low-
impedance resistor (NER). LREFPNDF can be also applied on the delta side of the
transformer if an earthing transformer (zig-zag transformer) is used there. In
LREFPNDF, the difference of the fundamental component of all three phase
currents and the neutral current is provided to the differential element to detect the
earth fault in the transformer winding based on the numerical stabilized differential
current principle.

Connection of current transformers

The connections of the main CTs are designated as "Type 1" and "Type 2". In case
the earthings of the current transformers on the phase side and the neutral side are
both either inside or outside the area to be protected, the setting parameter CT
connection type is "Type 1".

If the earthing of the current transformers on the phase side is inside the area to be
protected and the neutral side is outside the area to be protected or if the earthing
on the phase side is outside the area and on the neutral side inside the area, the
setting parameter CT connection type is "Type 2".

GUID-63BD73B4-7B60-4354-9690-E96C0A8076C7 V1 EN

Figure 227: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected

phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at
an external earth-fault situation.

615 series 427

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-124047A0-9B33-4D2F-9519-75D98C0A4534 V1 EN

Figure 228: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase

currents and the neutral current have equal directions at an
external earth-fault situation.

Internal and external faults

LREFPNDF does not respond to any faults outside the protected zone. An external
fault is detected by checking the phase angle difference of the neutral current and
the sum of the phase currents. When the difference is less than 90 degrees, the
operation is internally restrained or blocked. Hence the protection is not sensitive
to an external fault.

zone of
protection

Izs1 I a =0
A a
Izs1 Ib = 0
B b
Izs1 I c =0
C c

Uzs Io IN

For external fault

Io

IN Reference is Neutral
Current

Operate for Restrain for

internal fault external fault
GUID-FAC5E4AD-A4A7-4D39-9EAC-C380EA33CB78 V2 EN

Figure 229: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault

428 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

zone of
protection

s Ia = 0
o A a
u Ib = 0
r B b
c Ic = 0
C c
e
Ifault

Io Uzs IN

For internal fault

Io

IN Reference is Neutral
Current

Operate for Restrain for

internal fault external fault
GUID-D5D712D4-2291-4C49-93DE-363F9F10801C V2 EN

Figure 230: Current flow in all the CTs for an internal fault

LREFPNDF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the
fault current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not
experience this fault current.

Blocking based on the second harmonic of the neutral current

The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is
energized after a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times
the rated current, and the halving time can be up to several seconds. For the
differential IED, the inrush current represents the differential current, which causes
the IED to operate almost always when the transformer is connected to the
network. Typically, the inrush current contains a large amount of second harmonics.

The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic
magnetizing inrushes. At the recovery inrush, the magnetizing current of the
transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to
normal after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area. The sympathetic
inrush is caused by the energization of a transformer running in parallel with the
protected transformer already connected to the network.

Blocking the starting of the restricted earth-fault protection at the magnetizing

inrush is based on the ratio of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency
amplitudes of the neutral current Io_2H / Io. Typically, the second harmonic
content of the neutral current at the magnetizing inrush is higher than that of the
phase currents.

615 series 429

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.3.3.6 Signals
Table 346: LREFPNDF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 347: LREFPNDF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
BLK2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block

4.3.3.7 Settings
Table 348: LREFPNDF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operate value 5...50 %In 1 5 Operate value
Minimum operate time 40...300000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time
Restraint mode 1=None 1=None Restraint mode
2=Harmonic2
Start value 2.H 10...50 %In 1 50 The ratio of the 2. harmonic to
fundamental component required for
blocking

Table 349: LREFPNDF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
CT connection type 1=Type 1 2=Type 2 CT connection type
2=Type 2

430 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.3.8 Monitored data

Table 350: LREFPNDF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
RES2H BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint
1=True
ID_COSPHI FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIn Directional differential
current Id cosphi
IB FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 xIn Bias current
LREFPNDF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.3.3.9 Technical data

Table 351: LREFPNDF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±2.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2.0 x set 38 ms 40 ms 43 ms
Operate value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, …

1) Current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.3.4 High-impedance-based restricted earth-fault protection

HREFPDIF

4.3.4.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
High-impedance-based restricted earth- HREFPDIF dIoHi> 87NH
fault protection

615 series 431

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.3.4.2 Function block

GUID-0B400966-B2D9-4027-A2B3-786BA559A4A4 V3 EN

Figure 231: Function block

4.3.4.3 Functionality

The high-impedance-based restricted earth-fault protection HREFPDIF is used for

the restricted earth-fault protection of generators and power transformers.

HREFPDIF starts when the IDo, the differential neutral current, exceeds the set
limit. HREFPDIF operates with the DT characteristic.

HREFPDIF contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.3.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the high-impedance-based restricted earth-fault protection

function can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram
are explained in the next sections.

GUID-75842EE4-C4B8-452A-8FA9-FDE60ED22DD4 V3 EN

Figure 232: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The level detector compares the differential neutral current IDo to the set value of
the Operate value setting. If the differential neutral current exceeds the Operate
value setting, the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer module to start
the definite timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum

432 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

operate time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the
monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.3.4.5 Application

In solidly earthed systems, the restricted earth-fault protection is always deployed

as a complement to the normal transformer differential protection. The advantage
of the restricted earth-fault protection is its high sensitivity. Sensitivities of close to
1.0 percent can be achieved, whereas normal differential IEDs have their minimum
sensitivity in the range of 5 to 10 percent. The level for HREFPDIF is dependent of
the current transformers' magnetizing currents. The restricted earth-fault protection
is also very fast due to the simple measuring principle as it is a unit type of protection.

The differences in measuring principle limit the biased differential IED's

possibility to detect the earth faults. Such faults are then only detected by the
restricted earth-fault function.

The restricted earth-fault IED is connected across each directly or to low-ohmic

earthed transformer winding. If the same CTs are connected to other IEDs, separate
cores are to be used.

615 series 433

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

s2 s1

s1

s2

VDR

Stabilizing
Resistor
High impedance
protection
(HREFPDIF)
GUID-367BDBC9-D2E8-48D3-B98F-623F7CD70D99 V3 EN

Figure 233: Connection scheme for the restricted earth-fault protection

according to the high-impedance principle

High-impedance principle
High-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the zone of
protection. The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential
circuit. This method requires that all the CTs used have a similar magnetizing
characteristic, same ratio and relatively high knee point voltage. CTs on each sides
are connected in parallel along with a relay-measuring branch as shown in Figure
234. The measuring branch is a series connection of stabilizing resistor and IED.

434 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

CT1 CT2

Rin1 Rin2
Rm1/2 Rm2/2

Rs Ru
Id

Rm1/2 Rm2/2

GUID-80DC5CFE-118C-4C5C-A15F-13DCB1708C0E V1 EN

Figure 234: High-impedance principle

The stability of the protection is based on the use of the stabilizing resistor (Rs) and
the fact that the impedance of the CT secondary quickly decreases as the CT
saturates. The magnetization reactance of a fully saturated CT goes to zero and the
impedance is formed only by the resistance of the winding (Rin) and lead resistance
(Rm).

The CT saturation causes a differential current which now has two paths to flow:
through the saturated CT because of the near-zero magnetizing reactance and
through the measuring branch. The stabilizing resistor is selected as such that the
current in the measuring branch is below the relay operating current during out-of-
zone faults. As a result, the operation is stable during the saturation and can still be
sensitive at the non-saturated parts of the current waveform as shown in Figure 235.

In case of an internal fault, the fault current cannot circulate through the CTs but it
flows through the measuring branch and the protection operates. Partial CT
saturation can occur in case of an internal fault, but the non-saturated part of the
current waveform causes the protection to operate.

Saturated part Non-saturated part

GUID-B4CBEF48-1C9C-410B-997F-440CB10486BD V1 EN

Figure 235: Secondary waveform of a saturated CT

615 series 435

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

At internal fault, the secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation
voltage of the CTs, connection wires and IED. To limit this voltage, a voltage-
dependent resistor VDR is used as shown in Figure 234.

The whole scheme, that is, the stabilizing resistor, voltage-dependent resistor and
wiring, must be adequately maintained (operation- and insulation-tested regularly)
to be able to withstand the high-voltage pulses which appear during an internal
fault throughout the lifetime of the equipment. Otherwise, during a fault within the
zone of protection, any flashover in the CT secondary circuits or in any other part
of the scheme may prevent a correct operation of the high-impedance differential
function.

4.3.4.6 The measuring configuration

The external measuring configuration is composed of four current transformers

measuring the currents and a stabilizing resistor. A varistor is needed if high
overvoltages are expected.

The value of the stabilizing resistor is calculated with the formula:

Us
Rs =
I rs
GUID-00FCABE9-93E2-4BDD-83C6-EB1BE7FFE986 V1 EN (Equation 58)

Rs the resistance of the stabilizing resistor

Us the stabilizing voltage of the IED

Irs the value of the Low operate value setting

The stabilizing voltage is calculated with the formula:

I k max
Us = ( Rin + Rm )
n
GUID-6A4C58E7-3D26-40C9-A070-0D99BA209B1A V1 EN (Equation 59)

Ikmax the highest through-fault current

n the turns ratio of the CT

Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT

Rm the resistance of the longest loop of secondary circuit

Additionally, it is required that the current transformers' knee-point voltages Uk are

at least twice the stabilizing voltage value Us.

436 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.4.7 Recommendations for current transformers

The sensitivity and reliability of the protection depends a lot on the characteristics
of the current transformers. The CTs must have an identical transformation ratio. It
is recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and
characteristics and are of same type, preferably from the same manufacturing
batch, that is, an identical construction should be used. If the CT characteristics and
burden values are not equal, calculation for each branch in the scheme should be
done separately and the worst-case result is then used.

First, the stabilizing voltage, that is, the voltage appearing across the measuring
branch during the out-of-zone fault, is calculated assuming that one of the parallel
connected CT is fully saturated. The stabilizing voltage can be calculated with the
formula

I k max
Us = ( Rin + Rm )
n
GUID-6A4C58E7-3D26-40C9-A070-0D99BA209B1A V1 EN (Equation 60)

Ikmax the highest through-fault current in primary amps. The highest earth-fault or short circuit current
during the out-of-zone fault.
n the turns ratio of the CT
Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT in ohms

Rm the resistance (maximum of Rin + Rm) of the CT secondary circuit in ohms

The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the IED
through the differential circuit during a fault condition inside the zone of
protection. To ensure this, the knee point voltage Ukn should be at least two times
higher than the stabilizing voltage Us.

The required knee point voltage Ukn of the current transformer is calculated using
the formula
U kn ≥ 2 × U s
GUID-4F7F301A-1573-4736-B740-622605DB0FFB V2 EN (Equation 61)

Ukn the knee point voltage

Us the stabilizing voltage

The factor two is used when no delay in the operating time of the protection in any
situation is acceptable. To prevent the knee point voltage from growing too high, it
is advisable to use current transformers, the secondary winding resistance of which
is of the same size as the resistance of the measuring loop.

As the impedance of the IED alone is low, a stabilizing resistor is needed. The
value of the stabilizing resistor is calculated with the formula

615 series 437

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Us
Rs =
I rs
GUID-EA4FE2BC-4E93-4093-BD14-F20A4F33AEF2 V1 EN (Equation 62)

Rs the resistance of the stabilizing resistor

Us the stabilizing voltage of the IED

Irs the value of the Operate value setting in secondary amps.

The stabilizing resistor should be capable to dissipate high energy within a very
short time; therefore, the wire wound-type resistor should be used. Because of the
possible CT inaccuracy, which might cause some current through the stabilizing
resistor in a normal load situation, the rated power should be 25 W minimum.

If Ukn is high or the stabilizing voltage is low, a resistor with a higher power rating
is needed. Often resistor manufacturers allow 10 times rated power for 5 seconds.
Thus the power of the resistor can be calculated with the equation
2
U kn
Rs × 10
GUID-93E59545-7530-408D-8ECF-2D3D9CF76C13 V1 EN (Equation 63)

The actual sensitivity of the protection is affected by the IED setting, the
magnetizing currents of the parallel connected CTs and the shunting effect of the
voltage-dependent resistor (VDR). The value of the primary current Iprim at which
the IED operates at a certain setting can be calculated with the formula

I prim = n × ( I rs + Iu + m × I m )
GUID-2A742729-7244-4B1C-A4DF-404BDD3A68D9 V1 EN (Equation 64)

Iprim the primary current at which the protection is to start

n the turn ratio of the current transformer

Irs the value of the Operate value setting

Iu the leakage current flowing through the VDR at the Us voltage

m the number of current transformers included in the protection per phase (=4)
Im the magnetizing current per current transformer at the Us voltage

The Ie value given in many catalogs is the excitation current at the knee point
Ie
Im ≈
voltage. Assuming Ukn ≈ 2 x Us, the value of 2 gives an approximate value
for Equation 64.

The selection of current transformers can be divided into procedures:

438 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

1. In principle, the highest through-fault should be known. However, when the

necessary data are not available, approximates can be used:
• Small power transformers: Ikmax = 16 x In (corresponds to zk = 6% and
infinite grid)
• Large power transformers: Ikmax = 12 x In (corresponds to zk = 8% and
infinite grid)
• Generators and motors: Ikmax = 6 x In
Where In = rated current and zk = short circuit impedance of the
protected object
2. The rated primary current I1n of the CT has to be higher than the rated current
of the machine.
The choice of the CT also specifies Rin.
3. The required Ukn is calculated with Equation 61. If the Ukn of the CT is not
high enough, another CT has to be chosen. The value of the Ukn is given by the
manufacturer in the case of Class X current transformers or it can be estimated
with Equation 65.
4. The sensitivity Iprim is calculated with Equation 64. If the achieved sensitivity
is sufficient, the present CT is chosen. If a better sensitivity is needed, a CT
with a bigger core is chosen.

If other than Class X CTs are used, an estimate for Ukn is calculated with the equation

 S 
U kn = 0.8 × Fn × I 2 n ×  Rin + 2n 
 I 2 n 

GUID-AFA68232-5288-4220-845E-40347B691E29 V2 EN (Equation 65)

Fn the rated accuracy limit factor corresponding to the rated burden Sn

I2n the rated secondary current of the CT

Rin the secondary internal resistance of the CT

Sn the volt-amp rating of the CT

The formulas are based on choosing the CTs according to Equation

61, which results an absolutely stable scheme. In some cases, it is
possible to achieve stability with knee point voltages lower than
stated in the formulas. The conditions in the network, however,
have to be known well enough to ensure the stability.
1. If Uk ≥ 2 x Us, fast IED operation is secure.
2. If Uk ≥ 1.5 x Us and < 2 x Us, IED operation can be slightly
prolonged and should be studied case by case.
If Uk < 1.5 x Us, the IED operation is jeopardized. Another CT
has to be chosen.

615 series 439

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The need for the VDR depends on certain conditions.

First, voltage Umax, ignoring the CT saturation during the fault, is calculated with
the equation

I k max in I
U max = × ( Rin + Rm + Rs ) ≈ k max in × Rs
n n
GUID-CB54C30A-C69D-4C59-B9B3-44530319D1CE V1 EN (Equation 66)

Ikmaxin the maximum fault current inside the zone, in primary amps

n the turns ration of the CT

Rin the internal resistance of the CT in ohms

Rm the resistance of the longest loop of the CT secondary circuit, in ohms

Rs the resistance of the stabilized resistor, in ohms

Next, the peak voltage û, which includes the CT saturation, is estimated with the
formula (given by P.Mathews, 1955)

û = 2 2U kn (U max − U kn )
GUID-0FBE4CDF-8A7C-4574-8325-C61E61E0C55C V1 EN (Equation 67)

Ukn the knee point voltage of the CT

The VDR is recommended when the peak voltage û ≥ 2kV, which is the insulation
level for which the IED is tested.

If Rs was smaller, the VDR could be avoided. However, the value of Rs depends on
the IED operation current and stabilizing voltage. Thus, either a higher setting must
be used in the IED or the stabilizing voltage must be lowered.

440 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.3.4.8 Setting examples

Example 1

n
n2

GUID-AB960DE4-4DD2-4312-9921-0D6E7CD001AA V1 EN

Figure 236: Restricted earth-fault protection of a transformer

The data for the protected power transformer are:

Sn = 20 MVA

U2n = 11 kV

The longest distance of the secondary circuit is 50 m (the whole loop is 100 m) and
the area of the cross section is 10 mm2.

In = Sn / (√3 · Un) = 1050 A

Ikmax = 12 · In = 12600 A

In this example, the CT type is IHBF 12, the core size is 35 percent, the primary
current is 1200 A and the secondary current is 5 A.

Rin = 0.26 Ω (value given by the manufacturer).

Uk = 40 V (value given by the manufacturer).

Ie = 0.055 A (value given by the manufacturer).

Rm = 1.81 Ω/km · 2 · 0.05 km = 0.181 Ω ≈ 0.18 Ω

615 series 441

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

12600 × (0.26 + 0.18)

Us = V ≈ 23V
240
GUID-7AA079B9-4E11-48BD-A474-B7A06BA3976B V1 EN

According to the criterion, the value of Uk should be 2 · Us = 2 · 23 V = 46 V. It

depends on if the stability of the scheme is achieved with Uk = 40 V. Otherwise, it
is possible to choose a bigger core of 65 percent with:

Rin = 0.47 Ω (value given by the manufacturer).

Uk = 81 V (value given by the manufacturer).

Rm = 0.18 Ω

12600 × (0.47 + 0.18)

Us = V ≈ 34 V
240
GUID-F7AF5A9B-A4F3-4714-94D2-022A54232F0E V1 EN

Uk = 2 · Us = 68 V (required value).

As mentioned earlier, Im = 0.5 · Ie gives a realistic value for Iprim in Equation 64. If
Iu = 0 and Irs = m · 0.5 · Io, the value for the sensitivity is:

Iprim = n · m · Ie = 240 · 4 · 0.055 A ≈ 53 A

Irs = 4· 0.5 · 0.055 A = 0.11 A

The setting value can be calculated with:

 I rs   0.11 A 
Operate value =  = ≈ 2.2%
 I CT _ n 2   5 A 
 
GUID-C03C3B3E-E03F-41F3-B51A-A9AA161BC433 V1 EN

The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can be calculated:

Rs = Us / Irs = 34 V / 0.11 A ≈ 309 Ω

However, the sensitivity can be calculated more accurately when the actual values
of Iu and Irs are known. The stabilizing resistor of the relay is chosen freely in the
above example and it is assumed that the resistor value is not fixed.

442 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Example 2a

n m
n

GUID-787D9DE6-961E-454A-B97A-FAFC6F9701F0 V1 EN

Figure 237: Restricted earth-fault protection of a generator

In the protected generator:

Sn = 8 MVA

Un = 6 kV.

In = 770 A

Ikmax = 6 · In = 6 · 770 A = 4620 A

In this example, the CT type is KOFD 12 A 21 with:

ICT_1n = 1000 A (value given by the manufacturer).

ICT_2n = 1 A (value given by the manufacturer).

Uk = 323 V (value given by the manufacturer).

Rin = 15.3 Ω (value given by the manufacturer).

Ie = 0.012 A (value given by the manufacturer).

If the length of the secondary circuit is 100 m (the whole loop is 200 m) and the
area of the cross section is 2.5 mm2:

Rm = 7.28 Ω/km · 2 · 0.1 km ≈ 1.46 Ω

615 series 443

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The required knee-point voltage can be calculated using Equation 61.

Uk = 2 · ( 4620 A / 1000 ) · ( 15.3 + 1.46 ) ≈ 155 V.

The value 155 V is lower than the value 323 V, which means that the value of Uk is
high enough.

As mentioned earlier, Im = 0.5 · Ie gives a realistic value for Iprim in Equation 64. If
Iu = 0 and Irs = m · 0.5 · Ie, the value for the sensitivity is:

Iprim = n · m · Ie = 1000 · 4 · 0.012 A = 48 A ( ≈ 6 % x In).

Irs = 4 · 0.5 · 0.012 A = 0.024 A.

The setting value can be calculated with:

 I rs   0.024 A 
Operate value =  = ≈ 2.4%
 I CT _ 2 n   1A 
 
GUID-3873DFF7-8FB3-42B1-BF99-CE7D9D141F55 V1 EN

The resistance of the stabilizing resistor can now be calculated:

Rs = Us / Irs = 78 V / (2 · Ie) = 78 V / (2 · 0.012 A) = 3250 Ω.

Example 2b
In this example, Irs = 4 x 12 mA = 48 mA and Iu = 30 mA. This results in the sensitivity:

Iprim = n · ( Irs + Iu + m · Im ) = 1000 · (48 + 30 + 24) mA = 102 A

The setting value can be calculated with:

 I rs   0.048 A 
Operate value =  = ≈ 4.8%
 I CT _ 2 n   1A 
 
GUID-4373B1E0-46AB-401A-A76A-AD97B850D079 V1 EN

The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is now:

Rs = Us / Irs= 78 V / 48 mA ≈ 1630 Ω

In this example, the relay is of such a type that the stabilizing resistor can be
chosen freely.

4.3.4.9 Signals
Table 352: HREFPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IDo SIGNAL 0 Differential current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

444 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 353: HREFPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.3.4.10 Settings
Table 354: HREFPDIF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operate value 1.0...50.0 %In 0.1 1.0 Low operate value, percentage of the
nominal current
Minimum operate time 40...300000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time

Table 355: HREFPDIF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time

4.3.4.11 Monitored data

Table 356: HREFPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
HREFPDIF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.3.4.12 Technical data

Table 357: HREFPDIF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2.0 x set 16 ms 21 ms 23 ms
Operate value 11 ms 13 ms 14 ms
IFault = 10.0 x set
Operate value
Table continues on next page

615 series 445

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

1) Current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.4 Unbalance protection

4.4.1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC

4.4.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2> 46
protection

4.4.1.2 Function block

A070758 V1 EN

Figure 238: Function block

4.4.1.3 Functionality

The negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC is used for increasing

sensitivity to detect single-phase and phase-to-phase faults or unbalanced loads due
to, for example, broken conductors or unsymmetrical feeder voltages.

NSPTOC can also be used for detecting broken conductors.

The function is based on the measurement of the negative sequence current. In a

fault situation, the function starts when the negative sequence current exceeds the
set limit. The operate time characteristics can be selected to be either definite time
(DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT). In the DT mode, the function

446 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current
disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.4.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

A070660 V1 EN

Figure 239: Functional module diagram. I2 represents negative phase

sequence current.

Level detector
The measured negative-sequence current is compared to the set Start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector activates the timer
module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the set Start value is multiplied by the
set Start value Mult.

The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting
if the product of the settings exceeds the Start value setting range.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or
IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in
the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the
OPERATE output is activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

615 series 447

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. The functionality of the
timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type,
Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings. When the DT characteristic is
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When
the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to
"Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate"
causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset
time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse
reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The
START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.

The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user

programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another
operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during
the drop-off situation.

The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times.

The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care
because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

448 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.1.5 Application

Since the negative sequence current quantities are not present during normal,
balanced load conditions, the negative sequence overcurrent protection elements
can be set for faster and more sensitive operation than the normal phase-
overcurrent protection for fault conditions occurring between two phases. The
negative sequence overcurrent protection also provides a back-up protection
functionality for the feeder earth-fault protection in solid and low resistance
earthed networks.

The negative sequence overcurrent protection provides the back-up earth-fault

protection on the high voltage side of a delta-wye connected power transformer for
earth faults taking place on the wye-connected low voltage side. If an earth fault
occurs on the wye-connected side of the power transformer, negative sequence
current quantities appear on the delta-connected side of the power transformer.

The most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection is
probably rotating machines, where negative sequence current quantities indicate
unbalanced loading conditions (unsymmetrical voltages). Unbalanced loading
normally causes extensive heating of the machine and can result in severe damages
even over a relatively short time period.

Multiple time curves and time multiplier settings are also available for coordinating
with other devices in the system.

4.4.1.6 Signals
Table 358: NSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier

Table 359: NSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

615 series 449

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.4.1.7 Settings
Table 360: NSPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.30 Start value
Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
2=ANSI Very inv.
3=ANSI Norm. inv.
4=ANSI Mod. inv.
5=ANSI Def. Time
6=L.T.E. inv.
7=L.T.V. inv.
8=L.T. inv.
9=IEC Norm. inv.
10=IEC Very inv.
11=IEC inv.
12=IEC Ext. inv.
13=IEC S.T. inv.
14=IEC L.T. inv.
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Programmable
18=RI type
19=RD type
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Table 361: NSPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Minimum operate time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve

450 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.1.8 Monitored data

Table 362: NSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
NSPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.4.1.9 Technical data

Table 363: NSPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time 1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2 x set Start 22 ms 24 ms 25 ms
value 14 ms 16 ms 17 ms
IFault = 10 x set Start
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms 3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative sequence current before fault = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of
1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 2.5 x In, Start value multiples in range of 1.5 to 20

4.4.1.10 Technical revision history

Table 364: NSPTOC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms
for the Operate delay time setting
C Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting

615 series 451

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.4.2 Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC

4.4.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2/I1> 46PD

4.4.2.2 Function block

A070688 V1 EN

Figure 240: Function block

4.4.2.3 Functionality

The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC is used for detecting unbalance

situations caused by broken conductors.

The function starts and operates when the unbalance current I2/I1 exceeds the set
limit. To prevent faulty operation at least one phase current needs to be above the
minimum level. PDNSPTOC operates with DT characteristic.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

output, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.4.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of phase discontinuity protection can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

452 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A070687 V2 EN

Figure 241: Functional module diagram. I1 and I2 represent positive and

negative phase sequence currents. I_A, I_B and I_C represent
phase currents.

I2/I1
The I2/I1 module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current.
It reports the calculated value to the level detector.

Level detector
The level detector compares the calculated ratio of the negative- and positive-
sequence currents to the set Start value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Start
value and the min current check module has exceeded the value of Min phase
current, the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the timer.

Min current check

The min current check module checks whether the measured phase currents are
above the set Min phase current. At least one of the phase currents needs to be
above the set limit to enable the level detector module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal

615 series 453

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.4.2.5 Application

In three-phase distribution and subtransmission network applications the phase

discontinuity in one phase can cause an increase of zero-sequence voltage and short
overvoltage peaks and also oscillation in the corresponding phase.

PDNSPTOC is a three-phase protection with DT characteristic, designed for

detecting broken conductors in distribution and subtransmission networks. The
function is applicable for both overhead lines and underground cables.

The operation of PDNSPTOC is based on the ratio of the positive-sequence and

negative-sequence currents. This gives a better sensitivity and stability compared to
plain negative-sequence current protection since the calculated ratio of positive-
sequence and negative-sequence currents is relatively constant during load variations.

The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the negative-sequence and

positive-sequence current ratio, where the negative-sequence current value is I2 and
I1 is the positive-sequence current value. The unbalance is calculated with the
equation.
I2
Iratio =
I1
A070702 V2 EN (Equation 68)

Broken conductor fault situation can occur in phase A in a feeder.

IECA070699 V2 EN

Figure 242: Broken conductor fault situation in phase A in a distribution or

subtransmission feeder

454 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

IECA070698 V1 EN

Figure 243: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in
phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence
currents

4.4.2.6 Signals
Table 365: PDNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current

I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current

I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current

I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking
mode

Table 366: PDNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.4.2.7 Settings
Table 367: PDNSPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 10...100 % 1 10 Start value
Operate delay time 100...30000 ms 1 100 Operate delay time

615 series 455

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 368: PDNSPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Min phase current 0.05...0.30 xIn 0.01 0.10 Minimum phase current

4.4.2.8 Monitored data

Table 369: PDNSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
RATIO_I2_I1 FLOAT32 0.00...999.99 % Measured current ratio
I2 / I1
PDNSPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.4.2.9 Technical data

Table 370: PDNSPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±2% of the set value

Start time < 70 ms
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

4.4.3 Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC

4.4.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC I2>> 46R

456 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.4.3.2 Function block

GUID-AA794558-EF3A-4E9A-AA39-BCE9FB7253FD V1 EN

Figure 244: Function block

4.4.3.3 Functionality

The phase reversal protection PREVPTOC is used to detect the reversed

connection of the phases to a three-phase motor by monitoring the negative phase
sequence current I2 of the motor.

PREVPTOC starts and operates when I2 exceeds the set limit. PREVPTOC
operates on definite time (DT) characteristics. PREVPTOC is based on the
calculated I2, and the function detects too high I2 values during the motor startup.
The excessive I2 values are caused by incorrectly connected phases, which in turn
makes the motor rotate in the opposite direction.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.4.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of phase reversal protection can be described with a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-F0B4B5EF-8B3C-4967-9818-24DACE686FC8 V1 EN

Figure 245: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The level detector compares the negative-sequence current to the set Start value. If
the I2 value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector sends an enabling signal
to the timer module.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. When the operation timer
has reached the set Operate delay time value, the OPERATE output is activated. If

615 series 457

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the
reset timer reaches the value of 200 ms, the operation timer resets and the START
output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

4.4.3.5 Application

The rotation of a motor in the reverse direction is not a desirable operating

condition. When the motor drives fans and pumps, for example, and the rotation
direction is reversed due to a wrong phase sequence, the driven process can be
disturbed and the flow of the cooling air of the motor can become reversed too.
With a motor designed only for a particular rotation direction, the reversed rotation
direction can lead to an inefficient cooling of the motor due to the fan design.

In a motor, the value of the negative-sequence component of the phase currents is

very negligible when compared to the positive-sequence component of the current
during a healthy operating condition of the motor. But when the motor is started
with the phase connections in the reverse order, the magnitude of I2 is very high.
So whenever the value of I2 exceeds the start value, the function detects the reverse
rotation direction and provides an operating signal that disconnects the motor from
the supply.

4.4.3.6 Signals
Table 371: PREVPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 372: PREVPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.4.3.7 Settings
Table 373: PREVPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.75 Start value
Operate delay time 100...60000 ms 10 100 Operate delay time

458 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 374: PREVPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off

4.4.3.8 Monitored data

Table 375: PREVPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PREVPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.4.3.9 Technical data

Table 376: PREVTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2.0 x set Start
22 ms 24 ms 25 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative-sequence current before = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.4.4 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for motors

MNSPTOC

4.4.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overcurrent MNSPTOC I2>M 46M
protection for motors

615 series 459

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.4.4.2 Function block

GUID-5B6B4705-1EF3-4E12-B1A6-92A5D9D71218 V2 EN

Figure 246: Function block

4.4.4.3 Functionality

The unbalance protection based on the negative-sequence overcurrent protection

for motors MNSPTOC protects electric motors from phase unbalance. A small
voltage unbalance can produce a large negative-sequence current flow in the motor.
For example, a 5 percent voltage unbalance produces a stator negative-sequence
current of 30 percent of the full load current, which can severely heat the motor.
MNSPTOC detects the large negative-sequence current and disconnects the motor.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.4.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of unbalance protection based on negative sequence current can be

described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained
in the next sections.

GUID-F890E844-B9C9-4E99-A51F-6EAB19B5239B V1 EN

Figure 247: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence current is compared to the Start value setting. If
the measured value exceeds the Start value setting, the function activates the timer
module.

460 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT.
When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the
DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE
output is activated.

In a drop-off situation, that is, when the value of the negative-sequence current
drops below the Start value setting, the reset timer is activated and the START
output resets after the time delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics. For
IDMT, the reset time depends on the curve type selected.

For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define minimum and maximum operate
times with the Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings. The
Machine time Mult setting parameter corresponds to the machine constant, equal to
the I22t constant of the machine, as stated by the machine manufacturer. In case
there is a mismatch between the used CT and the protected motor's nominal current
values, it is possible to fit the IDMT curves for the protected motor using the Rated
current setting.

The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output. The
deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the cooling timer. The timer is set to
the value entered in the Cooling time setting. The BLK_RESTART output is kept
active until the cooling timer is exceeded. If the negative-sequence current
increases above the set value during this period, the OPERATE output is activated
immediately.

The T_ENARESTART output indicates the duration for which the BLK_RESTART
output remains active, that is, it indicates the remaining time of the cooling timer.
The value is available in the monitored data view.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

4.4.4.5 Timer characteristics

MNSPTOC supports both DT and IDMT characteristics. The DT timer

characteristics can be selected with "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time" in the
Operating curve type setting. The functionality is identical in both cases. When the
DT characteristics are selected, the functionality is only affected by the Operate
delay time and Reset delay time settings.

The IED provides two user-programmable IDMT characteristics curves, "Inv.

curve A" and "Inv. curve B".

615 series 461

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Current-based inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT)

In inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
current: the higher the current, the shorter the operate time. The operate time
calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Start
value and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the
inverse time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting
values used.

The Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings define the
minimum operate time and maximum operate time possible for the IDMT mode.
For setting these parameters, a careful study of the particular IDMT curves is
recommended.

Inv. curve A
The inverse time equation for curve type A is:

k
t [ s] =
2
 I2 
 
 Ir 
GUID-D8A4A304-6C63-4BA4-BAEA-E7891504557A V1 EN (Equation 69)

t[s] Operate time in seconds

k Set Machine time Mult
I2 Negative-sequence current

Ir Set Rated current

If the negative-sequence current drops below the Start value setting, the reset time
is defined as:

 b 
t [ s] = a ×  
 100 
GUID-8BE4B6AC-FB61-4D30-B77B-3E599D5BAE81 V1 EN (Equation 70)

t[s] Reset time in seconds

a set Cooling time
b percentage of start time elapse (START_DUR)

When the reset period is initiated, the time for which START has been active is
saved. Now, if the fault reoccurs, that is, the negative-sequence current rises above
the set value during the reset period, the operate calculations are continued using
the saved values. However, if the reset period elapses without a fault being

462 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

detected, the operate timer is reset and the saved values of start time and
integration are cleared.

Inv. curve B
The inverse time equation for curve type B is:

k
t [ s] =
2 2
 I2   IS 
  − 
 Ir   Ir 
GUID-805DCB50-71D2-4721-830B-3343E1A5500B V1 EN (Equation 71)

t[s] Operate time in seconds

k Machine time Mult
I2 Negative-sequence current

IS Set Start value

Ir Set Rated current

If the fault disappears, the negative-sequence current drops below the Start value
setting and the START output is deactivated. However, the function does not reset
instantaneously, but instead it depends on the equation or the Cooling time setting.

The timer can be reset in two ways:

• With a drop in the negative-sequence current below start value, the subtraction
in the denominator becomes negative and the cumulative sum starts to
decrease. The decrease in the sum indicates the cooling of the machine and the
cooling speed depends on the value of the negative-sequence current. If the
sum reaches zero without a fault being detected, the accumulation stops and
the timer is reset.
• If the reset time set through the Cooling time setting elapses without a fault
being detected, the timer is reset.

The reset period thus continues for a time equal to the Cooling time setting or until
the operate time decreases to zero, whichever is less.

4.4.4.6 Application

In a three-phase motor, the conditions that can lead to unbalance are single
phasing, voltage unbalance from the supply and single-phase fault. The negative
sequence current damages the motor during the unbalanced voltage condition, and
therefore the negative sequence current is monitored to check the unbalance
condition.

When the voltages supplied to an operating motor become unbalanced, the positive-
sequence current remains substantially unchanged, but the negative-sequence
current flows due to the unbalance. For example, if the unbalance is caused by an

615 series 463

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

open circuit in any phase, a negative-sequence current flows and it is equal and
opposite to the previous load current in a healthy phase. The combination of
positive and negative-sequence currents produces phase currents approximately 1.7
times the previous load in each healthy phase and zero current in the open phase.

The negative-sequence currents flow through the stator windings inducing negative-
sequence voltage in the rotor windings. This can result in a high rotor current that
damages the rotor winding. The frequency of the induced current is approximately
twice the supply frequency. Due to skin effect, the induced current with a
frequency double the supply frequency encounters high rotor resistance which
leads to excessive heating even with phase currents with value less than the rated
current of the motor.

The negative-sequence impedance of induction or a synchronous motor is

approximately equal to the locked rotor impedance, which is approximately one-
sixth of the normal motor impedance, considering that the motor has a locked-rotor
current of six times the rated current. Therefore, even a three percent voltage
unbalance can lead to 18 percent stator negative sequence current in windings. The
severity of this is indicated by a 30-40 percent increase in the motor temperature
due to the extra current.

4.4.4.7 Signals
Table 377: MNSPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 378: MNSPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start
BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Overheated machine reconnection blocking

4.4.4.8 Settings
Table 379: MNSPTOC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.01...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.20 Start value
Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Inv. Curve A
18=Inv. Curve B
Machine time Mult 5.0...100.0 0.1 5.0 Machine related time constant
Operate delay time 100...120000 ms 10 1000 Operate delay time

464 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Table 380: MNSPTOC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Rated current 0.30...2.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Rated current (Ir) of the machine (used
only in the IDMT)
Maximum operate time 500000...7200000 ms 1000 1000000 Max operate time regardless of the
inverse characteristic
Minimum operate time 100...120000 ms 1 100 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Cooling time 5...7200 s 1 50 Time required to cool the machine
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time

4.4.4.9 Monitored data

Table 381: MNSPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
T_ENARESTART FLOAT32 0.00...7200.00 s Estimated time to reset
of block restart
MNSPTOC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.4.4.10 Technical data

Table 382: MNSPTOC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 2.0 x set Start
22 ms 24 ms 25 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative-sequence current before = 0.0, fn = 50 Hz, results based on statistical distribution of 1000
measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Start value multiples in range of 1.10 to 5.00

615 series 465

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.5 Voltage protection

4.5.1 Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV

4.5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U> 59

4.5.1.2 Function block

GUID-871D07D7-B690-48FD-8EA1-73A7169AE8BD V1 EN

Figure 248: Function block

4.5.1.3 Functionality

The three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV is applied on power system

elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines, to protect the
system from excessive voltages that could damage the insulation and cause
insulation breakdown. The three-phase overvoltage function includes a settable
value for the detection of overvoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three
phases.

PHPTOV includes both definite time (DT) and inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT) characteristics for the delay of the trip.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase overvoltage protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

466 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

U_A_AB Phase Timer

Level
U_B_BC selection OPERATE
detector t
U_C_CA logic
START

Blocking t
BLOCK
logic

GUID-D71B1772-3503-4150-B3FE-6FFD92DE5DB7 V2 EN

Figure 249: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set value of the Start value setting. If the measured
value is higher than the set value of the Start value setting, the level detector
enables the phase selection logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be
used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly differs from
the Start value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the
hysteresis area.

The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase

voltages for protection.

For the voltage IDMT operation mode, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics. The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing
undesired operation.

For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of
the Curve Sat Relative setting, see the IDMT curve saturation of the
over voltage protection section in this manual.

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic
detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of
faulty phases match with the set Num of start phases, the phase selection logic
activates the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT
or IDMT.

For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the

IDMT curves for overvoltage protection section in this manual.

615 series 467

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the
DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the OPERATE output is
activated.

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operate time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation
depends on the selected operate time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the
drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the timer is reset and the
START output is deactivated.

When the IDMT operate time curve is selected, the functionality of the timer in the
drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset
delay time settings.

Table 383: The reset time functionality when the IDMT operate time curve is selected
Type of reset curve Description of operation
“Immediate” The operate timer is reset instantaneously when
drop-off occurs
“Def time reset” The operate timer is frozen during drop-off.
Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay
time is exceeded
“DT Lin decr rst” The operate timer value linearly decreases
during the drop-off situation. The operate timer is
reset after the set Reset delay time is exceeded

468 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-504A5E09-8D82-4B57-9B3A-2BAE7F84FC0D V2 EN

Figure 250: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of
reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are
presented for the time integrator.

The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.

The Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care

because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overvoltage protection
section in this manual.

615 series 469

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is
preselected with the global Blocking mode setting.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

The “Freeze timers” mode of blocking has no effect during the

inverse reset mode.

4.5.1.5 Timer characteristics

The operating curve types supported by PHPTOV are:

Table 384: Timer characteristics supported by IDMT operate curve types

Operating curve type
(5) ANSI Def. Time
(15) IEC Def. Time
(17) Inv. Curve A
(18) Inv. Curve B
(19) Inv. Curve C
(20) Programmable

4.5.1.6 Application

Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network
or due to prolonged power frequency overvoltages. Surge arresters are used to
protect the network against the transient overvoltages, but the IED protection
function is used to protect against power frequency overvoltages.

The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies
such as:

470 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

• The defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator
is in isolated operation.
• Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A
sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise
to a substantial change in voltage because of the inherent large voltage
regulation of a typical alternator.
• Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders, leaving the
generator isolated or feeding a very small load. This causes a sudden rise in the
terminal voltage due to the trapped field flux and overspeed.

If a load sensitive to overvoltage remains connected, it leads to equipment damage.

It is essential to provide power frequency overvoltage protection, in the form of

time delayed element, either IDMT or DT to prevent equipment damage.

4.5.1.7 Signals
Table 385: PHPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 386: PHPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

615 series 471

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.5.1.8 Settings
Table 387: PHPTOV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...1.60 xUn 0.01 1.10 Start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 40...300000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
15=IEC Def. Time
17=Inv. Curve A
18=Inv. Curve B
19=Inv. Curve C
20=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
-1=DT Lin decr rst

Table 388: PHPTOV Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 40...60000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Curve parameter A 0.005...200.000 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.50...100.00 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.0...1.0 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.000...60.000 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.000...3.000 1.000 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Curve Sat Relative 0.0...3.0 0.1 2.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve
discontinuities
Voltage selection 1=phase-to-earth 2=phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
2=phase-to-phase phase voltages
Relative hysteresis 1.0...5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative hysteresis for operation

472 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.1.9 Monitored data

Table 389: PHPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PHPTOV Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.5.1.10 Technical data

Table 390: PHPTOV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

UFault = 1.1 x set Start
22 ms 24 ms 26 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Depends of the set Relative hysteresis
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Start value = 1.0 x Un, Voltage before fault = 0.9 x Un, fn = 50 Hz, overvoltage in one phase-to-
phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Maximum Start value = 1.20 x Un, Start value multiples in range of 1.10 to 2.00

4.5.1.11 Technical revision history

Table 391: PHPTOV Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

615 series 473

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.5.2 Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV

4.5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3U< 27

4.5.2.2 Function block

GUID-B4A78A17-67CA-497C-B2F1-BC4F1DA415B6 V1 EN

Figure 251: Function block

4.5.2.3 Functionality

The three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV is used to disconnect from the

network devices, for example electric motors, which are damaged when subjected
to service under low voltage conditions. PHPTUV includes a settable value for the
detection of undervoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three phases.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the three-phase undervoltage protection can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-21DCE3FD-C5A0-471A-AB93-DDAB4AE93116 V1 EN

Figure 252: Functional module diagram

474 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Level detector
The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are
compared phase-wise to the set Start value. If the measured value is lower than the
set value of the Start value setting, the level detector enables the phase selection
logic module. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing
unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies above or below the Start
value setting. After leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition has to be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area.

The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltages for protection.

For the voltage IDMT mode of operation, the used IDMT curve equations contain
discontinuity characteristics. The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing
unwanted operation.

For more detailed description on IDMT curves and usage of Curve

Sat Relative setting, see the IDMT curves for under voltage
protection section in this manual.

The level detector contains a low-level blocking functionality for cases where one
of the measured voltages is below the desired level. This feature is useful when
unnecessary starts and operates are wanted to avoid during, for example, an
autoreclose sequence. The low-level blocking is activated by default (Enable block
value is set to "True") and the blocking level can be set with the Voltage block
value setting.

Phase selection logic

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic
detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected. If the number of
faulty phases match with the set Num of start phases, the phase selection logic
activates the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of
the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT
or IDMT.

For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the

IDMT curves for under voltage protection section in this manual.

When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the
DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the OPERATE output is
activated.

615 series 475

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operate time

characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter
B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operate
delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated. The behavior in the drop-off situation
depends on the selected operate time characteristics. If the DT characteristics are
selected, the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. If the
drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the timer is reset and the
START output is deactivated.

When the IDMT operate time curve is selected, the functionality of the timer in the
drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset
delay time settings.

Table 392: The reset time functionality when the IDMT operate time curve is selected
Type of reset curve Description of operation
“Immediate” The operate timer is reset instantaneously when
drop-off occurs
“Def time reset” The operate timer is frozen during drop-off.
Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay
time is exceeded
“DT Lin decr rst” The operate timer value linearly decreases
during the drop-off situation. The operate timer is
reset after the set Reset delay time is exceeded

476 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Example

GUID-111E2F60-2BFC-4D9B-B6C3-473F7689C142 V2 EN

Figure 253: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of
reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are
presented for the time integrator.

The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.

The Minimum operate time setting parameter defines the minimum desired operate
time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used.

The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care

because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but
always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For
more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection
section in this manual.

615 series 477

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/
Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is
preselected with the global Blocking mode setting.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

The “Freeze timers” mode of blocking has no effect during the

“Inverse reset” mode.

4.5.2.5 Timer characteristics

The operating curve types supported by PHPTUV are:

Table 393: Supported IDMT operate curve types

Operating curve type
(5) ANSI Def. Time
(15) IEC Def. Time
(21) Inv. Curve A
(22) Inv. Curve B
(23) Programmable

4.5.2.6 Application

PHPTUV is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers,

motors and power lines, to detect low voltage conditions. Low voltage conditions
are caused by abnormal operation or a fault in the power system. PHPTUV can be
used in combination with overcurrent protections. Other applications are the
detection of a no-voltage condition, for example before the energization of a high
voltage line, or an automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout. PHPTUV is also
used to initiate voltage correction measures, such as insertion of shunt capacitor
banks, to compensate for a reactive load and thereby to increase the voltage.

478 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

PHPTUV can be used to disconnect from the network devices, such as electric
motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage
conditions. PHPTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency.
Low voltage conditions can be caused by:
• Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or incorrect settings under manual
control (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Short circuits, often as phase-to-earth faults (unsymmetrical voltage increase).

PHPTUV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could
cause overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases,
PHPTUV is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes
in the power system.

4.5.2.7 Signals
Table 394: PHPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 395: PHPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.5.2.8 Settings
Table 396: PHPTUV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.05...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.90 Start value
Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves
Operate delay time 60...300000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time
Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type
15=IEC Def. Time
21=Inv. Curve A
22=Inv. Curve B
23=Programmable
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type
2=Def time reset
-1=DT Lin decr rst

615 series 479

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 397: PHPTUV Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate
2=2 out of 3 activation
3=3 out of 3
Minimum operate time 60...60000 ms 1 60 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Curve parameter A 0.005...200.000 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter B 0.50...100.00 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve
Curve parameter C 0.0...1.0 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter D 0.000...60.000 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve
Curve parameter E 0.000...3.000 1.000 Parameter E for customer programmable
curve
Curve Sat Relative 0.0...3.0 0.1 2.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve
discontinuities
Voltage block value 0.05...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.20 Low level blocking for undervoltage mode
Enable block value 0=False 1=True Enable internal blocking
1=True
Voltage selection 1=phase-to-earth 2=phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-
2=phase-to-phase phase voltages
Relative hysteresis 1.0...5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative hysteresis for operation

4.5.2.9 Monitored data

Table 398: PHPTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PHPTUV Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

480 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.2.10 Technical data

Table 399: PHPTUV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

UFault = 0.9 x set Start
62 ms 64 ms 66 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Depends on the set Relative hysteresis
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms3)
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Start value = 1.0 x Un, Voltage before fault = 1.1 x Un, fn = 50 Hz, undervoltage in one phase-to-
phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact
3) Minimum Start value = 0.50, Start value multiples in range of 0.90 to 0.20

4.5.2.11 Technical revision history

Table 400: PHPTUV Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the
Time multiplier setting.

4.5.3 Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV

4.5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV Uo> 59G

4.5.3.2 Function block

A070766 V3 EN

Figure 254: Function block

615 series 481

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.5.3.3 Functionality

The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV is used in distribution networks

where the residual overvoltage can reach non-acceptable levels in, for example,
high impedance earthing.

The function starts when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit. ROVPTOV
operates with the definite time (DT) characteristic.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of residual overvoltage protection can be described by using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070748 V2 EN

Figure 255: Functional module diagram. Uo represents the residual voltage.

Level detector
The residual voltage can be selected with the Uo signal Sel setting. The selectable
options are "Measured Uo" and "Calculated Uo". The residual voltage is compared
to the set Start value. If the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector
sends an enable signal to the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set
by Reset delay time, the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

482 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.5.3.5 Application

ROVPTOV is designed to be used for earth-fault protection in isolated neutral,

resistance earthed or reactance earthed systems. In compensated networks, starting
of the function can be used to control the switching device of the neutral resistor.
The function can also be used for the back-up protection of feeders for busbar
protection when a more dedicated busbar protection would not be justified.

In compensated and isolated neutral systems, the system neutral voltage, that is, the
residual voltage, increases in case of any fault connected to earth. Depending on
the type of the fault and the fault resistance, the residual voltage reaches different
values. The highest residual voltage, equal to the phase-to-earth voltage, is
achieved for a single-phase earth fault. The residual voltage increases
approximately the same amount in the whole system and does not provide any
guidance in finding the faulty component. Therefore, this function is often used as
a backup protection or as a release signal for the feeder earth-fault protection.

The protection can also be used for the earth-fault protection of generators and
motors and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks.

The residual voltage can be calculated internally based on the measurement of the
three-phase voltage. This voltage can also be measured by a single-phase voltage
transformer, located between a transformer star point and earth, or by using an open-
delta connection of three single-phase voltage transformers.

4.5.3.6 Signals
Table 401: ROVPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

615 series 483

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 402: ROVPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.5.3.7 Settings
Table 403: ROVPTOV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.030 Residual overvoltage start value
Operate delay time 40...300000 ms 1 40 Operate delay time

Table 404: ROVPTOV Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Uo signal Sel 1=Measured Uo 1=Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal
2=Calculated Uo

4.5.3.8 Monitored data

Table 405: ROVPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
ROVPTOV Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.5.3.9 Technical data

Table 406: ROVPTOV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

UFault = 1.1 x set Start
55 ms 56 ms 58 ms
value
Table continues on next page

484 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Residual voltage before fault = 0.0 x Un, fn = 50 Hz, residual voltage with nominal frequency injected
from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.3.10 Technical revision history

Table 407: ROVPTOV Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added a setting parameter for the "Measured
Uo" or "Calculated Uo" selection

4.5.4 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV

4.5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV U2> 47O-
protection

4.5.4.2 Function block

GUID-F94BCCE8-841F-405C-B659-3EF26F959557 V1 EN

Figure 256: Function block

4.5.4.3 Functionality

The negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV is used to detect negative

sequence overvoltage conditions. NSPTOV is used for the protection of machines.

The function starts when the negative sequence voltage exceeds the set limit.
NSPTOV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

615 series 485

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.5.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the negative-sequence overvoltage protection can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-0014077D-EEA8-4781-AAC7-AFDBAAF415F4 V1 EN

Figure 257: Functional module diagram. U2 is used for representing negative

phase sequence voltage.

Level detector
The calculated negative-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting.
If the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated if the overvoltage condition persists.
If the negative-sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block

486 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.5.4.5 Application

A continuous or temporary voltage unbalance can appear in the network for various
reasons. The voltage unbalance mainly occurs due to broken conductors or
asymmetrical loads and is characterized by the appearance of a negative-sequence
component of the voltage. In rotating machines, the voltage unbalance results in a
current unbalance, which heats the rotors of the machines. The rotating machines,
therefore, do not tolerate a continuous negative-sequence voltage higher than
typically 1-2 percent x Un.

The negative-sequence component current I2, drawn by an asynchronous or a

synchronous machine, is linearly proportional to the negative-sequence component
voltage U2. When U2 is P% of Un, I2 is typically about 5 x P% x In.

The negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC blocks are used to accomplish a

selective protection against the voltage and current unbalance for each machine
separately. Alternatively, the protection can be implemented with the NSPTOV
function, monitoring the voltage unbalance of the busbar.

If the machines have an unbalance protection of their own, the NSPTOV operation
can be applied as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm. The latter can
be applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better
than the rotating machines.

If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network, the rotating

machines should not be connected to the network at all. This logic can be
implemented by inhibiting the closure of the circuit breaker if the NSPTOV
operation has started. This scheme also prevents connecting the machine to the
network if the phase sequence of the network is not correct.

An appropriate value for the setting parameter Voltage start value is approximately
3 percent of Un. A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate delay time
depends on the application. If the NSPTOV operation is used as backup protection,
the operate time should be set in accordance with the operate time of NSPTOC
used as main protection. If the NSPTOV operation is used as main protection, the
operate time should be approximately one second.

4.5.4.6 Signals
Table 408: NSPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

615 series 487

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 409: NSPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.5.4.7 Settings
Table 410: NSPTOV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...1.000 xUn 0.001 0.030 Start value
Operate delay time 40...120000 ms 1 40 Operate delay time

Table 411: NSPTOV Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time

4.5.4.8 Monitored data

Table 412: NSPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
NSPTOV Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.5.4.9 Technical data

Table 413: NSPTOV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

UFault = 1.1 × set Start
value 33 ms 35 ms 37 ms
UFault = 2.0 × set Start 24 ms 26 ms 28 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Table continues on next page

488 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Characteristic Value
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Negative-sequence voltage before fault = 0.0 × Un, fn = 50 Hz, negative-sequence overvoltage with
nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of
1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.4.10 Technical revision history

Table 414: NSPTOV Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Internal change

4.5.5 Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV

4.5.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV U1< 47U+
protection

4.5.5.2 Function block

GUID-24EBDE8B-E1FE-47B0-878B-EBEC13A27CAC V1 EN

Figure 258: Function block

4.5.5.3 Functionality

The positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV is used to detect positive-

sequence undervoltage conditions. PSPTUV is used for the protection of small
power generation plants. The function helps in isolating an embedded plant from a
fault line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to start an overcurrent
function but high enough to maintain the arc. Fast isolation of all the fault current
sources is necessary for a successful autoreclosure from the network-end circuit
breaker.

The function starts when the positive-sequence voltage drops below the set limit.
PSPTUV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.

615 series 489

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.5.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the positive-sequence undervoltage protection can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-F1E58B1E-03CB-4A3C-BD1B-F809420397ED V1 EN

Figure 259: Functional module diagram. U1 is used for representing positive

phase sequence voltage.

Level detector
The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting.
If the value drops below the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer.
The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations
if the input signal slightly varies from the Start value setting. After leaving the
hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated if the undervoltage condition persists.
If the positive-sequence voltage normalizes before the module operates, the reset
timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the
operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/

490 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

4.5.5.5 Application

PSPTUV can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded
generation when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-earth faults in a
transmission or a distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the
power station. A network fault can be dangerous for the power station for various
reasons. The operation of the protection can cause an islanding condition, also
called a loss-of-mains condition, in which a part of the network, that is, an island
fed by the power station, is isolated from the rest of the network. There is then a
risk of an autoreclosure taking place when the voltages of different parts of the
network do not synchronize, which is a straining incident for the power station.
Another risk is that the generator can lose synchronism during the network fault. A
sufficiently fast trip of the utility circuit breaker of the power station can avoid
these risks.

The lower the three-phase symmetrical voltage of the network is, the higher is the
probability that the generator loses the synchronism. The positive-sequence voltage
is also available during asymmetrical faults. It is a more appropriate criterion for
detecting the risk of loss of synchronism than, for example, the lowest phase-to-
phase voltage.

Analyzing the loss of synchronism of a generator is rather complicated and requires

a model of the generator with its prime mover and controllers. The generator can
be able to operate synchronously even if the voltage drops by a few tens of percent
for some hundreds of milliseconds. The setting of PSPTUV is thus determined by
the need to protect the power station from the risks of the islanding conditions
since that requires a higher setting value.

The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is unable to

operate as a generator with the network frequency but enters into an unstable
condition in which it operates by turns as a generator and a motor. Such a condition
stresses the generator thermally and mechanically. This kind of loss of
synchronism should not be mixed with the one between an island and the utility
network. In the islanding situation, the condition of the generator itself is normal
but the phase angle and the frequency of the phase-to-phase voltage can be
different from the corresponding voltage in the rest of the network. The island can
have a frequency of its own relatively fast when fed by a small power station with a
low inertia.

615 series 491

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

PSPTUV complements other loss-of-grid protection principles based on the

frequency and voltage operation.

Motor stalling and failure to start can lead to a continuous undervoltage. The positive-
sequence undervoltage is used as a backup protection against the motor stall
condition.

4.5.5.6 Signals
Table 415: PSPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 416: PSPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.5.5.7 Settings
Table 417: PSPTUV Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 0.010...1.200 xUn 0.001 0.500 Start value
Operate delay time 40...120000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time
Voltage block value 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.20 Internal blocking level
Enable block value 0=False 1=True Enable Internal Blocking
1=True

Table 418: PSPTUV Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time
Relative hysteresis 1.0...5.0 % 0.1 4.0 Relative hysteresis for operation

492 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.5.5.8 Monitored data

Table 419: PSPTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
PSPTUV Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.5.5.9 Technical data

Table 420: PSPTUV Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x Un

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

UFault = 0.99 x set Start
value 51 ms 53 ms 54 ms
UFault = 0.9 x set Start 43 ms 45 ms 46 ms
value
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Depends of the set Relative hysteresis
Retardation time < 35 ms
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

1) Start value = 1.0 x Un, Positive sequence voltage before fault = 1.1 x Un, fn = 50 Hz, positive
sequence undervoltage with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on
statistical distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.5.5.10 Technical revision history

Table 421: PSPTUV Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B -

615 series 493

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.6 Frequency protection

4.6.1 Frequency protection FRPFRQ

4.6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Frequency protection FRPFRQ f>/f<, df/dt 81O/81U, 81R

4.6.1.2 Function block

GUID-744529D8-E976-4AFD-AA77-85D6ED2C3B70 V1 EN

Figure 260: Function block

4.6.1.3 Functionality

The frequency protection FRPFRQ is used to protect network components against

abnormal frequency conditions.

The function provides basic overfrequency, underfrequency and frequency rate-of-

change protection. Additionally, it is possible to use combined criteria to achieve
even more sophisticated protection schemes for the system.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.6.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the frequency protection function can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

494 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

OPERATE
Freq>/< START
F
detection
OPR_OFRQ
Operate OPR_UFRQ
logic ST_OFRQ
ST_UFRQ
df/dt
dF/dt
detection OPR_FRG
ST_FRG

Blocking
BLOCK
logic

GUID-76692C3F-8B09-4C69-B598-0288CB946300 V1 EN

Figure 261: Functional module diagram

Freq>/< detection
The frequency detection module includes an overfrequency or underfrequency
detection based on the Operation mode setting.

In the “Freq>” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Start value
Freq>. If the measured value exceeds the set value of the Start value Freq>
setting, the module reports the exceeding of the value to the operate logic module.

In the “Freq<” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Start value
Freq<. If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Start value Freq<
setting, the module reports the value to the operate logic module.

df/dt detection
The frequency gradient detection module includes a detection for a positive or
negative rate-of-change (gradient) of frequency based on the set Start value df/dt
value. The negative rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is
negative. The positive rate-of-change protection is selected when the set value is
positive. When the frequency gradient protection is selected and the gradient
exceeds the set Start value df/dt value, the module reports the exceeding of the
value to the operate logic module.

The IED does not accept the set value "0.00" for the Start value df/
dt setting.

Operate logic
This module is used for combining different protection criteria based on the
frequency and the frequency gradient measurement to achieve a more sophisticated
behavior of the function. The criteria are selected with the Operation mode setting.

615 series 495

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 422: Operation modes for operation logic

Operation mode Description
Freq< The function operates independently as the
underfrequency ("Freq<") protection function.
When the measured frequency is below the set
value of the Start value Freq< setting, the
module activates the START and STR_UFRQ
outputs. The time characteristic is according to
DT. When the operation timer has reached the
value set by the Operate Tm Freq setting, the
OPERATE and OPR_UFRQ outputs are activated.
If the frequency restores before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the timer
reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm
Freq setting, the operate timer resets and the
START and STR_UFRQ outputs are deactivated.

Freq> The function operates independently as the

overfrequency ("Freq>") protection function.
When the measured frequency exceeds the set
value of the Start value Freq> setting, the
module activates the START and STR_OFRQ
outputs. The time characteristic is according to
DT. When the operation timer has reached the
value set by the Operate Tm Freq setting, the
OPERATE and OPR_OFRQ outputs are activated.
If the frequency restores before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the timer
reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm
Freq setting, the operate timer resets and the
START and STR_OFRQ outputs are deactivated.

df/dt The function operates independently as the

frequency gradient ("df/dt"), rate-of-change,
protection function. When the frequency gradient
exceeds the set value of the Start value df/dt
setting, the module activates the START and
STR_FRG outputs. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has
reached the value set by the Operate Tm df/dt
setting, the OPERATE and OPR_FRG outputs are
activated. If the frequency gradient restores
before the module operates, the reset timer is
activated. If the timer reaches the value set by
the Reset delay Tm df/dt setting, the operate
timer resets and the START and STR_FRG
outputs are deactivated.
Table continues on next page

496 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Operation mode Description

Freq< + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the
protection methods. When the measured
frequency is below the set value of the Start
value Freq< setting, the frequency gradient
protection is enabled. After the frequency has
dropped below the set value, the frequency
gradient is compared to the set value of the Start
value df/dt setting. When the frequency gradient
exceeds the set value, the module activates the
START and STR_FRG outputs. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the
operation timer has reached the value set by the
Operate Tm df/dt setting, the OPERATE and
OPR_FRG outputs are activated. If the frequency
gradient restores before the module operates,
the reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches
the value set by the Reset delay Tm df/dt setting,
the operate timer resets and the START and
STR_FRG outputs are deactivated. The
OPR_UFRQ output is not active when this
operation mode is used.
Table continues on next page

615 series 497

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Operation mode Description

Freq> + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the
protection methods. When the measured
frequency exceeds the set value of the Start
value Freq> setting, the frequency gradient
protection is enabled. After the frequency
exceeds the set value, the frequency gradient is
compared to the set value of the Start value df/dt
setting. When the frequency gradient exceeds
the set value, the module activates the START
and STR_FRG outputs. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has
reached the value set by the Operate Tm df/dt
setting, the OPERATE and OPR_FRG outputs are
activated. If the frequency gradient restores
before the module operates, the reset timer is
activated. If the timer reaches the value set by
the Reset delay Tm df/dt setting, the operate
timer resets and the START and STR_FRG
outputs are deactivated. The OPR_OFRQ output
is not active when this operation mode is used.
Freq< OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection
methods is enabled. The START output is
activated when either of the measured values of
the protection module exceeds its set value.
Detailed information about the active module is
available at the STR_UFRQ and STR_FRG
outputs. The shortest operate delay time from
the set Operate Tm Freq or Operate Tm df/dt is
dominant regarding the OPERATE output. The
time characteristic is according to DT. The
characteristic that activates the OPERATE output
can be seen from the OPR_UFRQ or OPR_FRG
output. If the frequency gradient restores before
the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset
delay Tm df/dt setting, the operate timer resets
and the STR_FRG output is deactivated. If the
frequency restores before the module operates,
the reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches
the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq
setting, the operate timer resets and the
STR_UFRQ output is deactivated.

Table continues on next page

498 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Operation mode Description

Freq> OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection
methods is enabled. The START output is
activated when either of the measured values of
the protection module exceeds its set value. A
detailed information from the active module is
available at the STR_OFRQ and STR_FRG
outputs. The shortest operate delay time from
the set Operate Tm Freq or Operate Tm df/dt is
dominant regarding the OPERATE output. The
time characteristic is according to DT. The
characteristic that activates the OPERATE output
can be seen from the OPR_OFRQ or OPR_FRG
output. If the frequency gradient restores before
the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset
delay Tm df/dt setting, the operate timer resets
and the STR_FRG output is deactivated. If the
frequency restores before the module operates,
the reset timer is activated. If the timer reaches
the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq
setting, the operate timer resets and the
STR_UFRQ output is deactivated.

The module calculates the start duration value which indicates the percentage ratio
of the start situation and set operate time (DT). The start duration is available
according to the selected value of the Operation mode setting.

Table 423: Start duration value

Operation mode in use Available start duration value
Freq< ST_DUR_UFRQ

Freq> ST_DUR_OFRQ

df/dt ST_DUR_FRG

The combined start duration START_DUR indicates the maximum percentage ratio
of the active protection modes. The values are available via the Monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

615 series 499

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.6.1.5 Application

The frequency protection function uses the positive phase-sequence voltage to

measure the frequency reliably and accurately.

The system frequency stability is one of the main principles in the distribution and
transmission network maintenance. To protect all frequency-sensitive electrical
apparatus in the network, the departure from the allowed band for a safe operation
should be inhibited.

The overfrequency protection is applicable in all situations where high levels of the
fundamental frequency of a power system voltage must be reliably detected. The
high fundamental frequency in a power system indicates an unbalance between
production and consumption. In this case, the available generation is too large
compared to the power demanded by the load connected to the power grid. This
can occur due to a sudden loss of a significant amount of load or due to failures in
the turbine governor system. If the situation continues and escalates, the power
system loses its stability.

The underfrequency is applicable in all situations where a reliable detection of a

low fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. The low fundamental
frequency in a power system indicates that the generated power is too low to meet
the demands of the load connected to the power grid.

The underfrequency can occur as a result of the overload of generators operating in

an isolated system. It can also occur as a result of a serious fault in the power
system due to the deficit of generation when compared to the load. This can happen
due to a fault in the grid system on the transmission lines that link two parts of the
system. As a result, the system splits into two with one part having the excess load
and the other part the corresponding deficit.

The frequency gradient is applicable in all the situations where the change of the
fundamental power system voltage frequency should be detected reliably. The
frequency gradient can be used for both increasing and decreasing the frequencies.
This function provides an output signal suitable for load shedding, generator
shedding, generator boosting, set point change in sub-transmission DC systems and
gas turbine startup. The frequency gradient is often used in combination with a low
frequency signal, especially in smaller power systems where the loss of a large
generator requires quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In
such situations, the load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency
level. However, in combination with a large negative frequency gradient, the
underfrequency protection can be used at a high setting.

500 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.6.1.6 Signals
Table 424: FRPFRQ Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F SIGNAL 0 Measured frequency
dF/dt SIGNAL 0 Rate of change of frequency
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 425: FRPFRQ Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
OPR_OFRQ BOOLEAN Operate signal for overfrequency
OPR_UFRQ BOOLEAN Operate signal for underfrequency
OPR_FRG BOOLEAN Operate signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start
ST_OFRQ BOOLEAN Start signal for overfrequency
ST_UFRQ BOOLEAN Start signal for underfrequency
ST_FRG BOOLEAN Start signal for frequency gradient

4.6.1.7 Settings
Table 426: FRPFRQ Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation mode 1=Freq&lt; 1=Freq&lt; Frequency protection operation mode
2=Freq&gt; selection
3=df/dt
4=Freq&lt; + df/dt
5=Freq&gt; + df/dt
6=Freq&lt; OR df/dt
7=Freq&gt; OR df/
dt
Start value Freq&gt; 0.9000...1.2000 xFn 0.0001 1.0500 Frequency start value overfrequency
Start value Freq&lt; 0.8000...1.1000 xFn 0.0001 0.9500 Frequency start value underfrequency
Start value df/dt -0.200...0.200 xFn /s 0.005 0.010 Frequency start value rate of change
Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 ms 10 200 Operate delay time for frequency
Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 ms 10 400 Operate delay time for frequency rate of
change

Table 427: FRPFRQ Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay Tm Freq 0...60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for frequency
Reset delay Tm df/dt 0...60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for rate of change

615 series 501

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.6.1.8 Monitored data

Table 428: FRPFRQ Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Start duration
ST_DUR_OFRQ FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Start duration
ST_DUR_UFRQ FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Start duration
ST_DUR_FRG FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Start duration
FRPFRQ Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.6.1.9 Technical data

Table 429: FRPFRQ Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy f>/f< ±10 mHz
df/dt ±100 mHz/s (in range |df/dt| < 5
Hz/s)
± 2.0% of the set value (in
range 5 Hz/s < |df/dt| < 15 Hz/s)
Start time f>/f< < 80 ms
df/dt < 120 ms
Reset time < 150 ms
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms

4.6.2 Load shedding and restoration LSHDPFRQ

4.6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Load shedding and restoration LSHDPFRQ UFLS/R 81LSH

502 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.6.2.2 Function block

GUID-1B46D13E-4F26-4CFA-9655-E979E0E05D67 V2 EN

Figure 262: Function block

4.6.2.3 Functionality

The load shedding and restoration function LSHDPFRQ is capable of performing

load shedding based on underfrequency and the rate of change of the frequency.
The load that is shed during the frequency disturbance can be restored once the
frequency has stabilized to the normal level.

The measured system frequency is compared to the set value to detect the
underfrequency condition. The measured rate of change of frequency (df/dt) is
compared to the set value to detect a high frequency reduction rate. The
combination of the detected underfrequency and the high df/dt is used for the
activation of the load shedding. There is a definite time delay between the detection
of the underfrequency and high df/dt and the activation of LSHDPFRQ. This time
delay can be set and it is used to prevent unwanted load-shedding actions when the
system frequency recovers to the normal level.

Throughout this document, “high df/dt” is used to mean “a high rate

of change of the frequency in negative direction.”

Once the frequency has stabilized, LSHDPFRQ can restore the load that is shed
during the frequency disturbance. The restoration is possible manually or
automatically.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.

4.6.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the load shedding and restoration function can be described using
a module diagram. All the modules are explained in the next sections.

615 series 503

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

GUID-17F7A604-487F-4D45-8150-AE041BB939B1 V2 EN

Figure 263: Functional module diagram

Underfrequency detection
The underfrequency detection measures the input frequency calculated from the
voltage signal. An underfrequency is detected when the measured frequency drops
below the set value of the Start Value Freq setting.

The underfrequency detection module includes a timer with the definite time (DT)
characteristics. Upon detection of underfrequency, operation timer activates the
ST_FRQ output. When the underfrequency timer has reached the value set by
Operate Tm Freq, the OPR_FRQ output is activated if the underfrequency
condition still persists. If the frequency becomes normal before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
Reset delay time, the timer resets and the ST_FRQ output is deactivated.

df/dt detection
The df/dt detection measures the input frequency calculated from the voltage signal
and calculates its gradient. A high df/dt condition is detected by comparing the

504 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

gradient to the Start value df/dt setting.The df/dt detection is activated when the
frequency gradient decreases at a faster rate than the set value of Start value df/dt.

The df/dt detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics. Upon
detection of df/dt, operation timer activates the ST_FRG output. When the timer
has reached the value set by Operate Tm df/dt, the OPR_FRG output is activated if
the df/dt condition still persists. If df/dt becomes normal before the module
operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value of the
Reset delay time setting, the timer resets and the ST_FRG output is deactivated.

Load-shedding control
The way of load shedding, that is, whether to operate based on underfrequency or
high df/dt or both, is defined with the Load shed mode user setting. The valid
operation modes for the Load shed mode settings are "Freq<", "Freq< AND df/dt"
and "Freq< OR df/dt".

Once the selected operation mode conditions are satisfied, the START and
OPERATE output signals are activated.

When the START output is active, the percentage of the elapsed delay time can be
monitored through START_DUR which is available as monitored data.

615 series 505

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Frequency
Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn
[Hz]
Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s
50 Hz Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms
Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms
Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt
49 Hz
48.75 Hz

1s

Time [s]

ST_FRG
500ms

Start of operation timer

OPR_FRG

ST_FRQ
1s

Start of operation timer

OPR_FRQ

OPERATE is activated
as Freq< AND df/dt
OPERATE condition satisfied
GUID-143A36EB-FCC9-4E87-B615-7743A3D75A15 V2 EN

Figure 264: Load-shedding operation in the “Freq< AND df/dt>” mode when
both Freq< and df/dt conditions are satisfied (Rated frequency=50
Hz)

506 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn

[Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s
50 Hz Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms
Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms
Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt
49 Hz

1s

Time [s]

ST_FRG
500ms

Start of operation timer

OPR_FRG

OPERATE is not
OPERATE activated in this case
as Freq< condition not
satisfied
GUID-DB333B09-D987-4A62-ABAE-7B70ACA275EB V2 EN

Figure 265: Load-shedding operation in the “Freq< AND df/dt>” mode when
only the df/dt condition is satisfied (Rated frequency=50 Hz)

Restore detection
If after the activation of the OPERATE input the frequency recovers to a level
above the Restore start Val setting, the RESTORE signal output is activated. The
RESTORE output remains active for a 100 ms. The Restore mode setting is used to
select the restoring mode to be "Disabled", "Auto" or "Manual".

615 series 507

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Restoring mode Description

Disabled Load restoration is disabled.
Auto In the “Auto” mode, input frequency is continuously compared to the Restore
start Val setting. The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT
characteristics. Upon detection of restoring, the operation timer activates the
ST_REST output. When the timer has reached the value of the Restore delay
time setting, the RESTORE output is activated if the restoring condition still
persists. If the frequency drops below the Restore start Val before the
RESTORE output is activated, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer
reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting, the timer resets and the
ST_REST start output is deactivated.

Manual In the “Manual” mode, a manual restoration is possible through the

MAN_RESTORE input or via communication. The ST_REST output is activated
if the MAN_RESTORE command is available and the frequency has exceeded
the Restore start Val setting. The manual restoration includes a timer with
the DT characteristics. When the timer has reached the set value of the
Restore delay time setting, the RESTORE output is activated if the restoring
condition still persists. If the frequency drops below the Restore start Val
setting before the RESTORE output is activated, the reset timer is activated. If
the reset timer reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting, the timer
resets and the ST_REST start output is deactivated.

A condition can arise where the restoring operation needs to be canceled.

Activating the BLK_REST input for the "Auto" or "Manual" modes cancels the
restoring operation. In the "Manual" restoring mode, the cancellation happens even
if MAN_RESTORE is present.

Once the RESTORE output command is cancelled, the reactivation of RESTORE is

possible only after the reactivation of the OPERATE output, that is, when the next
load-shedding operation is detected.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the Configuration/System/Blocking mode
global setting that selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled
with a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the
IED program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is preselected
with the Blocking mode global setting.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode,
the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE
output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE, OPR_FRQ and
OPR_FRG outputs are not activated.

4.6.2.5 Application

An AC power system operates at a defined rated frequency. The nominal frequency

in most systems in the world is 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The system operation is such that
the operating frequency remains approximately at the nominal frequency value by

508 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

a small margin. The safe margin of operation is usually less than ±0.5 Hz. The
system frequency stability is one of the main concerns in the transmission and
distribution network operation and control. To protect the frequency-sensitive
electrical equipment in the network, departure from the allowed band for safe
operation should be inhibited.

Any increase in the connected load requires an increase in the real power
generation to maintain the system frequency. Frequency variations form whenever
there are system conditions that result in an unbalance between the generation and
load. The rate of change of the frequency represents the magnitude of the
difference between the load and generation. A reduction in frequency and a
negative rate of change of the frequency are observed when the load is greater than
the generation, and an increase in the frequency along with a positive rate of
change of the frequency are observed if the generation is greater than the load. The
rate of change of the frequency is used for a faster decision of load shedding. In an
underfrequency situation, the load shedding trips out the unimportant loads to
stabilize the network. Thus, loads are normally prioritized so that the less important
loads are shed before the important loads.

During the operation of some of the protective schemes or other system

emergencies, the power system is divided into small islands. There is always a load
- generation imbalance in such islands that leads to a deviation in the operating
frequency from the nominal frequency. This off-nominal frequency operation is
harmful to power system components like turbines and motors. Therefore, such
situation must be prevented from continuing. The frequency-based load-shedding
scheme should be applied to restore the operation of the system to normal
frequency. This is achieved by quickly creating the load - generation balance by
disconnecting the load.

As the formation of the system islands is not always predefined, several load-
shedding relays are required to be deployed at various places near the load centers.
A quick shedding of a large amount of load from one place can cause a significant
disturbance in the system. The load-shedding scheme can be made most effective if
the shedding of load feeders is distributed and discrete, that is, the loads are shed at
various locations and in distinct steps until the system frequency reaches the
acceptable limits.

Due to the action of load-shedding schemes, the system recovers from the
disturbance and the operating frequency value recovers towards the nominal
frequency. The load that was shed during the disturbance can be restored. The load-
restoring operation should be done stepwise in such a way that it does not lead the
system back to the emergency condition. This is done through an operator
intervention or in case of remote location through an automatic load restoration
function. The load restoration function also detects the system frequency and
restores the load if the system frequency remains above the value of the set
restoration frequency for a predefined duration.

615 series 509

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Frequency
[Hz]
50 Hz

48.8 Hz

Time [s]

START

OPERATE

ST_REST

RESTORE

Set Restore delay time

Restore
timer
Timer Timer Timer
starts suspended continues

GUID-8694ACBB-CC73-46E6-A9C9-5DE27F6FC7AF V3 EN

Figure 266: Operation of the load-shedding function

Power system protection by load shedding

The decision on the amount of load that is required to be shed is taken through the
measurement of frequency and the rate of change of frequency (df/dt). At a single
location, many steps of load shedding can be defined based on different criteria of
the frequency and df/dt. Typically, the load shedding is performed in six or four
steps with each shedding increasing the portion of load from five to twenty-five
percent of full load within a few seconds. After every shedding, the system
frequency is read back and further shedding actions are taken only if necessary. In
order to take the effect of any transient, a sufficient time delay should be set.

The value of the setting has to be well below the lowest occurring normal
frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency of the system. The
setting level, the number of steps and the distance between two steps (in time or in
frequency) depend on the characteristics of the power system under consideration.
The size of the largest loss of generation compared to the size of the power system
is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at a high
frequency level and the time delay is normally not critical. In small systems, the
frequency start level has to be set at a low value and the time delay must be short.

510 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

If a moderate system operates at 50 Hz, an underfrequency should be set for

different steps from 49.2 Hz to 47.5 Hz in steps of 0.3 – 0.4 Hz. The operating time
for the underfrequency can be set from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second
stepwise from a higher frequency value to a lower frequency value.

Table 430: Setting for a five-step underfrequency operation

Load-shedding steps Start value Freq setting Operate Tm Freq setting
1 0.984 · Fn (49.2 Hz) 45000 ms
2 0.978 · Fn (49.2 Hz) 30000 ms
3 0.968 · Fn (49.2 Hz) 15000 ms
4 0.958 · Fn (49.2 Hz) 5000ms
5 0.950 · Fn (49.2 Hz) 500 ms

The rate of change of frequency function is not instantaneous since the function
needs time to supply a stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long
enough to take care of the signal noise.

Small industrial systems can experience the rate of change of frequency as large as
5 Hz/s due to a single event. Even large power systems can form small islands with
a large imbalance between the load and generation when severe faults or
combinations of faults are cleared. Up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small
island becomes isolated from a large system. For normal severe disturbances in
large power systems, the rate of change of the frequency is much less, often just a
fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

Similarly, the setting for df/dt can be from 0.1 Hz/s to 1.2 Hz/s in steps of 0.1 Hz/s
to 0.3 Hz/s for large distributed power networks, with the operating time varying
from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second. Here, the operating time should
be kept in minimum for the higher df/dt setting.

Table 431: Setting for a five-step df/dt< operation

Load-shedding steps Start value df/dt setting Operate Tm df/dt setting
1 -0.005 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 8000 ms
2 -0.010 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 2000 ms
3 -0.015 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 1000 ms
4 -0.020 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 500 ms
5 -0.025 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 250 ms

Once the frequency has stabilized, the shed load can be restored. The restoring
operation should be done stepwise, taking care that it does not lead the system back
to the emergency condition.

615 series 511

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 432: Setting for a five-step restoring operation

Load-shedding steps Restoring start Val setting Restore delay time setting
1 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 200000 ms
2 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 160000 ms
3 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 100000 ms
4 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 50000 ms
5 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 10000 ms

4.6.2.6 Signals
Table 433: LSHDPFRQ Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F SIGNAL 0 Measured frequency
dF/dt SIGNAL 0 Rate of change of frequency
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
BLK_REST BOOLEAN 0=False Block restore
MAN_RESTORE BOOLEAN 0=False Manual restore signal

Table 434: LSHDPFRQ Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operation of load shedding
OPR_FRQ BOOLEAN Operate signal for under frequency
OPR_FRG BOOLEAN Operate signal for high df/dt
START BOOLEAN Start
ST_FRQ BOOLEAN Pick-Up signal for under frequency detection
ST_FRG BOOLEAN Pick-Up signal for high df/dt detection
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
ST_REST BOOLEAN Restore frequency attained and restore timer
started

4.6.2.7 Settings
Table 435: LSHDPFRQ Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Load shed mode 1=Freq&lt; 1=Freq&lt; Set the operation mode for load
6=Freq&lt; OR df/dt shedding function
8=Freq&lt; AND df/
dt
Restore mode 1=Disabled 1=Disabled Mode of operation of restore functionality
2=Auto
3=Manual
Start value Freq 0.800...1.200 xFn 0.001 0.975 Frequency setting/start value
Table continues on next page

512 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Start value df/dt -0.200...-0.005 xFn /s 0.005 -0.010 Setting of frequency gradient for df/dt
detection
Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 ms 10 200 Time delay to operate for under
frequency stage
Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 ms 10 200 Time delay to operate for df/dt stage
Restore start Val 0.800...1.200 xFn 0.001 0.998 Restore frequency setting value
Restore delay time 80...200000 ms 10 300 Time delay to restore

Table 436: LSHDPFRQ Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 50 Time delay after which the definite timers
will reset

4.6.2.8 Monitored data

Table 437: LSHDPFRQ Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Start duration
LSHDPFRQ Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.6.2.9 Technical data

Table 438: LSHDPFRQ Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy f< ±10 mHz
df/dt ±100 mHz/s (in range |df/dt| < 5
Hz/s)
± 2.0% of the set value (in
range 5 Hz/s < |df/dt| < 15 Hz/s)
Start time f< < 80 ms
df/dt < 120 ms
Reset time < 150 ms
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±30 ms

615 series 513

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.7 Arc protection ARCSARC

4.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Arc protection ARCSARC ARC 50L/50NL

4.7.2 Function block

A070686 V3 EN

Figure 267: Function block

4.7.3 Functionality
The arc protection ARCSARC detects arc situations in air insulated metal-clad
switchgears caused by, for example, human errors during maintenance or insulation
breakdown during operation.

The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal.
The function also monitors phase and residual currents to be able to make accurate
decisions on ongoing arcing situations.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs

and resets timers.

4.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of arc protection can be described by using a module diagram. All
the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

514 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

I_A Level
I_B detector
Dropoff
I_C 1 Operation
mode OPERATE
selector t
Level
Io detector
2
OPR_MODE
REM_FLT_ARC Dropoff

FLT_ARC ARC_FLT_DET
t

BLOCK
A070746 V4 EN

Figure 268: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents.

Level detector 1
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Phase start value.
If the measured value exceeds the set Phase start value, the level detector reports
the exceeding of the value to the operation mode selector.

Level detector 2
The measured residual currents are compared to the set Ground start value. If the
measured value exceeds the set Ground start value, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the operation mode selector.

Operation mode selector

Depending on the Operation mode setting, the operation mode selector makes sure
that all required criteria are fulfilled for a reliable decision of an arc fault situation.
The user can select either "Light+current", "Light only" or "BI controlled"
operation mode. The operation is based on both current and light information in “Light
+current” mode, on light information only in “Light only” mode or on remotely
controlled information in “BI controlled” mode. When the "BI controlled" mode is
in use and the OPR_MODE input is activated, the operation of the function is based
on light information only. When the OPR_MODE input is deactivated, the operation
of the function is based on both light and current information. When the required
criteria are met, the drop-off timer is activated.

Drop-off timer
Once activated, the drop-off timer remains active until the input is deactivated or at
least during the drop-off time. The BLOCK signal can be used to block the
OPERATE signal or the light signal output ARC_FLT_DET.

615 series 515

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.7.5 Application
The arc protection can be realized as a stand-alone function in a single relay or as a
station-wide arc protection, including several protection relays. If realized as a
station-wide arc protection, different tripping schemes can be selected for the
operation of the circuit breakers of the incoming and outgoing feeders.
Consequently, the relays in the station can, for example, be set to trip the circuit
breaker of either the incoming or the outgoing feeder, depending on the fault
location in the switchgear. For maximum safety, the relays can be set to always trip
both the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and that of the outgoing feeder.

The arc protection consists of:

• Optional arc light detection hardware with automatic backlight compensation
for lens type sensors
• Light signal output ARC_FLT_DET for routing indication of locally detected
light signal to another relay
• Protection stage with phase- and earth-fault current measurement.

The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal.
Locally, the light is detected by lens sensors connected to the inputs Light sensor 1,
Light sensor 2, or Light sensor 3 on the serial communication module of the relay.
The lens sensors can be placed, for example, in the busbar compartment, the
breaker compartment, and the cable compartment of the metal-clad cubicle.

The light detected by the lens sensors is compared to an automatically adjusted

reference level. Light sensor 1, Light sensor 2, and Light sensor 3 inputs have their
own reference levels. When the light exceeds the reference level of one of the
inputs, the light is detected locally. When the light has been detected locally or
remotely and, depending on the operation mode, if one or several phase currents
exceed the set Phase start value limit, or the earth-fault current the set Ground
start value limit, the arc protection stage generates an operation signal. The stage is
reset in 30 ms, after all three-phase currents and the earth-fault current have fallen
below the set current limits.

The light signal output from an arc protection stage ARC_FLT_DET is activated
immediately in the detection of light in all situations. A station-wide arc protection
is realized by routing the light signal output to an output contact connected to a
binary input of another relay, or by routing the light signal output through the
communication to an input of another relay.

It is possible to block the tripping and the light signal output of the arc protection
stage with a binary input or a signal from another function block.

Cover unused inputs with dust caps.

516 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

Arc protection with one IED

In installations, with limited possibilities to realize signalling between IEDs
protecting incoming and outgoing feeders, or if only the IED for the incoming
feeder is to be exchanged, an arc protection with a lower protective level can be
achieved with one protection relay. An arc protection with one IED only is realized
by installing two arc lens sensors connected to the IED protecting the incoming
feeder to detect an arc on the busbar. In arc detection, the arc protection stage trips
the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder. The maximum recommended
installation distance between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is six meters
and the maximum distance from a lens sensor to the end of the busbar is three meters.

A040362 V1 EN

Figure 269: Arc protection with one IED

Arc protection with several IEDs

When using several IEDs, the IED protecting the outgoing feeder trips the circuit
breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an arc at the cable terminations. If
the IED protecting the outgoing feeder detects an arc on the busbar or in the
breaker compartment via one of the other lens sensors, it will generate a signal to
the IED protecting the incoming feeder. When detecting the signal, the IED
protecting the incoming feeder trips the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and
generates an external trip signal to all IEDs protecting the outgoing feeders, which
in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders. For

615 series 517

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

maximum safety, the IEDs can be configured to trip all the circuit breakers
regardless of where the arc is detected.

Q1 PO3

DI1

SO1
M1
3I, Io

PO1

Q2

Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6

DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1

3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io

S1 S2 S3 S4

SO1 SO1 SO1 SO1

A040363 V3 EN

Figure 270: Arc protection with several IEDs

Arc protection with several IEDs and a separate arc protection system
When realizing an arc protection with both IEDs and a separate arc protection
system, the cable terminations of the outgoing feeders are protected by IEDs using
one lens sensor for each IED. The busbar and the incoming feeder are protected by
the sensor loop of the separate arc protection system. With arc detection at the
cable terminations, an IED trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder.
However, when detecting an arc on the busbar, the separate arc protection system
trips the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generates an external trip signal
to all IEDs protecting the outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all
circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders.

518 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

A040364 V1 EN

Figure 271: Arc protection with several IEDs and a separate arc protection
system

4.7.6 Signals
Table 439: ARCSARC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs
REM_FLT_ARC BOOLEAN 0=False Remote Fault arc detected
OPR_MODE BOOLEAN 0=False Operation mode input

Table 440: ARCSARC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
ARC_FLT_DET BOOLEAN Fault arc detected=light signal output

615 series 519

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.7.7 Settings
Table 441: ARCSARC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Phase start value 0.50...40.00 xIn 0.01 2.50 Operating phase current
Ground start value 0.05...8.00 xIn 0.01 0.20 Operating residual current
Operation mode 1=Light+current 1=Light+current Operation mode
2=Light only
3=BI controlled

Table 442: ARCSARC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off

4.7.8 Monitored data

Table 443: ARCSARC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ARCSARC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.7.9 Technical data

Table 444: ARCSARC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy ±3% of the set value or ±0.01 x In

Operate time Minimum Typical Maximum

Operation mode = 9 ms 12 ms 15 ms
"Light+current"1)2)
Operation mode = 9 ms 10 ms 12 ms
"Light only"2)
Reset time < 40 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96

1) Phase start value = 1.0 x In, current before fault = 2.0 x set Phase start value, fn = 50 Hz, fault with
nominal frequency, results based on statistical distribution of 200 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the heavy-duty output contact

520 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.8 Motor startup supervision STTPMSU

4.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Motor startup supervision STTPMSU Is2tn< 49,66,48,51LR

4.8.2 Function block

GUID-A37CF63B-5273-423B-9DC3-AACADB668AEE V1 EN

Figure 272: Function block

4.8.3 Functionality
The motor startup supervision function STTPMSU is designed for protection
against excessive starting time and locked rotor conditions of the motor during
starting. For a good and reliable operation of the motor, the thermal stress during
the motor starting is maintained within the allowed limits.

The starting of the motor is supervised by monitoring the TRMS magnitude of all
the phase currents or by monitoring the status of the circuit breaker connected to
the motor.

During the startup period of the motor, STTPMSU calculates the integral of the I²t
value. If the calculated value exceeds the set value, the operate signal is activated.

STTPMSU has the provision to check the locked rotor condition of the motor using
the speed switch, which means checking if the rotor is able to rotate or not. This
feature operates after a predefined operating time.

STTPMSU also protects the motor from an excessive number of startups. Upon
exceeding the specified number of startups within certain duration, STTPMSU
blocks further starts. The restart of the motor is also inhibited after each start and
continues to be inhibited for a set duration. When the lock of start of motor is
enabled, STTPMSU gives the time remaining until the restart of the motor.

STTPMSU contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

615 series 521

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

4.8.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the motor startup supervision function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-35DD1223-14B2-48BF-ADF4-4A1DF6930314 V1 EN

Figure 273: Functional module diagram

Startup supervisor
This module detects the starting of the motor. The starting and stalling motor
conditions are detected in four different modes of operation. This is done through
the Operation mode setting.

When the Operation mode setting is operated in the "IIt" mode, the function
calculates the value of the thermal stress of the motor during the startup condition.
In this mode, the startup condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS currents.

The Operation mode setting in the "IIt, CB" mode enables the function to calculate
the value of the thermal stress when a startup is monitored in addition to the
CB_CLOSED input.

In the "IIt & stall" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor
during the startup condition. The startup condition is detected by monitoring the
TRMS currents.

In the "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the
motor during the startup condition but the startup condition is detected by
monitoring the TRMS current as well as circuit breaker status.

In both the "IIt & stall" and "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function also checks for
motor stalling by monitoring the speed switch.

522 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

When the measured current value is used for startup supervision in the "IIt" and "IIt
& stall" modes, the module initially recognizes the de-energized condition of the
motor when the values of all three phase currents are less than Motor standstill A
for longer than 100 milliseconds. If any of the phase currents of the de-energized
condition rises to a value equal to or greater than Motor standstill A, the
MOT_START output signal is activated indicating that the motor startup is in
progress. The MOT_START output remains active until the values of all three phase
currents drop below 90 percent of the set value of Start detection A and remain
below that level for a time of Str over delay time, that is, until the startup situation
is over.

GUID-4475BDFB-57AE-4BFD-9EE7-AE7672F7206E V2 EN

Figure 274: Functionality of startup supervision in the "IIt and IIt&stall" mode

In case of the "IIt, CB" or "IIt & stall, CB" modes, the function initially recognizes
the de-energized condition of the motor when the value of all three phase currents
is below the value of the Motor standstill A setting for 100 milliseconds. The
beginning of the motor startup is recognized when CB is closed, that is, when the
CB_CLOSED input is activated and at least one phase current value exceeds the
Motor standstill A setting.

These two events do not take place at the same instant, that is, the CB main contact
is closed first, in which case the phase current value rises above 0.1 pu and after
some delay the CB auxiliary contact gives the information of the CB_CLOSED
input. In some cases, the CB_CLOSED input can be active but the value of current
may not be greater than the value of the Motor standstill A setting. To allow both
possibilities, a time slot of 200 milliseconds is provided for current and the
CB_CLOSED input. If both events occur during this time, the motor startup is
recognized.

The motor startup ends either within the value of the Str over delay time setting
from the beginning of the startup or the opening of CB or when the CB_CLOSED

615 series 523

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

input is deactivated. The operation of the MOT_START output signal in this

operation mode is as illustrated in Figure 275.

This CB mode can be used in soft-started or slip ring motors for protection against
a large starting current, that is, a problem in starting and so on.

GUID-DDAD7B3F-28BE-4573-BE79-FBB488A22ECA V1 EN

GUID-1470A4DB-310F-46BC-B775-843EAB8BA836 V1 EN

Figure 275: Functionality of startup supervision in the "IIt, CB" mode and the "IIt
and stall, CB" mode

The Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation.
• In the “IIt” or “IIt & stall” modes, the aim of this setting is to check for the
completion of the motor startup period. The purpose of this time delay setting
is to allow for short interruptions in the current without changing the state of

524 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

the MOT_START output. In this mode of operation, the value of the setting is
in the range of around 100 milliseconds.
• In the “IIt, CB” or “IIt & stall, CB” modes, the purpose of this setting is to
check for the life of the protection scheme after the CB_CLOSED input has
been activated. Based on the values of the phase currents, the completion of
the startup period cannot be judged. So in this mode of operation, the value of
the time delay setting can even be as high as within the range of seconds, for
example around 30 seconds.

The activation of the BLOCK input signal deactivates the MOT_START output.

Thermal stress calculator

Because of the high current surges during the startup period, a thermal stress is
imposed on the rotor. With less air circulation in the ventilation of the rotor before
it reaches its full speed, the situation becomes even worse. Consequently, a long
startup causes a rapid heating of the rotor.

This module calculates the thermal stress developed in the motor during startup.
The heat developed during the starting can be calculated with the formula.
t
W = Rs ∫ is2 ( t ) dt
0
GUID-7A92209F-7451-415B-8C3D-276A6ED4A44B V1 EN (Equation 72)

Rs combined rotor and stator resistance

is starting current of the motor

t starting time of the motor

This equation is normally represented as the integral of I²t. It is a commonly used

method in protective IEDs to protect the motor from thermal stress during starting.
The advantage of this method over the traditional definite time overcurrent
protection is that when the motor is started with a reduced voltage as in the star-
delta starting method, the starting current is lower. This allows more starting time
for the motor since the module is monitoring the integral of I²t.

The module calculates the accumulated heat continuously and compares it to the
limiting value obtained from the product of the square of the values of the Motor
start-up A and Motor start-up time settings. When the calculated value of the
thermal stress exceeds this limit, the OPR_IIT output is activated.

The module also measures the time START_TIME required by the motor to attain
the rated speed and the relative thermal stress IIT_RL. The values are available in
the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the thermal stress calculator and
deactivates the OPR_IIT output.

615 series 525

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Stall protection
This module is activated only when the selected Operation mode setting value is
"IIt & stall" or "IIt & stall, CB".

The startup current is specific to each motor and depends on the startup method
used, such as direct online, autotransformer and rotor resistance insertion. The
startup time is dependent of the load connected to the motor.

Based on the motor characteristics supplied by the manufacturer, this module is

required if the stalling time is shorter than or too close to the starting time. In such
cases, a speed switch must be used to indicate whether a motor is accelerating
during startup or not.

At motor standstill, the STALL_IND input is active. It indicates that the rotor is
not rotating. When the motor is started, at certain revolution the deactivation of the
STALL_IND by the speed switch indicates that the rotor is rotating. If the input is
not deactivated within Lock rotor time, the OPR_STALL output is activated.

The module calculates the duration of the motor in stalling condition, the
STALL_RL output indicating the percent ratio of the start situation and the set
value of Lock rotor time. The value is available in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the operation time and deactivates
the OPR_STALL output.

Cumulative startup protection

This module protects the motor from an excessive number of startups.

Whenever the motor is started, the latest value of START_TIME is added to the
existing value of T_ST_CNT and the updated cumulative startup time is available
at T_ST_CNT. If the value of T_ST_CNT is greater than the value of Cumulative
time Lim, the LOCK_START output is activated and motor restarting is inhibited
during the time the output is active. The LOCK_START output remains high until
the T_ST_CNT value reduces to a value less than the value of Cumulative time
Lim. The start time counter reduces at the rate of the value of Counter Red rate.

The LOCK_START output becomes activated at the start of MOT_START. The

output remains active for a period of Restart inhibit time.

526 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

GUID-200BC4CB-8B33-4616-B014-AFCC99ED9224 V2 EN

Figure 276: Time delay for cumulative start

This module also protects the motor from consecutive startups. When the
LOCK_START output is active, T_RST_ENA shows the possible time for next
restart. The value of T_RST_ENA is calculated by the difference of Restart inhibit
time and the elapsed time from the instant LOCK_START is enabled.

When the ST_EMERG_ENA emergency start is set high, the value of the
cumulative startup time counter is set to Cumulative time Lim - 60s × Emg start
Red rate. This disables LOCK_START and in turn makes the restart of the motor
possible.

This module also calculates the total number of startups occurred, START_CNT.
The value can be reset from the clear menu.

The calculated values of T_RST_ENA, T_ST_CNT and START_CNT are available

in the monitored data view.

The activation of the BLK_LK_ST input signal deactivates the LOCK_START

output. The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the cumulative startup
counter module.

4.8.5 Application
When a motor is started, it draws a current well in excess of the motor's full-load
rating throughout the period it takes for the motor to run up to the rated speed. The
motor starting current decreases as the motor speed increases and the value of
current remains close to the rotor-locked value for most of the acceleration period.

The full-voltage starting or the direct-on-line starting method is used out of the
many methods used for starting the induction motor. If there is either an electrical
or mechanical constraint, this starting method is not suitable. The full-voltage

615 series 527

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

starting produces the highest starting torque. A high starting torque is generally
required to start a high-inertia load to limit the acceleration time. In this method,
full voltage is applied to the motor when the switch is in the "On" position. This
method of starting results in a large initial current surge, which is typically four to
eight times that of the full-load current drawn by the motor. If a star-delta starter is
used, the value of the line current will only be about one-third of the direct-on-line
starting current.

GUID-F4C17D13-48CA-480A-BBE5-DFD7D6316DB8 V1 EN

Figure 277: Typical motor starting and capability curves

The startup supervision of a motor is an important function because of the higher

thermal stress developed during starting. During the startup, the current surge
imposes a thermal strain on the rotor. This is exaggerated as the air flow for
cooling is less because the fans do not rotate in their full speed. Moreover, the
difference of speed between the rotating magnetic field and the rotor during the
startup time induces a high magnitude of slip current in the rotor at frequencies
higher than when the motor is at full speed. The skin effect is stronger at higher
frequencies and all these factors increase the losses and the generated heat. This is
worse when the rotor is locked.

The starting current for slip-ring motors is less than the full load current and
therefore it is advisable to use the circuit breaker in the closed position to indicate
the starting for such type of motors.

The starting times vary depending on motor design and load torque characteristics.
The time taken may vary from less than two seconds to more than 60 seconds. The
starting time is determined for each application.

When the permissible stall time is less than the starting time of the motor, the
stalling protection is used and the value of the time delay setting should be set
slightly less than the permissible stall time. The speed switch on the motor shaft

528 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

must be used for detecting whether the motor begins to accelerate or not. However,
if the safe stall time is longer than the startup time of the motor, the speed switch is
not required.

The failure of a motor to accelerate or to reach its full nominal speed in an

acceptable time when the stator is energized is caused by several types of abnormal
conditions, including a mechanical failure of the motor or load bearings, low
supply voltage, open circuit in one phase of a three-phase voltage supply or too
high starting voltage. All these abnormal conditions result in overheating.

Repeated starts increase the temperature to a high value in the stator or rotor
windings, or both, unless enough time is allowed for the heat to dissipate. To
ensure a safe operation it is necessary to provide a fixed-time interval between
starts or limit the number of starts within a period of time. This is why the motor
manufacturers have restrictions on how many starts are allowed in a defined time
interval. This function does not allow starting of the motor if the number of starts
exceeds the set level in the register that calculates them. This insures that the
thermal effects on the motor for consecutive starts stay within permissible levels.

For example, the motor manufacturer may state that three starts at the maximum
are allowed within 4 hours and the startup situation time is 60 seconds. By
initiating three successive starts we reach the situation as illustrated. As a result,
the value of the register adds up to a total of 180 seconds. Right after the third start
has been initiated, the output lock of start of motor is activated and the fourth start
will not be allowed, provided the time limit has been set to 121 seconds.

Furthermore, a maximum of three starts in 4 hours means that the value of the
register should reach the set start time counter limit within 4 hours to allow a new
start. Accordingly, the start time counter reduction should be 60 seconds in 4 hours
and should thus be set to 60 s / 4 h = 15 s / h.

GUID-6E9B7247-9009-4302-A79B-B326009ECC7A V2 EN

Figure 278: Typical motor-starting and capability curves

615 series 529

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Setting of Cumulative time Lim

Cumulative time Lim is calculated by

∑ tsi = (n − 1) × t + margin
GUID-0214B677-48D0-4DD4-BD1E-67BA9FD3C345 V1 EN (Equation 73)

n specified maximum allowed number of motor startups

t startup time of the motor (in seconds)
margin safety margin (~10...20 percent)

Setting of Counter Red rate

Counter Red rate is calculated by

t
∆ ∑ ts =
treset
GUID-E7C44256-0F67-4D70-9B54-1C5042A151AF V1 EN (Equation 74)

t specified start time of the motor in seconds

treset duration during which the maximum number of motor startups stated by the manufacturer can
be made; time in hours

4.8.6 Signals
Table 445: STTPMSU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function
BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks lock out condition for restart of motor
CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Input showing the status of motor circuit breaker
STALL_IND BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal for showing the motor is not stalling
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN 0=False Enable emergency start to disable lock of start of
motor

Table 446: STTPMSU Output signals

Name Type Description
OPR_IIT BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for thermal stress.
OPR_STALL BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for stalling protection.
MOT_START BOOLEAN Signal to show that motor startup is in progress
LOCK_START BOOLEAN Lock out condition for restart of motor.

530 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.8.7 Settings
Table 447: STTPMSU Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start detection A 0.1...10.0 xIn 0.1 1.5 Current value for detecting starting of
motor.
Motor start-up A 1.0...10.0 xIn 0.1 2.0 Motor starting current
Motor start-up time 1...80 s 1 5 Motor starting time
Lock rotor time 2...120 s 1 10 Permitted stalling time
Str over delay time 0...60000 ms 1 100 Time delay to check for completion of
motor startup period

Table 448: STTPMSU Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operation mode 1=IIt 1=IIt Motor start-up operation mode
2=IIt, CB
3=IIt + stall
4=IIt + stall, CB
Counter Red rate 2.0...250.0 s/h 0.1 60.0 Start time counter reduction rate
Cumulative time Lim 1...500 s 1 10 Cumulative time based restart inhibit limit
Emg start Red rate 0.00...100.00 % 0.01 20.00 Start time reduction factor when
emergency start is On
Restart inhibit time 0...250 min 1 30 Time delay between consecutive startups
Motor standstill A 0.05...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill
condition

4.8.8 Monitored data

Table 449: STTPMSU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_CNT INT32 0...999999 Number of motor start-
ups occurred
START_TIME FLOAT32 0.0...999.9 s Measured motor latest
startup time in sec
T_ST_CNT FLOAT32 0.0...99999.9 s Cumulated start-up time
in sec
T_RST_ENA INT32 0...999 min Time left for restart when
lockstart is enabled in
minutes
Table continues on next page

615 series 531

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

IIT_RL FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Thermal stress relative
to set maximum thermal
stress
STALL_RL FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Start time relative to the
operate time for stall
condition
STTPMSU Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.8.9 Technical data

Table 450: STTPMSU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Start time1)2) Minimum Typical Maximum

IFault = 1.1 x set Start
27 ms 30 ms 34 ms
detection A
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.90

1) Current before = 0.0 x In, fn = 50 Hz, overcurrent in one phase, results based on statistical
distribution of 1000 measurements
2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact

4.9 Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC

4.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC MAP MAP

532 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.9.2 Function block

GUID-A842A2C8-0188-4E01-8490-D00F7D1D8719 V2 EN

Figure 279: Function block

4.9.3 Functionality
The multipurpose protection function MAPGAPC is used as a general protection
with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting
facilities. The function can be used as an under- or overprotection with a settable
absolute hysteresis limit. The function operates with the definite time (DT)
characteristics.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired.

4.9.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the multipurpose protection function can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

AI_VALUE Timer OPERATE

Level t
detector
ENA_ADD START

Blocking
BLOCK
logic

GUID-50AA4A14-7379-43EB-8FA0-6C20C12097AC V1 EN

Figure 280: Functional module diagram

Level detector
The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Start value setting. The Operation
mode setting defines the direction of the level detector.

615 series 533

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 451: Operation mode types

Operation Mode Description
"Under" If the input signal AI_VALUE is lower than the
set value of the Start value setting, the level
detector enables the timer module.
"Over" If the input signal AI_VALUE exceeds the set
value of the Start value setting, the level detector
enables the timer module.

The Absolute hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations
if the input signal is slightly above or below the Start value setting. After leaving
the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area. If the ENA_ADD input
is activated, the threshold value of the internal comparator is the sum of the Start
value Add and Start value settings. The resulting threshold value for the
comparator can be increased or decreased depending on the sign and value of the
Start value Add setting.

Timer
Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is
according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate
delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If the starting condition disappears
before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches
the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the START output
is deactivated.

The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the
percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is
available in the monitored data view.

Blocking logic
There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes
are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting "Configuration/System/
Blocking mode" which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be
controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal
of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected
with the global setting Blocking mode.

The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers"
mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all"
mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block
OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output
is not activated.

534 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 4
Protection functions

4.9.5 Application
The function block can be used for any general analog signal protection, either
underprotection or overprotection. The setting range is wide, allowing various
protection schemes for the function. Thus, the absolute hysteresis can be set to a
value that suits the application.

The temperature protection using the RTD sensors can be done using the function
block. The measured temperature can be fed from the RTD sensor to the function
input that detects too high temperatures in the motor bearings or windings, for
example. When the ENA_ADD input is enabled, the threshold value of the internal
comparator is the sum of the Start value Add and Start value settings. This allows a
temporal increase or decrease of the level detector depending on the sign and value
of the Start value Add setting, for example, when the emergency start is activated.
If, for example, Start value is 100, Start value Add is 20 and the ENA_ADD input is
active, the input signal needs to rise above 120 before MAPGAPC operates.

4.9.6 Signals
Table 452: MAPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI_VALUE FLOAT32 0.0 Analog input value
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ENA_ADD BOOLEAN 0=False Enable start added

Table 453: MAPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate
START BOOLEAN Start

4.9.7 Settings
Table 454: MAPGAPC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value -10000.0...10000.0 0.1 0.0 Start value
Start value Add -100.0...100.0 0.1 0.0 Start value Add
Operate delay time 0...200000 ms 100 0 Operate delay time

615 series 535

Technical Manual
Section 4 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection functions

Table 455: MAPGAPC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operation mode 1=Over 1=Over Operation mode
2=Under
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 100 0 Reset delay time
Absolute hysteresis 0.01...100.00 0.01 0.10 Absolute hysteresis for operation

4.9.8 Monitored data

Table 456: MAPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 % Ratio of start time /
operate time
MAPGAPC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

4.9.9 Technical data

Table 457: MAPGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

536 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

Section 5 Protection related functions

5.1 Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 68

5.1.2 Function block

A070377 V1 EN

Figure 281: Function block

5.1.3 Functionality
The transformer inrush detection INRPHAR is used to coordinate transformer
inrush situations in distribution networks.

Transformer inrush detection is based on the following principle: the output signal
BLK2H is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current
I_2H and the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value.

The operate time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs

and resets timers.

5.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

615 series 537

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

The operation of an inrush current detection function can be described using a

module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070694 V2 EN

Figure 282: Functional module diagram. I_1H and I_2H represent fundamental
and second harmonic values of phase currents.

I_2H/I_1H
This module calculates the ratio of the second harmonic (I_2H) and fundamental
frequency (I_1H) phase currents. The calculated value is compared to the set Start
value. If the calculated value exceeds the set Start value, the module output is
activated.

Level detector
The output of the phase specific level detector is activated when the fundamental
frequency current I_1H exceeds five percent of the nominal current.

Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Operate delay time value. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the
Operate delay time value, the BLK2H output is activated. After the timer has
elapsed and the inrush situation still exists, the BLK2H signal remains active until
the I_2H/I_1H ratio drops below the value set for the ratio in all phases, that is,
until the inrush situation is over. If the drop-off situation occurs within the operate
time up counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds Reset
delay time, the operate timer is reset.

The BLOCK input can be controlled with a binary input, a horizontal

communication input or an internal signal of the relay program. The activation of
the BLOCK input prevents the BLK2H output from being activated.

538 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform

based inrush blocking from the TR2PTDF function if available.

5.1.5 Application
Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing
inrush conditions. A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling
the start value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection.

The inrush detection function can be used to selectively block overcurrent and earth-
fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the
fundamental component exceeds the set value.

Other applications of this function include the detection of inrush in lines

connected to a transformer.

A070695 V2 EN

Figure 283: Inrush current in transformer

615 series 539

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform

based inrush blocking from the transformer differential protection
function TR2PTDF if available.

5.1.6 Signals
Table 458: INRPHAR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_2H_A SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase A current
I_1H_A SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase A current
I_2H_B SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase B current
I_1H_B SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase B current
I_2H_C SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase C current
I_1H_C SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status

Table 459: INRPHAR Output signals

Name Type Description
BLK2H BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block

5.1.7 Settings
Table 460: INRPHAR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Start value 5...100 % 1 20 Ratio of the 2. to the 1. harmonic leading
to restraint
Operate delay time 20...60000 ms 1 20 Operate delay time

Table 461: INRPHAR Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Reset delay time 0...60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time

540 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.1.8 Monitored data

Table 462: INRPHAR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INRPHAR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

5.1.9 Technical data

Table 463: INRPHAR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

Current measurement:
±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In
Ratio I2f/I1f measurement:
±5.0% of the set value
Reset time +35 ms / -0 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Operate time accuracy +35 ms / -0 ms

5.2 Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I>/Io>BF 51BF/51NBF

5.2.2 Function block

A070436 V4 EN

Figure 284: Function block

615 series 541

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

5.2.3 Functionality
The breaker failure function CCBRBRF is activated by trip commands from the
protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal
or external commands through binary inputs. The start command is always a
default for three-phase operation. CCBRBRF includes a three-phase conditional or
unconditional re-trip function, and also a three-phase conditional back-up trip
function.

CCBRBRF uses the same levels of current detection for both re-trip and back-up
trip. The operating values of the current measuring elements can be set within a
predefined setting range. The function has two independent timers for trip
purposes: a re-trip timer for the repeated tripping of its own breaker and a back-up
timer for the trip logic operation for upstream breakers. A minimum trip pulse
length can be set independently for the trip output.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, if desired.

5.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the breaker failure protection can be described using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Also
further information on the retrip and backup trip logics is given in sub-module
diagrams.

I_A Level
I_B detector
I_C 1
Timer 1
POSCLOSE Start t Retrip
TRRET
START logic logic

Timer 2
Level Back-up
Io detector t trip TRBU
2 logic

Timer 3
CB_FAULT t CB_FAULT_AL

BLOCK
A070445 V3 EN

Figure 285: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase
currents and Io residual current.

542 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

Level detector 1
The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Current value. If
the measured value exceeds the set Current value, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the start, retrip and backup trip logics. The parameter
should be set low enough so that breaker failure situations with small fault current
or high load current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with
the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection.

Level detector 2
The measured residual current is compared to the set Current value Res. If the
measured value exceeds the set Current value Res, the level detector reports the
exceeding of the value to the start and backup trip logics. In high-impedance
earthed systems, the residual current at phase-to-earth faults is normally much
smaller than the short circuit currents. To detect a breaker failure at single-phase
earth faults in these systems, it is necessary to measure the residual current
separately. In effectively earthed systems, also the setting of the earth-fault current
protection can be chosen at a relatively low current level. The current setting
should be chosen in accordance with the setting of the sensitive earth-fault protection.

Start logic
The start logic is used to manage the starting of the timer 1 and timer 2. It also
resets the function after the circuit breaker failure is handled. On the rising edge of
the START input, the enabling signal is send to the timer 1 and timer 2.

Once the timer 1 and timer 2 are activated, CCBRBRF can be reset only after the
timers have reached the value set with the Retrip time and CB failure delay settings
respectively and the 150ms time elapse after the timer 1 and timer 2 has been
activated. The 150ms time elapse is provided to prevent malfunctioning due to
oscillation in the starting signal.

In case the setting Start latching mode is set to "Level sensitive", the CCBRBRF is
reset immediately after the START signal is deactivated. The recommended setting
value is "Rising edge".

The resetting of the function depends on the CB failure mode setting. If CB failure
mode is set to "Current", the resetting logic further depends on the CB failure trip
mode setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the resetting logic requires that
the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value setting.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the resetting logic requires that
either the values of the phase currents or the residual current drops below the
Current value and Current value Res setting respectively.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "2 out of 4", the resetting logic requires that
the values of all the phase currents and the residual current drop below the
Current value and Current value Res setting respectively.

615 series 543

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

If CB failure mode is set to the "Breaker status" mode, the resetting logic requires
that the circuit breaker is in the open condition. If the CB failure mode setting is set
to "Both", the logic resets when any of the above criteria is fulfilled.

Also the activation of the BLOCK input resets the function.

I0 >
From Level detector 2

CB failure trip mode

“2 out of 4" AND

I>
From Level detector 1

I0 >
From Level detector 2

CB failure trip mode AND OR

“1 out of 4"

I>
From Level detector 1

CB failure mode ”Current” AND

AND
Set
POSCLOSE Enable timer
Reset

CB failure mode ”Breaker

status” AND
OR

START

Start latching mode AND

”Level sensitive”

TON
150.0 ms

Timer 1 elapsed
From Timer 1 AND
AND
Timer 2 elapsed
From Timer 2

BLOCK

GUID-61D73737-798D-4BA3-9CF2-56D57719B03D V3 EN

Figure 286: Start logic

Timer 1
Once activated, the timer runs until the set Retrip time value has elapsed. The time
characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value
set with Retrip time, the retrip logic is activated. A typical setting is 0 - 50 ms.

Timer 2
Once activated, the timer runs until the set CB failure delay value has elapsed. The
time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the
set maximum time value CB failure delay, the backup trip logic is activated. The
value of this setting is made as low as possible at the same time as any unwanted
operation is avoided. A typical setting is 90 - 150 ms, which is also dependent on
the retrip timer.

544 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

The minimum time delay for the retrip can be estimated as:

CBfailuredelay ≥ Retriptime + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + tmargin

A070693 V3 EN (Equation 75)

tcbopen maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset maximum time for the breaker failure protection to detect the correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin safety margin

It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical
time. This time often depends on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of
a fault close to a power plant.

GUID-1A2C47ED-0DCF-4225-9294-2AEC97C14D5E V1 EN

Figure 287: Timeline of the breaker failure protection

Timer 3
This module is activated by the CB_FAULT signal. Once activated, the timer runs
until the set CB fault delay value has elapsed. The time characteristic is according
to DT. When the operation timer has reached the maximum time value CB fault
delay, the CB_FAULT_AL output is activated. After the set time, an alarm is given
so that the circuit breaker can be repaired. A typical value is 5 s.

Retrip logic
The retrip logic provides the TRRET output, which can be used to give a retrip
signal for the main circuit breaker. Timer 1 activates the retrip logic. The operation

615 series 545

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

of the retrip logic depends on the CB fail retrip mode setting. The retrip logic is
inactive if the CB fail retrip mode setting is set to "Off".

If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Current check" mode, the activation of the
retrip output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode setting.

• If CB failure mode is set to the "Current" mode, TRRET is activated when the
value of any phase current exceeds the Current value setting. The TRRET
output remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until
all phase current values drop below the Current value setting, whichever is
longer.
• If CB failure mode is set to the "Breaker status" mode, TRRET is activated if
the circuit breaker is in the closed position. The TRRET output remains active
for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the circuit breaker
is in the closed position, whichever is longer.
• If CB failure mode is set to "Both", TRRET is activated when either of the
"Breaker status" or "Current" mode condition is satisfied.

If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Without check" mode, TRRET is activated once
the timer 1 is activated without checking the current level. The TRRET output
remains active for a fixed time set with the Trip pulse timer setting.

The activation of the BLOCK input or the CB_FAULT_AL output deactivates the
TRRET output.

Timer 1 elapsed
From Timer 1
AND
CB fail retrip mode
”Without check”
OR
CB fail retrip mode
”Current check” AND TRRET
AND
CB failure mode ”Current”

CB failure mode ”Breaker

AND
status”

CB failure mode ”Both”

AND OR
I>
From Level detector 1

POSCLOSE AND

OR

CB_FAULT_AL
From Timer 3

BLOCK
GUID-BD64DEDB-758C-4F53-8287-336E43C750F2 V2 EN

Figure 288: Retrip logic

Backup trip logic

The backup trip logic provides the TRBU output which can be used to trip the
upstream backup circuit breaker when the main circuit breaker fails to clear the
fault. The backup trip logic is activated by the timer 2 module or timer-enabling

546 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

signal from the start logic module (rising edge of the START input detected), and
simultaneously CB_FAULT_AL is active. The operation of the backup logic
depends on the CB failure mode setting.

If the CB failure mode is set to "Current", the activation of TRBU depends on the
CB failure trip mode setting as follows:
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the failure detection is based on
any of the phase currents exceeding the Current value setting. Once TRBU is
activated, it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or
until the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value setting,
whichever takes longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the failure detection is based on
either a phase current or a residual current exceeding the Current value or
Current value Res setting respectively. Once TRBU is activated, it remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all
the phase currents or residual currents drop below the Current value and
Current value Res setting respectively, whichever takes longer.
• If CB failure trip mode is set to "2 out of 4", the failure detection requires that
a phase current and a residual current both exceed the Current value or
Current value Res setting respectively. Once TRBU is activated, it remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all
the phase currents and residual currents drop below the Current value and
Current value Res setting respectively, whichever takes longer.

In most applications, "1 out of 3" is sufficient.

If the CB failure mode is set to "Breaker status", the TRBU output is activated if the
circuit breaker is in the closed position. Once activated, the TRBU output remains
active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the circuit breaker
is in the closed position, whichever is longer.

If the CB failure mode setting is set to "Both", TRBU is activated when the
"Breaker status" or "Current" mode conditions are satisfied.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the TRBU output.

615 series 547

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

BLOCK

CB_FAULT_AL
From Timer 3
AND
Enable timer
From Start logic

OR
Timer 2 elapsed
From Timer 2 AND TRBU

I> AND
From level detector 1
AND

CB failure trip mode AND

”2 out of 4"
Io >
From level detector 2

CB failure trip mode AND OR

”1 out of 3"

OR
AND

CB failure trip mode

”1 out of 4"

AND

CB failure mode ”Current”

OR
CB failure mode ”Both” OR

AND
POSCLOSE
CB failure mode ”Breaker
status”
OR
CB failure mode ”Both”

GUID-30BB8C04-689A-4FA5-85C4-1DF5E3ECE179 V3 EN

Figure 289: Backup trip logic

5.2.5 Application
The n-1 criterion is often used in the design of a fault clearance system. This means
that the fault is cleared even if some component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. A circuit breaker is a necessary component in the fault clearance system.
For practical and economical reasons, it is not feasible to duplicate the circuit
breaker for the protected component, but breaker failure protection is used instead.

The breaker failure function issues a backup trip command to adjacent circuit
breakers in case the original circuit breaker fails to trip for the protected
component. The detection of a failure to break the current through the breaker is
made by measuring the current or by detecting the remaining trip signal
(unconditional).

CCBRBRF can also retrip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the
protected circuit breaker. The retrip function is used to increase the operational
reliability of the breaker. The function can also be used to avoid backup tripping of
several breakers in case mistakes occur during IED maintenance and tests.

548 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

CCBRBRF is initiated by operating different protection functions or digital logics

inside the IED. It is also possible to initiate the function externally through a binary
input.

CCBRBRF can be blocked by using an internally assigned signal or an external

signal from a binary input. This signal blocks the function of the breaker failure
protection even when the timers have started or the timers are reset.

The retrip timer is initiated after the start input is set to true. When the pre-defined
time setting is exceeded, CCBRBRF issues the retrip and sends a trip command,
for example, to the circuit breaker's second trip coil. Both a retrip with current
check and an unconditional retrip are available. When a retrip with current check is
chosen, the retrip is performed only if there is a current flow through the circuit
breaker.

The backup trip timer is also initiated at the same time as the retrip timer. If
CCBRBRF detects a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time,
which is longer than the retrip time, it sends a backup trip signal to the chosen
backup breakers. The circuit breakers are normally upstream breakers which feed
fault current to a faulty feeder.

The backup trip always includes a current check criterion. This means that the
criterion for a breaker failure is that there is a current flow through the circuit
breaker after the set backup delay time.

A070696 V2 EN

Figure 290: Typical breaker failure protection scheme in distribution substations

615 series 549

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

5.2.6 Signals
Table 464: CCBRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation
START BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP start command
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB in closed position
CB_FAULT BOOLEAN 0=False CB faulty and unable to trip

Table 465: CCBRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
CB_FAULT_AL BOOLEAN Delayed CB failure alarm
TRBU BOOLEAN Backup trip
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip

5.2.7 Settings
Table 466: CCBRBRF Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Current value 0.05...2.00 xIn 0.05 0.30 Operating phase current
Current value Res 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.05 0.30 Operating residual current
CB failure trip mode 1=2 out of 4 1=2 out of 4 Backup trip current check mode
2=1 out of 3
3=1 out of 4
CB failure mode 1=Current 1=Current Operating mode of function
2=Breaker status
3=Both
CB fail retrip mode 1=Off 1=Off Operating mode of retrip logic
2=Without Check
3=Current check
Retrip time 0...60000 ms 10 20 Delay timer for retrip
CB failure delay 0...60000 ms 10 150 Delay timer for backup trip
CB fault delay 0...60000 ms 10 5000 Circuit breaker faulty delay
Measurement mode 2=DFT 2=DFT Phase current measurement mode of
3=Peak-to-Peak function
Trip pulse time 0...60000 ms 10 150 Pulse length of retrip and backup trip
outputs
Start latching mode 1=Rising edge 1=Rising edge Start reset delayed or immediately
2=Level sensitive

550 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.2.8 Monitored data

Table 467: CCBRBRF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CCBRBRF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

5.2.9 Technical data

Table 468: CCBRBRF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x In

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

5.2.10 Technical revision history

Table 469: CCBRBRF Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Default trip pulse time changed to 150 ms
C Added new setting parameter Start latching
mode.
Maximum value changed to 2.00 xIn for the
Current value setting.

5.3 Master trip TRPPTRC

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Master trip TRPPTRC Master Trip 94/86

615 series 551

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

5.3.2 Function block

A071286 V2 EN

Figure 291: Function block

5.3.3 Functionality
The master trip function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and
handler after the protection functions. The features of this function influence the
trip signal behavior of the circuit breaker. The minimum trip pulse length can be
set when the non-latched mode is selected. It is also possible to select the latched or
lockout mode for the trip signal.

5.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

When the TRPPTRC function is disabled, all trip outputs intended

to go through the function to the circuit breaker trip coil are blocked!

The operation of the tripping logic function can be described with a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070882 V4 EN

Figure 292: Functional module diagram

Timer
The duration of the TRIP output signal from TRPPTRC can be adjusted with the
Trip pulse time setting when the "Non-latched" operation mode is used. The pulse
length should be long enough to secure the opening of the breaker. For three-pole
tripping, TRPPTRC has a single input OPERATE, through which all trip output
signals are routed from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IED's binary inputs. The function has a

552 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

single trip output TRIP for connecting the function to one or more of the IED's
binary outputs, and also to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

The BLOCK input blocks the TRIP output and resets the timer.

Lockout logic
TRPPTRC is provided with possibilities to activate a lockout. When activated, the
lockout can be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the
RST_LKOUT input or from the LHMI clear menu parameter. When using the
"Latched" mode, the resetting of the TRIP output can be done similarly as when
using the "Lockout" mode. It is also possible to reset the "Latched" mode remotely
through a separate communication parameter.

The minimum pulse trip function is not active when using the
"Lockout" or "Latched" modes but only when the "Non-latched"
mode is selected.

The CL_LKOUT and TRIP outputs can be blocked with the BLOCK input.

Table 470: Operation modes for the TRPPTRC trip output

Mode Operation
Non-latched The Trip pulse length parameter gives the
minimum pulse length for TRIP

Latched TRIP is latched ; both local and remote clearing

is possible.
Lockout TRIP is locked and can be cleared only locally
via menu or the RST_LKOUT input.

5.3.5 Application
All trip signals from different protection functions are routed through the trip logic.
The most simplified application of the logic function is linking the trip signal and
ensuring that the signal is long enough.

The tripping logic in the protection relay is intended to be used in the three-phase
tripping for all fault types (3ph operating). To prevent the closing of a circuit
breaker after a trip, TRPPTRC can block the CBXCBR closing.

TRPPTRC is intended to be connected to one trip coil of the corresponding circuit

breaker. If tripping is needed for another trip coil or another circuit breaker which
needs, for example, different trip pulse time, another trip logic function can be
used. The two instances of the PTRC function are identical, only the names of the
functions, TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2, are different. Therefore, even if all
references are made only to TRPPTRC1, they also apply to TRPPTRC2.

615 series 553

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

The inputs from the protection functions are connected to the OPERATE input.
Usually, a logic block OR is required to combine the different function outputs to
this input. The TRIP output is connected to the binary outputs on the IO board.
This signal can also be used for other purposes within the IED, for example when
starting the breaker failure protection.

TRPPTRC is used for simple three-phase tripping applications.

PHLPTOC-operate
PHHPTOC1-operate OR
PHHPTOC2-operate
PHIPTOC-operate
NSPTOC1-operate
NSPTOC2-operate TRPPTRC
EFLPTOC1-operate
EFHPTOC-operate
OPERATE TRIP
EFIPTOC-operate
EFLPTOC2-operate BLOCK CL_LKOUT

PDNSPTOC-operate
RST_LKOUT
T1PTTR-operate
CCRBRF-trret PO#1
CBXCBR-open
ARCPSARC1-operate
ARCPSARC2-operate
ARCPSARC3-operate
DARREC-open cb

BI#2

BI#4
Lock-out
reset

A070881 V2 EN

Figure 293: Typical TRPPTRC connection

5.3.6 Signals
Table 471: TRPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function
OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=False Request to trip circuit breaker.
RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

Table 472: TRPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
CL_LKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

554 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.3.7 Settings
Table 473: TRPPTRC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Trip pulse time 20...60000 ms 1 150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
Trip output mode 1=Non-latched 2=Latched Select the operation mode for trip output
2=Latched
3=Lockout

5.3.8 Monitored data

Table 474: TRPPTRC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TRPPTRC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

5.3.9 Technical revision history

Table 475: TRPPTRC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B -
C -

5.4 Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO BST BST

615 series 555

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

5.4.2 Function block

GUID-6D70959C-EC59-4C72-85E5-9BE89ED39DBB V1 EN

Figure 294: Function block

5.4.3 Functionality
The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for transferring binary
signals between the local and remote end line differential protection IEDs. The
function includes eight binary signals that are transferred in the protection
communication telegram and can be freely configured and used for any purpose in
the line differential application.

BSTGGIO transfers binary data continuously over the protection communication

channel between the terminals. Each of the eight signals are bidirectional and the
binary data sent locally is available remotely as a received signal.

BSTGGIO includes a minimum pulse time functionality for the received binary
signals. Each received signal has its own minimum pulse time setting parameter.

BSTGGIO includes two alarm output signals. The SEND_SIG_A output signal is
updated according to the status of the sent binary signals. The RECV_SIG_A
output signal is updated according to the status of the received binary signals. Each
signal can be separately included or excluded from the alarm logic with a setting
parameter.

5.4.4 Operation principle

The Signal 1...8 mode setting can be used for changing the operation of the
bidirectional signal channel. The signal channel can be disabled by setting the
corresponding parameter value to “Not in use”. When the signal channel is
disabled locally or remotely, the corresponding RECV_SIG_1...8 signal status
is always false on both ends.

556 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

GUID-54526C83-99FA-478B-877A-394234289F91 V1 EN

Figure 295: Functional module diagram

Binary signal send

The status of the inputs is continuously sent in the line differential protection
telegrams. SEND_SIG_A can be used for alarming based on the status of
SEND_SIG_1...8. By selecting the signal mode as "In use, alarm sel.", the
sending status of the corresponding signal affects also the activation criteria of
SEND_SIG_A. Further, in case more than one signal channels are selected into the
alarm logic, the activation criteria can be defined according to "Any of selected"
(OR) or "All of selected" (AND).

Binary signal receive

The function receives continuous binary data within the protection telegrams from
the remote end IED. This received binary data status is then available as the
RECV_SIG_1...8 outputs on the local end IED. RECV_SIG_A can be used for
alarming based on the status of RECV_SIG_1...8. By selecting the signal mode
as "In use, alarm sel.", the received status of the corresponding signal affects the
activation criteria of RECV_SIG_A. Further, in case more than one signal channels
are selected into the alarm logic, the activation criteria can be defined according to
"Any of selected" (OR) or "All of selected" (AND). Each signal has also the Pulse
time 1...8 setting that defines the minimum pulse length for RECV_SIG_1...8.
Also, in case the protection communication supervision detects a failure in the
communication, the RECV_SIG_1...8 outputs are not set to false sooner than
the minimum pulse length defined is first ensured for each signal.

5.4.5 Application

Among with the analog data, the binary data can also be exchanged with the line
differential protection IEDs. The usage of the binary data is application specific

615 series 557

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

and can vary in each separate case. The demands for the speed of the binary signals
vary depending on the usage of the data. When the binary data is used as blocking
signals for the line differential protection, the transfer response is extremely high.
Binary signal interchange can be used in applications such as:

• Remote position indications

• Inter-tripping of the circuit breakers on both line ends
• Blocking of the line differential protection during transformer inrush or current
circuit supervision failure
• Protection schemes; blocking or permissive
• Remote alarming.

The figure shows the overall chain to transfer binary data in an example
application. The position indication of the local circuit breaker is connected to the
IED’s input interface and is then available for the IED configuration. The circuit
breaker position indication is connected to the first input of BSTGGIO which is
used to send information to the remote end via communication. In the remote end,
this information is handled as a remote circuit breaker open position and it is
available from the first output of BSTGGIO. This way the information can be
exchanged.

GUID-85FE5892-DDA5-4ED9-9412-A3A48E364EFC V1 EN

Figure 296: Example of usage of binary signal transfer for position indication
change

558 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.4.6 Signals
Table 476: BSTGGIO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SEND_SIG_1 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 1 state
SEND_SIG_2 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 2 state
SEND_SIG_3 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 3 state
SEND_SIG_4 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 4 state
SEND_SIG_5 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 5 state
SEND_SIG_6 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 6 state
SEND_SIG_7 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 7 state
SEND_SIG_8 BOOLEAN 0=False Send signal 8 state

Table 477: BSTGGIO Output signals

Name Type Description
RECV_SIG_1 BOOLEAN Receive signal 1 state
RECV_SIG_2 BOOLEAN Receive signal 2 state
RECV_SIG_3 BOOLEAN Receive signal 3 state
RECV_SIG_4 BOOLEAN Receive signal 4 state
RECV_SIG_5 BOOLEAN Receive signal 5 state
RECV_SIG_6 BOOLEAN Receive signal 6 state
RECV_SIG_7 BOOLEAN Receive signal 7 state
RECV_SIG_8 BOOLEAN Receive signal 8 state
SEND_SIG_A BOOLEAN Binary signal transfer sending alarm state
RECV_SIG_A BOOLEAN Binary signal transfer receive alarm state

5.4.7 Settings
Table 478: BSTGGIO Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Signal 1 mode 1=In use 2=In use, alarm Operation mode for signal 1
2=In use, alarm sel. sel.
3=Not in use
Signal 2 mode 1=In use 2=In use, alarm Operation mode for signal 2
2=In use, alarm sel. sel.
3=Not in use
Signal 3 mode 1=In use 1=In use Operation mode for signal 3
2=In use, alarm sel.
3=Not in use
Signal 4 mode 1=In use 1=In use Operation mode for signal 4
2=In use, alarm sel.
3=Not in use
Table continues on next page

615 series 559

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Signal 5 mode 1=In use 1=In use Operation mode for signal 5
2=In use, alarm sel.
3=Not in use
Signal 6 mode 1=In use 1=In use Operation mode for signal 6
2=In use, alarm sel.
3=Not in use
Signal 7 mode 1=In use 1=In use Operation mode for signal 7
2=In use, alarm sel.
3=Not in use
Signal 8 mode 1=In use 1=In use Operation mode for signal 8
2=In use, alarm sel.
3=Not in use
Pulse time 1 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 1
Pulse time 2 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 2
Pulse time 3 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 3
Pulse time 4 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 4
Pulse time 5 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 6
Pulse time 6 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 6
Pulse time 7 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 7
Pulse time 8 0...60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 8

Table 479: BSTGGIO Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Alarm mode 1=Any of selected 1=Any of selected Selects the used alarm logic mode for
2=All of selected activating SEND_SIG_A and
RECV_SIG_A

5.4.8 Technical data

Table 480: BSTGGIO Technical data
Characteristic Value
Signalling delay Fiber optic link < 5 ms
Galvanic pilot
wire link < 10 ms

5.5 Emergency startup ESMGAPC

5.5.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Emergency startup ESMGAPC ESTART ESTART

560 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.5.2 Function block

GUID-3AF99427-2061-47E1-B3AB-FD1C9BF98E76 V1 EN

Figure 297: Function block

5.5.3 Functionality
An emergency condition can arise in cases where the motor needs to be started
despite knowing that this can increase the temperature above limits or cause a
thermal overload that can damage the motor. The emergency startup ESMGAPC
allows motor startups during such emergency conditions. ESMGAPC is only to
force the IED to allow the restarting of the motor. After the emergency start input
is activated, the motor can be started normally. ESMGAPC itself does not actually
restart the motor.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.

5.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the emergency startup can be described using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-18128621-4A78-45D0-A788-9116B5213449 V1 EN

Figure 298: Functional module diagram

Standstill detector
The module detects if the motor is in a standstill condition. The standstill condition
can be detected based on the phase current values. If all three phase currents are
below the set value of Motor standstill A, the motor is considered to be in a
standstill condition.

615 series 561

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

Timer
The timer is a fixed 10-minute timer that is activated when the ST_EMERG_RQ
input is activated and motor standstill condition is fulfilled. Thus, the activation of
the ST_EMERG_RQ input activates the ST_EMERG_ENA output, provided that the
motor is in a standstill condition. The ST_EMERG_ENA output remains active for
10 minutes or as long as the ST_EMERG_RQ input is high, whichever takes longer.

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks and also resets the timer.

The function also provides the ST_EMERG_ENA output change date and time,
T_ST_EMERG. The information is available in the monitored data view.

5.5.5 Application
If the motor needs to be started in an emergency condition at the risk of damaging
the motor, all the external restart inhibits are ignored, allowing the motor to be
restarted. Furthermore, if the calculated thermal level is higher than the restart
inhibit level at an emergency start condition, the calculated thermal level is set
slightly below the restart inhibit level. Also, if the register value of the cumulative
startup time counter exceeds the restart inhibit level, the value is set slightly below
the restart disable value to allow at least one motor startup.

The activation of the ST_EMERG_RQ digital input allows to perform emergency

start. The IED is forced to a state which allows the restart of motor, and the
operator can now restart the motor. A new emergency start cannot be made until
the 10 minute time-out has passed or until the emergency start is released,
whichever takes longer.

The last change of the emergency start output signal is recorded.

5.5.6 Signals
Table 481: ESMGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode
ST_EMERG_RQ BOOLEAN 0=False Emergency start input

Table 482: ESMGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
ST_EMERG_ENA BOOLEAN Emergency start

562 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.5.7 Settings
Table 483: ESMGAPC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Motor standstill A 0.05...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill
condition

Table 484: ESMGAPC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off

5.5.8 Monitored data

Table 485: ESMGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
T_ST_EMERG Timestamp Emergency start
activation timestamp
ESMGAPC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

5.5.9 Technical data

Table 486: ESMGAPC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Un

5.6 Switch on to fault control CBRSOF

5.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Switch on to fault control CBRSOF SOTF SOTF

615 series 563

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

5.6.2 Function block

GUID-766B0C1E-86C1-4C7F-8C71-56A0EF89E74A V2 EN

Figure 299: Function block

5.6.3 Functionality
The automatic switch on to fault function CBRSOF provides an instantaneous trip
or a time delayed trip when closing the breaker while a fault exists.

CBRSOF is activated when the CB_CL_CMD circuit breaker closing command is

set high. CBRSOF has START and START_DLYD inputs for immediate or delayed
start operation respectively.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs and the reset timers, if desired.

5.6.4 Principle of operation

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of automatic switch onto fault function can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-A786834F-1BA2-4DD6-8457-D38BCBC4ABF8 V2 EN

Figure 300: Functional module diagram

Trigger
This module is used for detecting possible fault immediately after closing the
circuit breaker. An external protection function like PHxPTOC or EFxPTOC is
used for fault indication. The START and START_DLYD inputs are available for
feeding the detected fault.

564 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

• START input is used when it is required to enable SOTF control immediately

after protection function indicates a fault.
• START_DLYD input is used when time delayed SOTF control enabling is
needed. In this case, the delay can be set with a Operate delay time setting.

SOTF control
The SOTF control is activated when CB_CL_CMD circuit breaker closing
command input is activated. The module is kept active until the set SOTF reset
time is exceeded after the CB_CL_CMD is deactivated. The OPERATE output is
activated when a fault indication signal is received from the Trigger module while
the SOTF control is still active.

5.6.5 Application
The CB_CL_CMD input activates CBRSOF. In the standard configuration, the
breaker close command should be connected to this input. The SOTF reset time
setting parameter is used for keeping CBRSOF active for a certain time after the
CB close command is executed.

The overcurrent high and instantaneous signals, for example, the PHIPTOC
START signal is connected to the function START input. When the SOTF control
module is active and the START input is activated, the function operates
instantaneously without any delays.

The overcurrent low stage signals, for example, PHLPTOC START signal is
connected to the function START_DLYD input. The setting parameter Operate
delay time is used to delay the operation in case of inrush situation.

5.6.6 Signals
Table 487: CBRSOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
START BOOLEAN 0=False Start from function to be accelerated by SOTF
START_DLYD BOOLEAN 0=False Start from function to be accelerated with delay
by SOTF
CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0=False External enabling of SOTF by CB close command
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function

Table 488: CBRSOF Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

615 series 565

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

5.6.7 Settings
Table 489: CBRSOF Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SOTF reset time 0...60000 ms 1 1000 SOTF detection period after initialization
Operate delay time 0...60000 ms 1 0 Time delay for start input

Table 490: CBRSOF Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off

5.6.8 Monitored data

Table 491: CBRSOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CBRSOF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

5.7 Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR

5.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR UPSS UPSM

5.7.2 Function block

GUID-9ECE8940-32C4-46F7-84E7-CB129B93B080-CN V2 EN

Figure 301: Function block

566 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.7.3 Functionality
The uncorresponding position startup function UPSCBR detects circuit breaker
openings in an unknown situation. An unexpected breaker opening can be caused
by, for example, internal mechanical malfunction.

UPSCBR can be used independently. The function output is activated when

detecting a circuit breaker opening in an unknown situation.

In most cases, the function module is used together with the AR function module.
The operate output signal can be one of the startup signals of the AR function.

5.7.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the uncorresponding position startup function can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

CB_POSOPEN
CB_POSCLOSE

Signal power
SI_PWR_ON Operate logic OPERATE
supply check

Protection
CB_OPEN_CMD activation
check

GUID-2BEA9587-68B3-4B76-BAA5-D53DAA8A0D97 V2 EN

Figure 302: Functional module diagram

Signal power supply check

This module is used for signal power supply supervision. The activation of the
SI_PWR_ON input enables the Operate logic module after the value of the CB
power on delay time setting has elapsed.

Protection activation check

The main purpose of the module is to disable the Operate logic module when the
CB open command has been deployed by another function, for example, a
protection or control function. The activation of the CB_OPEN_CMD input disables
the Operate logic module immediately. The duration of the disabling time can be
set with the CB open hold delay setting.

615 series 567

Technical Manual
Section 5 1YHT530004D05 D
Protection related functions

Operate logic
The OPERATE output of this module can be used for closing the circuit breaker if it
is opened for an unknown reason. The OPERATE output is activated immediately
after the CB_POSOPEN input becomes active and CB_POSCLOSE inactive. The
pulse length for the OPERATE output signal can be set with the Operate pulse time
setting.

The module is disabled if the signal power supply is faulty

(SI_PWR_ON = FALSE) or the open command is sent to the
breaker (CB_OPEN_CMD = TRUE).

5.7.5 Application
The uncorresponding circuit breaker position means that the actual position of the
circuit breaker’s control switch is unmatched with the real position of the circuit
breaker. In a normal situation, the function is used in cooperation with the
autoreclose function (DARREC). The operate signal can start the autoreclosing
when detecting that the circuit breaker has opened in an unknown situation. If the
function is used as a stand-alone function when an unknown circuit breaker open is
detected, the function output can be used as an information indication for the
supervision station.

5.7.6 Signals
Table 492: UPSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CB_OPEN_CMD BOOLEAN 0=False CB open command, common
CB_POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB position closed
CB_POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False CB position open
SI_PWR_ON BOOLEAN 0=False Signal power on

Table 493: UPSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

568 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 5
Protection related functions

5.7.7 Settings
Table 494: UPSCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
CB open hold delay 300...500 ms 1 300 CB open hold delay time
Operate pulse time 100...20000 ms 1 100 Operate pulse time
Signal pwr on delay 300...500 ms 1 300 Signal power on delay time

5.7.8 Technical data

Table 495: UPSCBR Technical data

Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

615 series 569

Technical Manual
570
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

Section 6 Supervision functions

6.1 Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR

6.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR TCS TCM

6.1.2 Function block

A070788 V1 EN

Figure 303: Function block

6.1.3 Functionality
The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control
circuit of the circuit breaker. The invalidity of a control circuit is detected by using
a dedicated output contact that contains the supervision functionality.The failure of
a circuit is reported to the corresponding function block in the IED configuration.

The function starts and operates when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure. The
operating time characteristic for the function is DT. The function operates after a
predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates the ALARM

output and resets the timer.

6.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of trip circuit supervision can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 571

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

A070785 V2 EN

Figure 304: Functional module diagram

TCS status
This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in
the trip circuit activates the timer.

Timer
Once activated, the timer runs until the set value of Operate delay time has elapsed.
The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached
the maximum time value, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation
occurs during the operate time up counting, the fixed 0.5 s reset timer is activated.
After that time, the operation timer is reset.

The BLOCK input can be controlled with a binary input, a horizontal

communication input or an internal signal of the relay program. The activation of
the BLOCK input prevents the ALARM output to be activated.

6.1.5 Application
TCSSCBR detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker. The
function can supervise both open and closed coil circuits. This kind of supervision
is necessary to find out the vitality of the control circuits continuously.

Figure 305 shows an application of the trip circuit supervision function use. The
best solution is to connect an external Rext shunt resistor in parallel with the circuit
breaker internal contact. Although the circuit breaker internal contact is open, TCS
can see the trip circuit through Rext. The Rext resistor should have such a resistance
that the current through the resistance remains small, that is, it does not harm or
overload the circuit breaker's trip coil.

572 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

A051097 V4 EN

Figure 305: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision with an external

resistor. The TCSSCBR blocking switch is not required since the
external resistor is used.

If TCS is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be
omitted. When the circuit breaker is in the open position, TCS sees the situation as
a faulty circuit. One way to avoid TCS operation in this situation would be to block
the supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open.

A051906 V2 EN

Figure 306: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision without an

external resistor. The circuit breaker open indication is set to block
TCSSCBR when the circuit breaker is open.

615 series 573

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

Trip circuit supervision and other trip contacts

It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel, for
example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in
parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved. The supervising current
cannot detect if one or all the other contacts connected in parallel are not connected
properly.

TCS

A070968 V3 EN

Figure 307: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit
supervision

In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the
TCS test current flows through all wires and joints.

574 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

A070970 V1 EN

Figure 308: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test
current flows through all wires and joints

Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit

Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the
circuit has multiple TCS circuits in parallel. Each TCS circuit causes its own
supervising current to flow through the monitored coil and the actual coil current is
a sum of all TCS currents. This must be taken into consideration when determining
the resistance of Rext.

Setting the TCS function in a protection IED not-in-use does not

typically affect the supervising current injection.

Trip circuit supervision with auxiliary relays

Many retrofit projects are carried out partially, that is, the old electromechanical
relays are replaced with new ones but the circuit breaker is not replaced. This
creates a problem that the coil current of an old type circuit breaker can be too high
for the protection IED trip contact to break.

The circuit breaker coil current is normally cut by an internal contact of the circuit
breaker. In case of a circuit breaker failure, there is a risk that the protection IED
trip contact is destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of
electromagnetic energy accumulated in the trip coil.

615 series 575

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

An auxiliary relay can be used between the protection IED trip contact and the
circuit breaker coil. This way the breaking capacity question is solved, but the TCS
circuit in the protection IED monitors the healthy auxiliary relay coil, not the
circuit breaker coil. The separate trip circuit supervision relay is applicable for this
to supervise the trip coil of the circuit breaker.

Dimensioning of the external resistor

Under normal operating conditions, the applied external voltage is divided between
the relay’s internal circuit and the external trip circuit so that at the minimum 20 V
(15...20 V) remains over the relay’s internal circuit. Should the external circuit’s
resistance be too high or the internal circuit’s too low, for example due to welded
relay contacts, the fault is detected.

Mathematically, the operation condition can be expressed as:

U C − (R ext + Rint + Rs ) × I c ≥ 20V AC / DC
A070986 V2 EN (Equation 76)

Uc Operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit

Ic Measuring current through the trip circuit, appr. 1.5 mA (0.99...1.72 mA)

Rext external shunt resistance

Rint internal shunt resistance, 1 kΩ

Rs trip coil resistance

If the external shunt resistance is used, it has to be calculated not to interfere with
the functionality of the supervision or the trip coil. Too high a resistance causes too
high a voltage drop, jeopardizing the requirement of at least 20 V over the internal
circuit, while a resistance too low can enable false operations of the trip coil.

Table 496: Values recommended for the external resistor Rext

Operating voltage Uc Shunt resistor Rext

48 V DC 1.2 kΩ, 5 W
60 V DC 5.6 kΩ, 5 W
110 V DC 22 kΩ, 5 W
220 V DC 33 kΩ, 5 W

Due to the requirement that the voltage over the TCS contact must be 20V or
higher, the correct operation is not guaranteed with auxiliary operating voltages
lower than 48V DC because of the voltage drop in Rint,Rext and the operating coil
or even voltage drop of the feeding auxiliary voltage system which can cause too
low voltage values over the TCS contact. In this case, erroneous alarming can occur.

At lower (<48V DC) auxiliary circuit operating voltages, it is recommended to use

the circuit breaker position to block unintentional operation of TCS. The use of the
position indication is described earlier in this chapter.

576 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

Using power output contacts without trip circuit supervision

If TCS is not used but the contact information of corresponding power outputs are
required, the internal resistor can be by-passed. The output can then be utilized as a
normal power output. When bypassing the internal resistor, the wiring between the
terminals of the corresponding output X100:16-15(PO3) or X100:21-20(PO4) can
be disconnected. The internal resistor is required if the complete TCS circuit is used.

GUID-0560DE53-903C-4D81-BAFD-175B9251872D V1 EN

Figure 309: Connection of a power output in a case when TCS is not used and
the internal resistor is disconnected

Incorrect connections and use of trip circuit supervision

Although the TCS circuit consists of two separate contacts, it must be noted that
those are designed to be used as series connected to guarantee the breaking
capacity given in the technical manual of the IED. In addition to the weak breaking
capacity, the internal resistor is not dimensioned to withstand current without a
TCS circuit. As a result, this kind of incorrect connection causes immediate
burning of the internal resistor when the circuit breaker is in the close position and
the voltage is applied to the trip circuit. The following picture shows incorrect
usage of a TCS circuit when only one of the contacts is used.

615 series 577

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

A070972 V3 EN

Figure 310: Incorrect connection of trip-circuit supervision

A connection of three protection IEDs with a double pole trip circuit is shown in
the following figure. Only the IED R3 has an internal TCS circuit. In order to test
the operation of the IED R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip
contact of the IED R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower
contact is still connected. When the IED R2 operates, the coil current starts to flow
through the internal resistor of the IED R3 and the resistor burns immediately. As
proven with the previous examples, both trip contacts must operate together.
Attention should also be paid for correct usage of the trip-circuit supervision while,
for example, testing the IED.

578 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

A070974 V3 EN

Figure 311: Incorrect testing of IEDs

6.1.6 Signals
Table 497: TCSSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 498: TCSSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output

6.1.7 Settings
Table 499: TCSSCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operate delay time 20...300000 ms 1 3000 Operate delay time
Reset delay time 20...60000 ms 1 1000 Reset delay time

615 series 579

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

6.1.8 Monitored data

Table 500: TCSSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TCSSCBR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

6.2 Current circuit supervision CCRDIF

6.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCRDIF MCS 3I MCS 3I

6.2.2 Function block

GUID-7695BECB-3520-4932-9429-9A552171C0CA V1 EN

Figure 312: Function block

6.2.3 Functionality
The current circuit supervision function CCRDIF is used for monitoring current
transformer secondary circuits.

CCRDIF calculates internally the sum of phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and
compares the sum against the measured single reference current (I_REF). The
reference current must originate from other three-phase CT cores than the phase
currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and it is to be externally summated, that is, outside the
IED.

CCRDIF detects a fault in the measurement circuit and issues an alarm or blocks
the protection functions to avoid unwanted tripping.

It must be remembered that the blocking of protection functions at an occurring

open CT circuit means that the situation remains unchanged and extremely high
voltages stress the secondary circuit.

580 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

6.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of current circuit supervision can be described by using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-A4F2DBEE-938F-4961-9DAD-977151DDBA13 V1 EN

Figure 313: Functional module diagram

Differential current monitoring

Differential current monitoring supervises the difference between the summed
phase currents I_A, I_B and I_C and the reference current I_REF.

The current operating characteristics can be selected with the Start value setting.
When the highest phase current is less than 1.0 xIn, the differential current limit is
defined with Start value. When the highest phase current is more than 1.0 xIn, the
differential current limit is calculated with the formula:
MAX ( I _ A, I _ B, I _ C ) × Startvalue
GUID-A0C500CA-4A1A-44AA-AC14-4540676DD8CB V2 EN (Equation 77)

The differential current is limited to 1.0 xIn.

615 series 581

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

GUID-DC279F84-19B8-4FCB-A79A-2461C047F1B2 V1 EN

Figure 314: CCRDIF operating characteristics

When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region, the FAIL output is
activated.

The function is internally blocked if any phase current is higher than the set Max
operate current. When the internal blocking activates, the FAIL output is
deactivated immediately. The internal blocking is used for avoiding false operation
during a fault situation when the current transformers are saturated due to high
fault currents.

The value of the differential current is available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through other communication tools. The value is calculated with the
formula:

I _ DIFF = I _ A + I _ B + I _ C − I _ REF
GUID-9CC931FA-0637-4FF8-85D4-6F461BD996A9 V2 EN (Equation 78)

The Start value setting is given in units of xIn of the phase current transformer. The
possible difference in the phase and reference current transformer ratios is
internally compensated by scaling I_REF with the value derived from the Primary
current setting values. These setting parameters can be found in the Basic functions
section.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the FAIL output immediately.

582 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

Timer
The timer is activated with the FAIL signal. The ALARM output is activated after a
fixed 200 ms delay. FAIL needs to be active during the delay.

When the internal blocking is activated, the FAIL output is deactivated

immediately. The ALARM output is deactivated after a fixed 3 s delay, and the
FAIL is deactivated.

The deactivation happens only when the highest phase current is

more than 5 percent of the nominal current (0.05 xIn).

When the line is de-energized, the deactivation of the ALARM output is prevented.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output.

6.2.5 Application
Open or short-circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation in
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets
of CTs or CT cores measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable
current circuit supervision can be arranged by comparing the currents from the two
sets. When an error in any CT circuit is detected, the protection functions
concerned can be blocked and an alarm given.

In case of high currents, the unequal transient saturation of CT cores with a

different remanence or saturation factor can result in differences in the secondary
currents from the two CT cores. An unwanted blocking of protection functions
during the transient stage must then be avoided.

The supervision function must be sensitive and have a short operation time to
prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case
of faulty CT secondary circuits.

Open CT circuits create extremely high voltages in the circuits,

which may damage the insulation and cause further problems. This
must be taken into consideration especially when the protection
functions are blocked.

When the reference current is not connected to the IED, the

function should be turned off. Otherwise, the FAIL output is
activated when unbalance occurs in the phase currents even if there
was nothing wrong with the measurement circuit.

615 series 583

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

Reference current measured with core-balanced current transformer

CCRDIF compares the sum of phase currents to the current measured with the core-
balanced CT.

GUID-88FC46C8-8D14-45DE-9E36-E517EA3886AA V1 EN

Figure 315: Connection diagram for reference current measurement with core-
balanced current transformer

Current measurement with two independent three-phase sets of CT

cores
Figure 316 and Figure 317 show diagrams of connections where the reference
current is measured with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores.

584 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

GUID-8DC3B17A-13FE-4E38-85C6-A228BC03206B V1 EN

Figure 316: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of
three-phase current transformer protection cores

When using the measurement core for reference current

measurement, it should be noted that the saturation level of the
measurement core is much lower than with the protection core. This
should be taken into account when setting the current circuit
supervision function.

615 series 585

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

GUID-C5A6BB27-36F9-4652-A5E4-E3D32CFEA77B V1 EN

Figure 317: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of
three-phase current transformer cores (protection and
measurement)

Example of incorrect connection

The currents must be measured with two independent cores, that is, the phase
currents must be measured with a different core than the reference current. A
connection diagram shows an example of a case where the phase currents and the
reference currents are measured from the same core.

586 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

GUID-BBF3E23F-7CE4-43A3-8986-5AACA0433235 V1 EN

Figure 318: Example of incorrect reference current connection

6.2.6 Signals
Table 501: CCRDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I_REF SIGNAL 0 Reference current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 502: CCRDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Fail output
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output

615 series 587

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

6.2.7 Settings
Table 503: CCRDIF Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation On / Off
5=off
Start value 0.05...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate current differential level
Max operate current 1.00...5.00 xIn 0.01 1.50 Block of the function at high phase current

6.2.8 Monitored data

Table 504: CCRDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IDIFF FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Differential current
CCRDIF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

6.2.9 Technical data

Table 505: CCRDIF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time1) < 30 ms

1) Including the delay of the output contact

6.3 Protection communication supervision PCSRTPC

6.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Protection communication supervision PCSRTPC PCS PCS

588 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

6.3.2 Function block

GUID-8732CEA2-358D-441A-B5BB-B2DC9E36E4A4 V1 EN

Figure 319: Function block

6.3.3 Functionality
The protection communication supervision function PCSRTPC monitors the
protection communication channel. PCSRTPC blocks the line differential
protection functions when interference in the protection communication channel is
detected. The blocking takes place automatically for the LNPLDF and BSTGGIO
functions which are dependent on the continuous availability of the protection
communication channel.

The protection communication channel is continuously monitored by PCSRTPC.

The function detects missing or delayed protection telegrams. Protection telegrams
are used for transferring the sampled analog and other protection related data.
Missing or delayed protection telegrams can jeopardize the demand operate speed
of the differential protection.

When a short-term interference is detected in the protection communication

channel, the function issues a warning and the line differential functions are
automatically internally blocked. PCSRTPC reacts fast for the protection
communication interferences. The blocking takes place at the latest when a
communication interruption lasting for two fundamental network periods is
detected. When a severe and long lasting interference or total interruption in the
protection communication channel is detected, an alarm is issued (after a five-
second delay). The protection communication supervision quality status is
exchanged continuously online by the local and remote PCSRTPC instances. This
ensures that both local and remote ends protection blocking is issued coordinately.
This further enhances the security of the line differential protection by forcing both
line end IEDs to the same blocking state during a protection communication
interference, even in cases where the interference is detected with only one line end
IED. There is also the Reset delay time settings parameter available which is used
for changing the required interference-free time before releasing the line-
differential protection back in operation after a blocking due to an interference in
communication.

615 series 589

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

6.3.4 Operation principle

The operation of protection communication supervision can be described by using
a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-FE089DD8-D0A0-4D3B-9287-48B11ADBAC25 V1 EN

Figure 320: Functional module diagram

Communication supervision
The protection communication is supervised because the differential calculation is
dependent on the refreshing of new analog phasor samples from the remote
terminal within the protection telegram. The new protection telegram also updates
the status of the binary signals sent by the remote terminal. The calculation of the
differential current is based on comparing the remote and local terminal measured
current samples. It is therefore essential that the protection communication
telegrams are supervised and the result of the sample latency calculation can be
used further in the differential current calculation. When the communication is able
to receive telegrams correctly from the remote end via the communication media,
the communication is assumed to be operating correctly and the COMM output is
kept active.

Communication interference detector

The communication interference detector is continuously measuring and observing
the sample latency of the protection telegrams. This value is also available as
monitored data. The function provides three output signals of which only the
corresponding one is active at a time depending on if the protection communication
supervision is in OK, WARNING or ALARM. The OK state indicates the correct
operation of the protection. The WARNING state indicates that the protection is
internally blocked due to detected interference. The WARNING state is switched to
ALARM if the interference lasts for a longer period. The protection communication
supervision can sometimes be in the WAITING state. This state indicates that the
terminal is waiting for the communication to start or restart from the remote end
terminal.

Timer
Once activated with the WARNING signal, the timer has a constant time delay value
of five seconds. If the communication failure exists after the delay, the ALARM
output is activated.

590 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

6.3.5 Application
Communication principle
Analog samples, trip-, start- and user programmable signals are transferred in each
protection telegram and the exchange of these protection telegrams is done eight
times per power system cycle (every 2.5 ms when Fn = 50 Hz).

Master-Master communication arrangement is used in the two-terminal line

differential solution. Current samples are sent from both line ends and the
protection algorithms are also executed on both line ends. The direct-intertrip,
however, ensures that both ends are always operated simultaneously.

Time synchronization
In numerical line differential protection, the current samples from the protections
which are located geographically apart from each other must be time coordinated
so that the current samples from both ends of the protected line can be compared
without introducing irrelevant errors. The time coordination requires an extremely
high accuracy.

As an example, an inaccuracy of 0.1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum

amplitude error of approximately around 3 percent. An inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a
maximum amplitude error of approximately 31 percent. The corresponding figures
for a 60 Hz system are 4 and 38 percent respectively.

In the IED, the time coordination is done with an echo method. The IEDs create
their own time reference between each other so that the system clocks do not need
to synchronize.

The figure shows that in the time synchronization the transmission time to send a
message from station B to station A, T1→T2, and the time to receive a message
from A to B, T4→T5, are measured. The station A IED delay from the sampling to
the start of send, T3→T4, and the local delay from receive to the station B IED
sampling T5→T6 time, are also measured for the station B IED, and vice versa.
This way the time alignment factor for the local and remote samples is achieved.

GUID-2DDF64E2-D635-4783-854A-A62E5EFB7186 V1 EN

Figure 321: Measuring sampling latency

(T2 − T1 ) + (T5 − T4 )
Pd =
2
GUID-0CB3B365-7081-43D4-90F5-91A8082522FE V2 EN (Equation 79)

615 series 591

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

S d = Pd + (T4 − T3 ) + (T6 − T5 )
GUID-2940B36E-3A6C-44E4-BD39-1B117E168829 V2 EN (Equation 80)

The sampling latency Sd is calculated for each telegram on both ends. The
algorithm assumes that the one-way propagation delay Pd is equal for both directions.

The echo method without GPS can be used in telecommunication transmission

networks as long as delay symmetry exists, that is, the sending and receiving
delays are equal.

6.3.6 Signals
Table 506: PCSRTPC Output signals
Name Type Description
OK BOOLEAN Protection communication ok
WARNING BOOLEAN Protection communication warning
ALARM BOOLEAN Protection communication alarm
COMM BOOLEAN Communication detected, active when data is
received

6.3.7 Settings
Table 507: PCSRTPC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reset delay time 100...300000 ms 10 1000 Reset delay time from alarm and
warning into ok state
Alarm count 0...99999 0 Set new alarm count value
Warning count 0...99999 0 Set new warning count value

6.3.8 Monitored data

Table 508: PCSRTPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
HEALTH Enum 1=Ok Communication link
2=Warning health
3=Alarm
-2=Waiting
ALARM_CNT INT32 0...99999 Number of alarms
detected
WARN_CNT INT32 0...99999 Number of warnings
detected
SMPL_LATENCY FLOAT32 0.000...99.999 ms Measured sample
latency
PROPAGTN_DLY FLOAT32 0.000...99.999 ms Measured propagation
delay
Table continues on next page

592 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

RND_TRIP_DLY FLOAT32 0.000...99.999 ms Measured round trip
delay
T_ALARM_CNT Timestamp Time when alarm count
was last changed
T_WARN_CNT Timestamp Time when warning
count was last changed

6.3.9 Technical revision history

Table 509: PCSTRPC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Changes and additions to the monitored data

6.4 Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF

6.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision SEQRFUF FUSEF 60

6.4.2 Function block

GUID-0A336F51-D8FA-4C64-A7FE-7A4270E621E7 V1 EN

Figure 322: Function block

6.4.3 Functionality
The fuse failure supervision function SEQRFUF is used to block the voltage-
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and IED to avoid misoperations of the voltage protection functions.

615 series 593

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

SEQRFUF has two algorithms, a negative sequence-based algorithm and a delta

current and delta voltage algorithm.

A criterion based on the delta current and the delta voltage measurements can be
activated to detect three-phase fuse failures which usually are more associated with
the voltage transformer switching during station operations.

6.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the fuse failure supervision function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

GUID-27E5A90A-6DCB-4545-A33A-F37C02F27A28 V1 EN

Figure 323: Functional module diagram

Negative phase-sequence criterion

A fuse failure based on the negative-sequence criterion is detected if the measured
negative-sequence voltage exceeds the set Neg Seq voltage Lev value and the
measured negative-sequence current is below the set Neg Seq current Lev value.
The detected fuse failure is reported to the decision logic module.

Voltage check
The phase voltage magnitude is checked when deciding whether the fuse failure is
a three, two or a single-phase fault.

594 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

The module makes a phase-specific comparison between each voltage input and
the Seal in voltage setting. If the input voltage is lower than the setting, the
corresponding phase is reported to the decision logic module.

Current and voltage delta criterion

The delta function can be activated by setting the Change rate enable parameter to
"True". Once the function is activated, it operates in parallel with the negative
sequence-based algorithm. The current and voltage are continuously measured in
all three phases to calculate:
• Change of voltage dU/dt
• Change of current dI/dt

The calculated delta quantities are compared to the respective set values of the
Current change rate and Voltage change rate settings.

The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a
sufficient negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in
the current amplitude in each phase separately. This is performed when the circuit
breaker is closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is connected to the
CB_CLOSED input.

There are two conditions for activating the current and voltage delta function.
• The magnitude of dU/dt exceeds the corresponding value of the Voltage
change rate setting and magnitude of dI/dt is below the value of the Current
change rate setting in any phase at the same time due to the closure of the
circuit breaker (CB_CLOSED = TRUE).
• The magnitude of dU/dt exceeds the value of the Voltage change rate setting
and the magnitude of dI/dt is below the Current change rate setting in any
phase at the same time and the magnitude of the phase current in the same
phase exceeds the Min Op current delta setting.

The first condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in any phase at the
same time as the circuit breaker is closed. Opening the circuit breaker at one end
and energizing the line from the other end onto a fault could lead to an improper
operation of SEQRFUF with an open breaker. If this is considered to be an
important disadvantage, the CB_CLOSED input is to be connected to FALSE. In
this way only the second criterion can activate the delta function.

The second condition requires the delta criterion to be fulfilled in one phase
together with a high current for the same phase. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of a false fuse failure detection. If the current on the
protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by the fuse failure) is
not followed by a current change and a false fuse failure can occur. To prevent this,
the minimum phase current criterion is checked.

The fuse failure detection is active until the voltages return above the Min Op
voltage delta setting. If a voltage in a phase is below the Min Op voltage delta

615 series 595

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

setting, a new fuse failure detection for that phase is not possible until the voltage
returns above the setting value.

Decision logic
The fuse failure detection outputs FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH are controlled
according to the detection criteria or external signals.

Table 510: Fuse failure output control

Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response
Negative-sequence criterion If a fuse failure is detected based on the
negative sequence criterion, the FUSEF_U output
is activated.
If the fuse failure detection is active for more
than five seconds and at the same time all the
phase voltage values are below the set value of
the Seal in voltage setting with Enable seal in
turned to "True", the function activates the
FUSE_3PH output signal.

The FUSEF_U output signal is also activated if all

the phase voltages are above the Seal in voltage
setting for more than 60 seconds and at the
same time the negative sequence voltage is
above Neg Seq voltage Lev for more than 5
seconds, all the phase currents are below the
Current dead Lin Val setting and the circuit
breaker is closed, that is,CB_CLOSED is TRUE.

Current and voltage delta function criterion If the current and voltage delta criterion detects a
fuse failure condition, but all the voltages are not
below the Seal in voltage setting, only the
FUSEF_U output is activated.

If the fuse failure detection is active for more

than five seconds and at the same time all the
phase voltage values are below the set value of
the Seal in voltage setting with Enable seal in
turned to "True", the function activates the
FUSE_3PH output signal.

External fuse failure detection The MINCB_OPEN input signal is supposed to be

connected through an IED binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit
breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.The
MINCB_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output
signal to block all the voltage-related functions
when MCB is in the open state.
The DISCON_OPEN input signal is supposed to
be connected through an IED binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The
DISCON_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output
signal to block the voltage-related functions
when the line disconnector is in the open state.

It is recommended to always set Enable seal in to "True". This

secures that the blocked protection functions remain blocked until
normal voltage conditions are restored if the fuse failure has been

596 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

active for 5 seconds, that is, the fuse failure outputs are deactivated
when the normal voltage conditions are restored.

The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates both FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH
outputs.

6.4.5 Application
Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the
IED point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits
between the voltage transformers and the IED.

A fault in the voltage-measuring circuit is referred to as a fuse failure. This term is

misleading since a blown fuse is just one of the many possible reasons for a broken
circuit. Since incorrectly measured voltage can result in a faulty operation of some
of the protection functions, it is important to detect the fuse failures. A fast fuse
failure detection is one of the means to block voltage-based functions before they
operate.

GUID-FA649B6A-B51E-47E2-8E37-EBA9CDEB2BF5 V1 EN

Figure 324: Fault in a circuit from the voltage transformer to the IED

A fuse failure occurs due to blown fuses, broken wires or intended substation
operations. The negative sequence component-based function can be used to detect
different types of single-phase or two-phase fuse failures. However, at least one of
the three circuits from the voltage transformers must not be broken. The supporting
delta-based function can also detect a fuse failure due to three-phase interruptions.

In the negative sequence component-based part of the function, a fuse failure is

detected by comparing the calculated value of the negative sequence component
voltage to the negative sequence component current. The sequence entities are
calculated from the measured current and voltage data for all three phases. The
purpose of this function is to block voltage-dependent functions when a fuse failure

615 series 597

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

is detected. Since the voltage dependence differs between these functions,

SEQRFUF has two outputs for this purpose.

6.4.6 Signals
Table 511: SEQRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current

U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage

U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage
U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function

CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Active when circuit breaker is closed
DISCON_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when line disconnector is open
MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when external MCB opens protected
voltage circuit

Table 512: SEQRFUF Output signals

Name Type Description
FUSEF_3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
FUSEF_U BOOLEAN General start of function

6.4.7 Settings
Table 513: SEQRFUF Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Neg Seq current Lev 0.03...0.20 xIn 0.01 0.03 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element
Neg Seq voltage Lev 0.03...0.20 xUn 0.01 0.10 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element
Current change rate 0.01...0.50 xIn 0.01 0.15 Operate level of change in phase current
Voltage change rate 0.50...0.90 xUn 0.01 0.60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
Change rate enable 0=False 0=False Enabling operation of change based
1=True function
Min Op voltage delta 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.70 Minimum operate level of phase voltage
for delta calculation
Table continues on next page

598 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Min Op current delta 0.01...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.10 Minimum operate level of phase current
for delta calculation
Seal in voltage 0.01...1.00 xUn 0.01 0.70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage
Enable seal in 0=False 0=False Enabling seal in functionality
1=True
Current dead Lin Val 0.05...1.00 xIn 0.01 0.05 Operate level for open phase current
detection

6.4.8 Monitored data

Table 514: SEQRFUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SEQRFUF Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

6.4.9 Technical data

Table 515: SEQRFUF Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time1)
• NPS function UFault = 1.1 x set Neg < 33 ms
Seq voltage Lev
UFault = 5.0 x set Neg < 18 ms
Seq voltage Lev
• Delta function ΔU = 1.1 x set Voltage < 30 ms
change rate
ΔU = 2.0 x set Voltage < 24 ms
change rate

1) Includes the delay of the signal output contact, fn = 50 Hz, fault voltage with nominal frequency
injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements

6.5 Operation time counter MDSOPT

6.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM
devices

615 series 599

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

6.5.2 Function block

GUID-C20AF735-FF25-411B-9EA6-11D595484613 V3 EN

Figure 325: Function block

6.5.3 Functionality
The generic runtime counter function MDSOPT calculates and presents the
accumulated operation time of a machine or device as the output. The unit of time
for accumulation is hour. The function generates a warning and an alarm when the
accumulated operation time exceeds the set limits. It utilizes a binary input to
indicate the active operation condition.

The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service
on the equipment like motors. It indicates the use of the machine and hence the
mechanical wear and tear. Generally, the equipment manufacturers provide a
maintenance schedule based on the number of hours of service.

6.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the generic runtime counter for machines and devices can be
described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.

GUID-6BE6D1E3-F3FB-45D9-8D6F-A44752C1477C V1 EN

Figure 326: Functional module diagram

Operation time counter

This module counts the operation time. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the count is
continuously added to the time duration until it is deactivated. At any time the
OPR_TIME output is the total duration for which POS_ACTIVE is active. The unit
of time duration count for OPR_TIME is hour. The value is available through the
Monitored data view.

The OPR_TIME output is a continuously increasing value and it is stored in a non-

volatile memory. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the OPR_TIME count starts

600 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

increasing from the previous value. The count of OPR_TIME saturates at the final
value of 299999, that is, no further increment is possible. The activation of RESET
can reset the count to the Initial value setting.

Limit Supervision
This module compares the motor run-time count to the set values of Warning value
and Alarm value to generate the WARNING and ALARM outputs respectively when
the counts exceed the levels.

The activation of the WARNING and ALARM outputs depends on the Operating time
mode setting. Both WARNING and ALARM occur immediately after the conditions
are met if Operating time mode is set to “Immediate”. If Operating time mode is set
to “Timed Warn”, WARNING is activated within the next 24 hours at the time of the
day set using the Operating time hour setting. If Operating time mode is set to
“Timed Warn Alm”, the WARNING and ALARM outputs are activated at the time of
day set using Operating time hour.

The Operating time hour setting is used to set the hour of day in
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The setting has to be adjusted
according to the local time and local daylight-saving time.

The function contains a blocking functionality. Activation of the BLOCK input

blocks both WARNING and ALARM.

6.5.5 Application
The machine operating time since commissioning indicates the use of the machine.
For example, the mechanical wear and lubrication requirement for the shaft bearing
of the motors depend on the use hours.

If some motor is used for long duration runs, it might require frequent servicing,
while for a motor that is not used regularly the maintenance and service are
scheduled less frequently. The accumulated operating time of a motor together with
the appropriate settings for warning can be utilized to trigger the condition based
maintenance of the motor.

The operating time counter combined with the subsequent reset of the operating-
time count can be used to monitor the motor's run time for a single run.

Both the long term accumulated operating time and the short term single run
duration provide valuable information about the condition of the machine and
device. The information can be co-related to other process data to provide
diagnoses for the process where the machine or device is applied.

615 series 601

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

6.5.6 Signals
Table 516: MDSOPT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=False When active indicates the equipment is running
RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Resets the accumulated operation time to initial
value

Table 517: MDSOPT Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm accumulated operation time exceeds Alarm
value
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning accumulated operation time exceeds
Warning value

6.5.7 Settings
Table 518: MDSOPT Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Warning value 0...299999 h 1 8000 Warning value for operation time
supervision
Alarm value 0...299999 h 1 10000 Alarm value for operation time supervision
Initial value 0...299999 h 1 0 Initial value for operation time supervision
Operating time hour 0...23 h 1 0 Time of day when alarm and warning will
occur
Operating time mode 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Operating time mode for warning and
2=Timed Warn alarm
3=Timed Warn Alm

6.5.8 Monitored data

Table 519: MDSOPT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MDSOPT Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off
OPR_TIME INT32 0...299999 h Total operation time in
hours

602 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

6.5.9 Technical data

Table 520: MDSOPT Technical data
Description Value
Motor run-time measurement accuracy1) ±0.5%

1) Of the reading, for a stand-alone IED, without time synchronization.

6.6 Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR

6.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Uncorresponding position startup UPSCBR UPSS UPSM

6.6.2 Function block

GUID-9ECE8940-32C4-46F7-84E7-CB129B93B080-CN V2 EN

Figure 327: Function block

6.6.3 Functionality
The uncorresponding position startup function UPSCBR detects circuit breaker
openings in an unknown situation. An unexpected breaker opening can be caused
by, for example, internal mechanical malfunction.

UPSCBR can be used independently. The function output is activated when

detecting a circuit breaker opening in an unknown situation.

In most cases, the function module is used together with the AR function module.
The operate output signal can be one of the startup signals of the AR function.

6.6.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

615 series 603

Technical Manual
Section 6 1YHT530004D05 D
Supervision functions

The operation of the uncorresponding position startup function can be described

using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

CB_POSOPEN
CB_POSCLOSE

Signal power
SI_PWR_ON Operate logic OPERATE
supply check

Protection
CB_OPEN_CMD activation
check

GUID-2BEA9587-68B3-4B76-BAA5-D53DAA8A0D97 V2 EN

Figure 328: Functional module diagram

Signal power supply check

This module is used for signal power supply supervision. The activation of the
SI_PWR_ON input enables the Operate logic module after the value of the CB
power on delay time setting has elapsed.

Protection activation check

The main purpose of the module is to disable the Operate logic module when the
CB open command has been deployed by another function, for example, a
protection or control function. The activation of the CB_OPEN_CMD input disables
the Operate logic module immediately. The duration of the disabling time can be
set with the CB open hold delay setting.

Operate logic
The OPERATE output of this module can be used for closing the circuit breaker if it
is opened for an unknown reason. The OPERATE output is activated immediately
after the CB_POSOPEN input becomes active and CB_POSCLOSE inactive. The
pulse length for the OPERATE output signal can be set with the Operate pulse time
setting.

The module is disabled if the signal power supply is faulty

(SI_PWR_ON = FALSE) or the open command is sent to the
breaker (CB_OPEN_CMD = TRUE).

604 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 6
Supervision functions

6.6.5 Application
The uncorresponding circuit breaker position means that the actual position of the
circuit breaker’s control switch is unmatched with the real position of the circuit
breaker. In a normal situation, the function is used in cooperation with the
autoreclose function (DARREC). The operate signal can start the autoreclosing
when detecting that the circuit breaker has opened in an unknown situation. If the
function is used as a stand-alone function when an unknown circuit breaker open is
detected, the function output can be used as an information indication for the
supervision station.

6.6.6 Signals
Table 521: UPSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CB_OPEN_CMD BOOLEAN 0=False CB open command, common
CB_POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB position closed
CB_POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False CB position open
SI_PWR_ON BOOLEAN 0=False Signal power on

Table 522: UPSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate

6.6.7 Settings
Table 523: UPSCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
CB open hold delay 300...500 ms 1 300 CB open hold delay time
Operate pulse time 100...20000 ms 1 100 Operate pulse time
Signal pwr on delay 300...500 ms 1 300 Signal power on delay time

6.6.8 Technical data

Table 524: UPSCBR Technical data

Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

615 series 605

Technical Manual
606
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Section 7 Condition monitoring functions

7.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM CBCM

7.1.2 Function block

A070795 V2 EN

Figure 329: Function block

7.1.3 Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor
different parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when
the number of operations has reached a predefined value. The energy is calculated
from the measured input currents as a sum of Iyt values. Alarms are generated
when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function

outputs, if desired.

615 series 607

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.4 Operation principle

The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and
monitoring subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the
Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The
operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to “Off”.

The operation of the functions can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A071103 V3 EN

Figure 330: Functional module diagram

608 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.4.1 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position. The
operation of the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module
diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A071104 V3 EN

Figure 331: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

This module compares the three phase currents to the setting Acc stop current. If
the current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about the phase is reported
to the contact position indicator module.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low,
the POSOPEN input is high and the current is zero. The circuit breaker is closed
when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is
in the intermediate position if both the auxiliary contacts have the same value, that
is, both are in the logical level "0", or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is
low and the POSOPEN input is high, but the current is not zero.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS,
INTERMPOS and CLOSEPOS for open, intermediate and closed position
respectively.

7.1.4.2 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if

the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time.

The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 609

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

A071105 V2 EN

Figure 332: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm
for circuit breaker operation monitoring

Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained
inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done
by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The inactive days INA_DAYS is available in the monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days with the Ini inactive days parameter.

Alarm limit check

When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the Inactive Alm days
setting, the MON_ALM alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is
activated can be set with the Inactive Alm hours parameter as coordinates of UTC.
The alarm signal MON_ALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.

7.1.4.3 Breaker contact travel time

The breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time
for the closing and opening operation. The operation of the breaker contact travel
time measurement can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

A071106 V3 EN

Figure 333: Functional module diagram for breaker contact travel time

Traveling time calculator

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between auxiliary
contacts' state change. The open travel time is measured between the opening of
the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary
contact. Travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN
auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.

610 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

A071107 V1 EN

Figure 334: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. Therefore, to incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor
needs to be added with topen to get the actual opening time. This factor is added
with the Opening time Cor (=t1+t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by
adding the value set with the Closing time Cor (t3+t4) setting to the measured
closing time.

The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP and the closing travel time
T_TRV_CL are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools
via communications.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set with the Open
alarm time setting, the TRV_T_OP_ALM output is activated. Respectively, when
the measured closing travel time is longer than the value set with the Close alarm
time setting, the TRV_T_CL_ALM output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRV_T_CL_ALM and TRV_T_OP_ALM alarm

signals by activating the BLOCK input.

7.1.4.4 Operation counter

The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation

cycles. The opening and closing operations are both included in one operation
cycle. The operation counter value is updated after each opening operation.

The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 611

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

A071108 V2 EN

Figure 335: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of
the binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NO_OPR is available in the monitored data view on the
LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Counter initial Val
parameter and by setting the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from
WHMI or LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The OPR_ALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations
exceeds the value set with the Alarm Op number threshold setting. However, if the
number of operations increases further and exceeds the limit value set with the
Lockout Op number setting, the OPR_LO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPR_LO and OPR_ALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input
is activated.

7.1.4.5 Accumulation of Iyt

Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.

The operation of the module can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A071109 V2 EN

Figure 336: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy

and alarm

612 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Accumulated energy calculator

This module calculates the accumulated energy Iyt [(kA)ys]. The factor y is set with
the Current exponent setting.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input opening events. It ends when
the RMS current becomes lower than the Acc stop current setting value.

A071110 V1 EN

Figure 337: Significance of the Difference Cor time setting

The Difference Cor time setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to
accumulate the energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is
positive, the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and
when the delay is equal to the value set with the Difference Cor time setting. When
the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time
before the auxiliary contact opens.

The accumulated energy outputs IPOW_A (_B, _C) are available in the
monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The
values can be reset by setting the parameter CB accum. currents power setting to
true in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.

Alarm limit check

The IPOW_ALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value
set with the Alm Acc currents Pwr threshold setting. However, when the energy
exceeds the limit value set with the LO Acc currents Pwr threshold setting, the
IPOW_LO output is activated.

The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.

7.1.4.6 Remaining life of circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to
wearing. The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the
remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve

615 series 613

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decremented at least with one
when the circuit breaker is opened.

The operation of the remaining life of the circuit breaker subfunction can be
described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.

A071111 V2 EN

Figure 338: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker life estimator

The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit
breaker. If the tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the
Rated Op current setting, the remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one
operation. If the tripping current is more than the rated fault current set with the
Rated fault current setting, the possible operations are zero. The remaining life of
the tripping current in between these two values is calculated based on the trip
curve given by the manufacturer. The Op number rated and Op number fault
parameters set the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated
current and at the rated fault current, respectively.

The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as
a monitored data value CB_LIFE_A (_B,_C). The values can be cleared by
setting the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.

Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of any phase drops below the Life alarm level threshold
setting, the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CB_LIFE_ALM is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CB_LIFE_ALM alarm signal by activating the

binary input BLOCK. The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken
into use by writing the value to the Initial CB Rmn life parameter and resetting the
value via the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI.

614 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.4.7 Circuit breaker spring-charged indication

The circuit breaker spring-charged indication subfunction calculates the spring

charging time.

The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A071112 V3 EN

Figure 339: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring-charged

indication and alarm

Spring charge time measurement

Two binary inputs, SPR_CHR_ST and SPR_CHR, indicate spring charging started
and spring charged, respectively. The spring-charging time is calculated from the
difference of these two signal timings.

The spring charging time T_SPR_CHR is available in the monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communications.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the Spring
charge time setting, the subfunction generates the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm signal by activating the BLOCK

binary input.

7.1.4.8 Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber.

The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 615

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

A071113 V2 EN

Figure 340: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm

The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals PRES_LO_IN and
PRES_ALM_IN.

Timer 1
When the PRES_ALM_IN binary input is activated, the PRES_ALM alarm is
activated after a time delay set with the Pressure alarm time setting. The
PRES_ALM alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.

Timer 2
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRES_LO_IN binary input
becomes high, activating the lockout alarm PRES_LO after a time delay set with
the Pres lockout time setting. The PRES_LO alarm can be blocked by activating
the BLOCK input.

7.1.5 Application
SSCBR includes different metering and monitoring subfunctions.

Circuit breaker status

Circuit breaker status monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether
the breaker is in an open, closed or intermediate position.

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is to indicate that the
circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time. The function calculates the
number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the
same open or closed state. There is also the possibility to set an initial inactive day.

Breaker contact travel time

High traveling times indicate the need for the maintenance of the circuit breaker
mechanism. Therefore, detecting excessive traveling time is needed. During the
opening cycle operation, the main contact starts opening. The auxiliary contact A
opens, the auxiliary contact B closes and the main contact reaches its opening
position. During the closing cycle, the first main contact starts closing. The
auxiliary contact B opens, the auxiliary contact A closes and the main contact

616 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

reaches its closed position. The travel times are calculated based on the state
changes of the auxiliary contacts and the adding correction factor to consider the
time difference of the main contact's and the auxiliary contact's position change.

Operation counter
Routine maintenance of the breaker, such as lubricating breaker mechanism, is
generally based on a number of operations. A suitable threshold setting to raise an
alarm when the number of operation cycle exceeds the set limit helps preventive
maintenance. This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for
dielectric testing in case of an oil circuit breaker.

The change of state can be detected from the binary input of the auxiliary contact.
There is a possibility to set an initial value for the counter which can be used to
initialize this functionality after a period of operation or in case of refurbished
primary equipment.

Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of Iyt calculates the accumulated energy ΣIyt, where the factor y is
known as the current exponent. The factor y depends on the type of the circuit
breaker. For oil circuit breakers, the factor y is normally 2. In case of a high-
voltage system, the factor y can be 1.4...1.5.

Remaining life of the breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to
wearing. The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the
remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve
provided by the manufacturer.

Example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker

615 series 617

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

A071114 V3 EN

Figure 341: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter

Nr the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker

Ia the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker

Calculation of Directional Coef

The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula:

618 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

B
log  
Directional Coef =  A  = −2.2609
If 
log  
 Ir 
A070794 V2 EN (Equation 81)

Ir Rated operating current = 630 A

If Rated fault current = 16 kA

A Op number rated = 30000

B Op number fault = 20

Calculation for estimating the remaining life

Figure 341 shows that there are 30,000 possible operations at the rated operating
current of 630 A and 20 operations at the rated fault current 16 kA. Therefore, if
the tripping current is 10 kA, one operation at 10 kA is equivalent to
30,000/60=500 operations at the rated current. It is also assumed that prior to this
tripping, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is 15,000 operations. Therefore,
after one operation of 10 kA, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is
15,000-500=14,500 at the rated operating current.

Spring-charged indication
For normal operation of the circuit breaker, the circuit breaker spring should be
charged within a specified time. Therefore, detecting long spring-charging time
indicates that it is time for the circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the
spring-charging time can be used as a service value.

Gas pressure supervision

The gas pressure supervision monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber.
When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the circuit
breaker operations are locked. A binary input is available based on the pressure
levels in the function, and alarms are generated based on these inputs.

7.1.6 Signals
Table 525: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closeposition of apparatus from I/O
Table continues on next page

615 series 619

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

Name Type Default Description

PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure alarm input
PRES_LO_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure input for lockout indication
SPR_CHR_ST BOOLEAN 0=False CB spring charging started input
SPR_CHR BOOLEAN 0=False CB spring charged input
RST_IPOW BOOLEAN 0=False Reset accumulation energy
RST_CB_WEAR BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for CB remaining life and operation
counter
RST_TRV_T BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for CB closing and opening travel times
RST_SPR_T BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring

Table 526: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
OPR_ALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPR_LO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
IPOW_ALM BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded alarm
limit
IPOW_LO BOOLEAN Accumulated currents power (Iyt),exceeded
lockout limit
CB_LIFE_ALM BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB exceeded alarm limit
MON_ALM BOOLEAN CB &apos;not operated for long time&apos; alarm
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
INVALIDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in invalid position (not positively open or
closed)
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position

7.1.7 Settings
Table 527: SSCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Acc stop current 5.00...500.00 A 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which engy
acm stops
Open alarm time 0...200 ms 1 40 Alarm level setting for open travel time in
ms
Close alarm time 0...200 ms 1 40 Alarm level Setting for close travel time
in ms
Table continues on next page

620 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Opening time Cor 0...100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for open travel time in ms
Closing time Cor 0...100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time
in ms
Spring charge time 0...60000 ms 10 1000 Setting of alarm for spring charging time
of CB in ms
Counter initial Val 0...9999 1 0 The operation numbers counter
initialization value
Alarm Op number 0...9999 1 200 Alarm limit for number of operations
Lockout Op number 0...9999 1 300 Lock out limit for number of operations
Current exponent 0.00...2.00 0.01 2.00 Current exponent setting for energy
calculation
Difference Cor time -10...10 ms 1 5 Corr. factor for time dif in aux. and main
contacts open time
Alm Acc currents Pwr 0.00...20000.00 0.01 2500.00 Setting of alarm level for accumulated
currents power
LO Acc currents Pwr 0.00...20000.00 0.01 2500.00 Lockout limit setting for accumulated
currents power
Ini Acc currents Pwr 0.00...20000.00 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accumulation energy (Iyt)
Directional Coef -3.00...-0.50 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
Initial CB Rmn life 0...9999 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life
Rated Op current 100.00...5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
Rated fault current 500.00...75000.00 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
Op number rated 1...99999 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
Op number fault 1...10000 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
Life alarm level 0...99999 1 500 Alarm level for CB remaining life
Pressure alarm time 0...60000 ms 1 10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm in ms
Pres lockout time 0...60000 ms 10 10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout in ms
Inactive Alm days 0...9999 1 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days
counter
Ini inactive days 0...9999 1 0 Initial value of the inactive days counter
Inactive Alm hours 0...23 h 1 0 Alarm time of the inactive days counter
in hours

615 series 621

Technical Manual
Section 7 1YHT530004D05 D
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.8 Monitored data

Table 528: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
T_TRV_OP FLOAT32 0...60000 ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
T_TRV_CL FLOAT32 0...60000 ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
T_SPR_CHR FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 s The charging time of the
CB spring
NO_OPR INT32 0...99999 Number of CB operation
cycle
INA_DAYS INT32 0...9999 The number of days CB
has been inactive
CB_LIFE_A INT32 -9999...9999 CB Remaining life phase
A
CB_LIFE_B INT32 -9999...9999 CB Remaining life phase
B
CB_LIFE_C INT32 -9999...9999 CB Remaining life phase
C
IPOW_A FLOAT32 0.000...30000.00 Accumulated currents
0 power (Iyt), phase A
IPOW_B FLOAT32 0.000...30000.00 Accumulated currents
0 power (Iyt), phase B
IPOW_C FLOAT32 0.000...30000.00 Accumulated currents
0 power (Iyt), phase C
SSCBR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

7.1.9 Technical data

Table 529: SSCBR Technical data
Characteristic Value
Current measuring accuracy ±1.5% or ±0.002 x In
(at currents in the range of 0.1…10 x In)
±5.0%
(at currents in the range of 10…40 x In)

Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

Travelling time measurement +10 ms / -0 ms

622 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 7
Condition monitoring functions

7.1.10 Technical revision history

Table 530: SSCBR Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added the possibility to reset spring charge time
and breaker travel times
C Removed the DIFTRVTOPALM and
DIFTRVTCLALM outputs and the corresponding
Open Dif alarm time and Close Dif alarm time
setting parameters
D The Operation cycle setting parameter renamed
to Initial CB Rmn life. The IPOW_A (_B, _C)
range changed.

615 series 623

Technical Manual
624
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Section 8 Measurement functions

8.1 Basic measurements

8.1.1 Functions
The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU is used for monitoring
and metering the phase currents of the power system.For variant J, the measured
phase currents are sampled through dedicated current channels.

The three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU is used for monitoring

and metering the phase-to-phase voltages of the power system. The phase-to-earth
voltages are also available in VMMXU.

The residual current measurement function RESCMMXU is used for monitoring

and metering the residual current of the power system.

The residual voltage measurement function RESVMMXU is used for monitoring

and metering the residual voltage of the power system.

The sequence current measurement CSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering
the phase sequence currents.

The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI is used for monitoring and metering
the phase sequence voltages.

The frequency measurement FMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the
power system frequency.

The three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU/MPEMMXU is used

for monitoring and metering the active power P, reactive power Q, apparent power
S, power factor PF and for calculating the accumulated energy separately as
forward active, reverse active, forward reactive and reverse reactive. PEMMXU/
MPEMMXU calculates these quantities with the fundamental frequency phasors,
that is, the DFT values of the measured phase current and phase voltage signals.

The information of the measured quantity is available for the operator both locally
in LHMI and remotely to a network control center with communication.

If the measured data is within parentheses, there are some problems

to express the data.

615 series 625

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.2 Measurement functionality

The functions can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

Some of the measurement functions operate on two alternative measurement

modes: "DFT" and "RMS". The measurement mode is selected with the X
Measurement mode setting. Depending on the measuring function if the
measurement mode cannot be selected, the measuring mode is "DFT".

Demand value calculation

The demand values are calculated separately for each measurement function and
per phase when applicable. The available measurement modes are "Linear" and
"Logarithmic". The "Logarithmic" measurement mode is only effective for phase
current and residual current demand value calculations. The demand value
calculation mode is selected with the setting parameter Configuration/
Measurements/A demand Av mode. The time interval for all demand value
calculations is selected with the setting parameter Configuration/Measurements/
Demand interval.

If the Demand interval setting is set to "15 minutes", for example, the demand
values are updated every quarter of an hour. The demand time interval is
synchronized to the real-time clock of the IED. When the demand time interval or
calculation mode is changed, it initializes the demand value calculation. For the
very first demand value calculation interval, the values are stated as invalid until
the first refresh is available.

The "Linear" calculation mode uses the periodic sliding average calculation of the
measured signal over the demand time interval. A new demand value is obtained
once in a minute, indicating the analog signal demand over the demand time
interval proceeding the update time. The actual rolling demand values are stored in
the memory until the value is updated at the end of the next time interval.

The "Logarithmic" calculation mode uses the periodic calculation using a log10
function over the demand time interval to replicate thermal demand ammeters. The
logarithmic demand calculates a snapshot of the analog signal every 1/15 x demand
time interval.

Each measurement function has its own recorded data values. In IED, these are
found in Monitoring/Recorded data/Measurements. In the technical manual
these are listed in the monitored data section of each measurement function. These
values are periodically updated with the maximum and minimum demand values.
The time stamps are provided for both values.

Value reporting
The measurement functions are capable of reporting new values for network
control center (SCADA system) based on the following functions:

626 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

• Zero-point clamping
• Deadband supervision
• Limit value supervision

In the three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU the

supervision functions are based on the phase-to-phase voltages.
However, the phase-to-earth voltage values are also reported with
the phase-to-phase voltages.

Zero-point clamping
A measured value under the zero-point clamping limit is forced to zero. This
allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The active clamping function
forces both the actual measurement value and the angle value of the measured
signal to zero. In the three-phase or sequence measuring functions, each phase or
sequence component has a separate zero-point clamping function. The zero-value
detection operates so that once the measured value exceeds or falls below the value
of the zero-clamping limit, new values are reported.

Table 531: Zero-point clamping limits

Function Zero-clamping limit
Three-phase current measurement (CMMXU) 1% of nominal (In)
Three-phase voltage measurement (VMMXU) 1% of nominal (Un)
Residual current measurement (RESCMMXU) 1% of nominal (In)
Residual voltage measurement (RESVMMXU) 1% of nominal (Un)
Phase sequence current measurement (CSMSQI) 1% of the nominal (In)
Phase sequence voltage measurement 1% of the nominal (Un)
(VSMSQI)
Three-phase power and energy measurement 1.5% of the nominal (Sn)
(PEMMXU)

When the frequency measurement function FMMXU is unable to

measure the network frequency in the undervoltage situation, the
measured values are set to the nominal and also the quality
information of the data set accordingly. The undervoltage limit is
fixed to 10 percent of the nominal for the frequency measurement.

When the frequency measurement function FMMXU is unable to

measure the network frequency in the undervoltage situation, the
measured values are set to the nominal (50/60 Hz) and also the
quality information of the data set accordingly.

615 series 627

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

Limit value supervision

The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of
X_INST exceeds or falls below the set limits. The measured value has the
corresponding range information X_RANGE and has a value in the range of 0 to 4:

• 0: "normal"
• 1: "high"
• 2: "low"
• 3: "high-high"
• 4: "low-low"

The range information changes and the new values are reported.

GUID-AAAA7367-377C-4743-A2D0-8DD4941C585D V1 EN

Figure 342: Presentation of operating limits

The range information can also be decoded into boolean output signals on some of
the measuring functions and the number of phases required to exceed or undershoot
the limit before activating the outputs and can be set with the Num of phases setting
in the three-phase measurement functions CMMXU and VMMXU. The limit
supervision boolean alarm and warning outputs can be blocked.

Table 532: Settings for limit value supervision

Function Settings for limit value supervision
Three-phase current measurement High limit A high limit
(CMMXU)
Low limit A low limit
High-high limit A high high limit
Low-low limit A low low limit
Table continues on next page

628 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Function Settings for limit value supervision

Three-phase voltage measurement High limit V high limit
(VMMXU)
Low limit V low limit
High-high limit V high high limit
Low-low limit V low low limit
Residual current measurement High limit A high limit res
(RESCMMXU)
Low limit -
High-high limit A Hi high limit res
Low-low limit -
Residual voltage measurement High limit V high limit res
(RESVMMXU)
Low limit -
High-high limit V Hi high limit res
Low-low limit -
Frequency measurement (FMMXU) High limit F high limit
Low limit F low limit
High-high limit F high high limit
Low-low limit F low low limit
Sequence current measurement High limit Ps Seq A high limit, Ng Seq
(CSMSQI) A high limit, Zro A high limit
Low limit Ps Seq A low limit, Ng Seq
A low limit, Zro A low limit
High-high limit Ps Seq A Hi high Lim, Ng
Seq A Hi high Lim, Zro A Hi
high Lim
Low-low limit Ps Seq A low low Lim, Ng
Seq A low low Lim, Zro A
low low Lim
Sequence voltage measurement High limit Ps Seq V high limit, Ng Seq
(VSMSQI) V high limit, Zro V high limit
Low limit Ps Seq V low limit, Ng Seq
V low limit, Zro V low limit
High-high limit Ps Seq V Hi high Lim, Ng
Seq V Hi high Lim, Zro V Hi
high Lim
Low-low limit Ps Seq V low low Lim, Ng
Seq V low low Lim,

Deadband supervision
The deadband supervision function reports the measured value according to
integrated changes over a time period.

615 series 629

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN

Figure 343: Integral deadband supervision

The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the X
deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between
the maximum and minimum limit in the units of 0.001 percent x seconds.

The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the
formula:
(max − min) × deadband / 1000
t (s) =
∆Y × 100%
GUID-5381484E-E205-4548-A846-D3519578384B V1 EN (Equation 82)

Example for CMMXU:

A deadband = 2500 (2.5% of the total measuring range of 40)

I_INST_A = I_DB_A = 0.30

If I_INST_A changes to 0.40, the reporting delay is:

(40 − 0) × 2500 / 1000

t (s) = = 10 s
0.40 − 0.30 × 100%
GUID-D1C387B1-4F2E-4A28-AFEA-431687DDF9FE V1 EN

Table 533: Parameters for deadband calculation

Function Settings Maximum/minimum (=range)
Three-phase current A deadband 40 / 0 (=40xIn)
measurement (CMMXU)
Three-phase voltage V Deadband 4 / 0 (=4xUn)
measurement (VMMXU)
Residual current measurement A deadband res 40 / 0 (=40xIn)
(RESCMMXU)
Residual voltage measurement V deadband res 4 / 0 (=4xUn)
(RESVMMXU)
Table continues on next page

630 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Function Settings Maximum/minimum (=range)

Frequency measurement F deadband 75 / 35 (=40Hz)
(FMMXU)
Sequence current Ps Seq A deadband, Ng Seq A 40 / 0 (=40xIn)
measurement (CSMSQI) deadband, Zro A deadband
Sequence voltage Ps Seq V deadband, Ng Seq V 4/0 (=4xUn)
measurement (VSMSQI) deadband, Zro V deadband

In the three-phase power and energy measurement function,

PEMMXU/MPEMMXU, the deadband supervision is done
separately for apparent power S, with the preset value of fixed 10
percent of the Sn and the power factor PF, with the preset values
fixed at 0.10. All the power measurement-related values P, Q, S and
PF are reported simultaneously when either one of the S or PF
values exceeds the preset limit.

Power and energy calculation

The three-phase power is calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages and phase-to-
earth currents. The power measurement function is capable of calculating a
complex power based on the fundamental frequency component phasors (DFT).
* * *
S = (U A ⋅ I A + UB ⋅ I B + UC ⋅ IC)
GUID-8BF2FBFE-B33B-4B49-86AA-C1B326BBBAC1 V1 EN (Equation 83)

Once the complex apparent power is calculated, P, Q, S and PF are calculated with
the equations:

P = Re( S )
GUID-92B45FA5-0B6B-47DC-9ADB-69E7EB30D53A V3 EN (Equation 84)

Q = Im( S )
GUID-CA5C1D5D-3AD9-468C-86A1-835525F8BE27 V2 EN (Equation 85)

S = S = P2 + Q2
GUID-B3999831-E376-4DAF-BF36-BA6F761230A9 V2 EN (Equation 86)

P
Cosϕ =
S
GUID-D729F661-94F9-48B1-8FA0-06E84A6F014C V2 EN (Equation 87)

Depending on the unit multiplier selected with Power unit Mult, the calculated
power values are presented in units of kVA/kW/kVAr or in units of MVA/MW/
MVAr.

615 series 631

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

GUID-9947B4F2-CD26-4F85-BF57-EAF1593AAE1B V1 EN

Figure 344: Complex power and power quadrants

Table 534: Power quadrants

Quadrant Current P Q PF Power
Q1 Lagging + + 0…+1.00 +ind
Q2 Lagging - + 0…-1.00 -cap
Q3 Leading - - 0…-1.00 -ind
Q4 Leading + - 0…+1.00 +cap

The active power P direction can be selected between forward and reverse with
Active power Dir and correspondingly the reactive power Q direction can be
selected with Reactive power Dir. This affects also the accumulated energy directions.

The accumulated energy is calculated separately as forward active

(EA_FWD_ACM), reverse active (EA_RV_ACM), forward reactive (ER_FWD_ACM)
and reverse reactive (ER_RV_ACM). Depending on the value of the unit multiplier
selected with Energy unit Mult, the calculated power values are presented in units
of kWh/kVArh or in units of MWh/MVArh.

When the energy counter reaches its defined maximum value, the counter value is
reset and restarted from zero. Changing the value of the Energy unit Mult setting
resets the accumulated energy values to the initial values, that is, EA_FWD_ACM to
Forward Wh Initial, EA_RV_ACM to Reverse Wh Initial, ER_FWD_ACM to
Forward WArh Initial and ER_RV_ACM to Reverse WArh Initial. It is also possible
to reset the accumulated energy to initial values through a parameter or with the
RSTACM input.

632 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Sequence components
The phase-sequence components are calculated using the phase currents and phase
voltages. More information on calculating the phase-sequence components can be
found in Calculated measurements in this manual.

8.1.3 Measurement function applications

The measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision
and reporting to LHMI, a monitoring tool within PCM600, or to the station level,
for example, with IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor the
measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, power factors
and so on, is vital for efficient production, transmission, and distribution of
electrical energy. It provides a fast and easy overview of the present status of the
power system to the system operator. Additionally, it can be used during testing
and commissioning of protection and control IEDs to verify the proper operation
and connection of instrument transformers, that is, the current transformers (CTs)
and voltage transformers (VTs). The proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified during normal service by a periodic comparison
of the measured value from the IED to other independent meters.

When the zero signal is measured, the noise in the input signal can still produce
small measurement values. The zero point clamping function can be used to ignore
the noise in the input signal and, hence, prevent the noise to be shown in the user
display. The zero clamping is done for the measured analog signals and angle values.

The demand values are used to neglect sudden changes in the measured analog
signals when monitoring long time values for the input signal. The demand values
are linear average values of the measured signal over a settable demand interval.
The demand values are calculated for the measured analog three-phase current
signals.

The limit supervision indicates, if the measured signal exceeds or goes below the
set limits. Depending on the measured signal type, up to two high limits and up to
two low limits can be set for the limit supervision.

The deadband supervision reports a new measurement value if the input signal has
gone out of the deadband state. The deadband supervision can be used in value
reporting between the measurement point and operation control. When the
deadband supervision is properly configured, it helps in keeping the
communication load in minimum and yet measurement values are reported
frequently enough.

8.1.4 Three-phase current measurement CMMXU

8.1.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 3I 3I

615 series 633

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.4.2 Function block

A070777 V2 EN

Figure 345: Function block

8.1.4.3 Signals
Table 535: CMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 536: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm
HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning
LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning
LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm

8.1.4.4 Settings
Table 537: CMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit
2=2 out of 3 supervision
3=3 out of 3
A high high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.40 High alarm current limit
A high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.20 High warning current limit
A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low warning current limit
A low low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low alarm current limit
A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

634 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.4.5 Monitored data

Table 538: CMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured current
amplitude phase A
IL2-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured current
amplitude phase B
IL3-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured current
amplitude phase C
Max demand IL1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for
Phase A
Max demand IL2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for
Phase B
Max demand IL3 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for
Phase C
Min demand IL1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for
Phase A
Min demand IL2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for
Phase B
Min demand IL3 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for
Phase C
Time max demand Timestamp Time of maximum
IL1 demand phase A
Time max demand Timestamp Time of maximum
IL2 demand phase B
Time max demand Timestamp Time of maximum
IL3 demand phase C
Time min demand Timestamp Time of minimum
IL1 demand phase A
Time min demand Timestamp Time of minimum
IL2 demand phase B
Time min demand Timestamp Time of minimum
IL3 demand phase C

8.1.4.6 Technical data

Table 539: CMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

±0.5% or ±0.002 x In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 x In)

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

615 series 635

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.4.7 Technical revision history

Table 540: CMMXU Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Menu changes

8.1.5 Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU

8.1.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU 3U 3U

8.1.5.2 Function block

GUID-5B741292-7FA6-4DEA-8D16-B530FD16A0FE V1 EN

Figure 346: Function block

8.1.5.3 Signals
Table 541: VMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 542: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm
HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning
LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning
LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm

636 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.5.4 Settings
Table 543: VMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
Num of phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit
2=2 out of 3 supervision
3=3 out of 3
V high high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.40 High alarm voltage limit
V high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.20 High warning voltage limit
V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low warning voltage limit
V low low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit
V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

8.1.5.5 Monitored data

Table 544: VMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
U12-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured phase to
phase voltage amplitude
phase AB
U23-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured phase to
phase voltage amplitude
phase BC
U31-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured phase to
phase voltage amplitude
phase CA

8.1.5.6 Technical data

Table 545: VMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz
At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 x Un

±0.5% or ±0.002 x Un

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

615 series 637

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.6 Residual current measurement RESCMMXU

8.1.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU Io Io

8.1.6.2 Function block

A070778 V2 EN

Figure 347: Function block

8.1.6.3 Signals
Table 546: RESCMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 547: RESCMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm
HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning

8.1.6.4 Settings
Table 548: RESCMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
A Hi high limit res 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.20 High alarm current limit
A high limit res 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.05 High warning current limit
A deadband res 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

638 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.6.5 Monitored data

Table 549: RESCMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Io-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured residual
current
Max demand Io FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Maximum demand for
residual current
Min demand Io FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Minimum demand for
residual current
Time max demand Io Timestamp Time of maximum
demand residual current
Time min demand Io Timestamp Time of minimum
demand residual current

8.1.6.6 Technical data

Table 550: RESCMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At the frequency f = fn

±0.5% or ±0.002 x In
(at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 x In)

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

8.1.6.7 Technical revision history

Table 551: RESCMMXU Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B -

8.1.7 Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU

8.1.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU Uo U0

615 series 639

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.7.2 Function block

A070779 V2 EN

Figure 348: Function block

8.1.7.3 Signals
Table 552: RESVMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 553: RESVMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm
HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning

8.1.7.4 Settings
Table 554: RESVMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode
2=DFT
V Hi high limit res 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.20 High alarm voltage limit
V high limit res 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.05 High warning voltage limit
V deadband res 100...100000 10000 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation. (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

8.1.7.5 Monitored data

Table 555: RESVMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Uo-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured residual
voltage

640 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.7.6 Technical data

Table 556: RESVMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: f/fn = ±2 Hz

±0.5% or ±0.002 x Un

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

RMS: No suppression

8.1.7.7 Technical revision history

Table 557: RESVMMXU Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B -

8.1.8 Frequency measurement FMMXU

8.1.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 F F

8.1.8.2 Function block

GUID-5CCF8F8C-E1F4-421B-8BE9-C0620F7446A7 V1 EN

Figure 349: Function block

8.1.8.3 Signals
Table 558: FMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
F SIGNAL — Measured system frequency

615 series 641

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.8.4 Settings
Table 559: FMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
F high high limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 60.00 High alarm frequency limit
F high limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 55.00 High warning frequency limit
F low limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 45.00 Low warning frequency limit
F low low limit 35.00...75.00 Hz 40.00 Low alarm frequency limit
F deadband 100...100000 1000 Deadband configuration value for
integral calculation (percentage of
difference between min and max as
0,001 % s)

8.1.8.5 Monitored data

Table 560: FMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
f-Hz FLOAT32 35.00...75.00 Hz Measured frequency

8.1.8.6 Technical data

Table 561: FMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy ±10 mHz
(in measurement range 35 - 75 Hz)

8.1.9 Sequence current measurement CSMSQI

8.1.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI I1, I2, I0 I1, I2, I0

8.1.9.2 Function block

A070784 V2 EN

Figure 350: Function block

642 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.9.3 Signals
Table 562: CSMSQI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence current

I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current

I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current

8.1.9.4 Settings
Table 563: CSMSQI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Ps Seq A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.40 High alarm current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A high limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 1.20 High warning current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low warning current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low alarm current limit for positive
sequence current
Ps Seq A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
positive sequence current for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference
between min and max as 0,001 % s)
Ng Seq A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.20 High alarm current limit for negative
sequence current
Ng Seq A High limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.05 High warning current limit for negative
sequence current
Ng Seq A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low warning current limit for negative
sequence current
Ng Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low alarm current limit for negative
sequence current
Ng Seq A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for
negative sequence current for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference
between min and max as 0,001 % s)
Zro A Hi high Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.20 High alarm current limit for zero
sequence current
Zro A High limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.05 High warning current limit for zero
sequence current
Table continues on next page

615 series 643

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Zro A low limit 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low warning current limit for zero
sequence current
Zro A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 xIn 0.00 Low alarm current limit for zero
sequence current
Zro A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for zero
sequence current for integral calculation.
(percentage of difference between min
and max as 0,001 % s)

8.1.9.5 Monitored data

Table 564: CSMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NgSeq-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured negative
sequence current
PsSeq-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured positive
sequence current
ZroSeq-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 xIn Measured zero
sequence current

8.1.9.6 Technical data

Table 565: CSMSQI Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: f/fn = ±2 Hz

±1.0% or ±0.002 x In
at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 x In

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

8.1.10 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI

8.1.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI U1, U2, U0 U1, U2, U0

644 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.10.2 Function block

GUID-63393283-E2C1-406A-9E70-847662D83CFC V2 EN

Figure 351: Function block

8.1.10.3 Signals

Table 566: VSMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U0 SIGNAL 0 Zero sequence voltage

U1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage

U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage

8.1.10.4 Settings
Table 567: VSMSQI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.40 High alarm voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V high limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 1.20 High warning voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for positive
sequence voltage
Ps Seq V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configuration value for
positive sequence voltage for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference
between min and max as 0,001 % s)
Ng Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.20 High alarm voltage limit for negative
sequence voltage
Ng Seq V High limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.05 High warning voltage limit for negative
sequence voltage
Ng Seq V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for negative
sequence voltage
Ng Seq V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for negative
sequence voltage
Table continues on next page

615 series 645

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Ng Seq V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configuration value for
negative sequence voltage for integral
calculation. (percentage of difference
between min and max as 0,001 % s)
Zro V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.20 High alarm voltage limit for zero
sequence voltage
Zro V High limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.05 High warning voltage limit for zero
sequence voltage
Zro V low limit 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low warning voltage limit for zero
sequence voltage
Zro V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 xUn 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for zero
sequence voltage
Zro V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configuration value for zero
sequence voltage for integral calculation.
(percentage of difference between min
and max as 0,001 % s)

8.1.10.5 Monitored data

Table 568: VSMSQI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NgSeq-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured negative
sequence voltage
PsSeq-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured positive
sequence voltage
ZroSeq-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 xUn Measured zero
sequence voltage

8.1.10.6 Technical data

Table 569: VSMSQI Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±2 Hz
At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 x Un

±1.0% or ±0.002 x Un

Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

646 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.1.11 Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU/

MPEMMXU

8.1.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Three-phase power and energy PEMMXU/ P, E P, E
measurement MPEMMXU

8.1.11.2 Function block

GUID-E38A24DA-85CE-4246-9C3F-DFC6FDAEA302 V1 EN

Figure 352: Function block

8.1.11.3 Signals
Table 570: PEMMXU/MPEMMXU Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage
U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage
U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage
RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy reading

615 series 647

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.1.11.4 Settings
Table 571: PEMMXU Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Power unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the
6=Mega power related values
Energy unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the
6=Mega energy related values
Active power Dir 1=Forward 1=Forward Direction of active power flow: Forward,
2=Reverse Reverse
Reactive power Dir 1=Forward 1=Forward Direction of reactive power flow:
2=Reverse Forward, Reverse
Forward Wh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward active
energy
Reverse Wh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse active
energy
Forward VArh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
energy
Reverse VArh Initial 0...999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
energy

8.1.11.5 Monitored data

Table 572: PEMMXU Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Total Apparent Power
99.9
P-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Total Active Power
99.9
Q-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Total Reactive Power
99.9
PF FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Average Power factor
Max demand S FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Maximum demand value
99.9 of apparent power
Min demand S FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVA Minimum demand value
99.9 of apparent power
Max demand P FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Maximum demand value
99.9 of active power
Min demand P FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kW Minimum demand value
99.9 of active power
Max demand Q FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Maximum demand value
99.9 of reactive power
Min demand Q FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand value
99.9 of reactive power
Time max dmd S Timestamp Time of maximum
demand
Table continues on next page

648 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Time min dmd S Timestamp Time of minimum
demand
Time max dmd P Timestamp Time of maximum
demand
Time min dmd P Timestamp Time of minimum
demand
Time max dmd Q Timestamp Time of maximum
demand
Time min dmd Q Timestamp Time of minimum
demand

8.1.11.6 Technical data

Table 573: PEMMXU/MPEMMXU Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 x In
At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 x Un
At the frequency fn ±1 Hz
Active power and energy in range |PF| > 0.71
Reactive power and energy in range |PF| < 0.71
±1.5% for power (S, P and Q)
±0.015 for power factor
±1.5% for energy
Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,…

8.2 Disturbance recorder

8.2.1 Functionality
The IED is provided with a disturbance recorder featuring up to 12 analog and 64
binary signal channels. The analog channels can be set to record either the
waveform or the trend of the currents and voltage measured.

The analog channels can be set to trigger the recording function when the measured
value falls below or exceeds the set values. The binary signal channels can be set to
start a recording on the rising or the falling edge of the binary signal or both.

By default, the binary channels are set to record external or internal IED signals,
for example the start or trip signals of the IED stages, or external blocking or
control signals. Binary IED signals such as a protection start or trip signal, or an
external IED control signal over a binary input can be set to trigger the recording.
The recorded information is stored in a non-volatile memory and can be uploaded
for subsequent fault analysis.

615 series 649

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.2.1.1 Recorded analog inputs

The user can map any analog signal type of the IED to each analog channel of the
disturbance recorder by setting the Channel selection parameter of the
corresponding analog channel. In addition, the user can enable or disable each
analog channel of the disturbance recorder by setting the Operation parameter of
the corresponding analog channel to "on" or "off".

All analog channels of the disturbance recorder that are enabled and have a valid
signal type mapped are included in the recording.

8.2.1.2 Triggering alternatives

The recording can be triggered by any or several of the following alternatives:

• Triggering according to the state change of any or several of the binary

channels of the disturbance recorder. The user can set the level sensitivity with
the Level trigger mode parameter of the corresponding binary channel.
• Triggering on limit violations of the analog channels of the disturbance
recorder (high and low limit)
• Manual triggering via the Trig recording parameter (LHMI or communication)
• Periodic triggering.

Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates events through state
changes of the Recording started, Recording made and Recording stored status
parameters. The Recording stored parameter indicates that the recording has been
stored to the non-volatile memory. In addition, every analog channel and binary
channel of the disturbance recorder has its own Channel triggered parameter.
Manual trigger has the Manual triggering parameter and periodic trigger has the
Periodic triggering parameter.

Triggering by binary channels

Input signals for the binary channels of the disturbance recorder can be formed
from any of the digital signals that can be dynamically mapped. A change in the
status of a monitored signal triggers the recorder according to the configuration and
settings. Triggering on the rising edge of a digital input signal means that the
recording sequence starts when the input signal is activated. Correspondingly,
triggering on the falling edge means that the recording sequence starts when the
active input signal resets. It is also possible to trigger from both edges. In addition,
if preferred, the monitored signal can be non-triggering. The trigger setting can be
set individually for each binary channel of the disturbance recorder with the Level
trigger mode parameter of the corresponding binary channel.

Triggering by analog channels

The trigger level can be set for triggering in a limit violation situation. The user can
set the limit values with the High trigger level and Low trigger level parameters of
the corresponding analog channel. Both high level and low level violation
triggering can be active simultaneously for the same analog channel. If the duration

650 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

of the limit violation condition exceeds the filter time of approximately 50 ms, the
recorder triggers. In case of a low level limit violation, if the measured value falls
below approximately 0.05 during the filter time, the situation is considered to be a
circuit-breaker operation and therefore, the recorder does not trigger. This is useful
especially in undervoltage situations. The filter time of approximately 50 ms is
common to all the analog channel triggers of the disturbance recorder. The value
used for triggering is the calculated peak-to-peak value. Either high or low analog
channel trigger can be disabled by setting the corresponding trigger level parameter
to zero.

Manual triggering
The recorder can be triggered manually via the LHMI or via communication by
setting the Trig recording parameter to TRUE.

Periodic triggering
Periodic triggering means that the recorder automatically makes a recording at
certain time intervals. The user can adjust the interval with the Periodic trig time
parameter. If the value of the parameter is changed, the new setting takes effect
when the next periodic triggering occurs. Setting the parameter to zero disables the
triggering alternative and the setting becomes valid immediately. If a new non-zero
setting needs to be valid immediately, the user should first set the Periodic trig
time parameter to zero and then to the new value. The user can monitor the time
remaining to the next triggering with the Time to trigger monitored data
which counts downwards.

8.2.1.3 Length of recordings

The user can define the length of a recording with the Record length parameter.
The length is given as the number of fundamental cycles.

According to the memory available and the number of analog channels used, the
disturbance recorder automatically calculates the remaining amount of recordings
that fit into the available recording memory. The user can see this information with
the Rem. amount of rec monitored data. The fixed memory size allocated
for the recorder can fit in two recordings that are ten seconds long. The recordings
contain data from all analog and binary channels of the disturbance recorder, at the
sample rate of 32 samples per fundamental cycle.

The user can view the number of recordings currently in memory with the Number
of recordings monitored data. The currently used memory space can be
viewed with the Rec. memory used monitored data. It is shown as a
percentage value.

The maximum number of recordings is 100.

615 series 651

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.2.1.4 Sampling frequencies

The sampling frequency of the disturbance recorder analog channels depends on

the set rated frequency. One fundamental cycle always contains the amount of
samples set with the Storage rate parameter. Since the states of the binary channels
are sampled once per task execution of the disturbance recorder, the sampling
frequency of binary channels is 400 Hz at the rated frequency of 50 Hz and 480 Hz
at the rated frequency of 60 Hz.

Table 574: Sampling frequencies of the disturbance recorder analog channels

Storage rate Recording Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling
(samples per length frequency of frequency of frequency of frequency of
fundamental analog binary analog binary
cycle) channels, when channels, when channels, when channels, when
the rated the rated the rated the rated
frequency is 50 frequency is 50 frequency is 60 frequency is 60
Hz Hz Hz Hz
32 1* Record 1600 Hz 400 Hz 1920 Hz 480 Hz
length
16 2* Record 800 Hz 400 Hz 960 Hz 480 Hz
length
8 4 * Record 400 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz
length

8.2.1.5 Uploading of recordings

The IED stores COMTRADE files to the C:\COMTRADE\ folder. The files can be
uploaded with the PCM tool or any appropriate computer software that can access
the C:\COMTRADE\ folder.

One complete disturbance recording consists of two COMTRADE file types: the
configuration file and the data file. The file name is the same for both file types.
The configuration file has .CFG and the data file .DAT as the file extension.

652 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

A070835 V1 EN

Figure 353: Disturbance recorder file naming

The naming convention of 8+3 characters is used in COMTRADE file naming. The
file name is composed of the last two octets of the IED's IP number and a running
counter, which has a range of 1...9999. A hexadecimal representation is used for
the IP number octets. The appropriate file extension is added to the end of the file
name.

8.2.1.6 Deletion of recordings

There are several ways to delete disturbance recordings. The recordings can be
deleted individually or all at once.

Individual disturbance recordings can be deleted with the PCM tool or any
appropriate computer software, which can access the IED's C:\COMTRADE folder.
The disturbance recording is not removed from the IED memory until both of the
corresponding COMTRADE files, .CFG and .DAT, are deleted. The user may have
to delete both of the files types separately, depending on the software used.

Deleting all disturbance recordings at once is done either with the PCM tool or any
appropriate computer software, or from the LHMI via the Clear/Disturbance
records menu. Deleting all disturbance recordings at once also clears the pre-
trigger recording in progress.

8.2.1.7 Storage mode

The disturbance recorder can capture data in two modes: waveform and trend
mode. The user can set the storage mode individually for each trigger source with

615 series 653

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

the Storage mode parameter of the corresponding analog channel or binary

channel, the Stor. mode manual parameter for manual trigger and the Stor. mode
periodic parameter for periodic trigger.

In the waveform mode, the samples are captured according to the Storage rate and
Pre-trg length parameters.

In the trend mode, one value is recorded for each enabled analog channel, once per
fundamental cycle. The recorded values are RMS values, which are scaled to peak
level. The binary channels of the disturbance recorder are also recorded once per
fundamental cycle in the trend mode.

Only post-trigger data is captured in trend mode.

The trend mode enables recording times of 32 * Record length.

8.2.1.8 Pre-trigger and post-trigger data

The waveforms of the disturbance recorder analog channels and the states of the
disturbance recorder binary channels are constantly recorded into the history
memory of the recorder. The user can adjust the percentage of the data duration
preceding the triggering, that is, the so-called pre-trigger time, with the Pre-trg
length parameter. The duration of the data following the triggering, that is, the so-
called post-trigger time, is the difference between the recording length and the pre-
trigger time. Changing the pre-trigger time resets the history data and the current
recording under collection.

8.2.1.9 Operation modes

Disturbance recorder has two operation modes: saturation and overwrite mode. The
user can change the operation mode of the disturbance recorder with the Operation
mode parameter.

Saturation mode
In saturation mode, the captured recordings cannot be overwritten with new
recordings. Capturing the data is stopped when the recording memory is full, that
is, when the maximum number of recordings is reached. In this case, the event is
sent via the state change (TRUE) of the Memory full parameter. When there is
memory available again, another event is generated via the state change (FALSE)
of the Memory full parameter.

Overwrite mode
When the operation mode is "Overwrite" and the recording memory is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten with the pre-trigger data collected for the next
recording. Each time a recording is overwritten, the event is generated via the state
change of the Overwrite of rec. parameter. The overwrite mode is recommended, if

654 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

it is more important to have the latest recordings in the memory. The saturation
mode is preferred, when the oldest recordings are more important.

New triggerings are blocked in both the saturation and the overwrite mode until the
previous recording is completed. On the other hand, a new triggering can be
accepted before all pre-trigger samples are collected for the new recording. In such
a case, the recording is as much shorter as there were pre-trigger samples lacking.

8.2.1.10 Exclusion mode

Exclusion mode is on, when the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is
higher than zero. During the exclusion mode, new triggerings are ignored if the
triggering reason is the same as in the previous recording. The Exclusion time
parameter controls how long the exclusion of triggerings of same type is active
after a triggering. The exclusion mode only applies to the analog and binary
channel triggerings, not to periodic and manual triggerings.

When the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is zero, the exclusion mode
is disabled and there are no restrictions on the triggering types of the successive
recordings.

The exclusion time setting is global for all inputs, but there is an individual counter
for each analog and binary channel of the disturbance recorder, counting the
remaining exclusion time. The user can monitor the remaining exclusion time with
the Exclusion time rem parameter of the corresponding analog or binary channel.
The Exclusion time rem parameter counts downwards.

8.2.2 Configuration
The user can configure the disturbance recorder with the PCM600 tool or any tool
supporting the IEC 61850 standard.

The user can enable or disable the disturbance recorder with the Operation
parameter under the Configuration/Disturbance recorder/General menu.

One analog signal type of the IED can be mapped to each of the analog channels of
the disturbance recorder. The mapping is done with the Channel selection
parameter of the corresponding analog channel. The name of the analog channel is
user-configurable. The user can modify it by writing the new name to the Channel
id text parameter of the corresponding analog channel.

Any external or internal digital signal of the IED which can be dynamically
mapped can be connected to the binary channels of the disturbance recorder. These
signals can be, for example, the start and trip signals from protection function
blocks or the external binary inputs of the IED. The connection is made with
dynamic mapping to the binary channel of the disturbance recorder using, for
example, SMT of PCM600. It is also possible to connect several digital signals to
one binary channel of the disturbance recorder. In that case, the signals can be
combined with logical functions, for example AND and OR. The user can

615 series 655

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

configure the name of the binary channel and modify it by writing the new name to
the Channel id text parameter of the corresponding binary channel.

Note that the Channel id text parameter is used in COMTRADE configuration files
as a channel identifier.

The recording always contains all binary channels of the disturbance recorder. If
one of the binary channels is disabled, the recorded state of the channel is
continuously FALSE and the state changes of the corresponding channel are not
recorded. The corresponding channel name for disabled binary channels in the
COMTRADE configuration file is Unused BI.

To enable or disable a binary channel of the disturbance recorder, the user can set
the Operation parameter of the corresponding binary channel to the values "on" or
"off".

The states of manual triggering and periodic triggering are not included in the
recording, but they create a state change to the Periodic triggering and Manual
triggering status parameters, which in turn create events.

The Recording started parameter can be used to control the indication LEDs of the
IED. The output of the Recording started parameter is TRUE due to the triggering
of the disturbance recorder, until all the data for the corresponding recording is
recorded.

The IP number of the IED and the content of the Bay name
parameter are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file
for identification purposes.

8.2.3 Application
The disturbance recorder is used for post-fault analysis and for verifying the correct
operation of protection IEDs and circuit breakers. It can record both analog and
binary signal information. The analog inputs are recorded as instantaneous values
and converted to primary peak value units when the IED converts the recordings to
the COMTRADE format.

COMTRADE is the general standard format used in storing

disturbance recordings.

The binary channels are sampled once per task execution of the disturbance
recorder. The task execution interval for the disturbance recorder is the same as for
the protection functions. During the COMTRADE conversion, the digital status
values are repeated so that the sampling frequencies of the analog and binary
channels correspond to each other. This is required by the COMTRADE standard.

656 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

The disturbance recorder follows the 1999 version of the

COMTRADE standard and uses the binary data file format.

8.2.4 Settings
Table 575: Non-group general settings for disturbance recorder
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1 1=on Disturbance
5=off recorder on/off
Record length 10...500 fundamental 1 50 Size of the
cycles recording in
fundamental
cycles
Pre-trg length 0...100 % 1 50 Length of the
recording
preceding the
triggering
Operation 1=Saturation 1 1 Operation
mode 2=Overwrite mode of the
recorder
Exclusion time 0...1 000 000 ms 1 0 The time
during which
triggerings of
same type are
ignored
Storage rate 32, 16, 8 samples per 32 Storage rate
fundamental of the
cycle waveform
recording
Periodic trig 0...604 800 s 10 0 Time between
time periodic
triggerings
Stor. mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
periodic 1=Trend / for periodic
cycle triggering
Stor. mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
manual 1=Trend / for manual
cycle triggering

615 series 657

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

Table 576: Non-group analog channel settings for disturbance recorder

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1 1=on Analog
5=off channel is
enabled or
disabled
Channel 0=Disabled, 0 0=Disabled Select the
selection 1=Io signal to be
2=IL1 recorded by
3=IL2 this channel.
4=IL3 Applicable
5=IoB values for this
6=IL1B parameter are
7=IL2B product
8=IL3B variant
9=Uo dependent.
10=U1 Every product
11=U2 variant
12=U3 includes only
13=UoB the values
14=U1B that are
15=U2B applicable to
16=U3B that particular
17=CIo variant
18=SI11)
19=SI21)
20=SU0
21=SU11)
22=SU21)
23=CIoB
24=SI1B1)
25=SI2B1)
26=SUoB
27=SU1B1)
28=SU2B1)
29=U12
30=U23
31=U31
32=UL1
33=UL2
34=UL3
35=U12B
36=U23B
37=U31B
38=UL1B
39=UL2B
40=UL3B
41=U1T
42=U2T
43=U3T
44=PD
Channel id 0 to 64 DR analog Identification
text characters, channel X text for the
alphanumeric analog
channel used
in the
COMTRADE
format
Table continues on next page

658 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

High trigger 0.00...60.00 pu 0.01 10.00 High trigger
level level for the
analog
channel
Low trigger 0.00...2.00 pu 0.01 0.00 Low trigger
level level for the
analog
channel
Storage mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
1=Trend / for the analog
cycle channel

1) Recordable values are available only in trend mode. In waveform mode, samples for this signal type
are constant zeroes. However, these signal types can be used to trigger the recorder on limit
violations of the corresponding analog channel.

Table 577: Non-group binary channel settings for disturbance recorder

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1 5=off Binary
5=off channel is
enabled or
disabled
Level trigger 1=Positive or 1 1=Rising Level trigger
mode Rising mode for the
2=Negative or binary
Falling channel
3=Both
4=Level
trigger off
Storage mode 0=Waveform 1 0 Storage mode
1=Trend / for the binary
cycle channel
Channel id 0 to 64 DR binary Identification
text characters, channel X text for the
alphanumeric analog
channel used
in the
COMTRADE
format

Table 578: Control data for disturbance recorder

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Trig recording 0=Cancel Trigger the
1=Trig disturbance
recording
Clear 0=Cancel Clear all
recordings 1=Clear recordings
currently in
memory

615 series 659

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

8.2.5 Monitored data

Table 579: Monitored data for disturbance recorder
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Number of 0...100 Number of
recordings recordings
currently in
memory
Rem. amount 0...100 Remaining
of rec. amount of
recordings
that fit into the
available
recording
memory,
when current
settings are
used
Rec. memory 0...100 % Storage mode
used for the binary
channel
Time to 0...604 800 s Time
trigger remaining to
the next
periodic
triggering

8.2.6 Technical revision history

Table 580: RDRE Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B ChNum changed to EChNum (RADR's).
RADR9...12 added (Analog channel 9 -12).
RBDR33...64 added (Binary channel 33 - 64).
C Enum update for Channel selection parameters
(DR.RADRx.EChNum.setVal)
Std. enum changes to Clear and Manual Trig
D Symbols in the Channel selection setting are
updated

8.3 Tap changer position indicator TPOSSLTC

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tap changer position indication TPOSSLTC TPOSM 84M

660 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.3.2 Function block

GUID-9FF20342-1B3C-45DB-8FB5-50389401AEF5 V2 EN

Figure 354: Function block

8.3.3 Functionality
The tap changer position indication function TPOSSLTC is used for transformer
tap position supervision. The binary inputs can be used for converting a binary-
coded tap changer position to a tap position status indication. The X130 (RTD)
card, available as an option, provides the RTD sensor information to be used and
the versatile analog inputs enabling the tap position supervision through mA.

There are three user-selectable conversion modes available for the 7–bit binary
inputs where MSB is used as the SIGN bit: the natural binary-coded boolean input
to the signed integer output, binary coded decimal BCD input to the signed integer
output and binary reflected GRAY coded input to the signed integer output.

8.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". When the function is disabled,
the tap position quality information is changed accordingly. When the tap position
information is not available, it is recommended to disable this function with the
Operation setting.

The operation of the tap changer position indication function can be described
using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next
sections.

GUID-DDA703D9-A4FF-41D8-9711-AC53A56B34E8 V2 EN

Figure 355: Functional module diagram

615 series 661

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

Tap position decoder

When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the corresponding
tap changer position is decoded from the mA or RTD input. When there is no wired
connection to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used
for the tap changer position information. The tap changer position value and
quality are internally shared to other functions. The value is available through the
Monitored data view.

The function has three alternative user selectable operation modes: "NAT2INT",
"BCD2INT" and "GRAY2INT". The operation mode is selected with the
Operation mode setting. Each operation mode can be used to convert a maximum
of 6–bit coded input to an 8–bit signed short integer output. For less than 6–bit
input, for example 19 positions with 5 bits when the BCD coding is used, the rest
of the bits can be set to FALSE (0).

The operation mode "NAT2INT" is selected when the natural binary coding is used
for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic principle of the
natural binary coding is to calculate the sum of the bits set to TRUE (1). The LSB
has the factor 1. Each following bit has the previous factor multiplied by 2. This is
also called dual coding.

The operation mode "BCD2INT" is selected when the binary-coded decimal

coding is used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic
principle with the binary-coded decimal coding is to calculate the sum of the bits
set to TRUE (1). The four bits nibble (BI3...BI0) have a typical factor to the natural
binary coding. The sum of the values should not be more than 9. If the nibble sum
is greater than 9, the tap position output validity is regarded as bad.

The operation mode “GRAY2INT” is selected when the binary-reflected Gray

coding is used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer. The basic
principle of the Gray coding is that only one actual bit changes value with
consecutive positions. This function is based on the common binary-reflected Gray
code which is used with some tap changers. Changing the bit closest to the right
side bit gives a new pattern.

An additional separate input, SIGN_BIT, can be used for negative values. If the
values are positive, the input is set to FALSE (0). If the SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE
(1) making the number negative, the remaining bits are identical to those of the
coded positive number.

The tap position validity is set to good in all valid cases. The quality is set to bad in
invalid combinations in the binary inputs. For example, when the “BCD2INT”
mode is selected and the input binary combination is “0001101”, the quality is set
to bad. For negative values, when the SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE (1) and the input
binary combination is “1011011”, the quality is set to bad.

662 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

Table 581: Truth table of the decoding modes

Inputs TAP_POS outputs
SIGN_ BI5 BI4 BI3 BI2 BI1 BI0 NAT2I BCD2I GRAY2
BIT NT NT INT

... ... ... ... ... ... ...

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 —3 —3 —2
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 —2 —2 —3
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 —1 —1 —1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 3
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 2
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 7
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 6
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 4
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 5
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 8 15
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 9 14
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 9 12
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 9 13
0 0 0 1 1 0 0 12 9 8
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 13 9 9
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 14 9 11
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 15 9 10
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 16 10 31
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 17 11 30
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 18 12 28
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 19 13 29
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 20 14 24
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 21 15 25
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 22 16 27
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 23 17 26
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 24 18 16
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 25 19 17
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 26 19 19
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 27 19 18
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 28 19 23
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 29 19 22
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 30 19 20
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31 19 21
Table continues on next page

615 series 663

Technical Manual
Section 8 1YHT530004D05 D
Measurement functions

Inputs TAP_POS outputs

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 32 20 63
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 33 21 62
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 34 22 60
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 35 23 61
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 36 24 56
... ... ... ... ... ... ...

8.3.5 Application
TPOSSLTC provides tap position information for other functions as a signed
integer value that can be fed to the tap position input.

The position information of the tap changer can be coded in various methods for
many applications, for example, the differential protection algorithms. In this
function, the binary inputs in the transformer terminal connector are used as inputs
to the function. The coding method can be chosen by setting the mode parameter.
The available coding methods are BCD, Gray and Natural binary coding. Since the
number of binary inputs are limited to seven, the coding functions are limited to
seven bits including the sign bit and thus the six bits are used in the coding
functions. The position limits for the tap positions at BCD, Gray and Natural
binary coding are ±39, ±63 and ±63 respectively.

In this example, the transformer tap changer position indication is wired as a mA

signal from the corresponding measuring transducer. The position indication is
connected to input 1 (AI_VAL1) of the X130 (RTD) card. The tap changer
operating range from the minimum to maximum turns of the tap and a
corresponding mA signal for the tap position are set in XRGGIO130. Since the
values of the XRGGIO130 outputs are floating point numbers, the float to integer
(T_F32_INT8) conversion is needed before the tap position information can be fed
to TPOSSLTC. When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the
corresponding tap changer position is seen as the TAP_POS output value that is fed
to other functions, for example, OLATCC1. When there is no wired connection to
the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap
changer position information.

TPOSSLTC
BI0
BI1
BI2
BI3
AI_VAL1 BI4
BI5
T_F32_INT8 SIGN_BIT
F32 INT8 TAP_POS

GUID-0F8FDC38-827F-48F2-AC02-499CD3B121D7 V1 EN

Figure 356: RTD/analog input configuration example

664 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 8
Measurement functions

8.3.6 Signals
Table 582: TPOSSLTC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI0 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 1
BI1 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 2
BI2 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 3
BI3 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 4
BI4 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 5
BI5 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 6
SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input sign bit
TAP_POS INT8 0 Tap position indication

8.3.7 Settings
Table 583: TPOSSLTC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operation mode 1=NAT2INT 2=BCD2INT Operation mode selection
2=BCD2INT
3=GRAY2INT

8.3.8 Monitored data

8.3.9 Technical data

Table 584: TPOSSLTC Technical data
Descrpition Value
Response time for binary inputs Typical 100 ms

8.3.10 Technical revision history

Table 585: TPOSSLTC Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Added new input TAP_POS

615 series 665

Technical Manual
666
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Section 9 Control functions

9.1 Circuit breaker control CBXCBR, Disconnector

control DCXSWI and Earthing switch control
ESXSWI

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Circuit breaker control CBXCBR I<->O CB I<->O CB
Disconnector control DCXSWI I<->O DCC I<->O DCC
Earthing switch control ESXSWI I<->O ESC I<->O ESC

9.1.2 Function block

A071284 V3 EN

GUID-87017F8B-A03A-409C-8707-E721A1B0DE3E V1 EN

GUID-91FB6354-B7B0-46B4-9975-BE2769B97902 V1 EN

Figure 357: Function block

615 series 667

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.1.3 Functionality
The CBXCBR, DCXSWI and ESXSWI are intended for circuit breaker,
disconnector and earthing switch control and status information purposes. These
functions execute commands and evaluate block conditions and different time
supervision conditions. The functions perform an execution command only if all
conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed. If erroneous conditions
occur, the functions indicate an appropriate cause value. The functions are
designed according to the IEC 61850-7-4 standard with logical nodes CILO, CSWI
and XSWI / XCBR.

The circuit breaker, disconnector and earthing switch control functions have an
operation counter for closing and opening cycles. The counter value can be read
and written remotely from the place of operation or via LHMI.

9.1.4 Operation principle

Status indication and validity check
The object state is defined by two digital inputs, POSOPEN and POSCLOSE, which
are also available as outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS together with the OKPOS
information. The debouncing and short disturbances in an input are eliminated by
filtering. The binary input filtering time can be adjusted separately for each digital
input used by the function block. The validity of the digital inputs that indicate the
object state is used as additional information in indications and event logging. The
reporting of faulty or intermediate position of the apparatus occurs after the Event
delay setting, assuming that the circuit breaker is still in a corresponding state.

Table 586: Status indication

Status (POSITION) POSOPEN/OPENPOS POSCLOSE/ OKPOS
CLOSEPOS
1=Open 1=True 0=False 1=True
2=Closed 0=False 1=True 1=True
3=Faulty/Bad (11) 1=True 1=True 0=False
0=Intermediate (00) 0=False 0=False 0=False

Blocking
CBXCBR, DCXSWI and ESXSWI have a blocking functionality to prevent human
errors that can cause injuries to the operator and damages to the system components.

The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they affect the commands of
other clients: the operator place and protection and autoreclosing functions, for
example. There are two blocking principles.

668 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

• Enabling the opening command: the function is used to block the operation of
the opening command. This block signal also affects the OPEN input of
immediate command.
• Enabling the closing command: the function is used to block the operation of
the closing command. This block signal also affects the CLOSE input of
immediate command.

The ITL_BYPASS input is used if the interlocking functionality needs to be

bypassed. When INT_BYPASS is TRUE, the apparatus control is made possible
by discarding the ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE input states. However, the
BLK_OPEN and BLK_CLOSE input signals are not bypassed with the interlocking
bypass functionality since they always have the higher priority.

Table 587: Interlocking conditions for enabling the closing (opening) command
Inputs Outputs
INT_BYPASS ENA_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD
(ENA_OPEN) (BLK_OPEN) (OPEN_ENAD)
0 = False 0 = False 0 = False 0 = False
0 = False 0 = False 1 = True 0 = False
0 = False 1 = True 0 = False 1 = True
0 = False 1 = True 1 = True 0 = False
1 = True 0 = False 0 = False 1 = True
1 = True 0 = False 1 = True 0 = False
1 = True 1 = True 0 = False 1 = True
1 = True 1 = True 1 = True 0 = False

Opening and closing operations

The corresponding opening and closing operations are available via
communication, binary inputs or LHMI commands. As a prerequisite for control
commands, there are enabling and blocking functionalities for both opening and
closing commands. If the control command is executed against the blocking or if
the enabling of the corresponding command is not valid, CBXCBR, DCXSWI and
ESXSWI generate an error message.

Opening and closing pulse widths

The pulse width type can be defined with the Adaptive pulse setting. The function
provides two modes to characterize the opening and closing pulse widths. When
the Adaptive pulse is set to “TRUE”, it causes a variable pulse width, which means
that the output pulse is deactivated when the object state shows that the apparatus
has entered the correct state. If apparatus fails to enter the correct state, the output
pulse is deactivated after the set Operation timeout setting, and an error message is
displayed. When the Adaptive pulse is set to “FALSE”, the functions always use
the maximum pulse width, defined by the user-configurable Pulse length setting.
The Pulse length setting is the same for both the opening and closing commands.

615 series 669

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

When the apparatus already is in the right position, the maximum pulse length is
given.

The Pulse length setting does not affect the length of the trip pulse.

Control methods
The command execution mode can be set with the Control model setting. The
alternatives for command execution are direct control and secured object control,
which can be used to secure controlling.

The secured object control SBO is an important feature of the communication

protocols that support horizontal communication, because the command
reservation and interlocking signals can be transferred with a bus. All secured
control operations require two-step commands: a selection step and an execution
step. The secured object control is responsible for the several tasks.

• Command authority: ensures that the command source is authorized to operate

the object
• Mutual exclusion: ensures that only one command source at a time can control
the object
• Interlocking: allows only safe commands
• Execution: supervises the command execution
• Command canceling: cancels the controlling of a selected object.

In direct operation, a single message is used to initiate the control action of a

physical device. The direct operation method uses less communication network
capacity and bandwidth than the SBO method, because the procedure needs fewer
messages for accurate operation.

670 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

A070878 V2 EN

Figure 358: Control procedure in the SBO method

9.1.5 Application
In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, reliable control and
status indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is in a
significant role. They are needed especially in modern remotely controlled
substations.

Control and status indication facilities are implemented in the same package with
CBXCBR, DCXSWI and ESXSWI. When primary components are controlled in
the energizing phase, for example, the correct execution sequence of the control
commands must be ensured. This can be achieved, for example, with interlocking
based on the status indication of the related primary components. The interlocking
on the substation level can be applied using the IEC61850 GOOSE messages
between feeders.

615 series 671

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

A070879 V2 EN

Figure 359: Status indication-based interlocking via the GOOSE messaging

9.1.6 Signals
Table 588: CBXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening
ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1=True Enables closing
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks opening
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing
ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE
interlocking when TRUE
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal used to open the breaker1)
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal used to close the breaker1)
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O1)
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closed position of apparatus from I/O1)

1) Not available for monitoring

Table 589: DCXSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening
ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1=True Enables closing
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks opening
Table continues on next page

672 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Name Type Default Description

BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing
ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE
interlocking when TRUE
EXE_OP BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for close direction
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus closed position

Table 590: ESXSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening
ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1=True Enables closing
BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks opening
BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing
ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE
interlocking when TRUE
EXE_OP BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for close direction
OPENPOS BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus closed position

Table 591: CBXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok
OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the input status
CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status

Table 592: DCXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
Table continues on next page

615 series 673

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Name Type Description

OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok
OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the input status
CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status

Table 593: ESXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok
OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the input status
CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status

9.1.7 Settings
Table 594: CBXCBR Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation mode on/off
5=off
Select timeout 10000...300000 ms 10000 60000 Select timeout in ms
Pulse length 10...60000 ms 1 100 Open and close pulse length
Operation counter 0...10000 0 Breaker operation cycles
Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model
1=direct-with- enhanced-security
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Adaptive pulse 0=False 1=True Stop in right position
1=True
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 100 Event delay of the intermediate position
Operation timeout 10...60000 ms 500 Timeout for negative termination

Table 595: DCXSWI Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation mode on/off
5=off
Select timeout 10000...300000 ms 10000 60000 Select timeout in ms
Pulse length 10...60000 ms 1 100 Open and close pulse length
Operation counter 0...10000 0 Breaker operation cycles
Table continues on next page

674 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model
1=direct-with- enhanced-security
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Adaptive pulse 0=False 1=True Stop in right position
1=True
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 100 Event delay of the intermediate position
Operation timeout 10...60000 ms 500 Timeout for negative termination

Table 596: ESXSWI Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation mode on/off
5=off
Select timeout 10000...300000 ms 10000 60000 Select timeout in ms
Pulse length 10...60000 ms 1 100 Open and close pulse length
Operation counter 0...10000 0 Breaker operation cycles
Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model
1=direct-with- enhanced-security
normal-security
4=sbo-with-
enhanced-security
Adaptive pulse 0=False 1=True Stop in right position
1=True
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 100 Event delay of the intermediate position
Operation timeout 10...60000 ms 500 Timeout for negative termination

9.1.8 Monitored data

Table 597: CBXCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position
1=open indication
2=closed
3=faulty

Table 598: DCXSWI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position
1=open indication
2=closed
3=faulty

615 series 675

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Table 599: ESXSWI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position
1=open indication
2=closed
3=faulty

9.1.9 Technical revision history

Table 600: CBXCBR Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B Interlocking bypass input (ITL_BYPASS) and
opening enabled (OPEN_ENAD)/closing enabled
(CLOSE_ENAD) outputs added. ITL_BYPASS
bypasses the ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE states.

9.2 Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and

earthing switch indication ESSXSWI

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI I<->O DC I<->O DC
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI I<->O ES I<->O ES

9.2.2 Function block

A071280 V2 EN

Figure 360: Function block

A071282 V2 EN

Figure 361: Function block

676 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.2.3 Functionality
The functions DCSXSWI and ESSXSWI indicate remotely and locally the open,
close and undefined states of the disconnector and earthing switch. The
functionality of both is identical, but each one is allocated for a specific purpose
visible in the function names. For example, the status indication of disconnectors or
circuit breaker truck can be monitored with the DCSXSWI function.

The functions are designed according to the IEC 61850-7-4 standard with the
logical node XSWI.

9.2.4 Operation principle

Status indication and validity check
The object state is defined by the two digital inputs POSOPEN and POSCLOSE.
The debounces and short disturbances in an input are eliminated by filtering. The
binary input filtering time can be adjusted separately for each digital input used by
the function block. The validity of digital inputs that indicate the object state is
used as additional information in indications and event logging.

Table 601: Status indication

State OPEN CLOSE
Open ON OFF
Close OFF ON
Bad/Faulty 11 ON ON
Intermediate 00 OFF OFF

9.2.5 Application
In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, the reliable control
and status indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is
in a significant role. These features are needed especially in modern remote
controlled substations. The application area of DCSXSWI and ESSXSWI functions
covers remote and local status indication of, for example, disconnectors, air-break
switches and earthing switches, which represent the lowest level of power
switching devices without short-circuit breaking capability.

9.2.6 Signals
Table 602: DCSXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O1)
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closed position of apparatus from I/O1)

1) Not available for monitoring

615 series 677

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Table 603: ESSXSWI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O1)
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closed position of apparatus from I/O1)

1) Not available for monitoring

Table 604: DCSXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok

Table 605: ESSXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok

9.2.7 Settings
Table 606: DCSXSWI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 100 Event delay of the intermediate position

Table 607: ESSXSWI Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Event delay 0...10000 ms 1 100 Event delay of the intermediate position

9.2.8 Monitored data

Table 608: DCSXSWI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position
1=open indication
2=closed
3=faulty

678 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Table 609: ESSXSWI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position
1=open indication
2=closed
3=faulty

9.3 Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN

9.3.1 Identification
Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN SYNC 25

9.3.2 Function block

GUID-9270E059-ED17-4355-90F0-3345E1743464 V2 EN

Figure 362: Function block

9.3.3 Functionality
The synchrocheck function SECRSYN checks the condition across the circuit
breaker from separate power system parts and gives the permission to close the
circuit breaker. SECRSYN includes the functionality of synchrocheck and
energizing check.

Asynchronous operation mode is provided for asynchronously running systems.

The main purpose of the asynchronous operation mode is to provide a controlled
closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are connected.

The synchrocheck operation mode checks that the voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker are perfectly synchronized. It is used to perform a controlled
reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and it is also used to
perform a controlled reconnection of the system after reclosing.

The energizing check function checks that at least one side is dead to ensure that
closing can be done safely.

615 series 679

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function

outputs and timers if desired.

9.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The SECRSYN function has two parallel functionalities, the synchrocheck and
energizing check functionality. The operation of the synchronism and energizing
check function can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the
diagram are explained in the next sections.

Energizing
check

Synchro
check

GUID-FE07029C-C6C1-4BA7-9F8E-CACE86D0A9BD V2 EN

Figure 363: Functional module diagram

The Synchro check function can operate either with the U_AB or U_A voltages.
The selection of used voltages is defined with the VT connection setting of the line
voltage general parameters.

Energizing check
The Energizing check function checks the energizing direction. Energizing is
defined as a situation where a dead network part is connected to an energized
section of the network. The conditions of the network sections to be controlled by
the circuit breaker, that is, which side has to be live and which side dead, are
determined by the setting. A situation where both sides are dead is possible as well.
The actual value for defining the dead line or bus is given with the Dead bus value
and Dead line value settings. Similarly, the actual values of live line or bus are
defined with the Live bus value and Live line value settings.

Table 610: Live dead mode of operation under which switching can be carried out
Live dead mode Description
Both Dead Both line and bus de-energized
Live L, Dead B Bus de-energized and line energized
Dead L, Live B Line de-energized and bus energized
Table continues on next page

680 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Live dead mode Description

Dead Bus, L Any Both line and bus de-energized or bus de-
energized and line energized
Dead L, Bus Any Both line and bus de-energized or line de-
energized and bus energized
One Live, Dead Bus de-energized and line energized or line de-
energized and bus energized
Not Both Live Both line and bus de-energized or bus de-
energized and line energized or line de-
energized and bus energized

When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to be
constant for a time set with the Energizing time setting before the circuit breaker
closing is permitted. The purpose of this time delay is to ensure that the dead side
remains de-energized and also that the situation is not caused by a temporary
interference. If the conditions do not persist for a specified operation time, the
timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions allow. The circuit
breaker closing is not permitted if the measured voltage on the live side is greater
than the set value of Max energizing V.

The measured energized state is available as a monitored data value

ENERG_STATE and as four function outputs LLDB (live line / dead bus), LLLB
(live line / live bus), DLLB (dead line / live bus) and DLDB (dead line / dead bus),
of which only one can be active at a time. It is also possible that the measured
energized state indicates “Unknown” if at least one of the measured voltages is
between the limits set with the dead and live settings parameters.

Synchro check
The Synchro check function measures the difference between the line voltage and
bus voltage. The function permits the closing of the circuit breaker when the
following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.
• The measured line and bus voltages are higher than the set values of Live bus
value and Live line value (ENERG_STATE equals to "Both Live").
• The measured bus and line frequency are both within the range of 95 to 105
percent of the value of fn.
• The measured voltages for the line and bus are less than the set value of Max
energizing V.

In case Syncro check mode is set to "Syncronous", the additional conditions must
be fulfilled.
• In the synchronous mode, the closing is attempted so that the phase difference
at closing is close to zero.
• The synchronous mode is only possible when the frequency slip is below 0.1
percent of the value of fn.
• The voltage difference must not exceed the 1 percent of the value of Un.

615 series 681

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

In case Syncro check mode is set to “Asyncronous”, the additional conditions must
be fulfilled.
• The measured difference of the voltages is less than the set value of Difference
voltage.
• The measured difference of the phase angles is less than the set value of
Difference angle.
• The measured difference in frequency is less than the set value of Frequency
difference.
• The estimated breaker closing angle is decided to be less than the set value of
Difference angle.

Difference angle = U_Bus - U_Line Difference frequency

f = abs(fU_Bus - fU_Line)
U_Bus

Difference voltage
U_Line
fU_Bus fU_Line
Live line or bus value
Dead line or bus value Frequency[Hz]
Frequency deviation

Rated frequency

GUID-191F6C44-7A67-4277-8AD1-9711B535F1E1 V2 EN

Figure 364: Conditions to be fulfilled when detecting synchronism between

systems

When the frequency, phase angle and voltage conditions are fulfilled, the duration
of the synchronism conditions is checked so as to ensure that they are still met
when the condition is determined on the basis of the measured frequency and phase
difference. Depending on the circuit breaker and the closing system, the delay from
the moment the closing signal is given until the circuit breaker finally closes is
about 50 - 250 ms. The selected Closing time of CB informs the function how long
the conditions have to persist. The Synchro check function compensates for the
measured slip frequency and the circuit breaker closing delay. The phase angle
advance is calculated continuously with the formula.

682 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Closing angle = ( ∠U Bus − ∠U Line ) ° + ( ( f Bus − fline ) × (TCB + TPL ) × 360° )

GUID-48292FC2-C00C-4166-BCAD-FFC77D7F196B V1 EN (Equation 88)

φU_BUS Measured bus voltage phase angle

φU_LINE Measured line voltage phase angle

fU_BUS Measured bus frequency

fU_LINE Measured line frequency

TCB Total circuit breaker closing delay, including the delay of the IED output contacts defined
with the Closing time of CB setting parameter value

The closing angle is the estimated angle difference after the breaker closing delay.

The Minimum Syn time setting time can be set, if required, to demand the minimum
time within which conditions must be simultaneously fulfilled before the
SYNC_OK output is activated.

The measured voltage, frequency and phase angle difference values between the
two sides of the circuit breaker are available as monitored data values
U_DIFF_MEAS, FR_DIFF_MEAS and PH_DIFF_MEAS. Also, the indications of
the conditions that are not fulfilled and thus preventing the breaker closing
permission are available as monitored data values U_DIFF_SYNC,
PH_DIF_SYNC and FR_DIFF_SYNC. These monitored data values are updated
only when the Synchro check is enabled with the Synchro check mode setting and
the measured ENERG_STATE is "Both Live".

Continuous mode
The continuous mode is activated by setting the parameter Control mode to
"Continuous". In the continuous control mode, Synchro check is continuously
checking the synchronism. When synchronism is detected (according to the
settings), the SYNC_OK output is set to TRUE (logic '1') and it stays TRUE as long
as the conditions are fulfilled. The command input is ignored in the continuous
control mode. The mode is used for situations where Synchro check only gives the
permission to the control block that executes the CB closing.

Closing Closing
permission command

SECRSYN CBXCBR I

GUID-A9132EDC-BFAB-47CF-BB9D-FDE87EDE5FA5 V2 EN

Figure 365: A simplified block diagram of the Synchro check function in the
continuous mode operation

615 series 683

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Command mode
If Control mode is set to "Command", the purpose of the Synchro check
functionality in the command mode is to find the instant when the voltages on both
sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism. The conditions for synchronism are
met when the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker have the same frequency
and are in phase with a magnitude that makes the concerned busbars or lines such
that they can be regarded as live.

In the command mode operation, an external command signal CL_COMMAND,

besides the normal closing conditions, is needed for delivering the closing signal.
In the command control mode operation, the Synchro check function itself closes
the breaker via the SYNC_OK output when the conditions are fulfilled. In this case,
the control function block delivers the command signal to close the Synchro check
function for the releasing of a closing signal pulse to the circuit breaker. If the
closing conditions are fulfilled during a permitted check time set with Maximum
Syn time, the Synchro check function delivers a closing signal to the circuit breaker
after the command signal is delivered for closing.

Closing Closing
request command
CBXCBR SECRSYN I

GUID-820585ED-8AED-45B1-8FC2-2CEE7727A65C V2 EN

Figure 366: A simplified block diagram of SECRSYN in the command mode

operation

The closing signal is delivered only once for each activated external closing
command signal. The pulse length of the delivered closing is set with the Close
pulse setting.

684 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

t = Close pulse
GUID-0D9A1A7F-58D1-4081-B974-A3CE10DEC5AF V2 EN

Figure 367: Determination of the pulse length of the closing signal

In the command control mode operation, there are alarms for a failed closing
attempt (CL_FAIL_AL) and for a command signal that remains active too long
(CMD_FAIL_AL).

If the conditions for closing are not fulfilled within the set time of Maximum Syn
time, a failed closing attempt alarm is given. The CL_FAIL_AL alarm output
signal is pulse-shaped and the pulse length is 500 ms. If the external command
signal is removed too early, that is, before conditions are fulfilled and the closing
pulse is given, the alarm timer is reset.

Maximum Syn time

GUID-FA8ADA22-6A90-4637-AA1C-714B1D0DD2CF V2 EN

Figure 368: Determination of the checking time for closing

The control module receives information about the circuit breaker status and thus is
able to adjust the command signal to be delivered to the Synchro check function. If
the external command signal CL_COMMAND is kept active longer than
necessary, CMD_FAIL_AL alarm output is activated. The alarm indicates that the

615 series 685

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

control module has not removed the external command signal after the closing
operation. To avoid unnecessary alarms, the duration of the command signal
should be set in such a way that the maximum length of the signal is always below
Maximum Syn time + 5s.

Maximum Syn time

Close pulse

5s
GUID-4DF3366D-33B9-48B5-8EB4-692D98016753 V2 EN

Figure 369: Determination of the alarm limit for a still-active command signal

Closing is permitted during Maximum Syn time, starting from the moment the
external command signal CL_COMMAND is activated. The CL_COMMAND input
must be kept active for the whole time that the closing conditions are waited to be
fulfilled. Otherwise, the procedure is cancelled. If the closing-command conditions
are fulfilled during Maximum Syn time, a closing pulse is delivered to the circuit
breaker. If the closing conditions are not fulfilled during the checking time, the
alarm CL_FAIL_AL is activated as an indication of a failed closing attempt. The
closing pulse is not delivered if the closing conditions become valid after Maximum
Syn time has elapsed. The closing pulse is delivered only once for each activated
external command signal, and a new closing-command sequence cannot be started
until the external command signal is reset and reactivated again. The
SYNC_INPRO output is active when the closing-command sequence is in progress
and it is reset when the CL_COMMAND input is reset or Maximum Syn time has elapsed.

Bypass mode
SECRSYN can be set into bypass mode by setting the parameters Synchro check
mode and Energizing check mode to "Off" or alternatively, by activating the
BYPASS input.

In the bypass mode, the closing conditions are always considered to be fulfilled by
the SECRSYN function. Otherwise, the operation is similar to the normal mode.

686 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Voltage angle difference adjustment

In application where the power transformer is located between the voltage
measurement and the vector group connection gives phase difference to the
voltages between the high and low-voltage sides, the angle adjustment can be used
to meet synchronism.

The vector group of the power transformer is defined with clock numbers, where
the value of the hour pointer defines the low voltage-side phasor and the high voltage-
side phasor is always fixed to the clock number 12, which is same as zero. The
angle between clock numbers is 30 degrees. When comparing phase angles, the
U_BUS input is always the reference. This means that when the Yd11 power
transformer is used, the low voltage-side voltage phasor leads by 30 degrees or lags
by 330 degrees the high voltage-side phasor. The rotation of the phasors is
counterclockwise.

The generic rule is that a low voltage-side phasor lags the high voltage-side phasor
by clock number * 30º. This is called angle difference adjustment and can be set
for SECRSYN with the Phase shift setting.

9.3.5 Application
The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the
closing of the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the closing if the
conditions for synchronism are not detected. This function is also used to prevent
the reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and a three-pole
reclosing.

The Synchro check function block includes both the synchronism check function
and the energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead.

Network and the generator running in parallel with the network are connected
through the line AB. When a fault occurs between A and B, the IED protection
opens the circuit breakers A and B, thus isolating the faulty section from the
network and making the arc that caused the fault extinguish. The first attempt to
recover is a delayed autoreclosure made a few seconds later. Then, the autoreclose
function DARREC gives a command signal to the synchrocheck function to close
the circuit breaker A. SECRSYN performs an energizing check, as the line AB is de-
energized (U_BUS> Live bus value, U_LINE< Dead line value). After verifying
the line AB is dead and the energizing direction is correct, the IED energizes the
line (U_BUS -> U_LINE) by closing the circuit breaker A. The PLC of the power
plant discovers that the line has been energized and sends a signal to the other
synchrocheck function to close the circuit breaker B. Since both sides of the circuit
breaker B are live (U_BUS > Live bus value, U_LINE > Live bus value), the
synchrocheck function controlling the circuit breaker B performs a synchrocheck
and, if the network and the generator are in synchronism, closes the circuit breaker.

615 series 687

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

G
A B

U_Bus U_Line U_Line U_Bus

SECRSYN SECRSYN

DARREC PLC

GUID-27A9936F-0276-47A1-B646-48E336FDA95C V2 EN

Figure 370: Synchrocheck function SECRSYN checking energizing conditions

and synchronism

Connections
A special attention is paid to the connection of the IED. Furthermore it is checked
that the primary side wiring is correct.

A faulty wiring of the voltage inputs of the IED causes a malfunction in the
synchrocheck function. If the wires of an energizing input have changed places, the
polarity of the input voltage is reversed (180°). In this case, the IED permits the
circuit breaker closing in a situation where the voltages are in opposite phases. This
can damage the electrical devices in the primary circuit. Therefore, it is extremely
important that the wiring from the voltage transformers to the terminals on the rear
of the IED is consistent regarding the energizing inputs U_BUS (bus voltage) and
U_LINE (line voltage).

The wiring should be verified by checking the reading of the phase difference
measured between the U_BUS and U_LINE voltages. The phase difference
measured by the IED has to be close to zero within the permitted accuracy
tolerances. The measured phase differences are indicated in the LHMI. At the same
time, it is recommended to check the voltage difference and the frequency
differences presented in the monitored data view. These values should be within
the permitted tolerances, that is, close to zero.

Figure 371 shows an example where the synchrocheck is used for the circuit
breaker closing between a busbar and a line. The phase-to-phase voltages are
measured from the busbar and also one phase-to-phase voltage from the line is
measured.

688 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

L1
L2
L3

U12 Relay program

U1b
U_LINE
SECRSYN
U_BUS SYNC_INPRO
U1 U_LINE SYNC_OK
CL_COMMAND CL_FAIL_AL
BYPASS CMD_FAIL_AL
U2 BLOCK ENERG_STATE
U_BUS
U3

U0

GUID-DE29AFFC-9769-459B-B52C-4C11DC37A583 V2 EN

Figure 371: Connection of voltages for the IED and signals used in synchrocheck

9.3.6 Signals
Table 611: SECRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_BUS SIGNAL 0 Busbar voltage
U_LINE SIGNAL 0 Line voltage
CL_COMMAND BOOLEAN 0=False External closing request
BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Request to bypass synchronism check and
voltage check
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Blocking signal of the synchro check and voltage
check function

Table 612: SECRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNC_INPRO BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN Systems in synchronism
CL_FAIL_AL BOOLEAN CB closing failed
CMD_FAIL_AL BOOLEAN CB closing request failed
LLDB BOOLEAN Live Line, Dead Bus
LLLB BOOLEAN Live Line, Live Bus
DLLB BOOLEAN Dead Line, Live Bus
DLDB BOOLEAN Dead Line, Dead Bus

615 series 689

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.3.7 Settings
Table 613: Synchronism and energizing check (SECRSYN) main settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Live dead mode -1=Off 1=Both Dead Energizing check
1=Both Dead mode
2=Live L, Dead B
3=Dead L, Live B
4=Dead Bus, L Any
5=Dead L, Bus Any
6=One Live, Dead
7=Not Both Live
Difference voltage 0.01...0.50 xUn 0.01 0.05 Maximum voltage
difference limit
Difference frequency 0.001...0.100 xFn 0.001 0.001 Maximum frequency
difference limit
Difference angle 5...90 deg 1 5 Maximum angle
difference limit
Synchrocheck mode 1=Off 2=Synchronous Synchrocheck
2=Synchronous operation mode
3=Asynchronous
Control mode 1=Continuous 1=Continuous Selection of the
2=Command synchrocheck
command or
continuous control
mode
Dead line value 0.1...0.8 xUn 0.1 0.2 Voltage low-limit line
for energizing check
Live line value 0.2...1.0 xUn 0.1 0.5 Voltage high-limit
line for energizing
check
Close pulse 200...60000 ms 10 200 Breaker-closing
pulse duration
Max energizing V 0.50...1.15 xUn 0.01 1.05 Maximum voltage
for energizing
Phase shift -180...180 deg 1 180 Correction of phase
difference between
measured U_BUS
and U_LINE
Minimum Syn time 0...60000 ms 10 0 Minimum time to
accept synchronizing
Maximum Syn time 100...6000000 ms 10 2000 Maximum time to
accept synchronizing
Energizing time 100...60000 ms 10 100 Time delay for
energizing check
Closing time of CB 40...250 ms 10 60 Closing time of the
breaker

690 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.3.8 Monitored data

Table 614: SECRSYN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ENERG_STATE Enum 0=Unknown Energization state of
1=Both Live Line and Bus
2=Live L, Dead B
3=Dead L, Live B
4=Both Dead
U_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 xUn Calculated voltage
amplitude difference
FR_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0.000...0.100 xFn Calculated voltage
frequency difference
PH_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0.00...180.00 deg Calculated voltage
phase angle difference
U_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Voltage difference out of
1=True limit for synchronizing
PH_DIF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Phase angle difference
1=True out of limit for
synchronizing
FR_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Frequency difference out
1=True of limit for synchronizing
SECRSYN Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

9.3.9 Technical data

Table 615: SECRSYN Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage
measured: fn ±1 Hz

Voltage: ±3.0% of the set value or ±0.01 x Un

Frequency: ±10 mHz
Phase angle: ±3°
Reset time < 50 ms
Reset ratio Typical 0.96
Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

615 series 691

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.4 Autoreclosing DARREC

9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 logical IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
node name identification device number
Autoreclosing DARREC O-->I 79

9.4.2 Function block

A070836-CN V1 EN

Figure 372: Function block

9.4.3 Functionality
About 80 to 85 percent of faults in the MV overhead lines are transient and
automatically cleared with a momentary de-energization of the line. The rest of the
faults, 15 to 20 percent, can be cleared by longer interruptions. The de-energization
of the fault location for a selected time period is implemented through automatic
reclosing, during which most of the faults can be cleared.

In case of a permanent fault, the automatic reclosing is followed by final tripping.

A permanent fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re-
energized.

The auto-reclose function AR can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for auto-
reclosing. The function provides five programmable auto-reclose shots which can
perform one to five successive auto-reclosings of desired type and duration, for
instance one high-speed and one delayed auto-reclosing.

When the reclosing is initiated with starting of the protection function, the auto-
reclose function can execute the final trip of the circuit breaker in a short operate
time, provided that the fault still persists when the last selected reclosing has been
carried out.

692 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.4.3.1 Protection signal definition

The Control line setting defines which of the initiation signals are protection start
and trip signals and which are not. With this setting, the user can distinguish the
blocking signals from the protection signals. The Control line setting is a bit mask,
that is, the lowest bit controls the INIT_1 line and the highest bit the INIT_6
line. Some example combinations of the Control line setting are as follows:

Table 616: Control line setting definition

Control line INIT_1 INIT_2 INIT_3 INIT_4 INIT_5 INIT_6
setting DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4
0 other other other other other other
1 prot other other other other other
2 other prot other other other other
3 prot prot other other other other
4 other other prot other other other
5 prot other prot other other other
...63 prot prot prot prot prot prot

prot = protection signal

other = non-protection signal

When the corresponding bit or bits in both the Control line setting and the INIT_X
line are TRUE:
• The CLOSE_CB output is blocked until the protection is reset
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal is activated during the
discrimination time, the AR function goes to lockout
• If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal stays active longer than the
time set by the Max trip time setting, the AR function goes to lockout (long trip)
• The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre-defined two minutes
(alarming earth-fault).

9.4.3.2 Zone coordination

Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence between local protection units and
downstream devices. At the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line, the value of the
shot pointer is increased by one, unless a shot is in progress or the shot pointer
already has the maximum value.

The falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line is not accepted if any of the shots are in
progress.

615 series 693

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.4.3.3 Master and slave scheme

With the cooperation between the AR units in the same IED or between IEDs,
sequential reclosings of two breakers at a line end in a 1½-breaker, double breaker
or ring-bus arrangement can be achieved. One unit is defined as a master and it
executes the reclosing first. If the reclosing is successful and no trip takes place, the
second unit, that is the slave, is released to complete the reclose shot. With
persistent faults, the breaker reclosing is limited to the first breaker.

A070877 V1 EN

Figure 373: Master and slave scheme

If the AR unit is defined as a master by setting its terminal priority to high:

• The unit activates the CMD_WAIT output to the low priority slave unit
whenever a shot is in progress, a reclosing is unsuccessful or the
BLK_RCLM_T input is active
• The CMD_WAIT output is reset one second after the reclose command is given
or if the sequence is unsuccessful when the reclaim time elapses.

If the AR unit is defined as a slave by setting its terminal priority to low:

• The unit waits until the master releases the BLK_RECL_T input (the
CMD_WAIT output in the master). Only after this signal has been deactivated,
the reclose time for the slave unit can be started.
• The slave unit is set to a lockout state if the BLK_RECL_T input is not
released within the time defined by the Max wait time setting , which follows
the initiation of an auto-reclose shot.

If the terminal priority of the AR unit is set to "none", the AR unit skips all these
actions.

9.4.3.4 Thermal overload blocking

An alarm or start signal from the thermal overload protection (T1PTTR) can be
routed to the input BLK_THERM to block and hold the reclose sequence. The
BLK_THERM signal does not affect the starting of the sequence. When the reclose
time has elapsed and the BLK_THERM input is active, the shot is not ready until the
BLK_THERM input deactivates. Should the BLK_THERM input remain active
longer than the time set by the setting Max block time, the AR function goes to lockout.

If the BLK_THERM input is activated when the auto wait timer is running, the auto
wait timer is reset and the timer restarted when the BLK_THERM input deactivates.

694 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.4.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The reclosing operation can be enabled and disabled with the Reclosing operation
setting. This setting does not disable the function, only the reclosing functionality.
The setting has three parameter values: “On”, “External Ctl” and ”Off”. The setting
value “On” enables the reclosing operation and “Off” disables it. When the setting
value “External Ctl” is selected, the reclosing operation is controlled with the
RECL_ON input .

The operation of the autoreclosing function can be described using a module

diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

A070864 V2 EN

Figure 374: Functional module diagram

9.4.4.1 Signal collection and delay logic

When the protection trips, the initiation of auto-reclose shots is in most

applications executed with the INIT_1...6 inputs. The DEL_INIT2...4
inputs are not used. In some countries, starting the protection stage is also used for
the shot initiation. This is the only time when the DEL_INIT inputs are used.

615 series 695

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

A070865 V2 EN

Figure 375: Schematic diagram of delayed initiation input signals

In total, the AR function contains six separate initiation lines used for the initiation
or blocking of the auto-reclose shots. These lines are divided into two types of
channels. In three of these channels, the signal to the AR function can be delayed,
whereas the other three channels do not have any delaying capability.

Each channel that is capable of delaying a start signal has four time delays. The
time delay is selected based on the shot pointer in the AR function. For the first
reclose attempt, the first time delay is selected; for the second attempt, the second
time delay and so on. For the fourth and fifth attempts, the time delays are the same.

Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_2 signal are as follows:

• Str 2 delay shot 1

• Str 2 delay shot 2
• Str 2 delay shot 3
• Str 2 delay shot 4

Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_3 signal are as follows:

696 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

• Str 3 delay shot 1

• Str 3 delay shot 2
• Str 3 delay shot 3
• Str 3 delay shot 4

Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_4 signal are as follows:

• Str 4 delay shot 1

• Str 4 delay shot 2
• Str 4 delay shot 3
• Str 4 delay shot 4

Normally, only two or three reclose attempts are made. The third and fourth times
are used to provide the so called fast final trip to lockout.

OR CB_TRIP

DARREC
PHLPTOC INIT_1 OPEN _CB
I_A OPERATE INIT_2 CLOSE _CB CB_CLOSE
INIT_3 CMD_W AIT
I_B START
INIT_4 INPRO
I_C INIT_5 LOCKED
BLOCK INIT_6 PROT _CRD
DEL_ INIT_2 UNSUC_RECL
ENA_MULT DEL_ INIT_3 AR_ON
DEL_ INIT_4 READY
BLK _RECL _T
BLK _RCLM_T
BLK _THERM
CB_POSITION CB_POS
CB_ READY CB_READY
INC_ SHOTP
INHIBIT_ RECL
RECL_ON
SYNC

A070866 V3 EN

Figure 376: Autoreclose configuration example

Delayed DEL_INIT_2...4 signals are used only when the auto-reclose shot is
initiated with the start signal of a protection stage. After a start delay, the AR
function opens the circuit breaker and an auto-reclose shot is initiated. When the
shot is initiated with the trip signal of the protection, the protection function trips
the circuit breaker and simultaneously initiates the auto-reclose shot.

If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault, that is, if SOTF is used,
the fourth time delay can automatically be taken into use. This is controlled with
the internal logic of the AR function and the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter.

A typical auto-reclose situation is where one auto-reclose shot has been performed
after the fault was detected. There are two types of such cases: operation initiated
with protection start signal and operation initiated with protection trip signal. In
both cases, the auto-reclose sequence is successful: the reclaim time elapses and no
new sequence is started.

615 series 697

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

A070867 V1 EN

Figure 377: Signal scheme of autoreclose operation initiated with protection

start signal

The auto-reclose shot is initiated with a start signal of the protection function after
the start delay time has elapsed. The auto-reclose starts when the Str 2 delay shot 1
setting elapses.

A070868 V1 EN

Figure 378: Signal scheme of autoreclose operation initiated with protection

operate signal

The auto-reclose shot is initiated with a trip signal of the protection function. The
auto-reclose starts when the protection operate delay time elapses.

Normally, all trip and start signals are used to initiate an auto-reclose shot and trip
the circuit breaker. If any of the input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used
for blocking, the corresponding bit in the Tripping line setting must be FALSE.
This is to ensure that the circuit breaker does not trip from that signal, that is, the
signal does not activate the OPEN_CB output. The default value for the setting is
"63", which means that all initiation signals activate the OPEN_CB output. The
lowest bit in the Tripping line setting corresponds to the INIT_1 input, the highest
bit to the INIT_6 line.

698 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.4.4.2 Shot initiation

A070869 V1 EN

Figure 379: Example of an auto-reclose program with a reclose scheme matrix

In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose
program. The building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have
settings which give the attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or
blocking signals (rows in the matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.

The settings related to CBB configuration are:

• First...Seventh reclose time
• Init signals CBB1…CBB7
• Blk signals CBB1…CBB7
• Shot number CBB1…CBB7

The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the
OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines
the initiation signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that
are related to the CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting
defines which shot is related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example,
CBB1 settings are:

615 series 699

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

• First reclose time = 1.0s

• Init signals CBB1 = 7 (three lowest bits: 111000 = 7)
• Blk signals CBB1 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB1 = 1

CBB2 settings are:

• Second reclose time = 10s
• Init signals CBB2 = 6 (the second and third bits: 011000 = 6)
• Blk signals CBB2 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB2 = 2

CBB3 settings are:

• Third reclose time = 30s
• Init signals CBB3 = 4 (the third bit: 001000 = 4)
• Blk signals CBB3 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB3 = 3

CBB4 settings are:

• Fourth reclose time = 0.5s
• Init signals CBB4 = 8 (the fourth bit: 000100 = 8)
• Blk signals CBB4 = 0 (no blocking signals related to this CBB)
• Shot number CBB4 = 1

If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before
lockout. If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before
lockout.

A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a
third shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional
lockout. If the initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an
immediate lockout occurs.

The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active
during a sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to
lockout.

If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB
with the smallest individual number is always selected. For
example, if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the
second shot, that is, the shot pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of
CBB5.

700 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR
function can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the
sequence when the circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the
AR function issues a CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that
is, the closing of the circuit breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started.
Another example is the embedded generation on the power line, which can make
the synchronism check fail and prevent the reclosing. If the auto-reclose sequence
is continued to the second shot, a successful synchronous reclosing is more likely
than with the first shot, since the second shot lasts longer than the first one.

A070870 V1 EN

Figure 380: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection

Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:

615 series 701

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

• Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed

• When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the
auto wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the
synchronism check
• When the circuit breaker does not close, the automatic initiation is carried out
if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the
reclose command
• Both: the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the
circuit breaker does not close.

The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated
in the auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0",
which means that no auto-initiation is selected.

A070871 V1 EN

Figure 381: Example of an auto-initiation sequence with synchronization failure

in the first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot

In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE).
When the auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot.
During the second reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close
command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.

After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third
reclose time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time
starts. When the reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.

9.4.4.3 Shot pointer controller

The execution of a reclose sequence is controlled by a shot pointer. It can be

adjusted with the SHOT_PTR monitored data.

The shot pointer starts from an initial value "1" and determines according to the
settings whether or not a certain shot is allowed to be initiated. After every shot,

702 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

the shot pointer value increases. This is carried out until a successful reclosing or
lockout takes place after a complete shot sequence containing a total of five shots.

A070872 V1 EN

Figure 382: Shot pointer function

Every time the shot pointer increases, the reclaim time starts. When the reclaim
time ends, the shot pointer sets to its initial value, unless no new shot is initiated.
The shot pointer increases when the reclose time elapses or at the falling edge of
the INC_SHOTP signal.

When SHOT_PTR has the value six, the AR function is in a so called pre-lockout
state. If a new initiation occurs during the pre-lockout state, the AR function goes
to lockout. Therefore, a new sequence initiation during the pre-lockout state is not
possible.

The AR function goes to the pre-lockout state in the following cases:

• During SOTF
• When the AR function is active, it stays in a pre-lockout state for the time
defined by the reclaim time
• When all five shots have been executed
• When the frequent operation counter limit is reached. A new sequence
initiation forces the AR function to lockout.

9.4.4.4 Reclose controller

The reclose controller calculates the reclose, discrimination and reclaim times. The
reclose time is started when the INPRO signal is activated, that is, when the
sequence starts and the activated CBB defines the reclose time.

When the reclose time has elapsed, the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the
following conditions are fulfilled:

615 series 703

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

• The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information
about the synchronism
• All AR initiation inputs that are defined protection lines (using the Control
line setting) are inactive
• The circuit breaker is open
• The circuit breaker is ready for the close command, that is, the CB_READY
input is TRUE.

If at least one of the conditions is not fulfilled within the time set with the Auto
wait time parameter, the auto-reclose sequence is locked.

The synchronism requirement for the CBBs can be defined with the
Synchronisation set setting, which is a bit mask. The lowest bit in the
Synchronisation set setting is related to CBB1 and the highest bit to CBB7. For
example, if the setting is set to "1", only CBB1 requires synchronism. If the setting
is it set to "7", CBB1, CBB2 and CBB3 require the SYNC input to be TRUE before
the reclosing command can be given.

A070873 V1 EN

Figure 383: Initiation during discrimination time - AR function goes to lockout

The discrimination time starts when the close command CLOSE_CB has been
given. If a start input is activated before the discrimination time has elapsed, the
AR function goes to lockout. The default value for each discrimination time is
zero. The discrimination time can be adjusted with the Dsr time shot 1…4 parameter.

704 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

A070874 V1 EN

Figure 384: Initiation after elapsed discrimination time - new shot begins

9.4.4.5 Sequence controller

When the LOCKED output is active, the AR function is in lockout. This means that
new sequences cannot be initialized, because AR is insensitive to initiation
commands. It can be released from the lockout state in the following ways:
• The function is reset through communication with the RsRec parameter
• The lockout is automatically reset after the reclaim time, if the Auto lockout
reset setting is in use.

If the Auto lockout reset setting is not in use, the lockout can be
released only with the RsRec parameter.

The AR function can go to lockout for many reasons:

• The INHIBIT_RECL input is active
• All shots have been executed and a new initiation is made (final trip)
• The time set with the Auto wait time parameter expires and the automatic
sequence initiation is not allowed because of a synchronization failure
• The time set with the Wait close time parameter expires, that is, the circuit
breaker does not close or the automatic sequence initiation is not allowed due
to a closing failure of the circuit breaker
• A new shot is initiated during the discrimination time
• The time set with the Max wait time parameter expires, that is, the master unit
does not release the slave unit

615 series 705

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

• The frequent operation counter limit is reached and new sequence is initiated.
The lockout is released when the recovery timer elapses
• The protection trip signal has been active longer than the time set with the Max
wait time parameter since the shot initiation
• The circuit breaker is closed manually during an auto-reclose sequence and the
manual close mode is FALSE.

9.4.4.6 Protection coordination controller

The PROT_CRD output is used for controlling the protection functions. In several
applications, such as fuse-saving applications involving down-stream fuses,
tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast (instantaneous or short-time
delayed). The tripping and initiation of shots 2, 3 and definite tripping time should
be delayed.

In this example, two overcurrent elements PHLPTOC and PHIPTOC are used.
PHIPTOC is given an instantaneous characteristic and PHLPTOC is given a time
delay.

The PROT_CRD output is activated, if the SHOT_PTR value is the same or higher
than the value defined with the Protection crd limit setting and all initialization
signals have been reset. The PROT_CRD output is reset under the following
conditions:
• If the cut-out time elapses
• If the reclaim time elapses and the AR function is ready for a new sequence
• If the AR function is in lockout or disabled, that is, if the value of the
Protection crd mode setting is "AR inoperative" or "AR inop, CB man".

The PROT_CRD output can also be controlled with the Protection crd mode
setting. The setting has the following modes:
• "no condition": the PROT_CRD output is controlled only with the Protection
crd limit setting
• "AR inoperative": the PROT_CRD output is active, if the AR function is
disabled or in the lockout state, or if the INHIBIT_RECL input is active
• "CB close manual": the PROT_CRD output is active for the reclaim time if the
circuit breaker has been manually closed, that is, the AR function has not
issued a close command
• "AR inop, CB man": both the modes "AR inoperative" and "CB close manual"
are effective
• "always": the PROT_CRD output is constantly active

706 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

INIT_1 (I>>) Lockout

Shot 1 Shot 2
INIT_2 (I>) (CBB1) (CBB2) Lockout
0.3s 15.0s
INIT_3 (Io>) Lockout

A070875 V3 EN

Figure 385: Configuration example of using the PROT_CRD output for protection
blocking

If the Protection crd limit setting has the value "1", the instantaneous three-phase
overcurrent protection function PHIPTOC is disabled or blocked after the first shot.

9.4.4.7 Circuit breaker controller

Circuit breaker controller contains two features: SOTF and frequent-operation

counter. SOTF protects the AR function in permanent faults.

The circuit breaker position information is controlled with the CB closed Pos status
setting. The setting value "TRUE” means that when the circuit breaker is closed,
the CB_POS input is TRUE. When the setting value is “FALSE”, the CB_POS
input is FALSE, provided that the circuit breaker is closed. The reclose command
pulse time can be controlled with the Close pulse time setting: the CLOSE_CB
output is active for the time set with the Close pulse time setting. The CLOSE_CB
output is deactivated also when the circuit breaker is detected to be closed, that is,
when the CB_POS input changes from open state to closed state. The Wait close
time setting defines the time after the CLOSE_CB command activation, during
which the circuit breaker should be closed. If the closing of circuit breaker does not
happen during this time, the auto-reclose function is driven to lockout or, if
allowed, an auto-initiation is activated.

The main motivation for auto-reclosing to begin with is the assumption that the
fault is temporary by nature, and that a momentary de-energizing of the power line
and an automatic reclosing restores the power supply. However, when the power
line is manually energized and an immediate protection trip is detected, it is very
likely that the fault is of a permanent type. A permanent fault is, for example,
energizing a power line into a forgotten earthing after a maintenance work along
the power line. In such cases, SOTF is activated, but only for the reclaim time after
energizing the power line and only when the circuit breaker is closed manually and
not by the AR function.

SOTF disables any initiation of an auto-reclose shot. The energizing of the power
line is detected from the CB_POS information.

SOTF is activated when the AR function is enabled or when the AR function is

started and the SOTF should remain active for the reclaim time.

When SOTF is detected, the parameter SOTF is active.

615 series 707

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

If the Manual close mode setting is set to FALSE and the circuit
breaker has been manually closed during an auto-reclose shot, the
AR unit goes to an immediate lockout.

If the Manual close mode setting is set to TRUE and the circuit
breaker has been manually closed during an auto-reclose shot (the
INPRO is active), the shot is considered as completed.

When SOTF starts, reclaim time is restarted, provided that it is

running.

The frequent-operation counter is intended for blocking the auto-reclose function in

cases where the fault causes repetitive auto-reclose sequences during a short period
of time. For instance, if a tree causes a short circuit and, as a result, there are auto-
reclose shots within a few minutes interval during a stormy night. These types of
faults can easily damage the circuit breaker if the AR function is not locked by a
frequent-operation counter.

The frequent-operation counter has three settings:

• Frq Op counter limit
• Frq Op counter time
• Frq Op recovery time

The Frq Op counter limit setting defines the number of reclose attempts that are
allowed during the time defined with the Frq Op counter time setting. If the set
value is reached within a pre-defined period defined with the Frq Op counter time
setting, the AR function goes to lockout when a new shot begins, provided that the
counter is still above the set limit. The lockout is released after the recovery time
has elapsed. The recovery time can be defined with the Frq Op recovery time setting .

If the circuit breaker is manually closed during the recovery time, the reclaim time
is activated after the recovery timer has elapsed.

9.4.5 Counters
The AR function contains six counters. Their values are stored in a semi-retain
memory. The counters are increased at the rising edge of the reclose command.
The counters count the following situations:
• COUNTER: counts every reclose command activation
• CNT_SHOT1: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 1
• CNT_SHOT2: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 2

708 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

• CNT_SHOT3: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 3

• CNT_SHOT4: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 4
• CNT_SHOT5: counts reclose commands that are executed from shot 5

The counters are disabled through communication with the DsaCnt parameter.
When the counters are disabled, the values are not updated.

The counters are reset through communication with the RsCnt parameter.

9.4.6 Application
Modern electric power systems can deliver energy to users very reliably. However,
different kind of faults can occur. Protection relays play an important role in
detecting failures or abnormalities in the system. They detect faults and give
commands for corresponding circuit breakers to isolate the defective element
before excessive damage or a possible power system collapse occurs. A fast
isolation also limits the disturbances caused for the healthy parts of the power system.

The faults can be transient, semi-transient or permanent. Permanent fault, for

example in power cables, means that there is a physical damage in the fault
location that must first be located and repaired before the network voltage can be
restored.

In overhead lines, the insulating material between phase conductors is air. The
majority of the faults are flash-over arcing faults caused by lightning, for example.
Only a short interruption is needed for extinguishing the arc. These faults are
transient by nature.

A semi-transient fault can be caused for example by a bird or a tree branch falling
on the overhead line. The fault disappears on its own if the fault current burns the
branch or the wind blows it away.

Transient and semi-transient faults can be cleared by momentarily de-energizing

the power line. Using the auto-reclose function minimizes interruptions in the
power system service and brings the power back on-line quickly and effortlessly.

The basic idea of the auto-reclose function is simple. In overhead lines, where the
possibility of self-clearing faults is high, the auto-reclose function tries to restore
the power by reclosing the breaker. This is a method to get the power system back
into normal operation by removing the transient or semi-transient faults. Several
trials, that is, auto-reclose shots are allowed. If none of the trials is successful and
the fault persists, definite final tripping follows.

The auto-reclose function can be used with every circuit breaker that has the ability
for a reclosing sequence. In DARREC auto-reclose function the implementing
method of auto-reclose sequences is patented by ABB

615 series 709

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Table 617: Important definitions related to auto-reclosing

auto-reclose shot an operation where after a preset time the breaker is closed from the breaker
tripping caused by protection
auto-reclose a predefined method to do reclose attempts (shots) to restore the power system
sequence
SOTF If the protection detects a fault immediately after an open circuit breaker has
been closed, it indicates that the fault was already there. It can be, for example,
a forgotten earthing after maintenance work. Such closing of the circuit breaker
is known as switch on to fault. Autoreclosing in such conditions is prohibited.
final trip Occurs in case of a permanent fault, when the circuit breaker is opened for the
last time after all programmed auto-reclose operations. Since no auto-reclosing
follows, the circuit breaker remains open. This is called final trip or definite trip.

9.4.6.1 Shot initiation

A070869 V1 EN

Figure 386: Example of an auto-reclose program with a reclose scheme matrix

In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose
scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose
program. The building blocks are called CBBs. All blocks are alike and have
settings which give the attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or
blocking signals (rows in the matrix) and the reclose time of the shot.

710 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

The settings related to CBB configuration are:

• First...Seventh reclose time
• Init signals CBB1…CBB7
• Blk signals CBB1…CBB7
• Shot number CBB1…CBB7

The reclose time defines the open and dead times, that is, the time between the
OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands. The Init signals CBBx setting defines
the initiation signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that
are related to the CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting
defines which shot is related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example,
CBB1 settings are:
• First reclose time = 1.0s
• Init signals CBB1 = 7 (three lowest bits: 111000 = 7)
• Blk signals CBB1 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB1 = 1

CBB2 settings are:

• Second reclose time = 10s
• Init signals CBB2 = 6 (the second and third bits: 011000 = 6)
• Blk signals CBB2 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB2 = 2

CBB3 settings are:

• Third reclose time = 30s
• Init signals CBB3 = 4 (the third bit: 001000 = 4)
• Blk signals CBB3 = 16 (the fifth bit: 000010 = 16)
• Shot number CBB3 = 3

CBB4 settings are:

• Fourth reclose time = 0.5s
• Init signals CBB4 = 8 (the fourth bit: 000100 = 8)
• Blk signals CBB4 = 0 (no blocking signals related to this CBB)
• Shot number CBB4 = 1

If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line, only one shot is allowed before
lockout. If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line, three shots are allowed before
lockout.

A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a
situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a
third shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional

615 series 711

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

lockout. If the initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an
immediate lockout occurs.

The INIT_5 line is used for blocking purposes. If the INIT_5 line is active
during a sequence start, the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to
lockout.

If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer, the CBB
with the smallest individual number is always selected. For
example, if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the
second shot, that is, the shot pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of
CBB5.

Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR
function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot. The AR
function can, for example, be requested to automatically continue with the
sequence when the circuit breaker fails to close when requested. In such a case, the
AR function issues a CLOSE_CB command. When the wait close time elapses, that
is, the closing of the circuit breaker fails, the next shot is automatically started.
Another example is the embedded generation on the power line, which can make
the synchronism check fail and prevent the reclosing. If the auto-reclose sequence
is continued to the second shot, a successful synchronous reclosing is more likely
than with the first shot, since the second shot lasts longer than the first one.

712 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

A070870 V1 EN

Figure 387: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection

Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the
following:
• Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed
• When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the
auto wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the
synchronism check
• When the circuit breaker does not close, the automatic initiation is carried out
if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the
reclose command
• Both: the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the
circuit breaker does not close.

615 series 713

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated
in the auto-initiation. The default value for this parameter is "0",
which means that no auto-initiation is selected.

A070871 V1 EN

Figure 388: Example of an auto-initiation sequence with synchronization failure

in the first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot

In the first shot, the synchronization condition is not fulfilled (SYNC is FALSE).
When the auto wait timer elapses, the sequence continues to the second shot.
During the second reclosing, the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close
command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed.

After the second shot, the circuit breaker fails to close when the wait close time has
elapsed. The third shot is started and a new close command is given after the third
reclose time has elapsed. The circuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time
starts. When the reclaim time has elapsed, the sequence is concluded successful.

9.4.6.2 Sequence

The auto reclose sequence is implemented by using CBBs. The highest possible
amount of CBBs is seven. If the user wants to have, for example, a sequence of
three shots, only the first three CBBs are needed. Using building blocks instead of
fixed shots gives enhanced flexibility, allowing multiple and adaptive sequences.

Each CBB is identical. The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the
auto-reclose sequence the CBB should be performed, that is, whether the particular
CBB is going to be the first, second, third, fourth or fifth shot.

During the initiation of a CBB, the conditions of initiation and blocking are
checked. This is done for all CBBs simultaneously. Each CBB that fulfils the
initiation conditions requests an execution.

The function also keeps track of shots already performed, that is, at which point the
auto-reclose sequence is from shot 1 to lockout. For example, if shots 1 and 2 have
already been performed, only shots 3 to 5 are allowed.

Additionally, the Enable shot jump setting gives two possibilities:

714 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

• Only such CBBs that are set for the next shot in the sequence can be accepted
for execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2, a
request from CBB set for shot 3 is rejected.
• Any CBB that is set for the next shot or any of the following shots can be
accepted for execution. For example, if the next shot in the sequence should be
shot 2, also CBBs that are set for shots 3, 4 and 5 are accepted. In other words,
shot 2 can be ignored.

In case there are multiple CBBs allowed for execution, the CBB with the smallest
number is chosen. For example, if CBB2 and CBB4 request an execution, CBB2 is
allowed to execute the shot.

The auto-reclose function can perform up to five auto-reclose shots or cycles.

9.4.6.3 Configuration examples

OR CB_ TRIP

PHHPTOC DARREC
I _A OPERATE INIT _1 OPEN _CB
I _B START INIT _2 CLOSE _CB CB_CLOSE
INIT _3 CMD_W AIT
I _C INIT _4 INPRO
BLOCK INIT _5 LOCKED
INIT _6 PROT_ CRD
ENA _MULT UNSUC_ RECL
DEL _INIT _2
DEL _INIT _3 AR_ON
DEL _INIT _4 READY
PHLPTOC
BLK _RECL_ T
I_ A OPERATE BLK _RCLM_T
I_ B START BLK _THERM
CB _POS
I_ C CB _READY
BLOCK INC_ SHOTP
INHIBIT _RECL
ENA_ MULT
RECL _ON
SYNC

EFLPTOC
Io OPERATE
BLOCK START
ENA_ MULT

Circuit breaker position

information from binary input
Conditions to verify if circuit breaker
is ready to be reclosed
A070886 V4 EN

Figure 389: Example connection between protection and autoreclose functions

in IED configuration

It is possible to create several sequences for a configuration.

Autoreclose sequences for overcurrent and non-directional earth-fault protection

applications where high speed and delayed autoreclosings are needed can be as
follows:

615 series 715

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Example 1.
The sequence is implemented by two shots which have the same reclosing time for
all protection functions, namely I>>, I> and Io>. The initiation of the shots is done
by activating the operating signals of the protection functions.

A070887 V1 EN

Figure 390: Autoreclose sequence with two shots

tHSAR Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: First reclose time

tDAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time

tProtection Operating time for the protection stage to clear the fault

tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker

tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker

In this case, the sequence needs two CBBs. The reclosing times for shot 1 and shot
2 are different, but each protection function initiates the same sequence. The CBB
sequence is as follows:

INIT_1 (I>>) Lockout

Shot 1 Shot 2
INIT_2 (I>) (CBB1) (CBB2) Lockout
0.3s 15.0s
INIT_3 (Io>) Lockout

A071270 V2 EN

Figure 391: Two shots with three initiation lines

716 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Table 618: Settings for configuration example 1

Setting name Setting value
Shot number CBB1 1
Init signals CBB1 7 (lines 1,2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7)
First reclose time 0.3s (an example)
Shot number CBB2 2
Init signals CBB2 7 (lines 1,2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7)
Second reclose time 15.0s (an example)

Example 2
There are two separate sequences implemented with three shots. Shot 1 is
implemented by CBB1 and it is initiated with the high stage of the overcurrent
protection (I>>). Shot 1 is set as a high-speed autoreclosing with a short time
delay. Shot 2 is implemented with CBB2 and meant to be the first shot of the
autoreclose sequence initiated by the low stage of the overcurrent protection (I>)
and the low stage of the non-directional earth-fault protection (Io>). It has the same
reclosing time in both situations. It is set as a high-speed autoreclosing for
corresponding faults. The third shot, which is the second shot in the autoreclose
sequence initiated by I> or Io>, is set as a delayed autoreclosing and executed after
an unsuccessful high-speed autoreclosing of a corresponding sequence.

A071272 V1 EN

Figure 392: Autoreclose sequence with two shots with different shot settings
according to initiation signal

615 series 717

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

tHSAR Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: First reclose time

tDAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time

tl>> Operating time for the I>> protection stage to clear the fault

tl> or lo> Operating time for the I> or Io> protection stage to clear the fault

tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker

tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker

In this case, the number of needed CBBs is three, that is, the first shot's reclosing
time depends on the initiation signal. The CBB sequence is as follows:

Shot 1
INIT_1 (I>>) (CBB1) Lockout
1.0s

INIT_2 (I>) Shot 1 Shot 2 Lockout

(CBB2) (CBB3)
INIT_3 (Io>) 0.2s 10.0s Lockout

A071274 V2 EN

Figure 393: Three shots with three initiation lines

If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_1 line, that is, the overcurrent
protection high stage, the sequence is one shot long. On the other hand, if the
sequence is initiated from the INIT_2 or INIT_3 lines, the sequence is two shots
long.

Table 619: Settings for configuration example 2

Setting name Setting value
Shot number CBB1 1
Init signals CBB1 1 (line 1)
First reclose time 0.0s (an example)
Shot number CBB2 1
Init signals CBB2 6 (lines 2 and 3 = 2+4 = 6)
Second reclose time 0.2s (an example)
Shot number CBB3 2
Init signals CBB3 6 (lines 2 and 3 = 2+4 = 6)
Third reclose time 10.0s

9.4.6.4 Delayed initiation lines

The auto-reclose function consists of six individual auto-reclose initiation lines

INIT_1...INIT 6 and three delayed initiation lines:

718 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

• DEL_INIT_2
• DEL_INIT_3
• DEL_INIT_4

DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together with an OR-gate, as are inputs
3 and 4. Inputs 1, 5 and 6 do not have any delayed input. From the auto-reclosing
point of view, it does not matter whether INIT_x or DEL_INIT_x line is used
for shot initiation or blocking.

The auto-reclose function can also open the circuit breaker from any of the
initiation lines. It is selected with the Tripping line setting. As a default, all
initiation lines activate the OPEN_CB output.

A070276 V1 EN

Figure 394: Simplified logic diagram of initiation lines

Each delayed initiation line has four different time settings:

Table 620: Settings for delayed initiation lines

Setting name Description and purpose
Str x delay shot 1 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, where x is
the number of the line 2, 3 or 4. Used for shot 1.
Str x delay shot 2 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for
shot 2.
Str x delay shot 3 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for
shot 3.
Str x delay shot 4 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line, used for
shots 4 and 5. Optionally, can also be used with
SOTF.

615 series 719

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.4.6.5 Shot initiation from protection start signal

In it simplest, all auto-reclose shots are initiated by protection trips. As a result, all
trip times in the sequence are the same. This is why using protection trips may not
be the optimal solution. Using protection start signals instead of protection trips for
initiating shots shortens the trip times.

Example 1
When a two-shot-sequence is used, the start information from the protection
function is routed to the DEL_INIT 2 input and the operate information to the
INIT_2 input. The following conditions have to apply:

• protection operate time = 0.5s

• Str 2 delay shot 1 = 0.05s
• Str 2 delay shot 2 = 60s
• Str 2 delay shot 3 = 60s

Operation in a permanent fault:

1. Protection starts and activates the DEL_INIT 2 input.

2. After 0.05 seconds, the first autoreclose shot is initiated. The function opens
the circuit breaker: the OPEN_CB output activates. The total trip time is the
protection start delay + 0.05 seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.
3. After the first shot, the circuit breaker is reclosed and the protection starts again.
4. Because the delay of the second shot is 60 seconds, the protection is faster and
trips after the set operation time, activating the INIT 2 input. The second
shot is initiated.
5. After the second shot, the circuit breaker is reclosed and the protection starts
again.
6. Because the delay of the second shot is 60 seconds, the protection is faster and
trips after the set operation time. No further shots are programmed after the
final trip. The function is in lockout and the sequence is considered unsuccessful.

Example 2
The delays can be used also for fast final trip. The conditions are the same as in
Example 1, with the exception of Str 2 delay shot 3 = 0.10 seconds.

The operation in a permanent fault is the same as in Example 1, except that after
the second shot when the protection starts again, Str 2 delay shot 3 elapses before
the protection operate time and the final trip follows. The total trip time is the
protection start delay + 0.10 seconds + the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.

9.4.6.6 Fast trip in Switch on to fault

The Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays can also be used to achieve a fast and
accelerated trip with SOTF. This is done by setting the Fourth delay in SOTF

720 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

parameter to "1" and connecting the protection start information to the

corresponding DEL_INIT_ input.

When the function detects a closing of the circuit breaker, that is, any other closing
except the reclosing done by the function itself, it always prohibits shot initiation
for the time set with the Reclaim time parameter. Furthermore, if the Fourth delay
in SOTF parameter is "1", the Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays are also activated.

Example 1
The protection operation time is 0.5 seconds, the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter
is set to "1" and the Str 2 delay shot 4 parameter is 0.05 seconds. The protection
start signal is connected to the DEL_INIT_2 input.

If the protection starts after the circuit breaker closes, the fast trip follows after the
set 0.05 seconds. The total trip time is the protection start delay + 0.05 seconds +
the time it takes to open the circuit breaker.

9.4.7 Signals
Table 621: DARREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INIT_1 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 1
INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 2
INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 3
INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 4
INIT_5 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 5
INIT_6 BOOLEAN 0=False AR initialization / blocking signal 6
DEL_INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 2
DEL_INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 3
DEL_INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0=False Delayed AR initialization / blocking signal 4
BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and resets reclose time
BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and resets reclaim time
BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the
thermal overload
CB_POS BOOLEAN 0=False Circuit breaker position input
CB_READY BOOLEAN 1=True Circuit breaker status signal
INC_SHOTP BOOLEAN 0=False A zone sequence coordination signal
INHIBIT_RECL BOOLEAN 0=False Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
RECL_ON BOOLEAN 0=False Level sensitive signal for allowing (high) / not
allowing (low) reclosing
SYNC BOOLEAN 0=False Synchronizing check fulfilled

615 series 721

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Table 622: DARREC Output signals

Name Type Description
OPEN_CB BOOLEAN Open command for circuit breaker
CLOSE_CB BOOLEAN Close (reclose) command for circuit breaker
CMD_WAIT BOOLEAN Wait for master command
INPRO BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during dead
time
LOCKED BOOLEAN Signal indicating that AR is locked out
PROT_CRD BOOLEAN A signal for coordination between the AR and the
protection
UNSUC_RECL BOOLEAN Indicates an unsuccessful reclosing sequence
AR_ON BOOLEAN Autoreclosing allowed
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR is ready for a new sequence

9.4.8 Settings
Table 623: DARREC Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off/On
5=off
Reclosing operation 1=Off 1=Off Reclosing operation (Off, External Ctl /
2=External Ctl On)
3=On
Manual close mode 0=False 0=False Manual close mode
1=True
Wait close time 50...10000 ms 50 250 Allowed CB closing time after reclose
command
Max wait time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for haltDeadTime
release
Max trip time 100...10000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for deactivation of
protection signals
Close pulse time 10...10000 ms 10 200 CB close pulse time
Max Thm block time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Maximum wait time for thermal blocking
signal deactivation
Cut-out time 0...1800000 ms 100 10000 Cutout time for protection coordination
Reclaim time 100...1800000 ms 100 10000 Reclaim time
Dsr time shot 1 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for first reclosing
Dsr time shot 2 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for second reclosing
Dsr time shot 3 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for third reclosing
Dsr time shot 4 0...10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for fourth reclosing
Terminal priority 1=None 1=None Terminal priority
2=Low (follower)
3=High (master)
Synchronisation set 0...127 0 Selection for synchronizing requirement
for reclosing
Table continues on next page

722 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Auto wait time 0...60000 ms 10 2000 Wait time for reclosing condition fullfilling
Auto lockout reset 0=False 1=True Automatic lockout reset
1=True
Protection crd limit 1...5 1 Protection coordination shot limit
Protection crd mode 1=No condition 4=AR inop, CB Protection coordination mode
2=AR inoperative man
3=CB close manual
4=AR inop, CB man
5=Always
Auto initiation cnd 1=Not allowed 2=When sync fails Auto initiation condition
2=When sync fails
3=CB
doesn&apos;t close
4=Both
Tripping line 0...63 0 Tripping line, defines INIT inputs which
cause OPEN_CB activation
Control line 0...63 63 Control line, defines INIT inputs which
are protection signals
Enable shot jump 0=False 1=True Enable shot jumping
1=True
CB closed Pos status 0=False 0=False Circuit breaker closed position status
1=True
Fourth delay in SOTF 0=False 0=False Sets 4th delay into use for all DEL_INIT
1=True signals during SOTF
First reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB1
Second reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB2
Third reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB3
Fourth reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB4
Fifth reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB5
Sixth reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB6
Seventh reclose time 0...300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB7
Init signals CBB1 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB1
Init signals CBB2 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB2
Init signals CBB3 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB3
Init signals CBB4 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB4
Init signals CBB5 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB5
Init signals CBB6 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB6
Init signals CBB7 0...63 0 Initiation lines for CBB7
Blk signals CBB1 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB1
Blk signals CBB2 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB2
Blk signals CBB3 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB3
Blk signals CBB4 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB4
Blk signals CBB5 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB5
Blk signals CBB6 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB6
Blk signals CBB7 0...63 0 Blocking lines for CBB7
Table continues on next page

615 series 723

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Shot number CBB1 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB1
Shot number CBB2 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB2
Shot number CBB3 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB3
Shot number CBB4 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB4
Shot number CBB5 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB5
Shot number CBB6 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB6
Shot number CBB7 0...5 0 Shot number for CBB7
Str 2 delay shot 1 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2, 1st reclose
Str 2 delay shot 2 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2 2nd reclose
Str 2 delay shot 3 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2 3rd reclose
Str 2 delay shot 4 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2, 4th reclose
Str 3 delay shot 1 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3, 1st reclose
Str 3 delay shot 2 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3 2nd reclose
Str 3 delay shot 3 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3 3rd reclose
Str 3 delay shot 4 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3, 4th reclose
Str 4 delay shot 1 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start4, 1st reclose
Str 4 delay shot 2 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start4 2nd reclose
Str 4 delay shot 3 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start4 3rd reclose
Str 4 delay shot 4 0...300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start4, 4th reclose
Frq Op counter limit 0...250 0 Frequent operation counter lockout limit
Frq Op counter time 1...250 min 1 Frequent operation counter time
Frq Op recovery time 1...250 min 1 Frequent operation counter recovery time
Auto init 0...63 0 Defines INIT lines that are activated at
auto initiation

9.4.9 Monitored data

Table 624: DARREC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DISA_COUNT BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for counter
1=True disabling
FRQ_OPR_CNT INT32 0...2147483647 Frequent operation
counter
FRQ_OPR_AL BOOLEAN 0=False Frequent operation
1=True counter alarm
STATUS Enum -2=Unsuccessful AR status signal for
-1=Not defined IEC61850
1=Ready
2=In progress
3=Successful
ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing sequence is in
1=True progress
Table continues on next page

724 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

INPRO_1 BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing shot in
1=True progress, shot 1
INPRO_2 BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing shot in
1=True progress, shot 2
INPRO_3 BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing shot in
1=True progress, shot 3
INPRO_4 BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing shot in
1=True progress, shot 4
INPRO_5 BOOLEAN 0=False Reclosing shot in
1=True progress, shot 5
DISCR_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=False Signal indicating that
1=True discrimination time is in
progress
CUTOUT_INPRO BOOLEAN 0=False Signal indicating that cut-
1=True out time is in progress
SUC_RECL BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates a successful
1=True reclosing sequence
UNSUC_CB BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates an
1=True unsuccessful CB closing
CNT_SHOT1 INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation
counter, shot 1
CNT_SHOT2 INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation
counter, shot 2
CNT_SHOT3 INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation
counter, shot 3
CNT_SHOT4 INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation
counter, shot 4
CNT_SHOT5 INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation
counter, shot 5
COUNTER INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation
counter, all shots
SHOT_PTR INT32 0...7 Shot pointer value
MAN_CB_CL BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates CB manual
1=True closing during reclosing
sequence
SOTF BOOLEAN 0=False Switch-onto-fault
1=True
DARREC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

9.4.10 Technical data

Table 625: DARREC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms

615 series 725

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.4.11 Technical revision history

Table 626: Technical revision history
Technical revision Change
B The PROT_DISA output removed and removed
the related settings
C The default value of the CB closed Pos status
setting changed from "True" to "False"

9.5 Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC

9.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tap changer control with voltage OLATCC COLTC 90V
regulator

9.5.2 Function block

GUID-D28AEF4D-C38D-4F4A-908F-22FBFAB139CB V2 EN

Figure 395: Function block

9.5.3 Functionality
The tap changer control with voltage regulator function OLATCC (on-load tap
changer controller) is designed for regulating the voltage of power transformers
with on-load tap changers in distribution substations. OLATCC provides a manual
or automatic voltage control of the power transformer by using the raising or
lowering signals to the on-load tap changer.

726 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

The automatic voltage regulation can be used in single or parallel transformer

applications. Parallel operation can be based on Master/Follower (M/F), Negative
Reactance Principle (NRP) or Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC).

OLATCC includes the line drop compensation (LDC) functionality, and the load
decrease is possible with a dynamic voltage reduction.

Either definite time characteristic (DT) or inverse time characteristic (IDMT) is

selectable for delays between the raising and lowering operations.

The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the voltage

control operations with an external signal or with the supervision functionality of
the function.

9.5.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the tap changer control with voltage regulator function can be
described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in
the next sections.

615 series 727

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

RAISE_LOCAL Manual
LOWER_LOCAL voltage
CON_STATUS regulation

PARALLEL Operation PARALLEL

mode
AUTO selection AUTO

RSV Automatic
voltage
I_A regulation
I_B
I_C
Auto
U_AB single FLLW1_CTL
FLLW2_CTL
TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL
Auto PAR_FAIL
TR1_TAP_POS
parallel
TR2_TAP_POS (Master)
TR3_TAP_POS

Auto
TAPCHG_FLLW parallel Pulse RAISE_OWN
(Follower) control LOWER_OWN
Timer
Auto t
parallel
(NRP)

TR1_I_AMPL t Alarm
ALARM
indication
TR1_I_ANGL Auto
TR2_I_AMPL parallel
(MCC) TIMER_ON
TR2_I_ANGL
TR3_I_AMPL TR0_I_AMPL
TR3_I_ANGL TR0_I_ANGL
BLKD_I_LOD
Blocking BLKD_U_UN
LTC_BLOCK
scheme BLKD_U_OV
BLKD_I_CIR
TCO BLKD_LTCBLK

GUID-BC07A9CF-D378-4A60-AFAF-DB6021BD082D V2 EN

Figure 396: Functional module diagram

9.5.5 Voltage and current measurements

The measured voltage must be a phase-to-phase voltage from the regulated side.
Typically, it is the phase-to-phase voltage U_AB from the secondary side of the
power transformer. If the phase voltages are measured, the voltage U_AB is
calculated internally in the IED.

Currents from the secondary side of the power transformer (I_A – I_C) have
several uses.

728 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

• The highest phase current value is used for overcurrent blocking.

• The currents from the secondary side of the power transformer are used for
line drop compensation (average of the connected inputs).
• The currents from the secondary side of the power transformer are used for
calculating the circulating current in the Negative Reactance Principle (NRP)
and Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC) operation modes.

Both voltage U_AB and the phase currents from the secondary side (I_x, where x
is A, B or C) are always measured using the value of the filtered fundamental
frequency component (DFT). Hence, the harmonics are always suppressed.
Moreover, the measured voltage value is continuously average-filtered with the eight-
value-long sliding window where the resulting filtering delay is not compensated.
The phase-compensated voltage U_A is always used in calculations, although it is
not connected. Um is the averaged value used for control and its magnitude can be
read from the monitored data U_MEAS.

Similarly, the magnitude of the phase current of the own transformer, I_x, and the
phase angle difference between the internally phase-compensated voltage U_A and
phase current I_x are also average-filtered by the same length-fixed window. The
phase angle value can be read from the monitored data ANGL_UA_IA. These
currents and phase angle differences are used solely on circulating current
calculations.

The angle difference is used in Equation 91, Equation 92 and

Equation 94.

There are minimum limits for the voltage and current magnitudes, resulting in the
magnitude and phase angle difference values diverging from zero. The voltage
magnitude must exceed three percent of Un and the current I_A must exceed two
percent of In.

9.5.6 Tap changer position inputs

The position value of the tap changer can be brought to OLATCC as a resistance
value, a mA signal or as a binary-coded signal. More information on how the
resistance value, the mA signal or a binary-coded interface are implemented can be
found in TPOSSLTC in the technical manual of the IED.

The indicated tap changer position of the own transformer is internally connected
to the TAP_POS input, and the tap changer positions of the parallel transformers
are fed to the other TRx_TAP_POS inputs. This also defines the connection
identity so that follower 1 is connected to TR1_TAP_POS, follower 2 is connected
to TR2_TAP_POS and follower 3 is connected to TR3_TAP_POS. The own
transformer position can be read from the monitored data TAP_POS. The follower
tap changer positions can also be read from the input data TRx_TAP_POS, where
x is a value between 1 and 3.

615 series 729

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

The tap changer position value is given in parentheses. For example, (0) indicates
that there is no tap changer position connected or the tap changer position value
quality is bad. Typically, if no tap changer position is connected, all the
TPOSSLTC binary inputs are FALSE by default and the value shown is (0). A
value other than zero indicates bad quality. A bad-quality tap changer position is
dealt by OLATCC like unconnected tap position information.

9.5.7 Operation mode selection

OLATCC has the Operation mode and Auto parallel mode settings for selecting the
desired operation mode. The Operation mode setting can have any of the following
values: "Manual", "Auto single", "Auto parallel" and "Input control". If the
Operation mode setting is set to "Input control", the acting operation mode is
determined by the inputs PARALLEL and AUTO. The PARALLEL input defines if
the transformer (voltage regulator) is in the parallel or single mode. The AUTO
input defines the operation status in the single mode. The output signals
PARALLEL and AUTO echo fed input signals when the Operation mode setting is
set to "Input control". Otherwise the PARALLEL and AUTO monitored data
represent acting "Parallel or single operation" and "Auto/Manual indication"
respectively.

Table 627: Acting operation mode determined by the operation mode inputs
PARALLEL AUTO Operation Mode
0 0 Manual
0 1 Auto single
1 0 or 1 Auto parallel

Furthermore, if Operation mode has been set to "Auto parallel", the second setting
parameter Auto parallel mode defines the parallel mode and the alternatives are
"Auto master", "Auto follower", "MCC" or "NRP".

The acting operation mode can be read from the monitored data OPR_MODE_STS.

Command Exclusion
An acting operation mode change using two inputs (PARALLEL and AUTO) and
setting group change (either with the input or via menu) is needed when the acting
operation mode must be changed automatically, that is, there is a logic which
drives these two inputs and setting group change based on the status information
from the circuit breakers.

The common Local/Remote (L/R) exclusion concerns the manual raising and
lowering commands of OLATCC, that is, it internally proves the exclusion
mechanism to prevent the remote commands (from SCADA) when the IED is in
local mode.

730 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.5.8 Manual voltage regulation

The manual raising and lowering commands can be given either via the
configuration inputs LOWER_LOCAL and RAISE_LOCAL, via the HMI of the IED
or via remote commands. The acting operation mode of OLATCC must be set to
"Manual" and the Local/Remote control LR state monitored data of the IED has to
be "Local" to execute the control commands manually from HMI or via
configuration inputs. Although OLATCC is set to "Manual" but the LR state is set
to "OFF" or "Remote", no manual control commands can be given.

For remote commands, the acting operation mode of the OLATCC function must
also be set to "Manual" and the LR state monitored data has to be "Remote".

The manual raising or lowering commands can be given locally either via the
Manual control parameter ("Cancel"/"Lower"/"Raise") located in the HMI menu
Control/OLATCC1 or via the configuration inputs LOWER_LOCAL or
RAISE_LOCAL.

A raising command is given by selecting the enumeration value "Raise" and the
lowering command is given by selecting the enumeration value "Lower". An
accepted manual raising/lowering command activates the corresponding output
RAISE_OWN or LOWER_OWN to control the voltage of the own transformer.

Voltage control vs. tap changer moving direction

OLATCC has the control settings Lower block tap and Raise block tap. The Lower
block tap and Raise block tap settings should give the tap changer position that
results in the lowest and highest controlled voltage value (usually at the LV side of
the transformer). The setting of both Raise block tap value higher than Lower block
tap value and Lower block tap value higher than Raise block tap value is allowed.

When the value of Raise block tap exceeds the Lower block tap value, the raise
control activates the RAISE_OWN output. This results in raising the tap changer
position, and the measured voltage rises. Furthermore, the RAISE_OWN output
value is TRUE. If the own tap changer position is connected (that is, the own tap
changer's quality is good), the tap changer alarm is activated if the tap changer does
not move upwards in the Cmd error delay time setting after the pulse activation,
resulting that ALARM_REAS in the monitored data contains a command error
value. The Cmd error delay time setting default value is 20 seconds.

The lowering control works in a similar way, as shown in Figure 397. In the output
data the LOWER_OWN output value is TRUE. An alarm is generated if the tap
changer does not move downwards in Cmd error delay time after the pulse
activation (assuming that the own tap changer position is connected).

In the second case, the parameters are set so that the value of Lower block tap
exceeds the value of Raise block tap. The raising control activates the
RAISE_OWN output. The result should be that the tap changer lowers its position
and the measured voltage rises. Furthermore, the RAISE_OWN output value is
TRUE in the output data. If the own tap changer position is connected, the tap

615 series 731

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

changer alarm is activated if the tap changer does not move downwards in Cmd
error delay time after the pulse activation, resulting that ALARM_REAS in the
monitored data contains a command error value.

The lowering control works in a similar way, as shown in Figure 397. In the output
data, the LOWER_OWN output value is TRUE. An alarm is generated if the tap
changer does not move upwards in Cmd error delay time after the pulse activation,
assuming that the own tap changer position is connected.

9.5.9 Automatic voltage regulation of single transformer

OLATCC is intended to control the power transformers with a motor-driven on-
load tap changer. The function is designed to regulate the voltage at the secondary
side of the power transformer. The control method is based on a step-by-step
principle, which means that one control pulse at a time is issued to the tap changer
mechanism to move it exactly one position upwards or downwards. However,
when intermediate steps are not indicated for the tap changer, it does not cause
alarm if more than one step change is met.

The purpose of the regulator is to maintain a stable secondary voltage of the power
transformer. The basis for this operation is the Band center voltage setting. By
increasing or decreasing various compensation factors, the regulator calculates a
control voltage from the band center voltage as shown in Equation 89. Hence, the
control voltage is the desired transformer secondary voltage to be maintained by
the regulator. The control voltage is compared to the measured voltage and the
difference between the two forms the regulating process error.

Since the tap changer changes the voltage in steps, a certain error has to be
allowed. The error, called Band width voltage, is also set by the user. A
recommended setting for Band width voltage should be close to twice the step
voltage of the transformer ΔUstep and never below it as a minimum. For example,
Band width voltage is twice the value of ΔUstep in Figure 397.

If the measured voltage fluctuates within the control voltage ± half the Band width
voltage setting, the regulator is inactive. If the measured voltage is outside the half-
bandwidth voltage limits, an adjustable delay T1 (Control delay time 1 ) starts, as
shown in Figure 397, where the lowering function is an example. The delay T1
remains active as long as the measured voltage is outside the hysteresis limits of
half the value of Band width voltage. The factory setting for the hysteresis is 10
percent of the set Band width voltage.

732 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

T1 reset
T1 start

T1 start

Lower
U
T1

bandwidth limit
hysteresis limit
ΔUstep Um, measured voltage
Band
width Up, control voltage
voltage

t
GUID-65BA0EC4-8E96-41E1-B273-3519DF5C25E1 V2 EN

Figure 397: Voltage-regulating function. A control pulse to lower the voltage is

issued after the elapsed T1.

If the measured voltage is outside the hysteresis when the delay counter T1 reaches
its setting value, the raising or lowering output relay is activated. This activates
either output pulse RAISE_OWN or LOWER_OWN, and the motor drive of the tap
changer operates. The status of these outputs can be read from the output data
RAISE_OWN or LOWER_OWN.

If the measured voltage falls or rises within the hysteresis limits during the
operating time, the delay counter is reset.

The pulse length can be defined with the LTC pulse time setting. The default value
is 1.5 seconds.

A short delay same as the typical tap changer operating time is active before the
start of the next operating timer is possible. For OLATCC, the delay is set to 6
seconds. If one tap changer operation is not enough to regulate the transformer
voltage within the hysteresis limits, a second adjustable delay T2 (Control delay
time 2), usually with a shorter time setting than T1, starts. This delay is used for the
control commands within the same sequence until the recovery of voltage occurs.
The delays T1 and T2 can be selected either with definite or inverse time
characteristics. In the inverse time mode operation, the operating time depends on
the difference between the control voltage and the measured voltage as shown in
Equation 95. The bigger the difference in the voltage, the shorter the operating
time. More information on the inverse time operation can be found in the OLATCC
timer characteristics chapter.

Regulation equation
The simple regulating principle is often complemented by additional features to
take the voltage drop of lines into account (line drop compensation), coordinate the
regulation of parallel transformers and change the voltage level according to the

615 series 733

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

loading state of the network. The control voltage Up is calculated according to the
equation
Up = Us + U z + U ci − U rsv
GUID-86D55536-6EF1-43CB-BA21-EF57280DEBB4 V1 EN (Equation 89)

Up Control voltage

Us Set voltage level Band center voltage

Uz Line drop compensation term

Uci Circulating current compensation term

Ursv Voltage reduction parameter

Up can be directly read in the monitored data U_CTL.

The circulating current compensation term is calculated only in the parallel acting
operation modes "NRP" and "MCC".

Line Drop Compensation (LDC)

The line drop compensation feature is used to compensate the voltage drop along a
line or network fed by the transformer. The compensation setting parameters can
be calculated theoretically if the resistance and reactance of the line are known or
measured practically from the line drop.

IL
RL XL

Load
UB UL

GUID-552C931B-4A1A-4361-8068-0A151CB99F30 V2 EN

Figure 398: Equivalent electrical circuit for calculating the LDC term

The compensation parameters Line drop V Ris (Ur) and Line drop V React (Ux), are
percentage values of Un according to the equations.

734 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

3 × ICT _ n1 × R
Line drop V Ris = U r [% ] = × 100 [%U n ]
UVT _ n1
3 × ICT _ n1 × X
Line drop V React = U x [ %] = × 100 [%U n ]
UVT _ n1
GUID-B79F4E6B-B70E-4D85-BD8C-7877BD52A334 V1 EN (Equation 90)

ICT_n1 Nominal primary current of the CT

UVT_n1 Nominal primary voltage of the VT (phase-to-phase voltage)

R Resistance of the line, Ω/phase

X Reactance of the line, Ω/phase

The general LDC equation can be calculated.

Iinjected (U r [%] cos ϕ + U x [%] sin ϕ )

Uz = × [ xU n ]
In 100
GUID-B004A188-862D-4015-868D-8654F8F5D214 V1 EN (Equation 91)

Iinjected Average of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C

Ur Setting Line drop V Ris

Ux Setting Line drop V React

φ Phase angle between U_A and I_A (ANGL_UA_IA in monitored data)

By default, the line drop compensation (LDC) is not active. LDC is activated by
setting LDC enable to "True". To keep the LDC term within acceptable limits in all
situations, OLATCC has a setting parameter LDC limit, which has a default value
of 0.10 xUn. As a result, this gives the maximum value for Uz in Equation 89.

If more than one line is connected to the LV busbar, the equivalent impedance is
calculated and given as a parameter setting as shown in Figure 398 for the
equivalent electrical circuit for calculating LDC. For example, if there are N
number of identical lines with identical loads in the substation, the R- and X-values
needed for the settings Line drop V React and Line drop V Ris are obtained by
dividing the resistance and the reactance of one line by N. Because the voltage
drop is different in lines with different impedances and load currents, it is
necessary to make a compromise when setting the Line drop V React and Line drop
V Ris settings. Raising the voltage in the point of lowest voltage must not lead to
overvoltage elsewhere.

By default, the line drop compensation is effective only on the normal active power
flow direction. If the active power flow in the transformer turns opposite, that is,
from the regulated side towards the system in the upper level, the LDC term is
ignored, that is, set to zero. In such a case, it is assumed that the feeding units at the
regulated side of the transformers maintain proper voltage levels. This can cause a
conflict if the transformer tries to reduce the voltage at the substation. Additionally,

615 series 735

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

it is difficult to predict the actual voltage levels in the feeder lines in such a case,
and lowering the voltage at the substation can have harmful effects in the far end of
the network. However, the Rv Pwr flow allowed setting allows also negative LDC
terms to be taken into equation.

The topology changes in the network can cause changes to the equivalent
impedance value of the network. If the change is substantial, the setting groups can
be used to switch between different setting values for Line drop V React and Line
drop V Ris. In practice this means that the boolean-type information from the
topology change is connected to the active setting group change.

The use of the LDC equation in the case of parallel transformers is described in the
Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers chapter.

Reduce Set Voltage (RSV) input

The system frequency decreases when the active power production in the network
is smaller than its consumption. Either the power supply has to be increased or
some loads have to be shed to restore the power balance.

The simplest way to decrease the load is to reduce the voltage level by giving a
lower band center voltage value to the regulators. For this purpose, OLATCC has
the setting group parameter Band reduction. The RSV input activation results in
reduction. If this input is set to TRUE, a set target voltage value is decreased by
Band reduction. If more than one RSV reduction steps are desired, the setting group
change has to be used where different Band reduction values are supported. The
decreased value is kept as a target value as long as the RSV input is TRUE.

Because the decrease of frequency indicates a need to reduce the load, it is

practical to connect the start signal of an underfrequency function block to the RSV
digital input.

It depends on the load characteristics how much the load is reduced as the voltage
drops. For instance, purely resistive loads are proportional to the square of the
voltage, whereas motor drives based on frequency controllers may draw constant
power despite small voltage changes.

The status of the RSV input can be read from the RSV input data.

9.5.10 Automatic voltage regulation of parallel transformers

It is likely that a circulating current between transformers occurs if two or more
transformers with slightly different ratios are energized in parallel. This is due to
the unbalanced short circuit impedances of the parallel transformers. To avoid such
currents, the tap changers of the transformers should be adjusted to achieve
equilibrium. If the transformers are assumed identical, the tap (voltage) steps and
tap positions should also match. In this case, the Master/Follower principle can be
used. However, unequally rated transformers with different tap steps can be
connected in parallel and these configurations can also be managed by the tap
changer control function. For these configurations, the Minimizing Circulating

736 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Current (MCC) or Negative Reactance Principle (NRP) should be used. The MCC
and NRP principles are also suitable for identical transformers.

The circulating current, which is almost purely inductive, is defined as negative if

it flows towards the transformer. Uci in Equation 89 is positive and the control
voltage Up rises as a result to the RAISE_OWN output signal activation if the
circulating current level is sufficient (Equation 92 and Equation 94) and the other
parameters remain the same. As a result, the voltage rise should diminish the
circulating current.

LDC equation and parallel connection

The additional challenge in the parallel connection regarding the line drop
compensation is to know the total current which flows through the parallel
transformers.

In the Master/Follower mode, it is easier to know the total current than in other
parallel modes since the transformers are assumed to have identical ratings, that is,
the total current (Iinjected in Equation 91) is obtained by multiplying the measured
load current (the average of the secondary currents I_A, I_B and I_C of the
connected own transformer) with the number of parallel transformers. OLATCC
can internally conclude the number of parallel transformers from the connected tap
changer position inputs. However, if there is no connected position information
from the other parallel transformers, the correct number of the parallel
transformers, excluding the own transformer, needs to be set with the Parallel
trafos setting.

In the MCC mode, the horizontal communication transfers the information from
the measured load currents between the regulators so that the total current needed
in the line drop compensation can be summed accurately. Here, Iinjected is defined
to be the phasor sum of all the parallel power transformer secondary-side currents.
The currents from other transformers must be fed via the TRx_I_AMPL and
TRx_I_ANGL inputs.

In the NRP mode, the parallel transformers have different ratings and there is no
communication between the regulators. Therefore, when setting Line drop V React
and Line drop V Ris, the ICT_n1 used in the equation should be the sum of the rated
currents of all the transformers operating in parallel. Here, Iinjected is also defined as
the average of the connected secondary currents (I_A, I_B and I_C). The calculated
line drop compensation value can be read from the monitored data LDC.

9.5.10.1 Master/Follower principle M/F

The Master/Follower (M/F) operation principle is suitable for power transformers

with identical ratings and step voltages. One voltage regulator (master) measures
and controls and the other regulators (followers) follow the master, that is, all the
tap changers connected in parallel are synchronized. This parallel operation is
obtained by connecting the FLLWx_CTL output of the master to the corresponding
input TAPCHG_FLLW of the followers via a horizontal GOOSE communication.

615 series 737

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

The values for the FLLWx_CTL command are 1=Lower follower x and 2=Raise
follower x. Consequently, the values for the TAPCHG_FLLW command are
1=Lower and 2=Raise.

If several regulators are to act as masters (one at a time), their outputs also have to
be routed to the inputs of other regulators. To start the parallel operation, the
master regulator is set to the "Auto master" mode and the followers to the "Auto
follower" mode. To implement this setting, a group changing has to be planned.

To keep all the tap changers in the same position, the master needs to know the tap
positions of the followers. This way, the circulating current is kept at its minimum.
The position values of the followers can be brought to the master either via the
horizontal GOOSE communication or TPOSSLTC.

If it is not possible to use horizontal communication between the IEDs and the
position information cannot be wired from the parallel transformers, the M/F
principle can still be used to regulate two or an unlimited number of transformers
in parallel. Since the master cannot detect the tap positions of parallel transformers,
it just activates the lowering and raising outputs for all the followers when it
controls its own tap changer. This is called blind control. In this case, a number of
parallel transformers are regulated as one unit. The tap position inputs 1…3
(TR1_TAP_POS..TR3_TAP_POS) must be left unconnected for the master to
know that the tap positions of the followers are unknown. The time delay between
successive commands can be set by the Follower delay time setting. The default
value is six seconds.

When a disconnected transformer is taken into use and the tap position is unknown,
the follower should be manually controlled to the same position as the master. This
can also take place in the master/follower mode. First, the master gives a control
command to its own transformer, that is, it is echoed to the followers (the follower
tap positions have to be connected). Thereafter, successive control commands to
the followers take place until the master and followers have the same tap positions.

Out-of-step function
The out-of-step function is usually used in the M/F modes only. The out-of-step
function means that the master is able to detect the position values of the followers
and control them to the same position as the master is. In this case, the master
assumes that the followers also have either Raise block tap higher than Lower
block tap or Lower block tap higher than Raise block tap because this defines what
is the given command pulse for a follower. If the master has Raise block tap higher
than Lower block tap and the follower has Lower block tap higher than Raise block
tap, the corresponding TAPCHG_FLLW included control signals should be
connected crosswise. This requires an extra logic where dual-point command bits
have to be converted, that is, 0=>0, [01]=1=>[10]=2 and [10]=2=>[01]=1.

M/F is the only parallel mode which has an out-of-step functionality. In the MCC
and NRP operation modes, the circulating current is minimized, which most
probably means different tap positions in the parallel transformers. Moreover, these
modes allow different ratings and step voltages for the parallel transformers.

738 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Therefore, it is reasonable to apply the out-of-step function only to the M/F

operation mode.

The out-of-step function is triggered when the master detects a difference of at

least one step between the tap changer positions in the follower and in the master.
The master then sends special raising or lowering commands to the diverged
follower. If two consecutive commands fail to change the position of the follower
to the right direction, the master activates the PAR_FAIL output, that is,
PAR_FAIL is set to TRUE, and stops the special recovery efforts. However, every
time the master controls its own tap changer later, it always sends a controlling
pulse to the diverged follower too. Furthermore, if the master notices a correct
position change after a sent pulse, it restarts the attempt to drive the follower to the
same position and deactivates the PAR_FAIL output, that is, PAR_FAIL is set to
FALSE. However, if there still are diverged followers, the reset is not indicated. It
is indicated only when no diverged followers exist. Monitoring, and hence the
indication of a paralleling failure, is not possible in blind control. The followers
with a parallel failure can be read from the monitored data FAIL_FLLW. For
example, if only follower 3 is in the parallel failure state, FAIL_FLLW has the
value "Follower 3". If both followers 1 and 2 are in the parallel failure state,
FAIL_FLLW has the value "Followers 1+2". By default, when no failed followers
exist, the value is "No failed followers".

9.5.10.2 Negative Reactance Principle NRP

This parallel control scheme is suitable for power transformers with different
ratings and step voltages. Since no communication between the regulators is
needed, this principle can be applied even when the parallel transformers are
located at different substations. To start the parallel operation, the acting operation
mode has to be set to "NRP" for all the regulators of the connection. The acting
operation mode can be changed via function block inputs or by setting either
locally or remotely.

When applying this principle, each regulator has a phase angle setting φLoad
(setting parameter Load phase angle) towards which it tries to regulate the current.
The setting value is chosen according to the expected power factor of the load
(positive setting value equals inductive load). When the actual phase angle of the
load current is the same as the setting and the transformers and their tap changer
positions are identical, the currents of the two or more transformers are in the same
phase as the total load current. If the tap changer positions are different, the
circulating current flows and the currents of different transformers either lag or
lead the load current. Figure 399 shows that the circulating current is the reactive
component which separates the measured current vector from the expected angle
value.

615 series 739

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

U_A
φLOAD
φ1 ILOAD x sin(φLOAD)
ILOAD

ITR1 x sin(φ1)
Ici = circulating
current

ITR1

ILOAD = ITR1 x │cos(φ1)│/cos(φLOAD)

GUID-2B71B160-FB76-4BE0-952F-75F42220401F V2 EN

Figure 399: The expected phase angle of the load supplied by the transformers
operating in parallel is entered as a setting value φLoad

The regulators calculate the circulating current with the equation

I ci = (sin ϕ1 − tan ϕ Load × cos ϕ1 ) × ITR1
GUID-823FAEEA-589B-4C8E-81CD-E5FECF28BF06 V1 EN (Equation 92)

ITR1 Average of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C

φ1 Phase angle between U_A and I_A

φLoad The set Load phase angle of the load current

In the negative reactance method, the circulating current is minimized by changing

the control voltage according to the measured circulating current. The regulator
calculates the circulating current compensation term Uci using the equation

− I ci Stability
U ci = × ×U n
In 100
GUID-2A7864D3-D59F-47F9-84FD-B3F2C15178EB V1 EN (Equation 93)

Ici Circulating current

Stability Stability setting (the recommended value depends on the loop impedance)

If the transformers operating in parallel have different rated currents, the value of
the Stability factor setting of the regulator should be proportional to the rated
currents, that is, the higher the rated current, the higher the Stability factor setting
value.

740 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

By comparing the reactive components of the currents measured by the different

regulators it is possible to find out if the circulating current has been minimized.
The circulating current is minimized when the reactive components are equal.

The negative reactance method gives satisfactory results only if the phase angle of
the load current is known relatively accurately. If the actual phase angle deviates
from the phase angle setting, a regulating error occurs. However, for the cases
where there is an occasional stepwise change in the phase angle of the load, the
regulating error can be suppressed with the logic. This kind of stepwise change can
occur, for example, when a capacitor bank is switched on to compensate a reactive
power flow.

Another possibility is to use an automatic setting group change between setting

groups in different loading situations. The setting groups then have different set
values for the load phase angle.

9.5.10.3 Minimizing Circulating Current principle MCC

The MCC principle is an optimal solution for controlling the parallel transformers
of different ratings or step voltages in substations with varying reactive loads.
Since this control scheme allows the exchange of data between regulators, the
circulating current can be calculated more accurately than with other schemes.
However, a maximum of four regulators can be connected in parallel. To start the
parallel operation, the acting operation mode parameter has to be set to "MCC" for
all the regulators of the connection. Furthermore, the signal CON_STATUS must
indicate that the transformers are connected to the network. A unit that is
minimizing the circulating current must have the acting operation mode set to
"MCC". However, units that have the acting operation mode set to "Manual" do not
perform any circulating current minimization operations themselves.

U_A
φ1
φ2 ITR1 x sin(φ1)
ITR1

ITR2 x sin(φ2)
2 x Ici

ITR2

Ici = circulating current

GUID-F73692B0-629D-4C0A-BFAB-648B0A832E42 V2 EN

Figure 400: The circulating current between two parallel transformers

615 series 741

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

In this case, the circulating current can be calculated with the equation
(sin φ1 × ITR1 − sin φ2 × ITR 2 )
Ici =
2
GUID-5898550F-0095-4173-91ED-4D5AFFC7B58D V2 EN (Equation 94)

ITR1 Average primary value of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C measured by regulator 1

ITR2 Average primary value of the currents I_A, I_B and I_C measured by regulator 2

φ1 Phase angle between U_A and I_A in regulator 1

φ2 Phase angle between U_A and I_A in regulator 2

The circulation current can be read from the monitored data I_CIR.

Using the circulating current, the compensation term Uci can be calculated with the
equation

−Ici Stability
Uci = × × Un
ICT _ n1 100
GUID-173A1FA0-8C07-4BA8-AAEB-62F95E10396C V2 EN

Ici Circulating current, primary value

ICT_n1 Nominal primary current of the CT

Stability factor Stability setting (the recommended value depends on the loop impedance)

Using the circulating current, a compensation term Uci can be calculated using
Equation 93. The value of Uci, which can be positive or negative, is considered by
adding it to the Band center voltage Us (Equation 89). According to Figure 400 and
Equation 94, the phasor information from the other IEDs is needed.

Parallel unit detection and the MCC mode

The network connection status information is essential for the MCC operation
mode. The status FALSE needs to be connected to the CON_STATUS input to
ensure a proper operation of the MCC calculation if the transformer is disconnected
but OLATCC remains in the MCC mode. This way the disconnected transformer is
excluded from the circulating current calculations.

The CON_STATUS input is used to identify if a certain transformer controller is

able to send the current information to other transformer controllers for circulating
current minimization purposes. As a result, this input has effect only in the MCC or
Manual acting operation modes. In these modes, if CON_STATUS is TRUE, the
information transmission is started. The circulating current information receiving is
allowed only in the MCC acting operation mode when CON_STATUS is TRUE.
PAR_UNIT_MCC can be seen in the monitored data view.

742 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Communication and the MCC mode

The phasor information from the other parallel IEDs is needed for the circular
current calculation. Therefore, horizontal GOOSE communication is needed
between IEDs when the MCC principle is used.

The transferred current phasor contains the primary value of the measured current.
The received current phasor information can be read from the input data
TRx_I_AMPL and TRx_I_ANGL for the magnitude and angle respectively. The
value "x" gives the connected parallel transformer number, a value between 1 and 3.

The sent phasor information always represents the difference between the voltage
phasor U_A and I_A. This information regarding the current phasor can be read
from the output data TR0_I_AMPL and TR0_I_ANGL. The allowed acting
operation modes for sending data are MCC or Manual, both with the input
CON_STATUS activated. The communication can be seen to be active when the
sent and received phasor magnitude is not clamped to zero. The communication
phasor magnitude found to be zero results either from a rejected acting operation
mode or too low signal magnitudes (see Voltage and current measurements
chapter). Active CON_STATUS indicates that the corresponding transformer is
connected to network and its current affects the circular current of other
transformers even when it is itself in the manual operating mode.

9.5.11 Timer characteristics

Operation timer functionality
The delay times can be set to follow either the definite time characteristic or the
inverse time characteristic with the Delay characteristic setting. By default, the
"Definite time" type is selected. The timer mode cannot be changed between cycles
T1 and T2, only either before T1 has started or after T2 has elapsed.

Table 628: Different timer mode delays

Timer mode Setting Description
T1 Control delay time 1 First delay when the measured voltage
exceeds or falls below the limit value.
T2 Control delay time 2 Second delay when the first control did
not bring the measured voltage to a
desired level.

The delay after the command pulse activation and the restart of the timer is six
seconds. The delay is assumed to be the tap changer operating delay. The timer
status can also be read from the monitoring data TIMER_STS, where T1 active
gives a value "Lower timer1 on" or "Raise timer1 on" while T2 active gives a value
"Lower timer2 on" or "Raise timer2 on". Furthermore, the "Fast lower T on" value
indicates that the fast lowering control functionality is active (Blocking scheme
chapter).

Activation of operation timer also activates the TIMER_ON output.

615 series 743

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

IDMT type operation

The IDMT timer can be selected by setting Delay characteristic to "Inverse time".
The minimum time at the inverse time characteristic is limited to 1.0 second.
However, the minimum recommended setting of the control delay times T1 and T2
is 10 seconds when the definite time delay is used and 25 seconds when the inverse
time delay is used.

The inverse time function is defined by the equations:

Ud
B=
(U BW / 2)
GUID-59DE8DA1-7C1D-41A2-98A8-48A91D061FFD V1 EN (Equation 95)

Ud |Um – Up|, differential voltage

UBW Setting parameter Band width voltage

T
t=
2 ( B −1)

GUID-18A433AA-B4A7-4DA8-94B2-4FDF12A23FD1 V1 EN (Equation 96)

T T1 or T2

The monitored data UD_CTL shows the differential voltage value Um – Up. If the
value exceeds half of the Band width voltage setting and has a negative sign, a
raising pulse is issued. The UD_CTL monitored data can also be seen in the DT
timer mode.

The hysteresis approach is presented in Figure 397.

744 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

GUID-6AA3C028-E7DD-4C87-A91C-4B8B1D43CBBA V2 EN

Figure 401: Inverse time characteristic for different values on T1 or T2 (The

smaller figure is a zoom-in of the larger one)

9.5.12 Pulse control

The tap changer generates an active operating signal when the tap-changing
process is active. This signal is to be connected to the TCO input. The signal is used
for alarming purposes. If the signal is active (=TRUE) for more than 15 seconds
after the control pulse has been deactivated, an alarm is generated (Alarm
indication chapter). If the TCO input is not connected, no alarm is generated.

The control operation is disabled when the TCO input signal is active, unless no tap
changer stuck is detected (Alarm indication chapter). Thus, it is not possible for
the controller to send new pulses to the tap changer when it is already operating.
This is because the tap changers are typically immune to new pulses when they are
operating. Furthermore, because the pulses are omitted, the tap changer pulse
counter of the controller is not incremented either.

The commands are not tolerated during an active pulse. Therefore the command
pulse length (setting LTC pulse time) has to be carefully selected, although an
active TCO input is used internally to prevent new commands from reaching the tap
changer.

To be more certain that no new pulses are to be sent when the tap changer is in
operation, the tap changer operating signal can also be connected to the

615 series 745

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

LTC_BLOCK input. In this case, the external blocking is achieved when an

automatic pulse is sent to the operating tap changer. The external LTC_BLOCK has
by default no effect when the acting operation mode is set to "Manual".

The status of the TCO input can be read from the TCO input data.

9.5.13 Blocking scheme

The operation of the voltage regulator can be blocked for several reasons. The
purpose of blocking is to prevent the tap changer from operating under conditions
that can damage the tap changer or exceed other power system-related limits. There
is the BLK_STATUS monitored data that does not imply actual blocking but
reveals if the coming command pulse is issued or not. The blocking itself happens
when the corresponding bit in the signal BLK_STATUS is active and the command
pulse is to be started due to a timer elapse or a local command. This is to avoid
unnecessary event sending.

The cross (X) in the table defines when the operation is blocked (if the
corresponding bit is active in BLK_STATUS). For example, an overvoltage
(runback raising voltage) results in blocking only when the acting operation mode
is "Manual" and the manual raising command is to be given.

Table 629: Default blocking schema in OLATCC

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X X
Lower X X
Auto Raise X X X X
follower
Lower X X X X
Auto Raise X X X1) X X2)
single,
Auto Lower X X X1) X X2)
master,
NRP,
MCC

1) Because the circulating current is only calculated in the NRP and MCC modes, it can have a
blocking effect only in these modes.
2) However, in these cases pure automatic operation notices that the extreme position has already
been reached and there is no need to activate the signal for data set event sending. The automatic
follower case can here be compared to a manual case and an event can be sent, that is, the
corresponding output is activated.

In addition to the default blocking, the Custom Man blocking setting has been
added due to different operation practices considering the manual command
blocking. The setting can be used to adapt blockings considering the manual
overcurrent, undervoltage or external blocking. (The blockings are in the table in
columns Load current, Block lowering voltage and External block for the manual
operating mode.) The default value for the parameter is "OC". This means that the

746 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

table explaining the default blocking schema operates as such. However, there are
also other alternatives that cause different operation when compared to that table.

Table 630: Customized manual blocking schema

Manual Enumeration Description
blocking
type
1 Custom disabled No Load current, blocking of lower (under) voltage or external
blocking have effect in the manual.
2 OC Load current blocking has an effect in the manual operation mode
3 UV Block lowering (under) voltage blocking has an effect in the
manual operation mode
4 OC, UV Conditions 2 and 3 together: Load current and block lowering
(under) voltage blocking have effect in the manual operation mode
5 EXT External blocking has an effect in the manual operation mode
6 OC, EXT Conditions 2 and 5 together: Load current and external blocking
have effect in the manual operation mode
7 UV, EXT Conditions 3 and 5 together: Block lowering (under) voltage and
external blocking have effect in the manual operation mode
8 OC, UV, EXT All conditions 2, 3 and 5 together: Load current and block
lowering (under) voltage and external blocking have effect in the
manual operation mode

If the Custom Man blocking setting is "Custom disabled", the blocking schema
regarding the acting operation mode "Manual" is as given in Table 631. Other
operation modes follow the default schema.

Table 631: Blocking schema for selection "Custom disabled"

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X
Lower X

Table 632: Blocking schema for selection "OC, UV, EXT"

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X X X X
Lower X X X X

615 series 747

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Table 633: Blocking schema for selection “UV, EXT”

Acting Command Load Block Runback High External Extreme
operation current lowering raising circulating Block positions
mode voltage voltage current
Manual Raise X X X X
Lower X X X

Load current
The load current blocking is mainly used for preventing the tap changer from
operating in an overcurrent situation. For example, if the current is not high enough
to activate the protective IED of the substation, it can still be fatal for the diverter
switch of the tap changer. This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter
Load current limit. The maximum of measurements from the secondary-side
current phases is used for blocking. By default, both the automatic operation and
the manual operation are blocked (Table 629) when the set limit is exceeded.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_I_LOD.

Block lowering voltage

The block lowering voltage feature blocks both raising and lowering voltage
commands if the measured voltage is too low to be corrected by operating the tap
changer. Such a situation can occur due to a faulty measuring circuit, an earth fault
or an overcurrent situation. By default, only the automatic (also automatic
follower) operation is blocked when the undervoltage condition is met (Table 629).
This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter Block lower voltage.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_U_UN.

However, there is no minimum limit for the undervoltage blocking. The blocking is
allowed even if the measured voltage is not connected or it has temporarily a very
low value. There is a minimum limit for the phase angle calculation based on the
voltage phasor magnitude.

Runback raising voltage

The manual raising command is blocked if the overvoltage limit is exceeded (Table
629). However, in the automatic operation mode, the overvoltage situation triggers
the fast lowering feature. More information can be found in the Manual voltage
regulation chapter. This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter
Runback raise V.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data RNBK_U_OV.

High Circulating Current

The circulating current value is calculated in the operation modes Negative
Reactance Principle (NRP) and Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC). Only the
automatic operation in these modes is blocked when the high circulating current is

748 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

measured (Table 629). This operation can be adjusted with the setting parameter
Cir current limit.

The blocking status can be read from the monitored data BLKD_I_CIR.

LTC_BLOCK – external block input

With the PCM600 tool configuration possibilities, a desired blocking condition can
be built by connecting an outcome to this input. The blocking status can be read
from the monitored data BLKD_LTCBLK. When activated, this input blocks only
the automatic operation of the regulator by default (Table 629). For the fully
automatic modes, the signal activation resets the timer, and the monitored data
BLKD_LTCBLK is not activated.

Extreme positions
This blocking function supervises the extreme positions of the tap changer. These
extreme positions can be adjusted with the setting parameters Raise block tap and
Lower block tap. When the tap changer reaches one of these two positions, the
commands in the corresponding direction are blocked (Table 629). Here it depends
on the comparison between the Raise block tap and Lower block tap settings,
which direction is blocked (Voltage control vs. tap changer moving direction
section). This blocking affects both the automatic and manual operation modes.

However, as shown in Table 629, no blocking indication is to be generated in the

fully automatic modes. Here "Auto follower" is not a fully automatic mode. The
unconnected position information does not cause the total block of OLATCC, only
the extreme position blocking is not working.

The blocking status can be seen in the generated events.

Fast lowering control

OLATCC provides the fast lowering control in the automatic operation modes.
When the set Runback raise V is exceeded, the regulator gives fast lowering control
pulses until the voltage drops below the specified limit. This fast lowering control
can be seen with the monitoring data TIMER_STS, where the value "Fast lower T
on" indicates this functionality to be active.

To allow the fast lowering operation, Runback raise V has to be set

always to a value higher than the control voltage (U_CTL) plus half
of Band width voltage.

Typically, the blockings are reset when the corresponding limit with the hysteresis
is undershoot or exceeded. Although blocking is reset after undershooting the above-
mentioned limit, the fast lowering control operation continues until the measured
voltage signal difference undershoots half the Band width voltage hysteresis limit
(Figure 397). As a result, normal automatic mode operation is not possible before
this happens.

615 series 749

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Fast lowering control causes successive LOWER_OWN pulses to be activated. The

time between consecutive pulse starts is the pulse length plus 1.5 seconds.
• There is no tap changer operating delay (otherwise six seconds) taken into
account in this cycle (meaning that some command pulses are ineffective due
to tap changer operation, as described in the Pulse control chapter)
• Timer mode set by Delay characteristic has no effect here (always the DT timer-
type operation). Because the minimum pulse length (the LTC pulse time
setting) is 0.5 seconds, the shortest interval between successive pulses can be
two seconds.

In the automatic follower mode, the fast lowering is not triggered. In this way, the
awkward dispersion of position values in different units can be avoided. The
master always decides on the fast lowering on behalf of the follower units.
Moreover, master and follower should measure an equal voltage level and have
similar setting values for the overvoltage blocking limit.

9.5.14 Alarm indication

Tap Changer Monitoring
OLATCC supervises the operation of the tap changer and alarms if the alarm
condition is detected. An alarm activation means that the ALARM output is
activated and the alarm reason can be read from the monitored data
ALARM_REAS. Alarms are in use by default but they can be set not to be in use
by setting Alarms enabled to "False". Three different alarm conditions and their
combinations can be detected by OLATCC.

Command error
OLATCC supervises the tap changer position information of the own transformer
when a control pulse is given. If the correct position change (direction depends on
the comparison of the settings Raise block tap and Lower block tap) is not seen by
OLATCC in Cmd error delay time after the pulse start, the alarm is issued.

If the position information is not connected, no alarm is generated. The alarm is

reset when the correct change in position value is detected after a given pulse or if
a new command pulse is given.

The monitored data ALARM_REAS is set during an alarm. This means that if the
alarm reason is active, ALARM_REAS has the value "Cmd error".

TCO signal fails

If the tap changer operating signal TCO stays active for more than 15 seconds after
the output pulse deactivation, OLATCC concludes this as an abnormal condition
and assumes that the tap changer is stuck. The alarm is reset when the TCO input
signal deactivates. The monitored data ALARM_REAS is set during the alarm.
This means that only if alarm reason is active, ALARM_REAS has the value "TCO
error".

750 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

If the TCO input signal is not connected (indicated by bad quality), this type of
alarm is not possible.

Regulator pumping
It is possible that faulty settings cause the regulator to give control pulses too
frequently. For example, too low a setting for the Band width voltage (Figure 397)
can result in a pumping condition where the regulator has problems to bring the
regulated voltage to a desired level. To detect this, OLATCC has a setting Max
operations in 1h, which defines the allowed number of lowering and raising
commands during a one-hour sliding time window. The detection is active both in
the manual and automatic operation modes. The alarm is reset after the counted
number of the operations during the one-hour time window is less than the set
value. The number of executed operations per last one hour can be read from the
monitored data OP_TM_NUM_H. However, this parameter is updated only in three-
minute intervals. Again, the monitored data ALARM_REAS is set during an alarm.
This means that only if alarm reason is active, ALARM_REAS has the value
"Pump error".

The operation of OLATCC is not blocked during an alarm situation, but all the
alarms mentioned above cause the automatic operation to be delayed. In practice,
this means that the set delay times T1 and T2 are doubled.

In addition to the alarm detections, OLATCC provides a nonvolatile operation

counter parameter (monitored data OPR_CNT) for determining the service
intervals of the tap changer. The counter gives the total number of raising and
lowering commands given in the manual and automatic modes. All commands,
even those that are omitted by the tap changer due to its operation sequence, are
calculated in a cumulative counter. This data parameter can be reset via the clear
menu parameter OLATCC counter.

9.5.15 Application
OLATCC is used to control the voltage on the load side of the power transformer.
Based on the measured voltage and current, the function block determines whether
the voltage needs to be increased or decreased. The voltage is regulated by the
raising or lowering commands sent to the tap changer.

The basic principle for voltage regulation is that no regulation takes place as long
as the voltage stays within the bandwidth setting. The measured voltage is always
compared to the calculated control voltage Up. Once the measured voltage deviates
from the bandwidth, the delay time T1 starts. When the set delay time has elapsed,
a raising or lowering control pulse is sent to the tap changer. Should the measured
voltage still be outside the bandwidth after one tap change, the delay time T2 starts.
T2 is normally shorter than T1.

Under certain circumstances, the automatic voltage regulator needs to be enhanced

with additional functions such as Line Drop Compensation (LDC) and Reduce Set
Voltage (RSV). Also, various parallel operation modes are available to fit

615 series 751

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

applications where two or more power transformers are connected to the same
busbar at the same time. The parallel operation modes of OLATCC are Master/
Follower (M/F), Minimizing Circulating Current (MCC) and Negative Reactance
Principle (NRP).

Configuration example for the Manual and Auto single modes

Tap position indication (e.g. mA -signal)

- + +
TAP_POS
U12b TCO LOWER RAISE
VT_
IED
CT_
IL1b, IL2b, IL3b
AUTO LOWER_LOCAL RAISE_LOCAL

- - -
Auto /
Manual Lower Raise
+ + +

GUID-88A1D370-2203-48CA-9843-76C309B4049D V4 EN

Figure 402: Basic connection diagram for the voltage regulator

752 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

TPOSSLTC
BI0
BI1
BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
T_F32_INT8 SIGN_BIT
X130 (RTD).AI_VAL1 F32 INT8 TAP_POS

TAP_POS

TAP_POS value is transferred from

TPOSSLTC to OLATCC automatically

OLATCC
IL1b PO2_RAISE_OWN
I_A RAISE_OWN
IL2b I_B LOWER_OWN
PO1_LOWER_OWN
IL3b I_C FLLW1_CTL
U_AB FLLW2_CTL
U12b TR1_TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL
TR2_TAP_POS BLKD_I_LOD
TR3_TAP_POS BLKD_U_UN
BI4_RAISE_LOCAL RAISE_LOCAL BLKD_U_OV
LOWER_LOCAL BLKD_I_CIR
BI3_LOWER_LOCAL TAPCHG_FLLW BLKD_LTCBLK
PARALLEL ALARM
BI6_AUTO AUTO PAR_FAIL
CON_STATUS PARALLEL
LTC_BLOCK AUTO
BI1_TCO TCO TIMER_ON
RSV TR0_I_AMPL*
TR1_I_AMPL TR0_I_ANGL*
TR1_I_ANGL
TR2_I_AMPL
TR2_I_ANGL
TR3_I_AMPL
TR3_I_ANGL
* Only for GOOSE Engineering

GUID-CA9CF06F-2ADB-4758-B527-EE4400B35B36 V2 EN

Figure 403: Configuration example for the Manual and Auto single modes

The configuration example uses an mA signal to indicate the current tap position of
the local transformer. To take that position information to OLATCC, the measured
mA signal is first scaled with the X130 (RTD) function. The scaled value is then
converted to integer value with T_F32_INT8 function. That integer value is
connected to the TAP_POS input of the TPOSSLTC function. The tap position
value is automatically transferred from TPOSSLTC to OLATCC without a
configuration connection.

Configuration example for the Auto parallel (Master/Follower) mode

The configuration example for Master/Follower describes how the tap position
information is transferred from follower to master with the horizontal GOOSE
communication. The status information from circuit breakers and an extra logic can
be used to change the operation mode via inputs of the master and the follower
(Operation mode = "Input control").

615 series 753

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Regulator 1 signals Regulator 2 signals

Tap position ind.

Tap position ind.

Raise Raise
Raise
follower
M TCO TCO M
Lower
follower
Lower Lower

U12b U12b

IL1b, IL2b, IL3b IL1b, IL2b, IL3b

CB1 CB3

CB2 CB2

GUID-0B2CBB09-9B4C-498A-BB1C-3A3689513BDF V2 EN

Figure 404: An example of the configuration for the Auto parallel (Master/
Follower) mode (the position of the follower known by the master)

IED 1 / Regulator 1 IED 2 / Regulator 2

(Master) (Follower)

OLATCC OLATCC
I_A RAISE_OWN I_A RAISE_OWN
I_B LOWER_OWN GOOSE communication I_B LOWER_OWN
I_C FLLW1_CTL I_C FLLW1_CTL
GOOSE communication U_AB FLLW2_CTL ( Raise / Lower follower ) U_AB FLLW2_CTL
TR1_TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL TR1_TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL
( Regulator 2 tap position ) TR2_TAP_POS BLKD_I_LOD TR2_TAP_POS BLKD_I_LOD
TR3_TAP_POS BLKD_U_UN TR3_TAP_POS BLKD_U_UN
RAISE_LOCAL BLKD_U_OV RAISE_LOCAL BLKD_U_OV
LOWER_LOCAL BLKD_I_CIR LOWER_LOCAL BLKD_I_CIR
TAPCHG_FLLW BLKD_LTCBLK TAPCHG_FLLW BLKD_LTCBLK
PARALLEL ALARM PARALLEL ALARM
CB1 AUTO PAR_FAIL CB1 AUTO PAR_FAIL
CON_STATUS PARALLEL AND CON_STATUS PARALLEL
LTC_BLOCK AUTO CB2 LTC_BLOCK AUTO
TCO TIMER_ON TCO TIMER_ON
AND
RSV TR0_I_AMPL* AND RSV TR0_I_AMPL*
CB2 TR0_I_ANGL* CB3 TR1_I_AMPL TR0_I_ANGL*
TR1_I_AMPL
TR1_I_ANGL TR1_I_ANGL
TR2_I_AMPL TR2_I_AMPL
AND TR2_I_ANGL TR2_I_ANGL
CB3 TR3_I_AMPL NOT TR3_I_AMPL
TR3_I_ANGL TR3_I_ANGL
AND
* Only for GOOSE Engineering * Only for GOOSE Engineering

GUID-CE09E39C-D02B-4978-B968-B5B2EA19DB69 V2 EN

Figure 405: Simplified regulator 1&2 configurations of the Master/Follower

example

754 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Table 634: The automatic selection of operation modes for regulators in the Master/Follower
example
CB1 CB2 CB3 Regulator 1 Regulator 2
Open Open Open Manual Manual
Open Open Closed Manual Auto single
Open Closed Open Manual Manual
Open Closed Closed Manual Auto single
Closed Open Open Auto single Manual
Closed Open Closed Auto single Auto single
Closed Closed Open Auto single Manual
Closed Closed Closed Auto parallel Auto parallel
(Master) (Follower)
Auto parallel Auto parallel
mode = "Auto mode = "Auto
master'' follower"

Configuration example for the Auto parallel (MCC) mode

The purpose of the Auto parallel (MCC) mode is to minimize the circulating
current between the parallel transformers. The data exchange between the
regulators can be done with the horizontal GOOSE communication.

IED 1 / Regulator 1 IED 2 / Regulator 2

OLATCC OLATCC
I_A RAISE_OWN I_A RAISE_OWN
I_B LOWER_OWN I_B LOWER_OWN
I_C FLLW1_CTL I_C FLLW1_CTL
U_AB FLLW2_CTL U_AB FLLW2_CTL
TR1_TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL TR1_TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL
TR2_TAP_POS BLKD_I_LOD TR2_TAP_POS BLKD_I_LOD
TR3_TAP_POS BLKD_U_UN TR3_TAP_POS BLKD_U_UN
RAISE_LOCAL BLKD_U_OV RAISE_LOCAL BLKD_U_OV
LOWER_LOCAL BLKD_I_CIR LOWER_LOCAL BLKD_I_CIR
TAPCHG_FLLW BLKD_LTCBLK TAPCHG_FLLW BLKD_LTCBLK
PARALLEL ALARM PARALLEL ALARM
AUTO PAR_FAIL AUTO PAR_FAIL
CON_STATUS PARALLEL CON_STATUS PARALLEL
LTC_BLOCK AUTO LTC_BLOCK AUTO
TCO TIMER_ON GOOSE communication TCO TIMER_ON
RSV TR0_I_AMPL* RSV TR0_I_AMPL*
TR1_I_AMPL TR0_I_ANGL* TR1_I_AMPL TR0_I_ANGL*
TR1_I_ANGL TR1_I_ANGL
TR2_I_AMPL TR2_I_AMPL
TR2_I_ANGL TR2_I_ANGL
TR3_I_AMPL TR3_I_AMPL
TR3_I_ANGL TR3_I_ANGL

* Only for GOOSE Engineering * Only for GOOSE Engineering

GOOSE communication

GUID-1D6F1FD5-58AD-4AB1-B3F4-3414392CFEE1 V2 EN

Figure 406: Two parallel transformers and the horizontal connection via
GOOSE to transfer current and the phase angle information when
the MCC principle is used

Configuration example for the Auto parallel (NRP) mode

The advantage of the Negative Reactance Principle (NRP) operation mode is that
no wiring or communication is needed between the IEDs. The voltage regulators
operate independently. However, for the cases where there is an occasional

615 series 755

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

stepwise change in the phase angle of the load, the regulating error can be
suppressed by an automatic setting group change or by changing the operation
mode with the logic.

OLATCC
I_A RAISE_OWN
I_B LOWER_OWN
I_C FLLW1_CTL
U_AB FLLW2_CTL
TR1_TAP_POS FLLW3_CTL
TR2_TAP_POS BLKD_I_LOD
TR3_TAP_POS BLKD_U_UN
RAISE_LOCAL BLKD_U_OV
LOWER_LOCAL BLKD_I_CIR
Capacitor bank TAPCHG_FLLW BLKD_LTCBLK
NOT PARALLEL ALARM
connected AUTO PAR_FAIL
CON_STATUS PARALLEL
FALSE => Auto parallel (NRP) LTC_BLOCK AUTO
TCO TIMER_ON
TRUE => Auto single RSV TR0_I_AMPL*
TR1_I_AMPL TR0_I_ANGL*
TR1_I_ANGL
TR2_I_AMPL
TR2_I_ANGL
TR3_I_AMPL
TR3_I_ANGL
* Only for GOOSE Engineering
GUID-20F51931-FED1-4E58-8BBD-4B94702F0E2A V2 EN

Figure 407: Changing the operation mode of OLATCC automatically when the
capacitor bank is connected

Comparison summary between parallel operation modes

The parallel operation modes are needed because if the parallel regulators operated
independently, at some point the transformers would become out of step with each
other.

The circulating current would increase and the line drop compensation would thus
increase for the transformer giving the highest voltage. Correspondingly, the
increasing circulating current would cause the transformer giving the lowest
voltage to decrease the voltage due to a decreased line drop compensation effect. In
other words, the two transformers would run apart.

However, it is case-specific which parallel operation mode is the most suitable.

756 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Table 635: Different parallel operation modes

Parallel operation modes Description
Master/Follower (follower positions not known by Requires power transformers with identical
master) ratings and step voltages
- Extra wiring work: raising/lowering commands
(input TAPCHG_FLLW connected from output
FLLWx_CTL) from the master to the follower
- Manual control needed in the beginning of
operation
- Blind control: follower positions after control
cannot be supervised. It must be relied on that
the followers are following the commands.
+ Parallel transformers are regulated as one unit
+ Supports an unlimited number of transformers
in parallel
Master/Follower (follower positions known) Requires power transformers with identical
ratings and step voltages.
- Extra wiring work:
raising/lowering commands (the TAPCHG_FLLW
input connected from the FLLWx_CTL output)
from the master to the follower
TAP_POS connections from the followers to the
master
- Supports not more than four transformers in
parallel.
Negative reactance principle The actual phase angle setting results in a
regulating error. When the line drop
compensation is used, the setting should be
changed when the number of transformers in
parallel operation is changed.
+ The step voltages and short circuit
impedances of the transformers do not need to
be identical.
+ No communication or wiring between
regulators is needed, meaning that the principle
can be applied even when the parallel
transformers are located at different substations.
+ Supports an unlimited number of transformers
in parallel
Minimizing circulating current - Requires extra configuration efforts since this
principle utilizes a horizontal communication
between the regulators (the inputs TRx_I
connected from parallel transformer controller's
outputs TR0_I.
+ The step voltages and short circuit
impedances of the transformers do not need to
be identical.
+ The phase angle of the load current may vary
without any impact on the regulation accuracy.
+ Automatic adjustment for the number of
transformers (for an accurate calculation of line
drop compensation term)

615 series 757

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

9.5.16 Signals
Table 636: OLATCC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current
U_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-phase voltage AB
TR1_TAP_POS INT32 0 Integer value representing tap changer position of
transformer 2
TR2_TAP_POS INT32 0 Integer value representing tap changer position of
transformer 3
TR3_TAP_POS INT32 0 Integer value representing tap changer position of
transformer 4
RAISE_LOCAL BOOLEAN 0=False Raise command input from configuration
LOWER_LOCAL BOOLEAN 0=False Lower command input from configuration
TAPCHG_FLLW BOOLEAN 0=False Change follower tap position (stop, lower, higher)
PARALLEL BOOLEAN 0=False Parallel or single operation
AUTO BOOLEAN 0=False Auto/Manual indication
CON_STATUS BOOLEAN 0=False Network connection status of the (own) transformer
LTC_BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False External signal for blocking of automatic operation
TCO BOOLEAN 0=False Tap changer operating input
RSV BOOLEAN 0=False Reduce set voltage active
TR1_I_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00 Received current magnitude from transformer 1
TR1_I_ANGL FLOAT32 0.00 Received current angle from transformer 1
TR2_I_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00 Received current magnitude from transformer 2
TR2_I_ANGL FLOAT32 0.00 Received current angle from transformer 2
TR3_I_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00 Received current magnitude from transformer 3
TR3_I_ANGL FLOAT32 0.00 Received current angle from transformer 3

Table 637: OLATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
RAISE_OWN BOOLEAN Raise command for own transformer
LOWER_OWN BOOLEAN Lower command for own transformer
FLLW1_CTL INT32 Lower/Raise command for follower transformer 1
in the Master/Follower operation mode
FLLW2_CTL INT32 Lower/Raise command for follower transformer 2
in the Master/Follower operation mode
FLLW3_CTL INT32 Lower/Raise command for follower transformer 3
in the Master/Follower operation mode
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm status
PAR_FAIL BOOLEAN Parallel failure detected
Table continues on next page

758 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Name Type Description

PARALLEL BOOLEAN Parallel or single operation
AUTO BOOLEAN Auto/Manual indication
TIMER_ON BOOLEAN Timer on
BLKD_I_LOD BOOLEAN Indication of over current blocking
BLKD_U_UN BOOLEAN Indication of under voltage blocking
RNBK_U_OV BOOLEAN Indication of raise voltage runback
BLKD_I_CIR BOOLEAN Indication of high circulating current blocking
BLKD_LTCBLK BOOLEAN Indication of external blocking

9.5.17 Settings
Table 638: OLATCC Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Auto parallel mode 2=Auto master 2=Auto master Parallel mode selection
3=Auto follower
5=NRP
7=MCC
Band center voltage 0.000...2.000 xUn 0.001 1.000 Band center voltage Us
Line drop V Ris 0.0...25.0 % 0.1 0.0 Resistive line-drop compensation factor
Line drop V React 0.0...25.0 % 0.1 0.0 Reactive line-drop compensation factor
Band reduction 0.00...9.00 %Un 0.01 0.00 Step size for reduce set voltage (RSV)
Stability factor 0.0...70.0 % 0.1 0.0 Stability factor in parallel operation
Load phase angle -89...89 deg 1 0 Load phase-shift, used only with the
negative reactance principle
Control delay time 1 1000...300000 ms 100 60000 Control delay time for the first control
pulse
Control delay time 2 1000...300000 ms 100 30000 Control delay time for the following
control pulses

Table 639: OLATCC Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Operation mode 1=Manual 4=Input control The operation mode
2=Auto single
3=Auto parallel
4=Input control
Custom Man blocking 1=Custom disabled 2=OC Customized manual blocking
2=OC
3=UV
4=OC, UV
5=EXT
6=OC, EXT
7=UV, EXT
8=OC, UV, EXT
Table continues on next page

615 series 759

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Parallel trafos 0...10 0 Number of parallel transformers in
addition to own transformer
Delay characteristic 0=Inverse time 1=Definite time Selection of delay characteristic
1=Definite time
Band width voltage 1.20...18.00 %Un 0.01 3.00 Allowed deviation of the control voltage
Load current limit 0.10...5.00 xIn 0.01 2.00 Load current blocking limit
Block lower voltage 0.10...1.20 xUn 0.01 0.70 Voltage limit, where further voltage
lowering commands are blocked
Runback raise V 0.80...2.40 xUn 0.01 1.25 Voltage limit, where fast lower
commands takes place
Cir current limit 0.10...5.00 xIn 0.01 0.15 Blocking limit for high circulating current
LDC limit 0.00...2.00 xUn 0.01 0.10 Maximum limit for line drop
compensation term
Lower block tap -36...36 0 Tap changer limit position which gives
lowest voltage on the regulated side
Raise block tap -36...36 17 Tap changer limit position which gives
highest voltage on the regulated side
Max operations in 1h 0...10000 100 Allowed number of controls per one hour
sliding window
Cmd error delay time 10...50 s 20 Time delay before command error will be
activated
Follower delay time 6...20 s 6 Time delay between successive follower
commands by a master
LTC pulse time 500...10000 ms 100 1500 Output pulse duration, common for raise
and lower pulses
LDC enable 0=False 1=True Selection for line drop compensation
1=True
Alarms enabled 0=False 1=True Alarm selection
1=True
Rv Pwr flow allowed 0=False 0=False Reverse power flow allowed
1=True

9.5.18 Monitored data

Table 640: OLATCC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TAP_POS INT8 -36...36 Integer value
representing tap changer
position of own
transformer
TR0_I_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00...15000.00 A Transmitted current
magnitude
TR0_I_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 deg Transmitted current
angle
U_MEAS FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Phase-to-phase voltage,
average filtered
Table continues on next page

760 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ANGL_UA_IA FLOAT32 -180...180 deg Measured angle value
between phase A
voltage and current
TIMER_STS Enum 0=Timer off Timer T1, T2 or fast
1=Lower timer1 lower timer active
on
2=Raise timer1
on
3=Lower timer2
on
4=Raise timer2
on
5=Fast lower T
on
OPR_MODE_STS Enum 0=Not in use The acting operation
1=Manual mode of the function
2=Auto single block
3=Auto master
4=Auto follower
5=MCC
6=NRP
U_CTL FLOAT32 0.000...3.000 xUn Control voltage, Up,
target voltage level
UD_CTL FLOAT32 -2.000...2.000 xUn Voltage difference
between Measured
voltage - Control
Voltage: Um - Up
I_CIR FLOAT32 -10.00...10.00 xIn Calculated circulating
current - calculated in
operation modes NRP
and MCC
LDC FLOAT32 -2.00...2.00 xUn Calculated line drop
compensation
BLK_STATUS INT32 0...127 Bit-coded output
showing the blocking
status for the next
operation
ALARM_REAS Enum 0=No alarm Status and reason for
1=Cmd error alarm
2=TCO error
3=Cmd + TCO
err
4=Pump error
5=Pump + cmd
err
6=Pump + TCO
err
7=Pmp+TCO
+cmd err
OP_TM_NUM_H INT32 0...2147483647 Number of controls for
own tap changer during
last hour
Table continues on next page

615 series 761

Technical Manual
Section 9 1YHT530004D05 D
Control functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

FAIL_FLLW Enum 0=No failed Failed followers
followers
1=Follower 1
2=Follower 2
3=Followers 1+2
4=Follower 3
5=Followers 1+3
6=Followers 2+3
7=Followers
1+2+3
PAR_UNIT_MCC Enum 0=No parall units Parallel units included in
1=Trafo 1 MCC calculation
2=Trafo 2
3=Trafos 1 and 2
4=Trafo 3
5=Trafos 1 and 3
6=Trafos 2 and 3
7=Trafos 1+2+3
OPR_CNT INT32 0...2147483647 Total number of raise
and lower commands
given in the manual and
automatic modes
OLATCC Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off

9.5.19 Technical data

Table 641: OLATCC Technical data
Characteristic Value
Operation accuracy1) Depending on the frequency of the current
measured: fn ±2 Hz

Differential voltage Ud = ± 0.5% of the measured

value or ± 0.005 x Un (in measured voltages <
2.0 x Un)
Operation value = ± 1.5% of the Ud for Us = 1.0
x Un

Operate time accuracy in definite time mode2) + 4.0% / - 0% of the set value

Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode2) + 8.5% / - 0% of the set value
(at theoretical B in range of 1.1…5.0)
Also note fixed minimum operate time (IDMT) 1 s.
Reset ratio for control operation Typical 0.80 (1.20)
Reset ratio for analogue based blockings (except Typical 0.96 (1.04)
run back raise voltage blocking)

1) Default setting values used

2) Voltage before deviation = set Band center voltage.

762 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 9
Control functions

9.5.20 Technical revision history

Table 642: OLATTC Technical revision history
Technical Change
revision
B Added new output TIMER_ON (new 61850 data for that). ACT interface changes by
interchanging already existing data between monitored data and output interface.
Operation mode default to be changed to 4=Input control (previously it was Manual).

615 series 763

Technical Manual
764
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

Section 10 Power quality measurement functions

10.1 Current total demand distortion monitoring CMHAI

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current total demand distortion CMHAI PQM3I PQM3I
monitoring

10.1.2 Function block

GUID-62495CAB-20DF-4BBA-9D5C-ECDE1D2AAB52 V1 EN

Figure 408: Function block

10.1.3 Functionality
The distortion monitoring function CMHAI is used for monitoring the current total
demand distortion TDD.

10.1.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the current distortion monitoring function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

615 series 765

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

I_A
Distortion
Demand
I_B measure- ALARM
calculation
ment
I_C

BLOCK
GUID-E5EC5FFE-7679-445B-B327-A8B1759D90C4 V1 EN

Figure 409: Functional module diagram

Distortion measurement
The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic.
The total demand distortion TDD is calculated from the measured harmonic
components with the formula

N
TDD =
∑ k =2 I k2
I max_ demand
GUID-9F532219-6991-4F61-8DB6-0D6A0AA9AC29 V1 EN (Equation 97)

Ik kth harmonic component

Imax_demand The maximum demand current measured by CMMXU

If CMMXU is not available in the configuration or the measured maximum

demand current is less than the Initial Dmd current setting, Initial Dmd current is
used for Imax_demand.

Demand calculation
The demand value for TDD is calculated separately for each phase. If any of the
calculated total demand distortion values is above the set alarm limit TDD alarm
limit, the ALARM output is activated.

The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting. It has
seven window lengths from "1 minute" to "180 minutes". The window type can be
set with the Demand window setting. The available options are "Sliding" and "Non-
sliding".

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM output.

10.1.5 Application
In standards, the power quality is defined through the characteristics of the supply
voltage. Transients, short-duration and long-duration voltage variations, unbalance
and waveform distortions are the key characteristics describing power quality.
Power quality is, however, a customer-driven issue. It could be said that any power

766 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

problem concerning voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of

customer equipment is a power quality problem.

Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices. Electronic

power converter loads constitute the most important class of nonlinear loads in a
power system. The switch mode power supplies in a number of single-phase
electronic equipment, such as personal computers, printers and copiers, have a very
high third-harmonic content in the current. Three-phase electronic power
converters, that is, dc/ac drives, however, do not generate third-harmonic currents.
Still, they can be significant sources of harmonics.

Power quality monitoring is an essential service that utilities can provide for their
industrial and key customers. Not only can a monitoring system provide
information about system disturbances and their possible causes, it can also detect
problem conditions throughout the system before they cause customer complaints,
equipment malfunctions and even equipment damage or failure. Power quality
problems are not limited to the utility side of the system. In fact, the majority of
power quality problems are localized within customer facilities. Thus, power
quality monitoring is not only an effective customer service strategy but also a way
to protect a utility's reputation for quality power and service.

CMHAI provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the
current waveform distortion. CMHAI provides a short-term 3-second average and a
long-term demand for TDD.

10.1.6 Signals
Table 643: CMHAI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A Signal 0 Phase A current
I_B Signal 0 Phase B current
I_C Signal 0 Phase C current
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

Table 644: CMHAI Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for TDD

615 series 767

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

10.1.7 Settings
Table 645: CMHAI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation
1=5 minutes
2=10 minutes
3=15 minutes
4=30 minutes
5=60 minutes
6=180 minutes
Demand window 1=Sliding 1=Sliding Demand calculation window type
2=Non-sliding
TDD alarm limit 1.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 TDD alarm limit
Initial Dmd current 0.10...1.00 xIn 0.01 1.00 Initial demand current

10.1.8 Monitored data

Table 646: CMHAI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Max demand TDD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand TDD
IL1 for phase A
Max demand TDD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand TDD
IL2 for phase B
Max demand TDD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand TDD
IL3 for phase C
Time max dmd TDD Timestamp Time of maximum
IL1 demand TDD phase A
Time max dmd TDD Timestamp Time of maximum
IL2 demand TDD phase B
Time max dmd TDD Timestamp Time of maximum
IL3 demand TDD phase C
3SMHTDD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of
TDD for phase A
DMD_TDD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for TDD
for phase A
3SMHTDD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of
TDD for phase B
DMD_TDD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for TDD
for phase B
3SMHTDD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of
TDD for phase C
DMD_TDD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for TDD
for phase C

768 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

10.2 Voltage total harmonic distortion monitoring VMHAI

10.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI PQM3U PQM3V
monitoring

10.2.2 Function block

GUID-CF203BDC-8C9A-442C-8D31-1AD55110469C V1 EN

Figure 410: Function block

10.2.3 Functionality
The distortion monitoring function VMHAI is used for monitoring the voltage total
harmonic distortion THD.

10.2.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the voltage distortion monitoring function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

U_A_AB
Distortion
Demand
U_B_BC measure- ALARM
calculation
ment
U_C_CA

BLOCK

GUID-615D1A8A-621A-4AFA-ABB0-C681208AE62C V1 EN

Figure 411: Functional module diagram

615 series 769

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

Distortion measurement
The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic.
The total harmonic distortion THD for voltage is calculated from the measured
harmonic components with the formula
N
THD =
∑ k =2U k2
U1
GUID-83A22E8C-5F4D-4332-A832-4E48B35550EF V1 EN (Equation 98)

Uk kth harmonic component

U1 the voltage fundamental component amplitude

Demand calculation
The demand value for THD is calculated separately for each phase. If any of the
calculated demand THD values is above the set alarm limit THD alarm limit, the
ALARM output is activated.

The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting. It has
seven window lengths from "1 minute" to "180 minutes". The window type can be
set with the Demand window setting. The available options are "Sliding" and "Non-
sliding".

The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM output.

10.2.5 Application
VMHAI provides a method for monitoring the power quality by means of the
voltage waveform distortion. VMHAI provides a short-term three-second average
and long-term demand for THD.

10.2.6 Signals
Table 647: VMHAI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase
voltage AB
U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage B or phase-to-phase
voltage BC
U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage C or phase-to-phase
voltage CA
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs

770 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

Table 648: VMHAI Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for THD

10.2.7 Settings
Table 649: VMHAI Non group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation
1=5 minutes
2=10 minutes
3=15 minutes
4=30 minutes
5=60 minutes
6=180 minutes
Demand window 1=Sliding 1=Sliding Demand calculation window type
2=Non-sliding
THD alarm limit 1.0...100.0 % 0.1 50.0 THD alarm limit

10.2.8 Monitored data

Table 650: VMHAI Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Max demand THD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand THD
UL1 for phase A
Max demand THD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand THD
UL2 for phase B
Max demand THD FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Maximum demand THD
UL3 for phase C
Time max dmd THD Timestamp Time of maximum
UL1 demand THD phase A
Time max dmd THD Timestamp Time of maximum
UL2 demand THD phase B
Time max dmd THD Timestamp Time of maximum
UL3 demand THD phase C
3SMHTHD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of
THD for phase A
DMD_THD_A FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for THD
for phase A
3SMHTHD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of
THD for phase B
Table continues on next page

615 series 771

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

DMD_THD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for THD
for phase B
3SMHTHD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % 3 second mean value of
THD for phase C
DMD_THD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 % Demand value for THD
for phase C

10.3 Voltage variation PHQVVR

10.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage variation detection function PHQVVR PQMU PQMV

10.3.2 Function block

GUID-9AA7CE99-C11C-4312-89B4-1C015476A165 V1 EN

Figure 412: Function block

10.3.3 Functionality
The voltage variation measurement function PHQVVR is used for measuring the
short-duration voltage variations in distribution networks.

Power quality in the voltage waveform is evaluated by measuring voltage swells,

dips and interruptions. PHQVVR includes single-phase and three-phase voltage
variation modes.

Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the
nominal frequency period and less than one minute. The maximum magnitude (in
the case of a voltage swell) or depth (in the case of a voltage dip or interruption)
and the duration of the variation can be obtained by measuring the RMS value of
the voltage for each phase. International standard 61000-4-30 defines the voltage
variation to be implemented using the RMS value of the voltage. IEEE standard
1159-1995 provides recommendations for monitoring the electric power quality of
the single-phase and polyphase ac power systems.

772 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

PHQVVR contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function

outputs or the function itself, if desired.

10.3.4 Operation principle

The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".

The operation of the voltage variation detection function can be described with a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

U_A
U_B
U_C
I_A
I_B
I_C

GUID-91ED3E3D-F014-49EE-B4B0-DAD2509DD013 V1 EN

Figure 413: Functional module diagram

10.3.4.1 Phase mode setting

PHQVVR is designed for both single-phase and polyphase ac power systems, and
selection can be made with the Phase mode setting, which can be set either to the
"Single Phase" or "Three Phase" mode. The default setting is "Single Phase".

The basic difference between these alternatives depends on how many phases are
needed to have the voltage variation activated. When the Phase mode setting is
"Single Phase", the activation is straightforward. There is no dependence between
the phases for variation start. The START output and the corresponding phase start
are activated when the limit is exceeded or undershot. The corresponding phase
start deactivation takes place when the limit (includes small hysteresis) is
undershot or exceeded. The START output is deactivated when there are no more
active phases.

However, when Phase mode is "Three Phase", all the monitored phase signal
magnitudes, defined with Phase supervision, have to fall below or rise above the
limit setting to activate the START output and the corresponding phase output, that

615 series 773

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

is, all the monitored phases have to be activated. Accordingly, the deactivation
occurs when the activation requirement is not fulfilled, that is, one or more
monitored phase signal magnitudes return beyond their limits. Phases do not need
to be activated by the same variation type to activate the START output. Another
consequence is that if only one or two phases are monitored, it is sufficient that
these monitored phases activate the START output.

10.3.4.2 Variation detection

The module compares the measured voltage against the limit settings. If there is a
permanent undervoltage or overvoltage, the Reference voltage setting can be set to
this voltage level to avoid the undesired voltage dip or swell indications. This is
accomplished by converting the variation limits with the Reference voltage setting
in the variation detection module, that is, when there is a voltage different from the
nominal voltage, the Reference voltage setting is set to this voltage.

The Variation enable setting is used for enabling or disabling the variation types.
By default, the setting value is "Swell+dip+Int" and all the alternative variation
types are indicated. For example, for setting "Swell+dip", the interruption detection
is not active and only swell or dip events are indicated.

In a case where Phase mode is "Single Phase" and the dip functionality is
available, the output DIPST is activated when the measured TRMS value drops
below the Voltage dip set 3 setting in one phase and also remains above the
Voltage Int set setting. If the voltage drops below the Voltage Int set setting, the
output INTST is activated. INTST is deactivated when the voltage value rises
above the setting Voltage Int set. When the same measured TRMS magnitude rises
above the setting Voltage swell set 3, the SWELLST output is activated.

There are three setting value limits for dip (Voltage dip set 1..3) and swell
activation (Voltage swell set 1..3) and one setting value limit for interruption.

If Phase mode is "Three Phase", the DIPST and INTST outputs are
activated when the voltage levels of all monitored phases, defined
with the parameter Phase supervision, drop below the Voltage Int
set setting value. An example for the detection principle of voltage
interruption for "Three Phase" when Phase supervision is "Ph A +
B + C", and also the corresponding start signals when Phase mode
is "Single Phase", are as shown in the example for the detection of a
three-phase interruption.

774 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

Voltage swell set

U_A

U_C
U_B
Voltage dip set

Voltage Int set

SWELLST TRUE
FALSE
DIPST TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
A) Three phase mode
SWELLST TRUE
FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE

B) Single phase mode

GUID-F44C8E6E-9354-44E4-9B2E-600D66B76C1A V1 EN

Figure 414: Detection of three-phase voltage interruption

The module measures voltage variation magnitude on each phase separately, that
is, there are phase-segregated outputs ST_A, ST_B and ST_C for voltage variation
indication. The configuration parameter Phase supervision defines which voltage
phase or phases are monitored. If a voltage phase is selected to be monitored, the
function assumes it to be connected to a voltage measurement channel. In other
words, if an unconnected phase is monitored, the function falsely detects a voltage
interruption in that phase.

The maximum magnitude and depth are defined as percentage values calculated
from the difference between the reference and the measured voltage. For example,
a dip to 70 percent means that the minimum voltage dip magnitude variation is 70
percent of the reference voltage amplitude.

The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function and outputs.

10.3.4.3 Variation validation

The validation criterion for voltage variation is that the measured total variation
duration is between the set minimum and maximum durations (Either one of VVa
dip time 1, VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, depending on the variation type, and
VVa Dur Max). The maximum variation duration setting is the same for all
variation types.

615 series 775

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

Figure 415 shows voltage dip operational regions. In Figure 414, only one voltage
dip/swell/Int set is drawn, whereas in this figure there are three sub-limits for the
dip operation. When Voltage dip set 3 is undershot, the corresponding ST_x and
also the DIPST outputs are activated. When the TRMS voltage magnitude remains
between Voltage dip set 2 and Voltage dip set 1 for a period longer than VVa dip
time 2 (shorter time than VVa dip time 3), a momentary dip event is detected.
Furthermore, if the signal magnitude stays between the limits longer than VVa dip
time 3 (shorter time than VVa Dur max), a temporary dip event is detected. If the
voltage remains below Voltage dip set 1 for a period longer than VVa dip time 1 but
a shorter time than VVa dip time 2, an instantaneous dip event is detected.

For an event detection, the OPERATE output is always activated for one task cycle.
The corresponding counter and only one of them (INSTDIPCNT, MOMDIPCNT
or TEMPDIPCNT) is increased by one. If the dip limit undershooting duration is
shorter than VVa dip time 1, VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, the event is not
detected at all, and if the duration is longer than VVa Dur Max,
MAXDURDIPCNT is increased by one but no event detection resulting in the
activation of the OPERATE output and recording data update takes place. These
counters are available through the monitored data view on the LHMI or through
tools via communications. There are no phase-segregated counters but all the
variation detections are registered to a common time/magnitude-classified counter
type. Consequently, a simultaneous multiphase event, that is, the variation-type
event detection time moment is exactly the same for two or more phases, is
counted only once also for single-phase power systems.

Voltage
xUref

1.00

Voltage dip set 3

Voltage dip set 2

Temporary Maximum duration

Voltage dip set 1
Momentary dip dip
Instantaneous dip
dip

0
VVa dip time 1 VVa dip time 2 VVa dip time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-0D3F6D81-F905-4D8D-A579-836EF7BB6773 V1 EN

Figure 415: Voltage dip operational regions

In Figure 416, the corresponding limits regarding the swell operation are provided
with the inherent magnitude limit order difference. The swell functionality
principle is the same as for dips, but the different limits for the signal magnitude
and times and the inherent operating zone change (here, Voltage swell set x > 1.0
xUn) are applied.

776 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

Voltage
xUref

1.40
Instantaneous
swell Momentary
swell Temporary Maximum duration
Voltage swell set 1 swell swell

Voltage swell set 2

Voltage swell set 3

1.00
0
VVa swell time 1 VVa swell time 2 VVa swell time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-7F23358A-5B42-4F5B-8F12-B157208C8945 V1 EN

Figure 416: Voltage swell operational regions

For interruption, as shown in Figure 417, there is only one magnitude limit but four
duration limits for interruption classification. Now the event and counter type
depends only on variation duration time.

Voltage
xUref

1.00

Voltage Int set

Momentary Temporary Sustained Maximum duration

interruption interruption interruption interruption

0
VVa Int time 1 VVa Int time 2 VVa Int time 3 VVa Dur Max Time (ms)
0
GUID-AA022CA2-4CBF-49A1-B710-AB602F8C8343 V1 EN

Figure 417: Interruption operating regions

Generally, no event detection is done if both the magnitude and duration

requirements are not fulfilled. For example, the dip event does not indicate if the
TRMS voltage magnitude remains between Voltage dip set 3 and Voltage dip set 2
for a period shorter than VVa dip time 3 before rising back above Voltage dip set 3.

The event indication ends and possible detection is done when the TRMS voltage
returns above (for dip and interruption) or below (for swell) the activation-starting
limit. For example, after an instantaneous dip, the event indication when the
voltage magnitude exceeds Voltage dip set 1 is not detected (and recorded)
immediately but only if no longer dip indication for the same dip variation takes
place and maximum duration time for dip variation does not exceed before the
signal magnitude rises above Voltage dip set 3. There is a small hysteresis for all
these limits to avoid the oscillation of the output activation. No drop-off approach
is applied here due to the hysteresis.

615 series 777

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

Consequently, only one event detection and recording of the same variation type
can take place for one voltage variation, so the longest indicated variation of each
variation type is detected. Furthermore, it is possible that another instantaneous dip
event replaces the one already indicated if the magnitude again undershoots
Voltage dip set 1 for the set time after the first detection and the signal magnitude
or time requirement is again fulfilled. Another possibility is that if the time
condition is not fulfilled for an instantaneous dip detection but the signal rises
above Voltage dip set 1, the already elapsed time is included in the momentary dip
timer. Especially the interruption time is included in the dip time. If the signal does
not exceed Voltage dip set 2 before the timer VVa dip time 2 has elapsed when the
momentary dip timer is also started after the magnitude undershooting Voltage dip
set 2, the momentary dip event instead is detected. Consequently, the same dip
occurrence with a changing variation depth can result in several dip event
indications but only one detection. For example, if the magnitude has undershot
Voltage dip set 1 but remained above Voltage Intr set for a shorter time than the
value of VVa dip time 1 but the signal rises between Voltage dip set 1 and Voltage
dip set 2 so that the total duration of the dip activation is longer than VVa dip time
2 and the maximum time is not overshot, this is detected as a momentary dip even
though a short instantaneous dip period has been included. In text, the terms
"deeper" and "higher" are used for referring to dip or interruption.

Although examples are given for dip events, the same rules can be applied to the
swell and interruption functionality too. For swell indication, "deeper" means that
the signal rises even more and "higher" means that the signal magnitude becomes
lower respectively.

The adjustable voltage thresholds adhere to the relationships:

VVa dip time 1 ≤ VVa dip time 2 ≤ VVa dip time 3.

VVa swell time 1 ≤ VVa swell time 2 ≤ VVa swell time 3.

VVa Int time 1 ≤ VVa Int time 2 ≤ VVa Int time 3.

There is a validation functionality built-in function that checks the relationship

adherence so that if VVa x time 1 is set higher than VVa x time 2 or VVa x time 3,
VVa x time 2 and VVa x time 3 are set equal to the new VVa x time 1. If VVa x time
2 is set higher than VVa x time 3, VVa x time 3 is set to the new VVa x time 2. If
VVa x time 2 is set lower than VVa x time 1, the entered VVa x time 2 is rejected. If
VVa x time 3 is set lower than VVa x time 2, the entered VVa x time 3 is rejected.

10.3.4.4 Duration measurement

The duration of each voltage phase corresponds to the period during which the
measured TRMS values remain above (swell) or below (dip, interruption) the
corresponding limit.

Besides the three limit settings for the variation types dip and swell, there is also a
specific duration setting for each limit setting. For interruption, there is only one

778 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

limit setting common for the three duration settings. The maximum duration setting
is common for all variation types.

The duration measurement module measures the voltage variation duration of each
phase voltage separately when the Phase mode setting is "Single Phase". The phase
variation durations are independent. However, when the Phase mode setting is
"Three Phase", voltage variation may start only when all the monitored phases are
active. An example of variation duration when Phase mode is "Single Phase" can
be seen in Figure 418. The voltage variation in the example is detected as an
interruption for the phase B and a dip for the phase A, and also the variation
durations are interpreted as independent U_B and U_A durations. In case of single-
phase interruption, the DIPST output is active when either ST_A or ST_B is
active. The measured variation durations are the times measured between the
activation of the ST_A or ST_B outputs and deactivation of the ST_A or ST_B
outputs. When the Phase mode setting is "Three Phase", the example case does not
result in any activation.

GUID-22014C0F-9FE2-4528-80BA-AEE2CD9813B8 V1 EN

Figure 418: Single-phase interruption for the Phase mode value "Single Phase"

10.3.4.5 Three/single-phase selection variation examples

The provided rules always apply for single-phase (Phase Mode is "Single Phase")
power systems. However, for three-phase power systems (where Phase Mode is
"Three Phase"), it is required that all the phases have to be activated before the
activation of the START output. Interruption event indication requires all three
phases to undershoot Voltage Int set simultaneously, as shown in Figure 414. When
the requirement for interruption for "Three Phase" is no longer fulfilled, variation
is indicated as a dip as long as all phases are active.

In case of a single-phase interruption of Figure 418, when there is a dip indicated in

another phase but the third phase is not active, there is no variation indication start
when Phase Mode is "Three Phase". In this case, only the Phase Mode value
"Single Phase" results in the ST_B interruption and the ST_A dip.

615 series 779

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

It is also possible that there are simultaneously a dip in one phase and a swell in
other phases. The functionality of the corresponding event indication with one
inactive phase is shown in Figure 419. Here, the "Swell + dip" variation type of
Phase mode is "Single Phase". For the selection "Three Phase" of Phase mode, no
event indication or any activation takes place due to a non-active phase.
U_A
Voltage swell set
U_C

U_B
Voltage dip set

VoltageInt set

TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
GUID-0657A163-7D42-4543-8EC8-3DF84E2F0BF5 V1 EN

Figure 419: Concurrent dip and swell when Phase mode is "Single Phase"

In Figure 420, one phase is in dip and two phases have a swell indication. For the
Phase Mode value "Three Phase", the activation occurs only when all the phases
are active. Furthermore, both swell and dip variation event detections take place
simultaneously. In case of a concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell, both
SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are incremented by one.

Also Figure 420 shows that for the Phase Mode value "Three Phase", two different
time moment variation event swell detections take place and, consequently,
DIPCNT is incremented by one but SWELLCNT is totally incremented by two.
Both in Figure 419 and Figure 420 it is assumed that variation durations are
sufficient for detections to take place.

780 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

U_A
Voltage swell set
U_C

U_B
Voltage dip set

Voltage Int set

TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
A) Three phase mode
TRUE
ST_A FALSE
TRUE
ST_B FALSE
TRUE
ST_C FALSE
TRUE
SWELLST FALSE
TRUE
DIPST FALSE
TRUE
INTST FALSE
TRUE
SWELLOPR FALSE
TRUE
DIPOPR FALSE
INTOPR TRUE
FALSE
B) Single phase mode
GUID-1C0C906B-EC91-4C59-9291-B5002830E590 V1 EN

Figure 420: Concurrent dip and two-phase swell

10.3.5 Recorded data

Besides counter increments, the information required for a later fault analysis is
stored after a valid voltage variation is detected.

Recorded data information

When voltage variation starts, the phase current magnitudes preceding the
activation moment are stored. Also, the initial voltage magnitudes are temporarily
stored at the variation starting moment. If the variation is, for example, a two-phase
voltage dip, the voltage magnitude of the non-active phase is stored from this same
moment, as shown in Figure 421. The function tracks each variation-active voltage

615 series 781

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

phase, and the minimum or maximum magnitude corresponding to swell or dip/

interruption during variation is temporarily stored. If the minimum or maximum is
found in tracking and a new magnitude is stored, also the inactive phase voltages
are stored at the same moment, that is, the inactive phases are not magnitude-
tracked. The time instant (time stamp) at which the minimum or maximum
magnitude is measured is also temporarily stored for each voltage phase where
variation is active. Finally, variation detection triggers the recorded data update
when the variation activation ends and the maximum duration time is not exceeded.

The data objects to be recorded for PHQVVR are given in Table 651. There are
totally three data banks, and the information given in the table refers to one data
bank content.

The three sets of recorded data available are saved in data banks 1-3. The data bank
1 holds always the most recent recorded data, and the older data sets are moved to
the next banks (1→2 and 2→3) when a valid voltage variation is detected. When
all three banks have data and a new variation is detected, the newest data are placed
into bank 1 and the data in bank 3 are overwritten by the data from bank 2.

Figure 421 shows a valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips for the Phase
mode value "Single Phase". The first dip event duration is based on the U_A
duration, while the second dip is based on the time difference between the dip stop
and start times. The first detected event is an interruption based on the U_B
duration given in Figure 421. It is shown also with dotted arrows how voltage time
stamps are taken before the final time stamp for recording, which is shown as a
solid arrow. Here, the U_B timestamp is not taken when the U_A activation starts.

U_C amplitude & timestamp

Voltage swell set

U_C

U_A
U_A duration
U_B
Voltage dip set
Dip start

Dip stop

U_B duration

Voltage Int set

U_B amplitude & U_A amplitude &

timestamp timestamp
GUID-7A859344-8960-4CF3-B637-E2DE6D3BDA85 V1 EN

Figure 421: Valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips

782 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

Table 651: PHQVVR recording data bank parameters

Parameter description Parameter name
Event detection triggering time stamp Time
Variation type Variation type
Variation magnitude Ph A Variation Ph A
Variation magnitude Ph A time stamp (maximum/ Var Ph A rec time
minimum magnitude measuring time moment
during variation)
Variation magnitude Ph B Variation Ph B
Variation magnitude Ph B time stamp (maximum/ Var Ph B rec time
minimum magnitude measuring time moment
during variation)
Variation magnitude Ph C Variation Ph C
Variation magnitude Ph C time stamp (maximum/ Var Ph C rec time
minimum magnitude measuring time moment
during variation)
Variation duration Ph A Variation Dur Ph A
Variation Ph A start time stamp (phase A Var Dur Ph A time
variation start time moment)
Variation duration Ph B Variation Dur Ph B
Variation Ph B start time stamp (phase B Var Dur Ph B time
variation start time moment)
Variation duration Ph C Variation Dur Ph C
Variation Ph C start time stamp (phase C Var Dur Ph C time
variation start time moment)
Current magnitude Ph A preceding variation Var current Ph A
Current magnitude Ph B preceding variation Var current Ph B
Current magnitude Ph C preceding variation Var current Ph C

Table 652: Enumeration values for the recorded data parameters

Setting name Enum name Value
Variation type Swell 1
Variation type Dip 2
Variation type Swell + dip 3
Variation type Interruption 4
Variation type Swell + Int 5
Variation type Dip + Int 6
Variation type Swell+dip+Int 7

10.3.6 Application
Voltage variations are the most typical power quality variations on the public
electric network. Typically, short-duration voltage variations are defined to last

615 series 783

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

more than half of the nominal frequency period and less than one minute
(European Standard EN 50160 and IEEE Std 1159-1995).

These short-duration voltage variations are almost always caused by a fault

condition. Depending on where the fault is located, it can cause either a temporary
voltage rise (swell) or voltage drop (dip). A special case of voltage drop is the
complete loss of voltage (interruption).

PHQVVR is used for measuring short-duration voltage variations in distribution

networks. The power quality is evaluated in the voltage waveform by measuring
the voltage swells, dips and interruptions.

V Var Dur point 1 V Var Dur point 2

max duration
swell
min duration

Voltage swell set

magnitude
U_B

Voltage dip set

duration
dip

Voltage Int set

interruption

GUID-EF7957CE-E6EF-483E-A879-ABD003AC1AF9 V1 EN

Figure 422: Duration and voltage magnitude limits for swell, dip and
interruption measurement

Voltage dips disturb the sensitive equipment such as computers connected to the
power system and may result in the failure of the equipment. Voltage dips are
typically caused by faults occurring in the power distribution system. Typical
reasons for the faults are lightning strikes and tree contacts. In addition to fault
situations, the switching of heavy loads and starting of large motors also cause dips.

Voltage swells cause extra stress for the network components and the devices
connected to the power system. Voltage swells are typically caused by the earth
faults that occur in the power distribution system.

Voltage interruptions are typically associated with the switchgear operation related
to the occurrence and termination of short circuits. The operation of a circuit
breaker disconnects a part of the system from the source of energy. In the case of
overhead networks, automatic reclosing sequences are often applied to the circuit

784 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

breakers that interrupt fault currents. All these actions result in a sudden reduction
of voltages on all voltage phases.

Due to the nature of voltage variations, the power quality standards do not specify
any acceptance limits. There are only indicative values for, for example, voltage
dips in the European standard EN 50160. However, the power quality standards
like the international standard IEC 61000-4-30 specify that the voltage variation
event is characterized by its duration and magnitude. Furthermore, IEEE Std
1159-1995 gives the recommended practice for monitoring the electric power quality.

Voltage variation measurement can be done to the phase-to-earth and phase-to-

phase voltages. The power quality standards do not specify whether the
measurement should be done to phase or phase-to-phase voltages. However, in
some cases it is preferable to use phase-to-earth voltages for measurement. The
measurement mode is always TRMS.

10.3.7 Signals
Table 653: PHQVVR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current magnitude
I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current magnitude
I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current magnitude
U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage A
U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage B
U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase-to-earth voltage C
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode

Table 654: PHQVVR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPERATE BOOLEAN Voltage variation detected
START BOOLEAN Voltage variation present
SWELLST BOOLEAN Voltage swell active
DIPST BOOLEAN Voltage dip active
INTST BOOLEAN Voltage interruption active

615 series 785

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

10.3.8 Settings
Table 655: PHQVVR Group settings
Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Reference voltage 10.0...200.0 %Un 0.1 57.7 Reference supply voltage in %
Voltage dip set 1 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 1 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles 0.1 3.0 Voltage variation dip duration 1
Voltage dip set 2 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 2 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 2 10.0...180.0 cycles 0.1 30.0 Voltage variation dip duration 2
Voltage dip set 3 10.0...100.0 % 0.1 80.0 Dip limit 3 in % of reference voltage
VVa dip time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation dip duration 3
Voltage swell set 1 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 1 in % of reference voltage
VVa swell time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles 0.1 0.5 Voltage variation swell duration 1
Voltage swell set 2 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 2 in % of reference voltage
VVa swell time 2 10.0...80.0 cycles 0.1 10.0 Voltage variation swell duration 2
Voltage swell set 3 100.0...140.0 % 0.1 120.0 Swell limit 3 in % of reference voltage
VVa swell time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 2000 Voltage variation swell duration 3
Voltage Int set 0.0...100.0 % 0.1 10.0 Interruption limit in % of reference voltage
VVa Int time 1 0.5...30.0 cycles 0.1 3.0 Voltage variation Int duration 1
VVa Int time 2 10.0...180.0 cycles 0.1 30.0 Voltage variation Int duration 2
VVa Int time 3 2000...60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation interruption duration 3
VVa Dur Max 100...3600000 ms 100 60000 Maximum voltage variation duration

Table 656: PHQVVR Non group settings

Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On
5=off
Phase supervision 1=Ph A 7=Ph A + B + C Monitored voltage phase
2=Ph B
3=Ph A + B
4=Ph C
5=Ph A + C
6=Ph B + C
7=Ph A + B + C
Phase mode 1=Three Phase 2=Single Phase Three/Single phase mode
2=Single Phase
Variation enable 1=Swell 7=Swell+dip+Int Enable variation type
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int

786 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

10.3.9 Monitored data

Table 657: PHQVVR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ST_A BOOLEAN 0=False Start Phase A (Voltage
1=True Variation Event in
progress)
ST_B BOOLEAN 0=False Start Phase B (Voltage
1=True Variation Event in
progress)
ST_C BOOLEAN 0=False Start Phase C (Voltage
1=True Variation Event in
progress)
INSTSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Instantaneous swell
operation counter
MOMSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary swell
operation counter
TEMPSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary swell
operation counter
MAXDURSWELLCN INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration swell
T operation counter
INSTDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Instantaneous dip
operation counter
MOMDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary dip operation
counter
TEMPDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary dip operation
counter
MAXDURDIPCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration dip
operation counter
MOMINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary interruption
operation counter
TEMPINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary interruption
operation counter
SUSTINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Sustained interruption
operation counter
MAXDURINTCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration
interruption operation
counter
PHQVVR Enum 1=on Status
2=blocked
3=test
4=test/blocked
5=off
Time Timestamp Time
Variation type Enum 0=No variation Variation type
1=Swell
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
Table continues on next page

615 series 787

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase A
Var Ph A rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase A time stamp
Variation Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase B
Var Ph B rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase B time stamp
Variation Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase C
Var Ph C rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase C time stamp
Variation Dur Ph A FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
A
Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
B
Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
C
Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time
stamp
Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase A preceding
variation
Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase B preceding
variation
Var current Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase C preceding
variation
Time Timestamp Time
Variation type Enum 0=No variation Variation type
1=Swell
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase A
Var Ph A rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase A time stamp
Variation Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase B
Var Ph B rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase B time stamp
Table continues on next page

788 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 10
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Variation Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase C
Var Ph C rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase C time stamp
Variation Dur Ph A FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
A
Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
B
Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
C
Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time
stamp
Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase A preceding
variation
Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase B preceding
variation
Var current Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase C preceding
variation
Time Timestamp Time
Variation type Enum 0=No variation Variation type
1=Swell
2=Dip
3=Swell + dip
4=Interruption
5=Swell + Int
6=Dip + Int
7=Swell+dip+Int
Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase A
Var Ph A rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase A time stamp
Variation Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase B
Var Ph B rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase B time stamp
Variation Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 xUn Variation magnitude
Phase C
Var Ph C rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude
Phase C time stamp
Variation Dur Ph A FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
A
Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time
stamp
Table continues on next page

615 series 789

Technical Manual
Section 10 1YHT530004D05 D
Power quality measurement functions

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
B
Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time
stamp
Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 s Variation duration Phase
C
Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time
stamp
Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase A preceding
variation
Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase B preceding
variation
Var current Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 xIn Current magnitude
Phase C preceding
variation

790 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

Section 11 General function block features

11.1 Definite time characteristics

11.1.1 Definite time operation

The DT mode is enabled when the Operating curve type setting is selected either as
"ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". In the DT mode, the OPERATE output of
the function is activated when the time calculation exceeds the set Operate delay
time.

The user can determine the reset in the DT mode with the Reset delay time setting,
which provides the delayed reset property when needed.

The Type of reset curve setting has no effect on the reset method
when the DT mode is selected, but the reset is determined solely
with the Reset delay time setting.

The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults,
for example self-sealing insulation faults, and severe faults which may produce
high asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers. It
is typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop-off
periods, during which the fault current falls below the set start current, including
hysteresis. Without the delayed reset function, the operate timer would reset when
the current drops off. In the same way, an apparent drop-off period of the
secondary current of the saturated current transformer can also reset the operate timer.

615 series 791

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A060764 V1 EN

Figure 423: Operation of the counter in drop-off

In case 1, the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2, the
counter is reset immediately, because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero.

A070421 V1 EN

Figure 424: Drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time

792 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

When the drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time, as described in
Figure 424, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active,
provided that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive
when the current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The
timer input rises when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the
START output and the operate timer starts elapsing. The reset (drop-off) timer
starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault disappears. When the reset (drop-
off) timer elapses, the operate timer is reset. Since this happens before another start
occurs, the OPERATE output is not activated.

A070420 V1 EN

Figure 425: Drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time

When the drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time, as described in
Figure 425, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active,
provided that the current is above the set Start value. The input signal is inactive
when the current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region. The
timer input rises when a fault current is detected. The definite timer activates the
START output and the operate timer starts elapsing. The Reset (drop-off) timer
starts when the timer input falls, that is, the fault disappears. Another fault situation
occurs before the reset (drop-off) timer has elapsed. This causes the activation of
the OPERATE output, since the operate timer already has elapsed.

615 series 793

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070422 V1 EN

Figure 426: Operating effect of the BLOCK input when the selected blocking
mode is "Freeze timer"

If the BLOCK input is activated when the operate timer is running, as described in
Figure 426, the timer is frozen during the time BLOCK remains active. If the timer
input is not active longer than specified by the Reset delay time setting, the operate
timer is reset in the same way as described in Figure 424, regardless of the BLOCK
input .

The selected blocking mode is "Freeze timer".

11.2 Current based inverse definite minimum time

characteristics

11.2.1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection

The inverse-time modes, the operation time depends on the momentary value of the
current: the higher the current, the faster the operation time. The operation time
calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Start
value and the START output is activated.

794 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the
inverse-time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the
setting values used. The curve scaling is determined with the Time multiplier setting.

There are two methods to level out the inverse-time characteristic.

• The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operating time for the
IDMT curve, that is, the operation time is always at least the Minimum operate
time setting.
• Alternatively, the IDMT Sat point is used for giving the leveling-out point as a
multiple of the Start value setting. (Global setting: Configuration/System/
IDMT Sat point). The default parameter value is 50. This setting affects only
the overcurrent and earth-fault IDMT timers.

IDMT operation time at currents over 50 x In is not guaranteed.

615 series 795

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

GUID-20353F8B-2112-41CB-8F68-B51F8ACA775E V1 EN

Figure 427: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out
with the Minimum operate time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds
(the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum).

796 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

GUID-87A96860-4268-4AD1-ABA1-3227D3BB36D5 V1 EN

Figure 428: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out
with IDMT Sat point setting value “11” (the Minimum operate time
setting is set to minimum).

615 series 797

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

GUID-9BFD6DC5-08B5-4755-A899-DF5ED26E75F6 V1 EN

Figure 429: Example of how the inverse time characteristic is leveled out with
currents over 50 x In and the Setting Start value setting “2.5 x In”.
(the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum and the Minimum
operate time setting is set to minimum).

The grey zone in Figure 429 shows the behavior of the curve in case the measured
current is outside the guaranteed measuring range. Also, the maximum measured
current of 50 x In gives the leveling-out point 50/2.5 = 20 x I/I>.

11.2.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics

For inverse-time operation, both IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time

characteristics are supported.

798 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

The operate times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B and C.

The values of the coefficients can be calculated according to the formula:

 
 
 A
t[ s ] = + B⋅k
 c 
  I  
 I > − 1 
  
A060821 V2 EN (Equation 99)

t[s] Operate time in seconds

I measured current
I> set Start value
k set Time multiplier

Table 658: Curve parameters for ANSI and IEC IDMT curves
Curve name A B C
(1) ANSI Extremely 28.2 0.1217 2.0
Inverse
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 19.61 0.491 2.0
(3) ANSI Normal 0.0086 0.0185 0.02
Inverse
(4) ANSI Moderately 0.0515 0.1140 0.02
Inverse
(6) Long Time 64.07 0.250 2.0
Extremely Inverse
(7) Long Time Very 28.55 0.712 2.0
Inverse
(8) Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
(9) IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(10) IEC Very Inverse 13.5 0.0 1.0
(11) IEC Inverse 0.14 0.0 0.02
(12) IEC Extremely 80.0 0.0 2.0
Inverse
(13) IEC Short Time 0.05 0.0 0.04
Inverse
(14) IEC Long Time 120 0.0 1.0
Inverse

615 series 799

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 430: ANSI extremely inverse-time characteristics

800 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 431: ANSI very inverse-time characteristics

615 series 801

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 432: ANSI normal inverse-time characteristics

802 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 433: ANSI moderately inverse-time characteristics

615 series 803

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 434: ANSI long-time extremely inverse-time characteristics

804 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 435: ANSI long-time very inverse-time characteristics

615 series 805

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 436: ANSI long-time inverse-time characteristics

806 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 437: IEC normal inverse-time characteristics

615 series 807

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 438: IEC very inverse-time characteristics

808 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 439: IEC inverse-time characteristics

615 series 809

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 440: IEC extremely inverse-time characteristics

810 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 441: IEC short-time inverse-time characteristics

615 series 811

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 442: IEC long-time inverse-time characteristics

812 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

11.2.1.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics

The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard
formula:

A060641 V2 EN (Equation 100)

t[s] Operate time (in seconds)

A set Curve parameter A
B set Curve parameter B
C set Curve parameter C
E set Curve parameter E
I Measured current
I> set Start value
k set Time multiplier

11.2.1.3 RI and RD-type inverse-time characteristics

The RI-type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays. The RD-type is an

earth-fault specific characteristic.

The RI-type is calculated using the formula

 
 k 
t[ s ] =  
 0.339 − 0.236 × I > 
 I 
A060642 V2 EN (Equation 101)

The RD-type is calculated using the formula

 I 
t[ s ] = 5.8 − 1.35 × In  
k×I >
A060643 V2 EN (Equation 102)

615 series 813

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

t[s] Operate time (in seconds)

k set Time multiplier
I Measured current
I> set Start value

814 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 443: RI-type inverse-time characteristics

615 series 815

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 444: RD-type inverse-time characteristics

816 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

11.2.2 Reset in inverse-time modes

The user can select the reset characteristics by using the Type of reset curve setting.

Table 659: Values for reset mode

Setting name Possible values
Type of reset curve 1=Immediate
2=Def time reset
3=Inverse reset

Immediate reset
If the Type of reset curve setting in a drop-off case is selected as "Immediate", the
inverse timer resets immediately.

Definite time reset

The definite type of reset in the inverse-time mode can be achieved by setting the
Type of reset curve parameter to “Def time reset”. As a result, the operate inverse-
time counter is frozen for the time determined with the Reset delay time setting
after the current drops below the set Start value, including hysteresis.The integral
sum of the inverse-time counter is reset, if another start does not occur during the
reset delay.

If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as “Def time reset”, the
current level has no influence on the reset characteristic.

Inverse reset

Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user-
programmable curves. If you use other curve types, immediate reset
occurs.

Standard delayed inverse reset

The reset characteristic required in ANSI (IEEE) inverse-time modes is provided

by setting the Type of reset curve parameter to “Inverse reset”. In this mode, the
time delay for reset is given with the following formula using the coefficient D,
which has its values defined in the table below.

 
 
 D ⋅k
t[ s ] =
 2 
  I  − 1 
 I> 
  
A060817 V3 EN (Equation 103)

615 series 817

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

t[s] Reset time (in seconds)

k set Time multiplier
I Measured current
I> set Start value

Table 660: Coefficients for ANSI delayed inverse reset curves

Curve name D
(1) ANSI Extremely Inverse 29.1
(2) ANSI Very Inverse 21.6
(3) ANSI Normal Inverse 0.46
(4) ANSI Moderately Inverse 4.85
(6) Long Time Extremely Inverse 30
(7) Long Time Very Inverse 13.46
(8) Long Time Inverse 4.6

818 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070828 V1 EN

Figure 445: ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics

615 series 819

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070829 V1 EN

Figure 446: ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics

820 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070830 V1 EN

Figure 447: ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics

615 series 821

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070831 V1 EN

Figure 448: ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics

822 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070832 V1 EN

Figure 449: ANSI long-time extremely inverse reset time characteristics

615 series 823

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

A070833 V1 EN

Figure 450: ANSI long-time very inverse reset time characteristics

824 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

A070834 V1 EN

Figure 451: ANSI long-time inverse reset time characteristics

The delayed inverse-time reset is not available for IEC-type inverse

time curves.

User-programmable delayed inverse reset

615 series 825

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the
following formula using the set Curve parameter D.

 
 
 D ⋅k
t[ s ] =
 2 
  I  − 1 
 I> 
  
A060817 V3 EN (Equation 104)

t[s] Reset time (in seconds)

k set Time multiplier
D set Curve parameter D
I Measured current
I> set Start value

11.2.3 Inverse-timer freezing

When the BLOCK input is active, the internal value of the time counter is frozen at
the value of the moment just before the freezing. Freezing of the counter value is
chosen when the user does not wish the counter value to count upwards or to be
reset. This may be the case, for example, when the inverse-time function of an IED
needs to be blocked to enable the definite-time operation of another IED for
selectivity reasons, especially if different relaying techniques (old and modern
relays) are applied.

The selected blocking mode is "Freeze timer".

The activation of the BLOCK input also lengthens the minimum

delay value of the timer.

Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the START
output. It still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Start value, and
inactive when the current falls below the set Start value and the set Reset delay
time has expired.

826 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

11.3 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time

characteristics

11.3.1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection

In inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
voltage, the higher the voltage, the faster the operate time. The operate time
calculation or integration starts immediately when the voltage exceeds the set value
of the Start value setting and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the overvoltage situation exceeds the value set by the
inverse time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting
values used. The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT
mode, that is, it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming
too short. For example:

615 series 827

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

GUID-BCFE3F56-BFA8-4BCC-8215-30C089C80EAD V1 EN

Figure 452: Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum
operate time set to 0.5 second

828 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

GUID-90BAEB05-E8FB-4F8A-8F07-E110DD63FCCF V1 EN

Figure 453: Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum
operate time set to 1 second

11.3.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection

The operate times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.

The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula:

615 series 829

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U −U > 
B× −C
 U > 
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35 V2 EN (Equation 105)

t [s] operate time in seconds

U measured voltage
U> the set value of Start value
k the set value of Time multiplier

Table 661: Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves
Curve name A B C D E
(17) Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1
(18) Inverse Curve B 480 32 0.5 0.035 2
(19) Inverse Curve C 480 32 0.5 0.035 3

830 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 454: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

615 series 831

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 455: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

832 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 456: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

11.3.1.2 User programmable inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage

protection

The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula:

615 series 833

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U −U > 
B× −C
 U > 
GUID-6E9DC0FE-7457-4317-9480-8CCC6D63AB35 V2 EN (Equation 106)

t[s] operate time in seconds

A the set value of Curve parameter A
B the set value of Curve parameter B
C the set value of Curve parameter C
D the set value of Curve parameter D
E the set value of Curve parameter E
U measured voltage
U> the set value of Start value
k the set value of Time multiplier

11.3.1.3 IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection

For the overvoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time
does not start until the voltage exceeds the value of Start value. To cope with
discontinuity characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the
equation to a fixed value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter
and it is given in percents compared to Start value. For example, due to the curve
equation B and C, the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that
when the input voltages are in the range of Start value to Curve Sat Relative in
percent over Start value, the equation uses Start value * (1.0 + Curve Sat Relative /
100 ) for the measured voltage. Although, the curve A has no discontinuities when
the ratio U/U> exceeds the unity, Curve Sat Relative is also set for it. The Curve
Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and C is 2.0 percent. However, it should be
noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning the
discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is used. Thus,
the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the
inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum operate
time for the IDMT curve because for the voltage ratio values affecting by this
setting, the operation time is fixed, that is, the definite time, depending on the
parameters but no longer the voltage.

11.3.2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection

In the inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the
voltage, the lower the voltage, the faster the operate time. The operate time
calculation or integration starts immediately when the voltage goes below the set
value of the Start value setting and the START output is activated.

The OPERATE output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of
the integrator calculating the undervoltage situation exceeds the value set by the

834 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

inverse-time mode. The set value depends on the selected curve type and the
setting values used. The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier
setting.

The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time possible for
the IDMT mode. For setting a value for this parameter, the user should carefully
study the particular IDMT curve.

11.3.2.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage protection

The operate times for the standard undervoltage IDMT curves are defined with the
coefficients A, B, C, D and E.

The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula:

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U < −U 
B× −C
 U < 
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79 V2 EN (Equation 107)

t [s] operate time in seconds

U measured voltage
U< the set value of the Start value setting
k the set value of the Time multiplier setting

Table 662: Curve coefficients for standard undervoltage IDMT curves

Curve name A B C D E
(21) Inverse 1 1 0 0 1
Curve A
(22) Inverse 480 32 0.5 0.055 2
Curve B

615 series 835

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 457: : Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

836 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 458: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

11.3.2.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage

protection

The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula:

615 series 837

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

k⋅A
t  s  = E
+D
 U < −U 
B× −C
 U < 
GUID-4A433D56-D7FB-412E-B1AB-7FD43051EE79 V2 EN (Equation 108)

t[s] operate time in seconds

A the set value of Curve parameter A
B the set value of Curve parameter B
C the set value of Curve parameter C
D the set value of Curve parameter D
E the set value of Curve parameter E
U measured voltage
U< the set value of Start value
k the set value of Time multiplier

11.3.2.3 IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection

For the undervoltage IDMT mode of operation, the integration of the operate time
does not start until the voltage falls below the value of Start value. To cope with
discontinuity characteristics of the curve, a specific parameter for saturating the
equation to a fixed value is created. The Curve Sat Relative setting is the parameter
and it is given in percents compared with Start value. For example, due to the
curve equation B, the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that
when input voltages are in the range from Start value to Curve Sat Relative in
percents under Start value, the equation uses Start value * (1.0 - Curve Sat
Relative / 100 ) for the measured voltage. Although, the curve A has no
discontinuities when the ratio U/U> exceeds the unity, Curve Sat Relative is set for
it as well. The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A, B and C is 2.0 percent.
However, it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve
characteristics concerning also discontinuities in the curve when the programmable
curve equation is used. Thus, the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another
degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it
effectively sets the maximum operate time for the IDMT curve because for the
voltage ratio values affecting by this setting, the operation time is fixed, that is, the
definite time, depending on the parameters but no longer the voltage.

11.4 Frequency measurement and protection

All the function blocks that use frequency quantity as their input signal share the
common features related to the frequency measurement algorithm. The frequency
estimation is done from one phase (phase-to-phase or phase voltage) or from the
positive phase sequence (PPS). The voltage groups with three-phase inputs use PPS
as the source. The frequency measurement range is 0.6 xFn to 1.5 xFn. When the
frequency exceeds these limits, it is regarded as out of range and a minimum or

838 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

maximum value is held as the measured value respectively with appropriate quality
information. The frequency estimation requires 160 ms to stabilize after a bad
quality signal. Therefore, a delay of 160 ms is added to the transition from the bad
quality. The bad quality of the signal can be due to restrictions like:
• The source voltage is below 0.02 x Un at Fn.
• The source voltage waveform is discontinuous.
• The source voltage frequency rate of change exceeds 15 Hz/s (including
stepwise frequency changes).

When the bad signal quality is obtained, the nominal frequency value is shown
with appropriate quality information in the measurement view. The frequency
protection functions are blocked when the quality is bad, thus the timers and the
function outputs are reset. When the frequency is out of the function block’s setting
range but within the measurement range, the protection blocks are running.
However, the OPERATE outputs are blocked until the frequency restores to a valid
range.

11.5 Measurement modes

In many current or voltage dependent function blocks, there are four alternative
measuring principles:
• RMS
• DFT which is a numerically calculated fundamental component of the signal
• Peak-to-peak
• Peak-to-peak with peak backup

Consequently, the measurement mode can be selected according to the application.

In extreme cases, for example with high overcurrent or harmonic content, the
measurement modes function in a slightly different way. The operation accuracy is
defined with the frequency range of f/fn=0.95...1.05. In peak-to-peak and RMS
measurement modes, the harmonics of the phase currents are not suppressed,
whereas in the fundamental frequency measurement the suppression of harmonics
is at least -50 dB at the frequency range of f= n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,...

RMS
The RMS measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting
using the value "RMS". RMS consists of both AC and DC components. The AC
component is the effective mean value of the positive and negative peak values.
RMS is used in applications where the effect of the DC component must be taken
into account.

RMS is calculated according to the formula:

615 series 839

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

1 n 2
I RMS = ∑ Ii
n i =1
A070883 V2 EN (Equation 109)

n the number of samples in a calculation cycle

Ii the current sample value

DFT
The DFT measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting
using the value "DFT". In the DFT mode, the fundamental frequency component of
the measured signal is numerically calculated from the samples. In some
applications, for example, it can be difficult to accomplish sufficiently sensitive
settings and accurate operation of the low stage, which may be due to a
considerable amount of harmonics on the primary side currents. In such a case, the
operation can be based solely on the fundamental frequency component of the
current. In addition, the DFT mode has slightly higher CT requirements than the peak-
to-peak mode, if used with high and instantaneous stages.

Peak-to-peak
The peak-to-peak measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode
setting using the value "Peak-to-Peak". It is the fastest measurement mode, in
which the measurement quantity is made by calculating the average from the
positive and negative peak values. The DC component is not included. The
retardation time is short. The damping of the harmonics is quite low and practically
determined by the characteristics of the anti-aliasing filter of the IED inputs.
Consequently, this mode is usually used in conjunction with high and instantaneous
stages, where the suppression of harmonics is not so important. In addition, the peak-
to-peak mode allows considerable CT saturation without impairing the
performance of the operation.

Peak-to-peak with peak backup

The peak-to-peak with peak backup measurement principle is selected with the
Measurement mode setting using the value "P-to-P+backup". It is similar to the peak-
to-peak mode, with the exception that it has been enhanced with the peak backup.
In the peak-to-peak with peak backup mode, the function starts with two
conditions: the peak-to-peak value is above the set start current or the peak value is
above two times the set Start value. The peak backup is enabled only when the
function is used in the DT mode in high and instantaneous stages for faster operation.

840 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 11
General function block features

11.6 Calculated measurements

Calculated residual current and voltage

The residual current is calculated from the phase currents according to equation:

Io = −( I A + I B + I C )
GUID-B9280304-8AC0-40A5-8140-2F00C1F36A9E V1 EN (Equation 110)

The residual voltage is calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages when the VT
connection is selected as “Wye” with the equation:

Uo = (U A + U B + U C ) / 3
GUID-03909E83-8AA3-42FF-B088-F216BBB16839 V1 EN (Equation 111)

Sequence components
The phase-sequence current components are calculated from the phase currents
according to:

I 0 = (I A + I B + I C ) / 3
GUID-2319C34C-8CC3-400C-8409-7E68ACA4F435 V2 EN (Equation 112)

I1 = (I A + a ⋅ I B + a2 ⋅ I C ) / 3
GUID-02E717A9-A58F-41B3-8813-EB8CDB78CBF1 V2 EN (Equation 113)

I 2 = (I A + a2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C ) / 3
GUID-80F92D60-0425-4F1F-9B18-DB2DEF4C2407 V2 EN (Equation 114)

The phase-sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase-to-earth

voltages when VT connection is selected as “Wye” with the equations:

U 0 = (U A + U B + U C ) / 3
GUID-49CFB460-5B74-43A6-A72C-AAD3AF795716 V2 EN (Equation 115)

U 1 = (U A + a ⋅U B + a 2 ⋅ U C ) / 3
GUID-7A6B6AAD-8DDC-4663-A72F-A3715BF3E56A V2 EN (Equation 116)

U 2 = (U A + a 2 ⋅U B + a ⋅ U C ) / 3
GUID-6FAAFCC1-AF25-4A0A-8D9B-FC2FD0BCFB21 V1 EN (Equation 117)

When VT connection is selected as “Delta”, the positive and negative phase

sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages
according to the equations:

U 1 = (U AB − a 2 ⋅ U BC ) / 3
GUID-70796339-C68A-4D4B-8C10-A966BD7F090C V2 EN (Equation 118)

U 2 = (U AB − a ⋅U BC ) / 3
GUID-C132C6CA-B5F9-4DC1-94AF-FF22D2F0F12A V2 EN (Equation 119)

615 series 841

Technical Manual
Section 11 1YHT530004D05 D
General function block features

The phase-to-earth voltages are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages when
VT connection is selected as "Delta" according to the equations.

(
U A = U 0 + U AB − U CA / 3 )
GUID-8581E9AC-389C-40C2-8952-3C076E74BDEC V1 EN (Equation 120)

(
U B = U 0 + U BC − U AB / 3 )
GUID-9EB6302C-2DB8-482F-AAC3-BB3857C6F100 V1 EN (Equation 121)

(
U C = U 0 + U CA − U BC / 3 )
GUID-67B3ACF2-D8F5-4829-B97C-7E2F3158BF8E V1 EN (Equation 122)

If the U 0 channel is not valid, it is assumed to be zero.

The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages when
VT connection is selected as "Wye" according to the equations.

U AB = U A − U B
GUID-674F05D1-414A-4F76-B196-88441B7820B8 V1 EN (Equation 123)

U BC = U B − U C
GUID-9BA93C77-427D-4044-BD68-FEE4A3A2433E V1 EN (Equation 124)

U CA = U C − U A
GUID-DDD0C1F0-6934-4FB4-9F79-702440125979 V1 EN (Equation 125)

842 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 12
Requirements for measurement transformers

Section 12 Requirements for measurement

transformers

12.1 Current transformers

12.1.1 Current transformer requirements for non-directional

overcurrent protection
For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be
chosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT may
endanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However,
when the CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be
enabled.

The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on the
network fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CT
burden. The protection settings of the IED should be defined in accordance with
the CT performance as well as other factors.

12.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor

The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primary
current to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer
of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For
protective current transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest
permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current
prescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning
protection).

Table 663: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error at Phase displacement at rated primary Composite error at
rated primary current rated accuracy limit
current (%) minutes centiradians primary current (%)
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 - - 10

The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent
protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if
there are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering,
power metering, and so on) of the IED.

615 series 843

Technical Manual
Section 12 1YHT530004D05 D
Requirements for measurement transformers

The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current
magnitude at which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the
secondary current of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the
performance of the protection IED.

In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy
limit factor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the
actual CT burden.

The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:

Sin + Sn
Fa ≈ Fn ×
Sin + S
A071141 V1 EN

Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn

Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT

S the actual external burden

12.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection

The current transformer selection

Non-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the
accuracy class or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,
recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.

The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal
and dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the IED is not exceeded.
This is always fulfilled when

I1n > Ikmax / 100,

Ikmax is the highest fault current.

The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the
IED. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominal primary current
can be used than given by the formula.

Recommended start current settings

If Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to
operate, the start current should be set using the formula:

Current start value < 0.7 x (Ikmin / I1n)

I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.

844 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 12
Requirements for measurement transformers

The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection IED inaccuracy, current
transformer errors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.

The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the
high set stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by
the CT saturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is
noticeably lower than Fa.

When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT
does not need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply
according to the formula.

Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformers

The saturation of CT may cause a delayed IED operation. To ensure the time
selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate times of
successive IEDs.

With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that
is as long as the time the constant of the DC component of the fault current, when
the current is only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the
accuracy limit factor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and
on the operate time setting.

With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as
being as long as the time constant of the DC component.

With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the
AC component of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times the
starting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.
Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:

Fa > 20*Current start value / I1n

The Current start value is the primary pickup current setting of the IED.

12.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection

The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is
implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.

615 series 845

Technical Manual
Section 12 1YHT530004D05 D
Requirements for measurement transformers

A071142 V1 EN

Figure 459: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection

The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase
short circuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is
calculated to be 59.

The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice the
nominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with
the next IED (not visible in the figure above). The settings for the high-set stage
and instantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the
downstream protection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so
that the IED operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate with
the maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in the figure above.

For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>)
in this example is 3 500 A (5.83 x I2n). For the CT characteristics point of view, the
criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the
IED setting is considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden
could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.

846 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

Section 13 IED physical connections

13.1 Protective earth connections

1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24

A070772 V1 EN

Figure 460: The protective earth screw is located between connectors X100
and X110

The earth lead must be at least 6.0 mm2 and as short as possible.

13.2 Binary and analog connections

All binary and analog connections are described in the product

specific application manuals.

615 series 847

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

13.3 Communication connections

The front communication connection is an RJ-45 type connector used mainly for
configuration and setting.

For RED615, the rear communication module is mandatory due to the connection
needed for the line-differential protection communication. If station
communication is needed for REF615, REM615, RET615 or REU615, an optional
rear communication module is required. Several optional communication
connections are available.

• Galvanic RJ-45 Ethernet connection

• Optical LC Ethernet connection
• ST-type glass fibre serial connection
• EIA-485 serial connection
• EIA-232 serial connection

Never touch the end face of an optical fiber connector.

Always install dust caps on unplugged fiber connectors.

If contaminated, clean optical connectors only with fiber-optic

cleaning products.

13.3.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection

The IED is provided with an RJ-45 connector on the LHMI. The connector is
intended for configuration and setting purposes. The interface on the PC side has to
be configured in a way that it obtains the IP address automatically. There is a
DHCP server inside IED for the front interface only.

The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and
disturbance records can be read via the front communication port.

Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.

• PCM600
• LHMI
• WHMI

848 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

The default IP address of the IED through this port is 192.168.0.254.

The front port supports TCP/IP protocol. A standard Ethernet CAT 5 crossover
cable is used with the front port.

The speed of the front connector interface is limited to 10 Mbps.

13.3.2 Ethernet rear connections

The Ethernet station bus communication module is provided with either galvanic
RJ-45 connection or optical multimode LC type connection, depending on the
product variant and the selected communication interface option. A shielded twisted-
pair cable CAT 5e is used with the RJ-45 connector and an optical multi-mode
cable (≤2 km) with the LC type connector.

In addition, communication modules with multiple Ethernet connectors enable the

forwarding of Ethernet traffic. The variants include an internal switch that handles
the Ethernet traffic between an IED and a station bus. In this case, the used
network can be a ring or daisy-chain type of network topology. In loop type
topology, a self-healing Ethernet loop is closed by a managed switch supporting
rapid spanning tree protocol. In daisy-chain type of topology, the network is bus
type and it is either without switches, where the station bus starts from the station
client, or with a switch to connect some devices and the IEDs of this product series
to the same network.

Communication modules including Ethernet connectors X1, X2, and X3 can utilize
the third port for connecting any other device (for example, an SNTP server, that is
visible for the whole local subnet) to a station bus. In RED615, the first Ethernet
port X16 is dedicated to the line differential communication and it cannot be used
for station bus communication.

The IED's default IP address through rear Ethernet port is 192.168.2.10 with the TCP/
IP protocol. The data transfer rate is 100 Mbps.

13.3.3 EIA-232 serial rear connection

The EIA-232 connection follows the TIA/EIA-232 standard and is intended to be
used with a point-to-point connection. The connection supports hardware flow
control (RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR), full-duplex and half-duplex communication.

13.3.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection

The EIA-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is
intended to be used in a daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire half-duplex or 4-
wire full-duplex, multi-point communication.

615 series 849

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus

where the IED is used is 32, and the maximum length of the bus is
1200 meters.

13.3.5 Line differential protection communication connection

The protection communication port using dedicated link is provided with either a
single mode or a multimode connection with an LC type connector. The LC
communication (X16/LD) is always the topmost in the communication module.

The port cannot be used with any other Ethernet communication network. The
interface speed is 100 Mbps.

Use direct link. Switches, hubs or routers are not allowed between
the IEDs.

If galvanic pilot wire is used as protection communication link, the pilot wire
modem RPW600 is required. The protection communication link always requires
two modems in a protection scheme, thus delivered in pairs of master (RPW600M)
and follower (RPW600F) units. A single-mode fibre optic cable with dual LC type
connectors is used to connect RED615 with RPW600 modem. The recommended
minimum length for this cable is 3 m.

Communication port X16/LD of RED615 is used both for direct

fibre optic link and connection with the pilot wire modem.

The RPW600 modem has a built-in 5 kVAC (RMS, 1 min) level

insulation against earth potential in the pilot wire connection.

13.3.6 Optical ST serial rear connection

Serial communication can be used optionally through an optical connection either
in loop or star topology. The connection idle state is light on or light off.

13.3.7 Communication interfaces and protocols

The communication protocols supported depend on the optional rear
communication module.

850 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 664: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols

Interfaces/ Ethernet Serial
Protocols 100BASE-TX
100BASE-FX LC1) EIA-232/EIA-485 Fibre-optic ST
RJ-45
IEC 61850 ● ● - -
MODBUS RTU/ - - ● ●
ASCII
MODBUS TCP/IP ● ● - -
IEC 60870-5-103 - - ● ●
● = Supported

1) Not available for RED615

13.3.8 Rear communication modules

COM0001 COM0002 COM0003 COM0005 COM0006 COM0007

RJ-45 LC RS-485+ RJ-45+ARC LC+ARC RS-485+
IRIG-B IRIG-B+ARC
GUID-9942EA65-7B6F-4987-BD1A-9A88B0B222D6 V2 EN

Figure 461: Communication module options

615 series 851

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

COM0008 COM0010 COM0011 COM0012 COM0013 COM0014 COM0023

RJ-45+RS485+ LC+RS485+ RJ-45+RS485+ LC+RS485+ RJ-45+RS232/485+
IRIG-B IRIG-B IRIG-B+ARC IRIG-B+ARC RS485+ST+
IRIG-B
GUID-07821EE0-53E5-44A8-82BF-1C1D652DD21E V1 EN

Figure 462: Communication module options

852 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

COM0031 COM0032 COM0033 COM0034

3xRJ-45 2xLC+RJ-45+ 3xRJ-45+ LC+2xRJ-45+
ST+ARC ST+ARC ST+ARC
GUID-AF5B9B14-A1F1-4EED-96AD-DA0665226860 V3 EN

Figure 463: Communication module options

Table 665: Station bus communication interfaces included in communication modules

Module ID RJ-45 LC EIA-485 EIA-232 ST
COM0001 1 - - - -
COM0002 - 1 - - -
COM0003 - - 1 - -
COM0005 1 - - - -
COM0006 - 1 - - -
COM0007 - - 1 - -

COM00081) 2 - 1 - 1

COM00101) 2 - 1 - 1

COM0011 1 - 1 - -
COM0012 - 1 1 - -
COM0013 1 - 1 - -
COM0014 - 1 1 - -
COM0023 1 - 1 1 1
COM0031 3 - - - -
Table continues on next page

615 series 853

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

Module ID RJ-45 LC EIA-485 EIA-232 ST

COM0032 1 2 - - 1
COM0033 3 - - - 1
COM0034 2 1 - - 1

1) Available only for RED615.

Table 666: LED descriptions for COM0001-COM0014

LED Connector Description1)
X1 X1 X1/LAN link status and activity (RJ-45 and LC)
RX1 X5 COM2 2-wire/4-wire receive activity
TX1 X5 COM2 2-wire/4-wire transmit activity
RX2 X5 COM1 2-wire receive activity
TX2 X5 COM1 2-wire transmit activity
I-B X5 IRIG-B signal activity

1) Depending on the COM module and jumper configuration

Table 667: LED descriptions for COM0008 and COM0010

LED Connector Description1)
X16 X16 X16/LD link status and activity
X1 X1 X1/LAN link status and activity
X2 X2 X2/LAN link status and activity
RX X5 COM1 2-wire receive activity/COM2 4-wire receive activity
TX X5 COM1 2-wire transmit activity/COM2 4-wire transmit activity
RX X5/X12 COM2 2-wire receive activity/COM2 4-wire receive activity
TX X5/X12 COM2 2-wire transmit activity/COM2 4-wire transmit activity
I-B X5 IRIG-B signal activity

1) Depending on the jumper configuration

Table 668: LED descriptions for COM0023

LED Connector Description1)
FX X12 Not used by COM0023
X1 X1 LAN Link status and activity (RJ-45 and LC)
FL X12 Not used by COM0023
RX X6 COM1 2-wire / 4-wire receive activity
TX X6 COM1 2-wire / 4-wire transmit activity
RX X5 / X12 COM2 2-wire / 4-wire or fiber-optic receive activity
TX X5 / X12 COM2 2-wire / 4-wire or fiber-optic transmit activity
I-B X5 IRIG-B signal activity

1) Depending on the jumper configuration

854 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 669: LED descriptions for COM0031-COM0034

LED Connector Description
X1 X1 X1/LAN1 link status and activity
X2 X2 X2/LAN2 link status and activity
X3 X3 X3/LAN3 link status and activity
RX X9 COM1 fiber-optic receive activity
TX X9 COM1 fiber-optic transmit activity

13.3.8.1 COM0001-COM0014 jumper locations and connections

1 2 3
X8
X9
X7

X4
X6
X5

A070893 V3 EN

Figure 464: Jumper connectors on communication module

615 series 855

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

Table 670: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
X4 1-2 A+ bias enabled COM2
2-wire connection
2-3 A+ bias disabled
X5 1-2 B- bias enabled
2-3 B- bias disabled
X6 1-2 Bus termination
enabled
2-3 Bus termination
disabled
X7 1-2 B- bias enabled COM1
2-wire connection
2-3 B- bias disabled
X8 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled
X9 1-2 Bus termination
enabled
2-3 Bus termination
disabled

The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done
using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. In 4-wire
connection the pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X4,
X5, X7 and X8 to enabled position. The bus termination is selected by setting
jumpers X6 and X9 to enabled position.

The jumpers have been set to no termination and no biasing as default.

Table 671: 4-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM2

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
1-2 A+ bias enabled
X4
2-3 A+ bias disabled 1)
1-2 B- bias enabled
X5
2-3 B- bias disabled1) COM2
4-wire TX channel
1-2 Bus termination
enabled
X6
2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)
Table continues on next page

856 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

Group Jumper connection Description Notes

1-2 B- bias enabled
X7
2-3 B- bias disabled1)
1-2 A+ bias enabled
X8
2-3 A+ bias disabled1) COM2
4-wire RX channel
1-2 Bus termination
enabled
X9
2-3 Bus termination
disabled1)

1) Default setting

It is recommended to enable biasing only at one end of the bus.

Termination is enabled at each end of the bus.

It is recommended to ground the signal directly to earth from one

node and through capacitor from other nodes.

The optional communication modules include support for EIA-485 serial

communication (X5 connector). Depending on the configuration, the
communication modules can host either two 2-wire-ports or one 4-wire-port.

The two 2-wire ports are called COM1 and COM2. Alternatively, if there is only
one 4-wire port configured, the port is called COM2. The fibre-optic ST connection
uses the COM1 port.

Table 672: EIA-485 connections for COM0001-COM0014

Pin 2-wire mode 4-wire mode
10 COM1 A/+ COM2 Rx/+
9 B/- Rx/-
8 COM2 A/+ Tx/+
7 B/- Tx/-
6 AGND (isolated ground)
5 IRIG-B +
4 IRIG-B -
3 -
2 GNDC (case via capacitor)
1 GND (case)

615 series 857

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

13.3.8.2 COM0023 jumper locations and connections

The optional communication module supports EIA-232/EIA-485 serial

communication (X6 connector), EIA-485 serial communication (X5 connector) and
optical ST serial communication (X12 connector).

Two independent communication ports are supported. The two 2-wire-ports are
called COM1 and COM2. Alternatively, if only one 4-wire-port is configured, the
port is called COM2. The fibre-optic ST connection uses the COM1 port.

Table 673: Configuration options of the two independent communication ports

COM1 connector X6 COM2 connector X5 or X12
EIA-232 Optical ST (X12)
EIA-485 2-wire EIA-485 2-wire (X5)
EIA-485 4-wire EIA-485 4-wire (X5)

858 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

X 19
X 11
X 20
X 21
X6

X8
X5

X9
X7
1 2 3
X 26
3 2 1

X 17
X 18
X 16
1 2 3
1 2 3
X 13
X 15
X 14
X 27
X 28

1 2 3
3 2 1

2
4
6

X3
X 25 X 24
5
3
1

GUID-D4044F6B-2DA8-4C14-A491-4772BA108292 V1 EN

Figure 465: Jumper connections on communication module COM0023

revisions A-F

615 series 859

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

X21

X20

X19
X11
X5

X7

X9
X6

X8
1 2 3
X26
3 2 1

X13
X15
X18
X17

X14
X16

1 2 3
1 2 3
X27
X28

1 2 3
3 2 1

X3
X24

GUID-1E542C3A-F6E9-4F94-BEFD-EA3FEEC65FC8 V1 EN

Figure 466: Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revision

G

COM1 port connection type can be either EIA-232 or EIA-485. Type is selected by
setting jumpers X19, X20, X21, X26.

The jumpers are set to EIA-232 by default.

Table 674: EIA-232 and EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM1

Group Jumper connection Description
X19 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
X20 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
X21 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232
X26 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 EIA-232

860 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

To ensure fail-safe operation, the bus is to be biased at one end using the pull-up
and pull-down resistors on the communication module. In the 4-wire connection,
the pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X5, X6, X8, X9
to enabled position. The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X7, X11 to
enabled position.

The jumpers have been set to no termination and no biasing as default.

Table 675: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM1

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
X5 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled1)
X6 1-2 B- bias enabled
COM1
2-3 B- bias disabled1)
Rear connector X6
X7 1-2 Bus termination 2-wire connection
2-3 enabled
Bus termination
disabled1)

1) Default setting

Table 676: 4–wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM1

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
X5 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled1)
X6 1-2 B- bias enabled
COM1
2-3 B- bias disabled1)
Rear connector X6
X7 1-2 Bus termination 4-wire TX channel
2-3 enabled
Bus termination
disabled1)
X9 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled1)
X8 1-2 B- bias enabled
2-3 B- bias disabled1)
4-wire RX channel
X11 1-2 Bus termination
2-3 enabled
Bus termination
disabled1)

1) Default setting

COM2 port connection can be either EIA-485 or optical ST. Connection type is
selected by setting jumpers X27 and X28.

Table 677: COM2 serial connection X5 EIA-485/ X12 Optical ST

Group Jumper connection Description
X27 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 Optical ST
X28 1-2 EIA-485
2-3 Optical ST

615 series 861

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

Table 678: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM2

Group Jumper connection Description
X13 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled
X14 1-2 B- bias enabled
2-3 B- bias disabled
X15 1-2 Bus termination enabled
2-3 Bus termination disabled

Table 679: 4-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM2

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
X13 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled
X14 1-2 B- bias enabled
2-3 B- bias disabled COM2
4-wire TX channel
X15 1-2 Bus termination
2-3 enabled
Bus termination
disabled
X16 1-2 Bus termination
2-3 enabled
Bus termination
disabled
4-wire RX channel
X17 1-2 A+ bias enabled
2-3 A+ bias disabled
X18 1-2 B- bias enabled
2-3 B- bias disabled

Table 680: X12 Optical ST connection

Group Jumper connection Description
X3 1-2 Star topology
2-3 Loop topology
X24 1-2 Idle state = Light on
2-3 Idle state = Light off

Table 681: EIA-232 connections for COM0023 (X6)

Pin EIA-232
1 DCD
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 AGND
6 -
7 RTS
8 CTS

862 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

Table 682: EIA-485 connections for COM0023 (X6)

Pin 2-wire mode 4-wire mode
1 - Rx/+
6 - Rx/-
7 B/- Tx/-
8 A/+ Tx/+

Table 683: EIA-485 connections for COM0023 (X5)

Pin 2-wire mode 4-wire mode
9 - Rx/+
8 - Rx/-
7 A/+ Tx/+
6 B/- Tx/-
5 AGND (isolated ground)
4 IRIG-B +
3 IRIG-B -
2 -
1 GND (case)

13.3.8.3 COM0008 and COM0010 jumper locations and connections

The EIA-485 communication module follows the TIA/EIA-485 standard and is

intended to be used in a daisy-chain bus wiring scheme with 2-wire or 4-wire, half-
duplex, multi-point communication. Serial communication can be also used
through optical connection which is used either in loop or star topology.

Two parallel 2-wire serial communication channels can be used at the same time.
Also optical serial connector can be used in parallel with one 2-wire or 4-wire
serial channel.

The maximum number of devices (nodes) connected to the bus

where the IED is being used is 32, and the maximum length of the
bus is 1200 meters.

615 series 863

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

1 2 3
X8
X9
X7
X3
X6
X5
X 16
3 2 1

1 2 3
X 24
X 15

GUID-FDC31D60-8F9F-4D2A-A1A2-F0E57553C06B V1 EN

Figure 467: Jumper connectors on communication module

Table 684: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
1-2 A+ Bias enabled COM1
2-wire connection
X3 2-3 A+ Bias Disabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled
X5 2-3 B- Bias Disabled
Bus termination
1-2 enabled
Bus termination
X6 2-3 disabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled COM2
2-wire connection
X7 2-3 B- Bias Disabled
1-2 A+ Bias enabled
X8 2-3 A+ Bias Disabled
Bus termination
1-2 enabled
Bus termination
X9 2-3 disabled

864 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

The bus is to be biased at one end to ensure fail-safe operation, which can be done
using the pull-up and pull-down resistors on the communication module. In 4-wire
connection the pull-up and pull-down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X3,
X5, X7 and X8 to enabled position. The bus termination is selected by setting
jumpers X6 and X9 to enabled position.

The jumpers have been set to no termination and no biasing as default.

Table 685: 4-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM2

Group Jumper connection Description Notes
1-2 A+ Bias enabled
X3 2-3 A+ Bias Disabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled
X5 2-3 B- Bias Disabled COM2
4-wire TX channel
Bus termination
1-2 enabled
Bus termination
X6 2-3 disabled
1-2 B- Bias enabled
X7 2-3 B- Bias Disabled
1-2 A+ Bias enabled
X8 2-3 A+ Bias Disabled COM2
4-wire RX channel
Bus termination
1-2 enabled
Bus termination
X9 2-3 disabled

Table 686: Jumper connectors for COM1 serial connection type

Group Jumper connection Description
X16 1-2 EIA-485 selected for COM1
2-3 FO_UART selected for COM1
X15 1-2 Star topology selected for
FO_UART
2-3 Loop topology selected for
FO_UART
X24 1-2 FO_UART channel idle state:
Light on
2-3 FO_UART channel idle state:
Light off

It is recommended to enable biasing only at one end of the bus.

615 series 865

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

Termination is enabled at each end of the bus

It is recommended to ground the signal directly to earth from one

node and through capacitor from other nodes.

The optional communication modules include support for EIA-485 serial

communication (X5 connector). Depending on the configuration the
communication modules can host either two 2-wire ports or one 4-wire port.

The two 2-wire ports are called as COM1 and COM2. Alternatively, if there is only
one 4-wire port configured, the port is called COM2. The fibre-optic ST connection
uses the COM1 port.

Table 687: EIA-485 connections for COM0008 and COM0010

Pin 2-wire mode 4-wire mode
9 COM1 A/+ COM2 Rx/+
8 B/- Rx/-
7 COM2 A/+ Tx/+
6 B/- Tx/-
5 AGND (isolated ground)
4 IRIG-B +
3 IRIG-B -
2 GNDC (case via capasitor)
1 GND (case)

13.3.8.4 COM0032-COM0034 jumper locations and connections

The optional communication modules include support for optical ST serial

communication (X9 connector). The fibre-optic ST connection uses the COM1 port.

866 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

3 3
X15 2 2 X24
1 1

GUID-CA481BBF-C1C9-451D-BC18-19EC49B8A3A3 V1 EN

Figure 468: Jumper connections on communication module COM0032

615 series 867

Technical Manual
Section 13 1YHT530004D05 D
IED physical connections

3 3
2 2
X15 1 1 X24

GUID-4CAF22E5-1491-44EF-BFC7-45017DED68F4 V1 EN

Figure 469: Jumper connections on communication module COM0033

868 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 13
IED physical connections

3 3
2 2
X15 1 1 X24

GUID-E54674FD-2E7F-4742-90AB-505772A0CFF4 V1 EN

Figure 470: Jumper connections on communication module COM0034

Table 688: X9 Optical ST jumper connectors

Group Jumper connection Description
X15 1-2 Star topology
2-3 Loop topology
X24 1-2 Idle state = Light on
2-3 Idle state = Light off

13.3.9 Recommended third-party industrial Ethernet switches

• RuggedCom RS900
• RuggedCom RS1600
• RuggedCom RSG2100

615 series 869

Technical Manual
870
1YHT530004D05 D Section 14
Technical data

Section 14 Technical data

Table 689: Dimensions

Description Value
Width frame 177 mm
case 164 mm
Height frame 177 mm (4U)
case 160 mm
Depth 201 mm (153 + 48 mm)
Weight complete IED 4.1 kg
plug-in unit only 2.1 kg

Table 690: Power supply

Description Type 1 Type 2
Uauxnominal 100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V AC, 24, 30, 48, 60 V DC
50 Hz
48, 60, 110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Maximum interruption time 50 ms at Unrated
in the auxiliary DC voltage
without resetting the IED
Uauxvariation 38...110% of Un (38...264 V AC) 50...120% of Un (12...72 V DC)

80...120% of Un (38.4...300 V DC)

Start-up threshold 19.2 V DC (24 V DC * 80%)

Burden of auxiliary voltage DC < 12.0 W (nominal)/< 18.0 W DC < 12.0 W (nominal)/< 18.0 W
supply under quiescent (Pq)/ (max) (max)
operating condition AC< 16.0 W (nominal)/< 21.0W
(max)
Ripple in the DC auxiliary Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 Hz)
voltage
Fuse type T4A/250 V

615 series 871

Technical Manual
Section 14 1YHT530004D05 D
Technical data

Table 691: Energizing inputs

Description Value
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Current inputs Rated current, In 0.2/1 A1)2) 1/5 A3)

Thermal withstand capability:

• Continuously 4A 20 A

• For 1 s 100 A 500 A

Dynamic current withstand:

• Half-wave value 250 A 1250 A

Input impedance <100 mΩ <20 mΩ

Voltage inputs Rated voltage 60...210 V AC
Voltage withstand:
• Continuous 240 V AC

• For 10 s 360 V AC

Burden at rated voltage <0.05 VA

1) Ordering option for residual current input

2) Not available for RET615 and REU615
3) Residual current and/or phase current

Table 692: Energizing inputs

Description Value
Current sensor input Rated current voltage 75 mV...2812.5 mV1)
(in secondary side)
Continuous voltage 125 V
withstand
Input impedance at 50 2-3 MOhm2)
Hz
Voltage sensor input Rated voltage 6 kV...30 kV3)
Continuous voltage 50 V
withstand
Input impedance at 50 3 MOhm
Hz

1) Equals the current range of 40A - 1250A with a 80A, 3mV/Hz Rogowski
2) Depending on the used nominal current (hardware gain)
3) This range is covered (up to 2*rated) with sensor division ratio of 10 000 : 1

872 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 14
Technical data

Table 693: Binary inputs

Description Value
Operating range ±20% of the rated voltage
Rated voltage 24...250 V DC
Current drain 1.6...1.9 mA
Power consumption 31.0...570.0 mW
Threshold voltage 18...176 V DC
Reaction time 3 ms

Table 694: RTD/mA inputs

Description Value
RTD inputs Supported RTD 100 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385 (DIN 43760)
sensors 250 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385
100 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618 (DIN 43760)
120 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618
250 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618
10 Ω copper TCR 0.00427
Supported
resistance range 0...2 kΩ
Maximum lead
resistance (three-
wire
measurement) 25 Ω per lead
Isolation 2 kV (inputs to protective earth)
Response time <4 s
RTD/resistance
sensing current Maximum 0.33 mA rms
Operation Resistance Temperature
accuracy
± 2.0% or ±1 Ω ±1°C
10 Ω copper: ±2°C
mA inputs Supported
current range 0…20 mA
Current input
impedance 44 Ω ± 0.1%
Operation
accuracy ±0.5% or ±0.01 mA

Table 695: Signal output X100: SO1

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
constant L/R<40 ms
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC

615 series 873

Technical Manual
Section 14 1YHT530004D05 D
Technical data

Table 696: Signal outputs and IRF output

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 5A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A
Make and carry 0.5 s 15 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 10 mA at 5 V AC/DC

Table 697: Double-pole power output relays with TCS function

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 5 A/3 A/1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC (two
contacts connected in series)
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC
Trip-circuit supervision (TCS):
• Control voltage range 20...250 V AC/DC

• Current drain through the supervision circuit ~1.5 mA

• Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 V AC/DC (15...20 V)

Table 698: Single-pole power output relays

Description Value
Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC
Continuous contact carry 8A
Make and carry for 3.0 s 15 A
Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A
Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 5 A/3 A/1 A
constant L/R<40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC
Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC

874 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 14
Technical data

Table 699: Ethernet interfaces

Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate
Front TCP/IP Standard Ethernet CAT 5 cable with RJ-45 10 MBits/s
protocol connector
Rear TCP/IP Shielded twisted pair CAT 5e cable with 100 MBits/s
protocol RJ-45 connector or fibre-optic cable with LC
connector

Table 700: Serial rear interface

Type Counter connector
Serial port (X5) 10-pin counter connector Weidmüller BL
3.5/10/180F AU OR BEDR
or
9-pin counter connector Weidmüller BL
3.5/9/180F AU OR BEDR1)
Serial port (X16) 9-pin D-sub connector DE-9
Serial port (X12) Optical ST-connector

1) Depending on the optional communication module

Table 701: Fibre-optic communication link

Connector Fibre type Wave length Max. distance Permitted path attenuation1)
LC MM 62.5/125 or 1300 nm 2 km <8 dB
50/125 μm glass
fibre core
ST MM 62.5/125 or 820-900 nm 1 km <11 dB
50/125 μm glass
fibre core

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together

Table 702: Fibre-optic protection communication link available in RED615

Connector Fibre type Wave length Max. distance Permitted path attenuation1)
LC MM 62.5/125 or 1300 nm 2 km < 8 dB
50/125 μm
LC SM 9/125 μm2) 1300 nm 20 km < 8 dB

1) Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable altogether

2) Use single-mode fibre with recommended minimum length of 3 m to connect RED615 to the pilot
wire modem RPW600.

Table 703: IRIG-B

Description Value
IRIG time code format B004, B0051)
Isolation 500V 1 min.
Modulation Unmodulated
Table continues on next page

615 series 875

Technical Manual
Section 14 1YHT530004D05 D
Technical data

Description Value
Logic level TTL Level
Current consumption 2...4 mA
Power consumption 10...20 mW

1) According to 200-04 IRIG -standard

Table 704: Lens sensor and optical fibre for arc protection
Description Value
Fibre-optic cable including lens 1.5 m, 3.0 m or 5.0 m
Normal service temperature range of the lens -40...+100°C
Maximum service temperature range of the lens, +140°C
max 1 h
Minimum permissible bending radius of the 100 mm
connection fibre

Table 705: Degree of protection of flush-mounted IED

Description Value
Front side IP 54
Rear side, connection terminals IP 20

Table 706: Environmental conditions

Description Value
Operating temperature range -25...+55ºC (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range • REF615, REM615 and RET615:
-40...+85ºC (<16 h)1)2)
• RED615: -40...+70ºC (<16 h)1)2)

Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing

Atmospheric pressure 86...106 kPa
Altitude Up to 2000 m
Transport and storage temperature range -40...+85ºC

1) Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of -25...+55 ºC
2) For IEDs with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is +70 ºC

876 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 15
IED and functionality tests

Section 15 IED and functionality tests

Table 707: Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Description Type test value Reference
1 MHz/100 kHz burst IEC 61000-4-18
disturbance test: IEC 60255-22-1, class III
• Common mode
2.5 kV

• Differential mode
1 kV

Electrostatic discharge test: IEC 61000-4-2

IEC 60255-22-2
• Contact discharge
8 kV (IED) 6 kV (HMI)

• Air discharge
15 kV (IED) 8 kV (HMI)

Radio frequency interference

tests:
• Conducted, common IEC 61000-4-6
10 V (rms)
mode IEC 60255-22-6, class III
f=150 kHz-80 MHz

• Radiated, amplitude- IEC 61000-4-3

10 V/m (rms)
modulated IEC 60255-22-3, class III
f=80-3000 MHz

Fast transient disturbance tests:

• Communication port IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV
IEC 60255-22-4, level 3
• Remaining port IEC 61000-4-4
4 kV
IEC 60255-22-4, level 4
Surge immunity test: IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60255-22-5, level 4/3
• Binary inputs 4 kV, line-to-earth
2 kV, line-to-line
• Communication
2 kV, line-to-earth

• Other ports 4 kV, line-to-earth

2 kV, line-to-line
Power frequency (50 Hz) IEC 61000-4-8, level 5
magnetic field:
• Continuous
100 A/m
• 1s short duration
1000 A/m

Voltage dips and short 100%/100 ms IEC 61000-4-11

interruptions
Power frequency immunity test: Binary inputs only IEC 61000-4-16
IEC 60255-22-7, class A
Table continues on next page

615 series 877

Technical Manual
Section 15 1YHT530004D05 D
IED and functionality tests

Description Type test value Reference

• Common mode
300 V rms
• Differential mode
150 V rms

Emission tests: EN 55011

CISPR 11, Group 1, class A
• Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)

0.15-0.50 MHz < 79 dB(µV) quasi peak

< 66 dB(µV) average
0.5-30 MHz < 73 dB(µV) quasi peak
< 60 dB(µV) average
• Radiated, RF-emission

30-230 MHz < 50 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,

measured at 3 m distance
230-1000 MHz < 57 dB(µV/m) quasi peak,
measured at 3 m distance

Table 708: Insulation tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dielectric tests 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min IEC 60255-5 and
500 V, 50 Hz, 1 min, IEC 60255-27
communication
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J IEC 60255-5 and
1 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J, IEC 60255-27
communication
Insulation resistance >100 MΏ, 500 V DC IEC 60255-5 and
measurements IEC 60255-27
Protective bonding resistance <0.1 Ώ, 4 A, 60 s IEC 60255-27

Table 709: Mechanical tests

Description Reference Requirement
Vibration tests (sinusoidal) IEC 60068-2-6 (test Fc) Class 2
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump test IEC 60068-2-27 (test Ea shock) Class 2
IEC 60068-2-29 (test Eb bump)
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2

878 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 15
IED and functionality tests

Table 710: Environmental tests

Description Type test value Reference
Dry heat test • 96 h at +55ºC IEC 60068-2-2
• 16 h at +85ºC1)2)

Dry cold test • 96 h at -25ºC IEC 60068-2-1

• 16 h at -40ºC

Damp heat test • 6 cycles (12 h + 12 h) at IEC 60068-2-30

+25°C…+55°C, humidity
>93%

Change of temperature test • 5 cycles (3 h + 3 h) IEC60068-2-14

at -25°C...+55°C

Storage test • 96 h at -40ºC IEC 60068-2-1

• 96 h at +85ºC IEC 60068-2-2

1) For IEDs with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is +70oC
2) For RED615 +70oC, 16 h

Table 711: Product safety

Description Reference
LV directive 2006/95/EC
Standard EN 60255-27 (2005)
EN 60255-1 (2009)

Table 712: EMC compliance

Description Reference
EMC directive 2004/108/EC
Standard EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)

615 series 879

Technical Manual
880
1YHT530004D05 D Section 16
Applicable standards and regulations

Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations

EN 50263
EN 60255-26
EN 60255-27
EMC council directive 2004/108/EC
EU directive 2002/96/EC/175
IEC 60255
Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC

615 series 881

Technical Manual
882
1YHT530004D05 D Section 17
Glossary

Section 17 Glossary

ACT 1. Application Configuration tool in PCM600

2. Trip status in IEC 61850
AIM Analog input module
CAT 5 A twisted pair cable type designed for high signal
integrity
CAT 5e An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications
for far end crosstalk
CB Circuit breaker
CBB Cycle building block
CPU Central processing unit
CT Current transformer
CTS Clear to send
DC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector
3. Double command
DCD Data carrier detect
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DPC Double-point control
DSR Data set ready
DT Definite time
DTR Data terminal ready
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EIA-232 Serial communication standard according to
Electronics Industries Association
EIA-485 Serial communication standard according to
Electronics Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
Ethernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based
computer networking technologies into a LAN
FIFO First in, first out
FLC Full load current

615 series 883

Technical Manual
Section 17 1YHT530004D05 D
Glossary

FPGA Field-programmable gate array

GOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event
GPS Global Positioning System
HMI Human-machine interface
HSR High-availability seamless redundancy
HV High voltage
HW Hardware
IDMT Inverse definite minimum time
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC 60870-5-103 1. Communication standard for protective equipment
2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communication
and modeling
IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850
standard series
IED Intelligent electronic device
IP Internet protocol
IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated
by periods. Each server connected to the Internet is
assigned a unique IP address that specifies the
location for the TCP/IP protocol.
IRF 1. Internal fault
2. Internal relay fault
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code format
B
LAN Local area network
LC Connector type for glass fibre cable
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
LHMI Local human-machine interface
LV Low voltage
Modbus A serial communication protocol developed by the
Modicon company in 1979. Originally used for
communication in PLCs and RTU devices.
MV Medium voltage
PC 1. Personal computer

884 615 series

Technical Manual
1YHT530004D05 D Section 17
Glossary

2. Polycarbonate
PCM600 Protection and Control IED Manager
Peak-to-peak 1. The amplitude of a waveform between its maximum
positive value and its maximum negative value
2. A measurement principle where the measurement
quantity is made by calculating the average from the
positive and negative peak values without including
the DC component. The peak-to-peak mode allows
considerable CT saturation without impairing the
performance of the operation.
Peak-to-peak with A measurement principle similar to the peak-to-peak
peak backup mode but with the function starting on two conditions:
the peak-to-peak value is above the set start current or
the peak value is above two times the set start value
PLC Programmable logic controller
PPS Pulse per second
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
RAM Random access memory
RCA Also known as MTA or base angle. Characteristic angle.
RED615 Line differential protection and control IED
REF615 Feeder protection and control IED
REM615 Motor protection and control IED
RET615 Transformer protection and control IED
RI Ring Indicator
RJ-45 Galvanic connector type
RMS Root-mean-square (value)
ROM Read-only memory
RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol
RTC Real-time clock
RTD Resistance temperature detector
RTS Ready to send
Rx Receive/Received
SBO Select-before-operate
SCL XML-based substation description configuration
language defined by IEC 61850
Single-line Simplified notation for representing a three-phase
diagram power system. Instead of representing each of three

615 series 885

Technical Manual
Section 17 1YHT530004D05 D
Glossary

phases with a separate line or terminal, only one

conductor is represented.
SLD Single-line diagram
SMT Signal Matrix tool in PCM600
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOTF Switch on to fault
ST Connector type for glass fibre cable
SW Software
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TCS Trip-circuit supervision
Tx Transmit/Transmitted
UTC Coordinated universal time
VT Voltage transformer
WAN Wide area network
WHMI Web human-machine interface

886 615 series

Technical Manual
887
Contact us

1YHT530004D05 D © Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB
Nanjing SAC Power Grid Automation
Co., Ltd.
No. 11 Phoenix Road, Jiangning
Development Zone
211100 Nanjing, China
Phone +86 25 51183000
Fax +86 25 51183883

www.abb.com/substationautomation